Ethnology of the Kwakiutl, Part 1

I. INDUSTRIES

The Making of Dishes. — The dish-maker takes | along his ax 1 when he goes into the woods. When he | reaches a patch of aldertrees, he picks out a good one | that has no knots and that is not twisted, for he is || careful that it is straight when it is split in 5 two. After he has found | a good one, he chops it down. It must be six spans | around at the bottom. When it falls down, he chops off | one fathom length from the tough part at the butt, | and he measures off four spans in length and || chops it off there. After it 10 has been cut off, he splits it in two j straight through the heart of the wood. After it has been split in two, he chops off | the heart of the wood, so that the block is one span thick. | He chops it off carefully, so that it is level and that it has no twist, | for the heart of the tree will be the bottom of the dish. When this is done, || he 15 chops out the sides so that they are wide in the middle. The dish is one span wide | at each end, and it is one span and four | fingers wide in the middle, for it bulges out. | The bottom part of the end is one short span long, | and the height is one hand-width, || including 20 the thumb. | The bottom is one short span | wide and three span^

and I four finger -widths long. | This is the size of the large feasting-

25 dish when a feast is given to many tribes. || When the sides have been chopped, it is | in this way: (-^ ^~)Then he puts it right-side up and chops out the inside. [ so that it is hollow. | The bark is still on that partWC^; ^_) that will be the inner side.

Now he chops it off; and | he only stops chopping it when it is two

30 finger-widths || thick all around and at both ends. Then he carries it I home on his shoulder, and he puts it, down in his house, | takes his adz, and adzes the bottom so that it is level. | When this is done, he adzes the outside. It | is adzed well. Then he also adzes

35 the ends well || on the outside; and when this is done, he adzes along the sides | so as to make them thin, lie just feels the thickness. | After this has been done, he take- his small crooked knife and j scoops out two grooves on the outer side. When this is done, he |

40 takes spawn of the dog-salmon, chews it, and spits it into || his paintdish. He takes coal and rub3 it in I the place where is the salmon- spawn that has been spit out. When it is really | black, he takes his paint-brush, dips the end of the | ^^-^-j^-^^ paint-brush into the black color, and paints all ify^-- ^~t^| :ll',,ull(l I

the rim of the dish, in this way: D 0 When this

45 is done, || he puts it away, mi that it V^T "^^ dries. Then

This size of dish is used at a feast by six men. | If it is three 46 spans | long, then two1 guests eat out of [ one dish. It is used in lesser feasts. || The dish for a feast to the host's own nuniaym2 50 is two spans and a half long. | It is used by three guests. | A dish two spans long | is used by husband and wife | and their children; and those that are one span and four finger-widths || long are 55 used for the chief's daughter | and the chief's son. Two (a man and j his friend) eat out of it tooj | and the dish for a woman whose husband is away is | smallest. It is one span long. | It is only for one person. || That is all now. | "0

Dish for pounding Salal-Berries. — The husband ! of the woman first goes to get a good piece of cedar-wood without knots, three | spans long and | four spans |] wide and one short span high. | He 65 takes his ax and chops out | the inside, until it is hollow and like a box. When j it gets thin, he takes his hand-adz, turns it bottomside up, | and adzes it over finely at the bottom and the ends, || so 70 that it does not slant; and after he has finished the outer side, | he puts it bottom downward and he adzes it inside, so that there are

1 Evidently a mistake, instead of four.

" A numiym is one of the subdivisions of the tribe. See pp. 795 et seq.

72 110 lumps. I After he has finished this, he takes his straight knife and I his bent knife, and he cuts all around the corners with the straight knife, | around the inside of what he is working at; and

75 after he has done so, || he takes his crooked knife and shaves out the inside until it is very | smooth. This is the box for pounding salalberries, and it is | just like a box after it is finished. Now the box for pounding salal-berries is finished, | for it is called that way. | 1 The Making- of Boxes. — Now 1 will talk again | about her husband, who has to make a box for the lily-bulbs. |

He takes his wedge-basket, | his stone hammer, and his ax, and 5 he goes to a || patch of cedar-trees in the woods, looking for a good tree, | the bark of which runs straight up and down, without a twist. When | he finds one of this kind, he chops the cedar-tree | down on the side on which the branches are, so that it falls on its back | when it falls. When he passes the heart of the tree while chopping,

10 he goes around || and chops the smooth side; and .when it falls, it goes down on the side where it has been chopped in | deeply, and falls on its back. Now the cedar-tree lies on its back; | and the smooth side, which is the best side, is on top. He chops it off two | fathoms from the foot of the tree; and when | he has chopped down

15 to the heart of it, he measures || eight spans, beginning at the place where he | chopped into it; and when he has chopped down to | the 16 heart of the tree, he chops off more chips, in order to | spread it wider for the wedges to be put in. When | the wedges can lie on the sloping chopped side, he drives them in in this way: The first one || that he drives ha is the longest one of 20 the board wedges at | the far side from where he stands.1 He takes the next shorter one | next to it and drives it in close to the one that he has driven in, and | he takes the next shorter one and drives it in | close to the one that he drove before; and || the seven wedges are one shorter than the other as 25 they are driven into the end of the tree; and the one nearest | to the workman is the shortest wedge. Then he | strikes the top of each once while he is striking them with his stone hammer, | and he strikes them backward and forward. | As soon as the wood splits, he pries it off so that it falls on its back, and he marks || on the end the thickness of two fingers. Then | he takes his ax 30 and drives it in on the mark that he put on the wood. | After he has done so, he again takes up his wedges and | puts them in as he did before when splitting out the block. | He continues doing this as he keeps on splitting them off. Only || the first (board) 35 that he splits off is thick. The next one is only one | finger-width thick I if the cedar is very good, for generally the first one split off

'See Publications of the Jesup North Pacific Expedition, Vol. V, p. 328, fig. 54. The figure shows the order of the wedges. The split is placed vertically, not horizontally as described here.

38 runs outward: | therefore the first one that is split off is thick. | As soon as it has been split, he carries the boards out as he is going

40 home; || and when he has carried them all out, he takes his adz | and adzes them smooth. When he has finished | one side, he turns them over and adzes the other side also; so that they all have the same | thickness. When they are half a finger-width thick, | they

45 are done, and he puts them on edge. Then he adzes down || one edge to make it straight ; and after that has been done, he puts them down flat, | takes a piece of cedar-stick and splits it so that it is thin, and | he takes his straight knife and cuts off the end so that | it is square at the end. He measures one span | and a short span,

50 beginning at the end that he cut off, || and there he cuts it off. He uses this as a measure for the width | of the box that he is making. He puts it down and takes his | straight knife, and again puts on edge the board out of which | he is making the box. Then he shaves off the edge smooth, so that it is very | straight and smooth; and

55 when it is really [| straight, he puts it down Hat. Then he takes his | cedar-stick measure and puts it down on one end of the box | that he is making. The end of the measure is (lush with the | straight edge that he has shaved off. He marks with his knife 1 the other end lio.-.s] INDUSTRIES 63

to which the measure reaches, and he goes to the other end of the board || and does the same thing there, in this way:

n 0-

f)0

(1) is the measure at the one end, and (2) when he moves it to the other end; and | he marks it with his knife at (3), as he did before, and at (4); and | after he finishes measuring it, he takes his hand-adz and | adzes off (5). Now he splits it off, so that the width is greater than || the height 65 of the box which he is going to make ; and he takes | the piece that he has split off from the edge of the box that he is making, and shaves | one edge off with his knife so that it is straight; and when it is quite ] straight, he places it on one end of (3), and he places the | straight-edge on the mark that he has put on, and he also puts it || at the other end of the mark that he made at (4), and 70 he marks with his straight | knife along the straight-edge. As soon as | the mark that he makes is plain, he takes off the straightedge and puts it away, and | he takes his hand-adz and adzes down toward the mark that he put on, | as far as its end. As soon as he finishes adzing it, and when || he comes close to the mark that 75 he has put on, he puts down his adz and | he takes his straight knife and shaves it. | He shaves it off smooth and straight. | After he has finished it, he shaves off the other end, so that all the | chopping-marks come off; and when the rough end has been finished, || he takes up his straight-edge and another piece of thin split cedar- go

81 wood, | and he cuts off the end of the cedar-stick that he took up last. | He measures it off three spans long. | There he cuts it off, and with it he measures the board | at which he is working, in this way,

85 slanting: As soon || as he finds the end of the measure, he marks j_ vj it | in the middle of the board with his knife, and he | measures it with his cedar-stick, in this way:

He is trying i__^ to find the middle; | and as soon as he has found (~~ "j the middle of the board, he marks it with his | knife in the middle, and he takes a cedar-stick

90 and || he cuts off again one finger-width. | Then he takes his drill and drills through the end. As | soon as the drill-hole goes through, he puts it on the board out of which he is making a box. | He tries to put the end of the drill as the end shows at the | under side of the

95 cedar-stick measure at the mark in the middle of || the board at which he is working, in this way: i 1 As soon as | the end of the drill goes in a little 1 1 1 at the middle of the board at which he is working, he bevels | the other end of the measure, and he marks along it at the end of the beveled measure, | on the edge of the board at which he is working; and he 100 turns || the free end which has been beveled so that it goes to the other edge, and | he marks its end. After he has done so, he takes off | his beveled measure and he takes his straight-edge and | puts it down on the thin mark on each | edge. He wants the measure to lie || on the end of the beveled mark (1). | The straight edge of his measure is turned towards the rough end of | the board at which he is working, in this manner, . and he marks it with his straight knife. | Now he ~^) takes off the straight-edge and he puts it down, and | r "* he takes his straight knife and cuts along with it at || the mark, so that the end is smooth | and 10 so that it does not slant. As soon as the rough end has been cut off, | he takes the cedar-stick and splits it so that it is thin and square. | It is another measure. He splits out two pieces, and he measures | them so that one of them is two spans long || where he 15 cuts it off with his straight knife and puts it down. Then | he takes up one of the square split cedar-sticks and cuts off | one end of it square, and he measures it so that it is | one long span and one short span | long; and he cuts it off with his knife. || The cedar- 20 stick two spans in length | is to be the measure for the long side of the box, and the measure for the short side | is one short span and one long span. First he takes | the shorter measure and puts it down on one edge of | the box that he is making, beginning at the place where he cut the edge smooth. || He puts down the 25

25 measure at the end of the board at which he is working in this way: | and he cuts in a little with his straight knife as far | as | the end of the cedar measure goes. After hehas done so, | he takes off the measure and puts it down on the other edge, | in this way: i= and he marks

30 the end with his knife. || After he has •= done so, he takes off the measure and puts it down. | He takes his straightedge and lays it down along | the ends of the measures, in this way: n . After he has put down | the straight-edge al the marks, | he cuts along it with his | knife on the board that he U is working. After doing so, he puts down ||

35 the straight-edge and he takes up the longer cedar-stick | measure and he puts it down on the edge of the board on which he is working. | He puts the end of his measure on the mark which he made | for the short end, in this manner, and lie makes a small mark | at its end. After be has done so, he takes

40 off the measure || for the long side and puts it down on the other edge, and he | does the same as lie did before when he measured it. After | he lias done so, he takes off the measure, puts it down. | takes his straight-edge, and puts it down along the marks. Now | he turns the straight-edge along the two marks

When

45 that he has made || on the board, in this way: the straight-edge is | on the marks on the

_ board, he cuts along it with his straight | knife. After doing so, he takes 47 off his I straight-edge and puts it down. He takes the measure for | the short side and puts it down on the edge of the hoard on which he is working, starting at the || mark which he put on, and he puts a 50 small mark at the end of 1 this measure. He takes off the measure for the short side and | puts it down on the other edge (of the hoard), and he does as | he did before. After he has marked it, he takes it off I and puts it down. Then he takes his straight-edge and puts it down || on the r this manner: L

hoard at which he is working, in 55 He takes his straight | knife and cuts close along the straight-edge, and | he takes it off after he has finished and puts it down. Then he takes | his measure for the long side and lavs it down along the edge from | the place that he has marked, and he puts a small mark at its end. || Then he takes 60 it off and puts it down on the other edge of the | board at which lie is working, and he makes a small mark at its end. Then | he takes his measure, puts it down, and takes his | straight-edge and lays it on. As soon as the straight-edge has been placed j on the small marks, he takes his knife || and marks along it. After this has been 65 done, he measures the | thickness (l)1 of the end by means of a split cedar-stick; and when he has found | the thickness, he lays it

67 off at the end of the board with Ins cedar-stick measure on the two edges | (5), starting from the mark that he made between 4 and 5'. |

70 He marks each end with the straight knife, and. after || doing so, he takes off his measure, puis it down, takes I his straight-edge, and lays it down between (4) and (5); and ' when the straight-edge is on the marks, lie marks | it with his straight knife. ^_^ Then he cuts off the end so 1 that it is in this way: | i| g| j| 1\ After

75 he has done so. he takes his || straight knife and outs straight into the cutting at il I across the whole | width ot the board at which he is Working; and after he has cut through half the | thickness of t ho hoard t hat is being n ade, he cuts at (2), and | cuts, it to the same depth as he cut the first. Then he cuts in at (3); and |

80 after he has cut halt through the thickness of the board, || he cuts at (4), and when he has cut half through he stops. | Then he goes hack to (1). He takes his straight-edge and lays it on | the board at which he is working. He measures the width of half a little | finger from the mark at (1) and marks it, and | he docs the same at the other edge.

85 After doing so, he takes his || straight-edge and lay- il down on ther.e marks and cuts along on the right-hand ^^^^_^^ side of the first mark which he pu1 on, in this way: | '[[ '|| s|| (|| and he also j marks on the right-hand side of (2) and on the right-hand side of | (3); and after do.ing so, he takes his straightedge and | puts it down. Then he takes his whetstone and sharpens his ||

straight knife- so that it is very sharp. When the knife is very | 90 sharp, he cuts into the last line that he puts on. | The knife is held (with the hand) slanting | to the righl ; and when the cut reaches the bottom of the cut that has been made j straight down, a triangular piece comes off. || Then he shaves it out clean, so that the 95 kerf is smooth. Now (1) | has been cut out. Then he does the same at (2) as he | did at (1); and after he has done so, he does it at (3), I and he does what he did at (2). After he has | done so, he splits off one-half the thickness of I he board at (4) with his || knife, 200 and then he splits it off. Now he shaves it off so that it is smooth and | very straight, so that the joint is smooth, for that is I the name, of (4). As soon as he has finished, it is in this way: ' " '/=^ After | this has been done, he turns over the board at which he is working. He takes his j straight-edge and puts it on the board. Then he lays it on the back, || just over 5

the . — ^ r p groove that he cut at (1). When it is in this way, 1234 I he marks straight over the groove along the side of this straight-edge. I He wants the board to be thin between the kerf | and the mark on the hack at (1 ); and he does the same [ at (2) and (3). As soon as this is done, he takes his crooked || knife \q and sharpens it on the whetstone; and when | it is very sharp, he

12 shaves off four finger- | widths on the upper side of the cut that he has just made. It is two | finger-widths that he shaves off on each | side of the mark that he put on, in this way: , — ^ ., R , As

15 soon as the hack || at (1), (2), and (3) has been hollowed out, and | they have all the same thickness, he stops shaving it off. Then lie | takes well-splitting red-pine wood and splits it | like tongs. The pieces are four | spans long and three linger- ||

2" widths thick. They are split out square. There are | two pieces. Then he puts them down n on the hoard at which lie is working, in this way: so | that the ends of the board-protector pro j eel u equally on both sides of the | board. As soon as the board is in the center of the board-protector, lie marks | the edges of the board at which he is

25 working. After doing so, || he takes off the board-protector. He takes his straight | knife and cuts out a notch at the place where he made a mark for | both edges of the board. Then he adds to it one | finger-width, so that it is a little longer than the width of the plank, | and he shaves the wood out between the two marks, so that

,30 the part removed is half the || thickness of the plank at which he is working, and he puts it down. Then he takes up the other piece, and he | measures it by the. part t hat he has - finishe '

and he imitates what he has done |__f— grr=|— |- I befai

As soon | as it is done, it is in this way: ' U "—

the board-protector when it is finished. |

This is

As soon as it is finished, he takes twisted cedar-withes and he ties 33 them | to the ends of (1) and (2) and ties them on tightly; and he twists them on so that || the hoard-protector can not get out of shape. Then 35 he puts the hoard-protector on the hoard. | After doing this, he takes up another piece of red-pine wood and j splits it so that it is two finger-widths in thickness, | and it is also square. He takes his straight knife | and shaves it off on one side so that it is straight; and when || it is very straight, lie shaves off the under side, | which 40 is to lie flat on the plank. When this is also | straight, he puts it down on the plank on which he is working. This will he the instrument for bending the corners | when he bends the corners of the board at which he is working. | After he has done so, he goes to get driftwood for heating stones; || and when he has the driftwood, he 45 piles it up in a heap close | to the tire. He takes a basket, goes down to | the beach in front of the house, and puts medium-sized stones into it; | and when he thinks he has as many as lie can carry, he carries them up the beach | into the house in which he is making the box. He pours || them out by the side of the fire. Then he goes down to 50 the beach again, j carrying his basket, and he puts more stones | into it (some Indians call this " putting stones into the | stone-carrying basket"); and when he has as many as he thinks he can carry, he |

55 takes (the basket) up the beach and into the || house in which he is making the box, and he ,uoes and empties it out by the side of the lire. When | he thinks he has enough, he builds up the fire with driftwood, | piling it on crosswise; and after building the lire, lie puts on | the stones on the crossed driftwood; and when he has put

Gi on | the stones, the box-maker takes the basket, :; carries it down to the beach, and gathers dulco, which | he throws into his basket. When it is full, | he carries it on his back up the beach and puts it down close | to the fireand stones, lie empties it out on the floor, which he is going to dig out to | put the red-hot stones in. Then he takes

65 his || basket again, goes down to t he beach, carrying his basket, and | brings up dead eel-grass from the high-water mark. He puts it | in the basket; and when it is full, | he carries it up the beach on his back, and he puts it down near t lie pile of dulce. After he has done

70 so, he takes his || drib1 and well-splitting cedar-wood and puts them down S close to the basket with eel-grass; and he takes the board | at which he is working and put- it down on a level place on the floor of the house. Then | he takes his wife's digging-stick which -he uses for diguing clams, | and he pushes the point of the digging--! ick

75 into the floor at ; j 3 each end || of the grooves on the edge of the board [~ ~| at which he has been working, in this way, * i { from (1 I to | (4), and also from

(2) to (5), and also from (3) to (6). As soon | as he has made 77 the holes straight down at each end of the grooves, | he takes up the board at which he is working, and he puts it down on edge in the corner of the house. [ Then he digs up the sod from (1) to (4) four fingers || wide and a short span deep: and when SO it is deep j enough, he digs up from (2) to (5), doing the | same as before; and after doing so, he digs it up from (3) to | (6); and when it is deep enough, it is this way.1 || This hole is called the 85 " steaming-place of the box-maker for t lie box-board." ' After lie has dug them, he takes his tongs, | picks up the red-hot stones, and puts them into | (1) ; and when he has covered the whole length of the hole and it is nearly | filled, he does the same at (2), putting in the red- || hot stones ; and when it is also nearly full, he puts [ 90 red-hot stones into (3); and when | that is also nearly full, he puts down his tongs, takes the | dulee, and places it on top of the red-hot | stones; and he does not stop putting on dulee until it is level with the || floor. He does this in the two holes beside 95 the first one into which he | put dulee. As soon as he finishes with the dulee. he takes eel-grass and puts it over the dulee; and after this is. done | in the three holes, he takes | the board at which he is working and places it on top of it, laving the || kerfs 300

1 The ditches here described are dug from points indicated by the numbeis on the sketch on p. 72.

300 over the places where the steam comes out; and when the kerfs are right over | the places where he put the red-hot stones, he | takes the eel-grass and throws it on top of the | board at which lie is working, right over the kerfs, in tins way;1 and when it is | piled 5 on thickly, he takes his bailer, tills it with || water, lifts up one end of the board, and | pours on the water into the three holes where the | box-maker is steaming the board. After he has poured on | the water, he puts down the board so that it lies on the |

10 steam. He takes his tongs, picks up red-hot j| stones, and places them on top of the eel-grass | which he put on last along the three kerfs; and ! when he has put the red-hot stones close together, he takes eel-grass | and throws it on top. Then he puts down his tongs, ] takes his bailer, fills it with water, and pours it

15 along || the three rows of red-hol stones which are covered with | eelgrass. After finishing this, lie takes more eel-grass j and throws it over the red-hot stones as the steam is coming out. | Then he takes his straight knife and | splits cedar-wood into thin pieces. lie

^)(l shaves them oil' || so thai they are sharp, and measures them so thai they are four finger-widths | long; then he cuts them off. When | he has made many of these, lie stops. These will be the pegs for the |

1 That is, over the kerfs as indicated in the figure on p. 72.

box that ho is making. After this is finished, he takes up the 23 well-splitting | cedar-wood and splits it not quite as thick as the || little finger. He splits up much of this. When | this is done, lie takes 25 a long cedar-bark rope and putsil into | the water in order to soak it. He dips it up and down, so that it gets | soaked quickly; and when it is soaked, he takes it out of the water. He shakes off | the water and lays it out straight, so that it does not get tangled when lie puts it around || the box that he is making when he bends the corners. 30 When everything is ready, | he takes the board-protector and the instrument for bending the corners, | so that they are also ready. Then he | takes the tongs and picks up the hot eel-grass and the | hot stones that are on top of the box-board. He || puts them down at a 35 place not far from where the box-board is being steamed; | and when they are all off from the hoard, lie takes the | board-protector and puts it over the end of the board, in this way: djT_fri | Now the board-protector is near the end of the J boxboard. Then | he takes the implement for {jtnlj^ bend-

ing the corners (1, 4),' and puts it on towards the side of kerf [| (1, 4), 40 very near to the body of the kerf. He steps | with both feet on the ends of the bending-tool at | (1,4).-' Then he takes hold of the | endsofthe board-protector with his hands, anil he pulls it up, to bend the corner of

' These are the kerfs in order: 1,4; 2, 5; 3, 6. See figure on p. 72. 2 That is, the ends of the tool.

the box I that he is making; and when he lias bent it over enough, lie

45 takes off the board-protector || and puts it on the other end at (2, 5): and | when it is near the kerf at (2, 5), he stops the board-protector, and he [ takes off the instrument for bending the comer and puts it down at (2, 5). He | steps on the ends with his feet, | takes hold of

50 the board-protector with his hands, and pulls it upward; || and he only stops pulling when it is bent up enough. Then | he places the board-protector at the ()t herside of (3, 6), and | he docs as he did before when he bent with it. Now the | three kerfs are bent, forming the corners of the box that he is making. As soon as | this is done, he

55 takes the long cedar-bark rope and tit's it around || the box that he is making, which has now the shape of a box. Then he puts together the j two end joints of thi' box that he is making to iit them; and he pulls the | cedar-bark rope tight, twisting it around. He winds ll around many times, | so that the box that he is making does not get twisted. After doing so, ] he takes his drill and drills holes through

(ill the two ends, in this way: ^-^s. I After he has put the drillholes through, he pulls out fxl ^) the drill, puts it down, | and takes up one of the cedar \ }; J pegs which he shaved to a point, | puts it into the inouth xt^ to wet it with saliva so j that it is | slippery; and when it is wet all over with saliva, he puts

(15 it into the drill-hole before it gets dry || and drives it in with a round stone; and when [ the peg does not go in any farther wdien he drives it in, he drills another hole at the other corner, ] and when the 67 drill-hole goes through, he pulls out the drill, | puts it down, and takes up another cedar peg, and | does as he did before with the first one. He drives it in || with a round stone: and after doing so, he measures | 70 three finger-widths, beginning with the first | peg that he drove in, and he drills another hole through it; | and when it is through, he pulls out his drill and puts it down. | He wets the peg with saliva, and I drives it in with the stone. He continues doing this | in all the 75 holes which he makes at distances of three finger-widths apart, | and there is one cedar peg in each of them. | That is the way in which in ancient times the people | pegged the corner joint of a box with cedar pegs. The present Indians || sew them togetherwith twisted, thin cedar- SO withes, which arc soaked for four days in | urine to make them soft, and so that they do not | rot quickly, for they have a red color. Only two J finger-widths apart are the drill-holes for cedar-withes | on the corner joint of the box that is being made. After the pegging || has 85 been finished, the box-maker unties the cedar-bark rope with which | he kept it together, and he puts it away. Then he takes the board that will be the bottom of | the box, and his adz, and he puts them

88 ( Ic iwn flat, and he adzes off the flat side | to make it smooth. When it is very smooth and level, | he turns over what is to be the bottom of the

90 box, for that is its name, and || he adzes it again. After he has adzed it, he takes | split cedar-sticks and the box that he is making, and he puts it down on the floor, in this way : i | Then he takes one of the split cedar-sticks and. measures il / ^v | crosswise at the four corners. He firsl puts the j cedar N. S measure in at

!*5 (1), going across to (2), and he pushes the 7 end || of the measure into the inner corner at ('_'), and he marks the distance of the corner j on the measure from (1). Then he takes his measure | and puts it crosswise at (3), and pushes the measure | into the corner at (4); and when the distance of the corners from (3) [to (4) is the same as the distance of the corners from (1) to (2), then the box is 400 not awry || that is made by the box-maker. Then he takes his straight | knife and cuts oil' his measures where he has marked them, | and he takes another split cedar-stick and | puts it down so that the end is equal to the end that he has cut off, and he | cuts them to the o same length; and he does the same to the two other || cedar-sticks, so that they have the same measure in length. | After he has done so, he puts one end of the cedar-stick in the [ corner of the box that he is making, close to the upper rim, and he puts the other | end of the (same) stick in the upper corner at (2), in this way: i Then | he takes the other measured split cedarstick /l\ and puts || one end in at (3), and the other end lo at (4) 3^ / Now | it is this way. JL He does the same with y[ two split | measured / _V cedar-sticks at the other side ui the box that he is making. . / | lie takes his drill and drills through the two joints of Y^ the box that he is

As soon as he has drilled through, he cedar peg, pulls out his drill, and | 15 the place where his drill was before. |

making, | in this way takes || a well-shavcc puts the cedar peg ii

Then he takes up the "^ stone with his right hand, | and he drives in the cedar peg. When the peg does not go any farther, | he takes his drill and drills a hole at a distance || of three finger-widths, 20 beginning at the hole which he drilled first; | and when the drill has gone through, he pulls out the drill and | puts a cedar peg in the place where the drill had been, [ and he takes the stone and drives in the cedar peg. | He continues doing this until he finishes driving in the pegs || in the box that he is making. When it has been pegged, he 25 takes some of what was left | when he split the boards for making the box. He takes a | broad short board and puts it down. He takes his | adz and adzes it all over so that it is level; and | when the ridges that were on it have been adzed off, he turns it over and || does the same on the other side. When the ridges that were on it 30

31 have also been adzed off, | he adzes it on the surface, so that it is level; and after | he has finished, he turns it over; and after | he has done so, he takes the box that he is making and puts it on the | bottom board of the box that he is making, in this way, . and

35 he marks it all round with the straight knife \ r \ \ || on the outside of the box that he is making. As \ ' ' \ soon as his marks go around, | he takes off the box " ■■ ■' that he is making and puts it down, and he takes up again | his straight knife and cuts off the edges along | the mark that had been made; and when it has been cut off all along the mark, | he cuts off the ends along

40 the marks; and when the two ends are off,|j he takes up again the box that he is making and puts it on again. Then | he marks along the inside of the box, | on the bottom board of the box that he is making; and | when he has marked all around it, he takes off the box that he is making and puts it down. | Then he takes his straight knife and cuts

45 along || the mark that he put on first; and when he has cut half the width of the little finger j in depth all around the bottom board of the box, he | cuts it off and removes it. As soon as he finishes, it is in this way: puts it on

50 he takes

□

| Then he takes the box that he is making and | so that the inside tits well to the bottom. Then his || drill and drills in a slanting direction in this way: / Sx A | turning the box that he is making upside down. He f "■•■■■ •■ ■ (- I puts one foot | on the bottom board of the box that he is I / making; and when his drill comes through, |

he takes a cedar-stick and his straight knife and | cuts it. making a peg. When he has finished many, he || puts the pegs in the 55 whole number of holes that he has drilled. When he has done so, he | takes the other cedar board that he split, which is one handwidth thick. | He puts it down at the place where he is working, takes his stone hammer and his | wedges, and marks a line on one end with his marker, that is a short blunt-ended wedge, | in this form: |__^ As soon as he finishes marking the endjhe 60 takes his wedges and drives them along the line that he made on the end. [ The wedges are close together as they are standing on the end of what he is splitting. | Then he strikes them lightly with his stone hammer, striking them one at a time; | l\ and when he has split off the piece, then it is in this form, ' ' as he had planned it | for the cover of the box that he is making. When this is done, |[ he takes his adz and adzes it well all over on both sides; 65 and | when all the ridges have been adzed off, he adzes the top side | of what will be the top of the cover that he is making. |

When the cover has been finished, he t akes his small crooked | knife, turns the box that he is , making on its side, and he cuts grooves on it in this way : || round, he has When it is cedar -bark in this way:

and when his grooves go all 70 finished his box for lily bulbs. | done, his wife takes iwisted rope | and puts it around

75052—21—35 eth— pt 1 6

1 The Making of Oil-Boxes. I have forgotten to talk about the measuring [ of the oil-boxes. The husband of the | woman who picks viburnum-berries takes his seven wedges and his ] hammer for split- 5 ting boards in the wedge-bag of sea-lion skin. || He carries these on his back and goes into the woods, carrying his ax | in one hand. He is going to a place where he knows of a cedar-tree which has moss on its back, and which has been lying on the ground for a long t ime ; j for the box-maker looks for this kind of a tree when he wants to make an oil-box, | because it bends, and it does not split easily, although | the heat strikes it for a long time when they are trying

10 out the oil at Knight Inlet. As soon || as he comes to a trunk that has no branches or knots, he puts his wedge-bag down on the ground | and chops into the log near the top of the cedar-free. When | the place chopped out is a little over one span deep, | he measures three spans, | making more

15 room for starting his chopping, in this way: Q ~w ~J || As soon as the new notch has the same depth as |

the first one, he chops out the block between the t wo notches. | When it comes off, it is this way : I ^^~^) The long slanting place that he has chopped out is |

the place where he will put his wedges in. Now he starts

20 where he | cut in, and measures off ten spans || and four fingerwidths. | There he chops into the tree, and the chopping at this place slants toward | the base of the cedar-tree. This place is 22 not as wide open as the one which he chopped out iirst. | but it is much deeper than the one that he chopped out at the top, | at (1).

When it is deep enough, it is this way: Then || he takes 25

his wedge-bag and takes out his wedges 1/ and his | stone hammer, and he puts them down at (1) at the top of the cedar-tree. | Then he drives in the wedges with his stone hammer. | He hammers on each one at a time. | The seven wedges are all close together. When the top piece comes off.

he turns it on its back. || Then he measures (^ ^ Q 30

the thickness of one finger, | which he will split off from the top piece. He take- (lie short marking-wedge and drives it into the login this way: ^^~^^^ Then | he takes a straight-edged cedar-stick and s(^ J^2) phices it on the end of the piece that had been v^-^^^^^ wedged off from the I cedar-tree at (1), as far as (2), — J2-^ and he marks along it. After he has done so, || he takes his marking-wedge and 35 his stone hammer, and puts his | marking wedge into the line that has been marked out, and drives it in with his hammer, [ so that the wood splits a little. Then he pnlls it out again | and puts it in at the end of the place where he drove it in before, and he pulls out his | marking-wedge and strikes it again with the hammer. He || does so 40 along the whole length of the line that lias been marked with his marking-wedge. Then I he takes his wedges and drives them into the line that

12 lias been marked out. | As soon as the board that he splits out turns over, he does the | same as he did before; and when he has enough, | he carries the boards that lie has split off and puts them down flat

45 outside of his house. || Then he takes his hand-adz and adzes them all over. After he | has done so, he turns them over and adzes the other side, | adzing it all over nicely. After this has been done, he puts the board on edge and | adzes off the edges so that they are straight. When | this has been done, he puts it down flat. He

50 takes a cedar-stick and splits it in two so || that it is the thickness of our little finger. He cuts off one end | square, and from this point he measures off | three spans. Then he cuts it off. Now the cedar-

55 stick is | three spans long. | This he lays on the || other end of the box out of which he is making an oil-box. He marks as far as |

its end in this way: i After doing so, | he takes off the cedar-stick measure I I and puts it down at the | other end of the oil-box that he is making, and he does the

GO same | with the straight-edge as he did before: he marks its end ; and, || after doing so, he takes a straight-edged cedar-board, | puts it down lengthwise, on the oil-box that he is making, | flush with the straight line that runs from one mark to the other on | each end of the oil-box that he is making, and he marks along it | the whole

65 length. After this has been done, ho puts it on edge, takes his || handadz, and adzes along the mark that he has put on. When he | G5 nearly reaches this line, he stops. Then he takes his straight | knife and cuts off so that everything comes off down to the mark. After | the board has been cut smooth, he lays it down flat again and puts it on the other edge, | and he cuts the other edge also so that it is straight; and |[ after doing so, he puts it down flat. Three spans | is 70 the width of the oil-box. He | takes the cedar measure and cuts off its end so that it is square. | He measures it off so that it is two spans long, | and cuts it off. Then he lays it on the || middle of one end of 75 the oil-box that he is making, and marks it. | After doing so, he measures with his cedar measure | to find out the center of the box that he is making. When he has found it, | he marks it and measures it in this way: [\J i/j Now the cedar-stick is beveled so that he may U^l 1 r^-J find out which way it slants. || As soon as he finds that it is not so square, he takes his straight-edge | measure and lays it on the end of the box that he is making, and ] he marks along it; and after he has finished, he takes Ins straight j knife and cuts across the grain, cutting off the slanting end. | As soon as this is done, he takes another cedar-stick || and splits it so that §5 it is flat and one span wide. | It is very thin. He cuts off | the end so that it is square, and, after doing so, lie measures | it so that it is throe spans long. | Then he cuts it off. Then he measures two spans 90 and two || finger-widths for the end (of another one), which he also cutsoff. I Next, he places the shorter | measure on theedgeofthe bos that he is making, beginning at the. | end, and marks the end of the measuring- | stick. Then he takes it off. He puts it down on the 95 upper side || and marks its end again. Then he takes the | straightedge and puts it down so that it touches the marks, | and he marks along it. As soon as he has done this, he takes the longer one of the | cedar measures, puts it down on the l)ox that he is making, | beginning at the last mark that he put on, and he marks its end; || 100 and he also puts it on the other edge and marks its | end. After this has heen done, he takes his straight | cedar-stick and puts it down close to the marks thai he has just made, and | marks along it. Then he puts it down on the floor. He takes the shorter | cedar 5 measure and puts its end down on the edge || of the box that he is making, beginning at the last mark that he has put on, and he| marks its end. Then he takes it off and puts it down [ on the other edge and marks its end. | After this lias heen clone, he takes his straight-edge and puts it down on | the box that he is making so that 10 it touches the marks that he has put on, and he marks along it ; || and after all the places where, the short sides are to be bent have been 10 marked, and also | the long sides of the oil-box that he is making, he takes the measure of | the longer cedar-stick and puts it down on the edge of the | box that he is making so that it touches the mark that he made last. He. marks the | end of the measure, takes it off, and puts it down || on the other edge, and he marks the. end of it again. 15 After this has been | done, he takes his straight-edge, puts it down so that | it just touches the marks along it. This is | the place where t he two ends of the od-box that he is making will meet. After he has done so, it is | in this way.1 Then he takes his straight knife and || cuts out the marks for the bending of the sides, | in this way.2 The 20 ends are cut out in this manner.2 After this has been done, he takes | a basket, goes down to the beach of the house where he is making the box, and | puts stones into his basket. As soon as ] it is full, he carries them in on his back into the house in which he is making the box, || and he pours down the stones by the side of the fire. 25 Then he goes down again | and puts stones into his basket. | When it is full, he carries them on his back | into the house in which he is making the box. He pours them down by the side | of the fire. When he thinks he has enough, he stops. || He rakes up his fire and 30 puts the stones on top of it. | When this is done, he takes the box

1 See figure on p. 68. 2_See figure on p. 69.

32 which he is making and puts it down | close by the fire. He marks on the floor a point on each side of the marks that he has put on | the three corners of the oil-box that he is making. Then | he takes the

35 box away and puts it down flat at a place not far from || where he is working. He takes his wife's clam-digging stick and digs up | the soil. The hole that he digs is of the same length as the width | of the box that he is making, and the width of the hole is one span, | and

40 it is one span deep. | As soon as he has done so, he takes the || large basket, goes down to the beach, and picks off | dulce and throws it into a basket. | When it is full, he carries it on his back up the beach, I into the house in which the box is being made. He puts it down at the place | near where he dug the holes. As soon as this is

45 done, he takes good, easily-splitting || pine-wood and splits it with his knife into thin pieces. | He cuts them round with sharp | points. The length of each is four finger-widths. | He cuts them of the same size as the size of his drill, and he uses them to peg | the ends of the

50 box together. (Some people sew the ends || of the box with cedarwithes.) I As soon as he has cut enough pegs, he goes to get his drill, | and also the tongs, which he brings and puts down. As soon as this is done, [ he takes his large bucket and goes to draw fresh water. |

Then he takes pieces of old mats and [| puts them down: and after 55 he has done so, he sees that the stones on his | fire are red-hot. Then he | takes his tongs and picks off the red-hot stones and | puts them into the holes that he has dug. He does not fill them too full of | stones; and when there are stones in every hole, || he takes the GO basket with dulce, takes out the dulce, and | puts it on the red-hot stones. He puts on a great deal of it, so that the \ dulce in the three holes forms a thick layer. When this is done, | lie takes the box that he is making and puts it down over the holes. He puts the grooved side down, | and he places the holes just under the grooves. || Then he puts dulce over all the grooves. | As soon as a thick layer G5 has been put on, he lifts up one end of the box that he is making | so that it does not stand quite straight on edge. He takes his bucket | and pours water on the three holes for steaming. After doing so, | he puts down the box that he is making, as the steam begins to come out. || He covers it with pieces of old mats. After | this has been 70 done, he takes well-splitting pine-wood and splits it | so that it is two finger-widths in thickness and square. | He measures off five spans for the | length of the red-pine wood, and splits it so that it is || like 75 tongs. After this has been done, he takes split cedar-strips | and ties them to one end, so that the pine-wood does not split. | After he

77 has clone this to the piece protecting the sides of the box when the corners are being bent, | he takes off the old mat which he had spread over the side of the box that he is steaming, | and he puts it

80 down a little ways from where he is working, and || he removes from the box all the dulce that has been steamed. | When it is all off, he takes hold of one edge of the box that he is making, which is now pliable. | He lays it down flat on a place where it is level. Then he takes the protector of the box, | he opens the two legs while he is ] lifting the box-board from the floor, and puts the board between the

85 leys of the tongs. || He places this close to the slanting side of the groove that he lias made in the board. Then he places both feel , one on | each end of the protector. He takes hold of the two corners of the box-board that he is making and | pulls it upward. Then the side of the box begins to bend; and | when it is in this way,1 he moves his protector to the following J groove; and he does the same as he

90 did before when he bent the first groove; || and after he has bent the three grooves, he takes a | long cedar-bark rope and winds it around the box that he is making. Now [ he pushes the one end against the groove that will fit it at the other end; and after doing this, | he takes his drill and drills a slant ing hole through the two ends that are fitted together. | The distance between these holes is three finger-widths. ||

95 When he has pushed his drill through, he pulls it out | and puts in its place a peg of red-pine wood, which he | hammers in with a sj()ne.

1 At right angles.

When it has all been pegged together, he | takes a short board which 97 is the end of the box that he is making, and | puts it down flat. He takes hold of each side of the box that he is making and puts it on top of his board. || He takes his drill and marks all round the outside 200 of the 1 box that he has made; and as soon as he has marked all round it, he takes it off j and puts it down at a place not far from where he is working. Then he | takes his straight knife and he cuts the hoard until he reaches the mark that he put j round the bottom of his box. When he reaches || the mark up to which he is cutting, 5 he cuts it very smooth with his crooked j knife at the place where the box is going to fit on the bottom board of the box that he is making. | Then he pounds up charcoal and puts it into the shell of a | horseclam. He pours some water on it, stirs it, and | when it is mixed, he takes soft cedar-bark, dips it in, || takes the box that he is making ln and turns it bottom-side up. | When it is in this position, he soaks some shredded cedar-bark in the charcoal mixture, | and paints it all round the bottom edge of the box that he is making. He lays the bottom board | flat on the bottom of the box, and sits down on it, so that it is | pressed down against the box. After doing so, || betake- 1° it off, and then he examines it to see if the black paint is all over the bottom board, | then there is no leak. If the black i-; in patches, then there will be | leaks at the points without paint. He takes his crooked | knife and shaves off all the black paint ; and when ] it is all off, he takes some more soft cedar-bark, dips it into the charcoal ||

20 mixture, and rubs it over the edge of the box that he is making; then tie puts | on the bottom board; and when the black charcoal is no longer in patches, | he takes his drill and drills | slantingly through (the side and the bottom). When he gets through, he pulls out his drill, | takes one of the pegs, wets it in his mouth with his saliva,

25 and, || when it is wet all over, he puts it into the drill-hole. | He takes his stone hammer and drives it in. When it is all in, | he stops hammering. He takes his drill and drills another hole | three fingerwidths away from the first one; | and when that also passes through,

30 he wets another peg in his mouth || with his saliva. Then he pulls out his drill, | changes, and puts the peg in its place in the drill-hole. Then he takes the | stone and drives in the peg, as he did before. He | continues doing this, going around drilling and putting in pegs; and | when he has pegged all round the bottom, the oil-box is

35 finished; || for the time when he makes the box is when the | winter is over and just before the olachen run in Knight Inlet. | Oil has to be put in the oil-box first, in order to make it tight | by filling the pegged edge of the bottom with oil. When | the time for picking

40 viburnum berries comes, the oil box is empty. || Then the berries are put in; and now the juice of the viburnum berries will not runout, | although they leave it in the box for a whole winter. | That is all.

uoas] INDUSTRIES 93

Sewing with Cedar-Withes. — The man takes alongbone drill | and two split boards which he places side by side. Then he | drills close to the end slanting, and passes through the edges of the | two split boards, so that the end of the drill passes out ( ■ on the

. ft Ta ST? ITii I | knife cedarother side of the || other board, thus: as he comes to the end, he takes his and cuts a groove into it, in which the withes he. | After cutting the grooves, he turns it over and cuts a | groove on the other side, where no groove has been cut (on the upper side). When he gets to the end, | he takes the twisted cedar- withes andputs the thin end through (1 ) . || He pulls it ; and when it reaches the thick end, 10 he takes | a cedar stick and cuts it so that it has a sharp point, and drives it in | alongside of the cedar- withe. Then the end of the cedarwithe comes out at (2). | He pulls it tight and twists it, and pushes it in | at (3), and it comes out at (4). He pulls it tight, and|| 15 hammers it with a diabase pebble so as to | drive it mto the groove, while another man is pulling | the cedar- withe, for it always requires two men to work at boards. He twists the | cedar-withe tight and smooth and pushes the thin end mto (5), | and it comes out at (6). He pulls at it and hammers it with the stone; || and when it hes in 20 the groove, he twists the cedar- withe and | pushes it into (7), so that it comes out at (8); and | he does the same as he did before; and

23 be continues to the end of all the holes | up to (22). Then he drives in the point of a cedar-stick at its sides. | 1 Care of Canos. — I forgot t his when I was talking about | the canoebuilder, who spreads open the canoe, making a small canoe. When I it- | pours water into it, and the stones are nearly red-hot, | he 5 pours four buckets of water, || and there is one bucket of urine which he | pours into the canoe, ami lu; carries four more buckets of water, | pours them into it, and he also carries one bucket of urine | and pours it into the water in the | small canoe. Then eight buckets of

10 water || have been poured into the small canoe, and two buckets of urine, | so that it may not be split by the heat of the sun after the canoe-builder shall have finished it. | That is the reason why they put urine into it. As soon as enough | water and urine are put into it, he puts red-hot stones into the canoe. | When the canoe-builder

15 finishes this, || he takes a rush mat and a dish or a small steamingbox| and perch-oil (that is the oil obtained from | perch-liver). He places the stearning-box by the side of the fire of his house, and | he takes the rush mat and puts it into the fire. | As soon as it burns, he

20 places it on the side of the steaming-box, so that || the charcoal falls into the box. When he thinks he has enough, | he takes his hammer boasj INDUSTRIES 95

and crushes the charcoal with the striking-head into dust, | so that 22 it becomes like flour. After this has been done, he pours the | perchoil into it. Then he stirs it; and when it becomes a | thick paste, he turns the canoe bottom-side up, takes an || old mat and tears off 25 enough to squeeze it in his hand. Then he puts it into | the mixture of oil and coal and blackens the outside of the | small canoe. He rubs it well, so that it will penetrate the cedar wood; | and when it is all covered, he finishes at the end of the. canoe. | Therefore they do not put a sun-protector on the outside of the small canoe when it is blackened || outside with oil mixed with charcoal, for the heat of the 30 sun does not go through. | They do this way with small canoes and with | big canoes. |

As soon as this is finished, the canoe is turned right-side up, and supports of cedar-wood are put on each side of the bow and on each side of the stern. || Short boards of cedar-wood are placed on the 35 seats; and when | it is all covered, the man pours fresh water into it so as to [ keep the inside of the canoe cool. When the weather is hot, | he takes a dipper and sprinkles water so as to wet the inside of the canoe. | in the morning. When the owner of the canoe has no short boards, || he cuts off branches of young cedar-trees and | 40 places them on the seats of the canoe the. whole | length of the canoe, so that neither the sun nor the | cold winds of winter pass through, for the cold wind | cracks the inside of the canoe; for when the cold

45 winter wind is coming, the canoe-owner || bails out the water, so that it is dry inside. He takes | coarse cedar-bark mats and spreads them over the seats, | and he covers over the sides and each end | so that the cold wind does not go through. |

Alter the canoe has been finished, he goes to split from a cedar-

50 tree || narrow boards. These are one span | wide and one [ finger thick. | Their length is one and a half | fathoms. If they are split out

55 for a small canoe, | four of these are made for bottom-boards; and || for a large traveling-canoe twenty | are split out for bottom-boards. He does. the same as ho does when splitting out | roof-boards. The only difference is that they are not adzed. When | the owner of the large canoe goes traveling, he first | lays down on . the beach the

60 boards, beginning at the bow of the canoe, and || he places them more than a fathom apart, in this way.1 | This is called "place over which the traveling-canoe is pushed down." When | they have all been put down, many men take hold, one on | each side of the thwarts and also one | on each side of the bow, pressing their backs against the sides of the bow so that they lift it up and that it does not shove

65 the boards out of place, and || also one on each side of the stern, who

1 Laying them down parallel, as a runway for the canoe.

push ahead. Then one | man shouts, "Wo!"' and then all the | men 65 push together at the stern and pull on each side | at the ends of the thwarts. Those pull with the right hand at the ends of the thwarts, holding [ with (lie left hand the side of the canoe, who stand on the left-hand side of the canoe. || And those, pull with the left hand on 70 the ends of the thwarts | who stand on the right-hand side and hold with the right hand the side of | the canoe. When they have taken it down to the sea, they take | the split boards and place them in the bottom of the canoe; and when they are | all in, they put the cargo on top of the boards. When || the canoe has been loaded, they start 75 bow first ; and when they arrive | at the place where they are going, they go ashore stern first as they go to the beach. | The steersman is the first to go ashore. He pulls up the stern | of the canoe. When the crew is ashore, they unload | the cargo; and when everything is out, they take || the bottom-boards ashore and put them down, Mi beginning at the stern of the canoe: and they j lay them down up to the place where they will put the canoe on the beach. They pull it up | over the boards, and leave it at a level place on the beach. Then they | gather all the split boards and put them over the seats, so that j the heat of the sun does not strike the canoe. That is all. ||

Wooden Sail. — Now I will talk about the sail of the | ancient l people, which was sewed together of boards. First they | look for a

3 thick moss-covered cedar-tree that has been lying on the ground [or a long time. When | it has hern found, one and a half fathom-lengths are

5 split off. || Each piece is two spans wide j and one finger-width thick. |

I do not know how the edges are. fitted together. | They are well adzed . . . Then | he takes a long bone drill, and he takes two

10 pieces of the boards || and lays them side by side. He drills near the end in a slanting direction | through the edges of the two split boards, so that the point of the drill comes through | on the other side of flie other board, in this manner.1 . . . When | this is done, he takes another (board) and places it alongside of the last one, and | he

15 drills it in the same way, and sews it together as he sewed || the first one; and he only stops adding to it when it is two fathoms | wide. Then he takes a split hoard half | a finger-width thick and four | finger-widths wide. Its length is equal | to the width of the boards

20 that have been sewed together. He places it on top || of one end of the sewed boards, lie takes his | drill and drills through it one finger-width | from the edge of the piece of wood that forms now the straight | crosspiece of the short hoards that have been sewed together. He drills straight | through, and at a distance of three i Here the method of sewing is described in detail. See figure on p. 93.

INDUSTRIES

finger-widths || from the first hole he drills through again; and then 25 he drills | other holes at the same distances. The drilling continues over the | whole length of the cross end-piece. He also cuts grooves into it; and after | the grooves have been cut between alternating pairs of drill-holes, he turns the | sewed boards over and cuts grooves on the opposite side, over those (intervals) in which he did not cut || grooves (on the other side). After he finishes, he turns it over. 30 Then he takes | twisted cedar-withes and sews them together | in the way in which he sewed the short boards. As soon as j he has finished doing this at (1), 2

he does | the same as he he has done it, he || puts other end, and he drills does the same as he did at finally he does it at (4) ; the end, he has finished.

II II

; i M

1!

II II II II

he drills at (2), and did at (1) ; and after the crosspiece at the 35 it at (3), and J he (1) and (2); and | and when he reaches Now, that | is the sail of the ancient people before an}' white people came; to wit, | short boards sewed together. The canoe-mast is short, for it || just shows 40 above the top edge of the board sail when | it is standing up in the bow. They just push up one end, | for the lower edge lies hard against the mast when | it is standing. The wind just blows against it and presses | the board sail against the mast when the canoe is running before the wind. When || it gets calm, they lay it down flat towards the stern, 45

46 away from | the mast ; and the middle of the board sail lies against the mast as it is standing on edge. | After they have taken it down, they take down the mast and put it down | into the bow; and they push up the j board sail and shift it towards the bow, so that it lies

50 flat || in the bow of the canoe. The sail of a largo | traveling-canoe is of this size. |

1 Mat Sail and Mast. — A woven mat was the sail of I small canoes.

It- was made of the middle part of cedar-bark, for the j weaving is

5 made of narrow strips. Its length is one fathom | and two spans, || and its width is one fathom. There are four holes in one edge, | by means of which it is strapped to the mast, in this way: | and their is top corner; | end of the man peels|| for the mat one hole in each corner to put the sprit into the and the hole in the lower corner is for the lower

10 sheet | to pass through. When it is finished, the a young cedar-tree, which is to be the mast sail. | He passes twisted cedar-hark rope through the four holes in the side of the sail, | and puts it around the mast to hold the sail. He uses a small | young cedar-tree for the sprit, and he uses | twisted cedar-bark rope and puts it around the mast below

15 the || middle to hold the lower end of the sprit. | Finally he takes wellmade, twisted, thin cedar-bark rope, | sometimes five fathoms in

INDUSTRIES

and he does the same | corner. That is the is finished, it is thus: | The mast-hole of the white people came here in the I how of the canoe.

length, and | passes its end through the sprit-hole in the upper corner, 18

to the other end in the lower lowercornersheet.|| When it 20

ancient people \ before any consisted of two round sticks These were three finger-widths apa 1 1 . | The ends were sewed with cedar-withes. Then || the canoe-builder 25 took heavy cedar-withe ropes and small cedar-wood | and measured i lie middle point for the mast-hole. After | he had found the middle, he marked off a hole | measuring one finger-width and a half, beginning | at the middle mark. He took the same distance || from the middle on 30 the other side of the mark. | Three finger-widths is the distance of the | marks on each side of the mark in the middle. Then he takes | the heavy cedar-withe and ties it around the two bars. | After putting two turns into the cedar-withe rope, || he pulls it up between the two bars 35 and draws it tight ; I and lie winds it between the I crossbars and ties the ends. He does | the same on the side. The mast stands between the two bars and the | cedar-withes, in this manner: mast stands in (1). || This finishes all I about the making of a canoe.

other cross- The know 40

1 The Making of Horn Spoons (1). — Now I will talk about the | making of the horn spoon, the Mack spoon. | When the head of the mountaingoat is taken off, it is | kept in the corner of the house for four days, 5 and it is placed || not far from the side of the fire of the house ; and | when the heat of the fire strikes it, the spoon-maker | turns the head over all the time; and when it gets warm, | he places it nearer the fire. He watches it all the time | so that it does not get burnt.

10 When he thinks it is warm through and through, || he takes hold of the head and tries to pull [ the hair off. When it gets loose, he knows that | the horns are also loosened. He takes hold of | the horn with his right hand, and with his left hand he holds | the nose

15 of the head. Then he twists the horn a little and || pulls it off. Now the horn has been blown off by the steam. He | also does the same with the other one. When he has them off, | he takes his handadz and a block of wood and he adzes it. | He adzes it at the concave side of the horn. I placing the thick end on the block of wood, in this manner:||

20 As soon as he has it off, he adzes off the "mouth" of the spoon so that it is round, j in this manner: After he has done so, he measures three | finger- / \ widths, beginning at the | top of the horn, and he adzes it ^J so that it is | notched in this place, and it is in this way II when he has 2-'! finished it. || A

He puts away his hand-adz and takes his [^ straight knife. | 25 In former times the people rubbed them down (J with rough sandstone | when they were making black horn spoons. Now there is water in a dish, | and the man puts it down at his lefthand side while he is rubbing the horn. He | puts the thick end info the water, and he holds it by the small end || with his left hand. With 30 his right hand he holds a rough | sandstone and rubs the horn. | Nowadays the modern men adz it. They shave it down | to smooth it after they just begin cutting it. | After all this, he puts a small kettle half full of water over the fire, || and he takes two cedar-sticks, 35 each one span long | and half the thickness of a | finger. He takes split [ cedar-bark and ties the ends of the cedar-sticks together with the cedar-bark. Then he gets | another piece of cedar-bark ready to tie the other end || after having put the spoon in between. Then it 40 is this way.1 | When the kettle boils up on the fire, he takes the | spoon and puts it in. He does not leave it in a long time | before taking it out again. Then he puts the spoon near its "mouth,"

1 That is, two straight sticks tied loosely together at one end.

45 between | the cedar-sticks, in this manner, » || and he takes the cedar-bark and ties it on near the end / of the spoonspreader | into which the spoon is put. ph He bends back the point, | and holds it by putting it into J W cold | water, so that it sets. Then it does not bend back \Z/ again, but is kept in position | as it gets cold. Next he takes off the spoon-opener,

50 and || he takes dried dog-fish skin and rubs it all over it, so that it becomes very | smooth inside and outside. When it is quite | smooth, it is finished. Now the black horn spoon is finished after this. I The Making of Horn Spoons (2). — Let me first talk about the | horn spoons, how they are made. When | the mountain-goat hunter goes out to hunt, the spoon-maker asks | him to break off the horns of the 5 goats that he will get, for || the mountain-goat hunter only wants the tallow and the | kidney-fat and the meat. He does not want the bones and the | horns. Therefore the spoon-maker ] asks him for these. In the morning, when daylight comes, the \ mountain-goat

10 hunter goes hunting; and after he has killed || a mountain-goat, he takes off the tallow, [ kidney-fat, and the meat, and finally he cuts the skin around | the bottom of the horns; and when he has cut off j The Making of Horn Spoons (2). — Wega£maLEn gwagwrexsEX£Id laxa the skin, | he lakes a hammer and pounds off the horns. Now they break off from | the bone core. He continues doing this [| with 15 nil the mountain-goats that he has killed. And when lie has killed enough, he carries them down | from the mountain where he was hunting; and when he arrives at home, he | immediately goes and gives the horns to the spoon-maker, | who at once takes a basket and goes down to the beach | in front of his house, carrying (the basket) in his hand. He puts stones into it, || enough so that he can carry 20 them up | and he takes them into his house. He puts them down near j his fire, and he builds up the fire and puts the stones | on. "When this is done, he takes a steaming-box and | places it next to the fire, and he also takes his large water-bucket |j and goes to draw 25 some water, and he pours the water into the steaming-box I so that it is half full. After this is done, he takes the tongs | and puts them down, and also his adz and his straight | knife, so that they are ready on the floor of the house; and he also takes a piece of fire-wood,
which he places next to the fire. When all these have been || put 30 down, he places the stones on the fire until they get red-hot. | Then he takes his tongs, picks up the red-hot | stones, and throws them into the steaming-box which contains water, and | he continues putting in red-hot stones. As soon as the water | begins to boil, he

35 stops putting in stones, takes the horns, || and puts them into i(. He does not leave them there a long time, before | he takes up liis tongs, feels for the horn, and when he finds one, | he takes soft shredded cedar-bark and puts it into his hand | in order not to burn it as he takes hold of the point of the horn. He strikes with | the thick end against the piece of fire-wood on the floor. Then the core

40 that is left inside |[ jumps out. Now the horn is hollow. He continues | doing this with all of them; and when they are all done, he measures off two | finger-widths from the point at the concave | (belly) side, in this way: ^^^ neiiy. Then he takes his straight , knife and cuts a notch ^SSZZ^^ mto '*) slanting towards

45 the || thick end. Then he Back- puts down his knife and measures | three finger-widths from the point where he made the notch, | towards the big end, and ho puts a small notch there. | Then he puts down his knife, takes his | adz and adzes off the horn, begin-

50 ning at the first notch. He adzes off one-half || its thickness between the two notches. Then he turns the horn over, | holding it by the ( hick end, and adzes it off so that it is a little rounded, and so that it is hollow in the middle. | After this has been done, he adzes off the thick end so that it is round; | and when this is done, it is in this way: ( -\ (? Then he takes | red-pine wood that splits

55 well ^^=~5Z^^ an(J splits it, in pieces of the size of our || middle linger, and he measures off one | span for its length. Then he 56 takes his | straight knife and cuts it off, and when he has cut off | the same number and split as many as the number of black horn | spoons that he is making, then he takes spruce-root and splits it in two, || puts it into a small dish with water in it to soak, ] 60 and ho takes his straight knife and splits one end of the | pine-sticks to make them like a pair of tongs; and when | the ends of all of them have been split, he takes the split roots and ties the other end, | in this way.1 He does this with all of them; and when || they all have been tied with the roots, he builds up his fire, I takes 65 the stones out of the steaming-box, and puts them back on the fire. | When they are all on, he waits until they are red-hot. | When they are red-hot, he takes | his tongs and picks out the hot stones and puts them back || into the water in the steaming-box; and when the 70 water begins to boil up, | he takes the adzed horns and puts them | in. As soon as they are in, he takes the roots and | puts them down at the place where he is seated, and also the split pine-sticks. When he thinks | that the horns are hot enough, he takes his fire-tongs and || 75 picks up the horns. He takes one of the | spoon-moulds, —the pieces of pine-wood tied at one end, — and puts the | spoon between its legs.

' See footnote on p. 103.

78 Since the born is pliable, he can spread it | as wide as he wants. Then he takes root and ties the | other end of the spoon-mould. After he

80 has done so, it is in this way.1 After || he has done so with one, he docs the same with the others; and after he has | finished, he puts some more red-hot stones in the steaming-box; | and when the water begins to boil up, he takes | mountain-goat tallow and puts it down where he is working. Then lie puts a dish \ down where he is seated.

85 takes the || water-bucket with water in it, and pours the water into the dish. After | doing so. he takes the spoon with the spoon-mould on it | and puts them into the boiling water. When lie thinks that | they are hot through, he takes them out one by one, | and rubs them

90 .ill over with the tallow; and as soon as ho has done so, || he throws I hem into the cold water in the dish. He does this | with all of them. He wants them to become brittle, | therefore he does so. As soon as they have all been put into the cold water | in the dish, he takes them out, unties the roots which he has tied j around the mould, and

95 takes dogfish-skin from the back of the dogfish, and || polishes the outside and the inside. When they are smooth both outside | and inside, they are finished. He continues doing this | with all of them, and in this way the horn spoons are made. | Now, that is all. |

See figure on p. 104.

Cedar-Bark Breaker. — The man takes a (bone from the) | nasal 1 bone of a whale, and he takes a thin-edged rough sandstone | and a small dish, and he pours water into it so that it is | half full. Then he puts it down where he is going to work at a cedar-bark breaker. || 5 He takes the bone and measures it so that it is | two spans and four finger- widths in length. | Then he puts the rough sandstone into the water in the ] dish, and he saws the bone off so that the end is square. He I does the same with the other end. When both ends are square, || K) he rubs the edges so that they are straight; and when the edges are straight, | he measures the width of one hand for its width, and ] he measures with a cedar-stick to find the center, in this manner.1 | As soon as he finds the center, he marks a fine across, and he rubs [ on each side of the line to make a hole through it, which serve* as a grip. As soon as he has finished || rubbing the hole through 15 which serves as a grip, | he rubs along the lower edge so as to sharpen it. Now he has finished | the bark-breaker. |

Bag of Sea-Lion Hide. — As soon as this is done, he takes the | skin of a sea-lion which has been dried. He spreads it out, and he || measures two spans. Then he puts a j straight-edge of cedar-wood on 20 it and marks along the edge, so that it may be straight. Then he | cuts along, following the fine; and he also lays the straight-edge of cedar-

1 See Ulustrations in Publications of the Jesup North Pacific Expedition, Vol. V, p. 372.

wood | on the other side and marks along it and cuts following the

25 line. | Now it is two spans wide, || and he cuts along six spans | for the length as he lays his straight-edge of cedar-wood down at the end of the [ six spans which he has marked off, and he cuts along the line that he has marked. | Then he doubles it up in the middle of the long side and bends it over, and he steps on it, | so that the sides

30 may be close together. Then he punches holes through the edges || two finger-widths apart. That is | where the cord will pass through when he sews it; and when | it is finished, he puts the straight-edge of cedar-wood on a piece two | spans wide and marks a line on it, and

35 cuts along it. | This piece is seven spans in length. || It is to be the carrying-strap for the wedge-bag, and he | puts on the straight-edge of cedar-wood on a piece half | a finger wide and marks a fine on it and cuts along it. This | long strip serves to sew up the sides of the wedge-bag. | As soon as this is done, he puts it for a short time into ||

40 water, together with the wedge-bag. Only the carryings-trap is not put into the water. | lie does not leave it in for a long time before he takes it out. | Then he takes the narrow strip of sea-lion skin and pushes one end| through the holes. Then he puts one end of the carrying-strap to | one side and sews it on. This sewing goes downward || to the bent bottom of the wedge-bag. He does | the same at 45 the other side. | Then the wedge-bag is finished. |

Spruce-Roots and Cedar- Withes. — When the season approaches when I the huckleberries are ripe, | the woman makes her huckleberrybasket, and | it is ready when the berries are ripe. She takes her digging-stick and her small ax, | going to the place where small spruce-trees are growing, and where she knows that the ground is soft. As soon as || she reaches there, she pushes one end of her clam- 5 digging stick into the ground and | pries up the roots of a young spruce-tree. As soon as the roots come out of the ground, | she picks out thin and small ones. She takes hold of them and pulls them out. | These may be more than a fathom in length; | and when she reaches the end, she takes her small ax and || chops them off. 10 The woman who is getting the roots | continues doing this. When she has enough, she coils them up and ties them | with small roots in four places, so that they are this way : /0^^^. I As soon as this is done, she carries them in her right W ^ hand and | goes home. She puts them down in a cool 11 M corner of the house. || Then she takes a mat and ^Sas^^ spreads it 15 over them. As soon as she has done this, | she again takes her small ax and goes- to a place where young cedar-trees grow; | and when she reaches there, she looks for those that have straight long branches, | that are not twisted; and when she finds a | young cedar-tree that

20 has these, she chops it down. || When it falls, she breaks off the straight branches; and when | she has enough, she puts the thick ends together and takes thin cedar-withes | and twists them. When this is done, she ties them around the thick ends of the cedar-twigs. [ She ties them ^_j£SS5=j^^l||gK at four places, so that they are in this way: /^^S5S^ ^^%~ | As soon as this is done, she car

2.5 ries them home on her shoulder; and when || she enters the house, she puts them down at the place where she always sits. | There she unties the cedar-withes; and after they have been taken off, | she strips off the branches of the first one that she takes up; and after she has taken them all off, | she begins at the thin end of the cedar-withes and splits them in two | towards the thick end, right

30 through the heart. After they have been spht in two, || she puts down the other half and splits the first half again in two; | and after this has been split in two, she takes up | the other half which she had put down on the floor, and splits it in two also. | Now the cedarwithes have been split into four pieces. When this has been done, |

35 she takes up another cedar-withe and strips off the branches; || and after this has been done, she splits it in the same way as she did the first one; | and she continues doing so with the other cedar-withes; | and after sphtting them, she picks out the pieces containing the sap | and places them by themselves; and she takes the remainder of what she split and ties it together [ in this way : ^^^^^-— -, She does the same to the inner part. As soon || as 3||i=|^2^ every- 40 thing has been tied together, she lays the *' ^^^^ withes over her fire | to get dry; for when she splits them, the bark also comes off. | After this has been done, she takes the roots and unties them, | and she straightens them out. Then she takes good | straight-splitting red-pine wood and splits it like a || pair of tongs. 45 She takes a thin root and ties it at a place j four finger-widths from the unsplit end; | and after doing so, she takes her straight knife and | cuts off the end of the tongs which serve for stripping off the bark of the roots, and | thus the end is sharp. She cuts it again at the end where she tied the tongs with roots. As soon as this has been finished, || she puts it into the floor close to the fire, | with the split 50 end upward, and the sharp end in the ground, leaning (outwards) | towards the fire, in this way: m As soon as this has been done, | she takes one /(u of the long pieces of root and coils it up again. ffl Then | she puts it on the middle of the fire » a^&_ takes her tongs, and ||

holds the root with them. Then she turns it until all the bark has 55 been burnt black. | As soon as the bark has been burnt black, | she takes it off with the tongs and puts it down next to the implement foist ripping off the bark 1 of the root. Then she takes the end of it and puts it between the | legs of the tongs for stripping off the bark from

60 the roots that have been burnt over the fire. || She takes hold of the top of the legs of the tongs with the ; left hand, presses them together, while she pulls the roots through the tongs with the | right hand. Then the bark | peels off, and the sap comes out. As soon as all | the bark is off, she puts the other end in and strips off the bark of the ||

65 root that she is holding; and she continues for a lung time j pulling it to and fro. stripping oil' the bark of the roots by pulling them through. She only | stops doing this when the root is white all over, for they are dry. | After doing this, she takes another | root and does the same as she did with the first one with which she was working; ||

70 and she only stops when all the bark is stripped off. | Then she splits them in two through the middle, splitting the whole length; | and after splitting them in two, she splits the halves into two again. | Then she splits each root into four pieces. She continues doing this

75 with | all the roots; and when they have all been split, she || scrapes them. Then she takes her husband's straight knife | and puts it down at the left-hand side of her foot. She takes | the split root with the left hand and puts it | against the right side of the heel of her left foot. | Then with the right hand she takes the straight

80 knife || and puts the back of the knife against the root, and presses it down against it, j and pulls the root through with the right hand. Then she turns the root over, | pulling it through between the heel of her foot | and the back of the straight knife. Then she only stops doing this || when the knife does not get wet any more. Then the 85 scraped root is really | white, because it is very dry: and it | is pliable. That is the reason why it does not break ; for she is | going to make a well-made basket out of it to shake the huckleberries into. After | she has done this, she does the same with the cedar withes, and | she treats them in the same way. scraping || the water out of them. ] S9

Cedar- Withes. —While the man is making the digging-stick for 1 digging | clover, his wife goes into the woods looking for long cedarbranches that | split straight, which are the thickness of our fingers, | and which also have no branches. They only have || leaves on each 5 side, and these are called | "cedar-branches." As soon as the woman finds the cedar-branches, | she pulls them down and breaks them off. Sometimes there are many on ] one cedar-tree, and there are not many on other cedar-trees. ] When the woman who gathers cedar-branches gets enough, ]| she ties one end of the branches which 10 have been put together with twisted cedar-branch rope; and | after tying up one end, she goes home carrying on her shoulders the branches which she has gathered. | She puts them down in a cool corner of the house. Then | she sits down and sphts them through the heart. When | they have been split in two, she splits each half in two, and || she sphts them again in two,_and she sphts them once 15

16 more in two. | Sometimes the branches are split into twenty pieces, if | the woman who splits the branches is expert in splitting them into | thin pieces. When they arc all split, she puts them away. ] 1 Spruce-Roots (1) . — Then she gets ready again to go into the woods to dig spruce-roots whereshe knows that the ground is soft, | and where young spruce-trees are growing, for really long [ and thin, and without 5 branches, are the roots of young spruce-trees in soft ground. || When she finds them, she pulls out the ] root, as it is showing half way on the ground. She pulls out the whole length," | for they are long; and when she comes to the point where it divides, | she bites it off, so that it breaks off, and she does so with the others; and | when

10 she thinks she has enough roots, she takes the roots |] and coils them up. Then she takes a long thin root and | ties it to one side of the coil. After she has | done so, she carries the coil of roots that she has obtained and goes home to her house, | and she puts it down in a cool corner of the house. Then | she sits down and unties the tying

15 of the coded roots; and || when the tying is ail oil', she carries the uncoded roots | and puts them down alongside the fire of her house. She takes the tongs | and ties a thin root around its neck, so that they may not split when she ] puff- oil' the bark of the root. When this is done, she takes | one of the long roots and puts it over the fire, ||

beginning next to where it is being held, and pulling it slowly, | until 20 it gets hot all over. As soon as the bark is hot, | she puts it between the tongs next to | where she is holding it with the left hand. She squeezes the legs of the | tongs together under it. Then she pulls it through with her || right hand. Then the bark peels off. | As soon 25 as all the bark is off, she puts it down on the | left-hand side, and she takes up another root and | puts it over the fire, and she does the same as she did before | to the first one at which she was working when she put it over the fire. || When all the bark has been taken off the roots, | 30 she splits them before they are really dry. | She begins splitting at the thin end through the heart, | going towards the thick end. When it has been split in two, she takes | each half and splits it again in two; and when this has been split, || she splits it again in two; and 35 she does the same to the other half, ] for the woman wishes to have roots split into thin strips | to weave the basket that she is making. Sometimes she splits eight strips out of one | clean root when she is splitting it. When it has all been split, | she takes the cedar-bark splitting-bone (the ulna of the foreleg of the || deer) and grinds it 40 well, so that it has a sharp point and also so that | it is thin. That is the bone for splitting cedar-bark of the woman when she is making mats, | when she is splitting cedar-bark, and when she is making

43 narrow strips of bark. | This she uses when she is working at the roots. She stretches out | her left foot on the floor, and she takes one

45 end of the split || root with her left hand and she puts down a root | on the right-hand side of her heel. | She takes hold with the right hand of the bone cedar-bark splitter and she j lays it on the ] root and presses the bone implement against the root. Then | she pulls it

50 through, pressing it tightly against her heel. || Thus she squeezes out all the sap in the root. If there is | much water in it, she pulls the root through four times its whole length between her heel and the bone. When | all the sap is out, the routs become really white, flat

55 split | roots. She dot's this with all of (the roots). When || all the roots have been scraped, she coils them up and | puts them away for a while. | 1 Spruce-Roots (2). — The woman takes her ax and her | clam-digging stick and her cedar-bark belt, and she carries them | while she is going into the woods, where she knows that small spruce-trees are growing and | where the soil is soft. When she comes to the place, 5 she puts down her ax || ami her digging-stick. She takes her cedarhark belt, and she | puts the corners of her blanket over her left shoulder, and she puts the cedar-bark \ bell around her waist over the blanket. She pins the blanket with a pin of | yew-wood shaved boas] industries 119

to asharp point, over her left shoulder. | After doing so, she takes her digging-stick, || puts one end into the ground, and pries up the roots; 10 and when | the roots come out of the ground, she picks out straight medium-sized roots ] without branches. She takes hold of them and pulls them out. | When she reaches the thick root from which it branches off, | she takes her small ax and chops it off. Then || she 15 goes back to the place where she started and takes hold again of the root and pulls it out | towards the thin end; and when she comes to the place where | it branches out, she takes her ax and cuts it off. Then | she coils it up. Some of the wood-digging women call this | qEsHd. Then she takes the thin || roots and ties them in four places, 20 in this way; ' and she continues | doing so while she is getting the roots. |

As soon as she has enough, she goes to a patch of young cedar-trees | and looks for good cedar-withes which are long, | without branches. || She cuts off those that are not twisted. When she thinks | she has cut 25 off enough, she ties them with twisted cedar- j withes in four different places, in this way.2 After | she has done so, she carries away what she has cut off, and she just stops | to pick up the roots which she has dug, and goes home. ||

i See figure on p. 111. !See figure on p. ll-).

1 Cedar- Withes. — After this is done, the man looks for long thin | cedarwithes in the woods. When he finds them, he takes them and | carries them home to his house. He puts one of them over | his lire; and when its bark is thoroughly warm, he takes his || tongs and puts 5 the thick end of the withes between them, and he bites it | and pulls at it while he squeezes together the legs of the | tong^ with his right hand. Then he strips the bark oif with the tongs. J When it is all off, he twists it; and after | twisting the whole length of it, he puts it into urine while it is folded and twisted into a piece || one span in length,

10 being twisted together | like a rope. When they are all done in this way, he puts all of them into urine ] and leaves them there over night. Then he takes them out, and the cedar-withes turn red | like blood. That is why they are put into | urine, that they may not get rotten quickly. ||

15 Cedar-Bark(l). — In the morning, when day comes, he goes, carrying | his bark-lifter; and when he comes to a place with many young cedartrees, | he searches for one that has no twist in the bark, and that is a good tree | without branches. Immediately he pulls off cedarwithes from | another young cedar-tree, and he twists them; and

20 after he has || twisted them from end to end, he puts them around the butt of the young cedar-tree ] about half way up to our chest, (half a fathom) | above the ground. He ties them on tightly and ties the ends together. | Now it is in this manner: After this he 23

takes the | bark-lifter and pushes its end (!1 in beneath the twisted withes || which are tied around the cedar-tree. 25

Then he lifts the bark off the tree. x^\y^v^ When | he is almost around the tree, all the ends of / '(rA^ the bark are torn | into strips up to the cedar-withes which are tied around the young cedar-tree, and for this reason | he put the cedarwithes around the young cedar-tree, so that the splitting of the ends does not pass it. j The torn shreds are all below the ring of cedarwithes, || for the women want the cedar-bark as broad as possible 30 when they peel it off. ] If they did not put the cedar-withes around the young cedar-tree, | the bark would come off in narrow strips, and therefore | they put the cedar-withes around it. Afterwards he takes the cedar-withes off. As soon as they | are "IT, he throws them away, and he takes hold of the bark and || puts the ends together 35 although they are split into shreds. Then he pulls | upward without splitting it. When it is whole, it measures | one hand and three finger-widths in width. When | he has pulled off the bark the length of one fathom, | he steps back one fathom from the place where he stood first, from the j| foot of the young cedar, and he pulls backward 40 as he pulls at the cedar-bark, | and he continues doing so. When he reaches | the branches, the far end of the bark that he is pulling off becomes narrow and breaks off; | and when it comes down, he turns it over so that it lies on its inner side, | with the sap side downward,

45 and he pulls off another piece || in the same manner, and the same width as the first one. He does | the same with that. As soon as everything has been taken off from the good side of the tree, | he stops. ... I

This is the size of a young cedar-tree. The bark of a young cedar-

50 tree is best | when it is two spans in diameter at the butt-end || and when the outside bark is mouldy color. Bark is good to be shredded | when it is black outside, because the bark is tough, when the bark of the young cedar-tree is shredded. | Mats and halibut fishing-lines made of the bark of | young cedar-trees last a long time. If the man takes cedar-bark from a | large cedar-tree, it is brittle, therefore

55 they do not use it. ||

When the bark-peeler has peeled off enough bark, he begins | to take off the outer bark of what he obtained, and he just takes the long strips | of what he has peeled off and he measures three spans. | Then he bends it over | so as to break the outer bark towards the

60 inside, || and he presses the pieces together on the inner side in this way.1 This is the place where | the outer bark splits from the inner bark, and the | bark-peeler lifts the broken end of the outer bark and | peels it off. When it is off, ho measures again the same |

i That is, he folds it over inward, so that tho outer bark breaks.

INDUSTRIES

length as before, and again bends it over and breaks || the outer bark; 65 and he lifts it up on each side where the outer bark | has been broken, and peels it off. He continues to do this, | beginning at the broad end of the bark and going towards the narrow end, so that | the broad end of the peeled bark conies from the lower end of the young cedars. | The narrow end comes from the top of the cedar-tree. After || he has peeled off the outer bark, he folds the cedar-bark in the 70 places where he broke it | when the outside had to be taken off, in this manner: ^- — =— .^ Then he folds it so that the | broad end is in the /(!53EB§jS middle of the bundle, and the narrow end | on the ^^ ~ -=^ outside ; and the narrow end is used to tie the bundle in the middle, in this way.1 When | it is all tied in the middle, he places the bundles one on top of another. || Then he 75 ties them at each end so as to make one bundle out of them, in this and after he has done so, he takes two twisted cedar-twigs | and ties the end of the end After this the pack- | of peeled it stands 80 his house. I

of them X^.

tyings, on each side in this way: has been done, he puts his arms through ing-straps on each side of the bundle cedar-bark, and || he carries it home. Now on end on his back as he is carrying it into Then he puts it down in the corner of the house, for he does not want | the heat of the fire to reach it, nor the light of the sun to touch

1 It is turned over the middle of the bundle, and the narrow eud is tucked under the turns that hold the bundle in the middle.

83 it when it is | not covered and before it is split. Then it gets dried | and stiff , and it is difficult for the women to split it || apart. |

85 As soon as the woman has given a meal to her husband, ] she takes her bark-splitter made of the fore-leg of a black bear or of a | deer. It has a flat end, for it is sharpened on a sandstone. She goes | and

90 sits down where the bundle is. She unties the || end straps, and she takes out one piece of what her husband has peeled off. | She unfolds it and at once covers the others with a mat. ] Then she takes her cedar-bark splitter and with it | she splits off the outer layer of bark, starting at the broad end. She splits it off and pulls it apart, | going

95 towards the thin end. When it is off, she uses the splitter || again to remove the middle layer. Then she also splits off down to the | narrow end, she splits the second middle layer, and | finally she splits off the inner side. As soon as everything is split off, | she hangs it up outside of the house, so that the wind may blow through it and the | sun get at it, and it gets dry quickly. After this has been 100 done, she goes back into || her house and takes another piece of bark, and she does | the same as she did with the first one when she spht it into four pieces. | Now, after it has been split into four pieces, it is called 3mas.

After it has been drying; for four days outside of the house, | it is quite dry and it is stiff. Then she || folds it in the same way as she 5 folded it when it was first folded by her | husband in the woods, and the broad end is folded first. | Then she ties the middle with the narrow end, and she puts the cedar-bark into a basket, | and she puts down the basket with cedar-bark on hanging-poles, so that | the heat of the fire just reaches it. || It never gets mouldy when it is 10 really dry. | If the cedar-bark were not thoroughly dry, it would become | mouldy at once, for nothing is like cedar-bark for getting mouldy when | it is damp, for it gets mouldy at once. Therefore it is dried for four || days in the wind and sun. Then it is put away, 15 and she works at it in winter. ]

Cedar-Mats. — The broad strips for matting are taken from the 1 outer layer of cedar-bark, ] which is split into strips two fingers wide | for being made into mats and coarse clover- | baskets and for protecting new canoes. The next one || is the middle layer of bark. 5 This is next best for narrow strips | for ordinary woven mats and ordinary baskets, ] and it is also good for halibut fishing-lines | and for anchor-lines for the halibut-fisher, j The inner part is also spht into very narrow strips for || twilled mats and for well-woven spoon- 10

12 baskets | and twilled baskets. None of tbe | double twilled baskets are found nowadays. In tbese the | daughters of the chiefs of the tribes kept their combs. The strong inner side | is the same as the

15 inner part, for it is good for everything. || They are both the same. You know already how the | woman measures the length of the cedarbark when making mats and baskets. | Now I have finished talking about it. |

Shredding Cedar-Bark. — Now I will talk about tbe making of soft |

20 cedar-bark. (The man) takes a small ax, for I || have finished talking about the bark-peeler which is used on ] young cedar-trees. He chops around the bottom of a young cedar-tree | with black bark. He uses the small ax for lifting the bark | from the tree at the bottom, and he does the same as he does when | he peels cedar-bark.

25 After peeling off || the rough outer bark, he also makes a bundle of it and | carries it on his back into the house. He puts it down by the side | of the fire of his house. Then his wife unties | the strings at the ends, and she takes up one of the pieces of bark for making soft bark and unfolds it. | She hangs it up back of the fire of the house, ||

30 and she does the same with all the others. Now they are | hanging there in order to get dry quickly, for they are very thick. | It takes six days before they get dry. As soon | as they have been hung up, the husband of the woman takes bone from | the nasal bones of the whale, and he takes a thin-edged rough || sandstone. (Here follows 35 a description of the manufacture of the | cedar-bark breaker, p. 109.) |

She takes an old yew-wood paddle and places it | edgewise on the fire of her house, When the edge is burned off | on one side, she sprinkles water on it, so that the fire goes out. || She takes a rough 40 sandstone, | puts it into water in a small dish, and rubs off | the charcoal and gives it a sharp edge on one side of the cedarbark n holder. | When this is done, it is in this way: | " S She also takes a punting-pole and measures off two spans. || Then she burns it off; and ] when it is burned 45 through, she drives it into the floor near the fire of her | house. She stops driving it into the ground when ] the length that is standing out is one span and two finger-widths. | Then she takes cedar-bark rope and the paddle, and she places || the flat end of the paddle next to 50

the top of the n stake, and she ties it on with | cedar r-^~ — -— ; — W rope; and when it is finished, it is tins way: | I N- " LL

When the cedar-bark holder is ready, and when | the cedar-bark is dry and brittle, the woman takes one of the | pieces of cedar-bark

55 and spreads it out just over the fire. || Then she takes a cedar-stick two spans in length | and of the thickness of our | first finger. She takes the narrow split cedar-bark and | ties it around one end of the stick. When this is done, she splits j one end like a pair of tongs,

0(1 and this is called || "cedar-bark holder." When the cedar-bark is | thoroughly heated, she puts it between these tongs, ] the broad end first. The holder is four — ^^^ finger-widths |

from the end, in this way: / J Thenthewoman takes | the shredding- s\ ,jjj | — ") implement.

She puts her right leg ^ ' I'l llr^^ over tne Srip

65 of the j| paddle and sits on it, so that the tip of the paddle is | between her legs. She takes her shredding-implement in her right hand and | holds the cedar-bark holding-tongs (in the left), and squeezes | them together so that the stick fits close to the cedar-bark. The | tied end is turned towards the woman who is going to soften it with the

70 shredding-implement. || The end of the cedar-bark just shows over the edge of the paddle when | she begins to shred it. Every time she strikes, she pushes the bark ahead a little, and she | keeps on doing

• so untd she reaches the narrow end. As soon as | she reaches the end, she coils it up, and she does the same with the other pieces. |

7.") When all have been finished, she opens them out and plucks off the || rough strips that are made in shredding; and when these are all off, |

she puts away in a small box what she has shredded off. This is 76 rubbed | and used for towels after washing the face. Then | she folds up the cedar-bark well and puts it into her box. | That is all about this. ||

Yellow Cedar- Bark. — The same is done with the yellow cedar-bark, | 1 which is peeled off in the same way as the red cedar-bark. It is also dried in the | sun and in the wind outside of the house. Sometimes | it takes six or eight days || to dry it so that it is thoroughly dry, 5 because it is quite thick. The outside bark is | hardly peeled off from it. When it is dried thoroughly, | the woman takes it down. |

She puts it into her small canoe, and she paddles to a place where there is | a deep bay and where it is always calm inside, so that waves never || get into it, and the salt water is always quite warm. She | 10 lands on the beach and puts the yellow cedar-bark into the water. | She places it down lengthwise at low-water mark and puts | stones on each end. | After this is done, she goes home. ||

Then her husband also goes to work and looks for | a whale-rib. 15 I do not know how he works it | when he is making the cedar-bark beater. |

When it has been finished, he gives it to his wife. After | the yellow cedar-bark has soaked for twelve days, the woman || goes 20

21 in her small canoe, carrying the bone beater and a flat | diabase pebble. |

When she comes to the place where she put her cedar-bark, she takes out the flat | stone and puts it down on the shore. | She takes her bone

25 bark-beater in her right hand and || takes hold of the end of the bark with her left hand, for the woman is sitting on the | right-hand side of the yellow cedar-bark, facing towards the sea. | She does not pull very fast when she is pulling it out of the water, and puts it over | the Hat diabase stone on which she beats it. | She first beats the broad

30 end of the cedar-bark; and when || she reaches the end, she coils it into her small canoe. As soon as | she has finished it, she goes to her home; and when she arrives | there, she carries the beaten yellow cedar-bark to a place outside of the house and hangs it up | on the halibut drying-poles. When evening comes, | she gathers the beaten

35 cedar-bark ami spreads a new mat over it, || so that it may not get damp again. After it has been drying for four days, | it is thoroughly dry. She folds it up and puts it away | in a basket. Now it is finished, for she works at it | in winter-time. | i Cedar-Bark (2) . — The woman goes into the woods to look for | young cedar-trees. As soon as she finds them, she picks out one that has no I twists in the bark, and whose bark is not thick. | She takes her hand-adz and . . . cuts the back of the bottom || of the young cedar. 5 She leaves a strip four | finger-widths wide, which she does not cut when she cuts around the tree, and | she peels off a strip two finger-widths wide. I This is what the women who get cedar-bark call "making a road," I for after that she peels off a broad strip which is to go high up. After she has taken off the || narrow strip which makes the road, 10 she begins to peel at the lower end, starting with her adz | at the place where she cut around. The broad piece is one | span wide. Then she peels it off, and | as it goes up high, she steps back from the | place where she stands; and if the young cedar-tree is smooth high up, she || goes far back. 15

While she is going backward, she holds slack the cedar-bark that she is peeling off, | when it falls back to where it was before. Then the woman who peels the cedar-bark pulls at it, | so that it comes off. What she is peeling off becomes narrower as it goes upward, | and it just runs into a point and breaks off when it reaches way up. | Immediately the woman puts it down on the ground, with the inner side downward, and the outer bark outside. || Then she peels off 20 other pieces as she did | the first one; and she stops peeling when a strip I four fingers wide is left on the cedar-tree. That is | what the people of olden times refer to as being left on the young cedar-tree, so that I it should not be without clothes and to keep it alive. ||

25 As soon as the woman has enough, she takes up at the broad end what she peeled off, | and she breaks off the outer bark | for'a distance four spans in length. She goes on peeling off the | outer bark towards the narrow end, and she continues doing this | until she

30 reaches the narrow end. When || the outer bark has been taken off, she folds it up, and she measures | a length of four spans. Then she folds it over. In folding it, she places the outer side outside. | She first folds the broad end; | and after she has gone the whole length, she ties the narrow end around it; | and she does the same with (lie

35 others which she has peeled off. As soon as all || have been tied in the middle, she takes a long narrow strip of cedar-bark and | puts it around each end, in this way.1 After she has done so, she takes | another piece of cedar-bark and puts it on as a packing-strap. The | two packing-straps are tied to the two end ropes; and she just measures it | until it is long enough when she puts her hands

40 through them when she puts it through, || carrying it on her back. After she has done so, she puts her hands through the | packingstraps and carries the bundle on her back. In her hands she carries the | adz, and she goes home to her house. | 1 Shredding Cedar-Bark.- — As soon as she has finished, she takes her cedar-bark | and hangs it over her fire. She takes her cedar-bark i See figure on p. 123.

» This follows a description of the preservation of elderberries, p. 262, line 55.

beater | and paddle, and she drives the longest one of her wedges into the floor. | Then she takes the cedar-bark and splits off a strip, fl She takes the paddle and places it alongside the wedge driven into 5 the floor, and she ties | them together with the split bark. After this is done, it is in this way.1 | After she has finished the holder for beating cedar-bark, she takes the cedar-bark beater and | puts it down where she is going to beat the bark. When | the cedar-bark gets black from the heat, she takes it down and puts it by her side. || Then she takes a cedar-stick one span | in length and splits off one 10 side | of the cedar-bark, and she ties one end of the stick at the bottom two finger-widths | from the end. When that | is done, she takes her straight knife and splits one end of the stick, || so that it is 15 like tongs. When she has done so, this is the holder | of the bark that she is going to shred, and it is like this (like a pair of tongs). When this | has been done, she takes the cedar-bark and coils it up, the narrow end on the | left-hand side of the paddle on which she is going to shred the cedar-bark. She puts the bark on | with the broad end. It is in this way.2 Now the || woman who shreds the 20 cedar-bark holds the place where the holder is tied up in her left | hand, and with the right hand she takes the cedar-bark beater. | She puts her left leg over the paddle and | sits down on it. The handle

' See figure on p. 127. 2 See figure on p. 128.

of the paddle shows at her hackside, and | the bark hardly shows on 25 the right-hand side of the paddle. Then || she begins to beat it, and she pushes it on with the left hand every time | she beats it; and she continues doing so untd she | reaches the end of the whole length of the cedar-bark. When she | reaches the end, she puts down the cedar-bark beater, takes the broad | end of the shredded cedar-bark, 30 and lays it down flat on her knee. She || keeps it in the same way as she had it placed over the paddle, and she peels off | what came off by beating it. It is all in strips; and when she has taken it off, | she pulls it off, and she continues plucking off what is on the shredded cedar-bark; and when | she has plucked it off along the whole length, she splits it into strips one | finger wide.1 1 Open- Work Basket. — She takes split cedar- withes and | picks out four back pieces of the split cedar-withes. These | are to be the corners of the flat-bottomed basket (the four pieces). Then | she takes another one different from the four pieces, which is to form the 5 stiff || bottom of the flat-bottomed basket. Then she takes thin split cedar-withes and puts | them into the bottom, and she takes split roots and | ties them together /////* vnth them. Now it is tied crosswise in this way, | ///////// » || being placed and tied close together. The ^wnltlixz length of the bot- 10 torn is | two spans and four \\\V\ finger-widths ; || that is, where the corner withes are «"* tied in. | As soon

'See Doghair, p. 1317.

as she finishes tying the flat | bottom, she takes the material for 12 twining round the flat-bottomed basket and she puts it | on the corners, which are bent upward. | The twining consists of split roots, and the crosspieces consist of split cedar-withes. || She ties the 15 basket with the best quality | of thin roots. She twines it on as she is tying it on with | the root twining, and the sides of the basket stand up and down. | This is called the "standing side of the flat-bottomed basket." | Other basket-makers call it "standing up straight." She || continues doing this, moving upward until the basket is one span 20 high. | As soon as it is one | span high, she takes thick | split root and bends the tops of the warp-strands. | When all the warp-strands of the sides are bent over, || she ties them into a round coil around 25 the mouth of the flat-bottomed basket. | This is called "the tying at the mouth of the flat-bottomed basket" | (what she is tying now). As soon as this is finished, she takes the narrow split cedar-bark | and makes a rope, which she puts on each side of the flat-bottomed basket at | the middle, lengthways. This is called the "carrying-rope of the || flat-bottomed basket." Some basket-makers call it | "piece 30 for tying on cross-straps." Now the | flat-bottomed clover-basket is finished. I

1 Cedar-Bark Basket (1) . — Now the flat-bottomed basket is finished. | Then the woman takes cedar-bark and puts it down at the place where she is seated, | not far from the fire of the house, so that the | heat of the fire just strikes it. She measures the cedar-bark with her hand || 5 and cuts oft* a length of five spans | with her fish-knife. When the cedar-bark has been cut, | she splits it so that it is one | finger-width

| This will be the soon as all II the wide in the middle, in this manner:

10 bottom of thecinquefoil-basket. As cedar-bark has been split in the middle, the woman who makes the basket takes cedar-sticks | and splits them in square pieces half the thickness of the | little finger, and she measures them so that each is two spans | long. Then she breaks them oft. | When this has been

15 done, she takes a narrow strip of || split cedar-bark, and she takes the two | cedar-sticks that have been measured and places them together crosswise, in tins way: J Then she | ties them together with the narrow split cedar- hark. As soon as this has been finished, she | takes f another one of the cedar-sticks that have been measured and puts it | on the other end of those that have

20 been tied together, and she 4 ties it on with narrow || split cedar-bark, in this maimer: After this has been done, she |

takes up another one of «| the cedar-sticks that have been measured, and she puts it | on the ends of the two sticks, and she ties

INDUSTKIES

it to both ends. | She just ties it on with narrow split cedar-bark. 23 Now | it is this way, a « and it is the stiff bottom of the cloverbasket, for || that is If what the cedar-sticks tied together 25

are called. Therefore fl=== , au fcne I clover-baskets are of the same size when they =^ are made by the basket-makers. One is neither | bigger nor smaller than another, for the bottoms are measured. | When this is done, the woman takes the cedarbark that has been split | and measured splits it again clown to one end,|| in this manner: takes the stiff bottom and places middle of the cedar-bark, in this way : weaves it like a mat in | coarse it is of the Now it and it is off, and she Then she 30 it | on the and she we aving, ame size as | the stiff woven in this into narrow strips, starting from stiff bottom, in this way: split it, she takes a long strip of cedar-bark, puts the end ners of the stiff bottom into the of the basket, and she ties the called | "the bottom in broad strips;" namely, the bottom woven cedar-bark. When the stiff bottom has 35 covered, | the woman sphts the cedar-bark the edge of the After | she has narrow split | through the cor- || woven bottom 40 I two ends to the

42 corners of the flat bottom, in this way: strips of spht cedar-bark to they cross, in this manner:

| Then she ties on the center, | where

As soon as this is done, | she hangs the strings (ffn'i'i'y tQat she has tied to it to a

45 pole in the corner of the || house, and she measures the height so that she may sit by its side when she is weaving it; and | she ties the cedar-bark strings to the pole, and now it is | in this way.1 As soon as this is done, she takas long, split, [ narrow cedar-bark, which is called "woof." It is as wide as

50 this.2 And she begins | weaving at the corner of her basket || and weaves around it. After she has gone around once, she | adds on another strip and continues weaving. Now there are two woofstrands. | After she has gone around once, she puts on another one and weaves it in; | and after she has gone around once, she adds on still another one | to weave with. Now there are four of them.

55 Now she weaves around ; || and as soon as she has the size that she wants for the height of the cinquefoil-basket, | she twists in the warpstrands. When this has been finished, she continues [ making baskets, for sometimes she needs as many as ten baskets if she has a large j cinquefoil-garden. | 1 Basket for Viburnum-Berries. — You know already all the ways of working | roots and cedar-withes: therefore I will | talk about the way in i See last figure. 2 About 6 mm. wide.

INDUSTRIES

which the woman makes the basket | for viburnum-berries. It is made differently from other baskets. The weaving || is done in the same 5 way. The only thing that is different is that the sides are straight up and down, | and the bottom is flat. It is measured so as to fit into the | box for steaming viburnum-berries. The bottom is bent square, in this way side. It is one long short side. two fingers | loosely into four || spans

| There are two handles to it, one on each two spans high, and || two spans long, and 10 span and one short span | is the length of its The box for cooking viburnum-berries is wider than this size, so that the basket fits the box when it is put in. The box is high. As soon as | the cooking-basket for 15 viburnum-berries has been finished, it is put down at a damp place, so that | the weaving may not get loose, for it is not well woven . |

Basket for Wild Carrots. — The wife makes a | cedar-bark basket. You know already about the making of || baskets, for it is the same 20 as the cinquefoil-basket. The only | difference is that it is shallower than the cinquefoil-basket. | The basket for carrots is made of broad strips. |

Cedar- Bark Basket (2). — You know already | how baskets are made, i The only difference in the basket for | lily bidbs is that it is woven flat and low, for its length | and breadth are two spans each and it is 5 one |! span high. It has | no holes along the rim for lashing, as the other baskets have, | for lashing them when they are being tied up.

The baskets for lily-bulbs have the tops of the sides bent backward. |

Tli at is all about this. |

Huckleberry- Basket. — As soon as this is done, she begins to make the 10 basket || for shaking the huckleberries into; hut I will not | talk about the making of the basket, for the only thing that is different about the huckleberry-basket | is that it has a wide mouth and low sides and narrow ^ra^wttwjftfc. bottom, | and that it is very finely made in this way: jfflBnn^ffi!ffl| When | this is finished, she makes another 15 smaller bas- v^ffSSuuW|W» ket of medium size. [| It is made in the same way as ,™ssitti£gip!JPr the large | swallowing-basket. |

Box for picking Salmon- Berries. — Let me for a while talk about what the hooked box for picking salmon-berries is, | and what its sizes are. It is just this. The box is made of the best kind of cedar- 20 wood, and || the hooked box is well made. It is | made as light as possible, and it is made in the same way | as they make the oil-box; and these are its sizes. It is | one span and a short span high, and 25 is | one span and four fingers long, || and one span wide. | It has the thickness of one-half of the tip of the little finger, ] and it is well made. 27 It is grooved all over with fine grooves, in this manner.1 | When it is done, the wife of the box-maker takes the very best | cedar-bark to make a packing-strap. The cedar-bark is split || into very narrow 30 strips, and each end is twisted to a rope. In the middle it is woven like a mat, | in this way: As soon as the forehead-strap is twists a small cedar-bark when she thinks | it is long enough for being tied around the hooked box, she stops | twisting rope. She takes the hooked box, turns it around, and half way up its height || bark around it as tightly as possible, four times, | and she ties the end to she has done so, she cuts off the cedar- Then she takes the part that she has she winds the cedar- 35 She puts it around 2 (1) and (2). After | bark rope | at (3). cut off and makes a loop underneath, passing over the bottom board, brings it up, and takes a turn | at (4). She puts it around four times. Then she ties the end at || (4). As soon as this is done, she takes the 40 packing-strap which passes around her forehead, and | puts it on with two half -hitches at the end at (1) and also at (2). | That is the carrying-strap for the hooked box. That is all about this. ||

Tump-Line. — As soon as the basket has been finished, | she takes 1 cedar-bark and measures off one long fathom ] and two spans for | its

1 See figure below.

5 length. Then she takes the straight knife and || cuts it off, and she puts the bark into water to get soaked. | She does not leave it there long before taking it out. Then she | splits it into narrow strips ; and after it has been split, | she twists it into a rope three | spans long; and then she continues plaiting it like a mat, beginning with the rope

1 0 that she has twisted. || This plaiting is three spans long, and serves as a strap over the forehead for carrying the basket. | When she reaches the end, she twists it again, beginning at the end of the | matting, and the twisted rope is also three spans long. | After it is fin- ished, | it is in this way.1 This is called the "forehead-strap," and is

15 tied || to the opening of the huckleberry-basket which she has made. |

Back- Protector. — After she has finished all the baskets, |she quickly splits cedar-bark live spans in length; | and when she thinks she has enough, | she takes some narrow split cedar-bark and she weaves the

20 middle || together in this manner, . — -, so as to keep the strands close together. This is two - - T— =, spans | in width.

As soon as this has been finished, | A she hangs it over the mat-stick, and she sits down at the place | where hangs the cedarbark that she is going to weave, and she begins weaving in the middle. | When she reaches the end, she puts in the selvage; and

1 See figure on p. 141.

after || she has finished weaving it, she turns over what she is weaving, 25 and she again starts from | the middle and weaves downward; and when she gets to the end, j she puts in the selvage. After this has been done, | she takes it down, takes her fish-knife, and cuts off the rough ends | that are sticking out. When she has cut them off all around the || selvage, the back-protecting mat for digging clover is 30 done. |

Belt. — She also splits cedar-bark into narrow strips of the same 1 width as the one she used | when splitting bark for the back-protector for digging clover. | This is the width.1 She weaves it so that it is three fingers | wide and one fathom long. || When she comes near the 5 end, she lets it | taper; and when it is one fathom | long, the end is narrow; and she twists a rope out of the same bark that she used | for weaving; and when the rope is also one | fathom long, she ties a knot at the end || so that it will not untwist. Now the cedar-bark 10 belt is | two fathoms long. She uses it when she goes to dig clover. |

Implement for peeling Cedar-Bark. — When (a person) gets ready to go | to peel off cedar-bark in the woods, he takes | his small ax, and he takes a branch of pine, fiat at one end, four || spans long, and 15 two finger-widths | in diameter. He also takes aflat, | rough sand-

■ About 6 mm.

18 stone and places it by the side of the | fire of his house. He puts the end of the pine-branch | into the fire; and when it is burnt, he takes

20 it || by the big end and puts the burnt end on the rough sandstone, |

and he rubs it on it so that one end of it will become fiat, and it is bent | in this manner: "^ When this is done, he does the same to the | other side. Then the end is Hat; and he rubs the corners off, | so that the point is rounded, like this : s As

25 soon as the point is really sharp, || he takes tallow of J the mountain-goat and chews it; | and he takes the bark-lifter wit li which lie is going to peel the cedar-bark, and puts the [ flat end into the fire of his house. When it gets quite | hot, he puts the chewed tallow on both sides of | the flat end. He keeps on turning the bark-lifter while the ||

30 tallow is melting, so that it spreads over both sides. Then he | puts it up near the fire so as to let the tallow soak in. When | it almost catches fire, he stops heating it. Then he puts it down | in the corner of his house so as to let it cool quickly; | and when it is cool, it is hard.

35 After that it is ready. || This is the bark-lifter of the first people when they went to peel red cedar-bark | and yellow cedar-bark, of which they made blankets before the white men ca | in early days. |

1 Spade. — Her husband makes the spade for digging lily-bulbs. | It is also chopped out of yew-wood. When he goes into the woods and | he finds (yew trees), he chops down one that is two | spans in diameter. When the tree falls, he measures off || two spans and chops it off with 5 bis | ax. After he has done so, he splits it through the heart. | He takes the side without branches | and chops off all the heart-wood so that it comes off and so that | it is flat. After he has done this, he chops the other side so || that it is two spans thick, and | he chops it 10 well until it is smooth and of the same thickness. After | doing so, he measures one short span V^. a and | chops it so that it is in this way: I s 1 3 and he chops the top I so that it has a crosspiece on it. After finishing one edge, || 15 lie does the same with the other edge. Now the end, [ beginning at the. bottom (1) is square. This is the digging-point, which extends to (2), I the middle handle, and towards (3), the crosspiece on top. After doing so, | he carries it in his hands as he goes home. He puts it down and | takes a piece of fire-wood, on which he adzes it. He takes his adz || and takes hold of the spade for lily-bulbs. With his | 20 left hand he holds it by the point, and he places the crosspiece (3) | on the fire-wood. In his right hand he takes the adz, and | he first adzes down at the middle handle (2), which he makes round. | When it is round, he turns the end so that the point (1) || stands on the 25

25 fire-wood, and he adzes it so that the r — -. point becomes tliin | like an adz, in this manner:1 As soon as this is done, he takes | his crooked knife and shaves it off so as to make it smooth. Now | the digging-point is sharp; and he smooths the en isspiece on top | by shaving it. As soon as he has done so, he hard-

30 ens it by means of tallow. || You know the way it is done with the digging-stick for clover when it is heated | by the fire and rubbed with taUow to make the point brittle. | He does it in the same way when he is making the spade for lily-bulbs | when he is hardening the point of the spade that he is making. | 1 Digging- Stick for Clover. — First | this is searched for by the man. He takes his ax to go into the woods | to look for a yew-tree without branches. As soon as he finds one, he | cuts down the thick yew-tree 5 that has no branches. || When it falls down, he measures | five spans and | four finger-widths, nearly six spans, | then he cuts it off; and when it has been cut off, he splits it in two | through the heart.

10 When it has been split in two, he splits one side || again in two through the heart ; and when this has been split, | it is triangular (in cross-section). He measures two spans j and four finger-widths | fourspans, and cuts a notch into it, so thai it is in size three | spans in this manner, 6 at(l). When ||

this is done, he chops 4(^~ 1^~7 3 ^) at (2) so that it 15

is three spans | from * 5 (1) to the end at

(4). I When it is squared, starting from (1), he chops out the heart | so that it all comes off ; and when it is all off, he chops the one side | so it is flat (3). When it is finished, he lays it down flat j| and he 20 chops (6) and (5) so that they are this way: ______-^-r^-!— When that it is pointed and so that it | hends back. Now it is one hand wide at (7), and it is four | finger-widths under each side of (7).| When this is done, | he carries it on his shoulders and goes home. Then he k^y puts it down and || takes 25

his adz. ^(^^^ First he measures |

the grip , ? ^^^ at (5). Its length is one with his 2 adz, so that the handle of the digging-stick (6) | is two fingers thick; and he does the same at (4) , so that the grip is one | hand-width in length. When this is done, || he adzes (6) so that it is round; and after he has done 30 so, I he adzes the back (3), going to the hard point (1) of the | digging-stick. When this is done, he adzes the belly (2), | going towards the hard point of the digging-stick (1); and when this is done, I he takes his crooked knife and straight knife and cuts a

35 notch || at (7) with the straight knife, and he shaves it off so that it is hollow in the middle, | in this way: i^^^ anc^ ne ^oes tne same at (5). j After this has been zJ^t done, he takes the crooked knife and shaves off | the whole diggingstick smoothly. When it has all been shaved off, | he puts it over the

40 fire of his house to dry, || and it stays there four days drying. When it is dry, he takes | perch-oil and poms it into a large | clam-shell. Then he takes tallow, which he puts down | by the side of the fire of his house; and he takes down his | digging-stick and heats the ends

45 over the fire of his house. When || it is burnt black, he takes the tallow and rubs it | on the end of the digging-stick. When this is done, he heats it again | over the fire, and he only stops heating it when it is scorched at the point | and when the tallow begins to boil as it is melt-

50 ing. Then | ho takes also the perch-oil which he put into the large clam-shell, || and he takes rubbed shredded cedar-bark, pul s it into the | perch-oil and rubs it on the digging-stick. When it is rubbed all over | and oiled with perch-oil, he heats t he digging-stick over the fire of his | house; and when it is really hot, he again takes the | shredded cedar-

55 bark, puts it into perch-oil, and rubs it |j on the hot digging-stick. When it is rubbed all over, | he stands it upright in the cool corner of the house. Then the | digging-stick for digging clover is finished.

Digging-Stick for Roots. — First the man makes j a digging-stick of 1 yew-wood for digging carrots. When it is nearly | spring, and the plants begin to have buds, the man j takes his ax and goes into the woods to look for a yew-tree. When || he finds one, he picks out a 5 good branch wit limit knots, which is | bent and about two fingerwidths thick. [ He chops it off close to the trunk: and when it is off, | he measures off three spans and chops it off. | Then he chops off the end so that it is flat , and [[ it is like the stick for peeling off hemlock- 10 bark. After chopping it, he | goes home to his house. He carries it along. When | he arrives at his house, he puts down what is to be the digging-stick for digging carrots. He takes his | crooked knife and his straight knife and takes what is to be the digging-stick | for carrots and sits down. First the || bark of the yew- wood digging- 15 stick for carrots is shaved off with a straight knife. \ When it is all off, he shaves off the sap. so that it is [ all off; and when it is all off, he puts down his straighl j knife, takes his crooked knife, and shaves | the digging-stick that is being made. He shaves it well, [[ so that it ''() is smooth; and when it is smooth, j he shaves off the end so that it is flat, and he also makes it smooth and | a 4*^a^^-)3 n^-tle bent. There is a knob at the other end, in this way: x ] When the digging-stick for carrots (some | Indians call it rock carrot) is

25 finished, lie puts it down by the fire of the house || so that the heat will strike its back; and when it begins to smoke, he | turns it over so that the inner side (2) is towards the fire; and when this | also begins to smoke, he takes deer-tallow and rubs it on | all over the stick and the knob (3). The name of | this knob is "top

30 handle." Then he puts it down again by the side of the fire, || and turns it over so that the melting tallow will soak into | the digging-stick. When it nearly catches fire on account of the heat, | he wraps soft cedar-bark around his hand, takes hold of | the handle at the end of the digging-stick, and pushes the flat digging-point | (4) into the hot

35 ashes. He watches it; and || when the hot ashes seems to boil up, he knows | that the point of the digging-stick is burnt black. | Then he takes the top handle of the digging-stick | and pushes it into the tallow; and when it has been there long enough, he | heats the point

40 of the digging-stick again. When the melted || tallow at the end begins to bod, he dips it into cold | water and takes it out again. Now it is brittle. | Now the digging-stick for carrots is finished. | 1 Digging-Stick for Cryptochiton. — First the man goes | into the woods to get a branch of yew-wood. When he finds | a curved branch, lie chops it off. When it is off, | he measures off two spans. Then he cuts it off, ||.and he chops the end until it is flat on one side. It 5 is two finger-widths | in thickness. After chopping | the ends, he goes home, carrying the chiton digging-stick in his hands. | He goes into his house, takes his knife, | and cuts off the bark and the sap; and when || it is all off, he cuts the end so that it may be flat and 10 thin and | smooth, and it also has a round point, in this way.1 Now the digging-stick for cryptochitons is finished. [ He takes deer-tallow and | puts it down „close to the fire. Then he takes the diggingstick for cryptochitons and | pushes the flat end into the ashes where it is not very hot. || He watches it; and as soon as it begins to 15 burn, he rubs the tallow | on both sides, and he keeps it a while. Then he puts | the flat end back into the hot ashes; and he does not keep it there long | before he takes it out and rubs more tallow on both sides, | and he heats it by the fire of his house. When || it is 20 nearly burning, he puts it down in the corner of the house, so that it cools off quickly; | and as soon as it gets cold, the point is brittle. | Hook for Devil-Fish(l). — When the devil-fish hunter gets ready | to get devil-fish, he first goes to get a long thin | young hemlock-tree. After he finds it, he cuts it down, so that || it falls down. He cuts off the 25 branches and measures a piece two | fathoms long. Then he cuts off

1 Sea figure on p. 144.

27 the bark; | and when it is all off, he sharpens the thick end. | He measures four finger-widths from the | thick end and cuts in

30 a notch in this manner: -«__ -__^ Then he || cuts a piece of hemlock-wood four fingers long, | in this shape: ^^- — -^^ After ~~~~~J ' this is done, | he takes spruce- "~~ root and splits it, and he takes | the hook of the devil-fish spear and fits into the notch of the devil-fish spear, | and

When Wfo^ he has finished, || it is like

;55 this: '^"fta, Then he sharpens the thin

1 Hook for Devil- Fish (2). - -Now I have finished talking about him j who makes the kelp fishing-line. Now I shall talk about him who goes to get | devil-fish to put od his line. First he has to take his | straight-edged knife, which he takes when he goes into the woods to 5 look for a slim hemlock-tree. j| As soon as he has found one, he cuts it down, so that it falls | on the ground. He cuts off the branches. After he has cut off the | branches, he cuts the top oil'. Sometimes | it is two fathoms, sometimes three fathoms long. Finally he cuts off the |

10 bark, until it is white, and he cuts off || the top until it is sharp. He does not sharpen the butt-end of the | pole for fishing devil-fish. As soon as he has finished the long pole for fishing devil-fish, | he looks for a stick smaller than the first one, which is the size of a | short span 13 when the ringers are put around the butt-end of the | long pole for fishing devil-fish.1 The one for which he is looking must be small. |[ As soon as he finds it, he begins to cut it down with his straight- 15 edged knife. | Then he does the same as he did with the former one; | only this is different, that the two ends are sharp, | and that it is shorter than the one he first made, for it is only a | fathom and a half long. There is also a honk made of the concave side of || hemlock 20 on it. After he has shaved off | with his straight-edged knife, the butt-end of the pole for fishing devil-fish he cuts a notch three | fingerwidths long, made in this way;2 and as soon as j the notch is deep enough, he takes the brittle convex side of the hemlock- | tree and cuts it until its butt-end is sharpened. || He measures four finger- 25 widths | and cuts it off so that it is | flat on one side. After he has cut it, he takes | spruce-root, splits it, and scrapes off the bark | and the juice; and when it is done, he takes the pole || for fishing devil-fish, 30 puts the short end into the notched-end of the | pole for fishing devilfish, and ties it on with the split root. | Now it looks | like tins.3 Now there is a hook at the end of the pole for fishing devil-fish. | This

1 That is, one short span circumference at the butt-end.

• See figure 1 on p. 152. 3 See figure 4 on p. 152.

is used to catch devil-fish when its hole is dry | at low tide. Now its 35 name is "pole for pulling," || and the name of the long pole is "implement for pulling out at half tide | from the hole under water when the tide is not out far." | There is no hook at the end of the long pole | for fishing devil-fish. | 1 Spear for Sea-Eggs. — First there is taken by the man a thin | young hemlock-tree in the woods. When he finds one that is clear of branches and long, | he cuts it clown with a knife, so that it falls; and j when it falls, he measures off three and a half fathoms in length. || 5 Then he cuts off the top. He cuts off the bark | and the sap. He tries to make it one and a half | finger-widths in thickness. After this has been done, | he takes thin yew -wood branches for prongs. He measures the prongs to be | two spans and four finger-widths in 10 length. || These are to be at the end of the sea-egg spear. | He cuts off the ends so that they are sharp-pointed, and he also cuts off | the lower end so that it is fiat. When this is done, he digs out | the roots of a spruce-tree and splits t hem in two. | Then he peels off the 15 bark; and when this is done, he cuts || the butt-end of the spearshaft until it is square. | Then he takes the prongs and lays the flat ends against | the square end of the spear-shaft, and he ties them on | ^^ with the split spruce-root, so that it is in this m ay :

Hook for picking Elderberries. — Those who pick elderberries first go | 1 to make a hook of a small hemlock-branch of | the size of our firstfinger and one fathom in length. | The woman shaves off the bark until it is smooth; || and after this is done, she takes a piece of the same 5 hemlock-tree, | which is thinner and is to form the hook. She | shaves off the bark of this also, and it is one | span long. Then she cuts it off | and measures two finger-widths from the || end. There 10

she cuts a notch which goes half way through | the thickness of the pole. It is in this way: After | this is done, she does the same thing with the piece that is to form the hook; and when | the notch is also cut in one-half the thickness of the piece that is to form the hook, | she takes split spruce-root, puts it into water, || 15 and soaks it. After it has been soaked, she takes the piece that is to be the hook at the end | and puts the two notches together. She | takes up the soaked split root and ties the // two pieces together.

When | it is finished, it is this way: j //

Pole for gathering Eel-Grass. — First the man || goes to look in the 20 woods for a bent young hemlock-tree; and when | he finds one, he cuts it at the bottom with his adz; and when | it falls, he measures off two fathoms and a half. | Then he cuts off the top. At the top it

25 is two | finger-widths thick. Then he takes his straight || knife and cuts off the bark and the sap. \ When they are all off, it is a fingerwidth and a half thick | at the thin end, and it is hardly thicker at the | other end. Tin- tip is more curved than the | butt. At each

30 end there is a knob. || When it is finished, he goes home carrying it; and as soon as he enters | his house, he puts down the twisting-stick by the side of the fire. | Then he takes deer-tallow and puts it down where he is working at the | twisting-stick. Then he takes the twisting-stick and pushes it to and fro over the | fire. He pushes it

35 to and fro until the whole stick gets warm; || and when it is very hot, he takes the | tallow and rubs it over the twisting-stick. As soon as it is | all covered with tallow, he pushes it to and fro over the fire; | and when the tallow nearly catches fire, then he rubs on | some more

40 tallow; and when it is covered with tallow, || he puts it down in the corner of the house, where it cools off quickly. | He wishes it to he brittle and stiff. Therefore he does so | with the tallow. As soon as it gets cold, he takes soft cedar-bark | and the twisting-stick, and wipes it off with the soft shredded cedar-bark, | so that all the tallow

45 comes off from the surface. When it is all off, it is finished. || That is all about this. I

Flounder-Spear. — The first thing to be done by the | flounder- 1 fisherman is to get a spear-shaft for flounder-fishing. He [ has to get tough wood for the prongs. It is split in two | in this manner.1 It is split through the heart, and cut at the ends || which are made 5 sharp. When this has been done, he takes bird-cherry bark and the | shaft, and he so cuts the sides that they are flat, | and he also cuts one side of the prongs so that they will fit | on the end of the shaft. When he has finished this, he takes the | bird-cherry bark and ties it to the prongs and the shaft. || He ties it very tightly. When it is 10 done, I it is like this: Now the flounder-spear

Fishing- Tackle for Flounders. — When a man goes to catch many | flounders, he takes the leg-bone of a deer which is | thoroughly dry, so that it is white, and he breaks it up || lengthwise into slender pieces. As 1 5 soon as it is broken up, he measures off | pieces two finger-widths long, and breaks them off | at the end, so that they are all the same length. When this has been done, | he takes a flat, rough sandstone. He | also takes a dish and pours water into it until it is half full. || Then 20 he puts the sandstone into it; and he takes [ one of the thin bones, dips it into the water, and | puts one end against the sandstone and

1 It is cut through the center lengthwise.

23 rubs it | until it is sharp-pointed, and he does the same with the other end. As | soon as it is sharp-pointed, he rubs the middle part

25 so that it is round; and when || it is round, it is done. He does this with all of them. | When he has finished fifty, he puts them away, for that | is the number of bones for the flounder fishing-line. Then he takes | hair and twists a length of two | spans; that is, hair of women.

30 And when he has || enough of these, the same number as the polished bones, then he puts them away. He takes | cedar-bark and gives it to his wife, and she goes at once | and puts it into the water to soak. After it has been there for one night, | the woman takes out the cedarbark and splits it into | long, narrow strips, and she twists it until

35 it is moderately thick. || When it is forty fathoms long, it is finished. ] Then (the man) stretches it outside of the house | tightly, so that it is stretched (taut). It remains there for four days. | Then he takes down the twisted cedar-bark fishing-line | and coils it up and puts it

40 down in his house, and then || he takes dried back-sinew of the deer and shreds it, and | twists it until it is like thread. As soon as hi' has j twisted much of it, he takes the round bones and the twisted- 1 hair thread and ties one end of / the twisted hair to the

45 round bone, j He ties the hair || to f the crosspiece a little beyond the middle, in this way: Vr- He does this with all of them; | and when they are finished, he gathers | up the ends of the hair 45 threads and ties them with twisted sinew, | so that they are all gathered together, and he hangs them up in the corner of his house. The | round cross-bones are hanging downward. ||

Fish-Trap for Perch. — First the man takes | cedar-bark and soaks it in 1 the river. Then he goes into the woods | carrying his hand-adz ; and when he comes to a place where there are | many straight young hemlock-trees, he cuts the tall || slender trees which are a little over four 5 finger- widths in diameter. | As soon as the tree falls down, he measures off four spans. | Then he cuts it off. That is the measure | which he uses in cutting off twenty-four pieces of the same length; | and he cuts off twenty of them four || linger- widths thick, longer than the first 10 ones. I After he has done so, lie measures a length of two | spans and cuts it off. He cuts sixteen | of this length. After he has done so, | he measures them three spans || long and cuts them off. There are 15 twelve of these all of the same | length. After he has done so, he sharpens the points of the twelve. | These will be the posts for the perch-trap at one end. | And he also sharpens the sixteen | short ones which are two spans in length. || These will be the entrance. And 20

21 when it is all done, he takes roots | and ties them together in the middle. He puts them together and carries them | home to his house. When the tide is half down, | he takes his stone hammer and cedarhark that he had soaked in the river and | carries the posts for the

25 trap down to the beach, and he || puts them down where the beach is not very steep and where it is sandy. He | unties the roots in tbe middle of the bundle, and he first takes out one | of the pieces four spans in length | for a measure, and he lays it down and he marks along it | in this manner.1 Then he takes it up and lays it down at one end of

30 the || line, in this maimer,1 and he marks along it. He takes it up again | and lays it down on the other end of the first line, in this manner,1 and he | marks along it. After he has done so, he takes up two pieces | two spans in length, and he | puts them down on each side of what has been marked, in this way,

35 and he || marks along them. As soon as this is done, lie takes his stone hammer | and one of the posts three spans in length, | and he drives it in at (1); and \aJ^ N"SW when | one span and a half shows, | then he takes w"^ (j

40 another one and drives it in at (2). When || the top is level with the first one, he drives another one in | at (3), and other ones at from

1 See outliues of cut on this page.

(4) to (11). | The last one he drives in at (12). | These are the posts 42 of the perch-trap. As soon as | this is done, he takes the soaked cedar-bark, splits it into long strips, || and, when it is all split, he 45 takes up | one piece of the stops four spans in length | and lays it down at the outer side of the back of the perch- | trap, close to the posts. Then he ties it with cedar-bark | to the posts, and he ties it together with the back; for he first ties it to || posts (l)-(4), which are 50 the back-stop. As soon as this is done, he takes | another one of the same length and lays it down on top | of what he has already tied on the back-stop at post (4), and he ties it on to | the hack-stop and the side-stop, and he ties the side-stops on to posts | (5), (6), and (7). When this is done, || he takes another one of the same length and lays 55 it down on the | upper side of the side-stop at post (1). He ties it on, and | ties the side-stop to posts (12), (11), and (10). When this is done, he takes one of the pieces two spans in length, | with sharp point towards (9), and || he places the thick end under the side-stop 60 at (10). | Then he ties together the entrance and the side-stop at (10), and he ties the entrance to | (9), and he does the same with (7) and (8). When | this is done, he takes another one of the four- | span sticks and places it over the || side-stops, and he ties it together 65

[ETH. ANN. 36

66 at (1), (2), (3), and | (4). When this is done, he takes another one of the same | length and lays it on top of the back-stop, and he | ties it at (1), (12), (11), and (10), and he does the same | with the other

70 side at the entrance. As soon as there are eight || rows, it is finished. Then he takes pieces four spans and | four finger-widths in length and puts them down, and he | takes up another one and lays it on it, in this manner: and he places the he also ties them 75 takes up another width | apart

He | ties them together at (1), other ones on (2) and (3), and | at (4). When this is done he one || and places it one fingerfrom the first one and ties it on at both ends; and | he continues tying on all the others, going towards (4) and (3). As | soon as it is all covered, it is like this. When it is finished, he | goes up from the beach and

80 breaks off hemlock-branches in the woods. He || carries them down to where he is making the perch-trap and puts them down, and he goes up again and takes small : clams, which he gets for bait | for his fish-trap. He carries them down and breaks the shells of the clams | and scatters them in the trap. As soon as this is done, he puts | the cover over the trap.

85 He puts hemlock-branches on top of it, so that || it is dark inside, and he places four large stones | on top of the hemlock-branches to keep it under water. Then it is done. |

Net for Sea-Eggs. — You know already how nettle-bark | is cleaned 1 and what is done with it. When it is put | on the netting-needle, they take the netting-measure, which is half a finger wide | and four finger-widths || long, and they net on it. | After they have netted 5 three spans in length, the ends are netted together. Thus | the mouth is three spans around, and they net downward; | and as soon as it is two spans long, | they net the bottom together. Then the scrapingnet for flat sea-eggs is like a basket. || It is this way: -smg^ After he 10 has finished netting it, | he takes his ax and gnes fjgSSJj UI,(I the woods looking for the root of yellow-cedar; | and tttHBfl when he finds a yellow-cedar tree, he digs out a root §B' which is | moderately thick, and he measures five spans | and then cuts it off. He splits it through the || heart; and when it is in two parts, he chops | 15 off the heart on one side so that it all comes off, and he chops off the | sap. Then he tries to make it half a finger | thick; and he chops off the two edges, so that it is two finger-widths wide, | its whole length from end to end. || After finishing it, he carries it out of the woods and 20 takes it into his house; | and he puts it down on the floor, and he takes his crooked knife, | sits down, and takes the yellow-cedar wood and he shaves | the two edges straight; and after doing so, | he shaves off

25 the one flat side so that it is smooth. After doing so, he || turns it over and shaves off the other side until it has a thin edge, | and it is half a finger thick. | After doing so, he takes a basket, goes to the beach, | picks up stones, which he puts into the basket. | When he

30 has enough, he carries them on his back into his || house and puts them down by the side of the fire. | He puts the stones on the fire, and he takes the basket and he | goes down again to the beach and plucks off dulce; | and when his basket is full, he carries it up the beach | into

35 his house, and he puts it down on the floor. || Then he digs a hole by the side of the fire of the same length | as the stick of yellow cedar which is to be steamed to make a hoop for the scraping-net. One | span is the width of the hole that he is digging, | and its depth is the same. When this'is finished, he takes | mats, so that they are ready

40 for use, and he takes the tongs to put || the red-hot stones into the hole, and he puts them into the hole that has already been dug. | When it is nearly full, he takes his didce and throws it on the | redhot stones; and when a thick layer has been put on, | he puts the yellow-cedar stick on it, and he takes | more dulce and throws it on

45 to it; and as soon as there is a || thick layer of dulce on the yellow cedar, he takes water and | throws a little on top the whole length of the yellow-cedar stick, | and he covers it over with mats. After he has finished, he takes a | round billet, and he cuts it with an ax until it is round. | Its size is three spans around. || When it is done, he 50 takes thin cedar-bark rope, so that it is | ready for use. After it has been steaming quite a while, he | takes off the covering mats and he pulls out the yellow-cedar wood that has been steamed, | and he puts it around the end of the round piece of fire-wood, | and he ties it tightly to the fire-wood, in this manner: ]TT\ After he has tied it on with a || rope, he heats it by the iLAJ fire 0f ^e house_ 55

Now I he heats it all roimd until it is burnt black. Then he takes tallow and | rubs it on it while it is still warm. When it is covered I with tallow, he puts it down in the corner of the house, until it I cools off quickly. Now he wants it to become brittle and || to GO retain its hoop shape and to not spring back again. | Therefore the tallow is put on. When it gets cool, he | takes the hoop for the mouth of the scraping-net for flat sea-eggs, and he takes the | drill and drills ten holes to sew on | the mouth of the scraping-net. After he has done so, it is || in this manner: x^c^ Then he takes the 65 scraping-net and | nets its mouth to the ff J\ hoop. It is a different kind of I nettle-bark twine that ^lff' he puts through the drill-holes. It passes through I two meshes. As soon as this is done, he takes a small | hemlock- " tree two fathoms

70 in length, cuts off || the bark and the sap ; and when it is all off, he cuts | off the thick end so that it is flat, and he puts t on the end of his scraping-net | for flat sea-eggs to serve as a nethandle, for thus is called what they tie to the end of it; | and he takes a split spruce-root and ties the | scraping-net for small, flat sea-eggs to the end of the net-

75 handle. After he has || done so, it is in this way: 1 Staging for drying Roots. — After they have eaten, | they go out of the house. Immediately (the man) goes into the woods, | carrying his ax, and he cuts down four | good-sized long, straight cedar-trees 5 that have no branches. He measures off || three fathoms and cuts them off. | The four sticks are each three fathoms in length. | Then he measures off one fathom and | cuts them off, and he chops off eight of the same length. | As soon as all these have been cut off one

10 fathom in length, || he sharpens one end. When | all the ends are sharp, he carries them on his shoulders and | carries them into his house, and he throws them down where he is going to put them up for | a staging. When they are all in the house, he takes one | of the sharpened sticks and drives it into the ground close to the inner |

1 5 back-rest in the corner of the right-hand side of the house ; and when it is | two spans in the ground, he | takes another one of the sharpboas) INDUSTRIES 167

ened sticks and drives it into the floor | one span distant from the 18 first | post; and he takes one of the long sticks for a crosspiece and |j lays it down outside, in this manner: Then he 20

takes another one | of the sharpened poles and drives it down at the other end of the long stick that he had laid down ; | and when it is two spans in the ground, | he takes the other sharpened stick, | places it at the same distance as at the other end, and drives it into the floor. || When it is also two spans deep in the ground, | he 25 takes his hand-adz and adzes off the tops | of all the posts, so that they are hollowed out. These are called "notches for the beams," and | they are in this manner: M As soon as they have all been notched out on top, I I | he takes a beam and places it over the post || at one end, and he puts the 30 other end on the top of the other post, | so that it is in this manner: (_^ ; J) When the staging is finished, he

| the baskets with long cinquefoil-roots — and he does the same along the other puts on it, •

side. | 35

Frame for drying Berries. — Now we will talk about the work | of 1 the husband of the woman, for ho does not sit still in his house while ] his wife is picking elderberries. First he has to look' for a good | cedar-log which is soaked in water and soft, for this splits straight. || After he has found one, he chops it with his ax on the under side. | 5

6 He chops into it this way : Q t^ \ As soon as he has chopped half way down | to the heart of the wood, he measures from the place where he has | chopped nine spans of our

10 hand. | Then he chops in, and cuts in || as deep as before at the other end. Then he stops chopping. Now it is | in this way: ^ ^ ^ — .

Then he takes his wedges and drives them in at the ^

end | of (1), towards the top of the cedar- tree; and he uses his stone hammer to drive them in ; | and when he has a piece wedged off, he turns it over on its back. Then it is in this way : | /- — -^ ) Then he wedges the piece which he has cut off from ^ the tree

15 into pieces. He splits it up small enough so that he || can carry it out of the woods. After he has cut it into pieces, he carries it home on his shoidder | out of the woods and into his house. There he| throws it down in the corner of the house ; and after all has been carried out, he | takes his adz and puts it down. He also takes his straight | knife,

20 his wedge, and his stone hammer, and he || splits off the thickness of one of our fingers ; | and when it has come off, he measures pieces two fingerwidths | in width. He takes his straight knife and | splits the wood with it. He continues to do so until he has many of the same size. | When

25 he thinks he has split out enough, he takes his straight || knife and one of the cedar-sticks which he has split and cuts it well | and straight on one side, so that it is straight and flat. | After he has done so, he turns it over and cuts the back so that it is round | and also straight. After 28 doing so, he takes another one [ and does the same as he did to the first one he made, and he || continues doing so with the others. When all 30 have been cut out, he | splits some smaller than our little finger. He takes | his straight knife and cuts them square. | When he thinks he has enough of these, he measures these off | two spans and two fingerwidths J! in length. Then he cuts them off. There are many of 35 these | which he has cut the same length. After they have been done, he takes his | wedge and Ms stone hammer and he wedges the other | cedar-sticks into thin pieces. When they are all in pieces, he takes his | straight knife and the cedar-sticks which he has wedged into pieces and || splits them into small pieces with his straight [ knife, so 40 that they arc the thickness of half the thickness of our little finger. | Now he has split out very many. After doing so, he takes the | first one which he made two finger-widths in width, and he cuts | square holes a little larger than the size, of our little finger || four finger-widths 45 from the end of what he | is cutting. As soon as the hole passes through, he measures | two spans from this hole, and there he makes another hole; | and when it also passes through, he measures off two more spans | from the last hole he made; and he continues to do so, proceeding to the end of the stick. |[ As soon as this side-stick has been 50

51 finished, it is this way: ' ' Then he | puts it down. Then he takes the other one and puts it down by the side of the one that
he has finished, and he marks it according to the first one, so that the hole that he is to make will be in the corresponding place ; | and after he has marked it, he cuts the holes through it; and when these are | finished, he takes a square piece of the size of our little

55 finger || and two spans and two finger-widths in length, | which is called "crosspiece for tying on." He measures one | finger-width from the end of it. Then | he takes his straight knife and cuts a notch around it. He cuts off | a little all round, so that it fits into

60 the hole of the side-stick. He || pushes it through the hole that he has cut; and when he has cut off enough | so that it fits in tight for the end to pass through, | he only stops pushing it in when | it fits tightly against the shoulder of the notch, | he does the same with the other end of the | crosspiece as he did to the former end. After | doing so, he

65 continues the same with the others ; and || when all of them have been finished, it is in this way : After this has been done, |

he takes cedar-bark and i | 2 | 3 | 4 | -s | e [ soaks it in water. After doing so, I betakes the ~ thin pieces of cedar- wood half as I thick as our little finger and one finger-width | in width. These

70 are to be the middle sticks. When he has || put them all down at the place where he is sitting making the drying-frame, after | they have all been brought there, he takes the soaked cedar-bark and puts it uoas] INDUSTEIES 171

down. | He calls his wife to split it into narrow strips, | and she 72 immediately comes and sits down and | splits the cedar-bark into narrow strips for him to tie on the middle sticks of the || drying-frame. 75 After splitting off one strip, she gives it to her | husband. He takes it, and also one of the split sticks from | the middle sticks of the drying-frame, and he puts it on at (1) and close | to (7),1 and he ties it on with split cedar-bark, | and he sees to it that there is no turn in the cedar-bark. After tying it on, he takes up || another one of 80 the split sticks and places it alongside of the first one, | which he put on also at (1). Then he ties it also to the crosspiece. | He continues doing this at (1); and as soon as it has been filled up to (8),1 I the side-stick, then he ties them on at (2); and after that has been filled, | he ties them up at (3), (4), and (5). Now the dryingframe || has been finished; and when ^^^^^^^^^^ all the sticks 85 have been tied on, it is in this way: [ 1 | | | | | | After | the drying-frame has been finished, he gives it to his wife. |

Rack for holding Baskets. — His wife, however, takes easily- | splitting 1 eedar-wood and splits it so that (the pieces are) one finger | thick one way, and half | a little finger thick the other way. She measures them || by the inside of the empty oil-box. Then she cuts them off; 5 and when | she thinks she has enough of these sticks, she measures

1 (7) and (8) are the two long side-sticks.

7 with another stick the | width of the empty oil-box. One fingerwidth | on each side is the size of these square pieces of cedar-wood. | She makes four pieces of the same size, and all of the same length. |[

10 After they have been cut off, she takes cedar-bark and | puts it into water and leaves it there until it gets soaked. | When she thinks it is soaked, she takes it out and splits it | into narrow strips. After doing so, she takes | one of the shorter cedar-sticks, one of the pieces

15 to which the rack on which || the basket rests is tied when erabapples are being boiled, and she takes | one of the flat pieces of cedar and places it lengthwise, so that the two are | in this way.1 Then she takes split cedar-bark and ties together | the two ends of the rack that she is making. After this has been done, | she takes up one of

20 the long cedar-sticks || and puts it down flat on the crosspieces, and she ties these together with cedar-bark. | She continues doing this from one end of the crosspieces to the other. | When she reaches the other end, she takes another one of the shorter | cedar-sticks and ties it under the rack. | She measures so that equal distances are

25 between the || four cross-sticks. She ties them also with cedar-bark. | She does this with all four sticks. After she has | done so, it is hi this way.2 |

1 Tied together at the ends at right angles.

2 See figure of frame, p. 171. There are only four cross-sticks.

II. HUNTING, FISHING, AND FOOD-GATHERING

Goat-Hunting. — When the mountain-goat hunter | goes up the moun- 1 tain to hunt goats, he searches for thick, long | cedar-withes. Sometimes these are two fathoms long | and of the thickness of the fourth ringer. They have no branches. [| He twists them well, going towards 5 the thick end. | He steps on the top while he is twisting it; and when | the piece that he has twisted is long, he steps near the end of the | twisted piece and continues twisting it. He does not stop until | the whole length has been ^--===== twisted; and he snare for catching goats where C j they have a single 10

on the trail that is near a precipice upward and downward, [ and also a tree standing I / at the outer side of the trail, then he ties| the thick 'JjL M ■ end of the snare to the bottom of the tree. He JM?^- \ opens the | loop and puts it behind the tree, -x^^lcwSLy in the middle of the goat-trail, in this way: || £l §MW^m^^^ Now the tree is (1); the precipice | 15 above is ('_'': /r'« Y"V"~; {^w mu'e is (4); j the trail is (4); the precipice 3 /'««. "-' ..'/ "M- below the trail is (3). |

As soon as he has finished this, he leaves ; and after four | days he

20 goes to look at his snare; and if a goat has been snared, || he can see it a long ways off hanging down at (3) . Now the | snare has caught a goat which has died. He pulls it up, | takes the snare off the neck of the goat, | and sets it again. Then be takes the goat | a little

25 ways off from the place of his snare. || Then he cuts it open and takes out the intestines, but he keeps | the tallow. He twists cedar-withes and | ties together one fore-leg and one hind-leg | with the cedar-withes, and he does the same with | the legs of the other side. Then he puts

30 the tallow into the || belly. He cuts holes through each | side of the belly with his knife, pusbes the | thick end of the cedar-withe into it, and sews it up. | After he has sewed it up, he puts his arms through | the legs that have been tied together, so that the goat lies with its belly

35 on bis back, || and he carries it down the mountain.

1 Sealing. — And they do the same way when hunting | seal as they do when hunting porpoise; and | the hunting-canoe for seal-hunting is the same as the hunting-canoe for porpoise-hunting. |

5 As soon as it gets dark, at new moon the hunter gets ready, || and carries down his small hunting-canoe, | which he launches on the sea.

Then he goes up the beach and takes his | canoe-box in which he 7 keeps his harpoon-points and his harpoon-line, | and also the blue hellebore-root and peucedanum-seeds, and also sinew. | Then the hunter paddles with his steersman. ... || All these are taken aboard 10 the small canoe. As soon as they go aboard | the little huntingcanoe, they take their | paddles and paddle; and when they nearly arrive at the island, | the hunter puts his paddle down on the second thwart | behind him. The points of the harpoon turn towards the stern, and the two points || are pushed against the stern- 15 seat on the left-hand side of the little canoe. | The handle of the harpoon-shaft lies on the left-hand side of the bow, | where the harpooneer is seated. |

Then he pulls his harpoon-shaft out of the stem-seat ; and he pushes it, handle first, forward and | places it in the bow of the little canoe. || He puts it down on his right side. Then he opens the canoe-box, | 20 takes out the harpoon-line and the harpoon-points, and ties the end of the | line to the harpoon-line. |

After this has been done, he puts the points on the prongs, | and he ties the ends of the guide-rope. Then he turns || the harpoon the other 25 way, and ties the line on, where he holds it with his | left hand, as he is throwing the harpoon at what he is going to spear. As soon as he has finished, | then he puts the prongs and the harpoon-points

28 into the sea-water, | so that the prongs swell and hold the harpoonpoints better. |

After he has done so, he puts it down in the bow of the little ||

30 hunting-canoe. He coils up his canoe-line in the canoe-box. | When he comes to the middle, he takes his bladder and puts it into | the sea-water and pushes it down so as to moisten it. He | takes the middle of the harpoon-line and ties on the neck of the | bladder with

35 two half-hitches. Then he pulls it tight and puts it || into the bow of the little hunting-canoe just above the | canoe-box. He coils up the other half | of the other end of the spearing-linc underneath it. |

As soon as this has been done, he begins to paddle. He keeps close | to the shore of the island and watches. As soon as he sees a

40 seal diving, — || which he recognizes by the phosphorescence, — he puts his paddle (into the water). Then | he grasps the end of his harpoonshaft. If the seal should be frightened away, | the steersman puts his paddle | edgewise into the water and moves it about so as to |

45 produce phosphorescence. When the seal sees this, it comes || back to look at the phosphorescence around the paddle. Then | the karpooneer harpoons it as it comes swimming along on the left-hand side | of the hunting-canoe. |

As soon as he hits it, he hauls in the line, so | that the seal kicks against the bow of the hunting-canoe as it || is diving down. When 50 the seal is going to a patch of kelp or | seaweed, then the hunter takes his harpoon-shaft and pushes it | at the side of the seal's head as it is diving along swimming under | the water. Then it turns and leaves | the seaweed; for the seal, when it is harpooned, || searches first for 55 seaweed or a kelp-patch, and wriggles through it. | Then it often happens that the harpoon-line breaks or that the seal pulls out | the harpoon-points. Therefore an expert hunter | hauls in his harpoonline as soon as he hits the seal, to watch that it | does not go to a kelp- patch. ||

If the hunter is inexperienced and spears a seal, he lets | the line 60 run out when the seal is swimming; and when | the line has run out entirely, then (the seal) hauls the hunting-canoe, and | the hunter is surprised to find his fine twisted in the kelp as the seal | goes to and fro in it; and then it comes off, || and the hunter has difficulty in 65 pulling back his line and clearing it | from the kelp. |

An expert hunter just steers the seal with his harpoon | to make it go seaward. When | it comes up, as its breath is at an end, he takes the harpoon, || he puts the prongs close to the harpoon-line and the | 70 barbed points, and pushes it down. It does not take long before the

72 seal's breath is at an end. | As soon as it stops moving, the hunter rises in the canoe | and stands in the middle of his canoe, a little towards the stern. | He holds the nose in the right hand, and with

75 the left hand || he takes the fore-flipper. He pushes the seal down, pulls it up suddenly, | and hauls it aboard. He lays it crosswise in the stern of the hunting- 1 canoe. |

Then he twists out the harpoon-heads and washes them ; and when | the blood is all off, he puts them back at the end of the harpoon. ||

80 When this is done, he starts to paddle. |

Late at night he knows that the seals | finish swimming among the islands, for they all are then on the sleeping-rock. | The hunters know all the sleeping-rocks | of the seals. As soon as he comes near the ||

85 sleeping-rock, he paddles strongly in his hunting-canoe; and when he comes in sight of | the sleeping-place and the seals tumble into the water, then | the hunter stands up in the canoe, grasps the end of his harpoon, and | spears the seals as they swim under water, where they are seen by the phosphorescence; | and he does the same as I de-

90 scribed before. || When his hunting-canoe is full of hair- seals he goes | home. | 1 Catching Flounders.1 — When it is a fine day, the | wife of the man gets ready in the morning to go and get clams | and cockles for bait ;

1 Continued from p. 159, line 49.

ami when she has many clams and | cockles, she goes home to her house. As soon as she arrives on the || beach of her house, she takes 5 a piece of broken shell of a horse-clam | and cuts open the small clams and cockles to take off | the shells. She throws these into the water, and puts the edible insides | into a basket. When she has done so, the woman goes ashore. | Her husband takes the flounder-fishing line and the || cross-bones with the hair, and he carries them down to the 10 beach where the | fishing-canoe is. He lays out the fishing-line on the beach | near the canoe; and when | it is stretched out straight, he takes one of the | cross-bones with the hair-line, measures off two fathoms, || and ties the end of the hair-line of the cross-bone to the 15 fishing- 1 line. When this is done, he takes another | one of the crossbones with the hair-line, measures half a fathom, | and ties the end of the hair-line of the cross-bone to the | fishing-line. The fifty are all the same distance apart; || namely, half a fathom. When they are | 20 all on, he takes ■ i * i- the cleaned clams and cockles for puts on the bait. The crossthrough the | clams and cockles when they are baited. | As soon bait, and he | bone is pushed in this manner as all are baited, KU KU \U ^^ ^h.e fisherman || coils up the fish- 25

26 ing-line in his fishing- 1 canoe in front of the stern-thwart. When he has done so, | he looks for two medium-sized elongated stones for anchors at each end of the | fishing-line. When he has found them, he puts them into his | fishing -canoe. Then he goes up

30 the beach and || takes his fishing-paddle from his house. He goes down, carrying it, | to the beach, and goes into the stern of his fishing- 1 canoe. Then he paddles and goes to the fishing-place where the water is not ] very deep. It is sufficiently deep if the fishing-line

35 lies three | fathoms deep. As soon as he reaches it, || he takes up one of the elongated _^==e=:r st°nes I an(i the end of the fishingline, and ties the fr end of it to the middle of the |

elongated stone. ( ( ) When this is done, he puts it overboard; and | *■ when the anchor reaches the bottom, he takes his paddle and paddles. | When the small canoe begins

40 to go ahead, the fine runs out into the water. || When it is all in the water, he takes the | other elongated stone and ties it on, four fathoms | from the end of the fishing-line. Then he takes his paddle | and paddles again, so as to stretch the fishing-line, and he puts overboard the | stone anchor. ). _=. =*_5C3 When it touches the bottom, he takes /^^\ f /^~~^\ a r,miM cedar-wood ||

45 float of this shape |ff |}/ / \ and ties it to the end of the fishing-line. W^§^/ I J I Then he throws it into the water. ^__^^ Then he goes home to his house | after having finished on the water. In the evening 47 he goes into his fishing- | canoe and paddles to the place where he left his fishing-line; and | when he reaches the round cedarwood float at the end, he takes it || and puts it into his small canoe, 50 and he hauls in his | fishing-line. Then he takes off the flounders, and black-edged(?)flounders | which hang on the hooks; and as soon as he has them all off, he takes | clean clams and baits his fishingline; and | after he has baited it, he takes his paddle and paddles; || and when his small canoe starts, then the line runs out into the 55 water. | When it is all in, he puts the | stone anchor into the water; and when it touches the bottom, he takes the round cedar- | float at the end and throws it into the water. Then he goes home. He picks up some | dry driftwood. When he thinks he has enough to steam || the flounder standing on edge, he goes home | to his house. When it is 60 high water he throws out the | driftwood on the beach of his house.

Fishing Kelp-Fish. — The woman takes the harpoon for getting large 1 sea-eggs | and a flat-pointed prying-stick of yew-wood used for prying off mussels, | and she puts them aboard her small canoe in which the fish-trap is kept, | and she also puts aboard her new fish-trap. Thon she takes the harpoon, || which is made of a thin rod of red pine. Sometimes it is three fathoms long. | Two points of tough wood are 5

7 tied to its end, | in this manner: ^^* The tying is made of split | spruce-root. '■ ■niiingg°^ — ^ The implement for prying off mussels is made of a broken | paddle in

10 this way: It is four spans long, || and the flat end is four — j,^ ) fingers wide. | The handle is round. |

That is all about it. |

The woman carries her paddle as she goes aboard her small fishing- |

15 canoe, and she first goes to search for sea-eggs, for || these are the bait for tho fish-trap. As soon as she finds the sea-eggs, she spears them | with tho harpoon; and when she has enough for baiting the fishtrap, | she breaks the sea-eggs and puts them hi to the fish-trap; and | when there are no sea-eggs, she pries off mussels with the prying-

20 stick; | and when she has enough bait for the fish-trap, || she breaks them to pieces and puts them into the trap. Then she looks | for a place where eel-grass is growing under water. She selects a place about two | fathoms deep. Then she | takes her fish-trap and puts it overboard, so that it is placed on the bottom among tho eel-grass, |

25 so that the* kelp-fish do not see distinctly that it is a fish-trap. || Evidently the kelp-fish smell the bait inside and go in. | After the fish- trap has been under water for some time, she hauls | it up and takes the fish out. There may be six | or eight fish in it. When she has caught enough fish in the trap, | she goes homo. She goes right up from the || beach into her house. She takes up her small basket | 30 and carries it down to the beach. She carries it in her hand | and puts it into her small canoe, and she | puts the fish into the little basket. As soon as the small basket is full of kelp-fish, | she carries it up in her hand from the fishing-canoe. She | carries it hi one hand up the beach and into the || house. Then she puts it down in the 35 roar of the house. |

Fishing Perch (Taking perch out of the fish-trap). | — The time when 1 the perch go into the trap is at | high tide, when the trap is under water. As | soon as the ebb-tide goes way down, the trap is dry on the beach. || The owner just watches for the splashing of the perch | 5 that are caught and are splashing hi it. As soon as they are quiet, | the perch fisherman takes a medium-sized basket and carries it down to the beach | to where his trap is ; and he takes off the four | ballast stones and puts them down, and he takes off the hemlock-branches j| and puts them down on the beach, and he takes off tho roof and he | 10 lays it down on tho beach, and finally he takes out the fish from the | trap and puts them hito the basket. When | he has taken them all out, he takes out the broken shells of tho clams that served for bait; [ and when they are all out, he carries up his || fish-basket and takes it 15

16 into his house. Then he takes | the clams and carries them down to the beach | and breaks them and puts them into his trap; and after ho has done so, | he puts the roof on again. He puts the hemlockbranches over it | and puts on four medium-sized stones over the||

20 hemlock-branches. Then it is ready again when the tide comes in. | Then he goes up. | 1 Gathering Herring-Spawn. — When the herring is about to spawn, | the man who goes after herring-spawn looks for fine | hemlock-branches with smooth leaves. When he finds them, | lie goes home. Then he 5 watches for the herring to spawn. || As soon as the sea begins to look milky, the man goes | for the hemlock, and breaks off long branches of the | hemlock; and after he has broken off many, | he carries them to the spawning-place. Then he takes long | cedar-poles and takes

10 them to the spawning-place; and he also || takes stout rope and long stones, and he ties the end | to the long stones. Then he takes a thin, long | rope and takes a long pole and puts it | into the sea. Then he takes the hemlock-branches and ties them to (lie | pole with the long,

15 thin rope; and he only stops when || the hemlock reaches the end of the long pole. Then he puts it into the water at the | spawning-place of the herrings, and he takes the big rope and | ties its end to the pole, and he puts the stone into the water. | Then it is an anchor when it is in the water. I

For four days it is left in the water. || After it has been in the water 20 for four days, the herrings have finished spawning. | Then the man takes his canoe and washes it out. | When it is clean, he goes out to where the hemlock is in the water. | He unties the rope, and puts the hemlock with the spawn on it | into the canoe. ||

Catching Devil-Fish. — There is no hook at the end of the long pole | 1 for fishing devil-fish, for the only end with which they spear the devilfish is the thin end.1 1 When the man who fishes for devil-fish in deep water | feels for it in its hole, for || that is the name of the stone house 5 of the devil-fish, he feels for its | body and he strikes for the hard part. | He makes a thrust at it twice. Then he pulls out the pole and | puts it into his small fishing-canoe. | Then it does not take long before the devil-fish comes out of its hole; and he takes || his long 10 spear and spears it, lifts it up, | and puts it into the small canoe. Immediately | he takes out the intestines. He never strikes it on the rock to kill it, | for he wishes (it to be hard). 2 . . .

Gathering Seaweed. — When a woman goes to gather || seaweed at a 15 place where there are nice smooth stones, she plucks it off | when the rock on which it is is wet. When the sun shines, she just | peels it off from the rock when it is dry all over. Then she puts it into her |

1 See figure on p. 152. - The end of this description is missing.

large basket. When the basket is full, she pours it | into her canoe,

20 and she spreads a mat over the || short boards in the canoe. As soon as the canoe is full of seaweed, | she goes home. | 1 Digging Clover. — Now she is ready when the | season for digging clover arrives; that is, when the leaves of the clover | are killed by the frost, and winter is coming. | 5 As soon as there is frost at night, the woman || gets ready in the morning. She takes her clover digging-stick | and her flat-bottomed basket, her back-protector, | and her cedar-bark belt, and she walks down to the | clover-garden. There she puts down her tools in the direction towards | sunrise, so that the sun is at her back when it

10 rises, and || it does not shine into her eyes, so that she can see distinctly the | clover which she is digging, for generally the women pick up | other kinds of roots when they are digging clover. When she | has put down her tools, she takes her mat and spreads it over

15 her | back so that the lower end is a little above the || heels. Then she takes the cedar-bark belt | and puts it around her waist, and she puts the cedar-bark | rope over it; that is to say, the end of the belt. She ties on | the end. Then she takes her flat-bottomed basket and puts it down | in front in the direction where she is going to dig.

20 Finally she takes || her digging-stick and sits down on the backprotecting mat. | Nowshe works while she is sitting. She pokes down 21 her digging-stick so that | the point is one span deep in the ground. | Then she pries up the clover | easily, turning down the stick, for she does not wish to break the || clover-roots, and she pokes it again into 25 the ground so that it stands up, | and she picks out the clover-roots and throws them into her fiat-bottomed basket. When | she has picked all the clover-roots out of the soil, she | pries up some more clover with her digging-stick, and she again | puts the digging-stick standing where she is going to pry up || the roots next time, after she 30 has finished picking out what she has just pried up; | and she continues to do so. | She does this every day, for sometimes | it takes the woman five days to work over her | clover-garden when it is large. In the evening || she takes the mats and pours the clover on several | 35 mats, and covers it with others where she has dug it up; | and in the morning she takes the mat-covering off and | spreads it out, and scatters the clover-roots on them so as to get dry, if | it should be a fine day in the morning; but if it should be a bad day in the || morn- 40 ing, then she does not take off the mat-covering until | the sky clears up, for it is said that it is not good for the clover | to be dried in the house. They say that if it is dried in the house, | it shrinks up; but it does not shrink when it is dried | at the place where it is dug. The

45 soil || is not washed off. If the sky has been clear for two days, | the roots are dry all over. Then the dirt drops off. | Then the woman takes her basket, goes to the | pile of clover, and puts (the roots) into

50 the clover-basket. | When all the baskets are full, || the woman takes dry grass and places it on top of the | clover-baskets. After she has done so, she takes a | thin cedar-bark rope and ties up the top of the baskets. | Then she puts them into the canoe and goes home to the

55 winter house, | for they dig clover at another place, for || the best clover grows at Knight Inlet and at Gwa£ye. Now she arrives at her | winter house. She does not put down the clover- 1 basket near the fire of the house, but she | puts it in a cool corner of the house. Now she waits for | the winter before cooking the clover-roots. As soon

60 as the people begin the winter ceremonial, then || the people are invited to eat the clover. | 1 Digging Cinquefoil-Itoots. — The same digging-stick | is used for digging cinquefod-roots which is used for clover. Sometimes | the man who makes the digging-stick makes a smaller digging-stick | for 5 the cinquefoil-roots, for it is thinner and it is one span || shorter than t lie clover digging-stick; | and the basket for cinquefoil-roots has | no flat bottom, as the one that is used for digging clover, for the same | 7 basket that is used for clams is used for cinquef oil-roots; | and the other cinquefoil-basket is smaller. It is for the lower roots, || for 10 these are very long, and they grow under the curly | cinquefod-roots. As soon as the season for digging cinquefod-roots in the autumn arrives, then | the woman who owns a cinquefoil-garden takes her cedar-bark belt and | mat, two cinquefoil digging-baskets, and her | digging-stick, and goes to the cinquefoil-garden. || When she arrives 15 there, she puts down her baskets | and her digging-stick, and she spreads the mat on her back. | She takes her woven cedar-bark belt and puts | it around her body over the mat. After | she has done so, she sits down on the lower end of the back-protector mat. || Then 20 she takes her digging-stick and pokes the end into the ground in one corner of her | cinquefoil-garden. The point of the digging-stick does not go in deep. | Then she pries it up. Then the cinquefoil-roots show themselves, and | the woman picks out the short, curly | cinquefod-roots and puts them into the larger || basket which stands 25 at her right side. She puts down | the smaller basket on the left-hand side. After | she has picked out the cinquefoil-roots, she takes her digging-stick again and pushes | the end into the ground at the place where she dug first, for the small cinquefod-roots are only four fingers

30 deep, | but the long lower roots are four fingers || deeper, if the sand | is good and does not contain pebbles. The reason why there are no long cinquefoil-roots | at Nimkish River is that there are many small pebbles. Gwa£ye | in Knight Inlet is the only place where the long cinquefoil-roots grow, | for the soil in the cinquefoil-gardens is half

35 sand and half light || clay, and therefore the cinquefoil-roots and the I long roots grow well. As I said before, the short cinquefoil-roots are on top, | of the long roots below. Therefore the woman who is digging cinquefod-roots | pushes down her diggingstick again after she has picked up all the short roots; for the | short roots and the long roots do not keep together, although they belong

40 to one || stem. Now I will stop talking about this, and I ] will talk again about the woman who is digging. She | does not pry up the sand quickly, but she digs up the sand and clay slowly, | so that the long cinquefoil-roots do not break and that they come up in long strings | when she is picking them out of the sand; and she puts

45 them into the || basket for the long cinquefod-roots. She keeps on doing so over the whole garden- | bed, and she only stops digging after she has worked over the whole ground. | In the evening, when it gets dark, the woman who is digging cinquefoil-roots | takes her short roots and puts them on a pde, and covers them over with | mats;

50 and she does the same with the long roots, for || sometimes it takes the woman four days to dig over her | cinquef oil-garden. In the 51 morning, when day comes, the | owner of the cinquefoil-garden goes to the pile of short roots | and of long roots and takes off the mat covering of the piles | of short and long roots, and spreads the roots out so that they are close together. || After she has done so, she 55 takes the roots and scatters them, | and she does the same with the long roots. After she has done so, | she leaves and goes home to her cinquefoil-digging house. Now [ she dries the short roots so that the sand on them gets dry. When | she arrives at her house, she takes her cinquefoil-baskets and looks them over, || and she takes 60 them to the place where she left her | short roots and long roots drying. As soon as she arrives there, she | takes up the short roots and puts them into the baskets; | and when they are all in, she takes dry grass and | puts it on top as a cover; and after it has been put on, || she takes cedar-bark split for this purpose one finger | wide and ties 65 up | the cinquefoil-baskets. After she has done so, she gathers | them together and covers them with mats. Then | she takes cedarbark and splits it into narrow strips. || She lays down one of the pieces 70 of spht cedar-bark, | takes the long cinquefoil-roots and puts the ends together, laying them down | on the strip of cedar-bark. When she

73 can put her fingers | around them, she squeezes them together and ties them firmly in the middle. | They are this way when

75 they have been tied: . When || this has been done, she does the same with ^^^j=^^- the others, and she only stops | when they are all 5=pfe=Er ^et^ 1U bundles in the middle. Sometimes | she has ? ^ more than a hundred bundles of long cinquefoil-roots belonging to one woman who has a good | cinquefoil-garden. After this has been done, she puts the | long cinquefod-roots into the basket; and when they arc all in, she

80 takes || grass and puts it on top, and she ties it down with cedar-bark. | Then in the evening she gathers up | the baskets for long cinquefoil-roots, and she spreads mats over them. | After she has done so, she goes home to her digging-house. | In the morning, when daylight comes, the woman and her husband get

85 ready. || They launch their canoe into the sea, | push down the roofboards of the digging-house | and place them in the bottom of the canoe. When | the bottom of the canoe is all covered, the baskets with short roots | are placed on the boards in the canoe; and when

90 they are ah in, || they take the baskets with long roots and put them | on top of the baskets with short roots; and when they are all in, | they put the bedding and provisions on top. When everything is in, | they take the mats and spread them over the load. | When everything is aboard the canoe, the || man stands in the stern of the canoe, 95 which he steers. | He looks at his clover-digging house and prays to it.' ... |

As soon as he arrives at the beach of his winter house, | he puts the stern of his traveling-canoe landward and backs in. | The man gets out of the traveling-canoe, and || unloads the cargo when the tide is 100 high. If it is low tide, he | ties a long cedar-bark rope to the stern seat of his | traveling-canoe and carries up the end of the rope to high-water mark, j where he ties it to a stone which serves as an anchor. After he has done so, | the (couple) are invited by their relatives to eat, if it is || low tide when they arrive. If it is high tide, 5 they are only | invited when the cargo has been carried up the beach. They ] put the baskets with the long roots and those with the short roots in two different places. | The baskets with the long roots are put on the right-hand side of the | house, and the baskets with the short roots are placed on the left-hand || side of the house, for these corners 10 are cool. As soon as | all have been carried up, they go to the one who invited them. . . . As soon as this has been done, | (the man) takes the baskets with long cinquefoil-roots and puts them across | the two beams.2 If there are many baskets with long roots, there may be four layers, one on top of the other, | from one end of the staging

— 1 See page 618.

z Then follows the description of the making of a raised platform for keeping provisions (p. 166).

75052—21—35 eth— pt 1 13

15 to the other. When they are all on, || he takes mats and spreads thern over them, so that the | frost can not get at them, for he does not wish them to freeze. Now | it is called "staging for long einquef oilroots," and it is also called | "staging on which long cinquefoil-roots are thrown." After this has been done, | he dot's the same, putting

20 on the stage the || baskets with short roots: and after this has been done, he spreads j mats over them. Generally he does not put up one | basket of long cinquefoil-roots when the baskets arc piled up: | and when there are many people in his tribe, he keeps out four baskets with short cinquefoil roots to cook them for the people; but ||

25 more than one basket of long cinquefoil-roots is never kept out, for only the chiefs j eat the long cinquefoil-roots. The common people eat the short roots, j 1 Digging Sea-Milkwort.1 -When the plants first begin to grow and the tops begin to sprout, j the woman takes her digging-stick which she uses for clams, | and her small basket, and goes to a place where ,") -lie has seen || milkwort growing. In the following year there is nothing to be seen in the springtime, , anil she just digs for it. She sits down and pushes the point of her digging-stick into the sand, and she pries up the sand. | Then she picks out the milkwort-roots

'Olauz maritima, v. Fernald.

and throws them into | the small basket which stands on the ground in front of her. She continues doing so || while she is digging. When 1 0 her basket is full, she goes | home, carrying the basket in her hands. |

Digging Bracken ' - Root. — The woman j takes her back-protecting mat and her cedar-bark belt, | and her digging-stick which she uses for digging clams. Then || she goes to a place where she knows fern is 15 growing and where | the soil is soft. As soon as she arrives, she spreads the mat over her back | and she puts on the woven cedarbark belt. After | she has done so, she sits down on one end of the mat, holding the | digging-stick, and she pushes the point of the stick into the ground. || Then she digs up the ground; and when she 20 readies the fern-root, | she follows the whole length of the root, for it is very | long; and when she reaches the soft end, she j breaks it off; and if it is very long, she coils it up. She continues j doing so as she is digging. When she has enough, she takes a || spruce-root and ties 25 it around the middle, and she folds the roots up in a bundle, | which she carries on her back to her house, using her digging-stick as a walking-stick, for the load of fern-roots is really heavy when the old woman finds many. |

Digging Fern --Root. — The woman takes her | yew-wood digging- 1 stick and a large basket, | which she carries on her back. She uses her digging-stick as a cane. Then she walks, | looking for fern-root.

1 Pteridiu m aquilinum. ' Dryopteris spinulosa dilatata.

19fi ETHNOLOGY OF THE KWAKITJTL [MH.Amf.3s

5 As soon as she finds large ones, she puts her || basket down on the ground and pokes with her digging-stick under the root of the fern. She holds with her left hand the top of the digging-stick, and she holds with her | right hand the leaves of the fern, and she pulls at it. and | she pries it up with her digging-stick. As soon as she gets it out, she plucks off the | leaves, and she throws the root into the basket. She

10 continues || doing so, pulling it out, and she only stops when her basket is full. | Then she breaks off some slim hemlock-branches and puts them on top | of the fern-root. After she has done so, she carries her | fern-root basket on her back and goes home. |

15 Gathering Fern-roots.1 — Generally the tribes go || to get fern-roots when they are hungry and J they can not go to get other kinds of food; and those who haveto camp for along time in bad weather. | Then they go to gather fern-roots. The | man makes a stick for peeling bark like the stick for peeling hemlock-bark. | It is the same length. It is

20 bent and has a flat point. || Generally it is four spans long. | The woman carries it with her basket and goes to | look for loose moss in which the fern grows. When she finds | many plants of the fernroot growing among the loose moss on rocks, 1 she sits down and

25 plucks off the moss; || and when she comes to the rock, she takes her peeling-stick and | pushes it along the rock under the moss, and she

1 Polypodium glycorrhiza X). C. Eaton.

hoas] HUNTING, FISHING, AND FOOD-GATHERING 197

pries it off the rock. | As soon as it turns over, she pulls the moss apart 27 and pulls out the fern-roots, which she throws into her basket. She continues j doing so: and when her basket is full, she carries it home. ! Then she puts it down by the side of the fire. | 30

Digging- Erytliroaium. — Now I will speak again | about the 1 ervihronmm, how it is dug; for the j woman takes the same diggingst'ck that is used for short cinquefoil-roots, and the back-protecting mat, and her cedar-hark belt, and she takes a small-meshed flatbottomed |] basket: and she goes to the bank of the river, for that is 5 the only place | where the ervthronium-plant grows. As soon as she arrives where it grows, | when the leaves first come out of the ground, she carries a large | horse-dam shell. Then she takes her backprotecting mat and | spreads it over her back, and she takes her cedar-bark belt and |j puts it on over the mat. putting it around her 10 waist. Then | she takes a large horse-clam shell and her diggingstick, and she takes her small-meshed Hat-bottomed basket and puts it down on her | left-hand side. Then she sits on the end of the j mat and pushes the end of the digging-stick into the ground and pries up the sod. Then she scrapes the soil with her clam-shell | and picks 15 out the erythronium plants from the soil and throws them | into her

18 basket. If there are many plants, it is only a short time | before the basket is full; and when | the small-meshed flat-bottomed basket is

20 full, she carries it home in her hand. || After entering the house, she | puts down the basket inside of the door of the house to keep it cool and so that the roots | do not get dry, for they are dirty. | 1 Digging Lupine-Roots. — In spring, when I the salmon-berries begin to have buds and the olachen first arrives in | Knight Inlet . the season arrives when the tribes are hungry | when they first arrive at Knight 5 Inlet. Then the woman first takes her digging-stick || for clover and her basket and her | woven cedar-bark belt, and goes to the I flats back of the houses of the olachen fishermen. When she finds t he | tops of shoots of lupine as they come out of the ground, she puts down her | lupine-basket and her digging-stick. She takes her ||

10 narrow back-protector and spreads it on her back, and she sees to it that | it reaches down to her heels. Then she puts a belt I over it and ties it around her waist. When she lias finished, | she takes her digging-stick and her lupine-basket and sits down close to the | shoots

15 on the end of her back-protecting mat. || She pushes the point of the digging-stick into the ground close to the | lupine-shoot, and she pries it up. As soon as the roots come out, | she picks I hem out of the clay and throws them into her | basket; and when she has picked all the roots out of the clay, | she takes her digging-stick again, pushes it into the ground as she || did before, and she picks out the 20 lupine-roots and | puts them into her basket. She continues doing this; | and when her basket is full, she carries it in her one hand. | She takes the digging-stick in the other hand and goes home. | Then she puts down the basket at her place, and || she places the digging- 25 stick upright at one side of the door. | Then she takes a small dish and pours some fresh water into it. | When it is half full, she puts it down by the side of her place. She takes her | basket and places it by the side of the small dish I which contains water. Then she takes some of the lupine-roots and puts them into the || water in the small 30 dish, and she washes them all over, so that the clay | comes off. As soon as all the clay is off, she | begins to eat the roots, with her husband and her children; | and they only stop when they have enough. After eating lupine-root | for some time, they become dizzy, as though they were drunk || after having drunk whisky. After eating lupine- 35 root, I they put away what is left over. When | the woman and her husband eat too much of the lupine-roots, they become really drunk. | Their eyes are heavy, and they can not keep them open, and | their bodies are like dead, and they are really |) sleepy. Then they go and 40 lie down in their rooms and I sleep; and when they wake up, they

41 feel well again, because I they are no longer drunk. That, is all about this. | 1 Digging Carrots.1 — The woman takes this (cedar-bark basket), I the yew-wood digging-stick, her back-protecting | mat and her cedarbark belt. She goes to the | rocks, for carrots generally grow on 5 rocks where there is grass || on the points of land. When she reaches the point where many carrots | were growing the past season (for the woman only goes there if she knows | that there were many of them, for they have not come out yet), she takes her | back-protecting mat and puts it on her back, and she takes her | belt and puts it over it

10 around her waist, then |) she ties the mat on her back. She takes her digging-stick | and sits down on the rock. Then she puts her basket down in | front of her, and she peels off the grass and the roots from the rocks with her yew -wood ] digging-stick, so that it turns over and the roots show. Then | she picks out the carrots and throws

15 them into her basket. || After she has selected them from among the roots of (other) plants, | she takes her digging stick again (some women call it the | peeling-stick for carrots) and she does | as she did before when she peeled it off from the rock. After tilling her carrot-baskel , she puts it on her back. Generally she uses the peeling-stick fur

20 carrots as a walking-stick. || She goes home to her house; and when she i Continued from p. 139, line 22.

enters, | she puts down her load and puts it on the floor by the side 21 of the iire. |

Digging Lily-Bulbs.1 — As soon as (the digging-stick) is finished, (the 1 man) gives it to his wife. | In the morning, when day comes, the woman arises and | eats before she goes out. After she has finished eating, I she takes her back-protector and her cedar-bark belt II and 5 her new basket for lily-bulbs and also the | digging-stick for lilybulbs. She goes to the flat on the beach, for | there the lily grows and there is soft sand. When | she reaches the place where there are many lily-blossoms, she | puts down her new basket for lily-bulbs and her digging-stick for || lily-bulbs, and she puts the mat on her back. 10 She puts on the | cedar-bark belt, which she ties around her waist. After doing so, | she sits down on the lower end of the back-protector, for | the end of it reaches as far as her heels. She puts down her I new basket for lily-bulbs in front of her. She takes her || flat-edged 15 digging-stick and pushes the point into the sand on one side | of the lily-plant; and when the point is half way in, she | pulls out her digging-stick and pushes it into the sand again on one side of the plant, | in this way: I I and she pulls it out and pushes it again into the sand | at I ' | the upper side, in this way.2 She pulls

1 Continued from p. 146, lino 33. 2 See figure to left.

20 it out || and pushes it into the sand again so that the cuts (in the sand I meet. Then she | pries out the lily plant and bulb in this way: |

□ The lily-plant is the black spot in the middle of the square. Then | she breaks the soil and picks out the bulb, and she breaks off the I stem of the lily-bulb and throws it away.

25 Then she throws the || bulb into her bulb-basket. She continues doing this | as long as she is digging bly-bulbs. She digs them up very quickly when she is digging, for | three finger-widths is the width of the | digging-stick for lily-bulbs. As soon as the basket is full,

30 and when it is a fine day, she goes to get a mat from her house, || and she spreads it out where she is digging. She takes hold of her | basket on each side and pours the bulbs on the mat which has been spread out, and | she goes on digging as she did before. Now, the bulbs that have been poured on the mat are getting dry; | and when the basket lias been tilled again, | she pours it out again on the mat. When

35 evening comes || and it is fine weather, she gets another | mat from her house and spreads it over the | bulbs t hat she has dug so that I hey may not get wet from the night dew. | When day comes, the woman goes back to where she is digging the | bulbs, and she takes along

40 another mat, which she spreads out. |J She takes the one that was spread over the I I bulbs and spreads it-out close to I the one on which she ] poured the bulbs. The three mats are spread in this way: | She scatters over them the bulbs which she has dug, so that they may dry quickly. | After doing so, she 43 goes again and digs lily-bulbs; and | when she has filled her basket, she goes and pours them on the || mat. When it gets dark, she goes 45 and gets more mats | from her house, and spreads them over the bulbs that she lias dug. | When she has many, she stops. When it is bad weather, in the | evening she takes short boards and makes a roof over them. | There are four posts for it, and she puts two small || beams over them ; and she lays on the short split cedar boards, | that 50 it maybe tight if it should rain. If it is a fine day in the | morning, she takes off the boards of short split cedar-wood and scatters | the bulbs over the mats. If the weather is fine, it takes more than I six days to dry the bulbs thoroughly in the sun. Now I will || stop for a 55 short time talking about the woman.1 . . . |

After2 the woman has put the rope around the box for lily-bulbs, | she carries it on her back to where she has dried the | bidbs, and she puts the bulbs into the box. When | it is full, she takes some lilyleaves |[ (some Indians call it lily-plant) and she puts them on top. | 60 Some Indians call this the soft cover for the lily-bulbs. After doing this, | she puts the cover on. Some Indians call this "putting the | flat cover on the box for lily-bulbs." When it is a fine morning, |

1 Continued on p. 60. - Continued from p. 81, line 72.

65 she puts all the boxes with lily-bulbs aboard the || canoe; and when they are all aboard, they start for home, | going to the winter village. |

When they arrive at their house, they unload the canoe, | if it is high water at the time of their arrival. Then they put down the boxes | in a cool corner of the house, for the lily-bulbs easily dry up ||

70 when the boxes arc put down where it is warm; therefore they are | put into a cool corner of the house. There the owner of the roots will keep them until the | winter comes and the tribe have a winter ceremonial, j 1 Picking Elderberries. -You know | the way of making various kinds of baskets. The basket | of those who pick elderberries is a smallmeshed basket.1 . . . | In- the morning, when it is fine weather, the 5 woman takes her || hook, her cedar-bark belt, and her small-meshed | large basket, which she carries on her back, and she goes to the place where elderberries are growing, | for elderberries grow only on the banks of rivers. There the | woman goes who picks elderberries. As soon as she reaches the elderberry-bushes, | she puts there her baskets on the

10 ground, for generally she has two || or even three baskets for carrying elderberries. She takes her belt | and puts it round her waist; and after doing so, she takes her | smallest basket for elderberries and hangs it in front of her body. | First she picks off the berries growing i Continued on p. 155, line 1. • Continued from p. 155, line 18.

below; and when the | basket hanging on the front of her body is full, she pours the berries into the large basket; || and after she lias puked 15 off from the bushes, all the elderberries growing below she takes the hook and pulls down the elderberries growing on the upper part of the | bushes, and she picks them off; and when the basket hanging in front of her body is full, | she pours the berries which she has picked into the large | basket for carrying elderberries. She continues doing so with her hook, pulling down || the berries on the upper 20 part ()f the bushes. After all the \ baskets have been filled with elderberries, she ties down the top, for they are j all heaping full. After doing so, she carries one at a time j on her back, and she goes to and fro, carrying them down the river.

Picking Salal-Berries. — You know the I ways how baskets are made. 1 They use a large small-meshed | basket for picking salal-berries. One basket is large, | and the next one is medium-sized, and the smallest kind of basket is carried in front of the body. || The name of the large 5 basket of the woman is "swab1 owing-basket." and the next basket is called ''middle-one;" | and "front-basket" is the name of the smallest one. In the morning, when it is clear, the woman puts | her salal-berry picking baskets one into the other. She takes her belt and puts it into the baskets, and she takes || goat-tallow and chews it. 10 As soon as she has chewed it, she puts it | into the palm of her right

13 hand and rubs it with the left | hand. When it is all over her hands, she | rubs it on her face, so that a thick layer of tallow is on her j

15 face, and so that the mosquitoes cannot bite through it. || This is called "tallow sitting on the face." |

After she has done so, she takes her salal-picking cedar-bark hat | ami puts it on. On her back she carries the baskets, and | she also takes her paddle and goes down to the beach where her | salal-

20 berrying canoe is. She launches it and goes aboard. || She sits in the stern, and puts the baskets into the canoe. Then | she paddles, going to an island where salal-berries grow, for these are the only j places where salal-berries grow well. When she arrives there, she ties a stone to her | small canoe, carries the baskets on her back, and goes into the woods | to pick salal-berries. When she reaches the edge

25 of the salal-berry patch, || she puts down her baskets, takes her belt | and puts it round her waist. After that she takes her j front-basket, the smallest one of her baskets, and liangs it in front of her chest. She puts her | two baskets upright on the ground, | and she picks off

30 the salal-berries and puts them into the front-basket. || When it is full, she pours them into the swallowing-basket, the largest one | of (lie salal-berry baskets. She continues picking them into her front-basket. When | it is heapingfull, she pours them into the medium-sized basket; and ] as soon as it is full, she pours them into the swallowingbasket; and | when that is also full and the berries are heaped high, she || picks them into her front-basket; and when this is also heaping 35 full, | she puts it on the ground. Then she breaks off good hemlockbranches and | puts them on the opening of the salal-baskets all around; and when | she has put them in standing all around the salal-berry baskets, she | bends down the ends and ties the hemlockbranches down in this way.1 || After tying them down with cedar-bark 40 rope, which is on the basket, she | puts the swallowing-basket down into her small canoe, and she goes back and | carries the mediumsized basket, and she hangs the | front-basket over her chest, and she carries one on each side as she || comes out of the woods, and puts 45 them in the bow of the travelling-canoe. As soon as j she has done this, she goes aboard her travelling-canoe and paddles | home to her house. As soon as she arrives on the | beach of her house, she carries the largest | basket on her back and takes it up into her || house. 50 She puts it down at a place not too near the fire. | She goes down again to the other two berry-baskets, and she carries | one on each side as she walks up, in the same way as she had done when she came out of the woods | when she picked the berries on the island, and she puts them down. |

' That is, the branches are put in between the berries and the basket, tips up, and are then bent over from all sides toward the middle and tied together so that they cover the berries.

1 Picking Currants' (qlesena). — The same baskets | are used by the women to pick currants as are used when picking salal-berries, | and there are three of them. When the woman sees that the weather is fine in the morning, she | takes her baskets and her cedar-bark 5 belt || and her cedar-bark hat, and puts the baskets on her hack. | Then she puts on her cedar-bark hat and goes out to the place where | the currant bushes grow. As soon as she gets there, she puts down | her currant-picking baskets. She takes her cedar-bark | beltand puts it

10 around her waist. After doing so, she takes || her front-basket, hangs it in front of her chest, hung from a strap around her neck. | She pinches off the stems of the currants, and | breaks them off and throws them into her front-basket. When it is | fuli, she pours it into the swallowing-basket. Then she goes on pinching off | more currants at the lower ends of the stems. She pinches them oif and throws them into the ||

15 front-basket for currant-picking: and when it is full, she goes back and j pours them on top of those which she poured in first. When they are level with the top of the basket, | she stops pouring them into the swallow ing-basket. She does the same as she did before with the medium sized basket; | and when it is also level with the top, she stops pouring them in, | and she also fills her front basket; and when this is

20 full, || she gets skunk-cabbage leaves, which she puts as a covering over the ■ three currant-baskets. When they are ah covered with |

i Ribes petiolare Dougl.

skunk-cabbage leaves, sbe breaks off straight twigs of huckleberry- 22 bushes, | and pushes four of them through the top of each of the currant- 1 baskets. They are put across over the skunk-cabbage leaves; || and after she has done so, it is this way: ^+— i — r\ This repre- 25 sents the mouth of a | currant-basket; and / j when they are turned on their sides, | none of the cur- I y rants drop out through the | skunk-cabbage covering, ^ — -^ because the huckleberry-twigs that have been pushed through | hold them in tight. First she carries the large basket out on her back || and she 30 carries it into her | house, and she goes and puts it down in a cool corner of the house. Then | she goes back and brings out of the woods the medium-sized currant-basket, | and she takes it into her [ house. Then she puts it down next to the large basket. Then || she goes back and brings the currant-basket which is carried in front. 35 She | carries it out of the woods and brings it into her house and puts it down | where the others are. |

Picking Huckleberries.1 — As soon as this (the hook for picking 1 berries) is finished, (the woman) | gets ready to go and shake off huckleberries | in the morning. ... In the morning, when day comes, | she arises and eats a light breakfast. After doing so, || she 5 takes her two huckleberry-baskets and her paddle | and her mat to

'Continued from p. 140, line 10. 75052—21—35 eth— pt 1 14

7 sit on, her cedar-bark hat and her | cedar-bark belt. She carries them all as she is going down to the | beach to the place where she left her canoe that she is to use when she goes huckleberrying. | She goes aboard, sits down in the stern, and paddles, and she goes to the ||

10 huckleberry-patch on an island, for that is where huckleberries grow, | that are good to be picked, and the women go there for picking | huckleberries. As soon as she arrives there, she puts out the anchor-line | of her canoe. She takes her belt | and puts it around her waist, over

15 her blanket; || and after doing so, she takes her two | baskets and puts the smaller basket into the | larger one. She carries them on her hack, | placing the forehead-strap over her forehead. She puts on

20 her | hat, and, after doing so, she goes out of her || canoe into the thicket, for there are always many | salal-berry-bushes outside of the huckleberry-bushes. When | she reaches the huckleberry-bushes, she puts down her | baskets and hangs the medium-sized basket | on her

25 chest, and she goes to the place where she sees many || huckleberries on the bushes. She stands under them and bends them down into the | basket and shakes off the | huckleberries into it. As soon as the huckleberries fall into the basket, | she strikes the bushes with the right hand, and all the | huckleberries fall oil' into the basket.

mas] HUNTING, FISHING, AND FOOD-GATHERING 211

Then she lets go of the || huckleberry-bush, as there are no more 30 berries on it. She goes to another bush with | many huckleberries, and she does as she did with the | first one. When the small basket is full, she | pours the huckleberries that have been shaken off into her larger | basket, and she does as she did before to the other one, || and 35 she shakes off the huckleberries into her small basket ; and when | the large basket is all full and also the small one, | she takes skunkcabbage leaves and spreads them over the two | baskets. She ties down the top, and | after doing so, she carries the larger basket on her back and || the small one in front of her body. Then she goes 40 home. I

Picking Salmon-Berries. — When | the salmon-berries ripen, and l when the man wants to give a | salmon-berry feast, he engages many | women to go picking salmon-berries. Then they all take their || hooked salmon-berry picking boxes and their front- | baskets to pick 5 the berries in, which are used besides the hooked boxes for holding the picked berries. 1 . . . \

Now 2 the hired women take the front- | baskets and the hooked boxes along, for each of them has besides (a box) | a basket. They also take their paddles and go down || to the beach in front of their 10 houses. Then they go into their | small canoes, and generally there

' Here follows the description of the berrying-box, p. 140, line 17, to p. 141, line 43. 'Continued from p. 141, line 34.

12 are | two in each canoe paddling; and they are going with the bow ahead to where they know | many salmon-berry hushes grow. They do not all wish to keep together, — ] the whole number (of women). As soon as they come to a place where they are going to pick salmon

15 berries, || they go ashore out of their small canoes, and | take their baskets and hooked boxes along. | The hooked box is carried on the back, and in front of their bodies hang | the baskets. They have tied the small canoes | ashore by means of the anchor-line. After

20 this has been done, they go back to the place where the || salmonberry bushes grow; and when they come to a place where there are many salmon-berries ] on the bushes, they put down the hooked box so that it stands upright, | and they begin to pick. They put the berries into the [ front-basket: and when it is full, they pour the salmon-berries which they have | picked into the hooked box. They

25 do so every time || when they iill the front-basket. When the box is full, | they fill the front-basket too; and as soon as it [ is full, they carry it on their backs to the hooked boxes. Then they | put them into the small canoe, they go | aboard, and go home to their houses.

30 As soon as they arrive || at the beach of the house, they hang the front- 1 basket in front of the body. The man who engaged them goes down to the beach | and carries up the hooked boxes, and he pours the | berries into an empty oil box. |

Picking Crabapples. —The same kind | of large swallowing-basket 1 and the medium-sized basket | and the front-basket are used by the woman for picking | crabapples, when she goes to pick them at Knight Inlet and Gwa£ye£, for these are the only places where large || crabapples grow that are not rotten. They are not rotten inside, | 5 and therefore the women who pick crabapples go to these places, for they are not [ like the crabapples of the islands, which are rotten outside | and inside. They only become harder when | the women boil them. Therefore they pick the crabapples || that I have men- 10 tioned. The season for picking crabapples is | when they are still green. The woman who- works on crabapples watches j until they are large enough. When they are large enough, | the woman gets ready, takes the | three baskets which I have named, || the paddle, 15 and the punting-pole, her cedar-bark belt, | and her cedar-bark hat. and goes aboard her small | canoe. She puts her baskets aboard, and j the belt around her waist. She wears her | cedar-bark hat; and when she is ready, she stands in the || bow of the small canoe, 20 takes the punting-pole | and punts up river stern first, when she is poling up the river at Knight Inlet. | When she comes to a place where there are many crabapple trees, she puts ashore J and steps out of the canoe. She ties up the end of her | anchor-line (some

25 Indians call it the tying line). || After she has done so, she carries the three | baskets on her back, one inside the other; and she carries them along, looking for a tree | with many crabapples. Then she puts down her | large basket and takes out the second basket, |

30 which she also puts down, and takes out the front-basket. || This she hangs in front of her body and picks crab-apples, | picking them off in bunches. She puts them into her | front-basket; and when that is full, she pours it | into the large basket. Then she goes back and picks off more | crabapples into her front-basket; and when it is

35 full, || she pours them again into the large- basket. She continues | doing this; and when the large basket is full, | she does the same with the medium-sized basket; and when that also is full, | she picks into her front-basket; and when that is also full, | she carries the large

40 basket on her back, and pours its contents || into the small canoe, in case there are many crabapples ] on the trees; and she also pours the other basket into the canoe, | and she goes on picking apples into her front-basket, and | she does as she was doing before. When |

45 the three baskets are full, she carries the || large basket on her back into the | small canoe. She goes back and carries the medium-sized |

.basket, while she is carrying the front-basket in front of her body. 47 When | all the baskets have been put into the canoe, she steps into the | bow of the small canoe, takes the paddle, || pushes the canoe 50 off shore, and paddles. She goes down stern first, | drifting down the river. As soon as she arrives in front of her | house, she goes ashore, and then her ( husband goes to meet her, and carries on his back the large | basket with crabapples up the beach and into his house. || Then he puts it down. He spreads out a new mat; and when | that 55 is done, he pours the crabapples on to it. When the basket is | emptied, he goes back, carrying it down on his back, and he gives it to his wife; j and he carries up the medium-sized basket, which he also I carries on his back, going up the beach, and he goes and carries it into his house. Then || he pours the crabapples on the mat at 60 the place to which he had carried the first | crabapples; and when this is done, he goes down again, | carrying the empty basket on his back. He gives it | to his wife, who fills it with crabapples, and also the large | basket. The large basket has already been tilled in the canoe || when he arrives. Then he | carries it on his back up the 65 beach into the house, and | he puts it down. Then he carries on his back the medium-sized | basket, he carries it up and puts it down |

70 where the other baskets are. Finally his wife || comes up, carrying the front-basket. She goes up the beach and | puts it down with the other baskets containing crabapples. Then she | eats a little food. After doing so, she asks her husband to | help her clean off the stems of the crabapples. | 1 Picking Viburnum-Berries. — The | season for picking viburnum-berries is towards the end of summer, when it is nearly autumn.1 . . . | As soon as the viburnum-berries are nearly ripe, when they are still green, | 5 the woman gets ready to pick them. She takes her || three baskets,— the large swallowing basket, the medium-sized swaUowing-basket, | and the small front-basket. These arc the same as the baskets into which huckleberries and | salal-berries are picked. She carries the baskets on her back, | and goes down in the morning to the beach in front of her house, where her | small canoe is. She puts the basket

10 aboard the canoe and || goes in. Then she takes her punting-pole of hemlock and | punts up the river of Knight Inlet, for that is the only place where viburnum-berries grow. | As soon as she reaches the place where viburnum-berries grow, she backs the stern | of the small canoe towards the shore, and she leaves the canoe. She | takes out the anchor-line and ties it to the end of a stake. After doing so, ||

15 she takes her baskets, carries them on her back, and puts them | down to where she sees many viburnum-berries on the trees. She only | takes her front-basket, which she carries in front of her body, and ten5x£wide lax was Dzawade, qaxs lex-aemae ex- qlwaxatsa tlElse.

' Continued on p. 118.

stands under | the tree that has many berries. .She plucks off 18 a bunch at a time | and puts them into her front basket. It does not take || long before the front-basket is filled; and when it is full, she 20 goes | and pours the berries into the large swallowing-basket. Then | she picks some more into the front-basket; and when that is full again, | she goes back and pours them into the large swallowingbasket; and when her | large basket is full, she does the same with the second medium-sized basket. || When there are very many ber- 25 ries, | she spreads her blanket in the bow of the canoe, | and carries the large swallowing-basket to the canoe and | pours out the viburnumberries that are in the swallowing-basket on the blanket; | and she does the same with the medium-sized basket. Then || she goes back 30 to the place where she was picking berries, and tries to fill the | three baskets again. When they are full, | she carries them on her back and puts them aboard the canoe; and when | they are all aboard, • she unties the anchor-line from the stake, | goes aboard, and drifts downstream. || Then she goes home. As soon as she arrives at the 35 beach | in front of the house, her husband comes down to meet her, and he carries on his back | the large swallowing-basket. He carries it up the beach, | and puts it down at a cool place in the house. Then he goes down again, | and carries on his back the medium-sized basket,

40 and || carries it up the beach to his house, and he | puts it down at the same place where he put the large basket. | Then he goes down again, and takes hold of each corner of the blanket containing the berries, | and he carries them up into his house | and puts them down where the berry baskets stand. | 1 Picking Qotlxole. — When the | qotlxole are nearly ripe, when it is nearly winter, | the woman takes a flat-bottomed basket. Sometimes there are | three or even four flat-bottomed baskets. This 5 is also on the || upper course of the Knight Inlet River. It is named by the DEnax"da£xu | Llaklum, what is called by the Kwakiutl qotlxole. They call the man who has them " owner of qot Ixole," | and they call the picking qotaxE. The DEnax-da£xu | call the picking L.'akwa. |

10 I will speak of this as the Kwakiutl speak. || The woman takes her baskets, as she goes down to the beach carrying the | baskets on her back, one inside of the other. She goes aboard her small canoe, and | she puts the baskets into the canoe. Then she takes the puntingpole, I stands up in the bow of the small canoe, and [ poles up the

15 river. She goes stern first, poling up the river || of Knight Inlet. As soon as she arrives at the place where the berries grow, she goes ashore. | First she takes the anchor-line of her small canoe I and ties the end to a tree standing on the bank of the river. | After doing so, 18 she carries the baskets on her back | to the place where she knows many berries are growing; and when || she comes to where they are 20 thickest, she puts down her baskets, | puts the cedar-bark belt around her waist, and, | after doing so, she puts on her cedar-bark hat. Then | she places the baskets apart, one in each place among the | plants, and she picks off the berries and puts them into the || nearest basket. She is sitting between the baskets. | Therefore she 25 puts them into the nearest one, and therefore she puts them | into every basket that has been put down all around the woman. As | soon as all the baskets are full, she does not carry them on her back, | but she takes hold of each side with her hands || and carries them out 30 of the woods, taking them to her | small canoe. She puts them down in the bow of the | canoe; and when they are all in, she | goes into the bow of the canoe, after having untied the anchor-line. | Then she takes her paddle and pushes off her small || canoe, and she paddles. 35 She drifts down the river ; | and as soon as she reaches the front of the house, she goes ashore. | When she arrives, she takes hold of the baskets on each side | with her hands, and carries them up the beach. | After they have all been taken up, she eats a little. |

1 Picking Dogwood-Berries. — | The women use the same large basket and medium-sized basket | and front-basket. When the man thinks | they will give a feast of dogwood-berries, he engages many old || 5 women to go and pick the berries. They each carry on the back their | three baskets, one inside the other; and when | they come to a place where there are many of them, they put down the baskets, take out the | fronts-basket and hang it in front of the body, and begin to pick. I They pick the berries very fast, and some people call the

10 picking qElca. |[ As soon as the women fill the front-basket, | they pour (the berries) into the large basket and go on | picking as before; and when the front-basket is filled, | again they pour the contents into the large basket. They continue | doing this while

15 they are picking; and as soon as the three || baskets are filled with berries, they carry them on their backs, — the | large baskets, — and hang the front-baskets in front of the body, | and then they go home to the house of the man who engaged them. As soon | as they go in, they put down the large baskets, and | the man takes an empty oil-box

20 and pours the berries || into it. When the large basket is empty, he gives it back to the | owner, and then the women who picked the berries go I homo. Thev take for themselves the berries in the front-

' Cornus canadensis L.

basket, | and they tell the man where they left the medium-sized | basket. Then he engages some young men of his own || numaym ' to 25 bring them out of the woods. Then they pour them | into the empty oil-box. |

Picking Gooseberries. — These | are taken by the women by shaking 1 them off on a new large | mat. They also use the large basket and the cedar-bark | belt and cedar-bark hat and a short || piece of a 5 punting-pole. The woman goes to a goosebeny- | patch while the gooseberries are still green. | The woman looks for large ones; and when she sees them, she | puts down her basket. She takes her belt, ] puts it over her blanket around her waist. || After doing so, 10 she takes her cedar-bark hat; and | when this is done, she takes her large mat and ! spreads it under the gooseberry-bush which has many gooseberries on it. When | this is done, she takes the broken pole and with it strikes | the goosebeny-bush, striking off the gooseberries || so that the}' all fall on the mat. | When the gooseberries are 15 all off from the bushes, | the woman takes her large basket and puts it down next | to the mat on which the gooseberries have fallen. She lifts the mat by two corners | and pours the gooseberries into

1 The subdivision of the tribe to which he belongs. See p. 795 et seq.

20 the large || basket. Sometimes she spreads her mat three times | under the gooseberry-bushes. Then her large basket is full. | When it is full, she folds up her mat, puts it on top | of the gooseberries in the basket, and carries the basket on her back | home to her house and puts it down. ||

III. PRESERVATION OF FOOD

Cutting Dog-Salmon.1 — When | a woman cuts dog-salmon, she 1 takes off its giUs; | then she cuts off the head and takes it off; then she cuts the | back of the dog-salmon along the upper side of the dorsal fin, beginning at the || back of the neck, and down to four 5 fingers-width from the meat of the tad. | Then she turns the salmon round and turns it over, and | she cuts from the salmon-tail up to the I back of the neck, and the meat on the | backbone is half thick and half thin (medium thickness). As soon as she has taken it off, she puts away the || outer side that is going to be made into preserved 10 salmon.2 1

Boasted Old Salmon (Those that have finished spawning | in the upper part of the river). — Now we will talk about the Nimkish | when they go to catch salmon at Prairie, above Gwane, | when they | want to get dog-salmon that is not fat when it arrives at Prairie. || As 15 soon as it is evening, the river people get read}' to | catch salmon at the place for tying up the canoe that belonged to his ancestors; for they have traditional places for tying | up their canoes when catching dog-salmon with hooks at night. As soon as | a man discovers any one who has tied his canoe there, the owner begins to fight with

' See also p. 302. 2 Continued on p. 226, line 17.

him who goes to | steal salmon with the hook. Therefore the

20 Nimkish always || disappear at night, for they club one another when | one does not give in to the owner (of such a place). Therefore they just | club one another with their punting-poles. (I just wish to | talk about this.) As soon as evening comes, the | river people start,

25 and tie their canoes to the tying-placos || where the salmon go to spawn. When it gets dark, (the man) feels about with his hook tied to a long shaft. When there are many | salmon, it does not take long before he fills (his canoe). When it is full, | he goes home. As soon as day comes, his wife takes an | old mat, spreads it over her

30 back, and then she takes her || belt and puts it over the old mat on her back. | As soon as she has done so, she takes her carrying-basket, | puts it on her back, and goes down to the place where the salmoncanoe of her husband is. | Then she first takes up the best of the dog- salmon, whose skin is not white. | Of this she makes preserved sal-

35 moil. Afterwards she carries up those whose skin is white; || and when all the best salmon have been taken up from the beach, | the one with white skin is first cut open. She does the same | as she does with the one about which 1 spoke first,1 — namely, the salmon speared at the mouth of the river, — | when it is cut open. The only point that is different is when | it is roasted, for the salmon with white skill is not as thoroughly roasted || when it is roasted, because 40 it is not fat; and it is not hung up for a long time | to dry over the lire of the house of the river people. | They try to make it thoroughly dry before it is taken down by the | woman, and she puts it away at the place where the food is kept for the winter. | Even if it is kept a long time, it does not get mouldy, and it does not || get a bad taste, 45 for it is not fat. Therefore it is liked | by the Indians. Now we will talk about it when it is | given as food in winter by the one who obtained it. | . . .

Middle Piece of Salmon. — When the | woman cuts dog-salmon, 1 making preserved salmon of what she is cutting, she | leaves the meat on the skin thick. After she has | cut it, she takes the cutting-board and puts it down outside of the |[ house, in this man- ner,1 When the meat on the skin is too thick, | she cuts it off four 5 finger-widths on the side of (the fish) from which | she is going to make preserved salmon. Then she cuts downward from the back of the neck of the | dog-salmon, and she cuts down to the tail of the dog-salmon. Then | she hangs it on the stage below the upper stage at the place on which || the preserved salmon is hung. As soon as it is half dried, the woman takes it down | and binds (the pieces) together with split cedar-bark, in this way: |

1 That is, placing its upper end on a log, so that the cutting-board slants down toward her. 75052—21—35 eth— pt 1 15

12 Then she hangs them up again where they were hanging before. As soon as they are | really dry, the woman takes them down again and puts them | into a basket made to hold the middle parts of the

15 salmon. As soon ]| as they are all in, she puts (the basket) away at a place where she made room for it | under the stage where she put her preserved salmon. |

Backbones of Salmon. The woman takes cedar bars and | splits it, and she takes two backbones (of dog-salmon) and puts them together | at the tails; that is the place where she tics them together with cedar-

20 bark in || this manner: ^ » Then she hangs them up on the stage under which | the J\ preserved salmon is dried, that, it may have the full heat jiglll^ of the hre; and when | it begins to be dry, the woman \W^~==%L makes two baskets of cedar- bark; | and when she fin- ^^ ^^ ishes them, she puts them down and takes down the backbones, j When they are all down, she sits

25 down and begins to break off the tails || from the backbones, and she throws the tails into | one basket, and she throws the backbones into the other one; | and when they are both full, the woman puts away the | two baskets under the stage on which she keeps the preserved

30 salmon. | Tins is to be food for winter use, and it is called || "backbone for soaking." It is a small basket into which she puts the | salmon-tails, and the name of the basket is "tad -receptacle." The |

i Continued in Publications of the Jesup North Pacific Expedition, Vol. V, p. -130. 'Continued from p. 223, line 10.

basket into which she puts the backbones is larger; it is called | 32 "backbone-receptacle." That is all about this.1 |

Split Salmon.— When the ( woman cuts open the dog-salmon, she 1 takes oil' the gills of the | dog-salmon, and then she cuts open and takes on' its head, and she | cuts open the back on the upper side of the back fin. || The meat on the backbone is not tlnck; and she cuts 5 down I to the tail, and she breaks off the tail. Then she | puts dew n on the ground what has been cut. She takes the backbone and cuts off the | meat that was on it from the back of the salmon's neck, and | she cuts down to four finger-widths from the place where she broke off the salmon's || tail. Then the woman turns over what 10 she is cutting, and | she cuts off the meat that was left on it; and when she reaches down | to the same distance that she has cut before on the other side, she breaks off the j backbone and throws it away when it is only bone. Then it is thus: j j Now the meat is divided at the ends, and a. piece of the // backbone || is 15

at the upper end. This is called "tail-hold- // \ ing-together." As soon as the woman finishes this, | she ^ ^ hangs this, what, is called "split-down," on a frame made for the purpose, | outside of the house. When the weather is bad, she j hangs it up on the staging in the house. Now it is hanging in this man-

' Continued in Publications of the Jesup North Pacific Expedition, Vol. V, p 435 " Continued from ibid., p. 433.

ner: | =r&yy^^= After it has been hanging thus for three days, ||

20 i t is / f[\ \ hatf dried. Then the woman takes it down | a n d LJ V — straightens it out, so that the split-down hangs straight down from the end of the tail-holding-together. | Then she hangs it up again ; t the place where it was hanging before, | and it is in this way: fl She just leaves it again hanging over one night. | Then — -4| the woman takes it down, and she pulls

25 out the short / \ bones that are left || in the split-down. As soon as all the LJ *— J bones are out, she rubs it | as the women do when they are washing clothes; | and therefore the splitdown is soft, and therefore also it is | white. After she has fin- ished rubbing it, she hangs it up again | at the place where it was

30 hanging before; and when it is really dry, the || woman takes it down again and puts it on a mat. As soon as it is | all down, she takes two cedar-bark baskets and puts them down at the place where she is working, | and she takes the split- down and breaks off the tailholding-together and | throws it into one of the baskets. Then she rubs | the split-down again; and after she has done so, she throws it

35 into the || other basket; and she continues doing so, and only | stops when it is all finished. Then she puts away the two | baskets under the staging where she keeps the preserved salmon. | It serves for winter food.' j

' t'ontinu?d in Publications of the Jesup North Pacific Expedition. Vol. V, p. 433.

Fresh Roasted Backbone. When | the dog-salmon is cut by the 1 woman, | the dog-salmon is put on an old ma1 to be cut. Then | the woman cuts off the gills of the dog-salmon, so that they || are attached 5 only to the end of the intestines of the dog-salmon. Then she cuts off | the head; and as soon as it is off, the woman | begins to cut, beginning at the back of the neck of the dog-salmon, and going to four finger-widths | from its tail. Then she cuts along the upper side of the dorsal fin; | then she turns around what she is cutting, and she cuts into it || on the upper (dorsal) side where she stopped, four fin- 10 ger-widths from the tail of the dog-salmon. [ Then she cuts it , beginning from there, until she reaches the back of the neck. | Then the meat on the backbone is t luck when she takes it off from the | skin. When there are many backbones, the woman | takes straight-splitting pinewood and she splits it in || pieces to make roasting-tongs. These are 15 four spans | in length. As soon as she finishes splitting them, she puts them into the ground | where she is working. Then she takes the intestines of the dog-salmon and | rubs them on the roastingtongs. As soon as they are all slimy, [ she takes cedar-bark and ties it around under the || split part of the roasting-tongs; and after she 20 finishes tying it, she takes | the backbone and puts it crosswise into the roasting-tongs ; and as soon as | four have been put in, she ties a piece of cedar-bark | just over them. Then she takes four more pieces of backbone and | puts them over those that have been tied in. As 25 soon as these four are also done, || she ties (the tongs) up again above them, anil she keeps on | doing so; and she only stops when she reaches the end of the roasting-tongs. | That is in this way: As soon as they are full, she takes j four slender pieces of split pine and places them lengthwise | on the ends of the 30 backbones in the roasting-tongs. Now there is one || long strip of split pine on each side. Then she takes six pieces | and pushes them through between the two legs of the roasting-tongs; then | she puts one on each side of the backbones; then she pushes them over (the long split sticks), | and thus they are fastened. After this is done, she puts them in the ground by the side | of the lire of the house; and when they begin to 35 blacken, the woman || takes them and puts them right over the fire. | Now they are finished, and they are called "roasted backbones" after this. | 1 Pectoral Fins of Dog-Salmon (Pectoral fins of the dog-salmon taken | at the upper part of the river).- When the woman cuts the | dog-salmon and she finishes taking off the gills, she | cuts around I he 5 neck of the dog-salmon, and cuts oil' the || pectoral lins, half a. finger thick, | and they are just hanging down. Then she also | cuts oil' the anal fins and takes them off. She puts them into a | basket;

1 Pectoral Fins of Dog-Salmon (PEL.'Exa'£wesa gwaExnise g-a'yol

'Continued in Publications of the Jesup North Pacific Expedition, Vol. V, p. 437.

and after she has sliced that which is to be preserved salmon, | she S hangs it up at the place where she is going to dry it. After she finishes hanging it up, || she takes a drying-rack and puts the anal 10 fins on it, and she. scatters them | over it. Then she puts it up right over the fire, so that the heat | of the fire strikes it. She finishes thai ; and when [ the salmon is half dry, the woman takes down that which is to be preserved salmon. | Then she takes her fish-knife and cuts off the pectoral fins [[ and throws them also into a basket. After 15 she has done so, | she hangs up the basket with the pectoral fins in it by the side of the | drying-rack on which the anal fins are. After this is done, | she gathers the drying-poles and spreads on them that which is to be preserved salmon, | with the meat side downward, to the fire. || When she has done so, she watches the pectoral tins and 20 the | anal fins until they are thoroughly dry. As soon as they are thoroughly dry, | she puts them away as food for the winter. She does | the same with the salmon-tails, which are also put on a drying rack | when they are dried. Now we shall talk about the way || they 25 are cooked.

Dog-Salmon Cheeks. (Plucked cheek, the head of the dog-salmon i when it is | roasted, to keep it for winter use). —

When the Nimkish go to catch salmon in the river Gwane, above, and when there are many dog-salmon, the || woman cuts oil' their 5

'Continued on p. 327, line 1.

6 heads. Then the woman takes | wood of the red-pine that splits readily. (She makes pieces) one span and four fingers long, | and she splits them to make roasting-tongs. Sometimes she makes | one hundred, and sometimes she makes two hundred. | After her work is finished, she gathers them up, and takes them to the place where

10 she || cuts dog-salmon. Then she puts up on the ground one pair of tongs, and | puts the salmon-head on the end of the tongs, which are open; | and she just stops pushing down the head | when the points of the tongs reach up to the eyes of the head. | The roasting-

15 tongs are not tied with cedar-bark. After || she has finished with one of them, she puts down what she has finished; | then she takes another pair of roasting-tongs and | puts them up in the place where t he first ones have been standing. Then | she does with them the same thing as she did with the first ones. | She goes on doing so with the

20 others. After she has || finished, her husband takes much fire-wood and makes a fire | on the beach. When the fire that he makes blazes up, they | take the heads in the roasting-tongs and place them around it. | First the throats are roasted; and when they begin to be black, | they turn them all round, so that the nape of the neck is

25 next || to the fire on the beach. As soon as the skin is blackened, they are taken from the fire | and put down on the beach; and when they cool off, she | takes the salmon-heads out of the roasting-tongs and puts them down on the beach | by her side. When she has 28 taken them all off, she takes the roasted salmon-heads | and breaks open the jaws. She spreads them out so that they are || spread out 30 flat. Then she takes out the edible part inside the head, and only | the skin and the bones are left on the "plucked cheek." As soon as | this is done, she takes a long drying-rack. Sometimes it is | a little over a fathom in length. The width of the drying-rack is | two spans and four finger-widths. || She puts her "plucked salmon- 35 cheeks" on it. They are all spread out | when they are on the drving-rack, and they are close together | on it. As soon as this is all done, she takes what she has done | and puts it just over the fire of the house, where it is really | hot. When she finishes, she requests her husband to || go and call those who are walking about 40 in the village, the men the | children and the women, and even the weak old women, | to go and eat the edible part taken out of the head when it was lifted | from the roasting-place of the "plucked cheek." Immediately the | man calls all the men and all the women || and children seen by him to come quickly and to eat the 45 roasted | salmon-heads. It is not long before all those whom lie j invited come down to the beach, and they sit around (lie heap of roasted edible insides of the | salmon-heads. Then they begin to eat; and as soon as they have had enough, | they carry away what 50 they could not eat. They carry || it in their hands and go home. But the owner of the | heads which arc called "plucked cheeks" goes up from the beach and makes a fire under the "plucked cheeks." When they are dry enough, (the woman) takes them down and puts them into a | large basket. Then she puts them away for the winter. | That is the end. || 1 Koasted Dog-Salmon Heads (Heads of |dog-salmon when they are roasted ami dried, with the edible insides). —

When the woman cuts oil the head of the [ dog-salmon, and when

5 she has many salmon-heads, she takes the || same number of short roasting-tongs of the same kind as the roasting-tongs | for roasting the "plucked cheek," and she does in the same way as she does j when she roasts them. Each point of the roasting-tongs is pushed | into each side of the neck of the salmon-head, and reaches up to the eyes. |

When this is done, she puts them up around the fire on the ground, ||

10 outside of the house. First the jaws are roasted; and | when they begin to be black, she turns them around with the nape of the neck |

towards the tire; and when that begins to be black also, she takes them | into the house. Then she puts them up with the | roasting-

15 tongs over the fire, right where it is really hot. \ They stay there a long time, and she takes them down when they begin to be quite | 16 dry. Then she takes off the roasting- tongs, and | she ties the roastingtongs together and puts them in the corner of the house. | That is also what the woman does when she roasts the "plucked cheeks." Then | she takes a large cedar-bark basket and puts the roasted heads || into it; then she puts it away for winter use. | ' 20

Dog-Salmon Spawn (1) (Scattered spawn of the dog-salmon, | caught 1 in the upper part of the rivers when the dog-fish are spawning). — When a woman cuts the fish caught by her husband, | she takes a high box and puts it down at her || left side at the place where she is 5 cutting; and after | the woman has finished cutting the dog-salmon, and when | what she is cutting is opened out, then she scoops out with her hands the scattered J spawn and puts it into the tall box; and after she has | done so. and the box is full of the scattered spawn, || her husband goes up and puts it down in the | corner of the 10 house. Then short boards are put down flat on top of it, that | the rain may not drip in when it rains. When | that is done, he leaves it, for the cover is not water-tight, for | the men will always go and take out some of it. |

Dog-Salmon Spawn (2). — Now we will talk about the sticky(spawn). | 1 When the tall box is full of spawn, when | the woman cuts the dogsalmon, she takes a | dish and washes it out, When it is clean, she || 5 dips up the fresh salmon-spawn into it. When it is half full, | she stops, and she takes a smooth stone and pounds | it so that it all bursts. After it has all burst, she | stops pounding it. Then she takes a good-sized seal-bladder and | puts the burst salmon-spawn

10 into it. She just finishes putting it into it || when it is full. When it is full, she takes a twisted cedar-bark rope | and ties the neck of the bladder firmly. After this has been done, | she hangs it up not very near to the fire, in the | rear of the house. Then it remains hanging there until | the fern and the salmon-berries begin to sprout. ||

15 The juice of this is also used by painters for making the paint | stick on what they paint. |

Quarter-Dried Salmon. — This is | another way of (preparing) soaked green salmon. Now we will talk about | the way of (prepar-

20 ing) quarter-dried green salmon. Wlien || dog-salmon are first speared, when very old, the wife of the | one who speared them carries them up with her fingers, and places them on the mat on wloich | she cuts open the dog-salmon that her husband lias obtained. | Then she takes her fish-knife and cuts the old dog-salmon. | She first cuts

25 the gills at the neck || of the salmon, and then she cuts off the head and takes it off. I Then she cuts down along the back from the neck down | to four finger-widths above the tail. A little [ meat is left 27 on the backbone. The meat on the green salmon is thick. | Then she takes split-cedar sticks and || spreads (the green salmon) as she 30 does the dried green salmon. As soon as | she has spread it, she hangs it up in the smoke of the fire of her | house. Sometimes it hangs there one day; | then it is half dried. As soon as it is half dried, the woman takes it down | and looks for a mixture of sand and clay on the || bank of the river; and as soon as it is dry, she digs it 35 out; | and when she has dug two spans deep into the ground, | she spreads out one of the quarter-dried green salmon in it; then | she takes grass and puts it over it; then she strews a | handful of dirt (sand and clay mixed) over it. As soon as it is covered with || dirt, 40 she takes another green salmon and | spreads it out in the hole; then she puts grass | over it, and she again puts dirt on it. | Sometimes one woman puts a hundred in | one hole. Then she covers it above with dirt, || and much grass is put under it; | and it is still there 45 when winter arrives. |

Spawn of Silver- Salmon. — Now I shall talk about the | spawn of the 1 silver-salmon and of the sockeye-sahnon caught by trolling; for they are alike, | and their spawn is small. When | the woman cuts what

5 her husband has caught by trolling, and also || the sockeye-salmon caught in salmon-weirs, she puts the spawn down on the beach | on the right-hand side of the place where she is sitting and cutting. As soon as she has finished | cutting, she takes a drying-rack, made on purpose, and puts | the spawn on it in this manner: |j » jj ; As soon as this is done, | she puts it up just over the

10 fire, so that it is smoked by the smoke. || It is left there a long time, and it is only taken down when it is j really dry; and it is put into a spoon-basket of open weave, | and then she hangs it up again | behind the lire so that inrHnnnr' it gets just enough heat from it. Then it is | called "dried-partof-salmon," and its name is "whole-piece.'' ||

15 Sockeye-Salmon. — that is, (old) white sockeye-salmon. | When the sockeye gets white in the upper part of the river, | it is called "ugly sockeye salmon;" and it is speared by those who live on the livers | at the spawning place of the ugly sockeye-salmon at the upper part of the river. As soon as | (a man) gets many, his wife

2(j cuts some - /7T\ of them in the same way || as the dog-salmon are cut / \ when they are made into green dry salmon. | She just / \ cuts right down the back of the salmon in this manner: / — ^ — 1 | She does not allow it to be taken into the house, for she does not allow it | to be smoked by the smoke. Her husband only | puts up the staging for hanging up what has been cut by his wife; and the || -woman hangs up what she lias cut, and it 25 is dried by the | sun and the wind. It is left hanging there with cross-sticks | of broken cedar in the tails, which | cross over the two diving-poles. It is left there for a long time, so that it becomes really dry. | When it begins to be dry, it is named "sun-dried salmon." | When it begins to be really dry, the woman [ takes it down and takes 30 off the cross-pieces of cedar-wood from the tails. As soon | as they are all off, she gathers them, and takes them into her [ house. She takes a box and tilts it over by the side of the | lire; and soon it becomes warm, and then it becomes dry inside. After it is || quite 35 dry inside, she puts it down on the floor of the house not far from the | fire, so that it is heated by the heat of the fire. Then she | takes the sun-dried salmon and puts it away well in it. After | she has done so, she puts the cover on the box containing the sun-dried salmon. | Then the cover is tied down with cedar-bark rope. || Then she 40 finishes it. ]

Old Sockeye-Salmon. — I will again talk about ugly sockeye- 1 salmon. | When a man has caught many ugly sockeye-salmon, his wife | makes sun-dried salmon of some of them. Others she splits in two; | and when she gets tired of cutting sun-dried salmon, || she 5 just splits the others, in two. She just cuts off | the heads of the

7 ugly sockeye-salmon, and she also cuts off the | backbone; and she cuts down across, dividing the body of the | salmon into two pieces, which arc only held together by the tail. | As soon as she finishes, her

Id husband puts up poles; || then he puts up posts on each end of which rest the long poles over wliich the split salmon are hung. | After he has done so, the woman takes the split salmon and | hangs them over the poles in this manner: y y and | they are also put up outside of the house, £j=7/\ //\ jl and the | sun and the wind ilvy them, and there /] M LJ LJ *aey st;iy a ^on§ time II

15 before they are dry. As soon as night comes, |

the woman takes a large I mat of coarse cedar-bark and spreads | it over them to cover them, so that they may not got damp | by the dew of the night; and when it is a fine day, | she uncovers them again in the morning and takes off the large mat cover-

20 ing, || so that the heat of the sun and the wind may reach them; and when it is | raining, she does not uncover them. When they are really dry, | the woman takes them down and takes them into the house. | Then she takes a cedar-bark basket and puts them into it. After | they have been put in, she puts them away close to the

25 fire. || This will be food for the winter. Sometimes they | do the same with the silver-salmon. They do not do the same with dogsalmon | and other kinds of salmon. That is all of this. |

Roasted Silver-Salmon. (Roasted tails of silver-salmon caught by | 1 trolling.) ||

When the silver-salmon caught by trolling is cut open, | the 30 tail is left on the backbone. After | the woman has cut it, she takes the roasting-tongs and breaks off the | tail from the backbone, and she puts the salmon-tails | crosswise into the roasting-tongs in this manner : m Often || the salmon-tails are taken off after the 35 backbone has CP been roasted, | in this manner they only pg break them off after they have )3p | roasted. | dH After the tails have been put JM [ the roasting- CP tongs, | they are put by the ^ of the fire; — * — and when theskinis blackened, | D)*^§ are taken away and laid down || just over the fire, so the heat of the fire goes right up to them; | and when the owner of the house gets hungry ,he just takes | them down and eats of them. And if he does not eat all (he has taken down), he just | puts it back above. |

Halibut. — [The method of halibut fishing has been described in "The Kwakiutl of Vancouver Island'' (Publications of the Jesup North Pacific Expedition, Vol. V, pp. 472-4S0). The account continues as follows :]

As soon as (the halibut-fisher) enters his house, his wife | quickly 1 gives him something to eat; and when he begins to eat, his wife | goes out of the house, carrying her small basket, in which she has four fish-knives. | She is going to work on all the halibut lying on their backs on the beach. ||

5 Now I will talk about the woman, what she is going to do after | her husband has finished fishing; for the man never | helps his wife this side of his going out | fishing (after he has finished fishiug), and also when he has hauled the halibut out of his halibut-fishing canoe.1 . . ||

10 As 2 soon as the woman sits down on the beach at the place where | the halibut have been put down, she takes out her four knives, and | she takes a sandstone and whets her knives on it. | As soon as the four knives are sharp, she | first takes the fin-knife; for the four

15 knives all have names. || The first knife is the fin-knife; | the next one, the cutting-knife; the next one, the Making-knife; and | the last one, the splitting-knife. She sits down by the head of the halibut, and | she cuts open the lower part of the belly of the halibut, (in this manner:)3 ^^Ife^. ^e cu*s a^ around it- | Then she turns it y^^^^^^. A backward and takes the cut-

20 ting-knife and || £•') O %[ cu^s under the cheek-fins, and cuts out the ^ ^J gills. As | soon as she has them off, she pulls **^P^S^ out the intestines of thehalibut, and she | cuts off the guts so that they come off from the stomach. Then she turns the stomach inside out, so as to | spread it, and puts it down. Last she cuts off the pectoral fins, | on the other side, and

) Continued in Publications of the Jesup North Pacific Expedition, Vol. V, p. 4S0. • Continued from ibid., p. 480. ■That is, close to the edge of the fish.

puts them down. Then she cuts around the || skin, keeping close to 25 the edge-fin. She only stops cutting when she | arrives at the end of the tail [salt-taste tail]. Then | she begins to cut from behind the head of the halibut, at the place where she first cut it. She | does the same on the other side. Then she cuts off the skin of the white side. | As soon as the skin is off, she cuts down along the middle of the || backbone of the halibut; and when she reaches the backbone, 30 she again | cuts, beginning from the rough edge, cutting close to the | ribs, until she reaches the backbone. Then she takes off one side of the | halibut and puts it down, (in this manner:) Then she does the same also | on the other side. As soon as it is off, she turns it over and cuts ^ is off also || the skin of the black side. As soon as it is off, she cuts | also that side of the rough-edge, and goes on to the backbone. When she | reaches it again, she cuts down straight | to the backbone, and she puts it down with what came from the other side. | Then she does the same also to the other side that was still on. || As soon as all the meat of the 40 halibut is off, she takes off the apron-side (spawn) | and puts it down. Then she cuts off the head, and she | takes the rib of an elk and takes hold of the tail. Then she lifts the backbone of the halibut by the tail and cuts off the ribs, | cutting them WOTMST" close to the backbone, (in this manner:)

45 As soon as the ribs are off, || the woman takes cedar-bark and ties the tail-ends of | both sides of the ribs of the backbone together, (in this manner:) ,/OT5V Then she carries them | up and hangs themjustover ^W%j the fireplace of the house. She | takes her roasting- i)t§j Ysyfy/ tongs and takes them down to where the fins are. | She ^fc§3 ^"i/ ta^e3 them at once, and puts four fins

50 in one pair of || V^^ fifes' roasting-tongs. She ties the roastingtongs on top with cedar-bark. | Then she takes thin split cedar- wood, and puts it over each side, (in this manner:) | fh .. As soon as she has done so,. she gathers driftwood on r f^ the beach, | and makes a fire; and when the fire that she has made blazes up, she | picks up stones and puts

55 them on the fire that she has made. As soon as || there are enough on it, she takes the fins in the roastingtongs and | puts them up by its side. Then she gathers the backbones | while the tail is still attached to them ; and she takes the | stomachs and puts them down on the beach, not far from the stones in the fire. | Then she also takes mats and puts them down

60 there also with her || tongs, and also a bucketful of water. As soon | as the fins are roasted, she takes them away from the stones on the fire; | and when the stones are red-hot, she takes her | tongs and with them takes off the wood that is left on the fire. | When it is all off, she takes old eel-grass, and puts it around j| the red-hot 65 stones; and she plucks off | broad-leaved grass, and throws it over the | hot stones. As soon as they are covered, she takes the | stomach and puts it on the stones. Then she takes the head and | puts it on the stones, close to the old eel-grass, inside of it. || As soon as 70 this is done, she takes the fins that have not been roasted and | puts them on also, and also some of the rough-edge and of the | backbone, which she puts on also, and also the tail and the | apron-part. As soon as it is all on, she takes her mats and | spreads them down to one side of what she is steaming. Then she takes a || bucket with 75 water and pours it over what she is steaming. | After she has finished pouring the water, she takes the mats and covers it | with them, so that the steam cannot come through. After she has done so, | she takes her fish-basket and picks up the guts of the | halibut, and the fiver and the slime. After she has it all, || she carries it down to the SO beach, and she throws it into the sea. | Then she washes out her fishbasket, so that all the slime comes off | from it; and then she goes up the beach, takes the pieces cut off from one side of the halibut, and | scrapes off the blood. After she has done so, she spreads them out | on the beach, so that they are not one on top of the other, but very close together || at the edges. Then she covers them over with 85 a mat, for it is not | good if they are split while they are still fresh.

87 Therefore | they are only split the following day. After she has finished covering them, | she calls those who are walking about to come and sit down on the | beach. As soon as they arrive, she takes

90 off the covering of || what she is steaming. Then she spreads a mat on the beach, as a place on which to throw | the bones that are left over when they eat. As soon as the guests finish eating, | the woman watches that all the | guests throw on the mat the bones that are left over. | As soon as all the guests begin to eat, taking up their

95 food || with their hands, while they are eating; and when they eat, | they throw all the bones that are left over, and the fat skin, | on the mat spread on the beach. After they have eaten, the | guests get up from the beach and go down and | wash their hands in the sea. 100 When they have finished, they || all go home to their houses and drink water there; | and the woman scrapes off from the stones the rest of the food of her | guests, and puts it on the mat; and she puts the | rest of the food of her past guests on it, and she carries it down to the beach, | and she shakes it into the sea. Then she washes 5 off || the mat, so that it is clean. After she finishes | washing it, she carries it back, and hangs it at the place where the | halibut is dried. After she finishes, she gathers the skins of the | halibut and takes them into her house to hang them up | over the fire, so that they are doas] PRESERVATION OF FOOD 247

heated by the heat. || The meat-side of all of them is upward. 10 This is the way that the Indians call | " turning up the back." Then she takes a rest, for she will | split the halibut that is to be dried on the following day. |

This is the way the Indians do when they catch the first halibut. | Everything is steamed by the women, for it is said that the halibut know || that the one who caught them first is thankful for it. There- 15 fore | it is steamed at once when it is first caught; and it is said, that, if | the one who caught halibut first does not cook it right away, he will not | have another bite. The fisherman will go out in vain trying to | fish halibut. Therefore they do this way when halibut is first caught. || The woman does not do thus when | more hahbut is 20 caught by her husband. When they first take out the stomach of | what is next caught by her husband, then they throw it all into the | sea, with the guts and the heads | and the backbone and the apronpart. Often they also || throw the fins into the water. Sometimes 25 they | hang up the fins at the drying-place of the hahbut, so that they get half dry. | As soon as they are half dry, they boil them, and eat them with spoons | with the liquid. But the woman only now and then eats | roasted fins, when she takes a rest from splitting her halibut, || the four that are being roasted while she is steaming the 30 stomach and | the other parts. |

32 As soon as the autumn comes, when the halibut are really fat, | the fishermen go out again to fish halibut for food in | winter. Their

35 wives take out the stomachs and || cut off the gills, and they split them open and spread them out on the beach; and they | spread them right over the fire of the house, so as to dry them; | that is called "dried stomach." And they cut off the | head, and they cut off the lower jaw and open it out, | and they cut on each side of the

40 bone in the head. || As soon as it is off, [the woman] throws it away on the beach, | at the place where the brain was. And she spreads the outer skin also | just over the fire of the house. That is called | "dried head." And she takes the fins and hangs them up at | the same place where she first hung the others; and that is called "dried

45 fins." || Then she takes the ribs and hangs them up, in the same way as I | have said before [p. 244]; and this is called "ribs." | And she takes the rough-edges and ties them together at the tail-ends, and she | hangs them up at the same place where the others are, and this has the same name. | And she also takes the tail and cuts down the

50 side; || and as soon as it is spread, she takes out the end of the backbone, | and she also spreads it over the poles where the others were; and this is called | "dried tail." And she also takes the apron-part and | hangs it up where the others are, and this is called "dried apron." | And she also takes the skin and spreads it on a cuttingboard || for dried halibut. The meat side of the skin is upward. | 55 Then she takes her splitting-knife, and she cuts under the | thick layer of fat of the skin, and two finger-widths is the width | of splitting it ; and she continues cutting [what she is doing] until she comes to the | tail, for she begins at the neck, and it just does || not come 60 off; and she does the same with the other side: this is | called " tornfrom-the-edge." The torn-off edges | do not come off from the skin. As soon as | the woman finishes, she hangs it up at the place where the others are. | She puts the meat-side upwards; but when it has been hanging four [| days, the woman takes down the skin, and she 65 tears off the | torn-off edges. And when they are all off, the woman takes a | narrow" piece of cedar-bark and ties them in the middle, and she hangs them up | again not very near to the fire, namely, | the torn-off edges. Then she hangs up the skin again also. This is only || done to those that are caught in the autumn, when the halibut 70 is just | getting fat. . . -1

When the guests have gone out, | the woman sharpens her fishknives, in the evening; | and when she has done so, she takes the cutting-board | and scrapes it off, so that it is clean. After she has done so, she || puts it down on the beach where she is going to split 75

■Here follows a description of the cooking and eating of halibut-heads (pp. 357-359). Then the text continues as above.

76 the (halibut). Now she is | ready for the following day. As soon as day comes, the | woman goes down to the beach, to the place where she is going to cut the halibut; | and she sits down at the place where the cutting-board is already put up, in this manner: | Then she takes one-quarter of the halibut and puts it

80 down on its back on the || cutting-board. The skinside is next to the cutting-board, | and the side next to the ribs is upward. Then | she cuts it downward, in this manner: pi i-i'l She begins at the neck of the halibut, | and goes half way / / l/l down the quarter towards the thin end. It is | thicker at /\h// one en(^) anc^ ^s length is two spans of

85 our || fingers I / and two finger-widths. Then she does |

the same to y the other quarter; and if one piece is cut too long, | she V/ cuts it off and throws it into a basket which is made on purpose | for the unused cut-off pieces. When she has done so with the | other pieces at which she is working,

90 she puts them on a mat spread out on the beach. Then || she takes one piece and puts it down on the cutting-board; for | all the halibut is cut into long, square pieces.1 Then | she cuts them length- wise, going straight down the long thick pieces of halibut. She | cuts them, beginning at the thick end, going towards the thin end. j She stops cutting when they are half the width of a little finger ||

95 thick. Then she turns her knife down flat, and she cuts under I one

1 That is, square in cross-section.

side of what she is working at; and then she rolls out the halibut, 96 thus [ the piece that she is cutting becomes thin; and she only stops when it is spread out. | Then she rolls it up again and turns it over, and she also cuts it thin | (on the other side) ; and she does not stop cutting until it is all spread open. She || goes on doing so with the 200 others. As soon as all the halibut is cut thin, | she hangs the pieces up on the drying-place . . for the dried halibut, I in this manner: "Jf /^=7^A-7^?YffC' She hangs them up lengthwise. | After / V ^ * — ^ ^jf \ t,ney have all been hung up, the / \ $ \ woman takes her I fish-knives and puts ■ them into her small basket, and carries them || away with the basket in which the 5 cut-off tips of the halibut are.1 . . . |

When 2 it is evening, the woman goes down to the | beach, to the place where the drying halibut is. Then she gathers up the drying-poles I on which the drying-halibut hangs. As soon as she has gathered them all, | she covers them over with mats, so that the || dew of the night will not get at them. | 1 0

When day comes, she takes off the covering- 1 mats, and she spreads out again the drying-poles on which the drying halibut hangs. | She does so every evening and every | morning. Sometimes it takes three days || before the drying-halibut is half dry. When it is half 15

1 Continued on p. 359. ■ Continued from p. 359.

16 dry, | she takes down all the drying halibut, and she opens them, so that they are spread open. | Then she hangs them up again lengthwise.

They are hanging | in this way: fine day, they are then ready in j 20 they are thoroughly dry. As comes, they are taken down are opened out again and | spread out on the beach.

When it is a one day, and soon as || day again, and Then they are spread out on the drying-poles. As soon as | much halibut is ready, she spreads in this manner: halves length-

25 puts it away || pose in one in this manner: halibut on top of weight one on anflat. | That fin-

the drying halibut out | on the beach, and when it is dry, | she folds it in wise, in this way: , and she on a stage made l^-^ --/ on purcorner of the ' "— ■ — house, and the woman piles one another. Then they other, and they become ishes this. | As soon as all the dried halibut is flat, || being piled up one on another, they get damp again. Then the | woman takes large baskets, made on purpose, and she puts | the dried halibut into them, one hundred in each. Finally | she puts (the baskets) in a place where the damp can not get at them. Now this is done. ]

' Continued on p. 360.

Dried Codfish. — When they can not | catch any halibut and they 1 have much codfish, | the woman takes out the guts, and she does in the same way as I | described before when she cuts what has been caught by her [| husband; and she also does in the same way when ,3 she spreads open the meat | while the skin is still on. As soon as | the bone is taken off, the woman takes off the skin and throws it away, j Then one-half of it is this way: .--- — J Then the woman | cuts it in two lengthwise. Then there p""-^ are four pieces on both sides. || Then she cuts straight *-- 1 down one-half of | one 10

side in this manner, , _^^ and she does in the same way |

as she does with the -_^\ halibut when she cuts them thin, and they are | ' — ^ hung up at the place where halibut is dried. It is done in the same manner. | As soon as it gets dry, it is all white; and when it is || bad weather, it is dried in the 15 house, behind | the fire. When it gets dry, it is all red. | All this does not keep well, the sun-dried as well as the | smoke-dried (fish). That is all about this. |

The dried codfish is treated in the same way, and they also || do 20 everything with it that they do with dried halibut. It is eaten as breakfast in the morning | when there is no dried salmon in the house. I

1 Herring-Spawn.1 — When (the man) has all (the spawn) in the canoe, | he goes ashore at a point where the wind blows hard. Then he | takes the long ^_j^a poles and puts them up in this way : j "^^^^S^^^^^^^S^* This is called "standing on rock;" ff^Slli^-i^^^rr^^^' and when he 5 has finished || hanging // jS^feg-^T^^T^^^^^ up the hemlock-branches with \f the spawn on it, and when it is fine weather | and the wind is blowing hard, (the spawn) gets dry in six days; | and when it is all dry, the man takes down the | hemlock-branches with the spawn on them and puts them on the rocky place, and | his wife wipes off the herring-spawn from the hemlock-branches. Then she 'puts

10 it j| on a mat; and when it is done, she covers it with a mat, | when it is evening. In the morning, when day comes, she | spreads all the mats, and she scatters the herring-spawn over them; and when | it is really dry, she takes her boxes and she | picks out from among the white herring-spawn large pieces and puts them into

15 the || boxes; and when (a box) is full, she takes the cover | and puts it on. Then she puts it away in a dry place in the house". | This is kept to be eaten in winter. Then she takes a | medium-sized cedar-bark basket and puts into it the red spawn. | This is sold to other tribes,

20 f°r II this is not good to be kept long. Now that is all about hemlockbranches with | herring-spawn on them. . . . Kelp is also towed

) Continued from p. 185. » Continued on p. 422, line 1. "Continued from p. 422, line 12.

and I put into the spawning-place. It is also anchored there; | and 22 when the herring finish spawning, after four days, | the kelp with the spawn on it is taken oUt of the water; and || the hair of the kelp 25 is pulled off from its stem and is hung on the poles | on the point where the wind blows hard, and the | woman always turns it over; and she does not do so a long time, | before it gets dry; and when it is quite dry, | the stems of kelp are counted into lots of ten, which are laid flat || one on another, and are tied in the middle with 30 cedar bark, this way: ,^^)_^ Then they are put into a box, and | a cover is put I|gS||[lllS on tight. Then it is put away in a dry place | in the ^=^^^^ "=^ house. This is to be eaten in winter. That is all about this. |

Preserving Roots. — See p. 188.

Elderberries. — After1 all (the berries) have been earned down- l stream, (the woman) spreads a | mat at a place not too near the fire. She unties | the cords of her elderberry-basket, and pours the berries | on the mat that has been spread down. She sits down by the side of it, and puts the || empty baskets down on her left-hand side. Then 5 she takes up one bunch of | elderberries at a time and strips off the elderberries into the cleaning-basket. | As soon as they are all off, she throws away the stem and | takes up another bunch of elderberries and strips the berries | into the basket in which she had carried the

Preserving Roots. — See p. 188.

1 Continued from p. 205, line 23.

10 elderberries. || When these are also off, she throws away the stems, and | continues doing so with the other elderberries. When they are all | off, she goes to pick more elderberries. In the morning, when daylight comes, | she does the same as she did before when she went

15 to pick elderberries; | and when her baskets are full, she || ties down the top and she carries them down river on her back, | carrying one basket at a time; and she does the same as she did with the | elderberries she picked first, stripping the berries. When | they are all off, she puts them into the baskets; and | when this is done, she

20 spreads a mat over them so that the || soot of the roof can not drop on them during the night. In the morning, when daylight comes, | she takes her paddle, goes to her small canoe and ] launches it, in order to go and get fire-wood. When she reaches | the place where there is much driftwood, she puts it aboard her small canoe; | and when

25 it is full, she goes home. When || she reaches the beach of her house, she takes out of the canoe the | driftwood that she has obtained ; and when it is all on shore, she asks her | husband to carry it up | into the house. Then her husband goes and | carries it up into his house;

30 and his wife goes, taking her clam-digging stick || and a shell of the horse-clam. She sits down on the floor in the | middle of the house, and with the end of her digging-stick digs up [ the ground. Then she starts and measures | three long spans and one short one for the length 33 of her | digging, and the same for the width of the hole she digs with her digging-stick. || Then she cleans the soil out with the 35 large clam-shell. When | it is one span and four finger-width- | deep, she stops digging. Then she takes the small | pieces of driftwood and puts them into the hole; and when they are level | with the floor, she takes larger pieces of driftwood and || puts them down 40 on the sides of the hole. Then she puts one down on each side, inside of these two, | and she lays other medium-sized sticks crosswise close together over the | four pieces. After this has heen done, she takes her medium-sized hand- | basket, goes down to the beach, and puts stones | into it. When it is full, she carries it up || into her 45 house, and she pours the stones over the wood that she has built up. She I keeps on doing this, and does not stop until there are many stones on it. I When she thinks there are enough, she stops. She takes the | large basket, goes into the woods, where she is going to look for dead fern and | skunk-cabbage. First she plucks off the ■ lead fern-fronds; and when || her basket is full, she breaks off the 50 broadest leaves of skunk-cabbage; | and when she has broken off many of them, she piles them on top of the fern-fronds j and ties them down. She puts the basket on her back and carries j it out of the woods into the house. She puts it down on the floor, | not too

55 close to the pile of wood and stones. She does not set fire || to it until daylight. As soon as the wood is burnt up, she | takes her tongs, which are in readiness on the floor of the house. She also takes a long-handled | large ladle and a large dish. If | there are many elderberries, there are three, or even four, | large dishes for holding

60 the boiled elderberries. This is all || she needs for her work. When the stones are red-hot, | she takes her tongs and picks out what is left | of the drift-wood and the small pieces of charcoal. When | these are all out of the fire from the stones, she levels down the top of the | red-hot stones so that it is level; and after this has been done, she ||

05 takes the dead fern-fronds and sprinkles a little water over them, just enough to | dampen them; and after this has been done, she throws them on the red-hot | stones. When these are thickly covered with dead fern-fronds, she takes the | broad leaves of skunkcabbage and spreads them over the dead fern-fronds as smoothly as possible; | and she bends the edges of the skunk-cabbage leaves in at

70 the sides || of the hole that she has dug; and she only stops when she has four layers of | skunk-cabbage leaves on top of the fern-fronds. After doing so, she | takes her elderberry -basket, and she pours the bemes over the | skunk-cabbage leaves; and when all have been poured on, she takes many | skunk-cabbage leaves and spreads them over the elderberries. || She stops when these are very deep, and she 75 waits for the j berries to be cooked. Then she washes the large dishes and the | large long-handled ladle; and after doing so, she rests for a little while. When evening comes, she peels off the skunk-cabbage covering | from the elderberries which have been steamed; and after the skunk cabbage lias been taken off, || she takes SO the large dishes and puts them all round it. | Then she takes the large ladle and dips into the cooked | elderberries. She puts them into the large dish; and | when it is full, she continues dipping into them and pouring them into the other elderberry-dishes. | When all have been taken out of the steaming-hole, she takes || other skunk-cabbage 85 leaves and spreads them over the cooked-elderberry | dishes, for she does not want the soot to fall into them. She | leaves them that way over night, so that they will cool off and become | cold in the night, and also that they may become thick. | In the morning, when day comes, the woman who works at the elderberries takes a straightsplitting || cedar-stick, square in cross-section, of the thickness of 90 one-half of our || little finger. She takes her knife and | measures off pieces of square cedar-stick two | spans long. Then she cuts them off. There I are two of the same length. Then she measures off ||- two pieces, each one short span long, and she takes the straight- 95 edged knife and cuts them off. | Now there are two each two spans

97 long, | and there are also two (each) one short | span long. She uses these to | measure the width of the elderberry-cakes. It is like this.1 || 100 After she has finished, she takes the broadest skunk-cabbage leaves and j spreads them out on a mat. Then she takes her husband's crooked | knife and cuts out the middle vein of the leaves of the | skunk-cabbage, trying to get it of the same thickness as the | edge of tin- leaf. After doing this with many of them, she puts down 5 flat || all the skunk-cabbage leaves which she has cut, (putting them fiat) on the fire of her | house, so that they will get soft. She wants them to get a little | heat only, and therefore she puts them on the tire fur a little while. | After doing this with all of them, she puts them away. Sometimes | they leave the elderberries in the house for

10 three days, so that they may get very || thick before making them into cakes. Now they are ready to be | made into cakes.2 | . . .

The3 woman takes the drying-frame for the elderberry-cakes. | She puts it down where she is going to put the elderberries on it. She takes | the skunk-cabbage leaves which have been heated, and the

15 middle vein of which has been cut out, and she puts them on || the drying-frame smoothly. As soon as the | skunk-cabbage leaves have been spread over the drying-frame, she takes her straight | knife and i A rectangulai cake. 2 Continued on p. 107, line 1. -'Continued from p. 171, line 86.

cuts off all those that are broader than the middle sticks and that li hang over the drying-frame. | When she has cut them all off, she takes her measuring-stick | (for the berry-cakes) and places it down at (1), and she takes || one of the dishes containing the cooked elderberries and puts it down at (1), next | to the drying-frame. Then she takes her large long-handled ladle | and a large shell of the horse-clam, and [ she dips the ladle into the cooked elderberries. She sits | down on the floor at one end of the drying-frame at (1), and takes her measuring- 1| rod 25 and puts it down at the end at (1) ; and she puts down | three sticks; and as soon as they have all been put down, she takes the large | ladle which is full of cooked elderberries, and pours them into | the cedar-stick mould. Then she takes the large shell | of the horseclam, which she turns on its back, and presses the back of the || shell 30 on the cooked elderberries, so as to spread them inside, of the | cedarstick mould. Now she presses them with the back of the shell, | so that they settle down and have the same thickness as the | cedarstick mould, and have the same thickness all over. | After doing so, she takes off one of the moulding- || sticks, the one nearest to (1), and 35 also two | side-sticks, but she does not touch the | cedar-stick mould nearest (2). Now she puts down the | cedar-stick mould; one short stick at each end, | and she puts down the long cedar-stick measure

40 at the end, || this way: , . , , , , After doing so, she again takes her : = _|== s= ; ladle, | which is always kept filled with cooked elderberries, and | she pours them into the cedar-stick mould; and she again takes the | large shell, and she does the same as she did with the first one. | She continues doing so with the others, ||

1") and she only stops after finishing the whole length of the dryingframe. | As soon as all the elderberries have been made into cakes, she calls her husband j to lake hold of the end of the elderberry diving-frame, and they | put it up right over the lire where salmon are always dried; | and when they have all been put there,

50 they build up the fire so that it burns || well, for she wishes them to dry quickly. When | there is a good fire underneath, the elderberrycakes dry in one day, and they are really | dried (through). She leaves them drying there one day and one night. | In the morning, when day comes, the woman takes her breakfast, the one who makes the | elderberry cakes.1 ||

55 When2 (the cedar bark) is all split into strips, she takes her elderberry-cakes j and piles up the drying-frames | which she is going tie together in bundles. She takes up one of the strips of soft cedar-bark | and breaks it in two. She puts (the two pieces) down on the floor, on a mat that has been spread out. Then she takes

1 Herefollows a description of theshredding of cedar-bark, p. 132, line 1. ! Continued from p. 134, line 34.

five cakes of elderberries, one on top of the other, and [| puts them 60 on the two strips of soft cedar -bark, (in this way) : and when | the edges are even, she pulls the two strips of cedar-bark tight and ties the ends together. | As soon as she finishes it, she takes up another | piece of soft split cedar-bark and breaks it in two; and she puts down the pieces on the | mat that has been spread out. Then she takes the bundles of elderberry-cakes that have been tied and || puts them 65 on it. She ties them crosswise, the same way as the first, | in this manner: This is what they call one bundle of elderberry- V ! — 1 cakes, | when five cakes of elderberries are tied to- ) — I 1 gether. She continues doing so with what she in- tends to keep in the house, to be eaten in winter. She uses | a medium-sized box. When she finishes tying the elderberry-cakes into bundles, || she tilts (the box) to one side, near the 70 fire; and when it is warm inside and really | dry, she puts the bundle of elderberry-cakes | into the box. When it is full, she puts the | cover on and ties it down. When this is done, | she puts the elderberry-box away in a place where it is always dry; || that is, where the 75 heat of the fire can reach it. After she has done so, she | gathers tip the cakes that she did not tie into bundles, and puts them into another | small box, and she throws all the elderberry-cakes into it. | When they are all in, she puts the cover on, | ties it down, and puts (the box) down by the side of the first box. ||

] Salal-Berries.1 — She takes a large dish and puts it down by the | side of her salal-berry baskets. She unties | the tops of the salalberry baskets; and when | this is done, she pulls out the hemlock- 5 branches which cover the top. || Then she takes a medium-sized mat and spreads it outside of where she sits, where | she is going to. pluck the salal-1 terries off the stems. She takes hold of a salal-berry branch | and plucks off the berries from the stems, and she goes on and puts | the cleaned berries into the dish, and she throws the branches | on the mat that has been spread out. She cleans them very quickbj :

10 and || after all the berries have been cleaned which she put into the dish, | and after the branches have been put on the mat that has been spread out, | she folds up the mat holding the branches, | and she goes out and shakes them out outside of the house. Then she goes back into | the house. She takes her front-basket, goes down

15 to the || beach in front of her house, and picks up fresh stones, which | she puts into her small basket, enough so that she can | carry them. Then she carries the basket on her back into the house, | and she puts it down by the side of the fire. Then | the stones are poured out by the side of the fire. Then she goes down again, carrying her front-

20 basket, || and puts more stones into it; and when | she has enough, she carries them on her back into the house, and | puts them on top i This follows the description of the gathering of salal berries, p. 207, line 53.

of those she brought in first. She just puts | the basket with stones 2:; in it on the floor, and she builds up the fire so | that it is high. She takes good dry fire-wood and || lays it across the top of the fire. When 25 this is done, | she piles stones on top of it; and when they are all on, | she takes a low box and washes it out. | When this is done, she puts it down. She takes a small steaming- | box and pours water into it half way up from the bottom; and she || leaves it there just 30 outside of the low box, at a place between it | and the fire. Then she takes the fire-tongs and puts them down on the floor. | Now it is all done, and she waits for the stones to get red-hot, | as they arc still on the fire. |

Now we will talk for a little while about the low-sided box for mixing salal-berries. || It is three long spans and one short span | in 35 length, and it is just two | long spans in width, and it | is one span in height. | The corners ma tie in the same way as the boxes for keeping preserved salmon. || That is all about this. | 40

As soon as all the stones winch are on the fire are red-hot. | the woman wIki works on the salal-berries takes the dishes containing the cleaned berries and puts them down by the side of the low box for making salal-berry cakes; | she takes the tongs and puts them down at the

45 place where she is going to work. || Then she takes up with both hands the cleaned salal-berries and | pours them into the low box for making salal-berry cakes, for its name is | "low box for making salalberry cakes." She puts the berries into it; and | she only stops pour- ing in salal-berries when they arc four | finger-widths deep, when they

50 are levelled down on top. || Then she takes the tongs and takes up with them the red-hot stones. | First she dips them into a steamingbox containing water, so that | the ashes that stick on the stones will come off, and so that they may not be too hot | and burn the salalberries when they are put in. | After dipping the stones in, she puts

55 them in one corner of the || salal-berries; and she continues doing so with the other red-hot stones. | When she finishes, it is this way. Then | with both hands she takes more salal-berries and pours them on the red-hot stones which | are in the salal-berry box; and when these are also four | finger- widths ha depth, then she takes the tongs and

60 takes up || more red-hot stones. She dips them into the steamingbox | with water hi it, and puts them on the salal-berries; | and when these are all covered with stones, she pours more | salalberries on top; and when these are all in, she again | puts in more

65 hot stones; and when they are all covered || with hot stones, she takes a medium-sized mat | and spreads over it, for now it boils up; and after | she has done so, she takes an elderberry-cake that has not 67 been tied up in bundles with | shredded cedar-bark, and puts it up on edge over her fire. | It gets brittle quickly, and she goes down to the beach in front of her house || to look for a flat sandstone; and when 70 she finds one, | she takes it up and puts it down by the side of the box in which | the salal-berries are being cooked. She takes her husband's stone hammer and | places it on the flat sandstone. When the elderberry-cake is-quite | brittle, she takes down the elderberrycake and she takes a new | mat and spreads it out. She puts the flat 75 sandstone on the | mat and takes up the cake of elderberries, places it | on the sandstone, and she takes the stone hammer and pounds | the elderberry-cake so that it breaks in pieces. When it is all broken up, | she takes up the pounded elderberry-cake with both hands, rubs it together || so as to make a powder of it, ami she only | stops 80 when it is all like flour. After she has broken up | one of the elderberry-cakes, she takes others, for generally | they break ten cakes of elderberries for making the | salal-berry cakes. After ten elderberrycakes have been broken up, || she takes off the mat that has been 85 spread over the salal-berry box, for | they are done when they stop boiling. She takes a ladle | and a large dish and puts them down by the side of the low salal-berry box. | Then she takes the tongs and feels for the stones, | which are in the bottom, under the 90 boiled salal-berries ; and when || she gets hold of a stone, she takes a spoon and scrapes off the jam that | sticks to the stone. After scraping it off, she puts | (the stone) into the dish; and she continues doing this with the other stones. | When all the stones are out, she takes the dish with the stones, | goes out, and throws them out of the 95 house. Then || she goes back with the dish and puts it down. Then she takes her tongs | and stirs the salal-berries : She stirs them for a long time. Then the | boiled salal-berries become liquid. Next she takes a spoon | and dips it into the pounded elderberries, and pours these into the boiled | salal-berries; and she continues stirring them () with the tongs. When || all the pounded elderberries have been thrown in, it gets thick. | After finishing this, she takes her dryingframe, (the same one) that is used in making elderberry-cakes, | and she also uses the (same) measure that she used to measure the elderberry-cakes, | and also the skunk-cabbage leaves heated over the tire, for she does everything | with the boiled salal-berries, making 5 them into cakes, as she did when || making cakes of the elderberries; and she also ties them into bundles | with shredded cedar-bark in the way in which she tied the dried elderberries. | Thus they are tied into bundles with shredded cedar-bark, and they are put into a (square) box, which is | called "salal-berry box" because it contains the salal-berry cakes. | Those are not the best salal-berries that arc mixed with || elderberries; for they make them in a (cheap) way to sell 110 them, and also for her [ husband to give a feast of salal-berry cakes. They do the same with the | salal-berries as they do with the elderberries when a feast is given. | The only difference is that the dishes are called | " salal-berry-cake dishes." That is all about the one way of doing this.||

Salal-Berries and Elderberries mixed — (Strips of caked salal- 1 berries). | In tins1 (box) salal-berries mixed with elderberries are pounded before they are ripe. | This is what I talked about first, for they are made as cheaply as possible, because they are for sale | or given at a feast to different tribes. Therefore the salal-berries are not pure; || and they put in the elderberries so that they will show 5 up better and | that the salal-berry cakes will dry more quickly, when elderberries | are mixed with them, for this is sold cheaply. |

Now I wall talk about the salal-berry cakes, wluch are made carefully by the | women for their own food and for their husbands, their children, and their || relatives. When (the woman) makes the salal- 10 berry | cakes mixed with elderberries, she does not pick the largest salal-berries seen by her, those which grow well, | she keeps these to be picked when they are | ripe. When they are quite ripe, she takes her three | baskets, the same ones that were used before,

1 Continued from description of the dish for pounding salal-berries (p. 60, line 78).

15 and she does everything || as she did before when she went to pick salal-berries, as I first described; | and she also does as I said before, when she picks the salal-berries oh* the branches, | and she puts them into the same dishes; and when they have all been cleaned, | she takes the mortar-box for the salal-berries, and she puts it down on the floor | where she is going to work; and she also takes her

20 husband's stone hammer and places it || on the edge or by the side of the mortar-box. Then she takes the | disli containing the cleaned salal-berries and puts it down next to the mortar-box; | and she puts in both hands and takes out the | cleaned salal-berries and places them in the mortar-box. When | they are two finger-widths deep

25 in the || bottom of the mortar-box, she takes her [ stone hammer and pounds them until they burst, and she continues | pounding them until she sees that they have all burst. Then she takes the | large dish and pours the pounded salal-berries into it. After | pouring all out, she takes some more of the cleaned salal-berries, ||

30 puts them into the mortar-dish, and when they are | two fingerwidths deep in the | mortar-box, she takes her stone hammer and pounds them. | She pounds them for a long time; and when she sees | that they have all burst, she puts the hammer down on the floor ||

35 and pours the pounded salal-berries into the dish. | She continues doing this with the other cleaned salal-berries, and | only stops when 37 they have all been pounded. She does not make them into cakes quickly, | but leaves them for two nights in the dish, covered over with a mat, before | making the cakes. ||

Now I will talk about the long strips of dried salal-berries. When | 40 the woman gets ready to dry them, after leaving them two nights covered | over with a mat, so that no soot will drop into them and | so that they will get thick, — for she can not make them into cakes immediately | after pounding, because the berries are full of juice, and therefore || she leaves them for a long time to dry up, — then she 45 takes up the drying-frame, | the (same) one as she used when she dried elderberries mixed with salal-berries, | and also the heated skunkcabbage. She puts the heated | skunk-cabbage leaves down flat the whole length of the drying-frame. She puts them on very | smoothly; and when they are all down on the drying-frame from end to end, || she 50 takes her straight knife and cuts the curved edges | of the skunk-cabbage leaves that hang down over the two side-pieces of the drying-frame | (this is called by some people "stiff edge of the drying-frame) ". | Alter cutting them all off, she takes a large horse clam-shell | and a large spoon, and she takes the pounded-salal-berry dish j[ and puts it 55 down by the side of the drying-frame. She | takes the ladle, dips it in, and stirs it until they are well mixed | with the juice; and when

58 the berries are well mixed, she dips the | spoon into them until it is heaping full of the pounded salal-berries ; and she pours | them on one end of the drying-frame. Then she takes a straight cedar-stick||

60 and puts it down (crosswise) near the end of the drying-frame, in this manner: | The thickness of the cedar-stick is onehali'of the II 1-| little finger, | and it is just squeeze, I

between the two side-pieces of the drying-frame.

She | does the same at the other end; and after doing so, she takes the | clam-shell, turns it over, and uses it to smooth the pounded

65 salal-berries || on one end of the drying-frame. Then the pounded salal-berries are levelled down | to the crosspiece of cedar-wood, and she presses | the pounded salal-berries against the two side-pieces. As soon as she has spread all the pounded | salal-berries, she dips the spoon into the berries again and pours them out at the | end of the

7ii salal-berries. She continues doing this until || she reaches the end of the drying-frame; and when she reaches the other crosspiece, | she stops. After doing so, it is in this way: Sometimes she has as many as twenty dryin frames with | pounded salal-berries, or even more when the salalberries are growing well | in summer, and when the woman is indus- 75 trious in picking salal-berries. || After this has been done, she asks her husband to come and help her | put the frames up just over the fire, not very high, | for the woman must bend her head when she is standing under the drying-frame | when it is put up over the 77 fire. Now the woman takes hold of one end, | and her husband of the other, and they put the salal-berry cakes (for now their name is changed) || over the fire. After doing so, her husband | builds up SO the fire with very dry alder-wood. | The reason why they use alderwood to burn underneath is because it gives no sparks | and it makes a very hot fire, for the owner of the salal-berries wishes them | to dry quickly. As soon as the fire burns well, they watch || the drying- 85 frames that they may not catch fire, and they do not leave (the cakes) there for more than two | hours. Then they are half dry. Now | the berry-cakes are done; and she takes them all down and puts down on the floor one | of the drying-frames. Then she takes down another one and puts it on top | of the one on the floor; and she continues doing so, putting them one |[ on top of another. After she has 90 taken them all down, the woman | takes an empty drying-frame and places it over the top | one which has the long strips of salal-berry cakes on it. Then she turns it over on the | empty one. The woman is careful that the salal-berry cake | is flush with the end of the empty drying-frame, and || that the sides are straight along its sides; 95 for all the frames are made of the same length | and of the same width. As soon as | she has finished, she calls her husband to come and take hold | of the drying-frames that he face to face. Then her husband takes hold of | one end, and the woman takes hold of the 100 other (end). They || lift them up at the same time, and then turn them over so that the drying-frame with the salal-berry cake is on top; I and when they turn them over, the cake falls upon the | empty drying-frame, and the strip of salal-berry cake has been turned over. | Then they put it again just over the fire. | After this has been done, she takes the same drying-frame | from which she 5 had taken the strip of salal-berry cake. || She peels off the heated skunk-cabbage leaves which stick to it, and throws them away. | Then she turns it over and puts it on the next one; and she does | as she did before with the first one, turning over the cakes; and she continues | doing this with the others. It takes only one day | to

10 dry all of them. When they are all dry, the woman || takes a small square box, takes off the cover, and she tilts it on one side by the side of the fire, ] so that it will get dry inside. | As soon as the inside is very dry, she puts out the fire. | Then, without help, the woman takes down the drying-frames and | puts one on top of another, as

15 they had been before, when she turned them over. || She takes the small square box of medium size and places it | near the dryingframes. Then she takes up the end of one strip of salal-berry cake, | puts it into the bottom of the salal-berry box, | and the end up against the narrow end of the small box. When part of it | covers uoas] PRESERVATION OF FOOD 275

the bottom, she folds it back so that it is of the same size || as the 20 bottom of the small box. It is in this way | ^^^ when it is folded. | when they leaves over put into the small box into which it is being She continues doing this with the others; and are all in, | she heats some new skunk-cabbage the fire; and | when they are soft, she takes the crooked knife, of her husband, || cuts out the thick veins in the middle, and, when they 25 are all off, | she heats them again over the fire. She does not stop until they are almost brittle | and very dry. Then she puts the leaves on top of the [ strips of salal-berry cake, and she tucks them in all round inside the box | containing the strips of salal-berry cakes, so that it is very tight. After doing this, || she puts the cover on 30 and ties it down. When | this has been finished, she puts it down in a place where the heat of the fire reaches it, and | she leaves it there until whiter; for generally | the cannibal dancers wish to eat only long salal-berry cakes, | when the owners of the long salal-berry cakes have a winter ceremonial, and also || the head chiefs of the owners of 35 long salal-berries | wish to eat them; but the poor people of the tribe | eat salal-berries mixed with elderberries when they are given at a feast. | Now this is finished. |

Currants1. — After doing so, (the woman) takes a large dish and | 1 puts it down by the side of the currant-baskets. She pulls out the |

1 Ribes bracteosus, Dougl., Ribes pctiolare, Dougl. Continued from the description of gathering currants. See p 209, line 37.

3 huckleberry-branches that have been pushed through the baskets, and she takes oft' | the skunk-cabbage covering and puts it down, •5 and she takes a mat || and spreads it outside of the basket. | She puts the large cleaning-dish on the left-hand side of the | currant-baskets. When everything is ready, she takes | one branch of the currants. She takes hold of it with her left | hand, and pulls off the berries with

10 her right hand, and || she drops them into the large dish for holding the cleaned berries. She | continues doing so, cleaning the currants. When they are all cleaned, she takes her | front-basket, goes down to the beach in front of her house, and | picks up twelve stones. When they are all in, | she carries it on her back into the house

15 and || puts it down by the side of the fire. Then she puts the stones | into the fire; and after doing this, she takes a | square box and puts it down next to the fire, and also her tongs, which | she puts down on the floor, and also a large, long-handled | ladle, which

20 she puts next to the square box. || She also takes skunk-cabbage leaves which were used for covering the berries, cuts out the midribs, | and, after these have been cut out, she heats them over the fire. | She continues to do this until they get very brittle. Then she puts them into a | small dish and breaks them to pieces until they

25 are as fine as | flour. When this is done, and the stones that || she has put on the fire arc red hot, she takes a small steaming-box and |

pours some water into it, until it is half full. She puts it down | be- 26 tween the square box and the-fire. Then she takes the large | longhandled ladle, dips it into the currants, and pours (them) | into the square box; and when one-half of the currants are in the box || one- 30 half are still in the large dish containing the cleaned berries. | Then she takes her tongs, picks up the red-hot stones, | and dip them quickly into the water in the steaming-box and | puts them into the currants. She puts in six red-hot | stones. Then she dips more of the cleaned currants with her large || long-handled ladle out of the dish 35 containing the cleaned currants j and puts them over the red-hot stones. She only | stops when they are all in. Then she again takes her tongs and again picks | up red-hot stones, which she first puts into | the water in the steaming-box, and she puts these on the currants. || She only stops when six stones have been put in. | Then 40 she takes a mat and covers over the currants that she is steaming. | She leaves them this way all day and all night. Then the woman | goes into the woods looking for broad skunk-cabbage leaves; and when she has found some, | she breaks off the broadest leaves. || When she has many of these, she digs up spruce-roots, which she | 45 splits in two and which she ties in the middle. When this is done, she carries | everything home and puts it down at the left side of the

18 fire. ] Then she takes her husband's crooked knife and | sits down where the skunk-cabbage leaves have been placed. She cuts up

50 the || tying of the spruce-roots which have been split in two, takes hold of a | leaf of skunk-cabbage, and she cuts off the mid-rib, so that it is the same | thickness in the middle and at the edges, then | she takes hold of another one and she does the same as she did with the | first one. She continues doing this with the others; and ||

5.") when nil have been finished, she heats them by the lire; and when | they are soft and thin, she puts them down on a mat. She does | the same with all of them. When they are all done, she takes | the drying-frames, the same ones that were used for the salal-berry cakes, | and she also uses the same cellar measure which she used

60 for || mixed elderberry and salal-berry cakes. She takes the four | cedar-sticks. and puts them on the drying-frames, and she also | takes a large horse-clam shell and puts it down. | Finally she takes off the mat that has been spread over the steaming-box | in which the cur-

65 rants are. She takes up another medium-sized || dish and puts it on the corner of the square box. She takes the | large shell and skims off the juice of the boiled currants, | since the boiled berries have all gone down in the | juice. She skims the juice into the dish which she placed on the corner of the box; | and she does not stop until the boiled currants are dry. When || this is done, she takes the tongs, 70 with which she searches for the stones | that are still in the bottom of the box. | She takes out the stones and puts them down by the side of the fire.. When | all the stones have been taken out, she takes a small dish into which she puts the | powdered skunk-cabbage, and she empties it into the boiled || currants. When if is all in, she takes 75 her tongs and | stirs it; and she only stops stirring when it is all | mixed. Now the boiled currants are thick. When she has | done so, she takes the heated skunk-cabbage leaves and spreads them | on the drying-frame along the whole length. After || doing so. she takes SO the cedar-stick measures ami lays them down on the drying frame, | in this way,1 so that the four measures are at (1). | She takes the large shell anil dips it into the boiled currants, | and she pours them out inside the measures at (1). Then she turns [ the shell on its back and spreads (the currants). When they are spread all over, || she presses them so that they fill the corners of the mould and | so 85 that they are pressed close together. After doing this, | she continues doing so with the others, when she makes berry-cakes. When the I cakes have all been made to the end of the frame, she puts it just over the fire; | and after doing this, she takes another dryingframe, and || she does the same as she did to the first one when she 90

1 See figure on p. 261.

91 put the cakes on. | She continues doing this until all the currants have been made into | cakes. After this is done, she takes a mat and spreads it over them, | so that the soot of the fire will not fall on 95 them | and so that the heat of the fire will go up to it. || They need a strong heat to dry quickly, for the | cakes of currants do not dry quickly. Sometimes it takes three or | even five days to dry them. When they are | dry, she takes down the drying-frames ami [ places them one on top of another by the side of the fire. When they have 100 all been taken down, || the woman takes an empty drying-frame and puts it on top of | one with a currant-cake on it. She takes care that the edges are flush | on all sides ami at the ends of the two dryingframes. | Then she calls her husband to come ami help her turn over 5 the | currant-cakes ; and when her husband comes, the woman || takes one end of the two drying-frames which lie together, | and her husband takes hold of the other end. Both lift them up at the same time, | and they turn them over. Then the currant-cake is turned, | and falls on the empty drying-frame. All the | currant-cakes 10 and the heated skunk-cabbage leaves fall off together. || When they take off the now empty drying-frame, she puts it down | and peels off the skunk-cabbage leaves that stick to the backs of the | currant-cakes. When the skunk-cabbage leaves have been taken off, | they put (the frames) up where they were before, and they do the same with the next one; | and after all (the cakes) have been turned over, they spread a mat || over them, and they are left there only one 15 night. Then they are | dry all through. Then she takes down the drying (frames) and puts them down. When they have all been put down, she gathers up the | currant-cakes and puts them in piles of five, | and ties them with soft shredded cedar-bark, as she did with the || cakes of elderberries mixed with salal-berries when they were 20 tied into bundles, and about which I talked before. | She also puts them into a dry small box which she keeps j not too far from the fire of the house, so that | the heat of the fire strikes it, for the currantcakes get damp easily, | unless they take good care of them and if they do not know how to treat them. || That is all about this. | 25

Viburnum-Berries. — While1 (the man) is carrying in (the berries), i his wife goes up the beach, | and the man goes aboard the canoe | to get driftwood. Meanwhile his wife eats. | The husband does not stay away long before he comes back; and as soon as || he reaches the 5 beach, he backs up the stern of his small canoe and | goes ashore. He throws ashore the driftwood that he brought; and when it | is all out, he carries it up on his shoulder into his | house, and he throws it down at the place where he intends to build the fire | to cook the viburnum-berries. As soon as all the wood has been carried up, he

'Continued from p. 218, line 44.

10 [himself]" goes || and takes a basket, goes down to the beach, | picks up stones, and puts them into the basket. He puts in as many as he ran | carry. Then he stops putting them in and carries them in one hand [ up the beach into his house. He puts | them down at the place where he intends to work a I the unripe viburnum-berries.

15 When || he thinks there are enough stones, he stops. | You know already everything about the ways of building a fire to heat | stones, for there is only one way of heating stones for steaming | and for heating water for steaming. The | man has to go out to get drift-

20 wood and stones || for this purpose, because his wife is working at the viburnu m-berries. When he has finished building the fire, | he puts on the stones, but he does not light the fire under them. Then | the man goes to help his wife, who is sitting by the side of the mat on which he lias poured | out the viburnum-berries; for the woman does that first after she | has eaten, after coming home. She goes

25 and spreads a new mat, || takes the large berry-basket, and | pours the viburnum-berries on the mat. She does the same | with the front-basket and with the medium- J sized basket. Now her baskets are empty. Then she takes the smallest basket, the front-basket, ||

30 and puts it down on her left-hand side. She sits down next to the [ mat on which the viburnum-berries are, and she takes a bunch of | berries and picks the berries off the stems, and she puts them into the small basket. | She throws the stems down on the right-hand 33 side. In | this way her husband helps her; and as soon as they have picked off all the || berries, the man lights the fire under the 35 place where he is about to heat, | the stones. As soon as it burns, he takes the high | steaming-box and puts it down by the side of the fire. He | takes two large water-buckets and goes to draw fresh water; | and as soon as he comes carrying a bucket of fresh water in each hand,'[| he goes to the place where the stcaming-box is standing, 40 and pours the water into it. | There are only two buckets of water poured in. | That is sufficient for the high steaming-box. After he has done so, | he takes the basket for holding the berries, puts it next to the | steaming-box, and he takes the long tongs || and the water- 45 bucket and puts them down. Then he goes to draw | fresh water, which he places between the stcaming-box and the fire. [ The red-hot stones are to be dipped into this water. When it is all there, he I takes an empty oil-box and puts it down. Then | he draws some more water in another || large bucket. When he comes back, he 50 pours the water into the | empty oil-box and washes it out. After doing so, he | goes and puts it down where it is to be left until winter comes; | however, he has poured away the dirty water with which the box has been washed out. I As soon as this is done, and when he

55 sues that the stones are red-hot, || he takes his long tongs, | puts the end into the bucket with water which stands between the | steaming box and the fire, and. when 1 be end of the tongs is wet, he picks the | red-hot stones out of the fire and puts them into the steaming-box ; he | continues doing this with the other red-hot stones; and when ||

60 the tongs catch fire at the end, he puts the end into the | bucket of water. The man is careful that | the water does not boil up, for he only wants it to be real hot. | When it has nearly come to a boil, he stops putting stones into it. | Then he takes the front-basket, which is

(55 now filled with viburnum-berries, || and pours the berries into the cooking-basket. Then (thewoman) | fills the front-basket withmore berries, which are in the | medium-sized swallowing-basket, and she pours these too into the cooking- 1 basket. When it is nearly full, she stops. Then the man takes hold of the | handles of the cooking-basket and puts

70 it || into the hot water in the steaming-box. The woman watches | it carefully while it is covered with water, for (the berries) must not be cooked too long. | She takes it out of the hot water every now and then, and watches it. | When (the berries) all turn red, they are at once | taken ou1 and poured into the empty oil-box, ||

75 which has already been put down at the place where it is to stay boasj PRESERVATION OF FOOD 285

until winter. | As soon as the cooking-basket is empty, (the woman) 76 pours | in more raw viburnum-berries; and when it is full, she puts it down by the side of the | steaming-box, and she puts a few more red-hot stones | into it. When (the water) nearly boils up, she puts || the cooking-basket in, and watches it until they | get red or 80 sometimes whitish yellow. Then they are | done. When they have that color, they are taken out, and | the woman then goes and pours them into the empty oil-box. When four | basketfuls (of berries) have been poured into the empty oil-box, || she takes another empty 85 oil-box, washes | it out, and, after doing so, she puts it down alongside of one that has been filled with | viburnum-berries; and she pours in also four | basketfuls of steamed viburnum-berries. Sometimes | a couple will put up as many as ten oil-boxes full of viburnuni-berries, || when they have a strong desire to do so, for they help each other 90 when they wish to have | many oil-boxes full of viburnum-berries. When they are all done, | (the woman) goes to draw fresh water in a large bucket, and | four bucketfuls are poured into each of the oilboxes containing steamed viburnum-berries. | When water has been poured into all of them, they || take a board and lay it as a cover on 95 top of the oil-boxes containing the berries. | They keep it there until the winter, | when the people will have a winter ceremonial. That is all about this. |

1 Crabapples. — The woman takes the large basket, | which is still full of crabapples, and pours these | on the mat at the same place where the first lot were poured out. | She does this with all of them, — 5 the medium-sized basket and the || front-basket. When they are empty, she puts them down all around | the crabapples which she had poured on the mat. After tins is done, | she sits down on the right-hand side of the basket in the front corner, and | her husband sits down at the right-hand side of the medium-sized basket. | The

1 0 baskets are on the left sides of the || woman and her husband who are sitting down. Then they take up each a bunch | of crabapples and pinch off the stems of the crabapples | with the right hand. With the left they hold the | crabapple-stems, which are in bunches; and when the crabapples have been picked off, | the woman puts the

15 cleaned crabapples hi to the front-basket, || and her husband puts the cleaned crabapples into the | medium-sized basket. They continue doing this while they are cleaning them; | and when the baskets have been filled, they pour them | into the large basket. They only |

20 stop pouring them into the large || basket when it is very full. Then the woman takes a | large dish and pours into it the clean crabapples and those which | her husband has cleaned; and generally she takes a short oil-box or | a high box and pours the cleaned crab- 23 apples into it, | in case she is picking a great many. When all the crabapples have been cleaned, || the husband of the woman goes to 25 get driftwood, | for it is hard work to prepare crabapples. Therefore | the man helps his wife. When he gets home from getting | driftwood, he carries it on his shoulder into the | house, and puts it down where he is going to build a fire. As soon as || all the drift- 30 wood has been carried in, he puts down two medium-sized logs, | which will be the side-pieces. Between them he puts small pieces | of dry driftwood. He places larger pieces of driftwood | crosswise over the side-pieces for the stones to rest on. When ( this is done, he takes a basket, goes down to the beach, || and puts stones into the 35 basket. | When he thinks he has as many as he can carry, he carries them on his back up the beach, | and carries them into the house in which the crabapples are being prepared. | Then he puts (the basket) down on the wood that is built up for it. | He brings many stones which he has picked up; and when he has brought in enough, || he lights the fire under the wood and stones. When | 40 it is burning, he takes an empty oil-box and puts it down alongside I of the wood and stone in order to heat it. Then he goes and gets I two large buckets and draws water in them. He | pours the

45 water into the box. Wlien it is half full, he stops. || Then he takes his tongs and puts them down on the floor.1

(As | soon as this is done, the man takes a bucket and goes to | draw water; and when he comes back, he puts it down between the | empty oil-box and the fire.) Now all j the stones on the fire are red-hot.

50 Then he || takes the tongs, dips the end. into the | bucket, and picks out the red-hot stones. He | dips them into the water so that the ashes that stick on them come off;| and after doing so, he puts them into the water in the steaming-box. | He continues doing this, and

55 does not stop until || the water really boils up. Then he takes the | rack and puts it into the boiling water. | After doing this, he takes the large basket containing the cleaned crabapples, | puts them on the rack of the one who steams crabapples, | and he also takes the medium-

G0 sized || basket and puts it in, and he also takes the | front-basket and puts it in. | As soon as they are all in, they are covered with hot water. Then | the man takes his tongs and picks up more [ red-hot

65 stones, which he dips into the water, || and then puts them in, so that the water really boils up. | When it is boiling, he takes a rest. | His wife watches the crabapples. She takes a ladle | and dips it into i Then follows the description of the manufacture of a drying frame, p. 171. line 1, to p. 172, line 27.

the crabapples and feels if they get soft. | When they are soft all through, they are done. Then she || calls her husband to take out the three | baskets with the boiled crabapples. They pour these into 70 the empty oil-box | which has been washed out by the wife of the man, and which is now ready to be placed | where the crabapples are to be kept. They | pour in the steamed crabapples. If they do not boil all the || other crabapples, the woman puts the green cleaned [ 75 crabapples into the three baskets, and | her husband puts more redhot stones into the cooking-box. | As soon as the water boils up, he puts in | the three baskets with crabapples and does the || same as he 80 did before; and after the crabapples have been boiled, | he takes the two large buckets, goes to draw some | water, and pours it on, because he wants to have two- | thirds more water than crabapples. | After he has done this, he takes a short board and puts it on. || He 85 keeps them there until winter comes, when the tribe of the crabappleowner have a winter ceremonial. | Sometimes the chiefs want to give a crabapple-feast, for | this is one of the great feasts of the tribes. | That is all about the cooked crabapples. |

1 Qotlxole.' — When she has finished, she takes a dish and | puts the ()erries into it. Then she takes oil and pours | much of it on. There is more oil than there are berries. | When this is done, she takes a 5 wooden spoon and puts it down next || to her seat. Then she calls her husband and her | children to come and eat the berries; | and when they have all come, the woman gives them spoons; | and after doing so, she takes up the dish with the berries | and puts it before

10 them. Then they all begin to eat the berries. || The}7 eat them with their spoons. | Whoever is not accustomed to eat them drains off the oil to make them dry when | he is eating them, but the berries choke one when they are eaten; | and therefore any one who does not like to eat od with them must chew them a long time, and | can not

15 swallow them: he just has his mouth full || of berries. But if he is experienced in eating them, he does not take many | berries in his spoon, and he takes much od, | when he puts them into his mouth; and he does not chew them long | before swallowing, for the oil makes them shppery. After eating the berries, | they do not drink water,

20 and just || go out of the house. They do not drink water for a long time, because they | do not want the oil to rise into their throats. Tins is one way to do with the berries, when | they are given at a

' This description follows that of the gathering of qotlxole (p. 218, line 1, to p. 219, line 39).

feast to many tribes. It is the way | I have described before. I 23 will only talk about it | when they are put into boxes for winter use. They are just put into || (square) boxes, and the cover is put on and 25 it is tied down. | Then they are put in a cool corner of the house, | and they are eaten in the way I have just described. | That is all. |

Qot !xole mixed with Oil. — When many berries have been picked by 1 the | woman, she asks her husband to get a | high box that does not leak and to put it down; and then he builds up | the fire and puts stones into it. There || are very many stones. Then he takes his 5 bucket and goes to draw | a bucketful of water; and when he comes back, | he puts it down next to the fire. When this is done, he takes his | tongs and puts them down by the fire. He takes his | oil-box and puts it down by the fire. When || this has been done, he takes 10 the basket with berries and [ puts them down next to his high boxes, and pours | them in. As soon as (the boxes) are nearly full, he stops pouring them in. | He continues doing this until the other boxes are all full. | As soon as (the berries) are all in, he just waits for the || stones which he put on the fire to be red-hot; and when he 15 sees | that they are getting red-hot, he takes his tongs, | picks up the red-hot stones, dips them into the | water in the bucket so that the ashes that stick to them come off, | and puts them into the oil

20 which is in the oil-box. || He continues doing this, and does not stop until the oil in the box begins to boil. | He does not dip out | the boiling oil immediately to pour it on the berries in the box, | but he takes a large shell of a horse-clam and skims off the | froth floating

25 on the hot oil. When that is all off, || he takes a long-handled ladle.

and dips it into the. hot oil. | Then he pours it on the berries, and he does not stop until | the berries are covered by the boiling oil. He leaves them there, on the floor of the house, | until the oil tliickens.

He leaves them there for two days to get entirely cooled off. | Then

30 he takes the boxes containing the berries and the oil and || puts them down in a cool corner of the house. After he has put them there, he | takes the cover, puts it on, and ties it down. | After he has done so, he takes an old mat and | spreads it over them, and there they will stay until winter comes. |

1 Curing Seaweed (l).1 — A woman inexperienced in working | seaweed spreads it out at once on the beach to | dry. Then the seaweed that is treated that way is tough. | An experienced woman only takes

5 the || seaweed out of the canoe, and she takes a mat and | covers it over on the beach, after she has piled it up on the beach, | even when the day is fine. She does not spread it for a long time, for she wishes |

1 Continued from p. 186, line 21.

it to rot. After it has been in this way for four days, she takes off the mat | cover. Then she takes a drying-rack made for the || seaweed, 10 to dry it on. It is made of broad split cedar, and is | one fathom in length, and three | spans is the length of the four crosspieces. | That is the width of the drying-rack. Then she spreads the seaweed | on it. Now she dries it in the sun and the wind. || Sometimes one woman has 15 ten drying-frames on which | seaweed is drying. When it is a fine | day, she turns the seaweed over at noon, and | in the evening it is entirely dry. When it is dried, | the woman rolls it all up and puts it away in her house. || Now it is rolled up in a mat; and when it is a 20 fine day, | she starts again in her canoe. She is going to get chitons. As soon | as she has many, she goes home.1 |

After2 the men have eaten the chitons, they go out of the house | after they have drunk water. The woman takes the dish from which they have eaten || and puts it down at the place where she is going to 25 work at the seaweed. | Then she takes her small box and puts it down at the place where | the dish is. Then she takes cedar-branches and breaks off the | soft tops and puts them down. Then she takes the cover of her | little box and puts it down on its back. Then she takes the seaweed and spreads || it on the box-cover. She folds it over 30

i Here follows a description of how the chitons are cooked and eaten (see p. 483).

• Continued from p. 4S4, line 18.

31 so that it is folded the same size | as the box-cover. Then she takes a mouthful of the liquid of the | chitons, and she spreads it out again. Then she blows water from her mouth over it. | She takes four mouthfuls of the dirty water and blows | it on it. Then the seaweed

35 gets all wet, || and she folds it up again to the size of the cover. | Now it is four fingers thick. | As soon as this is done, the woman takes the soft tips of | cedar-branches and puts them in the bottom of the small box. Then she takes the | seaweed and puts it on the branches ;

40 and she takes more || cedar-branches and lays them over the seaweed. When | no more shows, she takes another piece of seaweed and | docs the same as she did to the first one which is in the | little box; and she does not stop until all the seaweed is in the | small box. As

45 soon as she has finished, she takes a long || rope and ties it around the small box. Then she draws the rope tight, | because she docs not wish the small box to burst open, and she | puts stones on top of it. As soon as she has finished, she takes | short boards and measures the size of the top of the small box, so | that they fit the corners of the

50 inside of the small box. Then she puts it down flat || on the seaweed. Then she takes up stones and puts them on the | small box containing the seaweed; and she does not stop until there is no | room to put stones on, for there are | many stones to put on the top of the box containing the seaweed. | Sometimes they are left this way in the house for one month. || When the woman thinks that the seaweed 55 sticks together, | she takes off the stones when it is a fine day. | Then she takes out the seaweed, which is now one | finger thick. Then she takes it out of the | house and puts it fiat on the beach, where it is dry; and || when it is evening, she takes it up and takes it into the 60 house. | Then she puts it back into the small box, and she again | puts cedar-branches between them; and she also puts | stones on it again. She does this four times; and after | she has done so four times, she puts them into a small box, || after she has taken out the 65 cedar-branches and also the | stones on it. Now she only puts on the cover, and the cover is | tied down. Then it is put away. That is all about this. |

Curing Seaweed (2). — They drive into the floor two | poles half a fathom long, and sharp at the ends. Then || they split cedar- wood; 70 and when it is in thin pieces, these are two | finger-widths wide and hah a finger-width | thick, and they are a little more than hah a fathom long. | Then they take split narrow cedar-bark and tie one end to the pole | standing alongside of the fire, and they do the same

5 at II the other end. There are six split cedar-sticks | tied to the poles in this way: seaweed, break it are thin and flat, SO rack. As soon as turned over; and taken down from

When it is done, | they take the in pieces, and, when | the pieces they hang them over the [ dryingit is browned by the fire, || it is when it is browned again, | it is where it had been put, and placed on dressed deer-skin. Then it is made into a bunch. | A wedge is taken, and with it it is beaten as it is | lying on the board on the floor of the house. Then it is just like | powder after it has been

85 beaten, and it is shaken into the || small box. Then a tight cover is put on, and it is placed in a | dry place in the house.

Boiled Huckleberries. — The woman goes | to get driftwood after she has picked huckleberries, | when she has many and they have been cleaned. | She goes herself to get driftwood; and when she gets 5 home, || she carries it up the beach into the house, and | she throws it down. After she has carried in all the driftwood, she takes a medium-sized | basket and goes down to the beach in front of her house. She | puts stones into it, as many as she can carry. | Then

10 she carries it on her back into her house || and puts it down. Then she continues carrying stones. | When she thinks she has enough, she takes two medium-sized | pieces of driftwood and puts them 12 down as side-pieces at the place where she intends to | build her fire, and between them she puts kindling-wood. When | the kindlingwood is level with the two side-pieces, || she takes short pieces of 15 driftwood and puts them crosswise over the side-pieces. | The stones are to be placed on these. When (the wood) is all on, she puts the stones on top of it; | and after the stones are all on, she lights | the fire underneath. When it blazes up, she takes the | huckleberries, which she is going to cook in a high square box, which she puts down next to the fire which she has made, and also her || long tongs and a 20 bucket filled with water. She | places the bucket with water next to the fire, so that it may get warm. | After doing so, she takes spawn of the humpback-salmon and | puts it down in a dish. She takes her huckleberry- | baskets and pours the huckleberries into the high box in which || they are to be cooked. When the box is nearly 25 full, she stops | pouring in huckleberries; and when the stones get red-hot, | the woman who cooks the huckleberries takes her | tongs, picks up the red-hot stones, and | dips them into the water hi the bucket, so that the || ashes that stick to them come off. Then she 30 puts them into the huckleberries which she is cooking. | She continues doing this, and the hot stones sink down | in the berries. There are not very many stones which she puts in, | when they begin to boil. Then she takes the dish with spawn | and empties it on the

35 boiling huckleberries. Next she takes || a mat and covers (the high box), so that the steam does not come out; | and she piles up the fire over the rest of the red-hot stones. | Then she rests a long time before she takes off the mat covering. | When she sees that the salmonspawn is turning white, she takes a | broken paddle and stirs with it

40 the huckleberries which have been || mixed with salmon-spawn. As soon as they are mixed, she puts down her | broken stirring-paddle. She takes the tongs and | feels for the stones which are piled together in the bottom of the box in which the | huckleberries were boiled. She puts them down by the side of the | fire. When they are all out,

45 she takes up more || red-hot stones that are on the fire. She first | dips them into the bucket with water, and then she | puts them again into the huckleberries that she is cooking; and she only stops | when the huckleberries mixed with salmon-roe are thoroughly boiling. |

50 Then she spreads the mat over them. |[ After doing so, the woman goes into the woods to break off | broad leaves of skunk-cabbage. She does not break off very many of them, and | takes them home. Then she | takes her husband's crooked knife and cuts off the veins | in the middle of the leaves. As soon as (the veins) are all rut

55 off, she warms the leaves by the fire to make them || pliable and thin; and after she has done so, her husband takes [ a short board 56 and makes a cover for the box. He | fits it so that it will not leak. Then his wife | takes olachen-fat that is left after the oil has been dried out of the olachen in | Knight Inlet. She puts it on a board, takes a stone || and hammers it until it becomes a thick paste, which 60 is very sticky. | After she has done so, she takes her tongs and with them picks the | stones out of the bottom of the box in which the huckleberries with salmon-spawn have been cooked. | When all the stones are out, she takes the pounded fat | and puts a little all around the opening of the || box. Then she fits the cover on the box so that 65 it | lies on the olachen-fat and so that it is air-tight. | Then her husband sits down on it, and the woman takes more olachen-fat and | smears it all around between the box and the cover. She takes | the heated skunk-cabbage leaves, cuts off a strip two finger-widths wide, || and sticks it on to the olachen-fat | all around the box cover. 70 When this is done, she puts it down in a | cool corner of the house. She leaves it there until the | season of the winter-ceremonial. |

I have forgotten this. She spreads the heated skunk-cabbage leaves || over the boiled huckleberries mixed with salmon-spawn. | 75 She spreads them smoothly all around the corners; and after doing so, she puts on | the cover. All this is done in the same way with

78 huckleberries, | with large blueberries, small blueberries, and scarlet berries ( ?). All of these are treated in the same way, | the four kinds that I have just named, in the same way as the red huckleberries are

SO treated when they are || picked and eaten. The eating of the large blueberries, the eating of the small blueberries, | and the eating of the mountain scarlet berries (?) is the same. | Another name of the small blueberries is "mouldy blueberries." That is all about this. | 1 Viburnum1 -Berries with Oil. — Now I will talk about | the viburnumberries mixed with oil, for there is only one way of cooking them, | as I have described. When they have been cooked, | they pour them 5 into the large swallo wing-basket and the || medium-sized swallowingbasket, and also into the front-basket; and when | they are all full of steamed viburnum-berries, the woman takes a | high box, which is

10 two spans | wide and long, | and which is three spans high. || The cover is made to fit on (air-tight). This is put down by the | woman. Then she takes a large dish and puts it down next | to her seat, and she takes oil and pours it | into the large dish. When it is half full, she stops | pouring in the oil. She takes a small basket, goes down

15 to the beach, || and puts six stones into it. She carries them back in one hand, | coming up from the beach, and carries them into the house, and | she puts them down next to the fire. Then she puts

1 Viburnum pauciflorum Pylaine.

them I on the fire, and she takes the bucket of water and | puts it down where she is going to work. She takes her tongs and || puts 20 them down. Then she takes a small dish and puts it down. | Then she takes a bucket of water, and she pours the water | into the small dish. Now she watches the stones which are on the | fire until they are just hot enough to be a little red. | As soon as they have that color, she takes her tongs, || picks up the stones, dips them into the 25 small dish with water | in it, so that the ashes on them come off, and she | puts them into the oil. She does the same with the other | stones; and when all the oil is melted, she takes a | bucket of water and pours it on the melted |] oil. After it has staid there a little while, 30 she picks the stones out | and throws them down by the side of the fire. After she has taken them all out, she | takes a large ladle, dips it into the oil and water, and moves it up and down. | When she has done this a little while, the oil and water are mixed, and | they get cold, and the mixture of oil || and water looks white. When they are 35 well mixed, she takes a basket of viburnum-berries | and pours the berries into the high box. When | they are all emptied out, the box is full. Then she takes the dish in which she has | the water mixed with oil, and places it across the corner of the berry-box, and | pours (the contents) very slowly over the || viburnum-berries. Then the 40

41 water and oil run down among the | berries. She keeps the dish with the mixed oil and berries turned over for a long time, | because the mixture does not run very fast. It runs in among the | viburnumberries. When the mixed water and oil does not run in any more, she puts | the dish upright and places it on the floor of the house,

45 for || the berries are now covered with water and oil. She takes the cover of the | box, and her husband takes a | drill and his straight knife and splits good | red-pine wood. He cuts it out and makes pegs out of it. When | he has done so, he drills through the cover

50 and the edge of the || box, pulls out his drill, wets the pegs with his saliva, | and, when one is wet all over, he puts it into the | drill-hole and takes a stone and drives in the peg. | The drill-holes are three

55 finger-widths apart. | He puts a peg into every hole. After || he has done so, he puts the box down in a cool corner of the house. That is all about this. | I The First Dog-Salmon of the Season. — Now I will talk | about the salmon obtained by those who fish [on the rivers] at the mouth of the I river, when they are going to eat (the salmon) quickly. When the dog-salmon are seen | jumping at the mouth of the river, the 5 man at once || takes his fishing box and opens it, and he takes out | his two harpoon points, and he prepares them. And after | he i Here follows a prayer to the salmon (see p 609, also p. 223).

iioas] PRESERVATION OF FOOD 303

has prepared them, he takes his harpoon shaft and prepares | it, S putting on the prongs, so that they fit on firmly. | As soon as he has done so, he goes to the beach where his fishing canoe is. || Then he goes 10 to spear the salmon, which swim in the | mouth of the slough. Then he begins to spear them. If there are many | dog-salmon, it does not take long until he has obtained many. | Then he goes home.1 | Then the woman herself2 replies- "Yes," and goes up from the bank of the river, and || takes an old mat and spreads it out on the beach 15 seaward from | the high-water mark. As soon as she has done this, she goes down to the beach | where the spearsman's canoe is, and she puts her fingers into the gills of two | dog-salmon, two in each hand. Then she carries the | four salmon up from the beach, and she puts them on the old mat which is spread out on the beach. || After she has taken them all out, she takes her fish-knives and | sharp- 20 ens them on a whetstone; and after she has sharpened | them, she takes a small mat and spreads it out on the beach by her side. Then she | puts the salmon on it. Then she can just reach the | salmon, when she takes it to cut it open. Then she does the same as she || does when she is cutting open dog-salmon to be roasted, and she 25 only | cuts the meat thin along its skin, and the | edges of the cut salmon are left on in this manner.3 I After she has cut it on her

' Here follows 3 prayer, p. 609. ' She answers her own prayer. ) See first figure on p. 304.

1 On a slanting board supported by a log See figure on p. 250.

cutting-board in this manner,1 | _rXv-.^ she takes her basket 30 and puts into it what she has | Tj cut- Then || she carries it up on the beach and takes it \ \ / / into her house. Then she takes the | drying-poles, which \ \ // are always left in their places in the houses of the river W_Z/ people. | Then she hangs the cut salmon lengthwise on the drying-poles in this manner: | After she has done so, she takes short boards and | puts them under the place where she has hung up her cut salmon. She does || not allow the heat to strike what is now hanging lengthwise on the | drying-poles. Sometimes it hangs for one day; then the woman | looks at it. As soon as it is half dry, the woman takes it down; and | she gathers together the drying-poles, and she puts the cut salmon up 40 again; | but it is spread out. Now it is spread out when she || puts it up again; and it only differs from preserved skin of salmon | caught with a hook in the upper part of the river, in that (the salmon) is not fat | when it is found spawning | in the upper part of the river, while it is really fat when it is speared at the | mouth of the river. 45 And as soon as they finish cutting up || the speared salmon, the woman at once gathers the slime and | everything that comes from the salmon, and puts it into the basket, and | she goes and pours it into the water at the mouth of the river.

1 On a slanting board supported by a log.

IV. RECIPES

Roasted Salmon. — This is when the man goes catching salmon | at 1 night. That is what is called by the river people "taking salmon | with hooks at night up the river," when they are going to dry | the roasted dog-salmon for winter. Dog-salmon are speared || by the 5 river people at (he mouth of the river when they are going to eat them at once, | while the dog-salmon are still phosphorescent. Then they will not | keep a long time without getting mouldy when they are roasted, for they are fat. j

Now I shall talk about the salmon speared at the mouth of the river | when it is still phosphorescent. When the man || who spears 10 the salmon gets one, he goes home as soon as he has | speared it. His wife at once takes an j old mat and spreads it over her back; then she takes her | belt and puts it on over the old mat on her back. | Then she takes along a large basket in which to carry the dog-salmon on her back. |[ She goes to the canoe of her husband and puts \ four 15 dog-salmon into her carrying-basket. Then she goes up the beach to the place | where she is going to cut them. She puts them on an | old mat, which is spread on the ground outside of the house. As soon as I she. has thrown them on the ground, she takes her fish-knife and sharpens it; || and after she lms sharpened it, she cuts off the gills of 20

21 the dog-salmon. | When the gills are off, she cuts around the | neck, but she does not cut off the head from the backbone. Then | she cuts from the back of the neck down to four finger-widths from the tail on the upper side. | Now a thin strip of flesh is left on the backbone. ||

25 As soon as the cut reaches down to the belly, she turns it around, | and she begins to cut from the tail upward to the back of the neck. | As soon as she takes off the backbone, she | takes her roasting-tongs and takes the slime and rubs it | over the roasting-tongs, so that they

30 may not get burned when they stand || by the fire of the house. Then she winds cedar-bark around the tongs one | span from the bottom of the roasting-tongs; | and when this is done, she takes one of the cut salmon and | puts it crosswise into the roasting-tongs. Then she takes cedar-bark and ties it | tight above the cut salmon;

35 and after she has || tied it, she takes another salmon and puts it | the other way, above the one that she put in first. | Then she again takes cedar-bark and ties it above the salmon. | After she finishes tying it, she splits cedar-wood, — | long and slender pieces. These are called "the

40 lock." || Then she pushes one of these on each side, two finger-widths from | the edge of the salmon-meat, through between | the legs of the roasting-tongs, lengthwise of the salmon; | and after she has finished this, she pushes long ones across | the salmon and the "locks" which she first put on. Now there is || one on each side of the roasting. 45 tongs in this manner: | Then the same is done on the other side. After this is -^^^b*-? finished, | the woman puts (the tongs) up by the side of H-sU-f^ the fire. She first turns | the meat side towards the j^jM— i firei a]Ul when it is done, | she turns it around to the XJ— j~TT S^U1 side. As soon as that is done, the || man requests ^^P^ permission from his wife to in- 50 vite his friends | to come and eat the roasted salmon while it is warm. \ As soon as his wife tells him to go ahead and call them, I the man goes and invites them. Then his wife takes a mat, I which is to be the food-mat of the guests of her husband; then she || spreads a mat for the guests of her husband to sit on; 55 and it does not | take long before her husband comes back followed by his guests, for | they try to come before the roasted salmon cools off. | Immediately they sit down on the mat that has been spread out; and when | they are all in, the woman takes the food-mat and || spreads it in front of her husband's guests. Then 60 she goes back | and takes the two roasted salmon in the tongs; and she takes them out, | one for each two men. Then she lays them skin down, | on the food-mat. When there are four men, | there are two food-mats, and there is one || roasted salmon. There is no 65

66 oil for dipping, for the | dog-salmon is very fat while it is still phosphorescent, when it is jumping in the mouth of the rivers. | Then the guests themselves break it and eat the salmon | speared at the mouth of the river. Early in the morning, | dog-salmon speared at the mouth

70 of the river is not eaten, for it is fat; || it is only eaten in the afternoon and evening. | Whenever it is eaten in the morning, it makes those who eat it feel sleepy the whole day long, | for it is very fat. Therefore they are afraid | to eat it in the morning. As soon as the

75 guests finish eating it, | the man takes what is left and eats it || with his wife, while his guests drink water freshly | drawn. After they finish drinking, the guests go out. | They only wash their hands in their houses; and | after the man has finished eating with his wife,

80 he I gathers the bones and the skin left by his guests, || puts them on a mat, and throws them into the sea on the j beach. This is all about the salmon speared at the mouth of the river. 1 Blistered Salmon. And we will also talk about the green | salmon almost dry. The woman takes the almost dried green | salmon from the place where it is hanging. ! She takes her tongs and picks up the 5 green salmon, and || blisters the meat-side of the green salmon by the fire. As soon as j the green salmon gets grey, she turns it and places the skin-side | towards the lire; and as soon as the skin is covered with blisters, | the woman knows that it is done. Then [ S she puts it on the dish-mat. ||

She takes water and sprinkles it over it to make it soft; | and after 10 she has sprinkled it with cold water, she takes the | oil-dish and pours oil into it; and alter she has done so, she | takes the blistered green salmon and puts it down flat, and places it before | those who are going to eat it. Then she takes an oil-dish and puts it || outside 15 of the blistered green salmon.1 . . . As soon as the woman | takes the cup, the man breaks off a piece of the blistered | salmon and dips it into the oil, and puts it into his mouth. | He himself breaks off bits from what he is eating. |

Scorched Salmon. —Dried2 salmon is the breakfast of the Kwakiutl.|| In the morning, as soon as they arise, the wife of the | chief takes 20 dried salmon and scorches it by the fire. As soon as | she finishes scorching it, she pounds it on a mat spread out on the floor, to f remove the scales loosened by the fire. As soon as she finishes pounding it on the floor, | she rubs it to make it soft; and after she has rubbed it, || she pounds it again on the floor of the house. Then 25 she folds up the scorched dried salmon | and puts it down on the floor. Then she takes a dish and puts it down at | the place where

1 Part of the description of the eating of the salmon has been omitted, it being a repetition of previous descriptions.

2 Line! 19-22 repeated from Publ. Jes. Exp. Vol. V, 427-428.

27 she is sitting, and she takes up again the scorched dried salmon, | opens it, and spreads it out; then she breaks out the belly-part | and puts it down. Then she breaks the dried salmon to pieces and puts

SO it into the || dish. As soon as she has finished, the woman arises again and | dips some oil out of the oil-box which stands in the corner of the| house. Then she takes an oil-dish [dipping-receptacle], and when it is full | she [comes] and puts it down cm the floor at the place where she is sitting.1 . . . After (the man) | has taken a drink

35 he takes a piece of the dried salmon, folds it up, chews || it, and then dips it into the oil. 1 Preserved Brittle Salmon. — Many men | like to eat preserved brittle old salmon roasted. | When a man goes to visit one who has | 5 preserved roasted salmon, the one who has || roasted old salmon at once requests the one who comes to visit him to go himself and | invite his friends. Immediately the man goes | and invites his friends who are sitting on the summer-seat. | As soon as the one who invites them comes, | they all go out of (the summer-seat), and they all go into the house with the one who goes to visit. Then a mat ||

10 is spread out, and the one who goes to visit shows the guests where to sit. | Then the one who goes to visit does not sit among | his friends. Immediately the woman goes and opens the | basket in which the roasted salmon is kept, and her husband tends the fire. |

1 Part of the description of the eating of the salmon has been omitted.

Then the one who went to invite takes roasted salmon and puts it down flat || on the fire, with the skin of the roasted salmon down. 15 ward. I As soon as the skin is scorched, he breaks it quickly to pieces and I puts it on the mats that have been spread out. The woman only I looks on. As soon as he has done so, he takes the dish and | puts the broken roasted salmon into it. Then he also takes || oil and 20 pours it into an oil-dish; and | after he has done so, he takes up the dish and the oil-dish which he puts into the dish | at the farther side, and he also takes water for them. [ Then they rinse their mouthsand after they have rinsed their mouths, | they drink. After they have finished drinking, they eat. || Then the owner of the house just 25 watches the one who | came to visit him when he is attending to the oil; for the guests take much oil | for dipping. They sometimes drink oil | when they get choked ; and the one who went to invite will pour in oil | whenever the oil-dish is empty [of oil]. When || they 30 nearly finish eating, the one who went to invite draws fresh water, | and he does not stay long before he comes back, and | he places the bucket with the water in it in front of liis friends. | Then he takes away the dish, and puts it down at | the place where the woman is sitting, and the guests drink at once of the || water. After they have 35 finished drinking, they just | wait for the second course. That is the end. |

1 Cold Roasted Salmon. — But now this is finished with two ways of doing with | rousted salmon-backs, — the fresh roasted salmon-backs; | and we have talked about the old soaked roasted | salmon-backs. 5 Now we wall go on and talk about the || roasted salmon-backs when they are fed to young men, even | when they are really dry, in winter. When they are | given to young men, they are broken into three pieces | and put on the food-mat. | They are just put down in

10 front of the guests, || and the oil-dish is also put down | in front of what is to be eaten. Then water is taken by the | man and given to Iris guests to | rinse their mouths, and they drink some of it after they have finished rinsing their mouths; | and after they have finished drinking, they eat the dry salmon, which is really brittle; ||

15 and only that is different from the soaked salmon, | that they do not take much oil when they dip it; but they take | much oil when the brittle salmon-back is dipped in, for | the food chokes them. There is also always a bucket | of water standing in front of those

20 who are eating the roasted salmon-back; || for, as soon as those who are eating it get choked, they | take some water and wash down what chokes them.1. . . | As2 soon as the young men finish eating, they drink much I oil; namely, the oil that is left in the oil-dish; | anil after i Continued in Publications of the Jesup North Pacific Expedition, Vol. V., p. 428. 2 Continued from ibid., p. 428.

they finish drinking the oil, they drink some more water; || and after 25 they finish drinking water, the}* wait for the | next course. That is all. |

Old Salmon, roasted. — Now I will talk about the | roasted old salmon when it is eaten before it is quite dry. | It is broken to pieces and put into a dish, || and the oil-dishes are, filled with oil, for much 30 oil | is mixed with fresh salmon coming from the upper part of the rivers; for | people really choke with this food, and sometimes those who eat | the roasted old salmon have to drink oil when they gel j choked. The host always pours oil into the || oil-dishes of his guests. 35 After the guests finish eating, | they drink much water. This is also the breakfast-food | of the Kwakiutl, and they also do the same: they rinse | their mouths with water before they eat. Now we have finished with this. |

Boiled Salmon. — Now I will talk about the cooking of salmon that is speared, | whenitisnotreally dry. When | the speared salmon isl dry, the woman takes it down. | Then she takes a kettle and puts it on the || fire, and she pours water into it. Then she takesher | fish-knife and cuts (the salmon) topiccesinthiswav: and | after she has cut it, she puts it into the kettle before

8 it | begins to boil. Then she takes a stone and puts it on top of it | to keep it under the water; and after she has clone so, she

10 takes || a dish and a kelp bottle with oil in it, and puts them | at the place where she is sitting; and she does not leave (the salmon) long on the fire, | before it is done. Then she takes it off, and at once she | takes her tongs and lifts it out and puts it into the dish. | After it is

15 all out, then she smoothes it in thedish,so || that it is level. Then she takes her kelp with oil in it, and she | pours it over the quarter-dried salmon in the dish. | After she has done so, she gives water to those | whom she is going to give to eat. As soon as they have rinsed their months, they drink; | and after they finish drinking water, she puts the

20 dish || before those whom she is going to give to eat. When this is done, they go to draw | fresh water for them to drink after they have eaten; and it is not | long before he who went to draw water comes back; and after those | to whom she has given to eat have eaten, the woman takes soft | white cedar-bark and gives it to those to whom

25 she has given to eat, to wipe their hands with, || and to take the oil off of the hands of those to whom she has given to eat, for there is really much | oil on their hands, and they are always covered with oil when I key are eating quarter-dried | speared salmon with oil for their food. After they have | wiped their hands, the woman takes |

another dish and pours water into it, and she || puts it before those 30 to whom she has given to eat, and they wash their hands. | After they have done so, the woman gives them water | to drink. After they have finished drinking, they wait for | the next course. That is the end. |

Old Dried Salmon. — Now we will again talk about dried salmon. | i That is the way of cooking fresh dried salmon, what I said first;1 | and this is the way of cooking old dried salmon, what I am going | to say. This is when it is the middle of winter, when || all the women put 5 down the soaking-boxes in the corner of their houses. | Then (the woman) puts into the water much dried salmon. Now she soaks it I to make it soft. In the morning, as soon as day comes, the woman | takes some of the soaked dried salmon and folds it up; then she puts it I into a kettle and places it over the fire of her house. |[ Next she pours not much water on it. Then it begins to boil; | and 10 the kettle is not over the fire long, when | she takes it off. Then the woman takes a dish and | puts it down, and she takes (the salmon) out with her tongs and | puts it into the dish. Then she waits until it gets cool; || and as soon as it is cool, she takes it and breaks it 15 into I small pieces. Then she puts it into the dish; then | she takes the oil-dish and pours oil into it; and then | she puts it before him to whom she is going to give to eat. Others pour the | oil on the

20 soaked salmon when they break it into the dish; and [| the Koskimo drink the liquid of the soaked salmon as they eat it, for | they have no oil. |

Fresh Dried Salmon. The food of thosewho catch salmon | is fresh dried salmon. Before the (dried) salmon is dry, j it is taken by the

25 woman and put down on a mat. Then || she takes her fish-knife and cuts the quarter-dried salmon; | and she puts it into a keltic and she puts the kettle over the | fire of the house. Then she pours water in In it; | and it does not stay there long boiling, when she takes the kettle off the fire. | Then she puts it down on the floor, and takes a dish,

30 and oil from a || kelp bottle in which the oil is kept. Then she puts (the salmon) down at the place where she is sitting. | Then she takes her largest spoon and scoops out | the quarter-dried salmon and puts it into the dish. As soon as she has | spread out the quarter-dried salmon evenly in the dish, she takes the kelp bottle in which the oil is, and pours (the oil) over the food to be served. || 1 Green Salmon. — This is another break fa si -food of the | Kwakiutl, when they live at the river catching salmon. It is the "green salmon'' j cut straight along the hack. This is the way it is cut: At this time it is not | really dry, and therefore it is called 5 "half-dry || green salmon." The woman just takes it down from where it is hanging; j then she puts it on a food-mat, and she takes her fish-knife and cuts up the green salmon. | 7 Then what she is cutting is in small pieces. When she finishes this work, | she takes the kettle and puts it over the fire, and she || pours 10 water into it. As soon as it boils, she takes | the half-dry green salmon and puts it into the | boiling water on the lire. However, it is not on the fire really long, when she takes it off. [ Then she puts it down and takes a dish, which she puts down: | then she takes oil from the kelp bottle and puts that down; then she || takes an oil-dish and 15 puts it down; and as soon as | all these things named have been brought, she takes the tongs and takes out | the cut pieces of green salmon and puts them into the dish. She | takes them up with the tongs because they are [not] quarter dry, and they are not j dry. This i( called "half-dry green salmon." As soon as the dish is || full, she 20 levels it out so that it is level. Then she | takes an oil-dish and pours the oil into it.1 | . . . (The2 man who eats it) takes what he is going to eat and folds it up. He chews | one end of it; and as soon as what he has chewed is soft, he dips it | into the oil and puts it into his mouth; and he continues doing this while || eating. | 25

As soon as he finishes eating, the woman rises from her | place and takes the dish and the oil-dish. Then she | puts them down near i Continued in Publications of the Jesup North Pacific Expedition, Vol. V, p. 129. • Continued from ibid., p. 429.

28 the place where she is sitting. Then she. "pours | the green salmon thatis left over back into the kettle in which it was boiled.1 . . . Then2

30 the man sits down || and waits for her to give him the second course. I shall | talk about this later on, for I am talking now about | the breakfast. | 1 Soaked Green Salmon (1). — Now I will talk again | about soaked green salmon, — the food of those who do not go to catch | salmon in green salmon that have been dry for a long time. | They are always 5 winter, — soaking in a soaking-box, which stands in the || corner of the house, full of water. Dried green salmon are always kept | in it. After they have been soaking for two days, | they get soft; then the soaked green salmon are taken | and folded up. The kettle is taken, | and the soaked green salmon are put into it. Then (the kettle) is put ||

10 over the fire of the house. As soon as it is well over the fire, | water is poured into it; but now it is a longer time over the fire | boiling before the cook takes it off . Then she takes | a dish and she puts it down, and she again takes an oil-dish | and oil and puts it on

15 the floor where she is sitting. Then she || takes her tongs and takes up the soaked green salmon | out of the kettle and puts them into the dish. Then she | waits for them (to cool off). Then she takes a food-mat and spreads it | before the one to whom she is going to give i Continued in Publications of the Jesup North Pacific Expedition, Vol. v, p. 430. 2 Continued from ibid.', p. 430.

breakfast; and as soon as the soaked (salmon) are lukewarm, | she breaks them in pieces small enough for one || bite.1 ... 20

As soon as she has finished breaking the soaked green salmon, she spreads them out | so as to make them level in the dish- Then she takes the oil-dish | and pours the oil into it. As soon as she has done so, she takes | the dish and the oil-dish and puts them j| in front of the one to whom she is going to give to 25 eat. She puts down the oil-dish just | outside of the dish; and after doing so, she draws water and | gives it to him who is going to eat. Then the man who is going to eat takes | a mouthful of water and rinses the mouth; and after [ rinsing the mouth, lie drinks. After drinking, he takes || a piece of the soaked salmon and dips it in the 30 oil and puts it into his mouth. | He never chews it, because it is soft. Then he keeps on | doing this whde he is eating; and when it is nearly all gone, he stops | eating2. . . . |

After he finishes drinking, lie waits for the second course. || That is 35 the end of this.

Soaked Green Salmon (2).- -When a man wishes to | invite his tribe 1 the following day, he | asks permission of his wife to give a feast (to his friends) on the following day. | The woman at once makes her husband go and fetch || water and pour it into the soaking-box. 5

) Here follows p. 750, lines 1-3. 2 The description of the eating of the salmon has been omitted.

6 Her husband goes at once | and pours water into the soaking-box, that stands in the | corner of the house; and when it is half full of water, the | woman takes roasted salmon and puts it into it; and | when it is

10 done, the man goes to get fire-wood and || takes it into his house. Now it is evening. As soon as | night comes, they lie down; and therefore in the morning, when daylight comes, | the man arises and builds a fire in his house; and as soon as the | fire in the house blazes up, lie sends one of his house-fellows to go and | call all the men; and

] f) it is not long before the messenger || comes back. Immediately they clear the house; | and after they finish clearing it, they take the kettle and | put it down in front of the fire; and the woman takes | her dishes and places them at the place where she is sitting, and also |

20 the oil-dishes and oil. As soon as this is all ready in the house, || the man goes to call the guests again. He stays a long time outside calling them, but | the men come in one by one into the house. At last they are | all inside. Then a drum is taken and is | pxit down on the right-hand side of the guests. Immediately the | song-

25 leader begins to sing the new songs. Now they || sing a feast-song, and the host takes the soaked | salmon out of the water and puts it into the large kettle. | When it is full, it is put over the fire, and | 1 hen water is poured into it. It does not boil long | before the kettle is taken off. It is only on the fire waiting || for the guests to finish 30 singing. As soon as they finish singing, | the man takes a mat and spreads it out, and he takes | his long tongs and takes the roasted boiled salmon out with them. | Immediately the woman takes one roasted salmon and | puts it into each dish; and when || one roasted 35 salmon has been put into each, the woman breaks it into small pieces | just the right size for our mouths; and j after she has broken it in pieces, she pours oil into the | oil-dish. After she has done so, the man | takes the drum and puts it down by the door of the house: and || he puts down the dishes and gives one dish to each two men, | 40 when really all the tribes are guests in the house; | and as soon as all the dishes have been put down, he takes a bucket and | places it before the guests highest in rank, and they rinse | their mouths ; and after they have rinsed their mouths, they || drink. After they have 45 finished drinking, they begin to eat; and | when they begin to eat, the man goes to draw fresh water, for | they drink after the}7 finish eating. After they have eaten, | the man takes away the dishes and takes them to the place where his | wife is sitting. After he has taken them away, lie puts the bucket jj with water before the guest 50 highest in rank; then he dips | the cup into it and gives it to him;

52 then they all drink; | and after they finish drinking, the woman washes | four dishes and pours water into them, and the | man puts

55 them before the guests. Then || they all wash their hands; and after they have washed their hands, | they wait for the next course. That is the end of this. |

Salmon Preserved in Cellars. — (It has been described before [p. 237], how salmon is kept in cellars for winter use.) 1 When there are no more | salmon in the rivers, the cellar is dug up. The salmon are washed in water | until all the clay and sand come off. As soon as all | the dirt is off, they are soaked in the river 5 and are left there over || night. As soon as day comes, the woman takes | out of the river what has been soaking. Now the quarterdried | green salmon are thick; they are just like fresh salmon. | The woman just takes her fish-knife, and they are cut this way | /jtj\

10 into twelve pieces. Then she puts them into a || kettle; then she puts it on the fire and pours water over | it. Then it is boiled a long time before it is taken off. | She stirs (the meat). As soon as it is all to pieces, she | puts the kettle back over the fire. Then it is left over the fire a very long time. | When it is done, it becomes a mush; and she pours ||

15 oil into it while it is still over the fire, and it is stirred again. | Then the kettle is taken off and put down. Then | spoons are given to the guests, and the woman takes the dishes | and she pours into them the 18 quarter-dried salmon that is to be eaten with spoons. Then the dishes are nearly | full,1 . . . They are not given a second course. Sometimes || green salmon are just put into a kettle and boiled for a 20 short time, | when they are taken off and cut to pieces. They are put | into the dish without water. Then oil is poured over them. | The man only takes them from the dish with his hands | and eats them.1 . . . Then (the guests) just lie down on their seats and || wait for the next course until it is done. Another | course is not 25 given when they have eaten with spoons the quarter-dried green salmon. This is | the way of the Denax'da£xu in Knight Inlet.

Middle Part of Salmon, cold or boiled. — The description of a feast continues with the following notes on the preparation of middle parts of the salmon 2 :

(1) Then the woman J takes a dish and puts it down at the place 1 where she is sitting; then she goes | and opens the basket in which the middle part of the salmon is, | and she breaks off the cedar-bark with which the middle parts of the salmon are twined together. When there are four || men, the woman takes eight middle parts | of 5 salmon and breaks them up into two dishes, | four pieces into each dish. As soon | as she has broken them, she takes her oil-dish and pours | oil into it.3 . . . They4 take up what they are going to eat and || fold it over, and chew it to make it soft, and then they dip it | 1 0

1 Here follows a description of the eating of the food, which has been omitted.

2 Continued from Jesup Expedition, etc., Vol. V, p. 436, line 24.

s Continued from ibid, p. 431, line 7. ' Continued on ibid, p. 430, line 25.

11 into the oil; and then they put it into their mouths and they begin to eat,1 . . . and (the men) wait for the second course. | That is the end. |

(2) When the middle parts of the salmon are really dry, they are

15 soaked || in the soaking-box, which stands in the corner of the house. | It is always filled with water; and the woman | always puts the middle parts of the salmon into it, so that it is full; and when | she goes to take the middle parts of the salmon to cook them, she | puts in again some more dried middle parts of the salmon, and changes ||

20 them for those that have been taken out. 2 . . . When her husband comes, | the woman takes the soaking middle parts of the salmon and j counts two pieces of the middle parts of the salmon for each | man; and so she takes twelve pieces. She | puts them into the

25 kettle; and her husband puts the kettle || on the fire, and he also pours water into it. | Then the woman takes two dishes and also | two oil-dishes, and puts them down where she sits. | The kettle is not very long over the fire, when it is taken off; | and the man also

30 takes the tongs || and takes out the soaked middle parts of the salmon and puts them also into | a large dish which stands on the floor of the house, | made for this kind of cooking.3 . . . |

Her husband breaks to pieces the soaked middle parts of salmon, 33 and | he measures what he is breaking so that they will be the right size for our mouths; || and his wife pours od into the oil-dishes; j and 35 after the man has finished breaking what he is working at, | the guests finish singing.1 . . . _____^ Then (the man) takes up two|

oil-dishes and puts |Y~" c5 j) them | in the far side of the dish, | in this manner:2 lc^_ — -^Z) ... As soon as (the guests) finish, they wait || for X x x the next course. 40

Split-Backs. — (The split-backs are eaten without being boiled or l blistered. The man takes the "split-down" and folds it up and dips it into the oil and puts it into his mouth.) He does not chew it before he | clips it into the oil, for it is really soft.3 . . . After | the men have finished drinking, they wait for the second course. | That is the end of this. For they never soak this split-down, || because it does not get hard, although it may be old. Even if it is two | 5 years old, it never gets hard, for it is really worked thoroughly. Therefore | it keeps always soft. That is the end. |

Soaked Backbones, boiled or blistered (1). — (The woman) takes | the soaked backbones out of the water in the soaking-box, and puts them|| on a mat that is spread at the place where she is sitting. Then the 1 0 man | breaks them into three pieces and puts them into the kettle. |

■ Continued in Jesup Expedition, etc., Vol. V, p. 432, lines 4-21. ' Continued in ibid., p. 432, line 21, to p. 434, line 40. 3 Continued in ibid., p. 434, line 40, to p. 435, line 8. ' Continued from ibid., p. 435, line S.

12 After he has done so, he puts the kettle on the fire; and | as soon as it stands there firmly, the man pours water into it; | and it does not

15 take long before it begins to boil. Then the kettle is taken off; || and the woman takes five dishes and | puts them down, and also five oil-dishes. As soon as | it is all on the floor, the man takes his tongs, and | takes the soaked backbone out of the water and puts it into the

20 dishes.1 1 . . . When they finish (eating) they wait for a second || course.]

(2). — Sometimes the soaked backbone is blistered by the | fire of the house to heat it, when there are not many who have been | invited,—

for instance, two men, — or when the owner of the house | is given this,

25 to eat by his wife. She just goes and takes some || soaking backbone, and blisters it by the fire. When | it is done, she puts it on a foodmat; | and an oil-dish is taken and oil poured into it. | When it is put on the food-mat outside | of the blistered soaked backbone, it

30 is eaten by the one || man and his wife and his children, in this manner. | Sometimes old people desire to eat it blistered in this | way, for it has a different taste from boiled | soaked backbone, and there-

35 fore some men like it. | They never sing when their food || is going to be soaked backbone; for this is going to be their food when few i Continued in Jesup Expedition, etc., Vol. V, p. 436, line 12, to p. 437, line 22.

are eating, | for there are never many who eat this kind of cooking; I 36 and the only time they eat this is in the morning. That is | all about this. |

Fins and Tails (1). — Now I will talk about the cooking | of the. pec- 1 toral fins and anal fins and the tails of the | dog-salmon. These three kinds are [never not] always eaten at | noon and in the evening. When they are going to eat pectoral fins || and anal fins and tails, a 5 soaking-box is taken, | and water is poured into it. Then (several handfuls of) | pectoral fins are picked up and put into it. For four days they are soaking in it. | Then they are taken out and put into a kettle; and | water is poured on them before they are put on the fire. || When they are covered with water, they are put on the | fire. 10 Sometimes they are kept boiling until it is nearly noon, | for they try to boil the bones soft. When the bones are boiled to pieces, | the kettle is taken off the fire. Then the | woman takes a dish and puts it alongside the kettle. || Then she takes a large spoon, | and ladles 15 out the pectoral fins, and she pours them into the | dish. When they are all in it, she places it before the one who is to eat it; | and next water is given to drink to him who is going to eat it. As soon | as (the guests) finish drinking, they eat. No oil is || dipped with it when 20

21 they eat these pectoral fins and anal fins and | tails. After they have eaten, the woman takes | the dish out of which those have eaten to whom she has given to eat, j and she takes water and pours it into it. Then she puts it back before those to whom she has given

25 to eat, | and they wash their hands in it. After || they have done so they are given water to drink. | Often they are not given a second course after eating | pectoral fins and anal fins and also tails. | The guests just go out of the house. The | old people always eat that,

30 about which I am talking. || Only poor people have, for their food, these three kinds | about which I am talking. That is all. |

(2). — When there are many roasted salmon-tails, | the owner invites his friends early in the morning to come [ and eat breakfast in his house.

35 As soon as the guests are all in, || the man who invited them takes a food-mat and spreads it on the floor | in front of his guests. Then lie takes the roasted salmon-tails | and puts them down lengthwise on the food-mat. Then lie takes | water and gives it to them; and after they finish drinking, | they begin to eat. As soon as the guests

Id licgin to eat, || the man takes his bucket and goes to draw fresh water for I drinking afterwards. As soon as he comes back, he puts down on the floor the | bucket with water in it; and after they have finished eating the salmon-tails, | the man puts the bucket with water in it before them, and | immediately they drink of it. After they finish drinking, || they go out. There is no oil to dip with it, 4.5 and | there is no dish, and they do not rinse their mouths; for | the first people said that the silver-salmon would disappear | if these three kinds of things were done. | Therefore they take for them a new food-mat; and || they do not wipe their hands when they eat 50 roasted salmon-tads | and roasted backbones of silver-salmon; for often the guests just rub [ their 1 ands, after they finish eating, to dry off | the fat of their food. The owner of the | salmon-tads eats some of what has been left over by those who have eaten, || when he 55 gets hungry, and he does the same way with roasted | backbones. That is all. |

Salmon-Cheeks. — As soon as winter comes, (the woman) takes | her 1 soaking-box and puts it down in the corner of the house; | then she draws water (and pours it) into the soaking-box until it is half full of water. | Then she takes the basket in which she keeps the "plucked cheeks" and pours them into the || soaking-box. She soaks them 5 four days in the house. After | they have been soaking four days, the woman requests her husband, | even if it is noon, to go and invite the old chiefs | to come and eat the "plucked cheeks," for only the chiefs | eat this kind (of food). The man at once goes and j|

10 selects the chiefs whom he intends to invite in. It is not long before they all come into | his house. [I have forgotten that his wife | at once spreads out mats for the guests to sit down on the floor. | Those who have been invited go right in and sit down on | the spread mats.]

1 5 As soon as they are all in, the || man takes a kettle and pours water into it, | and he puts it on the fire in his house; but his wife goes on with her work. | She takes a basket, and takes the "plucked cheeks" out of the water and puts them into the | basket, and pours them into the kettle which | is boiling over the fire in the house. Then the

20 woman takes dishes and || puts them down where she is sitting, and she also takes tongs; | and when she thinks that (the "plucked cheeks") are done, her husband takes | the kettle from the fire. Immediately the woman takes her tongs | and takes out the "plucked cheeks" and puts them into the dishes; | and when they are all in

25 the dishes, she places || one dish in front of each four men. As soon | as this is done, she takes a bucket with water in it and places | it in front of the guests; then they drink; | and when they finish drinking, they begin to eat; | and when they begin to eat, the woman takes

30 another || dish and pours the liquid of the "plucked cheeks" into it. Then she counts one | spoon for each guest, and she goes and gives them each one. She | takes up the dish with the liquid in it and places it in front of them, to | eat it with spoons while they are 33 eating the "plucked cheeks." They eat (the liquid) with spoons | while they are eating (the heads). After they have eaten, || the 35 woman takes up the dish and pours out what was in it. | Then she pours some good water into it, and she | places it in front of her guests again. Then they wash their hands; | and after they have done so, the bucket with water in it is put before them, | and they drink out of it. After || they finish drinking, they go out; for no 40 second course is served after | eating the "plucked cheeks," and also no oil is dipped with it. | Therefore only liquid of the "plucked cheeks" is drunk while they are | eaten. That is the end. |

Fresh Salmon-Heads. — Sometimes they eat (the salmon-heads) at 1 once when they are soft, for often | the old people come to the owner of this kind (of food to ask to be invited). | Then it is just put down on a food-mat and placed in front of those || who ask to be invited. 5 They do not eat it in the morning, only | at noon and in the evening; and those who eat it do not rinse their mouths, | for that is only done in the morning. They only drink water | before they eat the roasted heads, and they also drink water | after they finish eating; and then they take a mouthful of water || and squirt it over their hands to 10 wash them, for | their hands are greasy from the fat of their food,

12 for they just take | the whole roasted salmon-heads and hold them when they eat them, therefore | their hands are very greasy. As soon as they finish, | they go out of the house, for no second course is

15 served after fresh || roasted salmon-heads. That is all about this. | Preserved Salmon-Heads. — Now we wdl talk about the | roasted salmon-heads when they cook them in winter. When | it is winter, the common people are invited to come | to the house of the owner

20 of the roasted salmon-heads. Then || they do again the same thing tli at I told of before,1 when they spread out | mats behind the fireplace of the house for the guests to sit down on | when they come in. As soon as they are in, | they are led by the woman to their seats on

25 the spread | mats. When they are all in, the || woman at once takes the basket in which she keeps the salmon-heads, and she puts it down | at the place where she is sitting; and her husband takes a large | kettle and puts it down also, next to the place where his wife is sitting. | At once the woman opens the top of the basket, | and she takes out the roasted salmon-heads and puts them into the

30 kettle. || Then she places them in it so that all stand on the part where | the head has been cut off, and so that the faces of the roasted heads are upward; and she only | stops when the kettle is full. Her husband | at once takes up two buckets and goes to draw water | 33 for the liquid of what is being cooked. As soon as he comes back, || he pours (the water) into (the kettle). When it is half full of water, | 35 his wife takes an old mat and covers it over, so | that the steam may not come through when it boils. As soon as | this has been done, she puts the kettle on the fire. Immediately | the guests begin to sing the songs of their ancestors. || Four songs are sung. Then the | 40 host takes the dishes and puts them down at the place where his | wife is sitting; and when that is done, she dips up some water, so that | everything stands ready on the floor of the house. After it has been boiling for a long time, the | kettle is taken off; and it just stands on the floor of the house, || for she wants (what is being 45 cooked) to swell up. After the guests finish singing, | and when the hostess thinks that what is being cooked is (thoroughly) soaked, | then she takes the tongs and takes off the covering. | Then she takes a large long-handled ladle and takes out | what has been cooked and puts it into the dishes; || and she only stops when they are all fuU of what 50 lias been cooked. | Then (the host's) wife takes an old [bad] foodmat and | spreads it out in front of the guests. After she has done so, | her husband takes up the dishes and places them before his | guests. There are four men to each dish. || After this has been done, 55

56 she dips up some water, and they drink it; | and after they have finished drinking, they begin to eat. They just take up | one sakaon-head and hold it in their hands when they are eating, | and they throw the bones on the food- | mat; therefore an old [bad]

60 food-mat is used, || for the fat of the salmon-heads sticks | to the mat. And after they have eaten, the woman | takes up the eatingdishes and pours out into the kettle | the food that was left. Then she washes them out; | and after she has done so, she pours some

65 water into them, and she puts them again || before those to whom she has given to eat; and at once they all | wash their hands; and after the | men have washed their hands, the host draws some water, and they | all drink; and after they have finished drinking, | the

70 oldest one among the guests speaks, praising the host; || and when he stops speaking, the host thanks them for their | words; and when he stops speaking, they wait for the | second course. That is all of this. | 1 Steamed Salmon-Heads. — Now I will | talk about the salmonheads steamed (on hot stones) , | — -the heads of all kinds of salmon. When | the woman cuts the salmon, as soon as she finishes, her || 5 husband cuts fire-wood; and after he has done so, he | digs a hole on the beach. Then he puts the split fire-wood lengthwise | into it.

After he has done so, he piles stones into it; | and when the fire-wood S is covered with stones, | he puts fire under the pile of wood and stones; and when the pile of wood and stones blazes up, [| he goes 10 back into the woods and gets | skunk-cabbage leaves; and when he gets many of them, he brings them and puts them down | near the pile of wood and stones; and he takes his tongs | and lie brings his bucket. His wife takes off | the gills from the salmon-heads, and her husband takes || eel-grass, drifted ashore; and after this has been 15 done on the beach, | and when the stones are hot enough the man takes his tongs | and takes up a fire-brand and puts it down on the beach, far away from | the place where the heads are to be steamed; and when all the fire has been taken out, | he levels the stones; and when they are all level, || he takes the eel-grass and puts it around the 20 stones; | and when this has been done, he takes the skunk-cabbage leaves and spreads them | over the stones; and he only stops when there are four layers | of skunk-cabbage leaves spread out. As soon as this is done, he takes the | salmon-heads and places them, nose upward, on the skunk-cabbage leaves. || As soon as they are all on 25 the stones, he takes several skunk-cabbage leaves and | spreads them over the salmon-heads; and when these are spread also four layers thick, | he takes his bucket, dips up sea-water | on the beach, and brings it up to the steaming-hole. | Then he takes mats and places

30 them by the side of it, and he takes a || pointed cedar-stick and pokes holes through the covering of skunk-cabbage leaves, for the water to go through when he pours it on. When | all this is done, lie takes the bucket of water and pours it over the | skunk-cabbage leaves; then he takes the mats and covers them over the leaves, | so that the steam can not come through. After he has covered (the

35 steaming-hole) || he calls his friends to come and sit down on the beach at the place where he is steaming | salmon-heads. After they have been sitting there some time, the man uncovers | what he is -.teaming; and the guests at once | sit around the steamed salmonheads, and they at once eat by picking the heads | with their hands

40 while they are still hot; || and after they have eaten, water is drawn and | is drunk afterwards, and the hands are washed. After they finish drinking | water and washing their hands, they go home. | That is the way in which the Indians cook the heads of the dogsalmon | when they are first caught, and of the humpback-salmon

45 and of silver-salmon caught by trolling, and || of all the other kinds of salmon. | 1 Boiled Salmon-Heads. — Now I will | talk about boiled salmonheads. | When the woman finishes cutting the | dog-salmon and 5 silver-salmon, when they are first caught, || her husband at once takes a kettle and pours water into it, | and his wife takes off the gills from the heads. | After this has been done, she puts the salmon-heads into 7 the kettle; | and when it is full, she takes an old mat and | covers the salmon-heads which are in the kettle. || After she has covered them, 10 she puts them over the fire. | Then they invite whom they like to invite among their tribe; | and when the guests come in, the woman takes | her dishes and her spoons, and takes them to the place where she is sitting. | The kettle has not been boiling a long time, || before 15 it is taken off the fire. Then the cover is taken off. | The woman takes a long-handled ladle made for the purpose, | and dips out the salmon-heads one by one, and | puts them down into a dish. Then she counts the salmon-heads, so that | there are two for each man. [| There are eight salmon-heads in each dish for | four men. After she 20 has done this, a | food-mat is spread on the floor of the house in front of the guests, and | an empty dish is taken and put down outside | of the food-mat spread on the floor. Then || the dish with the 25 heads in it is picked up and placed before the guests, | inside of the empty dish and nearest to the guests; | and (the woman) also takes the spoons and distributes them among the guests. | The guests at once pick off the skin of the salmon-heads [ and eat it; and after all the skin has been eaten, || they pick off the bones and suck them. 30

31 Then, | after all the good meat has been sucked off, they throw the bones which they have been sucking | into the empty dish which has been put down for the | bones that have been sucked off, to be thrown into it. After all the | bones have been taken out of the head, they

35 pick up out of the dish with their hands || the edible part of the salmon-head and eat it; and after | they have finished eating it, the man takes away the dish with the bones in it, | and pours them into the kettle, and he washes | the dishes out, and he pours water into the dishes and places them in front | of those who have eaten the

40 salmon-heads, and they wash their hands. || After they have finished washing their hands, the man | draws some water for them, and they drink it; and after they have finished drinking, | they go out. That is all about this. | 1 Mush of Boiled Salmon-Heads. — Heads of all | kinds of salmon, eaten with spoons, — that is what I am going to talk about. This is the same as | I have told before; and the only difference is that they are not | covered with an old mat, and that they are left to boil a 5 long time on the fire, so that they || fall to pieces. The reason why the salmon-heads are boiled to pieces is because they are always | stirred, so that the salmon-heads are broken. Then the kettle | is taken off from the fire, and the salmon-heads are dipped out into a dish, and | it is put in front of those who are going to eat it; and |

spoons are given to the guests. Then they at once eat it. || There are 10 hardly any bones to blow out, for it is really boiled to pieces. | After they have eaten it, water is drawn, and they drink it; | and after they have finished drinking it, they go out. | No oil is taken with this, as with what I have been talking about before.

Milky Salmon- Spawn. — When (the salmon-spawn) has been in the house for some time, || it is cooked, and then it is called "milky." | 15 This is put into a kettle, and some water is poured over it; | then it is stirred, and they just stop | stirring when it is quite milky. Then the kettle is put | on the fire, and the man watches it; and when || it gets warm, the man takes a large | stirring-ladle with a long 20 handle, made for this purpose, and stirs it with it, | and he continues stirring it while it is boding. It is not | left to boil a very long time, and is taken off from the fire when | it is done. The mdky spawn || with its liquid is dipped out into a dish, and oil is poured into it. 25 Then | it is placed before those who are to eat it, and they eat it with spoons. | After they finish eating with spoons, they drink fresh water, | and they drink water before they begin to eat it. | This is eaten by the Indians at noon and in the evening. || They do not eat 30 the milky spawn in the morning, for it makes them sleepy, | on

' Continued from p. 235, line 14.

32 account of its fat. Now I will talk also about the | milky salmon when it lasts until the winter. | Then it is called "clayey." When the | old men are invited at noon or in the evening by the one who

35 owns it, — for this also is not || eaten in the morning, — when all | the guests are in, the owner who invited them takes a kettle and | washes it out well, so that it is quite clean. He takes it up, | and puts it down by the side of the box in which the milky spawn was | before

40 it began to rot. Then he takes || a large clam-shell and dips out the really | rotten-smelling spawn, and dips it out into the kettle; and when | the kettle is half full of salmon-spawn, the man stops dipping it out. | Then he takes up the kettle and puts it down | by the side

45 of the fire, and pours water into it; and he only || stops pouring into it when the kettle is half full of water. He does not | stir it. As soon as it is done, he takes another | kettle and washes it out well with water; and when it is | clean, he puts it down on the floor of the house; and then he takes from the floor of the house | the

50 kettle in which the salmon-spawn is, and puts it over the fire; || and when it is on the fire, he takes his long-handled stirring- | ladle and dips up the salmon-spawn and its liquid, and pours it back | into the kettle; and he continues doing this until it | bods over. He never stirs it: he only | dips it up. He does not dip it up for a long time, before it || boils a little; and as soon as it boils, over, it is taken off 55 the fire | and poured into the cold kettle. Then it | is done. The reason why it is quickly poured into the | cold kettle is, that, if it is allowed to boil for a long time, then the | water gets clear, and the spawn separates from the liquid. || When it is poured into the cold 60 kettle | as soon as it begins to boil over, then it is just like boiled flour, and it is mushy. | Immediately the man takes the dishes and j puts them down close to the place where the kettle is standing | in which the clayey spawn is. Then he takes a long-handled [[ ladle 65 and dips up the clayey 'salmon, and puts it | into the dishes; and when the dishes are full of the | clayey spawn, he takes oil and pours it into it, — | really much oil. The reason why they take much | oil is that it chokes those who eat it. After (the man) finish |[ putting oil into 70 it, he puts it before the guests, | and his wife takes her spoon-basket and distributes the spoons | among the guests. They do not drink water before | they eat it. They just eat it right away. As soon as | they begin to eat, the man draws fresh water for his guests to drink || after they have eaten. As soon as the one who went to 75 get water comes back, | he puts down the water that he has drawn, and waits for his guests to finish | eating; and after they finish eating,

78 he takes the dishes | and puts them down at the place where his wife is sitting. | Then he takes the water and places it before his guests, ||

80 and they drink; and after they have finished drinking, they | go out. They never eat anything before they eat salmon-spawn, | and those who eat it never eat a second course with it. | 1 Salmon-Spawn with Salmon-Berry Sprouts. — When | salmon-berry sprouts are eaten, the dried salmon-spawn is taken and eaten with it, I for it is not dipped in oil, for dried salmon-spawn and oil do not 5 agree: | therefore they do not dip it into it. It is also eaten |[ with fern-root, when it is eaten by the old women and | men. It is eaten with salmon-berry sprouts | and fern-roots, because it makes one feel sick when it is eaten alone, | when it is not eaten with these two. It does not make one feel sick, | when the salmon-spawn is eaten

10 with salmon-berry sprouts and fern-root. When || the winter dancers are brought back, and the singing-masters continue to sing, | the whole length of the night in the winter, and | when the speaker of the house has to speak every time (a dancer) goes out of the house, I when they lose their voices, they take dried salmon-spawn | and pass it to those who have lost their voices, that they may eat

15 it. || They chew it for a long time, and they swallow the juice | that is in their mouths, for what comes from it is just like what comes from gum. Then | they have no longer lost their voices; and also the painter, when he paints | the front of a house, takes rubbed cedar- 18 bark and | puts it into 1ms mouth, and he takes dried salmon-spawn and || he bites a piece off from it, and he chews it with the cedar- 20 bark; | and as soon as his mouth is full of that which is just like gum and nnlk, | he spits it into his paint-dish, and he does not stop until the paint-dish is nearly | full. Then he takes out of his mouth what has been chewed | and puts it into his brush -box; then he takes a || piece of coal and rubs it in the liquid that he spit out; ] and he 25 only stops when his paint is really black. | That is all about this. |

Sticky Salmon-Spawn. — As soon as spring comes, then [ the bladder with salmon-spawn is taken down from where it hangs, and it is broken open at the side. || Then a piece of sticky spawn is taken out when | 30 the salmon-sprouts are brought into the house. They peel them, and eat the sticky spawn with the | salmon-berry sprouts when they eat', and when they do not want to eat the sprouts | dipped into oil, for od and sticky spawn do not agree; | and some men, when they have no sticky spawn, dip salmon-berry sprouts into || oil, and also 35 fern-roots, when they are eaten | by the old women and men. When | the women go to dig fern-root, they | come home when they get a great many. Immediately they sit down by the fire and | roast the fern-roots under the fire in the house. As soon as || the bark is 40 blackened all over, it is done. Then she takes a piece of fire-wood

41 and | puts it clown on the floor of the house; and she takes her shortest wedge, | and she takes the roasted fern-root, and, holding it in the left hand, | she puts one end of it on the fire-wood; tnen she begins to beat | it with the wedge, and she only stops beating it

45 when it is flattened out. || After she has beaten it soft, she measures off lengths of | four finger-widths and breaks them off; | and after this has been done, she puts them on a food-mat. | Then she takes some of the sticky spawn to eat with the roasted [ fern-root, and they eat the fern-root. When there is no sticky spawn to eat with the

50 fern-root, || they dip it into od. | 1 Roasted Salmon-Spawn. — Now I will talk again about the spawn. | When various kinds of salmon are first caught by the fishermen who go trolling, | the woman takes the whole salmon-spawn, and she takes the roasting-tongs | and she puts the salmon-roe into them 5 doubled up in this way: || After this has been done, she puts it up by the side of the -j^fLj^ fire; and when it is | white all over, she takes it off. Then ^jhl EL it is done. I It is eaten at once, whde it is stdl hot; (9E=EL for | it is not eaten afterwards when it is cold; and it is ^fefeL not dipped into | od, but they 10 drink much water after hav- ^QQ= ing eaten || the roasted salmonroe. Then a flat stone is put on the fire; | and when it is hot, the stone is taken off from the | fire and laid by the side of the 12 fire. Then the | whole salmon-spawn is taken and is laid down lengthwise on the hot stone | in this manner: ^P~^-^. This is named "stuck-on-the-stone." As soon || as it ^^^^^p^^ is all on 15 the stone, it is put up edgewise by the fire, v^^^'^ so that | the spawn is heated. As soon as it all turns ^^ white, |

it is done. Then it is taken off from the fire and scraped off; | and it is eaten at once, whde it is still hot; it is also | not dipped into off by those who eat it, only much water || is drunk after it has 20 been eaten; also it is not used for inviting people of | another house; only the owner of this kind of | spawn eats what is stuck on the stone. |

Boiled Spawn of Silver-Salmon. — The | spawn of the silver-salmon, when it is first caught by trolling, is also boded. || After the woman 25 has cut open the salmon, she takes | a kettle and puts spawn into it. Then she pours | water into it, until it covers the spawn. | Then she puts it on the fire. It is not left to bod long, before it becomes white. | Then it is taken off the fire. The woman just takes the spoons || and 30 gives them to her children and to her husband, | and the woman just puts the kettle with the spawn in it | before her chfidren and her husband, and they eat it with spoons. | They only eat quickly the fresh salmon-spawn | at noon and in the evening. It is not eaten in 35 the morning, for || it makes one sleepy. After they have eaten the salmon-spawn, | they drink water. That is all about the salmonspawn. | 1 Sockeye- Salmon. — Now1 I will talk about the | way it is cooked. When winter comes, the | woman takes her soaking-box and puts it down in the corner of the | house. Then she pours water into 5 it. When it is half full || of water, she takes the basket with the split salmon and | brings it out, and puts it down near the soaking-box. Then she takes out the | split salmon and puts them into the soaking-box. After she has done so, | she takes two large stones and puts them on top of | the split salmon that are to be 10 soaked, to keep them under water. || Sometimes they are left in four or six | days soaking in the house. As soon as they are soft, the woman | takes a kettle and puts it by the side of the fire; then | she takes out the split salmon, and takes them where the kettle is standing. | Then she cuts the split salmon into three pieces with her fish- 15 knife, || and she puts them into the kettle. | After she has done so, she .takes a piece of old mat and covers over | the split salmon that is in the kettle. | After she has tucked in (the mat) all around, she pours a little | water over it. Then she puts it over the fire. As

■ Continued from p. 240, line 27.

soon as it || boils, she strikes with her tongs the covering on top, | so 20 that no steam may come through the cover | of what is on the fire. It boils a long time. | Then she takes it off; then the kettle remains standing on the floor of the house. | Then the woman takes a dish and an oil-dish and oil, || and takes them to the place where she is 25 sitting; and | after she has put them all down, she takes her tongs and takes off the covering of the | kettle, and she puts it down with her tongs at the end of the fire; | and she also takes out with the tongs the split salmon that she has cooked, | and she puts them into a dish. As soon as they are || all out of the water, she spreads out the split 30 salmon in the dish; | and when this is done, she takes od and pours it into the | od-dish; and after this is done, she takes a food-mat | and spreads it before those who are given to eat. | After this is done, she takes up the dish and the od-dish || and places them in front of her 35 guests. The oil-dish is put | inside of the dish. When this is done, she | dips up some water and gives it to those who are going to eat. ) At once they rinse their mouths; and after they have done so, they drink; | then they begin to eat. They themselves break to pieces || the split salmon that is given them to eat; and they dip it into od 40 and | put it into their mouths; and after they have finished eating, the | woman goes and takes the dish and takes it to her seat, | and she pours out into the kettle the food that is left; then she | washes 45 it out with water; then she pours water into it, and she puts || it again before those to whom she has given to eat. At once | they who have been eating wash their hands. When | the guests begin to eat, the husband of the woman draws fresh | water; and when they finish washing their hands, | the bucket with water in it is 50 put before them, and || they drink; and after they finish drinking, they wait for the | second course. That is the end of this. | And when the owner gets hungry, she takes a split salmon out of the soaking-box; ] then she takes the tongs and holds it between them, and scorches it by the | fire in this manner; 55 and as soon as the steam comes through, || she knows that it is done; but this is called | "cooke'd. quickly for those who are hungry," and this is also dipped in oil | when it is eaten. That is all about this. |

1 Silver-Salmon.1 — In the evening the man invites the | chiefs to come and eat with spoons the fresh silver-salmon. | When all the men are in the house, he takes his kettle | and pours water into it.

5 Then he puts it on the fire. || His wife takes four fresh split silver-

' The first silver salmon of the season is caught by trolling. It is cut in a ceremonial manner, head and tail being left attached to the backbone . These are roasted and eaten at once, as will be found described on p. 610. The meat of the silver-salmon is boiled.

salmon and slices their meat | crosswise. When the water in the 6 kettle is boiling, | she puts the four fresh silver-salmon into it. The woman only | stirs it when it has been boiling for some time, to break it into pieces. | After she has finished stirring it, she takes three dishes, || when there are twelve men who will eat with spoons 10 the fresh silver-salrnon, | and she takes twelve spoons which are really new, | and the large dipping-ladle. As soon as | they have all been put down, she washes out the three dishes' and the spoons; | and after she has done so, she puts the meat of the || silver-salmon 15 into the dishes. When the dishes are filled, [ she spreads a food-mat in front of (the men) ; and the man | takes up the dishes and places them before four | men, and he places another before four | others, and again one dish before four others. || After all the dishes have been 20 put down, he distributes the spoons | to them; then he gives them water to drink. | After they have finished drinking, the one highest in rank prays the same | prayer that they said when they first ate the roasted eyes;1 [ and after he stops speaking, they begin to eat with spoons. When || they begin to eat, the man takes up a bucket 25 and goes to draw | fresh water; and when he comes back, he puts down the | bucket with water in it, and waits for them to finish eating. After they finish | eating, the man takes up from the floor

'See p. 611.

the bucket with water in it and | puts it in front of his gue3ts.

30 Then they drink, and || the man takes up the dishes and puts them down at the place | where his wife is sitting. Then he takes the spoons and | puts them down at the place where his wife is sitting. As soon as | this is done, the guests go out. They do the same with |

35 the dog-salmon when it is caught for the first time. || They also do the same thing with the dog-salmon when it is | dried for winter, when they are going to keep it in the same way as the | silver-salmon. They do not pour oil over it, because it is really | fat: therefore they give it to eat only in the evening. | This is also the way when silversalmon caught by trolling is eaten with spoons in the morning. ||

40 He who eats it is never strong; he always feels sleepy the | whole day, and he is not strong: therefore it is first eaten in the | evening. As soon as the dog-salmon coming from the upper part of the | river is eaten, they pour much oil over it, for it is dry; | and there is never

45 a time when they do not eat it in the morning, at noon, and || in the evening. They are afraid to eat it in the morning, when it just jumps I at the mouth of the river, for it is really fat. That is | the cause of making (those who eat it) sleepy. That is the end of this. | 1 Sun-Dried Salmon (G-wasila) . — When winter comes, (the woman) always | takes sun-dried salmon for breakfast-food; | and when she takes some of it, she takes her tongs and puts it flat between | them in this manner: ] Then the skin side is first blistered, not || too near P ' ^--^ the fire, so that all the scales are 5 blistered off. | *^ "^ Then, when it is covered with blisters, she turns it over V^"^ | and blisters the flesh side. And as sood as it is all f gray, | she takes a bucket with water in it, and takes a mouthful and | blows it over the flesh side of the scorched sun-dried salmon || to wet it with water; and after she has 10 done so, | she takes the tongs and folds over what she is cooking, | so that the skin is outside. Then she puts it under a mat and | steps on it; and after she has stepped on it, she takes it out again | and rubs it in the same way as women do when washing clothes; || and after she 15 lias done so, she strikes it on the floor, so that the | scales which'have been scorched drop off. After she has done so, she takes small dishes, | and oil-dishes and pours oil into them. After she has done so, | she takes the scorched sun-dried sabnon and breaks it up into pieces in the I small dishes. After she has done so, she takes some water and || rinses her mouth with it. Then she drinks of it; and after | she has 20 finished drinking, she takes the broken sun-dried salmon and chews one end; | and when what she has been chewing is soft, she dips it into the | oil and puts it into her mouth and chews it and swallows it; I and she continues doing so; and she only stops when it is nearly

25 all gone. || After she finishes eating, she drinks water; and | then she puts away the eating-dish. I have forgotten that, when the woman | first takes the sun-dried salmon out of her box, she scratches | the scales from the skin before she scorches it, so that it may be well covered with | small blisters after she has scorched it. They do this

30 way only || with sun-dried salmon. It is also soaked when it is | very hard, when the spring of the following year approaches. This | is done the same way as the soaking of all kinds of soaked salmon which I | talked about before. Sometimes it is only taken out of the soaking-box | by the woman and by her husband; and (the

35 woman) takes her tongs || and puts it in in this manner,1 and she blisters it by the fire [ while it is still wet, and she turns it over and over. | Then the scales are never blistered off, because it is wet. This is | just like soaked salmon when it is done. When it is | done, she put it down on the food-mat on the skin side, and takes off

40 the || tongs. Then she takes her oil-dish and she pours oil | into it. After she has done so, she dips water up to | rinse the mouth; and after she has rinsed her mouth, she drinks; | and after she has finished drinking, she breaks pieces of the blistered sun-dried salmon | which is lying on its back, and she dips it into the oil. She continues ||

45 breaking off pieces from the bkstered sun-dried salmon which is

1 See figure on p. 351 .

boasj RECIPES 353

lying on its back on the | food-mat, and she dips it into the oil; and 4G she only | stops when what she is eating is nearly all gone. After she has finished eating, | she dips up water and drinks it; and | after she has finished drinking, she takes a mouthful of water and squirts it on her hands || and washes her hands; and after she fin- 50 ishes that, she | puts away the food-dish. Then she takes the second course. | That is all about the blistered sun-dried salmon.1 |

Boiled Silver-Salmon. — After | the silver-salmon has been caught 1 by trolling, the | woman takes one, the head, backbone, | and tail of which have been cut off, and the split silver-salmon is spread open. || Then it is placed on an old mat ] which is spread on the floor near the 5 fire of the house. She takes her small kettle | and washes it. After washing it, she | pours it half full of water and puts it on the | fire. She takes her fish-knife and .. cuts crosswise what she is ||

going to cook, in this maimer, f~~J. 2 1 on the outer (skin) side; | 10 and after she has cut it cross- t ■ I wise, the water in the kettle on the fire begins to boil. | \ i I Then the woman takes the cut silver-salmon | and puts it \ / into the water; and when the salmon is in it, | the water N — ' in the kettle stops boiling. Then the woman || watches to see when it begins to boil again; 15

1 See also p. 612. 75052—21—35 eth— pt 1 23

16 and when it begins to boil, | she takes her spoon and pushes the end into it, so that the | meat of the silver-salmon is broken up; and when it is all in small pieces, | she stirs it a little. She does not

20 let it boil a long time, | before she takes it off, for it is done. || Then she takes her small dish and dips the boiled | silver-salmon into it. After she has done so, she calls her husband | and her children to come and sit down; and when they are all | seated, she gives each a spoon, draws some | water and gives it to them to drink. After ||

25 drinking, they eat with spoons; and after eating, they | drink some more cold water. That is what the Indians call | "cooling down." After drinking, the man | takes the dishes and pours out into the |

30 kettle what is left in them. Then he takes the kettle, carries || it out of the house, goes down to the beach, and | pours the contents into the sea, and he washes it out | so that it is clean. No oil is poured in. When | the sockeye-salmon is first caught in the salmon-weirs | up the river, it is treated in the same way. The only

35 difference between this and the way they do with || dog-salmon caught on the upper part of the river is that they put | much oil into it, for it is lean, and that they pour out | outside of the house what is left over. That is all I about this. I

Boiled Salmon-Guts. — After the woman has | cut open the silver- 1 salmon caught hy her husband by trolling, | she squeezes out the food that is in the stomach, and the | slime that is on the gills. She turns the stomach inside out; || and when she has cleaned many, she takes a 5 kettle I and pours water into it. When the kettle is half full of | water, she puts the stomachs of the silver-salmon into it. After | they are all in, she puts the kettle on the fire; and when | it is on the fire, she takes her tongs and stirs them. When || (the contents) begin to boil, 10 she stops stirring. The reason for | stirring is to make the stomachs hard | before the water gets hot; for if they do not | stir them, they remain soft and tough, and are not hard. Then the woman | always takes up one of (the stomachs) with the tongs; and || when she can hold 15 it in the tongs, it is done; but when it is slippery, it is not | done. (When it is done,) she takes off the fire what she is cooking. | It is said that if, in cooking it, it stays on the fire too long, | it gets slippery. Then she will pour it away | outside of the house, for it is not good if it is that way. If || it should be eaten when it is boiled 20 too long, (those who eat it) could keep it only a short time. | They would vomit. Therefore they watch it carefully. | When it is done, the woman takes her | dishes and her spoons, and she puts them down at the place where she is seated; | but her husband invites

25 whomever he wants to invite. || When the guests come in, his wife takes a | large ladle and dips the liquid out of the kettle into the dishes. | When they are half full of the liquid of what she has been cooking, | she takes the tongs and takes out the boiled | stom-

30 achs and puts them into the dishes. When all the dishes are || full, she takes food-mats and j spreads them in front of the guests. Finally she takes the | dishes and places them in front of the guests. There is one dish for | every four guests. Then she gives | a spoon to

35 each guest. Water is never || given with this, and they never pour oil on it, j for oil does not agree with the boiled stomach; and [ therefore also they do not drink water before they eat it, for it makes those who | eat it thirsty. Then they eat with spoons; and | after they

40 have eaten, the host takes the dishes and || puts them down at the place where his wife sits. Then he takes | water and gives it to them . Then they rinse their | mouths on account of the salty taste, for the boiled stomach is really salt. | After rinsing the mouth, they drink |

45 some water; and after drinking, they go out of the house. || This finishes what I have to say about the cooking of various kinds of salmon. | They never sing when eating steamed salmon-heads | or boiled salmon-heads, or when they oat boiled stomachs, | for these are eaten quickly when they first go trolling | silver-salmon. The stomach of the dog-salmon is not eaten || when it is first caught at 50 the mouth of the river, nor when it is caught on the upper part of the | rivers; hut they boil the heads when it is caught | in the upper part of the river, also those of the humpback-salmon. At last it is finished. |

Fresh Halibut-Heads and Backbone. — Sometimes1 the j woman boils 1 the heads (of halibut) and invites the | friends of her husband; and when the men are invited | by the fisherman, bis wife takes the || heads and puts them on a lug on the floor. Then she takes an | ax 5 and chops them in pieces. The pieces are not very small. | Then she puts them into a kettle. Then she takes the backbone | and breaks it to pieces. Then she also puts it into the kettle. | As soon as the kettle is full, she takes |[ a bucket of water and empties it into it. The 10 water hardly | shows among them when she puts it on the fire. | She does not touch it; but when it has been boiling a long time, | she takes it off. Then she takes her large ladle and | also dishes, and she dips it out into the dishes with her || large ladle. As soon as all 15 the dishes are full, | she takes her spoons and gives one to each | guest, and she spreads a food-mat in front of them. | At last she

1 Continued from p. 249, line 71.

takes up the dish and puts it down in front of her | guests. Immedi-

20 ately thej- all eat with || spoons; and after they have eaten with spoons, the wife of the host | takes other small dishes and puts them down I between the men and the food-dish. | This is called "receptacle for the bones." As soon as | the guests find a bone, they throw

25 it into the small dish; || and they keep on doing this while they are eating. After | they have finished eating with spoons, they put their spoons into the dish from which they have been | eating. Then they take the small dish in which | the bones are, and put it down where the large dish had been, | and they pick up the bones

30 with their hands and put them into their mouths || and chew them. Therefore this is called "chewed;" namely, boiled | halibut-head. They chew it for a long time and suck | at it; and after they finish sucking out the fat, they blow out the | sucked bones; and they do not stop until all the bones have been sucked out. | Then the woman

35 takes the small dishes and || washes them out, and she pours some water into them, and she puts them | down again before the guests. Then they wash their hands. | As soon as they have done so, they drink; and after they have finished drinking, | they go out. Then they finish eating the halibut-heads. | Halibut-heads are not food for

40 the morning, for they are too fat. || They only eat them at noon and in the evening, because they are very | fat; that is the reason why they 41 are afraid to eat them, — that it makes one | sleepy.1!

Halibut-Tips. — (The woman) enters her house, and at once | she 1 takes the kettle and puts the halibut-tips | into it. She pours a little water over them. The water does not quite | show on top of the meat of the halibut. Then she puts || the kettle on the fire. As 5 soon as it begins to boil, she stirs | (what is in the kettle) and breaks it. After she lias stirred it, she lets | it boil for a long time, and then takes the kettle off the fire. Then | she pours oil into it, when they are going to eat out of the kettle. | When they dip it out into dishes, when there are many || guests, then she pours oil into it when it is 1" in the dish. | Then they drink water before the}" eat with spoons the | boiled meat of the halibut, and they also drink water | after they have eaten it with spoons. She puts down the food-mat when the boiled meat of the halibut is given at a feast. It is || food for the 1") morning and noon, and for the evening, for | it is not fat. Therefore they pour oil into it. The only | difference in the morning is, that they do not put much oil into it, for then only | a little is poured into it; but at | noon and in the evening it is covered with oil. No second course is served || after this has been eaten with spoons. 2 1 20

' Continued on p. 249, line 71, to p. 251, line 5. 'Continued on p. 251, line 6, to p. 252, line 33.

1 Dried Halibut. — As soon as there is no dried salmon for breakfast | in the morning, (the woman) takes dried halibut and breaks it into a dish. | When there are four guests, then there is one dish | into 5 which two dried halibut are broken: and when there are six || guests, then there are two dishes, in which there are three dried halibut, | so that there is one and a half in each dish, and | there are three guests to each dish; but they also use the food-mat, | which is spread out in front of the guests, | and the woman also takes her oil-dish and

10 pours || oil into it. As soon as she has clone so, she places the dish | in front of her guests. Then she puts down the oil-dish | and puts it in the corner of the dish, on top of the broken dried halibut, | on the outer side of the dish. As soon as this is done, she dips up some | fresh water and gives it to them to rinse their mouths. After they

15 have done so, || they drink; and after they have done this, the one highest in rank takes | some broken halibut and folds it over and chews it, | to make it soft. Then lie dips it into the oil, and finally he [ puts it into bis mouth, when it is heaped up with oil; and all the guests | do the same way when they are eating; and they never

20 forget to fold over the || broken dried halibut and to chew it soft, and then to | dip it into the oil. The reason why they chew it is that it requires much | oil, for the dried halibut is very dry food; |

for there is venT little fat in this food. As soon as | the guests finish eating, fresh water is drawn, and they drink. || After they have 25 finished drinking, the guests wait for | the second course. Thus they finish eating the dried halibut. |

Halibut-Skin and Meat. — Now I will talk | about the mixed half- 1 dried halibut-skin and half-dried halibut. | When the drying halibut and the skin are half dry, the | woman takes the half-dried halibut and cuts it down in strips || one finger-width wide, in this | 5 As soon as it is all cut up, she takes the skin and | also straight down into strips, in the manner in made the narrow strips of [ dried halibut. As the narrow strips are done, she puts | one narrow skin and one narrow strip of half-dried halibut one on the other, || and she. rolls them up into a ball: and she 1" just tucks the end | under the top of the tight strip of | skin and half-dried halibut. This is the size of an egg of a | sea-gull. As soon as all that she is doing is done, she takes the | kettle and pours water into it, and she only stops || pouring water into it when 15 the kettle is half full. Then | she puts it on the fire; and when it begins to boil, | she takes the balls of skin and dried halibut, and puts them | into the boiling kettle on the fire. However, she

20 does not | boil it long, when the kettle is taken off. || Then the woman takes her dish and puts it down at the | place where she is sitting; and she also takes a large long-handled ladle, | and takes out the rolled-up skin and | dried halibut, and puts them into the dish. She does not take any gravy, | but only the round rolled-up skin and

25 the dried halibut. || As soon as it is all out of the kettle and it is in the | dish, the woman takes a food-mat and [ spreads it in front of her guests. Then she puts the dish on it. | As soon as the woman puts the dish before them, she | draws some fresh water for her

30 guests. When it is in the morning, || the guests all rinse their mouths before they drink. | When it is noon or evening, they do not rinse their mouths, | hut they drink water before they eat. | As soon as they have rinsed their mouths, at breakfast they | drink; and after

35 they have finished drinking, they take up with their hands || the rolled-up skin and the dried halibut that they are eating. | They just bite off from their food. After | they have eaten, the woman takes the food-dish and | pours into the kettle what is left over. Then she pours | water into it, and she puts (the dish) again before

40 their guests. || Then they wash their hands. After they have finished, | some fresh water is drawn. After they finish drinking, they go out, I for no second course is served after the rolled-up skin and | 4- the dried halibut; and they also do not dip it into oil, for | the skin is very fat; and only the men highest || in rank of the various tribes 45 eat this kind. That is all | about this. |

Blistered Half-Dried Halibut. — As | soon as the drying halibut is 1 half-dried, when the halibut is first caught, | then the men of high rank enter the house of the fisherman in the morning, and | sit down in the rear of the house; and at once || the woman takes her mat, and 5 asks all the visitors to | rise from the place where they are sitting. As soon as they all stand up, | she spreads the mat on the floor; and after the mat has been spread, | she asks the visitors to sit down on it. As soon as all | are seated, the woman takes down the half-dried halibut || and blisters it by the tire. After she has finished 10 blistering it, | she takes a mouthful of water and blows it on the blistered | half-dried halibut; and after she has blown water | on it, she takes a food-mat and breaks the | blistered half-dried halibut, and puts it on the food-mat. || As soon as she has done so, she takes 15 her oil-dish and | pours oil into it. After she has finished doing so, she puts down | the mat on which the blistered half-dried halibut is, and | spreads it before those who are going to eat. She scatters the broken pieces | of blistered half -dried halibut over the food-mat.

20 Then she takes the fl oil-dish and puts it on what they are going to eat, and she also | takes water and draws it for them. When it is in the morning, | the guests all rinse their mouths. After they have finished | drinking, they take the blistered half-dried halibut and |

25 dip it into the oil. Then they put it into their mouths. || They do not chew it first, for it is brittlo, but they take much | oil on it. When they have finished eating, the woman folds up [ the food-mat, and puts it down at the place where she is sitting, | together with the oil-dish. Then she draws water for them, and | they drink.

30 After they have all finished drinking, they wait || for the second course. |

1 Boiled Dried Halibut. — | When the dried halibut has been in the house a long time, it turns red, | and it is also hard and tough. When

5 it is this | way, the woman takes her kettle, and she takes || the dried halibut and folds it into a ball. Then she puts it into the kettle, j and she pours water over it, and she only stops | when the top of the dried halibut is covered with water. Then she takes a |

• flat sandstone and puts it on top of it, to keep the dried halibut under water. | Then she puts it over the fire. Then it boils for a long time. ||

10 When she thinks that it is soaked through, | she takes it off, and she lets the kettle stay on the floor of the house. Then | the woman takes her oil-dish and pours oil into it. | Then she takes a small dish 13 and puts it down at the place where she sits. | At last she takes her tongs and takes out the flat piece of || sandstone, and she puts it 15 down at the end of the fire, j Then she also takes out with the tongs what has been cooked, and she puts it into the | small dish. She puts down her tongs, and takes what | has been cooked by her and spreads it out. She breaks it into pieces j of the right size for our mouths. As soon as she has done so, || she takes her food-mat and 20 spreads it out before those | who will eat with her, and she puts the small dish on it. Then she pours | oil into the oil-dish: and she also puts it at the outer corner | into the small dish. Then (those who are going to eat) drink fresh water: and after they finish | drinking, they begin to eat. After they finish eating, || they drink water. 25 Then the woman takes the small dish and | empties into the kettle what is left over. Then she pours | water into (the dish) and washes it out. When it is clean, | she pours fresh water into it, and she puts it again before those | who have eaten. Then they wash their hands; and || after they have finished, they wait for the second 30 course. That is | all about this. |

Scorched Halibut- Skin. — When | the skin has been dried, the l woman just takes it down from where it has been hanging, | in the

3 rear of the house. She takes her tongs, and takes up | the skin with them, by the middle, in this maimer: «=— — — ^Jll) Then she blis-

5 ters || its edge on the flesh side; and \T~~~~~ --^v. when all the fat on its side begins to cook, | then ~~~^ she blisters the inner side; | and when all its fat ^^ j — begins to cook, she turns it over and | scorches — HI — its back. As soon as it is covered with blisters, | it is done. Then the woman

10 takes her food-mat, || and she takes the scorched skin and puts it on a (mat) ; and she rolls it up | and treads on it, to make it soft, and also that the | scorched parts may come off. After she has trodden on it for a long time, | it is done. Then she opens it out, and spreads out the mat that she has been using. | Then

15 she strikes the scorched skin on the middle of the mat, || so that the scorched part comes off ; then she stops. | Then she shakes the mat, so that the scorched part comes off. Then she breaks into pieces the | scorched skin and puts them down on the food-mat. | Immediately they drink water, and eat it quickly, while | the scorched skin

20 is still hot; for as soon as it gets cold, || it becomes hard. After they finish eating, | they drink fresh water. Scorched skin is not given at a feast. | Only the owner eats it when it is scorched. | They do not dip scorched skin into oil, because it is very | fat. That is all. ||

Poked Halibut- Skin. — When the skin has been | kept for a long 1 time, and its fat turns red, it is not | good to be scorched. When the owner wants to eat it, | she takes her kettle and pours water || into 5 it until it is half full. Then she puts it on the fire. | She takes down the skin from the place where she has hung it up, in the rear of the house. | Then she takes her fish-knife and cuts the skin into pieces, in | this manner: | «;;— — p-~^^

As soon as she )d~ [*")--, finishes cutting it, she waits for the water to boil || T~ | J-3 in the kettle. As soon as it be- 10

gins to boil, | she — puts the pieces of skin into it; and when (the skin) is all in (the kettle), she | takes her tongs and pokes down on top of the skin, so as to | keep it under the water in which it is being boiled. Therefore | it is called "poked skin." After it lias been boiling for a long time, || when she thinks that it is 15 soaked, she takes it off of the fire. [ Then she takes her small dish and puts it down at the place where she is sitting. | Then she takes her tongs and takes the poked skin out of the water, and | puts it into the small dish. As soon as it is all out of the kettle, | she drinks fresh water, when it is not || in the morning; but when it is morning. 20 she rinses her mouth. As soon as | she has finished drinking, she eats it I while it is still hot; for when it gets cold, they can not | bite it, because it is hard. When she finishes eating, | taking it up with

25 her hands as she eats, she puts down her ]] small food-dish and pours out (the contents) outside of the house; for they do | not often eat all the poked skin, | and also it is not good when it is boiled again after it has been cold. | Therefore it is only thrown away. When |

the woman comes in again into her house, she pours water into (her

30 small dish) || and washes it out; and when it is clean, | she pours fresh water into it, and they all wash their hands; | and after they have finished, they do not oat a second course. Sometimes the old people I eat with spoons the liquid of the poked salmon, and they

35 eat | dried halibut raw and dry with the poked skin. || After they have eaten, they drink fresh water. | This also is not given at a feast given by the chief to his tribe ; | only the owner eats it ; and they do not I dip it into oil, for it is really fat. That is [ all about this. ||

1 Boiled Halibut-Edges. — When | the (halibut-) edges begin to be dry, and when there are many of them, | they are tied in the middle with narrow strips of cedar-bark, and they hang in the | rear of the fire of

5 the house. Then the owner invites || the chiefs in. As soon as they are all in the house, the woman | takes a kettle and puts it down on the side of the I fire nearest the door. She takes down sometimes five bundles | of edges tied in the middle, and she puts the bundles 8 into the kettle. | She does not untie the tying of narrow cedar-bark hi the middle. It || remains in the wa}^ it was tied into bundles. Then 10 she pours water into the (kettle) ; | and when it is half full of water, she takes an | old mat and covers the top with it. As soon as she has done so, [ she puts it on the fire. As soon as this is finished, | the chiefs begin to sing the songs of olden times; but the || woman 15 takes her dishes and puts them down at the place where she is sitting, | and also the tongs. Everything is ready, and | (what is in the kettle) has been boiling on the fire for a long time. After four | songs have been sung, the guests stop singing. | Then the kettle is taken off of the fire; and the woman takes her tongs, [| and takes off 20 the old mat covering and puts it down at the | door-side of the fire. Then sire takes up with the tongs the middle of one bundle of | edges and puts it into one dish. She | continues doing so with the others, and puts each into one dish. | As soon as they are all out of the water, she unties the narrow || strip of cedar-bark with which they were tied 25 in the middle, and finally she divides them into the several dishes. | As soon as she has done so, she takes a food-mat and | spreads it before the guests. Then she puts the dishes | on it, and she gives them water. After they finish drinking, | they begin to eat. They

30 take up the food with their hands || and bite off the ends of the long edges. After they have finished | eating it, they drink water, and they carry home for their wives what is left. | Then they carry it home when they leave the | house; and they wash their hands in their own houses. | No second course is given with this, for it is a

35 valuable food for feasts, for || this kind is very costly; and they do not dip it into oil, for | it is very fat. That is all about this. | 1 Roasted Halibut-Edges. — When | the (halibut-)skin is half dry, the edge is torn off. | Then it is tied in the middle with narrow strips of cedar-bark, and is hung up in the | rear of the house; Sometimes the 5 woman and her || husband desire to eat of it. Then the woman requests her | husband to make roasting-tongs. Immediately | he shaves down a piece of red pine, and splits it in the same way as | fire-tongs (are split) ; only this is different, that below it has a sharp point | where the top of the fire-tongs is. Then the woman takes

10 narrow strips of || cedar-bark and ties them around it one span of our fingers | from the sharp lower end. When this is | done, the woman takes the half-dried edges | and puts them in coils into the roasting-tongs, in this manner:1 As | soon as they are all

15 in the roasting-tongs, she ties a narrow strip of || cedar-bark around the top, so that the tongs may not spread when

1 See figure on p. 344.

they | get hot. Then she takes thin cedar-sticks and | puts them on 1(1 lengthwise, one on each side of the end [ of the edges, and she puts a stick crosswise, one at each end. | Then she puts it up by the side of the lire, and it is not long before she turns it around. || As soon as it 20 is done, the woman takes her food- | mat and spreads it out at the place where she is sitting. Then she takes the | roasted edges and puts them on it and takes them out of the tongs. | Then they drink water. After they have finished drinking water, | they take long strips of the edges and bite them off from the end. || After they have 25 finished eating them, the woman takes her small dish | and pours some water into it, and they wash their hands. | After they have done so, the woman puts away what is left over, | and they drink water. It is not put into a | dish when the}- eat it; and they do not dip it into oil, for it is || very fat; and also this is not given to the 30 tribe at a feast. [ That is all about this. |

Dried Halibut-Head. — When it is winter | and they can not catch 1 halibut, the wife of the | fisherman takes dried halibut-head and soaks it in bilge-water | of the fishing-canoe of her husband. After it has been soaking for four days || in the fishing-canoe, the woman 5 takes her kettle | and puts it down by the side of the fire. Then she

7 takes | her small basket by the handle and carries it out of the house, and she | puts it down by the side of the fishing-canoe. Then she takes out of the water the dried heads and | puts them into the small

10 basket. After it is full, she || takes it up by the handle and carries it into the house. Then | she takes out the dried heads and puts them into the kettle. | As soon as it is full, she pours water into it; and when | it is filled with water, she puts the kettle on the fire. It is I left to boil for a long time, and then the kettle is taken off the

15 fire. || Then the woman takes her dish and takes her | long-handled ladle, and she dips up the dried heads and | puts them into the dish. As soon as they are all out of the water, she drinks | water; and after she finishes drinking, she takes up with her hands | the boiled dried

20 heads and puts them into hor mouth. || Then she begins to eat. This is called "eating dried heads." Then | she throws into the fire the bones that remain. After she has finished, | she again pours into the kettle the food that has been left over. | She pours some fresh water into the food-dish that she had used. | Then she washes her

25 hands. After she has finished, she puts away the || kettlo. The remains of the dried heads | are in the kettlo in the water. She is going to put them on the fire again | when she feels hungry, for heads do not get spoiled even if they are | put on the fire ten times. Then she drinks | fresh water. The dried halibut-head is not used for inviting (to a feast). || Only the owners — that is, the woman, her 30 husband, | and her children — eat it; and this also is not dipped into oil. | That is all about this. |

Dried Halibut-Stomach, boiled | and soaked. — (The dried halibut- 1 stomach) is soaked the same number of days | as the halibut-head, which is soaked forfour | days in the bilge-water of the fishing-canoe of the fisherman. || The dried stomach is also soaked in the fishing- 5 canoe. | After it has been in the canoe for four days, it swells up. | Then the woman again takes her small basket by the handle and puts | it down by the side of the fishing-canoe. She takes the dried | stomach out of the bdge-water of the fishing-canoe and puts it into her small basket. [| When it is full, she takes it up by the handle and 10 carries it | into her house. Then she puts it down in front of the fire. | Then she takes her small kettle and washes it out. As soon as | it is clean, she takes out of the small basket tho dried stomach and | puts it into the small kettle. Then she pours water into it until || it is full, and puts it on the fire. She does not let it | boil 15 quickly. There is only little fire under the | kettle. The water gets hot slowly, | and it is on the fire from morning until noon. Then the woman | takes the kettle from the fire and puts it down at the place where she is sitting. || Then she takes a small dish and puts it down 20

21 by the side of the kettle. | Then she also takes her fish-knife and puts it into a small dish. | Then she takes her tongs and picks up the boiled stomach | and puts it into the small dish. As soon as it is

25 all out | of the kettle, she takes a thin cedar-board || four fingers wide and one span and four | fingers long. She puts it down crosswise by | the side of the small dish. Then she takes the dried stomach and puts it down on it. | She. takes her fish-knife and cuts it into small pieces | of the right size to go into our mouths. After the

30 woman has || cut up what she is cutting, she takes the kettle and | pours out the liquid of the dried stomach outside of the house. ] Then she carries it back into the house by the handle and puts it down at the place where she is sitting. | Then she pours fresh water into it and washes it out | inside. As soon as it is clean, she pours

35 it out again || outside of the house. As soon as this is done, she brings it back and puts it down | by the side of the fire. Then she pours fresh water on the | pieces of dried stomach, and she washes them well. As soon as | all the soot is washed off and they are white outside, she | puts them into the small kettle; and when they are

40 all in, she pours fresh || water over them. Now the small kettle is full of water; and she makes a good | fire, so that it blazes up well. Then she puts the kettle on the | fire, and it does not take long before it boils. Then | for a long time the woman watches it while 43 it is boiling. | When the water is nearly dried up, she pours fresli water || into it. When it is evening, the kettle is taken off, | and 45 then it is done. Immediately the woman takes her | spoon and dips the dried stomach out into a small dish. | She does not take the liquid. Only what is edible is dipped out | into the small dish. As soon as the small dish is full, she calls || her husband to come and sit 50 down in the evening. Then they | drink water. After they finish drinking, the | woman takes pointed cedar-sticks and pricks | into the dried stomach. She (eats) the same way with the pointed cedarstick | as white people eat with forks: she |[ pricks with it into the 55 dried stomach and puts it into her mouth. | When she finishes eating the dried stomach, the woman takes up the [ small food-dish and pours back what is left over | into the small kettle. Then she pours fresh water into it and | washes the inside. As soon as it is clean, she pours more water || into it, and they wash their hands; and 60 after they finish, | they drink fresh water. Dried stomach is also not used at feasts; | and they do not dip it into oil, for it is really | fat, |

Soaked Dried Halibut-Fins. — | Dried halibut-fins are also soaked 1 in the bdge-water of the fishing-canoe; | only this is different, that they are soaked for six days | in the canoe, for they are thick. 5 Therefore they are soaked for a long time. || As soon as they swell up, the woman takes her small basket | and carries it by the handle to the side of the place where the canoe is on the ground. | Then she takes one fin and washes off the soot that is on it. | As soon as it is all off, she puts it into the small basket. She only | stops when the

10 small basket is full. Then she carries the small basket || into her house, and she puts it down by the side of the fire. | Then she takes the small kettle and washes it out inside. As soon as it is clean, ! she takes split cedar-sticks. She breaks them into pieces, and | puts them crosswise in the bottom of the small kettle, (forming a grating). As soon as this is done, | she takes the soaked fins and puts them on ||

15 the crossed split cedar-sticks in the small kettle. [ She does not want what she is cooking to be burned: therefore | she puts the cedarsticks under it. When the small kettle is full of | dried fins, she pours water into it; and she only stops pouring | when it is full.

20 Then she puts the kettle on the fire. It || stays on the fire for a long time. Sometimes it is put on the lire in the morning, | and it is not done until afternoon. As soon as it is done, | the woman takes her tongs and takes the | kettle off the fire. Then she takes her small dish anil puts it down at the | place where she is sitting. Then she takes her tongs and takes out the dried fins, || and she puts them into 25 the small dish. When the small dish is full, | she calls her children and her husband to come and sit down. | Then they drink fresh water; and after they finish drinking, | they take whole pieces of dried fins and eat them. They | hold them in their hands while they are eating. After they have finished || eating, the woman takes the small 30 dish and pours back | into the kettle what is left over. She pours some water | into (the dish) and washes it out inside; and when it is clean, she | pours more fresh water into it, and they wash their hands. | As soon as this is finished, they drink fresh water. That is all || about this. They do not dip it into oil, for it is fat; | and it is 35 also not given at feasts to other people, for | only the owners eat it.

The Indians always | drink water before they begin to eat and when they have finished; | for the people in olden times said that if they should not drink || water when they were about to eat, those who -10 should forget | to drink water before they eat or when they finis] i would rot inside. | The reason why they rinse their mouths in the morning before they eat is to | get off the sleepiness of the throat. Therefore they do this way. | That is all about this. ||

Halibut-Spawn. — Halibut-spawn is not kept for a long time. | As 1 soon as it is half dried, it is boded | in a small kettle. Some water is poured into the | small kettle, and it is put over the fire of the house. 5 As soon || as the water begins to boil, the woman takes down the | spawn from where it is hanging, and puts it into the boiling | kettle on the fire. After it has been boiling for a long time, | it is taken off and is done. Then the woman takes a | small dish and a spoon, and

10 she dips out the boiled || spawn and puts it into the small dish. As soon as I it is all out of the water, they drink water, and they just take it up with their hands | and bite off the end as they eat it; and they do not eat much | before they finish, for this is not very good food. I The men do not often eat the spawn. That is the only ||

15 reason why the woman boils it, that it brings bad luck if it is not | boiled; for the men of early times said, that, if it were not done, | her husband would not get a bite, — if for once | the woman should not boil what conies from the halibut caught by her | husband. As

20 soon as the woman finishes eating, || she pours out what is left over. Then she drinks water. | That is all about this. |

Middle Piece of Halibut. — I have forgotten | the piece in the middle,— the fat that is under the skin between | the two flat sides of the

25 halibut, the meat just on top of the || backbone. As soon as the skin is taken off, the | woman cuts off the piece in the middle, and there is a groove at the place, where it was. | Then the woman puts her 27 forefinger into this groove, | and she opens it out at the place where the (sides of the) meat meet, along the | backbone. As soon as the piece in the middle is off, she || throws it into a basket which stands 30 by the side of the woman when she is working on the | halibut. As soon as she has finished, she takes the basket by the handle and | carries it into the house. Then she splits a piece of red pine | and makes ro as ting-tongs just like the roasting-tongs for the edges, | and the piece in the middle is put in in the same way as the edges || when 35 they are roasted; and it is eaten in the same manner. | What is left over is put away; and they eat of it again, | even when it is cold. That is all about this. |

I have also forgotten the one name of the edges. It is called | by the Newettee "standing-on-thc-edge."||

Fresh Codfish (1). — The1 wife, at once breaks | some dried halibut and 1 puts it on a food-mat, and she | pours oil into an oil-dish; and after she has done so, | she spreads out a food-mat in front of her husband, and she || puts the oil-dish on it. As soon as she has done so, she 5 takes her | small basket in which she keeps her two fish-knives. She | is going to remove the guts of the codfish. She takes her fish-knives, | and takes a codfish so that the head turns towards i Continued from Publications of the Jesup North Pacific Expedition, Vol. V., p. 482.

the place where she is sitting. | She first cuts off the pectoral fins. ||

10 She cuts them out in one piece with, the gills. Then she cuts across the bone in the neck, | and she pulls out the guts. She at once | cuts off the intestines and throws them away on the | beach. Then she turns the stomach inside, out and puts it down on the | beach. As soon as all her work is finished, she goes up from the beach ||

15 and takes her fish-basket. She carries it by the handle down | to the beach, and takes the stomachs of the codfish and puts them | into it. As soon as they are all in it, she carries the basket by the handle | into the house. Then she puts it down in front of the fire of

20 her | house. She takes her kettle, pours || water into it, and, when it is half full of water, she puts it | on the fire. Then her husband invites in his friends. | As soon as all the guests are in, the woman | takes the stomachs and puts them into the boiling water of the | kettle; and when they are all in the water, the woman takes her ||

25 tongs and stirs what is being cooked. Then | she lets it boil for a long time before she takes it off from the fire. | At last the woman takes her spoons and distributes them | among her guests. When they have one each, she takes the | kettle by the handle and puts it

30 down in front of her guests. Then || she takes a bucket with water and puts it down in front of her | guests. They drink water from the corner of the bucket. | After they have finished drinking, the bucket 32 is put away. | Then they eat with spoons out of the kettle. | The woman takes her small dishes and || puts them down behind the 35 kettle from which they are eating; [ and as soon as they find a stomach with their spoons, they put it into the small dish; | and when they finish eating the gills and the liquid with their spoons, they put down the spoons | with which they have been eating, and they take the stomachs with their hands | and bite them off; and after they have finished eating them, the || woman takes the small 40 dish and pours back what is left over | into the kettle from which they have been eating. Then she pours some water | into (the dish) and washes it out; and when it is clean, she again [ pours fresh water into it. Then she places it before her guests, | and they wash their hands; but the woman || takes by the handle the kettle from which 45 they have been eating, and puts it down at the | outer end of the fire. After this has been done, she takes the bucket | with water and places it before her guests, and | they again drink from the corner of the bucket. | Then the woman takes the dish in which they washed their hands and || puts it down at the place where she is sitting. Then the 50 guests go out. | This kind of food is also not a food for the morning, and no | oil is poured into it, and it is not used at feasts for many |

men, and the numaym is not invited to it. | Only four or six friends of

55 the || one who caught the codfish eat of the bull-head, for that is its name | when it is eaten; and the one who invites his friends says, |

"We will eat bull-head to-morrow." Thus he says. And the reason why its name is | "bull-head" is that the stomach of " the-one-whopulls" is never full, and also | the stomach of the black cod and of the

60 kelp-fish and of the xuldzos. That is its other || name when it has been cooked and when it has been caught by the | fisherman; for the fisherman does not allow | the guts of the codfish and of the halibut to stay in the body over night; for it is said, that, if | his wife should not do so, he would never again have a | bite from the halibut or ||

65 codfish or black cod or qlwa'qEla and also the t!ot!op!e and also the gwaxugu£wa and | also the gwtflek'. There is only one | way of doing with these nine kinds when they are first caught by the fisherman. |

That is all about this. |

1 Fresh Codfish (2). — Sometimes the | woman cooks at once these eight kinds besides the | halibut, and the eight kinds of fishes are eaten

5 fresh | when the tribes are really hungry; and they also do || so when they get rotten. The only difference when they are | fresh is, that the woman cuts the codfish right away. | Both sides of the neck of the codfish are cut, and then around | the back of the head; and she cuts down its back way down to its | tad. She cuts close to the backbone, and || she only stops cutting when she gets down to the 10 belly. Then she turns it over | so that its head turns away from her; and she cuts along the upper side of the dorsal fin | again close to its backbone, | and she only stops cutting when the cuts meet at the belly. | Then she takes the head and pulls it off with the || backbone; 15 and she puts it on an old mat which is spread on the floor of the house. | Then she takes cedar-rope and ties it around the flesh side of the | codfish, in this manner: Then the flesh-side is on the outside, | and the scales | a r e on the inside.

After she has finished many of ( | ~) these, | she sends her husband to call his tribe to come || l^' to a feast. As soon 20

as her husband is gone, the woman takes | her large kettles and puts them down inside, by the | door of the house. Then she takes buckets and carries them | to the place where the kettles are, and also long-handled | tongs, and also a basket; and she asks some || young men of her husband's numaym to come and help her build a 25 fire in the middle of the | house where the feast is to be. As soon as the fire in the middle of the house blazes up, | the young men pick up the buckets and go to draw water; | and when they come back, they pour it at once into the | kettles; and they only stop when they are half full of water. || When they have finished, the young men go 30

31 about again to call the guests. | The woman spreads out the mats for the feasters all round the | house. As soon as she has finished, she takes out her box with dried salmon, | and her oil, and also fooddishes and oil-dishes. | When they are all ready, the guests enter; ||

35 and when they are all in, they | first take the dried salmon out of the box. Then they are scorched | in the way I told first, when I spoke about a real feast given to the | invited tribes; for dried salmon is the first course. After | they have eaten the dried salmon, the kettles

40 are put || on the fire in the middle of the house. They do not put the | meat of the codfish at once into the kettles that were put on the fire. | When (the water) begins to boil, the woman takes her | basket and places it in the boiling water. Then | she takes her tongs and

45 picks up with them the meat of the || codfish that is tied together, and she puts it with the tongs into the basket which is in the water | in the kettle. She only stops doing so when it is all in the water. | The woman does not allow it to be in the water for a long time. Then she takes her | tongs and pushes them through the handles of the basket and lifts it out of the water. | Then she puts it

50 into a large dish. Then she at once unties the || ropes which had been tied around (the meat). Then the woman spreads out the meat | of the codfish, and she takes a spoon and scrapes off the | scales. As soon as they are all off, she breaks the meat into pieces |

and puts it into another large dish. As | soon as she has done so with (all the meat), she takes the kettles || from the fire, and she also 55 takes a long-handled ladle | and puts it into the liquid of what has been cooked, and she | dips out the scales which came off from the skin of the codfish when she | put them into the water. As soon as this is all done, she takes the large dish | in which is the broken meat of the codfish, and she || pours (the hquid) into the kettle. Then she 60 puts the kettle on the fire | again; and when it begins to boil, the woman takes her | long ladle and dips up the hquid of what is | being boiled, and pours it back into what is boiling. | She does the same thing as long as the food that is being cooked || is boiling. 65 She only stops doing so when the food that is being cooked is done. | The reason why she does so with the liquid that is | being boiled is that the fat and the liquid become mixed; | and for this reason the liquid becomes thick, and the hquid also becomes really | milky. It looks as though flour had been poured into it. [| When it is done, 70 she takes the kettles off the fire, | and the young men at once take the dishes and place them on | each side of the kettles; and she takes again her long-handled | ladle and dips the cooked codfish out | into the dishes. She only stops doing so when the dishes are full. || There is no food-mat used, for | the liquid always drips from their 75

76 mouths when they are eating the boiled codfish with spoons. | She only distributes spoons among the guests. | As soon as they have one each, they put the dishes in front of them; | and when all this has

80 been done, the young men take buckets by their handles and || place them before the guests, and they all drink; | and after they finish drinking, they eat with spoons; and after they have finished, | the young men take away the dishes, and they carry" the rest to the wives | of the guests. Other | young men give water to the guests.

85 This was called by || former generations [the first past men] "cooling down when they drink water after | having eaten with spoons boiled fish." After they finish drinking, | they go out. That is all about this. | 1 Tainted Codfish. — I first talked about the fresh boiled | codfish. Now I will talk about | what the Indians like best, — tainted boiled codfish. | When the codfish has been kept for a very long time in the 5 corner of the house, || and when it begins to be tainted, the woman takes the tainted codfish | and puts it into water that is in a large dish. | As soon as the body is soaked, she puts it on the fire | and turns it over and over; and when the body is warm, | she rubs off

10 the scales. Then the woman || takes an old mat and spreads it out by the side of the fire; | and she puts the heated codfish on it. Then 11 she takes | thin cedar-sticks and scrapes off the scales, for [ they are all loose. When they are all off, she takes a wedge, | and she also takes fire-wood and puts it down by the place where she is sitting. || Then she takes the scraped codfish and | puts it down on the belly- 15 side, holding the head of the fish. Then she takes the | wedge and beats it, and she only stops beating it when | the body of the codfish is really soft. | The reason why they beat it is that the meat comes off at once from the || bones when it is cooked; and they just 20 pick out the bones when it is | done, and only the meat is left in the | kettle. As soon as (the woman) has finished scraping the body, she takes her | fish-knife and cuts the body crosswise, in this manner: After I she has finished cutting crosswise, she takes the kettle and pours || water into it until it is half full. Then she takes the scraped codfish, | bends it, and puts it into the kettle on the fire. | As soon as it begins to boil, the woman takes her tongs | and stirs what she is cooking. At once | the meat comes off from the bones. Then she lifts (the bones) out of the water || and throws them into the fire. Only the head is not | 30 taken out. As soon as all the bones are out, she takes a | long-

33 handled ladle and dips up the liquid of | what is being cooked by her, so that it becomes milky; and when it is really | milky, she takes the

35 kettle from the fire. Then || it is done. At once she calls her husband and her | children to eat with spoons what is in the kettle, for the tainted codfish is not | used to invite many people. It is | only food in the house for the married couple and their children. As soon I as they have eaten it with spoons, the man takes the head. ||

40 The first thing to be eaten are the eyes; and | when he finishes them, he breaks the head and eats the | fat of the skull; and when this is finished, he takes a | spoon and eats the meat and the liquid; but first I they drink water, and they also cool themselves with water ||

45 when they have finished eating. That is all about this. | 1 Codfish-Head. — When the head of the codfish is | really tainted and has been kept for a long time in the | corner of the house, the woman takes her kettle and | puts it down at the place where the 5 heads are. Then she puts || the heads into it. They are put in so that the face is upward. | As soon as the kettle is full, she takes an old mat and | covers them over. Then she takes a bucket of water and | pours it over the old-mat covering. She | only stops pouring water

JO when it shows all || around the mouth of the kettle. The reason why she | pours water over the old mat is that it does not catch fire | 11 when the kettle is put on. As soon as she finishes | covering it up, she puts the kettle on the fire, and the kettle stays on the fire | for a long time; and after it has been kept boiling for a long time, || it is 15 taken off. Now it is done. Then the woman takes | a large, dish and her largest spoons. J She puts the dish by the side of the kettle and takes off the | mat covering of what is being cooked by her, and she puts it down by the side of the fire. | Then she takes the large spoon and takes out of the kettle one by one || the whole heads. She 20 puts them | into the dish, and she only stops doing so when the heads are all out. | When this is done, the woman calls her | house-mates to come and eat the heads of the codfish. | As soon as they come, they sit down, and she puts the dish before them. || They drink water: 25 and after they have finished drinking water, | they take up with their hands each one | head and begin to eat it; and they continue to eat. first | the eyes, and after that the fat of the skull; | and they suck the bones and throw them into the fire. [| As soon as they have finished, 30 the woman takes the food-dish | and pours into the kettle the food that is left over. She pours | water into it and washes it out; and as soon as it is clean inside, | she pours the water out by the side of the fire, and she pours | fresh water into it and puts it down before 35 her guests; || and they all wash their hands, and they also wash themselves I around the mouth, for the fat of the [ heads sticks all around the mouths of those who eat this kind (of food). After | finishing they drink fresh water. This kind (of food) | is also not used to invite 40 many men or the || numaym. Only the housemates of the | owner eat it; and no oil is poured into it, for it is really | fat. That is all. | 1 Roasted Codfish. — When many | codfish have been caught by the fishermen, the woman | cuts them in the same manner hi which she first cut them, | this way: _- 7 As soon as she fin-

5 ishes cutting them, she takes L^" ^ I a || piece of pine that is easily spht to make roasting- ^~~~-- — \ tongs. | Four codfish are put into each pair of roasting-tongs, | in this manner.1 A strip of cedar-bark is tied between each (two) | codfish and also at each end, so that the roasting-tongs do not spread open. | As soon as this is done, she puts (the tongs) by the side of the fire. || 10 The flesh side is first roasted. As soon as it is done, she | turns it over and roasts the skin side; and when | it is blackened, she takes it away from the fire. Then it is done. | Sometimes this is eaten at once, while it is still hot. | They do not dip it into od when it is still

'See first figure on p. 241.

hot, for || it is still moist with fat inside. As soon as | it gets cold, 15 it gets dry inside; and when it is | given as food, they dip it into oil. This also is not used to invite | many people. Only the married couple | and their children eat this kind (of food) ; and the || roasted 20 codfish is also eaten cold in the morning, at noon, and in the evening; | but it is not eaten hot in the morning, for it is fat, | and it is bad if it is eaten when still hot in the morning. | They drink water before and after they have finished eating it. | That is all about this. ||

Another Kind of Eoasted Codfish. — When I the woman does not 25 want to boil the codfish, she just | takes the cut codfish and puts it down by the side of the | fire. Then the belly is first roasted; and when | the belly is done, she puts it down on the belly-side and roasts the right-hand side; || and when (the surface) is all blackened, 30 she turns the head the other way and roasts | the left-hand side ; and when that also is blackened. | it is done. [It is done after this.] Then the woman takes a | food-mat and puts the roasted codfish | on it, and she calls her husband to come and eat it. || Now the woman first 35 takes water, and they drink it. | After they have finished drinking it, the woman takes off the skin and | throws it into the fire; and after the skin is all off, | she breaks the meat into pieces, and then her husband

40 begins to eat it. | After he has eaten, the woman takes the food- || mat on which are the remains of food and the bones, and | shakes it into the fire. Then the woman also dips up some | water and drinks, and her husband also. After | they have finished drinking, he squirts a mouthful of water over | his hands; and his wife, on her part, puts

45 her hands || under the hands of her husband. Then he and his | wife wash their hands together. The man takes four | mouthfuls of water and squirts it over his hands. After he has | squirted over his hands four times, he finishes. This kind of food is not used to invite |

50 many people; and the codfish is not || dipped into oil when it is (cooked) this way, and | the head is not eaten. That is all about this. |

Red Cod. — The same is done witli the red cod, the one kind of codfish | and with the nalEm, the (jweHeIc, the q.'wa'gEh, | the t.'ot.'op.'e

55 and the LEWErlgame£. Only that is different || with the xuldzos: that is not dried, and also the kelp-fish, for they are | very small. At last it is done. |

Black Cod. — I have forgotten about the black cod, | for this one is treated in the same way as dried salmon when it is dried; and that also | is done in the same way, — it is scorched as they do dried

60 salmon when it is eaten || in the morning; and it is also soaked when it has been kept for a long time and | when it is boiled. They dip 61 it into oil; and this is also | used for inviting many people, when the host has no dried salmon | and no dried halibut. That is at last all about this. |

Kelp-Fish (1). — Now I'll talk about the kelp-fish, which is | the same 1 as the xii'ldzos. Its name is "heated body," | because its body is heated over the fire in order to loosen the scales, | and because also hot water is poured over it. || Then the scales come off from the skin, 5 and I therefore it is called the "heated body;" and the reason why it is called "fast swimmer" (xil'ldsos) | is because it swims very quickly whenever it is frightened. |

Now I will tell how they are cooked, for | they do not begin right away to cook them when they are fresh, for they only [| begin to 10 cook them after they have been in the house for a long time. Sometimes I they are kept five days, or even more; for they try to obtain for it a I strong smell, so that the bones will come off from the meat, and also so that they | may be fat. The first people said so, and therefore people | of recent times imitate them; and (therefore) also the kelp-fish becomes tainted (before it is used). || The woman takes 15 the kettle and puts it by the side of the | fire of the house. Then she takes her drinking-bucket and draws | fresh water. As soon as she comes home, she pours | the water that she has drawn into the kettle, until it is half full. | and she leaves it by the side of the Ore.

20 Then she takes the kelp-fish and || puts them into a small basket, and she places it near the | side of the fire. Then she takes the short | wedges which are always kept in the house, and also a short wall-board. | Generally she uses the stem-seat of a small canoe. She puts it down | close to the small basket in which the kelp-fish are

25 kept, and she does the same || with the short wedge. Then she takes one kelp-fish out of the | little basket. She holds the head of the kelp-fish, and puts its | body into the fire. Then she turns it over; and as soon as | she sees that the scales begin to come off from the skin, [ she puts it down on an old mat that has been spread out on

30 the floor of the house. She takes her || knife and scrapes off the scales that are loose. Then she turns | the fish over and over as she scrapes off the scales. As soon as all | the scales are off, she puts the fish on its belly on the [ stern-seat of the small canoe, on which the fish is beaten. She holds it with the left hand, by the | head. With the

35 right hand she takes the flat point of a || short wedge, and with the top end beats the | back of the kelp-fish, beginning at the back of the head, and beating down to the tad. | She only stops beating when the body of the kelp-fish is ^^-z___^^ soft. | After she has beaten it, she takes her | fish- (^2)j)jJ--D--^ ^mfe and cuts the

40 body across in this manner. After || she has cut it crosswise, she puts the fish head first into the water in the | kettle. 41 She never cuts off the head ; for the first people | said that a good taste is given to the meat of the | kelp-fish by the fat of the eyeballs and the | brain. Therefore she puts it all into the kettle; || and she does 45 this to all the other kelp-fish, if there are to be many | guests. As soon as the kelp-fish is in the kettle, | she puts it over the fire; and when it begins to boil, | the woman takes the fire-tongs and stirs it; [ and after stirring it for some time, she takes it down. Then || she takes her large 50 long-handled stirring-ladle and stirs with it | for a short time what is being cooked. She does not | stir it long, before she dips the spoon into what is being | cooked and pours it back [on the top of where she took it from] ; | and she continues this for a long time. It may be |[ half an 55 hour according to the clock that the woman | dips up the water of what she is cooking and pours it back again. | She only stops when the liquid of what she is cooking is really milky. | This shows that the fat of the fish is well mixed | with the liquid. That is the reason why the woman dips up || the liquid of what she is cooking, so that the 60 liquid | and the fat of the kelp-fish ma}' be well mixed; for if the | liquid of the kelp-fish should not be milky when it is given by the host to his friends, | then the guests at once whisper among themselves when they leave the house | of their host, and they say about

65 the woman that she is lazy, || although she maybe of chief's blood and a chief's wife. However, | the wives of those who are not of chief's blood do not give up | trying to get milky the liquid of the kelp-fish that they are cooking. When | the liquid of the kelp-fish is really milky, the | kelp-fish kettle is taken off the fire, and now it is done. ||

70 Then the woman brings out of her room her dishes, which | she keeps in the inner room. She puts them down on the floor next to the j kettle in which the kelp-fish were boiled; and she takes the same large | ladle with which she dipped up the liquid of the kelp-fish when she was cooking it, | and she dips up with it the boiled kelp-fish

75 from the || kettle, and she pours them into the dishes. Both the liquid and the | meat are put into the dishes. As soon as the dishes are filled evenly, | — for they are not entirely full | of liquid and meat, — and as soon as everything | i-^ ready, the spoons are distrib-

S0 uted among the small party of guests. || Then the dishes are placed before the guests; and there is always | one dish for four men. | First, they drink some cold water; and after they have finished drinking, | the host speaks to his guests, and says, | "Think of your throats and do not swallow the bones!" Then they all begin to

S5 eat with || spoons. It takes them a long time to eat the boiled kelpfish, for | in eating it they are very much afraid, for it happens often | SG that they are hurt when swallowing fish-bones, and therefore they do not eat fast | [with spoons] when it is boiled; and after they have eaten, they | cool themselves with fresh cold water. Then they || go out of the feasting-house at once. The kelp-fish is not given | to 90 a large number of people, for they never | obtain many when they are catching them. Therefore it is given only to the | numaym and to a single family; that is, the sons, and their | wives, and their children, and the daughters and their || husbands and their children. That is 95 what is called a family of single origin. | Only these are invited by the owner of the kelp-fish and also his | friends. That is all about the boiled kelp-fish. |

Kelp-Fish (2). — (The man) first takes the small basket of his wife. I i As soon as he arrives at the beach of his house he puts j the fish caught with the line into the basket. He goes up and enters the | house. Then his wife spreads an old mat || and carries up the small 5 fish-basket and | places it by the side of the old mat. She sits down by the side of the old mat, which j is at the right-hand side of the fish-basket. She takes | one of the fish with her left hand, and she does in the same way as I | described before. When the intestines and the gills have all been removed, || she takes her fish-knife, which is 10

11 also called j mussel-shell knife, for the first people used the musselshell for a knife | (this was sharpened by Deer when he met Q!a'neqe£lak"). | The woman takes the fish in her left hand | and

15 puts it down on t lie old mat with the || tail of the fish towards the woman and the stomach turned towards the left | of the woman. She holds her knife in her right hand, | cuts off the head, and when it is off she cuts open J the back all the way down to the tail, cutting along the upper side of the backbone. | She only stops cutting when

20 the fish is spread open. | Then she puts it back on the old mat. Then she takes | another fish and she does the same to it, and | she does the same with all the others. Now her husband | makes roast ingtongs of red pine, for they are going to roast the fish. As soon | as

25 the work is finished, he gives them to his wife, and the woman || takes the roasting-tongs and she takes a long strip of split | cedar-bark and winds it about one span [ from the lower sharp-pointed end of the roast ing-tongs. ] She pulls it tight as she winds it around it, and ties it on. Then the roasting-tongs will not | split when she puts the fish

30 into them. As soon as || the woman has finished this, she takes one of the fish that have been cut open | and rubs it over the roasting-tongs. When these are | covered with blood and slime, she puts into it one of the fish that have been | cut open. It is put in crosswise. Then she takes | split cedar-bark and winds it around just over the edge of the fish, and || she pulls it tight and ties it down. Then she puts 35 another fish just over it. | It is turned the way opposite the one just put into the tongs. Then she | winds cedar-bark just above it, and she pulls it tight when she | ties it around. Then she takes another fish and puts it in. | Its tail is turned again the opposite way, for all of them are turned so that the tails are in alternate directions || in the 40 roasting-tongs. Sometimes there are four | fish, or even six, put into one pair of long roasting-tongs. | Then she ties cedar-bark around the top of the roasting-tongs. | Then the woman places them by the side of the fire of her house. | First the flesh-side is roasted; and as soon as it is almost || black on the surface of the meat, she turns them over 45 and | changes to roast the skin-side. When the skin-side is really blackened, | they are done. Then she pulls the tongs out of the ground and | places them not far from the fire, so that the heat of [ the fire reaches them, and so that they keep hot. Then the || man calls his friends, 50 and sometimes he calls his | numaym to come and eat the roasted kelpfish. | Those whom he has called come in immediately; and as soon | as they are all in, the woman spreads long food- | mats in front of those who are going to eat the roasted kelp-fish. || The woman takes 55 the roasted fish in the roasting-tongs, and takes | it out of the roasting-

57 tongs. She puts them down with the skin below in front j of the guests, and she pours oil into oil-dishes, | and she puts down one in front of every four men. | The feasters themselves break the fish; ||

60 and when it is all broken in pieces, they begin to eat. | Then they dip it in oh, for all the fat comes out while | it is being roasted, and. therefore it is dry. As soon as they have finished | eating the roasted fish, they drink fresh water; | and after they have finished drinking they go

65 out. Roasted kelp-fish is not || given at a feast to many tribes, for they | never catch much of it. Therefore only the friends, husband and wife, | or the numaym, or strangers, eat roasted | kelp-fish. Now, that is aU about this. 1 Kelp-Fish (3). — Oh, I forgot to talk about | wind-dried kelpfish. It is cut in the same way as the roasted | kelp-fish. The only difference is, that the backbone is taken out, [ and the scales are left on in the same way as the scales are left 5 on || roasted fish. They do not eat the skin of the roasted kelp-fish, for | they only eat the meat. After the feasters have eaten the roasted kelp-fish, ] they throw away the skin. When | the woman finishes cutting open the kelp-fish, she splits thin pieces of | cedar-sticks and spreads the fish

10 with two of them so as to keep it open, || in this manner:

After she has done so, she hangs them up just over the | fire; and 12 after they have been hanging there for four days, | they are half dried. Then the owner takes them down; | and when he wishes to boil them, she takes the || small kettle and puts it over the fire. She takes her | fish- 15 knife and cuts the kelp-fish into two pieces lengthwise, | and she also cuts it in halves crosswise. Now each of the dried kelp-fish is in four pieces. | When the kettle begins to boil, she | puts the pieces of kelpfish into it. It doesnot || boillong beforeshe takes the kettleoff thefire, 20 for then | it is done. Then the woman takes her dish and puts it down | at the place where she is sitting. She takes her tongs, and with them she lifts | the boiled fish and puts it into the dish. | When it is all in the dish, she takes her oil-dish, |[ pours oil into it, and puts it down 25 in front of the persons for whom she has cooked it. | They drink water before they begin to eat; | and after drinking water they eat. They ,| dip it into oil. They do not eat the skin with it, for | the scales are still on it. They only eat the meat. || After they have eaten, a bucket 30 of water is placed in front of them. | They put their mouths at the corner and take a mouthful | of water. Then they squirt the water into the hands and wash them; | and after they have washed their hands, they put their mouths | to the corner of the bucket and drink

35 water. Now that also is finished. ||

1 Broiled Dried Kelp-Fish.— Sometimes other people want | to eat soaked half-dried kelp-fish. | The woman first takes her tongs and puts them down | where she is sitting. Then she takes down the

5 kelp-fish that has been hung up to dry, || and she puts it down at the place where the tongs are. She dips up some | water and places it with the dried kelp-fish. Then ! she takes the fire-tongs and lifts the dried kelp-lish in the middle, | in this manner:

Then she holds it in the tongs over the fire, the flesh-

10 side first || turned down; and as soon as the steam puffs out all over, ] she turns it over and she broils the skin-side; and when | the skin becomes all black, she stops | broiling it, for it is done. Then she puts it down | on the mat with the skin down. She drinks water: and

15 after || drinking, she begins to eat the meat. She only | takes off the meat from the skin and puts it into her mouth. | She does not dip it into oil, for this kind is fat. |

I forgot. As soon as she finishes broiling the half-dried | kelp-fish,

20 and when it is done, she takes a cup with water, |j takes a mouthful, and blows the mouthful of water over the flesh-side of what she | has cooked. Then it gets really tender, and | therefore old women ami old men are | fond of broiled half-dried kelp-fish, | because it is tender. As soon as the woman finishes eating, || she drinks water. 25 When the dried kelp-fish is really dry, | it is soaked like dried salmon when it is soaked; | and it is cooked in the same way as the | halfdried kelp-fish is cooked when it is broiled and when it is boiled. | That is all about this. J|

Split Kelp-Fish. — Now I will talk again about the | kelp-fish split 1 in two. When the man goes home who has (gone out) | with the fishtrap to catch kelp-fish, as soon as he has many, | the woman takes her fish-knife and sits down at the || edge of the old mat on which the 5 fish has been put. Then she takes one of the kelp-fish with her left hand. | Its tail is towards the woman, | and its stomach is turned towards the left side, when she puts it down. | Then she cuts oft' the head; and when the head has been cut off, | she cuts into the back and cuts all the way down to the tail, || cutting through along the ]o upper side of the backbone. When it is spread open, | she pulls out the intestines; and when all the intestines are out, she | cuts along the under side of the backbone and takes it out close j to the tail, and then she breaks it off. She | throws away the backbone. The (ail is left on (he || split kelp-fish. Then she cuts it down lengthwise, 15

16 beginning at the neck, down | to the belly, until she comes to the | tail, in this manner: j~7 Now it is called "split | kelpfish." As soon as this has /j\ keen done, she hangs it up over the | fire of the house; / \ \ and when it is half dried, it is

20 cooked. || First she takes / / j her small kettle, pours some |

water into it, and, when L— ' I 1 it is half full, she puts it on the fire. | She takes down the split fish and cuts it into two parts, | and she cuts one side into three pieces; and she does | the same to

25 the other side, in this manner: Fl Now it is in six pieces. || She throws away the tail, and ff\ throws the pieces | of fish into the kettle in which the /~f\ water is boiling. | I think the length of time that it is on /__/ I — \ the fire is more than half | an hour by the watch, and then [ J I — I it is done. She | takes the

30 kettle off the fire. She takes a small dish || and puts it down by the side of the kettle. | She takes her tongs and with them she lifts the fish and puts it | into the small dish; and when it is all in, she drinks water; | and after drinking, she takes a piece of the | boiled

35 kelp-fish, pinches off the meat, and puts it into her || mouth. Now she is eating the meat. She does not eat the | skin, on account of the scales: therefore she just puts it back into the | dish. After she has eaten, she takes the | small dish from which she has eaten, and pours into the kettle what is left in it. | She pours some water into the dish and washes her hands; and || after doing so, she drinks 40 fresh water. This also is not | given at a feast to many tribes. It is only eaten by the | husband and wife, or by friends whom they invite, or by the numaym, for J the woman does not cure many in this way. | That is all about this. ||

Boiled Kelp-Fish Gills and Stomachs. — Immediately1 | (the) wife 1 goes to meet (her husband i, carrying a small basket made of split | spruce-root. She puts it into the small canoe which has been used in fishing kelp-fish. | Then she puts the kelp-fish into the basket. When || it is full, she takes it out of the canoe and carries it to her 5 house, | and pours the fish on the coarse plaited mat made of split cedar-bark | which she has spread out to pour the kelp-fish on. |

As soon as she has carried up all the kelp-fish, she sits down on the floor and | begins to take out the intestines. The woman takes hold of t the || kelp-fish with the left hand and squeezes at the back of its 10 head, | the belly being turned towards the woman. She puts the thumb of her | right hand into the gills, and puts the | forefinger of her left hand at the left side of the neck, while she puts her thumb into the gill at | the right side. Then she squeezes it and pulls at it; || and as soon as the gills become loose, she puts her thumb | at the 15

1 Continued from Publications of the Jesup North Pacific Expedition, Vol. V, p. 4."-S, line 21.

16 inside of the pectoral fin, and puts her forefinger on the outside. | Then she bends it outward and twists the skin off at that place. | Then she turns the fins back and pulls them off | with the intestines

20 and the gills. When she has finished, || she throws the intestines into a small hand-basket. | .She puts the clean kelp-fish back on the spread | mat, and she does not stop until all the kelp-fish have been cut. | Then the woman takes in one hand the small basket containing the intestines, and carries it | to the beach and pours the

25 contents of the small basket || into the salt water. She puts the small basket into the water and | washes off the slime outside and inside. After she lias done so, | she puts down the little basket on the beach, and then she takes some of the | intestines of the kelp-fish and pulls it off from the | stomach. She leaves the gill at one end

30 of it. || Then she washes the intestines so thai all the blood comes off; and she pulls it through | (between her thumb and fingers), so that all the food-contents come out. As soon as this is done, | she turns it inside out, so that the stomach is turned inside out; | and she washes it, and finally throws it into the | small basket. She does the same

35 to all the others; || and as soon as all the stomachs have been washed, the woman | takes up the basket containing the gills and puts it | into the sea-water, and shakes it so that all the blood and the | slime boas) RECIPES 407

ci off. As soon as she has finished this, she takes the | basket containing the gills out of the water and carries it || to the house. 40 She. puts it down by the side of the fire of her house. | She takes a kettle and pours some water into it, and j when it is half full she puts it over the fire. When | the water begins to boil, she takes the IcIUmes (for that | is the name of the gills when they are cooked) out of the little basket || and throws them into the boiling water. 45 When they are all j in, she takes her fire-tongs and stirs (what is in the kettle). The kettle is not | kept long on the fire, perhaps for | half an hour or a little longer. Then it is taken off. | Now it is done and she invites all those who like to eat gills with her. || As soon as 50 those come who are going to eat gills with spoons, she takes | the spoons, gives one to each of those who are going to eat with it, then | the woman takes the water and gives a drink to those who are going to eat with spoons. | After they have drunk, they eat. with spoons. | The guests eat with spoons the liquid and the stomachs of the kelpfish || and its gills. They just blow out of their mouths the bones, 55 for there are bones | in the gills of the various kinds of fish. After they have eaten, | the woman takes water and gives it to those who eat with spoons with her. | Then she cools with cold water those who had eaten the gills with spoons, | for those who eat gill-soup perspire. ||

60 Therefore they always say, "Let us | now cool ourselves with cold water! " and therefore the host | gives his guests fresh water to cool themselves. | Then those who have eaten the gills go out of the

65 house. | This is not given at a great feast to many tribes, for || they never catch enough of these fish. Therefore those who catch them just | eat them with their wives, children, and relatives. | That is the end. | 1 Roasted Kelp-Fish. — If (the woman) is really hungry, | she takes one of the kelp-fish, puts it down on its stomach at the right-hand side | of the fire, close to it, the woman facing towards the rear of 5 the | house. The roasting fish also faces the rear || of the house. As soon as the steam puffs out from the body | of the fish, she turns it around so that it faces the | door of the house; but it is still lying on its stomach. It does not take long | before it is cooked. Then the woman takes a long | eating-mat, spreads it out outside of the place

10 where || she is sitting (that is, away from the fire), and she takes the roasted kelp-fish and places it on its stomach on the | mat. Then she eats it. She does not | take out the intestines and the gills before she puts it down to be roasted | by the fire, for she takes them off when she begins to eat it. | Just before she begins to eat she takes a

15 piece of cedar-wood || about a span long. With it she | scrapes off the scales and the skin ; and when it is all off, | she eats it. She does not 1 7 dip it into grease, because it is very fat. | I have forgotten this, that the woman also beats | the body of the kelp-fish before she puts it down on its stomach to roast by the fire, || so as to loosen the bones 20 from the meat. |

After she has eaten the kelp-fish, she drinks | water, but not much, for it tastes salt. That is the reason why she does not drink much | water, for she knows that she has to keep on drinking water. | Only the one who has caught the fish eats it roasted by the fire while lying on its stomach; || for she only does this with the kelp-fish when she 25 is very hungry | when she comes home, after having been fishing with her fish-trap. | That is the reason why she. puts one kelp-fish down on its belly by the fire, | for it takes a very short time to be done. Old women | eat kelp-fish roasted by the fire while lying on its belly; for it is || too dirty for young women, because the | intes- 30 tines and the gills are in it, and the scales are also on it; for | they are afraid to eat the scales of the fish, because it often kills | those who eat them with the meat, because they stick in the throat and the}- can not get out | the scales when they eat the kelp-fish. There is no way of getting them out when they are || stuck hi the throat, 35 and our throat gets sore when we | swallow them. Now I have finished talking about this. I

1 Perch 1. — The1 wife cuts open the perch, so that | the gills come off, and the intestines: and as soon as all the intestines | and the gills have been taken out. she throws them out of the house. She cuts (the perch) open with her fish-knife, and she scrapes the body so 5 that the ]| scales come off. When they are all off, she cuts across the body, in this manner: J ^-fTTT))^ ^ s00n as sne Qas finished, she takes her kettle Q°J)j I I I I ]T~1 anc^ pours some water into it: and when it is ^ half full, she putit on the tire. When it boils, she takes the opened perch and in puts them into it. When they are all in. the man takes his tongs and stirs them. They stay for about half an hour according to the watch boding over the fire. Then they are taken off of the fire. Now the boded perch is done. Then the woman takes her )ns and gives one to each of those who are to eat the || boded perch. When each lias one spoon, they put the kettle of boiled perch in front of those who are to eat the boiled perch, and they begin to eat it with spoons. First they take out the backbone and tiie ribs: and when they have all been taken out. they take out the

20 heads and suck them, for | they are very fat: and when the fat is all off. they suck out the eyes: and when these are off. they break them to pieces and suck out the brains: and when these are out.

'Continued from p. 1S4, line 21.

they throw the sucked head-bones into the fire, j When this is done, they eat the liquid with the meat; || and when they have had -1"1 enough, they stop eating with spoons and they drink a little water. J That is what the Indians refer to as "cooling off;" and when they finish, | they go out. That is all about one way | of the Kwakiutl of cooking perch. There is only one way of cooking it. |

(2) This is the manner in which the perch is cooked by the Koskimo. It || is cut open in the same way as I said first, and the scales arc 30 scraped off. | When the intestines and the gills and the | scales arc off, the woman squeezes out the stomach and the guts, and | she squeezes out the slime of the gills. After she has done so, she throws (the perch) into a dish, and she does this with all the others. || When this is done, she takes her kettle and pours some [ water into 35 it, a little less than half full. Then she puts it on the fire. | When it begins to bod, she takes the whole perch | and puts them into the kettle; and when they are all in, | she takes the intestines thai had been squeezed out, the stomach, and the || gdls, and puts them in. 40 She lets this boil for maybe more than | half an hour according to the watch. | Then the kettle is taken off the fire. Now it is done. ] They never stir it, for it is called "whole perch." | The woman

45 takes her dish and her rib-strainer, and || she puts down the dish by the side of the kettle with whole perch; | and she takes the ribstrainer and lifts out the whole boiled perch | and puts them into the dish. She puts | all the perch crosswise into the dish. | When they are all in the dish, she goes and puts (the dish) down in front of

50 those || who are going to eat the whole perch. The men immediately | pick off (the meat) and put it into the | mouth. When they have nearly eaten everything, the host takes | spoons and gives one to each of his guests; and as soon as | each has one, he takes up the

55 kettle in which the perch had been boiled and || pours the liquid of the boiled perch into the dish. | He pours it on what is left over of the boiled perch. | As soon as the dishes are nearly full, he goes back, carrying the kettle; | and he puts it down at the end of the fire, towards the door. Then | the men eat with spoons the liquid

60 and the gills and the stomach, || as it has been boiled, and the intestines; and when they have eaten enough, they stop. | That is what the ancient Indians call "washing down the food." Then | they go out. They never drink water, for they know that they | will drink water when they notice a salty taste of what they have eaten, | and

65 it is not very long before they wish to drink water. Then || they drink. That is all. I

Roasted Perch. — Perch is roasted by the side of the fire; and | they 66 take the perch just out of the basket and put it down | under the side-pieces of the fire of the house. They never | take out the intestines and gills and scales. 'When || the scales are scorched, (the 70 woman) turns it over so that what was the outer side is inside, j Then the woman watches it until the steam comes through | on the inner side all along the body. She does not | let the steam come through for a long time, before it is done. | Then she takes her foodmat and spreads it out outside || of her seat. She takes her tongs 75 and with them lifts the | roasted perch and puts it on the foodmat, | and she takes a piece of broken cedar-stick and with it she scrapes off the scorched | scales. When they are all off, she picks off the | meat with her fingers and puts it into her mouth. After she has finished, she || takes water, takes a mouthful and squirts it 80 into her | hands and washes them; and as soon as she has done so, she | rinses her mouth; and after that she drinks a little | water. That is all about this. |

Flounder. — When it is calm weather and the tide is coming in, | 1 the flounder-fisherman launches his small flounder-fishing canoe, | and he puts the flounder-spear on the left-hand side of his | flounder-

5 fishing canoe, the prongs pointing to the place || where the fisherman is sitting in the stern of the flounder-fishing canoe. | He paddles seaward with his flounder-fishing paddle. As soon | as he comes to a place where the water is two fathoms deep, he | looks down, resting on his left hand, looking for | flounders. He backs-water with his

10 flounder-fishing paddle, and is j| going astern. As soon as he discovers a flounder, he paddles ahead | to stop his flounder-fishing canoe; and when I the canoe stops, he puts the flounder-fishing paddle into the canoe, and | he takes his flounder-spear and puts it into the water, anil he spears | the flounder in the middle, pulls it up, and shakes

15 it off in the bow || of his flounder-fishing canoe; and he just goes on in the same way with the | others. As soon as he has caught many flounders, he goes home to his | house. |

When he arrives at the beach of his house, his wife | comes and

20 picks up a small basket, and she goes down to the beach carrying || the small basket. Then she puts it down in the middle of the flounderfishing I canoe. She takes the flounders and puts them into the small basket; | and when the flounder-basket is full, she lifts it out of the canoe | and carries it up the beach into her house, and | she puts it down in the corner of her house. ||

25 Then she takes her small kettle and pours some water into it, and she washes it out until it is clean; and as soon as ah the dirt is out, |

she pours away the dirty water with which she washed it out: and 27 she pours in some more water, | until it is half full, and she puts il on the fire. After | she has done so, she takes her fish-knife and sits down alongside of the || flounder basket; and she takes out one of the 30 flounders and cuts open | the belly, which contains the intestines, in this manner at X : ^^^^^^ I ^s soon ^ sne turns over the white side, she pulls ^^ /-JJ) out the intestines. | She cuts off the intestines close ^^^^s^^"^ to their end. at the gills. | She does not take off the gills from the head. || As soon as she has taken 35 out the intestines, it is in this way: | /-—) Then she cuts down to the bone on each side cross- jv.^^^"^'3^ wise, in this manner: | ^r-Tn\ Wien ^lls ^^S~^JCX^ has been done, she puts it r^- — - (M i((°) on an ohl ^unL7 mat that lias been spread ^~^^LJ_l-^ out, | and she does the same with the others; and Ls when that lias been done, she | cuts off the tails: and when they have been cut off, the water in the flounder-kettle begins to boil. || She takes it off and puts it down by the hi side | of her fire, and she takes spht cedar-sticks and measures them off | so that they are the size of the flounder-cooking kettle crosswise. | Then she breaks off eight of them. When she has clone • so, she puts | four on the water of the flounder-cooking kettle, || and 45 she takes the four others and puts them crosswise over the four that are

1 See figure on p. 416.

[ETH. ANN. 35

46 in it. (Then it is this way:) ,,-rv. | Now the broken cedar-sticks are floating on the hot | water; /~~~N and she takes the clean flounders and lays them on top \ -j of the | cedar-sticks; and she takes three more pieces of 4-1^K broken | cedar-sticks and lays 511 them on the flounder lengthwise; and || she takes another flounder-and lays it on top of it, so that it is crosswise | on the first one; and she takes three pieces of broken | cedar-sticks and lays them on and she does this to every water enters between them, sticks laid between boiled broken cedar-sticks in the are called | " cross-cedar- When all | this has been the top of it, in this way:

one, | so that the hot

Tins is called | " cedar- 55 flounders;" and || the bottom of the kettle sticks of the whole boiled flounders.'

done, she puts her flounder-cooking kettle on the fire; and flounders stay on the fire boding for about half an hour according 60 to the watch. | Then she takes them off the fire and puts || them down outside of the place where she is sitting. Then she takes a disli and | the bone strainer, and she puts (the dish) down by the side of the kettle in which the whole flounders have been • cooked. | She puts the bone strainer under the topmost one of the |

flounders, so that it docs not break to pieces when she lifts it out, and she puts it into the | dish of the one who is to eat the flounder; and 65 she does the same with the others. || As soon as she has taken the boiled flounders out of the kettle, she puts them into a dish | in front of those who are to eat the boiled whole flounders; and | immedi- 07 ately those who arc to eat the flounders begin to eat, taking them up in the hands. | Some Indians call this "flounder-eating." They suck | the bones and the head and the gills while they are eating the || meat. When they have eaten it all, then water is given to them to | 70 rinse their mouth, and they drink. This is all about | one manner (of cooking flounder). |

Flounder eaten with Spoons. — The | cutting of the flounder is the same as the cutting of the whole boiled flounder, || the only difference 75 being that there are no broken cedar-sticks, for | it is just put into the water when it begins to boil. When it has been | boiling a little while, it is stirred so that it breaks; and when j the meat comes oft' from the bones, it is done. Then [ the flounder-cooking kettle is taken off the fire, and || a little oil is taken and poured into it. Then | SO the woman takes the spoons and distributes them among those who are to eat | the boiled flounder. The woman takes dishes and a | large spoon, and puts the dishes down by the side of the | flounder-cooking kettle: and she takes the Large spoon and || dips the boiled floun- 85 dcr out of the kettle, | and puts into the flounder-dish all the liquid and the meat. The dishes are half full of it. | Then it is placed in front of the flounder-eaters, who immediately | eat the flounder.

They eat it with spoons; and | when tliey have eaten, they drink a 90 little water to cool themselves; || and alter drinking, they go out. That is all | about it. | 1 Steamed Flounder (Flounders steamed standing on edge on stones). — (The man gathers driftwood, and when he thinks he has enough to steam on stones the flounders put on edge, he goes home to his house. When it is high water, he throws out the driftwood on the beach of Ins house;) and ' when all the driftwood is out, | he takes two medium-sized pieces of | drift wood not quite one fathom in length, | 5 and puts them down above high-water mark. They are four || spans apart. He takes | easily-splitting cedar-wood and splits it into | thin pieces to start the lire, ami he puts them down between the | two side-pieces of the fire. Then he takes medium-sized dry | driftwood and puts it down on top, so that the top is on the same level as the || 10 two side-pieces. Then he puts driftwood crosswise over them. | As soon as it reaches from one end to the other the whole length of the two side-pieces, he | takes a medium-sized basket and goes to pick up medium-sized fresh stones, | and puts them into his stone carryingbasket. When it is full, J he carries it up and pours the stones on top 15 of the cross-pieces on which the flounders are to he steamed. || He continues doing this, and does not stem until the stones are thick | over the top of it. Then he lights a fire under | them at each end.

1 Continued trom p. lxl, line 62.

As soon as it flames up, he takes the | basket in which he carried up 18 the stones, and | carries it down to his fishing-canoe. Then he takes the flounders || and places them in the basket. When it is full, he | 20 takes up the flounder-basket and carries it to the wood-pile. | He takes an old unit and spreads it out on the beach. Then | he takes the flounder-basket and pours the flounders on to the old \ mat, so that they lie on it- Then he goes back to the beach and || brings up the 25 rest of the flounders. As soon as he reaches his fishing-canoe, | he takes the flounders and puts them into the flounder-basket; | and when they are all in, he picks up (the basket ) and | carries it up the beach, and puts it down by the side of i the old mat on which the flounders have been placed; and he goes up the beach, and takes the tongs out of his house, || and a bucket, and also old mats for covering, | 30 and also-cedar wood; and lie takes these and puts them down by the wood-pile. | Then lie takes the long tongs, picks out the red-hot stones, and j puts them down on the beach not far from | where he stands, for he never moves his feet when lie puts down the || red-hot 35 stones. He puts them down on a level placeon the beach. j When all the stones have been taken out of the (ire, he levels the | hot stones with his tongs; and when they have all been levelled down, j he takes his bucket with fresh water in it and i sprinkles a little on the red-hot

40 stones, so that the || ashes that stick on them come off. When he has sprinkled water | over the whole surface, lie takes split cedarsticks not | really thick, and measures oil' one span | and four finger- widths, and breaks it off; and | this is the measure for the other

15 cedar-sticks, when he keeps on breaking off || many of them, — all cedar-sticks of the same length. When he thinks ] that he lias enough, he puts them end down between the red-hot stones, ] in this manner: Ac-\3((^A l'"\v are one span apart | lengthwise and crosswise; ami the cedar-sticks standing on end among the red-hot stones are called "holders of the

50 steamed flounders standing on edge on stones." || The name of the red-hot stones is " steaming-place for flounders standing on edge on stones." When all | the cedar-sticks stand on edge on stones, the man takes the flounder- j basket and puts it down by the side of the steaming-place. He never | cuts the flounders to take out the

55 intestines. He takes out one |[ flounder, and lays it flat on the cedar-sticks. so that it stands on its edge on the I

hot stones.

of the ' cedar

Each flounder leans against one sticks. When he has finished, it is in this way: I ]yy^^V^3V2 1 j When he has put them all on, lie takes the ■ ■ old mats and | lavs them down

60 close to his steaming-place. When this has been done, || he takes the bucket with fresh water and pours it | over the flounders (il standing on edge on the stones. When the water has been poured out, | he quickly takes up the old mats and throws them over them; I and it does not take long before he takes off the covering, for (the flounders) are now done. | As soon as he has taken off the whole covering of old mats, the man || calls his numaym to sit G5 around the place where the flounders were steamed, | to eat the steamed flounders. The men all come and sit around | what they are going to eat. When they are all there, | each man takes one j flounder, and they pinch off (the meat) and put it into their months; and || after each has eaten one flounder, they take another one and 7(1 eat it; | and when there are many flounders, then all the men try to eat many | flounders; and sometimes each man will eat four [ flounders when there are many. And when the flounder-eaters finish, | they go home to their houses, and they wasli their hands; and || after they have done, so, they drink a little water, after | rinsing 75 their mouths for the salty taste to come out. The reason why they do not | drink much water is because they are afraid to drink much when they first | taste the flounders steamed standing on edge on stones, for then they would | always want to drink water. Therefore they only || drink a little water to wash down what they have SO eaten. | This also is not given at a feast to many tribes. That is | all about this. |

1 Fresh Herring-Spawn on Cedar- Branches. Now I will talk about | (herring-spawn on) cedar-branches, for thai is also done in the same manner as with the hemlock-branches, \ when they arepul into the sea; and the only difference is. thai they are | not often dried, for 5 they arc only put || into the spawning-place; and as soon as herrings stop spawning, then j the cedar-branches with the spawn on them arc given [ to the tribe to eat. The raw spawn is eaten fresh, j It is bad when it is dried, for it quicklj gets a strong taste, | and it quickly

10 gets red; and it also !! tastes of cedar-branches when it gets dry; and the only j reason why it. is put into the sea is, that it is easy to wipe off | the herring-spawn; and it is not cooked in kettles. |

Soaked Herring-Spawn. — A [ large steaming-box is taken, and the

15 box with herring-spawn is taken, || and it is put down on the Left-hand side of the house. | Then they untie the rope of the cover, ami they pour (the herring-spawn) into the steaming-box; j and as soon as it is nearly full, they pour fresh water into it; and they only stop pouring water into it when it covers the : spawn. This is done in

20 the morning, ami it is just j| left that way until noon. Then the old women are asked j to come and rub the herring-spawn; and when the old women j come, they sit down in the house, one on each side of each steaming-box; and as soon as they have sat down, they rub the | herring-spawn. After they have continued rubbing it for a a lung time, they shake out with the back || of the hand the hemlock- 25 leaves, and they draw the spawn towards themselves; and | when all the spawn is on the near side of the steaming-box, | then all the 1 emlock-leaves are on the far side; and the old woman | skims them off with her right hand, and puts them into a | small dish that stands on the floor; and when all the hemlock-leaves are out, she || rubs the 30 spawn again; and she rubs (among) it for a long time, | doing in the same way as she had done before, when she first worked at the | spawn, shaking her hands so as to remove the hemlock-leaves to the outer side | of the steaming-box; and she also does the same, skimming off the | hemlock-leaves and throwing them into the small dish. She keeps on || doing this, and only stops when all the hemlock-leave- '■'(■) are out. | As soon as this has been done, a large kettle is taken, and | the spawn is poured into it. When the kettle is full, | the man calls his tribe; and [ when all the guests are in, they first eat || scorched 40 dried salmon. After they have eaten it, they put the | kettle with herring-spawn on the fire, and | the young men at once stir it; ami when it begins to boil, | it is taken off the fire. Then it is | done. Then dishes are taken, and || long-handled ladles, and with the 45

46 ladles they dip [ the herring-spawn out of the kettle and put it into the dishes. | As soon as (the dishes) are full, oil is taken and is poured | on the spawn in the dishes; and they only stop pouring on the oil | when the liquid of the spawn is covered with it. Then it is

50 put before the || guests, and the guests at once cat it with spoons, for before this | spoons are given to them. They do not drink water before it, | for they have eaten dried salmon; therefore they do not | drink. As soon as they finish eating herring-spawn, they | cool themselves with fresh water. That is all.|| 1 Half-Soaked Herring-Spawn. — They | do the same with the herringspawn as I have told before. | Only this is different, that it is not. left in the steaming-box for a long time, | and it is rubbed before the 5 herring-sp awn swells; || and when all the hemlock -leaves are taken out , the spawn is taken out | and made into balls large enough to lit into the hands | put together; and the reason why it is made round is, | that it is put into the dishes, and two halls are made for | each man.

10 When there are eight || balls of herring-spawn put into each dish, | it is put before four men. Immediately j the guests take out eachone ball of | herring-spawn, and they eat it; and alter they have eaten it, the wife ] of the host takes her spoons and puts them down on the ||

inner side of the dish. She dips up sonic fresh water and | pours it 15 on to the halls of spawn which are in the dish; and ! when the guests eat the halls of spawn, they take the spoons \ and eat the spawn with its liquid witli spoons; and when | they finish, they go out. This half-soaked spawn is often given at feasts ]| to the tribe, and also 20 dried salmon is eaten before it, j before they eat the half-soaked spawn. No oil goes with it. That is | all about this. |

Eating Herring-Spawn. — When a man desires to eat herring-spawn, || he just goes into the house of a man who owns | some good dried 25 spawn, and he sits down in the house. | Then they tell the wife of the man that they want to eat spawn. | At once the woman takes her food-mat | and spreads it outside of the men. Then she takes her || small basket and fills it with herring-spawn. Then she pours | the 30 herring-spawn on the food-mat, and she scatters the spawn over it. | She also takes her oil-dish and pours oil into it, and I she places it among the spawn. Then the men take | the spawn, dip it into (lie oil, and put it [| into their mouths. Then they take much oil with it, 35 for | dried herring-spawn is very rough to eat. j After they finish eating, some fresh water is fetched, and they drink; j and after they finish drinking, they go out. That is all about this. |

1 Herring- Spawn with Kelp. — When | a man wishes to invite his trihe in for the morrow, | then in the evening his wife takes the steamingbox | and pours some fresh water into it until it is half full. Then .") she takes a J| bundle of kelp (with spawn) tied in the middle, and she unties it in the middle. Then j she puts it into the steaming-box in the evening. Now it is soaking in the house during the whole | night. In the morning, when day comes, | the man invites his tribe in; but his wife clears | the house, so that it may be clean; and after

10 she has finished clearing it, || she spreads the mats around the house; and as soon as she has finished, | she takes the kettles and puts them down by the door of the [ house; and after she has finished, she takes her dishes and | puts them down near the door of the house; and when she has finished, | she takes her oil and her spoon-basket, and ||

1") these also are put down by the door of the house, and also | two buckets, and sometimes even four buckets, | for there is much water (needed) with the kelp with herring-spawn when it is boiled. | Now everything is ready. As soon as | her husband conies, he starts the

-'(i lire in the middle of the house; and when || the fire blazes up, he waits fof the young men of his nuinaym | to come in. As soon as they come, he sends them to call ; his tribe again. Immediately the young men go out again | to call the guests again. Not long and
all the guests come. Immediately the woman takes her || box of 25 dried salmon and puts it down near the door of the house. | Immediately the young men untie the cover, and they scorch (the salmon I, and several | of them draw fresh water fur the guests to drink first. Now we have | finished with the eating of the dried salmon, for I have already talked | about this. Then the young men take the kelp and || break it into pieces small enough for our mouths. As soon as j it is 30 all in pieces, it is taken out of the steaming-box with the hand, and put into | the kettles; and when they are full, fresh water is poured on; | and they only stop pouring on fresh water | when it shows over the pieces of kelp. Then the || kettles are put on the fire. The 35 young men | take the tongs and stir with them. They keep on stirring until it begins to boil; and when it has been | boiling for a long time, the kettles are taken off the [ fire. Now it is done. At once the young men take || dishes and put them down in a row behind |n the kettles; and then the woman takes the large long-handled dipping-ladle [ and gives it to the young men. This is used to dip j out the kelp from the kettle and put it into the dishes. They only stop dipping it into the dishes when (the dishes) are nearly || full. A- ■!•) soon as they have finished, they take oil and | pour it on, and they

47 only stop pouring oil on when | the liquid of the kelp is all covered with it. Other | young men pass the spoons around among the quests; and as soon as | every one has a spoon, the dishes are put

50 before them, and they || begin to eat with spoons; and they eat for a long time, then they have finished. Then they [ cool themselves down with fresh water. As soon as they finish drinking, the j young men take up the dishes and take them to the wives of the | guests. Then the guests go out. Kelp with herring-spawn is not eaten j dry.

55 It is only eaten soaked, and || it stays on the fire a long time when it is being boiled. | That is all about this. |

Herring-Spawn with Salmon-Berry Shoots. — One thing | I have forgotten about the herring-spawn. It is eaten dry with salmon-berry shoots, j and it is dipped into oil with salmon-berry shoots when it ||

60 is eaten. That is all about this. | 1 Mountain-Goat Butchering. — Now I will talk | about the mountaingoat brisket. If is cut oil' beginning at the | soft place between the lowTer ends of the ribs and the breast-bone, | in this wTay :

Assoonasit has been taken off , fl it is hung up right over /fjjjjjj the fire of the house. If it — ] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 /III/ 's veiT I fat, then the side-ribs are \ f /(// 1/ cut off m from the backbone | all Vy-A \ , , , ' tne way dovm to the flanks, and it is in this way; v-~AAATy an,| ] it, is also hung up just over the lire of the house, and the other piece also. |

Then it is smoked mountain-goat meat; i'or that is its name when it is done || this way. (The man) also spreads the suet at a place, not 10 too | near the fire, and he cuts out the kidney-fat. He puts it into a dish containing water. As soon as all the kidney-fat | has been taken out, he washes it well in the dish with water. | He takes it out and puts it on a well-made new mat. He || pours off the water 1 .") that was in the dish, and puts the dish down at the place where lie sits. | Then he takes up the kidney-fat and bites off a piece, which he chews. | After chewing it to pieces, lie takes it out of his mouth and | puts it into the dish. He does the same with other pieces, [ and he only stops when he has chewed it all and || put it all into the dish. 20 Then he goes down to the beach and takes some | fresh stones. He puts them on the fire of his house. | Then he takes another dish and puts it down near | the one containing the chewed kidney-fat. He pours some water | into it, so that it is not quite full. Then he also pours some water || into the dish containing the chewed kidney-fat ; 25 but this dish is half full. | After this has been done, he takes the smaller dish and | washes it well. As soon as it is clean, he puts it near the j fire, with the inside towards the fire, in order to dry it. After this has been done, he goes down | to the beach and searches for

30 a piece of kelp. When he lias found it, || he cuts off a piece two spans long | from the head. He carries it up and puts it down | by the side of the dish. Then he takes down a spoon and | puts it down. Now the stones are white-hot. Then he | takes his tongs and lifts

35 the red-hot stones, || dips them into the water in the dish, so that the ashes that stick on the stones come off, | and then he puts them into tin' chewed kidney-fat. | He continues doing this; and, before a great many red-hot | stones have been put in, the water in the dish containing the chewed kidney-fat begins to boU. | Then the chewed

40 kidney-fat begins to melt; and when it is all || melted, he takes the tongs and with them lifts the stones | out of the "dish in which the fat is melted," for that is the name of the dish, j He puts them down by the side of the fire. When he has taken them all out, [ he takes the spoon and takes the kelp (bottle) and places its opening upward; |

45 and he skims off the fat that is now floating on the water, || and he pours it into the kelp bottle. When it is Idled, he puts | it down in the corner of the house where it gets stiff quickly. | (Some people say that in this manner "it gets hard" quickly.) Then he goes back | to the dish, for the fat is not all done yet. He just | takes a piece of short

50 broken cedar-wood, and with it he lifts the skum off from the || fat; and when it is all out, he takes up the dish and pours the contents | into the small dish for fooling tallow. In most cases the 51 water | in it goes with the fat. He takes it to the corner of the house, to a | level place, so that it does not cant over to one side as it stands on the floor, so that the cake of tallow will not be | thicker on one side than on the other, so that it may be just even. || After it has been 55 in the corner for one night, the owner goes to take it. | He puts down the ice-cold tallow in the dish by the side of the fire, so that | the upper side gets warm; and when it is warmed through, he turns it around | so that the upper side also becomes warm; and when that is also warm, | the tallow is melted all around. Then the [| man 00 lifts up the ice-cold tallow cake and raises it on one side, | and immediately the cold tallow cake slips out of the dish. | Then he takes a broad piece of soft white cedar-bark and wraps it all around | it and puts it into a box. He takes the kelp bottle | and just breaks it off; and when he gets all the tallow out of the || kelp bottle, he takes soft 65 cedar-bark and wraps it around it; | and he puts it into a small box, which he keeps by his side. | It is the box in which his wife keeps her comb and her j cedar-bark towel; for the Indians use the kidneytallow of the goat to grease their | faces in cold weather in the winter, || for it is hard and the color of snow. When the day is hot | 70 in summer, the men and the women also rub tallow on their faces, | so that they may not be sunburned; and when it is very cold in |

winter, the tallow is taken and chewed; and | when it is all in pieces,

7.") it is put in the palm of the right hand. || (The man) pushes the palm of las left hand over it and rubs the hands together, | so that all the fat is between the hands. Then he presses it all over | his face; and when the face is covered with it, it is white all over | with tallow.

Then the cold and the | wind do not go through it. Generally it is so the woman who works on the || kidney-fat of the mountain-goat when it is melted; but sometimes the | man melts the kidney-fat of the mountain-goat, when his wife does not know | how to do it, for not everybody knows how to melt it and | how to handle it. The kidney-fat of the goat is not used as food, | for it is only good for greasing the face. That is all about this. ||

) Stomach-Fat of Mountain-Goat. — Now I will talk | about the stomach-fat when it is eaten. When the mountain-goat hunter has much of it, | he keeps it. Sometimes lie has eight | large boxes of the stomach-fat of mountain-goats. ||

5 The mountain-goat hunter does not often give a feast of the |

stomach-fat, for the head chief of the tribe | always gives leasts of stomach-fat of the mount ain-goal , when, if the hunterhas thedaughter of the head chief for his wife, | he gives as a marriage-present the stomach-fat | to his father-in-law; and when the chief has no

10 daughter, || a canoe will be due the mountain-goat hunter, or his son will receive a marriage-present | (from the chief) , or he will give all marriage-present | to the wife of the mountain-goat hunter. ' He must give a marriage-feast of stomach-fat of the mountain-goat | to the chief, although she is his own wife. Nowhe hasgivenfor a marriagefeast | the stomach-fat of the mountain- goat, and the dried brisket, || and the dried sides, to his father-in-law; and sometimes | there are 15 as many as eight large boxes full. When it is thoroughly dried, | his wife puts it into boxes; and when he gives it | to his father-in-law to give a marriage-feast, then the people at once take a new | small canoe and carry it into the house of the chief. They put || it down at the left-hand side of the door of the house. They carry in | much 20 water and pour it into the small canoe; | and when it is nearly half full, they stop pouring in the water, | and they open the boxes of dried brisket and the boxes of dried sides. | They put them into the water in the small canoe. |[ There they are soaked. When they are all in, they put | short boards over them; and they take large stones and 25 put them | on to keep the dried brisket and the dried sides under water. | After they have been soaked for three days, the chief calls | all the tribes to come and eat dried || mountain-goat briskets. As soon as the one who invites | all the men goes, the chief's numaym carry 30 up | many fresh stones and put them into the fire in the middle of

1 As though the hunter's son or his wife were the chief's daughter. 7.-,{ir,2— 21— 35 eth— ft 1 28

the | feasting-house. Others go to get large oil-boxes, | and put

35 them down at the end of the fire, towards the door of the || house. Still others go to get long tongs, and put | them down. As soon as everything is ready, | the stones are white-hot, and the oil-boxes are filler! | with water that has been carried in by others of the chief's

40 numaym. | When the guests come in, young men take the tongs j| and take up the red-hot stones, and put them into the | water in the oilboxes. When the water begins to boil, some of the | young men take large baskets and put the soaked | briskets and side-pieces into them. When | the baskets are full, they put them into the boiling water;

45 and when || they are all in it, they put more red-hot stones | outside around the baskets. Then the water boils hard; | and after it has been boiling quite a while, it is done; they take | broad, short boards and put them down next to | the oil-boxes on the side towards the

50 door of the house. || They take the baskets, one man lifting on each side, take them out of the oil-box, and | pour out the contents on the short boards. Some of the | young men go to get long roof-boards, which are laid down flat | in front of thefeasters. They pull to pieces the cooked brisket, so that | there will be enough for all the feasters.

55 As soon as they finish, the young men take || the pieces of brisket, place them on | long boards in front of each guest. When they have 56 all been put down, | the chief's speaker speaks, and | tells the guests to take the meat and to eat it. Then | all the guests stretch out their hands, take up the cooked soaked brisket, and eat it. || They do not 60 drink water before they begin to eat; for they are afraid to drink | when eating fat brisket, for fear that the cold water might make hard the | tallow in their stomachs. After they have eaten, the guests | take home to their wives what is left. The feasters are told | to sing their feasting-songs, and the guests at once begin to || sing their 65 feasting-songs. Immediately the young men | open the boxes containing the stomach-fat. They take a new | woven mat and spread it to the left of the door of the | house. They take stomach-fat out of the box and | put it on the mat. After it has all been taken out, two || young men count the number of guests. They carry a number 70 of split | long slender cedar-sticks that have been counted, and they give one stick to | every one of the guests. These are used to put the stomach-fat | at one end of the cedar-stick when they melt it in the fires of their own houses. | There may also be more sticks than the number of feasters. As soon as they know the || number of the guests, they 75 cut the stomach-fat into pieces, so that every | guest gets one piece. When it has all been cut up into pieces, they distribute | it. When

78 this has been done, the chief's speaker begins to praise them. | The guests never eat any of the stomach-fat | of the mountain-goat,

80 but go out. This important feast || is given to many tribes; namely, dried brisket and sides, | and also the stomach-fat of the mountaingoat; for there is a myth about it and | about the seal, for it is valued more highly than an oil-feast by [ many tribes. As soon as the former guests enter their houses, | they distribute the split cedar-

85 sticks, for all the guests carry them || to theirwives with the stomachfat. The women at once | bite off a piece of the fat and chew it; and after it has been chewed, | they put it on the end of a split cedarstick, so that there is a knob of fat at the end, | for they only wish it to be large enough to go into the mouth. They put the knob | into the fire; and when the stomach-fat is melted, they put it into

90 the || mouth and suck the knob. When all the melted tallow has been sucked off, | they put the knob into the fire again; and when it begins to drip | with the melted fat, they put it back into the mouth; and they | only stop when there is only skin left at the end of the fat-stick. They only | suck it off and eat it. That is all about this. || 1 Mountain- Goat Brisket. — When there are two rival | chiefs in one tribe, and each lias a | son-in-law who is a mountain-goat hunter, they watch each other | when they give feasts. When the chief's 5 mountain-goat hunter || has ten boxes of dried briskets and | sides and the stomach-fat of the mountain-goat, | then the mountain-goat 6 hunter of the chief of the other side tries to get also | that number of boxes which is the number of goats obtained by his rival; and this is also the same | in recent times, when they have kettles. When the || mountain-goat hunter gives the marriage-present to the chief 10 his father-in-law, the latter | soaks the meat, as I described before the soaking of dried briskets and | sides when they soak them in a small canoe. After three | days they call all the tribes; and as soon as | the messenger comes back, they build a fire in the chief's house. || They take large kettles and place them by the side | of the fire, and 15 the young men go to draw water and pour it into the | kettles. When they are half filled with water, the | young men take the soaked briskets out of the soaking-eanoe, | and they go and put them into the kettle. They only stop when || these are filled. They do this 20 with the other kettles too. | Then the young men put them on the fire; and when the water | begins to boil, the young men go again to invite all the tribes. | Then the rival chief goes in first with his numaym. | They enter the house and sit down at their seats, for they do not wish || the rival chief to say that he is afraid to go to the feast; and 25 after him come all the | other guests. Then they start singing the feast-songs, | and they sing the feast-songs | of the rival of the host.

As soon as they sing, | the rival of the host rises; and when his song

30 is ended, || he promises a feast. After he has done so, he sits down. Then the | boxes of stomach-fat are opened, and the stomach-fat is taken | out of the boxes and placed on mats. It is cut into pieces | by the young men. When it is all cut up, the kettles | are taken

35 from the fire and placed around the || fire, so that they are slightly heated on one side and that they hardly | boil on one side. Then the stomach-fat which has been cut into pieces | is taken and put into the boiling liquid of the boiled goat-briskets. | As soon as it is all in, the young men take | spoons and put them down; and when the

40 brisket is done, || they take many dishes and put them down, and they also take long tongs. | With these they take out the boded | briskets and put them into the dishes. There | is one brisket in each dish. When | it is all in, the spoons are distributed among the

45 guests. Then || the dishes are distributed, one dish to each two guests. I Two young men carry the kettle, one on each side, | and put it down in front of the rival of the host. Then one | of the young men says, "Now, eat, chief!" and the chief says, | "I shall do so."

50 Then the young men do the same with the other kettles || to, the other guests. Then they all eat with spoons | the tallow that is on top buas] RECIPES 439

of the liquid of the boiled briskets. | After they have eaten the 52 tallow, they eat the boiled briskets. | However, they do not eat much; and when they finish eating, they go out. | They never drink water after eating. || At this time the host gives a name to his children 55 on account of this kind of food, and also | (when he gives) seal and oil; and the rival of the chief | gives the same kind of a feast as the host. That is all about this. |

Steamed Mountain-Goat Meat. — There is another way of | cooking 1 mountain-goat meat when it is fresh; that is, steaming it on | redhot stones. After the mountain-goat has been caught by the | hunter, the latter skins it in his [| house, so that the skin comes off 5 witli the hair. After he has skinned it, he first goes | into the woods and breaks off tips of hemlock branches. | When he thinks he has enough, he carries them home | and puts them down in his house. Then he takes a basket and | carries it down to the beach in front of his house. He picks up || fresh stones and puts them into it. He 10 carries them on his back and puts them down | in his house. He takes his wedge and his hammer and ] wedges into pieces fire-wood [so that the pieces are] of medium size; and he puts one piece down crosswise | at the end of the fire for heating stones, and there is a| crosspiece only at one end; and he puts the two side-pieces down on the sides; || and he puts pieces across on top for the stones to lie on. | 15

16 After this is done, he takes the basket of stones and pours them on top I of this; and after that is done, he lights the fire under it. As | soon as it begins to burn, he cuts the mountain-goat meat into slices, I and he cuts holes in them so that they will cook quickly. ||

20 When this is done, he takes two buckets and draws | fresh water. He brings them back and puts them near the fire for heating stones. | Then he takes his tongs, so as to have them ready, and | he takes many old mats, which he puts down. Now | all the stones are white-

25 hot. Then he takes his tongs || and picks off from the fire the wood that has been burned. After | it lias all been taken off, he levels off the top of the red-hot stones. After | this has been done, he takes hemlock-branches and lays them down over the | red-hot stones. When there is a thick layer of hemlock-branches, he takes | thin slices

30 of goat-meat and spreads them over it; || and when (the hemlockbranches) are all covered/he takes split cedar-wood and puts it down crosswise | over the meat which is spread over the hemlock-branches, in this way: | s~jG$2?K. Then he takes the goat-meat and spreads | it over the pieces ((KWjuQ which are two spans square. When | (the meat) is all on, *4oi)^ he takes old mats for covering it, and ||

35 spreads them down by the side of it. As soon as everything is ready, | he takes up the buckets with water and empties them over | (the place) where the cut meat is spread; and he does the 37 same quickly | with the other one. When (the buckets) are emptied, he quickly takes up | the mat covers and spreads them over (the meat) ; and he only || stops when hardly any steam is coming 40 through. Then | the man who is steaming it rests for a while; but he does not leave it long, before it is uncovered; | for then it is done, for goat-meat is done quickly when it is steamed. | He just invites all the men to come and sit | around the place where it has been steamed. They take some of it and eat it; || and when 45 they all have eaten enough, they carry home the rest for their wives in their | houses. This is called "steamed fresh goat-meat," which | is treated in this manner. It is called "boded soaked brisket | covered with tallow" when the soaked brisket is boiled. |

Cooking Mountain-Goat Meat. — As1 soon as he arrives at his house | 1 he skins (the goat), as goats are skinned. | After he has skinned it, he cuts off the head so that it comes off, and he ) puts it down in the corner of the house. Then he cuts up the meat of the || hind-legs 5 and fore-legs and the meat of the back. | He cuts it into strips. Then he takes a basket, and puts | the meat of the mountaingoat that has been cut up into it. He goes to the beach and | picks up some stones, which he puts on the fire in the house. When he has | enough stones, he takes his cooking-box

1 Continued from p. 174, line 35.

10 and places it || near the fire. Then he takes his buckets and goes to draw | water, and pours it into the box. When it is half full | of water, he stops pouring it in. He takes his | tongs and picks up the red-hot stones, which he | puts into the cooking-box. When the

15 water begins to boil, || he takes up the basket with the pieces of mountain-goat meat and places the basket with its contents | in the boiling water. As soon as the basket has been put | in, he takes his tongs, takes up more | red-hot stones, and places them outside the basket. |

20 Then the water begins to boil hard all around the basket || containing the pieces of niountain-goat meat. It does not take | really long before it is done. Then he takes a short | piece of board and lays it down by the side of the cooking-box. He | puts down a narrow strip of split cedar-board in front of those who | are to eat the meat of the

25 mountain-goat. Then he takes the tongs and || picks up the cooked goat-meat and puts it on the | short board. When it is all out of the basket, | he takes the cooked mountain-goat meat and places it on | the long strip of board in front of each of those who are to eat the mountain-goat meat. | Before they begin to eat the meat, they drink

30 water; || and after they have drunk, the men take up the pieces of { mountain-goat meat and bite off a piece, and they eat it, and then all the | others begin to eat. After they have eaten, they drink | water. Then they go out.

Roasted Monutain-Goat Meat. — And also roasted mountain-goat | 1 meat, this also is taken from the hind -legs of the mountain-goat. It is cut up, | for they only cut along the thigh-bone of the mountaingoat, so that | it comes off. When it is off, it is sliced so that it forms one thin || wide piece. . . . The thin slice of meat is placed | 5 between the legs of roasting-tongs. Cedar-bark is tied | on the top of the tongs. After this has been done, the man takes | thin split cedar and puts it crosswise (so as to keep the meat open), in this | After this has been done, he places it by the the fire; || and when it is burnt black on one 10 turned over; j and when that side is also burnt is done. Then it is taken | and put down in those who are to eat it. Immediately | they up and eat it. This kind of food is always eaten entirely. | In this also they do not drink water. ||

Mountain-Goat Skin. — An important food of the ancestors of the 15 DEnax-da£xu, | when they stay for a long time on the upper course of Knight Inlet, is (also) mountain-goat skin. | "When the mountaingoat skin has been [ in the house for four days, the man takes the collar-bone of the eagle and breaks off one side of it. || Now (he takes) 20 one half of it, || and he pulls off the wool from the mountain-goat skin. He puts | the wool that he has plucked off into a basket for his wife to make blankets. | When the wool is all off, he puts in the

23 bone hook and | plucks off the long hair. When it is all off, he spreads it out | over his fire in order to singe off the hair that

25 is left on. As soon as it is || all off, the skin shrinks, and then becomes thick on account of the heat when | it is put over the fire. Then he spreads it on a short board, and | takes his knife, whatever it may be, a stone knife or | bone knife. Then he cuts it into strips; and | after it has all been cut, he puts stones on the fire. ||

30 After he has done so, he goes into the woods and takes hemlockbranches and | much skunk-cabbage. He carries them home and puts them down in his | house. Then he takes a digguig-stick and digs a hole | near the fire, two spans long and | the same width, and

35 also the same || depth. As soon as he has finished, he goes to get water with his bucket. | He brings it and puts it down. Then he takes the tongs and picks up | red-hot stones and places them in the hole. | As soon as there are many stones in it, he takes hemlockbranches and | places them over the stones; and when there are

40 enough on them, he spreads skunk-cabbage || over the hemlockbranches. When this also has been done, | he takes cedar-wood and pokes holes through the skunk-cabbage leaves. He | takes the skin that has been cut into strips and coils (the strips) up on the | skunk-cabbage. When it is all in the hole, he takes more skunkcabbage leaves and | spreads them over (the whole). When they are thickly covered, he takes a piece of j| cedar-wood and pokes holes in 45 the middle of the top of the skunk-cabbage. When | the holes have been made, he takes the bucket of water and pours it into the | hole over the skunk-cabbage ; and when he thinks the water is enough , he | takes one leaf of skunk-cabbage and puts it over the place where he poured | the water in. Finally he covers it over with soil. This is done in the evening |j when the skin is boiled underground. He 50 leaves it in there during the night. | In the morning, when day comes, he digs it up. Immediately | he invites some one to eat it with him while it is still hot; for it is tender | while it is hot, but it gets tough when it gets cold: therefore | it is eaten right away. This is called "eating skin steamed underground." || After they have eaten the 55 skin, they go home. |

Boiled Mountain-Goat Meat. — Now also boiled fresh | mountain- 1 goat meat. The meat from the hind-leg of the | mountain-goat is taken and cut into pieces. After this has been done, the man takes | the kettle and puts the meat into it. He pours some || water into it; 5 and when the meat is covered, he puts it over the fire. | As soon as it boils up, the boded blood floats on the liquid, | and all the guests take the spoons and skim off the boded blood, | and they eat it with spoons. They only stop skimming it off when it is finished. It does not | bod a very long time, before the kettle is taken off [| of the fire. Short 10 boards are taken and put down by | the side of the kettle in which the

12 mountain-goat meat has been cooked. (The host) takes the | tongs, takes the boiled meat out (of the kettle) and | places it on the short boards. When it is all out of the kettle, | he takes long, narrow

15 roof-boards and places them in front of || the guests. These are called "things on which to place the meat." He | picks up the cooked meat and places it in front of each | man. When every one has a piece, they begin to eat; and | after they finish, they go out. They never drink | cold water with tins while they are in the f eastinghouse. That is all about this. || 1 Porpoise. — As soon as (the hunter) arrives on the beach of his house, | he himself pulls the porpoises out of his little canoe, | and he places them the head landward. He takes out the two mats on which he and the steersman were sitting, and | everything that was 5 in his hunting-canoe. || As soon as everything is out, he washes the canoe, so that all the blood | is out; and when it is clean inside, he carries it up the beach and | puts it down above high-water mark. | After eating, lie takes his butcher-knife and | goes to the place

10 where the porpoises are lying on the beach. He cuts off the || tail and puts it down on the beach; and he cuts the back of the head down to | the joint of the jaws; and he cuts, beginning from the mouth | towards the place which he has cut along the sides of the head. Then he twists | the head off, but the lower jaws are left on the body | of the porpoise. He puts the porpoise down on its belly and cuts || into the right side on the back of the neck, down along the 15 right side of the | dorsal fin. When he reaches the meat, he cuts under the | blubber; and when he reaches the end of the | ribs and the breast-bone, he cuts through the cartilage. | Then he pulls it open and spreads it out. Now the || butchered porpoise is spread open. 20 He takes out the kidney and the tongue, | the lungs, and liver. Often the stomach is also taken. | He throws the intestines into the sea. I He gives head and tail to the steersman, for | that he receives for steering. Then the hunter cuts up the || tongue, kidney, liver, 25 and stomach, and | puts them into a kettle. He cuts off four strips | one finger wide of the | blubberfromthebackof the porpoise all theway down to the root of the tail. | These pieces are one span in length. || He 30 puts them into the kettle and there is fat on them. He pours in some I water. Now they are covered with water. Then he puts them on the I fire of the house, and they are called "boiled insides." | After they have been boiling for a long time, they are done. Then the hunter | calls his fellow-hunters, and also the steersman, to come and eat the boiled insides. || When they are in the house, he gives to each two 35

36 strips of blubber, | and after it the boiled insides. First the | boiled insides are eaten. Then they mix them with blubber and chew them together. | After they have eaten, they go out and wash their hands in their | houses. That is all about this. ||

40 Only the steersman boils the head and the | tail of the porpoise for his friends, the steersmen of the other | hunters; for the steersmen never change. | They just take off the blubber from the head. When it is all off, | they cut it in strips and put the (strips) into the kettle. (The steersman) ||

45 cuts the tail in pieces, cutting in this manner: He puts | the pieces into the kettle and pours water into it. When | it is half full of water, he puts it on the fire; and | after it has boiled for a long time, he takes the kettle off the fire. |

50 Then it is done. Then he takes it out and puts it on || short boards. He does in the same way as he does when eating | boiled insides [when they eat it]; and (the guests) just go out of the house at once | after eating; and they wash their hands in their houses. |

After the butchered porpoise has been in the house for one night, | they cut it to pieces. (The hunter) cuts off the blub-

55 ber; and when || it is off, it is in this way:

He cuts it crosswise and places it on the fire. | If he intends to steam it on red-hot stones, he | spreads it out in the way it is, being 57 cut, but not cut through. | If it is to be boiled, then it is cut into pieces along the lines marked in the sketch. | The meat is also cut into pieces; and when it is all in pieces, || the kettle is 60 put on the fire, water is poured | into it, and when it is half full, the cut pieces of meat are put | into it. When the meat is all in, he waits for the water to boil; | and after it has been boding for a long time, the blubber is put in [ on top of the meat. It does not boil very long, || before it is done. Then the kettle is taken off the 65 fire; | and then it is done as they do when eating the boded insides. | The oidy difference when it is steamed is, that it is cut up | after it is done, and also that they put | the pieces of meat and blubber in with the red-hot stones, || and they pour four bucketfuls of water over 70 them. Then they | put an old mat over them so as to keep the steam in. It does not | take long before (what is in the kettle) is done; and they also do | the same as they do when eating boiled insides. This is oidy eaten when it is | hot. When it is cold, they throw it away. || That is all about this. | 75

70052—21—35 eth— pt 1 29

These are the names belonging to the hotly of the porpoise:-

1. Head.

2. Eyes.

3. Blow-hole.

4. Mouth.

5. Chin.

G. Jaw-bone.

7. Collar-bone.

8. Place for cutting off head.

9. Occiput.

10. Ear.

11. Tongue.

12. Fins.

13. Backbone.

14. Ribs.

15. Breast-hone.

1C). Spine.

17. Kidney.

18. Liver.

19. Lungs.

20. Windpipe.

21. Diaphragm.

22. Milt.

23. Gall.

24. Stomach.

25. Intestines.

26. Belly.

27. Bladder.

28. Rectum.

29. Heart.

30. Dorsal fin.

31. Side of back part of dorsal fin.

32. Place for butchering.

33. Tad.

34. Small of hack.

35. Side-.

36. Cheeks.

37. Flukes.

38. Place for cutting oil' tad.

39. Nipples.

40. Blubber.

41. Meat.

This is the number of the names of the body of the porpoise.

4. SEU1S.

15. haqlwayo.

16. dogwil.

17. galgene.

18. tlewana.

19. kwaxwa.

13. hamomo.

22. tsalayo.

26. tsk-!e.

27. texatsle. 2s. awage.

29. paxwa.

32. eyimlas.

37. plewayoxsde.

39. dzEmdzEmxulas. 4(1. xudz.

41. mas. Eldz.

Seal Butchering. — As1 soon as (the seal-hunter) arrives on the beach, 1 he brings | his hunting-canoe sideways to the beach. Then he pulls out the [ hair-seals so that they remain in shallow water, for | generally the hunter comes home at high tide. || When they are all out, 5 he washes his hunting-canoe. | When it is clean, he and his steersman carry it up and | put it down above the line of the spring tide. After | eating, he goes down to the beach, takes | another small canoe, and goes to get driftwood to singe off the hair of the || seal and 10 to steam it. When the little canoe is full, | he goes home. As soon as he arrives on the | beach, he unloads the driftwood that he has gathered; and when it is | all out, he takes two logs and puts them down on the beach. | These are two spans apart. || They are the side- 15 pieces of the fire on which the seal is singed. Then he | splits dry driftwood and makes a fire on the beach. As soon as it | begins to burn, he hauls up the seal and lays it across with the | head on the seaward side-piece, for the head and neck are singed first. | When all the hair of the head and neck || has been singed off, he turns it over 20 and singes the hair on the back of the head. He | shoves it forward, and keeps on rolling it over. When he comes to the | flippers, he takes the tongs and spreads out the flippers | so that the fire reaches

) Continued from p. 17S, line 9.

the folds and the sides of the seal. | As soon as the flippers have been

25 singed, he strikes them || with the tongs until the singed off (hair) comes off.1 . . . Then | he pushes it ahead and turns it over; and as soon as he passes the middle, | he pulls it off the fire for singeing on the beach. He turns it the other way, and | takes a split cedarstick and lays it across the hind-flipper so as to | spread it

30 open, in this way, and _pppp^ he does the same with the || other hind-flipper. When Vvi_Yy t'1*s *s d°ne) ne Puts ** I backward on the fire, so that \\ // the hind-flippers are over the fire for singeing. When | all \ / the hair has been singed off, he pushes it backward and rolls q, it around; and when | he comes up to the place where ^ it had been singed before, in the middle, he rolls it from the | fire for singeing. Now he is through

35 with the singeing. || Then he takes a short board to cut open the seal. He lays it down by the | side of the seal. He takes a short block of | driftwood one span in diameter | and lays it crosswise at the upper end of the cutting-board. | He takes another block of driftwood of

40 the same length, a little || less in diameter than the first one, and puts it down at the upper end of the cutting- | board. He puts it crosswise so as to keep the | cutting-board off the beach. Then he takes a dish and puts it | under the lower end of the cutting-board, in this

1 Continued on p. 607, line9, to p. 608, line 14.

This dish serves to let the into it. || Then he takes 45 and puts it on the board head | towards the beach, lower end of the cutting- Then he takes his butchermakes a cut under the the seal down to the He | cuts along each side of the tongue and pulls it out. Then he cuts around || the neck; and when he has cut all 50 around it, he turns the | seal over so that it lies on its belly, and cuts the back of the neck towards | the hind-flippers. The cut goes between the right hind-flipper | and the tail. When his cut passes through the | blubber, he cuts under it towards the || belly of the 55 seal. The shoulder-blade and the fore-flipper remain | with the blubber. When he reaches the cartilage between | the ribs and the lower end of the breast-bone, | he cuts through along it. He follows along and cuts open the | belly. Then the blood begins to run into the dish. Then || he takes hold of the tongue and pulls at it 60 while he cuts with his butcher-knife | underneath the windpipe, and pulls at it, cutting towards the | lower end of the hair-seal, and cutting under the backbone and the diaphragm and | the kidneys. He cuts all this off with the intestines, | liver, and stomach. When he reaches

65 the lower end of the || intestines, he cuts thorn off. He takes a basket and puts | it down close to where he butchered the seal. He takes the j guts and throws them into the basket. Then he | carries (the basket) down to the beach, and he also carries his butcher- | knife.

70 Then he first cuts off the tongue and puts it down. || He cuts off the heart and the lungs. He | cuts off the liver and kidney, and cuts off the gall and the | milt, and throws them away. Then he cuts off the upper end of the intestines j from the stomach. He cuts along them so as to stretch them out the whole length. | As soon as they arc

75 opened out, lie squeezes out wdiat is inside of the intestines; || and when they are empty, he puts them down. | Then he does the same with the stomach. As soon as it is empty, | he takes a basket and washes it out. He does not | wash the blood off the tongue, the kidneys, lungs, | and liver, for it is said that the blood gives it a good

80 taste. Then || he puts all into a basket. He washes the empty intestines | and throws them on top of the insides that are in the basket, and also the stomach. | He carries (the basket) up the beach, and puts it down | by the side of the fire. He takes a kettle and

85 places it j by the side of the fire, and he takes a cutting-board || and puts it down by the side of the basket with the insides in it. | Then he takes out the stomach and puts it in the corner | of the house. He 87 goes back and sits down by the basket, | takes his butcher-knife, and takes out the tongue, | places it on the cutting-board, and cuts it into two || pieces lengthwise. He cuts each half in two | lengthwise and 90 puts the pieces into the kettle. He also takes out | the kidneys, puts them on the cutting-board, | and does the same to them. He cuts each into four pieces lengthwise. | He takes out the liver, places it || on his cutting-board, and cuts it into pieces, | each strip one finger- 95 width wide is the width of the | cut liver. When it is all cut up, he throws it into the | kettle; and he takes the lungs, puts them on the | cutting-board, and he cuts off the heart || and cuts it into four 100 pieces, which he puts into the kettle; and he cuts the | lungs in the same way as lie cut the liver, | and puts it into the kettle. He takes the intestines | and makes a braid of them, beginning to pull through one end [I | shall send you a thread to show how the gut is braided]. When || the intestines are four fingers long, | he cuts them off; and 5 he does the same to the rest. | He makes them into braids of the same length, and throws them into the kettle. | Then he pours water on; and when it shows over the insides, | he. puts the kettle on the fire.

10 Then he goes down to the beach, carrying his || butcher-knife, to the place where he left the singed seal. He cuts off | a strip one finger wide of the | blubber, beginning at the neck of the seal, | and following the line where he cut it open down to the back; and when it comes off, | he carries it up; and he also takes up the dish of blood. Then

15 he coils the || blubber on the cutting-board and cuts it into pieces | four finger-widths in length. After | the insides have been boiling quite a while, he puts the blubber into the water. | He takes another kettle and washes it out. When | it is clean, he pours water into it

20 until it is half full. || Then he puts it on the fire. He takes some water and pours it into the | blood in the dish. He stirs it; and when it is well mixed, lie pours | it into the water in the new kettle that he put on, | and he stirs it again. He watches it closely. | He stirs it for

25 awhile, and looks at the end of his stirrer. || When the blood changes color, he takes it off | the fire. He does not let it bod up. Then the "blood-soup" is done, | for that is its name. An expert | cook boils the soup this way. If he is inexperienced, he lets it boil up. | Then

30 it is cooked too much, and the || boiled blood goes down, and there is only water on top. | If the cook is experienced, it is thick. When it is done, he takes the kettle | off the fire, and lie also takes off the kettle with the | insides. He takes a short board | and puts it down by the side of the kettle containing the insides. || Then he takes his tongs 35 and lifts out the insides. He | puts them on the board. When they are all there, he takes | the board and puts it on a long split cedarboard, which he | lays down in front of those who are to eat the insides (of the seal). | After this has been done, he sits down by the side of the board. He takes a || piece of blubber, and a piece of the 40 tongue, | kidney, liver, | lungs, heart, and | also a piece of the braided intestines. He does | in the same way for all of those who are to eat the insides. || As soon as he has put down a number equal 45 to that of the | men, he takes up the boards and puts them in front of those who are to eat the insides. | Then he puts them down. As soon as they are all there, | he takes spoons and gives them to those who are to eat | the insides; and he carries the kettle with boded blood || and puts it down in front of those who are to eat the "blood- 50 soup," for | that is its name. Then they eat the insides, | and they eat with spoons the soup. Generally they | eat with spoons both the blood-soup and insides. | As soon as they have eaten, they go out. Only || chiefs are invited to eat the insides of seals. Generally | 55 blood-soup is given with it. That is all about this. |

[KTII. ANN. 35

57 The blubber of the hairseal is cut after the manner of this sketch of a seal.

If there are from four to ten seals, and when ] a seal-feast is given to not very many people, then the blubber is cut| 60 the whole length of the seal. When there are from eighty to a hundred, | they give a feast of blubber to many tribes. That is a great seal-feast. | Then they cut off the blubber from the meat (as in skinning deer). | Itis spread open, and the blubber is cut from one end to the other, in this way: 1 and 2, the hind-flippers, are given to the young chiefs; 65 3 and 4, the fore-flippers, are given to the next ones; ] and the chest (5) is given to the head chiefs. | The long strips of blubber are given to the |

common people. As soon as a | man receives a long strip of 70 blubber, he stands up in the house, || takes it and puts it around lus neck, and at once he bites the blubber | from the skin, and bolts it, for they try to cat quickly the | blubber of the skin; and when they have swallowed all the blubber, | they throw away the skin and ask for another | long strip of blubber; and when 75 it is given to them, they || put it around the neck, and they again bite off the blubber and bolt it. | Those who are experts can 76 eat six long strips of blubber. | Then they have enough; and (whoever does that) is proud of having eaten so much, for he is | an expert. Not even-body is expert at bolting it; | but the chiefs do not eat fast, as they eat the limbs. This || is called "feast of long 80 strips of blubber." It is the great feast | given of many seals. When it is done, they go out. | Then those who have bolted the seal go and wash themselves, for they are quite | covered with oil, because they had the blubber around the neck. That is | all about this. ||

Seals are also boiled with stones in the same way as | horse-clams 85 are boiled. The only difference is, that they do not dig a hole | for heating the stones when steaming the seal. When the fire is lighted under it, | and it has burned out, (the owner) calls some men of his numaym | to bring many oil-boxes. They || put them down by the 90 side of the heated stones, so that the}- stand close together, | in this way.1 When this is done, they take large buckets | and go to draw water. The man pours it into the oil-boxes. | When they are less than half full, lie stops. Then he takes the long | tongs, sometimes four, and he takes one || mat for each oil-box. When these are all | ready and the 95 stones are red-hot, the | young men of his numaym take the tongs,

1 Six boxes side by side; opposite'the middle of the'fire, about two feet away from the Are.

pick up the red-hot | stones, and throw them into the water in the 200 oil-boxes. | When the water begins to boil, they take || long strips of blubber and throw them into the boiling | water. When the boxes are nearly full, they take the tongs, | pick up the red-hot stones, and put them on top of the | blubber that they are steaming. When the water is boiling hard | in the oil- boxes, they take the mats and spread 5 them || over them, so that the water dues not boil over. Then the young men leave them. | Afer the water has been boiling a while, they go to look at them; | and when it stops boiling, they take off the mats and put them away. | They take cutting-boards and lay them down back

10 of the I oil-boxes. They take the tongs, and || take out the blubber and place it on the cutting-boards. | When it has all been taken out, the young men call those who are to eat it. I .^§^^^^^^1^ I sP°ke about this on page 458 of this .(^p||5||§§i§§l§|||^ writing. | They cut the blubber length- l\((f(f//f^^^^^^^^^W\ wise. When | there are more than a hun died I W^y^^^^^^^^^jJJ]}]) seals, the}' cut it spirally, in

15 this way: \§§s§§§^=^^^%^ so tnat ^ is II one l°ng strip of blubber. ^^S^^S^^Hi^ This is done when two rival chiefs try — "^^S^gi^ to give great seal-feasts to outdo each ^(g^^ other. Two | chiefs of one tribe do ^ this; and the long strip is given | to the speaker of the rival chief. A whole length of blubber j is coiled into the feast-dish. 18 Then they pour | olachen-oil on it, and place it in front of the speaker. Then he arises, || takes one end of the blubber, and 20 puts it around his neck. | He bites off the blubber from the singed skin and swallows it. If he | is an expert at bolting it, he eats almost three | fathoms of blubber. If he is not expert, he can not | eat more than one-half of a fathom. Then he gives up. Then the speaker of the chief just promises a seal-feast. || They do not. cut the blubber spirally | to give it 25 to those who do not belong to the rival chief. They only receive strips of blubber cut | lengthwise, cut as written on page 458. | They also put the blubber around their necks and bolt it. | They do not pour oil on it, for they only pour oil on the blubber given to the || speaker of the rival chief. As soon as they finish, [ they go out and 30 vomit all behind the house, | for it really makes one feel squeamish. After finishing, they wash themselves | in hot water and urine. That is all. |

Steamed Seal-Meat. — Steaming of seal and porpoise is done in the 1 same way, | on heated stones, as clams are steamed. | The only difference is that | skunk-cabbage and many hemlock-branches are taken and are put down by the side of the || red-hot stones. When 5 the coals are taken away from the | red-hot stones, the hemlock-

7 branches are put | on top of the hot stones; and when there is a thick layer, they | spread the skunk-cabbage over the hemlock-branches. They stop when there is | one layer. Then the man takes the pieces

10 of seal- meat, || places them on the skunk-cabbage, and when they are all on, he | takes sharp cedar-sticks and pokes holes in the skunkcabbage, so that [ there are holes in it for the water and steam to pass through. | After this has been done, he takes strips of blubber |

15 which he has cut as described on page 458. He spreads them || over the pieces of meat. After they have been spread, he takes | mats and puts them down next to the place where he is going to steam the seals. | Each one of four young men takes a large bucket filled with fresh water, | and he pours it | over the cut seal-meat. Then other ||

20 young men take up the mats and cover (the meat) with them. I think | they keep it there for three hours. After this time | it is done. Now it is done. Then they take off the mat cover | and spread it that it may get dry, and also so that the steamed | seal may

25 cool off. Then they take short boards, || put them down, and then they do as I described before. | They put the cooked meat on the hoards and they eat it. | That is all about this. | 1 Seal-Head. — Now oidy the head is left, which is given to the steersman | of the seal-hunter. They do not cut off the head | until the boas] eecipes 463

hair has been singed off. Then it is given to the steersman. If | 3 there are many seals, the hunter does not give the head to his | steersman, but he pays him five pairs of blankets for | one hundred 5 seals, which are equal to five dollars; for | the head is always left on the body when there are many h air-seals. When | they let the chief buy the seal, then the head is cut off, and | it is given to the old people, for it is never given with the || meat in a seal-feast. The 10 old people just take off the blubber of the head | and cut it into strips, in this manner: #fflnt\ ^ ^s Just Put m^° a I kettle, water is poured into it, /%OT/I nllV ant^ tne kettle is put on the | fire of the house. It takes ffly/fl //// 1\\ a l°n& time to boil it before it is done. | When it ^MjUIxo^ is done, the boiled head is taken off the fire. || They take a small dish and put it down alongside of 15 the kettle with boiled head. | They take tongs and take hold of the | blubber of the boiled heads, and put it into the small dish. | When it is all in, they take dried halibut, break it into pieces, and put it into | another small dish. Now it is to be eaten with the strips of blubber of the || boiled seal-head. If there is no dried hali- 20 but, dried salmon is eaten [ with it; and the dried salmon and dried halibut are eaten with strips | of blubber which is not eaten at the great seal-feast which is given when there are many seals. | This is

23 called "eating seal-heads," what I am | describing now. That is all about the seal. || 1 Whale. (A whale found dead on the beach). — When | the hunter finds a dead whale, he goes home to his | house; and when he comes to the beach in front of his house, he stands | up in the bow of his 5 small hunting-canoe and promises || a whale-feast to his people. Then his people learn that he has | found a dead whale. He gives to his daughter the name Place-of-cutting-Blubber, for he invites them on her behalf. Then the tribe | make ready. They sharpen their butcher-knives that day. | In the morning, when daylight comes, the

10 whole tribe launch their small canoes || for carrying whale-blubber. Their | wives steer the canoes when they start. He who | found the dead whale goes ahead of his tribe. When | they arrive at the place where the whale is lying, his father, if he has one, goes up to the | whale with the daughter of the one who found the whale; that is,

15 with Place-of-cutting-Blubber. || They stand behind the neck of the whale; and when the | guests arrive at the beach where the dead whale lies, | his father speaks, and says, "O tribe! come and cut the blubber of the | salmon of Place-of-cutting-Blubber, for it is very fat." Then he speaks again, | calling the head chief of the tribe.

20 He says, "You shall have for your dish || the dorsal fin, Chief Placeof-Property;" that is, if the Seaward-Dwellers | are invited. Then 21 he calls the common people. | His tribe goes ashore at once, and they stand at the right-hand side | of the whale. They stand according to their seats | at the feast; but Place-of-Property stands near the dorsal fin || of the whale. The whale lies on its belly, and (the head chief) 25 holds in each hand | a butcher-knife. He puts these on the | back of the whale's neck, and measures one fathom. [ Then he moves backward, cutting along the two sides of the whale | towards the tail, back of the dorsal fin. Then he stops. The (people) || cut 30 around the neck of the whale, beginning at the back of the | whale's head; and the one next in rank to Property-Place cuts off a piece of blubber half | a fathom wide, beginning at the cut made | by Property-Place, downward to the belly of the whale. | The one next in rank cuts a piece of the same width, || and all the men receive 35 pieces of the same width as they | cut off the blubber crosswise downward. As soon as all | the blubber is off, the women | cut a hole in the thin side of the whale, and cut off the inside fat. [ When it is all off, they put it aboard the canoes. || Next they cut off a piece of the 40 tail of the whale; | and when it is all off, they go home to their houses. | Then they unload the blubber and put it down above |

43 high-water mark. After it has all been taken up, the man takes | a short hoard for cutting blubber. He puts it down, takes the blub-

45 ber, || and puts it on the board to be cut. He measures it so that it is cut in pieces four | finger-widths wide. He continues this the whole j length of the blubber. After a piece is off, he | cuts it crosswise, so that it is half a finger-width thick. | After it lias all been cut up, he puts

50 the pieces into a kettle for boding. || He puts the kettle on the fire on the beach | to try out the od. He takes the tongs and stirs it, and | he continues stirring it. His wife takes a box and | places it by the side of the fire on which the oil is being tried out. She also takes a large shell of a horse-clam. When it bods up, she takes the large

55 clam-shell || and skims off the whale-oil and pours it into the box. | She only stops when aU the whale-oil is off the boiled blubber. | Then she takes a large basket, takes the boiled blubber | out of the kettle, and puts it into the basket. When | it is all in, she puts it down in

60 the corner of the house. || The people also take the od-boxes at each end and another man [ puts them down in the corner of the house. (The owner's) wife | takes cedar-bark, splits it into long strips, and | carries it to the basket containing the boiled blubber, next to which she sits down. | Then she takes out one of the pieces of boded blubber,

05 and she ties it in the middle with the cedar-hark. || She takes another one and ties it in the middle. | She continues doing so, and does not 66 stop until the | strips of split cedar-hark are all used up; and when it is done, it is in this way: Now, | the name of the boiled blubber is changed, and it h is called "tied in the middle." | After all this has been done, 2? she hangs up the pieces || over 70 the fire of the house, and £p evaporates them until they are dry. I After they have been hanging there for one month, she takes a small kettle and | puts into it one string of blubber tied in the middle, together with the cedar-bark. | She pours water on it; and when the water shows on | top, she puts it on the fire. After it has been boihng a long time, || she takes it off. She takes a | small 75 dish and puts it down near the kettle in which the pieces tied in the middle have been cooked. | She takes the tongs and takes hold of the boiled I pieces and puts them into the small dish. After | she lias taken them all out of the kettle, she tries to eat it at once, || while it 80 is still hot, for it is tender whde it is hot, | but it gets tough when it gets cold. After she has eaten enough, | she puts away what is left ; and when she wants to eat more, she | takes her kettle, pours water into it, and puts it on the | fire of the house. When it begins to boil, she takes it off || the fire. She takes the cold pieces of blubber tied 85 in the middle | and places them in the hot water; and when she thinks that they are | hot, she takes them out with her tongs and |

places them in small dishes, and they eat it | before it gets cold.

90 After she has eaten enough, || she puts it away, and she just heats it whenever she wants to eat of it. | This is called " eating boiled blubber tied in the middle." 1 Boiled Whale-Tail. — And this is eating boiled | whale-tail while it is fresh. When the man goes and takes | a piece of the tail, he cuts it in strips two | finger-widths thick, and he cuts it the same length, || 5 so that the pieces are square. The length of the square is | one span. As soon as many pieces have been cut, | the man takes his kettle and pours water into it. | When it is more than half full, he puts it on the fire of his house; and when | it is on, he takes a piece of blubber of the

10 whale-tail, || and he bites the end of it, holding at the same time the opposite end and stretching it. | Now he pulls it; and after he has stretched it, | the blubber of the whale's tail is two spans long. | It is now as thick as the little finger. | He does this to all the pieces;

15 and after he has done so, || he waits for the water to boil. When it boils up, | he takes the pieces one by one. He takes the stretched blubber | of the whale's tail and puts it into the boiling water. | He puts it into it quickly. When the pieces are all in the kettle, he takes

20 the | tongs and stirs the water quickly. After doing so || he takes the kettle off the fire and pours off the liquid. | When the water has 21 all been poured off, he takes a small dish and | places it by the side of the kettle in which the tail-blubber has been cooked. | He takes hold of the kettle on each side and pours the contents | into a small dish. The people eat it while it is still || hot; and when they have 25 eaten enough, they put away the rest. | As soon as the owner wants to eat more, he puts the kettle | over the fire of the house; and when the water boils, | he takes the kettle off the fire, and he takes the boiled | whale-tail and puts it in; and || when he thinks that it is 30 warm enough, he takes it out and eats it, | for it is tender while it is warm. Not many tribes are invited | to this food, for only the owner | eats the boiled whale-tad, | but they do not stretch the blubber of the dorsal fin when they bod it. || This is cut in the same 35 way as the tail-blubber of the whale is cut, | and after a short time it is put into boiling water. | When it is all in, the kettle is taken off the fire | and the liquid is poured out. Then the blubber ] of the dorsal fin of the whale shrivels up. When it is done, the (woman) puts it || into a small dish. She does not eat this at once, for, | 40 although the blubber of the dorsal fin gets cold, it never | gets tougli when it is cold : therefore she cooks much of it at the same time. | When she has eaten enough of the fin-blubber, | she puts it away;

45 and when she wants to eat some more, she just takes the || cold shrunk blubber of the dorsal fin and eats it, for | it never gets tough. That is all about this. [ 1 Boiled Devil-Fish. — When1 this is done, (the man) goes to catch devil-fish- at | low tide; and when he finds the hole of a devil-fish, he puts the end | (for feeling) of the devil-fish spear, into the entrance of the hole; and when | be feels the body of the devil-fish, he pulls out 5 the devil-fish harpoon, and lie pushes || the thick end of the harpoon into the hole. When he | feels the hard part, he pushes. | For a short whde he leaves the devil-fish harpoon alone until it stops moving, for [ the devil-fish catcher watches the spear as it is moving

10 about. I When it stops moving, he takes the spear and jerks it || out of the entrance of the devil-fish hole. Then the devil-fish | comes out on the end of the spear. | He pulls the spear out of the devil-fish, and strikes the devil-fish | on the rock; and when it turns white, he pulls out the entrails. These are called by the Indians "phosphorescence." I When he gets them off, he strikes it again on the rock to

15 kill it entirely, || and to make it tender when it is eaten. Then | the hunter goes home, and puts down the devil-fish in the house. | Then he takes his kettle, pours water into it | until it is more than half full, and puts it on the fire of his house. | When the water is boiling

' Continued from p. 152, line 36.

he takes up the devil-fish || and puts it into the kettle which is on the 20 fire. | When it is in the kettle, the man who is cooking the devil-fish takes the | tongs and stirs it; and after stirring it for some time, he | lets it boil again. Then he stops stirring it. He may keep it | for about an hour, according to the watch, || boiling this length of time. 25 Then the devil-fish is done. | He takes the kettle off the fire, and places it at the | door-side of the fire. He takes a dish and | puts it by the side of the kettle in which the devil-fish is cooked, | and he pours fresh water into the dish. Then he takes the || tongs, lifts the 30 devil-fish, and puts it into the | dish. He takes a knife and cuts around the upper end of the | arms close to the body, and he cuts off the | stomach close, to the upper end of the body. Then he puts down | his knife, takes off the arms, and pulls off the || loose skin that 35 hangs together at the end, and | he pulls off the loose skin along the side of the suckers; | and when the loose skin is off, he gives it to one of those who are to cat the devil-fish. | He goes on and does the same with the other arms. | After this has been done, he takes the stomach and pulls off the loose skin; || and after this has been done, he bites 40 off the joint over the head and | spits it out. He looks for the four shells which are on I each side of the stomach of the devil-fish.

4.3 When he finds them, | he pulls them out and throws them away. Then he breaks it into strips, | and gives a strip to each of his guests. ||

45 He who eats the body takes off the loose skin, | and pulls out the mouth-parts of the devd-fish and eats them, | and he eats the body. After | they have eaten enough, they go out. They only invite the | numaym to eat devil-fish. They do not cook devd-fish for many ||

50 tribes. That is all about this. |

Scorched Devil-Fish. — -When the devil-fish hunter | comes home, he takes his knife and | cuts off one of the arms. | He puts it by the

55 side of the fire, with its loose skin; and when || the outside is scorched, he turns it so that the | raw side is towards the fire; and when it is also scorched, he | takes it off and pulls off the loose skin. When it is all off, | he eats it. Some Indians call this "eating devil-fish |

60 roasted by the fire," although oidy the legs are roasted; || and they call it "eating devd-fish." Only the | females are roasted this way; for they are afraid, when they are boded, | that they will get an itchy eruption and have to scratch themselves | wherever the liquid touches the skin, when the female devil-fish is boded. | Therefore

65 they do not wash the female devd-fish, and || therefore also it is not boiled. After they have eaten the roasted | arms, they throw the G6 body and the stomach | out of the house. That is all about this. |

Devil-Fish with Oil (Chopped Devil-Fish with Oil) . — This j is another 1 way of cooking devil-fish. When the | devil-fish hunter comes home with the devil-fish, and when lie has many | devil-fish, perhaps as many as twenty or thirty, || he cooks them all at one time on his fire. 5 He | does it in the same way as I described the cooking of devil-fish before, and he | takes off the loose skin in the same manner. When all the loose skin is off, | the devil-fish hunter takes his knife and a large dish | and puts them down. He takes a small piece of wood and puts it || over the sides of the dish crosswise in the middle. 10 This is named | "the cutting-board for devil-fish." He takes the arms of the devil-fish and | puts them on the short board. He takes his chopping- | knife and chops the arms into pieces. Then | he takes another arm and cuts it up too. After || they have all been 15

chopped up, he takes a large kettle and | washes it out. When it is clean, he takes with his hand the chopped | arms and throws them into the kettle for cooking them. | When the kettle is almost full, he pours a little | water into it and puts it on the fire. After || boiling quite a while, it is taken off. | Then many dishes are 20

22 taken and put down by the side of the | kettle in which the chopped devil-fish has been cooked. The man takes a ladle and | dips out the chopped devil-fish, and puts it into the | dishes. It contains

25 little water. When the || chopped devil-fish is in the dishes, he takes oil and pours it over it; | and he only stops pouring oil over it when it is covered. | After doing so, he takes many spoons and | gives them to those who are to eat the chopped arms of the | devd-fish. After

30 this has been done, he places the || dishes in front of his guests, and they begin to eat the chopped devil-fish | with oil. When it is finished, they | go out at once, for this food makes them feel like vomiting. | Then they all hurry out to go back of the houses, where |

35 they vomit. After vomiting, they drink water. || That is all about this. I

Steamed Devil-Fish. — When | a woman sees a devil-fish in the water on a rock while she is gathering clams, she | spears it and puts it into her small clam-digging canoe. | When she has many clams, she

40 steams them. Then she l| puts the devil-fish with them when she is about to pour water on her steamed clams, j After the water has been poured on, the devil-fish is covered over | with the clams, and it is steamed with the clams that are I steamed to be made into dried clams. After it is done, it is uncovered. | Then the steamed devilfish is first taken out and || washed in fresh water; and then (the 45 woman) also does what | I described at first, when I described the eating of devd-fish; but it tastes differently | when it is steamed, for the taste of the steamed | clams affects the taste of the steamed devil-fish. |

You know about the devil-fish caught in deep water when the || tides are low at half-moon. This has been written | in the writing 50 about those who get devd-fish for bait for halibut; | for I have described it entirely, how they catch devil-fish with long | spears in deep water, and everything about it. Therefore | I say that you know it already, and also about the catching of devd-fish on the dry beach at || spring-tide. That is all about this. | 55

Boiled Sea-Slugs (Catching sea-slugs). — When | a man wants to 1 take sea-slugs, he first goes for a thin shaft which is used by the salmon-fishers. | He takes two thin cedar-sticks, each one short span | long and a little thinner than the || little finger, flat on one side, [ 5 and he takes cedar-bark and splits . it in narrow strips. | The two cedar-sticks are to be hooks at the end of the seaslug spear. | He puts these near the end of the harpoon-

shaft, and ties them on v)dth spht | long xl strips of cedar-bark. When it is finished, it is this way: || 5^

10 Then he waits for it to bo calm at low tide. When | it is calm, he launches Ids sea-slug-gathering canoe. | He takes his sea-sluggathering paddle, and Ids knife lor cutting off the heads j of sea- slugs, and also the stick for catching sea-slugs. Then lie paddles | to a place where he knows there are many sea-slugs. He looks down

15 into the water; and || when he sees a place where there are many of them together, he takes his stick for catching sea-slugs and | pushes it down into the water. He pushes the hook-end under the sea-slugs | and pulls them off the bottom, (putting the hooks under) the middle of the sea-slug. | Then it comes up lying crosswise over the two hooks at the end of the pole. He pulls up | the pole, and

20 puts it down crosswise over las canoe. || He takes the sea-slug, takes his knife, | and cuts off the neck. Then he squeezes out the insides, | and lie throws it down hard into his canoe, saying | as lie is throwing it down, — |

" Now you will bo as stiff as the wedge of your grandfather." ||

25 He does this to each of them, and says so as he throws the seaslugs into Ids | canoe. When he has caught many of them, he goes home. |

As soon as he arrives on the beach of his house, his wife takes | a basket and goes to meet him and to carry up what he has. She puts |

30 her basket into the small canoe: and the woman takes II one of the sea-slugs, squeezes down the whole length of its body, holding it by 31 the | hind part, the head downward; and when what is left of the insides has come out, | she throws it into the basket. She does this to all | of them. When they are all in, she carries | her basket of sea-slugs up the beach and takes it || into the house. She puts it 35 down in the corner of the house. | Then she takes a large low steaming-box and pours some | fresh water into it. When it is half full. she takes the basket of sea-slugs [ and pours them into the water in the box. She leaves them there ] for two nights with the water over them. Then they are ready || to be boiled. The man takes the 40 kettle for boiling sea-slugs | and pom's water into it until it is half full. | He puts it over the fire; and when the kettle for boding seaslugs | is on the fire with the sea-slugs in it, he goes into the woods and breaks off hemlock-branches. | He carries these back and puts them down where the sea-slugs are boding || in the kettle. Alter he 45 lias done so, he takes the low steaming-box in which the sea-slugs are, | and places it by the side of the lire, | and also the tongs. When the wTater begins to bod, his wife | takes one of the sea-slugs and squeezes the body so that | the liquid comes out from the inside. Then she puts it into the boiling water. || Her husband stirs it with 50 the tongs. The woman | squeezes out the whole number of seaslugs; and when they are all | in the kettle, the man continues to

53 stir them. When | the water begins to boil, the man picks up handfuls of dirt from the floor of the | house and throws it into the

55 boiling water. Then || it stops boiling over, for the | water of the sea-slugs almost always boils over, and only | dirt from the floor of the house stops the boiling-over. The man | tries to take hold of one of them with the tongs; and when he succeeds in taking one, | it is done. The skin gets rough when it is done. The (sea-slugs) are

60 slippery, when || they are raw, and he can not get hold of them with his tongs. | When they are done, he takes off the fire the kettle for cooking sea-slugs. | He takes a large dish and puts it by the side of the | kettle. He pours some water into it; and when it is | more

65 than half full of water, he takes the tongs, lifts up the || sea-slugs, and puts them into the dish for washing the boiled | slugs. As soon as they are all in, the man sits down by its side | and washes them, they being stiff. Afterhehas | washed one of them, he gives it to one of his guests | to eat first a sea-slug; and the one to whom the first sea-slug is given

70 eats it at once. || The man washes the sea-slugs quickly, | and gives one to a second man; and he continues doing this with his other | guests; and when the first one finishes eating a sea-slug, | he is given another one. After they have eaten enough, they take some | to

75 their wives, for sea-slugs are only eaten in winter, || when they are good. They are bad in summer. That is all about | one way of 76 cooking of sea-slugs. |

Roasted Sea-Slugs (Sea-slugs roasted by the side of the fire of the | 1 house). — When water has been on the sea-slugs for two days, | the woman takes a dish and carries it to put it down by the side of | the low steaming-box. She takes the sea-slugs out of the water and || puts 5 them into the dish. As soon as she has enough, she carries a dish of sea-slugs | and puts it down by the side of the fire of her house. She puts | it alongside the fire, under the side-logs of the fire, and she | continually turns (the sea-slugs) over. As soon as they are really | stiff, they are done; and as soon as they are done, she takes them off the fire with the || fire-tongs. She takes another dish and pours 10 some | water into it, and she puts the roasted sea-slugs into it. | Then she takes a cedar-stick and scrapes off the ashes that | stick to the roasted sea-slugs. When they are all in the dish, she squeezes them, | so that the water comes out, and she puts them into another -|| dish. Then she takes another sea-slug, scrapes off [ the ashes that 15 stick to the outside of the roasted sea-slugs, and she | squeezes it so that the water comes out, and puts it into the | dish. She does this to all the others; and when | they are all done, she gives them to

20 those who are to eat the roasted sea-slugs. || At once they eat them ; and after they have eaten enough, they carry home | for their wives what is left over. That is all about this. |

Baked Sea-Slugs (Sea-slugs baked in hot ashes in the fire of the | house). — The woman also takes the sea-slugs out of the low steaming -

25 box. | She digs a hole in the hot ashes and puts the || sea-slugs into the hole dug in the ashes. Then she covers them with ashes. | It may be half an hour according to the watch | before she digs them out. She takes them up with the fire-tongs and | places them on the floor, by the side of the fire; and she does the same as what I | said before when I spoke about the sea-slugs roasted by the side of the

30 fire. That is || all. | 1 Roasted Chiton. — Tins is called by the l !ai. !asiqwala h Uriel, but by the Kwag-ul it is called | me'srriEts.'a. \

When a woman gets ready to | go to get chitons, she takes her 5 hasket to put the chitons into, and also flat-pointed || hemlockbranches three spans in | length. They are flat-pointed. She car- ries with her what is called [ "instrument for peeling chitons off the rock." As soon as she comes to a place where there are many, | she pokes the stick under them, lifts them off, and throws them into her basket; and when | she has many, she carries the basket with the

10 chitons on her back, and goes home || carrying the basket up the beach. She puts it down in the | corner of her house. Then she 11 takes a large dish and pours some [ fresh water into it, until it is half full, and she pours the chitons into it. | After they have been four days in the water, she takes her | fish-knife and goes and sits down by the side of the dish of chitons. She || takes out one of the chitons 15 and scrapes it with her fish-knife so that | all the green stuff comes off that covers it. When the green stuff is all off, | (the chitons) are white. When they are done, | she puts them into another dish which is half full of | fresh water; and she does this with the others. || As soon as 20 they are all done, she leaves them in the water in the dish for one night. | In the morning, as soon as day comes, the woman takes drift wood, | which she gathers on the beach in front of her house, and she puts down one crosspiece | at the upper end; and she puts down two | side-pieces, one on each side. She puts kindling-wood in the space between the || side-pieces, and she places medium-sized 25 driftwood crosswise | on top of it. Then she takes her basket and goes to pick stones on the | beach. When her stone-carrying basket is full with stones, | she carries it on her back, and puts it down outside of the place where she is going to steam the chitons. She | puts them on top of the crosspieces of driftwood; and when they are all on, || she lights the fire under (the whole). When the fire blazes up, 30 she goes to the beach | and gathers kelp that grows on the rocks; |

32 and when her basket is full, she carries it on her back, and puts it down | by the side of the place where she is going to steam the chitons. Then she goes into the woods to get | skunk- cabbage and

35 old fern. She puts these into a || basket, and carries the basket with fern on her back; and she carries the skunk-cabbage under her arm. | Then she goes home, and puts down the skunk-cabbage | by the side of the place where she is going to steam the chitons; and she also puts down the | basket with old ferns. Her husband cuts sticks | one

40 span long, of red pine, with sharp points || and round, for spits for the chitons. As soon as these are finished, | she takes one of the chitons and pushes the spit of | red-pine wood through the middle of it. She does this with every one of them, | one spit for each chiton, in this manner: When they are all on the spits, | they are ready, and she puts them into a basket. Then the man

45 takes the || /CP ^\ tongs and takes away the driftwood that is not burned; | and %t(¥ as soon as all the fire has been taken away, he takes the kelp and lays it | on the red-hot stones, and he puts old fern | over the kelp; and he takes the skunkcabbage and | spreads it over the old fern. As soon as this is

50 finished, he takes the || chitons on their spits and pours them on the skunk-cabbage. When this is | done, he takes a cedar-stick and pokes holes through the skunk-cabbage for | the water to pass through and the steam to come out. When this is done, | he pours water on, 53 and he takes some skunk-cabbage | leaves and spreads them over the top; and when it is all covered, he || takes mats and covers (the 55 whole). When this is done, he | leaves it. After about four hours | (the chitons) are done. Then he takes off the cover-mats and | also takes off the skunk-cabbage cover. When the | cover is all off, he calls the people who are walking about to come and eat the chitons. || When they sit down, he gives each | one a spit with a chiton on it, 60 and immediately they | begin to eat chitons. Nobody gets two | spits of steamed chitons, for they taste very salt; | and when they eat many chitons, these cause diarrhoea. || After they have finished, 65 they all go home. They do not invite | many tribes for this, and it is not eaten by the Kwakiutl. | Only the Seaward-Dwellers eat chitons, and also the Koskimo | and Gwats!enoxu and G'ap!enoxu and the L!asq!enoxu. | Only those eat it. That is all about this. ||

Boiled Chiton. — (Wien chitons have been gathered [see p. 293], 1 they are eaten in the following manner:) At once (the woman) sends her husband to go and | invite his numaym. Immediately the woman takes | her kettle and pours water into it; and when it is half full, | she puts it on the fire. When it begins to boil, || the woman takes the 5 basket of chitons by the handle and pours | them into the kettle.

7 Then she takes her fire-tongs and | pokes the chitons in the water; and as soon as the skin comes off, | they are done. Then she takes the kettle off of the fire. | She takes a large dish and dips up with

10 a spoon || the chitons in the water, and she puts them into the dish. She does not | put the liquid into the dish also. As soon as the dish is full, | the woman pours fresh water on the chitons in the dish, | and she puts it down before the guests of her husband. | They eat at

15 once with their hands. || They peel off the shells on the back, and they throw them into the | dish, with the guts. As soon as they finish eating the chitons, they | wash their hands in the water of their food; and | after they have eaten, those who have eaten chitons go out. |

Large Chiton (Getting large chiton). — When a man wants to eat ||

20 chitons, he launches his | small canoe at low water, and he goes to a place where he knows there are many chitons. | When he arrives there, he puts the stern of his chiton-catching | canoe ashore and gets off. He picks up chitons which | he on the stony beach, and

25 he throws them into his small chiton-catching canoe. || When he has many, he launches | his chiton-catching canoe, goes aboard, and he | paddles back. He picks up driftwood where there is much of it, and | he puts it into his chiton-catching canoe. As soon as it is |

full, he goes aboard and paddles home to his house. || When he arrives 30 at his beach, he throws the | driftwood ashore. He goes up and goes to get a basket from his | house, and he comes carrying it down to the place where his chiton-catching | canoe is. He also carries his knife, and he | puts the basket into the small canoe. || Then he takes 35 one of the chitons, puts it down on its back, | and cuts along its belly. Then he pulls out the entrails, | and he throws them into the water; and he scrapes it, so that the red color | on the body of the chiton comes off. When it is all off, he | washes it in salt water. After he has done so, he throws it || into the chiton-basket. He does 40 this with all the others. | As soon as they are all ready, he carries the basket of chitons; | and when he is in his house, he puts it down in the | corner of the house; and he goes down to the beach to bring up | the driftwood, and he carries it into the house, and he puts it down || by the side of the fire, and he puts it on the fire. | If he wishes 45 to eat the chiton raw, he takes his knife | and cuts the belly of the chiton, which looks like the tongue | of a quadruped. He puts them into a small dish with | water in it. He also cuts close along the shell on its back || the whole length of the body of the chiton; and | when 50 it is off, he cuts it into pieces half a | finger-width thick. Then he puts these pieces into a small dish with water in it ; | and when he has enough, he takes the tongs and | holds the pieces of chiton and throws

55 them into the || fire, and then he picks them out again with the tongs and puts | them back into the dish, and he washes them, and then he eats them. | He only stops when he has eaten enough. Then he rinses his mouth | with water; and after he has rinsed his mouth, so that the salt taste | is removed, he drinks a little water. That is

60 all about || one way of cooking them. | 1 Baked Large Chiton. — There is another way of cooking | chitons. They only cut out the entrails; and as soon as all | the entrails are out, the woman takes her tongs and digs a hole | in the hot ashes. 5 Then she takes the chiton whose guts have been removed and || puts it into the hole that she has dug, and she covers it over with hot ashes. | As soon as she has done so, she takes a dish and pours water into it I until it is half full. When she has done so, she takes a spoon | and puts it down by the side of the fire, and also the dish, | and she takes the tongs and uncovers the chiton which has been buried in the

10 ashes. || With her tongs she lifts the buried chiton and | puts it into the dish, and she takes the spoon and with it she scrapes off | the ashes that stick on it from the outside. | As soon as they are all off, she pulls off the shell from the back, for it is very soft, because | it is

15 thoroughly cooked. As soon as all the dirt is off, she || changes the water, for it is dirty. Then she pours it out outside | of the house, 16 and she pours some fresh water on it, and she | washes it again; and when all that looks like red paint comes off, it is done. | Then they begin to eat the baked chiton; | and when they have finished, (the woman) draws some water and rinses her mouth to |[ remove the 20 salt taste; and when it is all gone, she drinks | water. That is all about this. |

Boiled Large Chiton. — First | the woman takes a kettle, and she pours some water into it until it is | more than half full, and she puts it on the fire; and she takes || a chiton, and takes the knife for cutting 25 out the insides, and cuts | along one side of its belly. Then she pulls out the entrails and throws them down by the side | of the fire. As soon as they are all out, she scrapes off with the | back of her knife what looks like red paint on its body; | and when it is all off, she washes it in a dish || with water in it; and by the time it is all washed, 30 the kettle on the fire begins to boil. | Then she puts the chitons into it; and when | they are all in, she calls her friends to come and eat the | boiled chitons. When they have all come in, the | woman takes her spoons and dishes and || puts them down where she is sitting, and 35 she takes her tongs and stirs | the chitons that she is cooking while they are still on the fire. | After they have been boding for maybe

38 more than an hour according to the watch, | she takes them from the fire. | Then they are boiled to pieces and they are cooked thoroughly.

40 Then she takes her || long-handled ladle, and with it she takes out the boiled chitons and | pours them into the dishes. As soon as they are all in the dishes, j she puts them down in front of her guests. She takes the spoons and distributes | them; and when she has given one to each, | they begin to eat the boiled chiton and the liquid. ||

45 They try to eat with spoons all the boiled chiton. After | they have eaten it all, they drink very little water. Now, that is all about this. |

Chitons are the food eaten by the poor people who can not | get the real good food. It is not often eaten by chiefs | and young men

50 and young women. The only time it is eaten || by chiefs and young men and young women is when they are | caught in bad weather and by strong winds, and when they have to stay out for a long time, or when their canoes | capsize. Then they get chitons and large chitons | and winkles, and also small mussels and large mussels. This and | various kinds of shell-fish are the food of those who are caught, and

55 often this || saves their lives. That is 'all about this. | 1 Raw and Roasted Sea-Eggs. — As 1 soon as (the spear) is finished, (the man) waits | until it gets calm at low tide; and when it is calm, at low tide in the | morning, he launches his sea-egg spearing-canoe, | and he

1 Continued from p. 154, line 18.

also takes his paddle and bailer || and spear. He paddles, and goes 5 to a place where there are many sea-eggs. | Then he takes his spear and puts it into the | sea; and he spears the sea-eggs, and puts them into his | sea-egg spearing-canoe. When he has many of them, | he goes home. ||

As soon as he arrives on the beach of his house, he calls his | tribe 10 to come and break the sea-eggs and to eat them. | Immediately all the men and women and | children go down to the beach where the sea -egg spearing-canoe is, | and all the men go into the sea || and 15 stand by the side of the canoe containing the sea-eggs. | They take out the sea-eggs, and they go and give two each | to their wives, and they also take two each for themselves; and | all the others do the same. As soon as | they have them, they sit down by the side of the water. Each takes a || stone, and with it breaks one side of the sea- 20 egg at the side where the | mouth is, and they pull out the edible insides and | wash them in sea-water; and after washing them, they | squeeze out the sea-water and they eat them, — lEx£wid as the Seaward people call the eating | of sea-eggs, while the Kwag'ul call the eating of sea-eggs || m.Emsexug ' Exa mEseqwe; and they all do the 25 same as | they eat the sea-eggs; namely, the good sea-eggs, which are the female | sea-eggs. The male sea-eggs are bad. That is what the

28 Indians call | "milky sea-eggs." The milky sea-eggs are not eaten raw by the Indians. | They keep them; that is one of the number of

30 those who are || eating sea-eggs. The woman gathers the | milky sea-eggs that have been thrown away by the eaters. After the people have eaten the | good sea-eggs, she takes the milky sea-eggs and washes out the | large empty sea-egg shells. Then she takes the milky sea-eggs and | pulls out the edible insides. She washes them

35 in salt water; || and after she has done so, she squeezes them so that the water comes out, | and she puts them back into the empty seaegg shells. She continues doing this | with the others; and as soon as they are all done, there may be five j empty sea-egg shells filled with milky sea-eggs. She | carries them up the beach into the

40 house. || Then she puts them down by the side of the fire. Then she roasts them. Some | Indians call this ts.'esa. They are almost | under the side-logs of the fire. Sometimes it takes almost | half a day to cook them. They are not taken off the fire | until they are burnt black. Then they are done. The one who is roasting them ||

45 invites her numaym to come and eat the | roasted sea-eggs; and as soon as the guests come and sit down, | the one who invited his numaym takes the roasted sea-eggs and \ puts them down in front of the guests. There are two men to each | sea-egg shell containing roasted sea-eggs.

They eat with then- hands as || they begin to eat it. The people of 50 ancient times called this | "eating roasted sea-eggs." As soon as they finish, | they go out of the house. That is all about this. |

Boiled Sea-Eggs. — When the one who goes to get sea-eggs | comes 1 home, he immediately takes the | anchor-line of his sea-egg-catching canoe and ties it to a | stone on the beach. He goes up and takes a large || dish out of the house, and carries it down to where the sea- 5 egg | catching-canoe is. He puts it down on top of the sea-eggs, and | he takes an elongated stone to break the shells of the sea-eggs. | He sits in the bow of his canoe, and his wife sits in the stern. | His wife often carries a yew-wood wedge to break the sea-eggs. |[ Then 10 they begin to break the mouth-side of the sea-eggs, and they | pull out the edible insides and wash them on one side of the | canoe. After washing them, they throw them into the | large dish, and they do this with the whole number; | and when it has been clone with all of them, they carry the clean sea-eggs and go to put them down || in 15 the house. (The man) takes a medium-sized kettle and pours | fresh water into it; and when it is half full, he puts it over the | fire; and when it begins to bod, he takes the dish with clean | sea-eggs and drains off the liquid. When the liquid is all | drained off, lie pours the clean sea-eggs into the || boiling water in the kettle on the 20

21 fire of his house. | They keep boiling over the fire a long time, but in the evening | they are done. Then he invites his numaym to come and eat | boiled sea-eggs. As soon as they have all come in, the man takes | a long-handled ladle and puts it down by the side of the ||

25 kettle. He also takes many dishes and puts them down by the side | of the kettle in which the sea-eggs are boiling; and he takes a | large dish and puts it down on one side of the | kettle. They take hold of it on each side, and drain off the liquid from the | sea-eggs into the

30 large dish; and when the liquid of the sea-eggs is in the dish, || they pour it out outside of the house. (The man) takes a | long-handled ladle and dips it into the boded sea-eggs, and | dips them out and puts them into the dish. When it is half full, he stops. | He takes a cedar-stick and splits it in pieces; and these are thin. | They are each

35 one span in length, || and they are all of the same length. He gives | one to each of his guests. Then he lifts the dish and | puts one down in front of each four men. | When the dishes have been placed in front of the guests, | they take their sticks and with them begin to

40 put || the boiled sea-eggs into their mouths. After they finish, | they go out. They never drink water, | because they are afraid to drink water after eating | the sea-eggs; for, if they drink soon after eating boiled sea-eggs, they get heart-burn. | Therefore they are afraid to drink water after eating this kind of food. || That is all about 45 this. |

Raw Sea-Eggs (Raw sea-eggs soaked in cold water). — | When 1 good sea-eggs are being broken, they take a | new dish and put it down on the beach close to the salt water. | They pull out the edible insides of the sea-egg and || wash them in salt water. Then (the man) 5 throws them into the new dish, | and they all do the same with the others. As soon as they are all | washed, they are carried up the beach; and they carry them up the river, and | pour some water into the (dish). With his right hand (the man) stirs them so as to wash them, | and he pours off the dirty water; and he puts the dish || into 10 the water, and puts stones on each end to keep it down. Then he leaves | it there. For one night it remains in the river; but at noon on the | following day (the man) walks up the river and takes out the dish with the clean | sea-eggs, and drains off the liquid; and he goes back carrying it down, | and takes it into his house. Then he calls his || numaymto come to his house; and when they have all come 15 in, he takes | many dishes, and puts them down by the side of the dish with | clean sea-eggs; and he takes a large ladle and | dips up the clean sea-eggs and puts them into the dishes. | The depth of the clean sea-eggs is only one layer in the dish. || As soon as there are some 20

21 in all the dishes, he takes many | spoons and distributes them among his guests. | They take up the spoons, and the host | takes up the dishes, and places one in front of each four | guests. As soon as they

25 have all been put down, they eat with spoons ||the clean sea-eggs; and when they finish, they go out. | That is all about this. |

I have forgotten this. It is just the same as boiled sea-eggs | when they are put into cold water for one night so that they may | get

30 stiff. Some Indians call it " to get hard." || They are also afraid to drink water after eating sea-eggs | that have been in the river; for they really get heart-burn when they eat | this kind of food, and they drink water after it. Therefore they are afraid of | water. That is all about this. | 1 Flat Sea-Eggs. — The means of obtaining | flat sea-eggs is also the same as that for obtaining large sea-eggs; but they do not | often spear flat sea-eggs, because it breaks them. Therefore | they use the 5 scraping-net.1 . . . As soon as it gets calm at low tide, || (the man) immediately goes and launches his small sea-egg scraping- | canoe. He carries into the canoe the sea-egg-scraping paddle | and the bailer and his scraping-net. Then he goes aboard his | canoe, and he paddles to where he knows that there are | many flat sea-eggs. The

10 flat sea-eggs are where there is sandy and level bottom and no || eeli Continued on p. 163, line 1, to p. 166, line 75.

grass. That is good for scraping | sea-eggs. When he arrives there, 11 he | takes up his scraping-net and puts it into the water. He | pushes it down to the bottom with the mouth of the | scraping-net towards the bow of his canoe, and the canoe goes stern first, as || the 15 man turns his face towards the stern of his canoe; | and he pushes down the scraping-net forcibly, and pulls it so that | the sea-eggs jump into the scraping-net. As soon as it is full, he | hauls it up and empties it out towards the bow of the canoe. He continues doing | so, and only stops when his canoe is almost full || of sea-eggs. Then 20 he goes home to his house. | As soon as he arrives at the beach of his house, he calls his tribe | to come and cut the flat sea-eggs. Immediately all the men, | their wives, and the children go to the beach where | the canoe with sea-eggs is, and they take along || horse-clam 25 shells. If there are no horse-clam shells, then they | take small clam-shells. If there are none of these, they | take large mussel-shells to break the sea-eggs. They | walk out to where the canoe with the sea-eggs is, and they take the sea-eggs in the folds of their | blankets and carry them ashore. They put them down on the beach || near the 30 edge of the water, and all the others | do the same. Then they sit iown on the beach, and each takes | one sea-egg and cuts all round it with the clam-shell. | They cut along the edge, for the sea-eggs are

35 flat. | After they have cut around it, they take off || one half, and throw away the side of the sea-egg with the mouth, | for the edible part is on its back; and as soon as the one half comes off, | they throw it away. The other one they turn upside down in the salt water, | so that the entrails come out, and they eat the edible part; | and they

40 do the same to all the others. When || one of them gets a milky seaegg, he gives it to one who | gathers them. After they have eaten, they go up the beach and | go into their houses. There they take water and | rinse their mouths; and after doing so, they drink a little

45 water. | That is all about this. But the woman does the same || with the milky flat sea-eggs as she did with the | milky large sea-eggs when she roasted them by the side of the fire. | That is all about this. | Picking Flat Sea-Eggs off the Rock at low Water. — When | there

50 is spring-tide at full moon, (the man) launches his || sea-egg-picking canoe, takes two | large baskets and las paddle, and he | paddles to a place where the swell made by the southeast wind in winter does not reach. | That is the time for getting flat sea-eggs. That is the | place

55 to gather them. When he reaches there, he takes his basket and || gets out of his sea-egg-picking canoe; and when he finds | many (sea-eggs),

Picking Flat Sea-Eggs off the Rock at Low Water. — Wa, he£maaxs he picks out the large ones and j puts them into his basket; and when 57 the basket is full, | he takes it up and goes and pours (the contents) into his canoe. | He continues doing this, and he only stops when he has enough. || Then he goes aboard his little canoe and goes home, 60 When | he arrives at the beach of his house, he puts the anchor | of his sea-egg canoe into the water. After doing so, he goes up the beach | and goes into his house; and his wife takes her back- | mat and goes down to the beach, and she carries the basket with || sea- 05 eggs up the beach into her | house and puts it down by the side of the fire. I After doing so, she sends out some of her children to call | all the men to go and carry up the sea-eggs. | Then they all take baskets and go down to the || beach, and they go alongside the sea-egg canoe 70 and I put the sea-eggs into their baskets; and as soon as they have enough in their | baskets, they go up the beach and go into their houses, carrying | the sea-eggs in the baskets on their backs. Then they take their dishes | and pour fresh water into them, and take their knives || to cut the sea-eggs. They take the sea-eggs out of the | 75 basket, which they place by the side of the dish; and they chop them with the knife. | As soon as they have cut a sea-egg all around, they throw one half | towards the fire, and put the other half with the edible part bottom up into | the water in the dish and wash it, so that 80 the entrails come out. || As soon as they are all out, then they cat the edible part, | and all the people do the same. After they have finished, | they rinse their mouths; and when they have done so, their | wivesgather up the empty shells and put them into a basket. As soon as | they are all in, the woman takes a large firebrand and puts it on 85 top of the || empty shells. Then she picks up (the basket) and empties it outside of the | house.1 ... As soon as it is day, (the people) eat the flat and the | large sea-eggs. . . . This is all about the flatseaeggs- I

1 Blue Sea-Eggs. — I have forgotten the blue sea-eggs. They are | the same as flat sea-eggs, for they are eaten in the same way | as the ilat sea-eggs when they are broken. Only that is different, | when they go to get them, that the only time to get them is when it is

5 really low || water at spring-tide, when the moon is new or when it is full. | When the tide is nearly at its lowest, the woman takes her | basket for carrying them, and she carries it on her back, going down the rocky beach to the | point of land; for that is the only place where there are many blue sea-eggs, where the largest waves are, | what some people call breakers, for that is where the blue sea-eggs stay, 10 where there are || many cracks in the flat rocks, and that is where | the women go to look for blue sea-eggs, carrying their clam-digging i H this is not done, the ^host will come and eat the sea eggs. See p. 614, line 17.

sticks. When | she finds them, she immediately pushes them off with 12 her digging-stick, and she | throws them into her carrying-basket. As soon as it is full, | she carries the basket of sea-eggs on her back. She carries it up the rocky beach, and || carries it into her house, and 15 puts it down in the corner of her house. | They are not eaten at once, for they do not eat them until | after they have been four days in the house. . . . When | they eat blue sea-eggs, they do the same as they do when they eat the | flat sea-eggs. That is all about this. ||

Barnacles (Getting barnacles). — When the woman is getting | 1 ready to go and get barnacles, she takes | many old mats and also many baskets and one large bucket, | and she goes and puts them aboard her barnacle-catching || canoe. As soon as the tide begins 5 to fall, she | carries her paddle in one hand, and she goes down to where the | barnacle-catching canoe is. She launches it and | goes ahoard. Then she paddles and goes to a place where she knows there are many | barnacles on stones. As soon as she arrives there, she [| goes ashore. Then she puts the old barnacle-catching canoe stern 10 first ashore; | for they never use a new canoe to go getting barnacles, because | often the canoe is cracked when they use it. | Therefore they use old canoes for getting barnacles. As soon as |

15 she puts the stern ashore, she goes ashore and picks up || some driftwood and puts it aboard her old canoe; and | when she has enough, she pushes the canoe, off the beach and goes aboard. | She goes seaward, and looks downward into the water; and | when she sees many barnacles on stones, she takes her anchor | and puts it overboard

20 where she thinks it will run dry at half || tide. She cuts shavings of dry cedar-wood; and | when her old barnacle-catching canoe is left dry on the beach, she takes a large | bucket and fills it with salt water. When it is full, | she just lifts it; and when it stands upright, she lets it go. | When her canoe is left dry on the. beach, she unloads

25 the small pieces of driftwood, and || lavs down the cross-ends for a fire on the beach, and she takes two other pieces and lays them | down as side-pieces. Between them she puts j the shavings for kindling. Then she places cross-pieces | of medium size on top of the sidepieces. | Then she picks up stones close alongside, and puts them on

30 top; !| and when she thinks she lias enough, she lights the fire underneath; and when | the fire is burnt up, she takes her basket and picks up the barnacle-stones and puts them | into the basket; but she only puts into the basket those that have many | barnacles on them. When she thinks that the basket is heavy, she carries it | and pours out

35 (the contents) close to the fire for heating stones; ]| and she continues picking up the barnacle-stones. She only stops when she has | gathered many; and as soon as she iinishes, she takes two pieces of driftwood, | each one fathom in length and generally | one short span | thick, and puts them down close to the || fire for heating -ft) stones; and she takes two other pieces of the same thickness, | but only half a fathom long. When she | has finished this, the fire for heating stones is burnt out. | Then she takes a long thin piece of driftwood, and uses it to take out the firebrands | from the red-hot stones; and as soon as all the firebrands have been taken out, || she 45 takes one of the one-fathom pieces of round driftwood and | places it by the side of the red-hot stones; and she does the same with the | piece half a fathom in length. She places it across the end, and also | with the other one of the same length at the other end; and she takes | the one-fathom piece and puts it down || on the ends of the 50 two short ones; and after she has done so, | she takes a long thin piece of driftwood and levels down the top of the red-hot [ stones, so that they are level, and so that they fill the corners of the | driftwood enclosure all around the place for steaming the barnacle-stones. As soon | as she finishes, she puts the barnacle-stones on

°o° ° o'

bo°°°°

the red-hot || stones; and she heaps up the barnaclestones on top, so that they are quite | thick. Then she takes the old mats and spreads them alongside of the place; | and when they are all ready, she takes the large

5S bucket filled j with salt water and pours it over it, and she | quickly takes up the old mats and spreads them over what is being g0 steamed. || When it is covered over on top and on the sides, |. she takes a rest. It may be half an hour according to the watch | when they are done. Then she takes off the mat covering; and | when it is all off, she waits for them to get dry and also to | cool off. Then she

65 takes her large baskets and washes them || in salt water, until the sand comes off. When it is | all off, she carries them up and puts them down by the side of the place where the | barnacle-stones have been steamed. She sits between the two large baskets. | She takes the barnacle-stones and she pulls off the barnacles, and she | throws

70 away the stones when the barnacles are all off; and she || puts the barnacles into the baskets carefully, so as not to break them | when she puts them in. She continues doing this with the whole number; | but, even if she takes the barnacles quickly off the stone, | generally the tide rises to the place where she is steaming the barnacle-stones, for steaming in this way is slow. | When they are all off, she carries

75 the basket of barnacles || and puts them on board the old barnaclecanoe. | As soon as they are all in, she puts aboard her old mats and the large | bucket; and when they are all aboard, she goes home to her house. | When she arrives at the beach of her house, she | gets out of the old canoe, which she lands stern first. Then she takes the end || of the anchor-line of the old canoe, goes up the beach, and ties | 80 the end to a stone on the beach. She goes into her house, | and immediately she eats; and her husband clears up the house | and spreads mats around the floor. When he has done so, he invites his | tribe to come and eat the barnacles. When they come in, || the host takes 85 long narrow mats to eat from, | and he spreads them down in front of the barnacle-eaters; | and he takes cedar-sticks, which he splits into thin pieces, | and he breaks them into pieces four finger-widths in length. | He distributes these, one stick || to each one of the 90 barnacle-eaters, to pull out the | edible part of the barnacles. As soon as each has one, he goes down to the | place where the old canoe of his wife is, and he carries on his back the basket with barnacles. | He carries them into the house and puts them down by the side of the | door of the house. Then he goes down again, and carries on his back the || other large basket of barnacles; and he goes 95 and carries them into his house; | and he walks right back to the rear of the house, and pours them on the | mats from which the barnacles are to be eaten. Then he pours them out all along in front of those who | are to eat the barnacles; and he takes the other basket of barnacles | and goes and pours them out. Then the barnacleeaters || take up the barnacles with the left hand, and with the | 100 right hand they hold the cedar-stick and push at the "eye" | of the

2 barnacles, so that the edible part comes out; and after they have pushed out | the edible part, they pinch the shell teeth of the barnacles, and bite off the | lower end and eat it; and they all do the same || 5 while they are eating the barnacles. They eat them very quickly; | and after they have eaten them, the host who is giving the barnaclefeast draws some water and | gives it to the feasters. They rinse their mouths so as to | remove the salt taste from the inside of the mouth; and when the salt taste is out of the mouth, | they drink a

10 little water. Then || they go out of the house; and the host gathers | the empty shells, puts them into a mat, and throws them | out of his house. That is all about this. |

Another Way of preparing Barnacles. — Burning barnacles on | level sandstone. When the j woman gets ready to go and start a fire over the barnacles, she | first takes her large basket; and she takes a 5 short, broad board and || splits it in pieces the thickness of a finger. | She ties them up with cedar-bark, and she also takes her yew-wood | clam-digging stick and matches, and she carries her | large basket. She carries the split cedar-sticks on her shoulder, | and in one hand she carries the yew-wood clam-digging stick, and she walks down the

10 rocky || beach in front of her house at Fort Rupert. Then she looks for I a sheet of barnacles; and as soon as she finds a large patch of barnacles | (that is what the old Indians call a sheet of barnacles), | 12 then she puts her cedar-sticks down on the rock, and also her clamdigging stick, | and she carries her basket on her back as she is going up the beach where she goes to get || eel-grass at high-water mark. 15 She puts it into her basket. | When it is full, she goes down again to the rocky beach where she left | her split cedar-sticks, and she puts down the | basket of eel-grass. She takes out the eel-grass, and | scatters it over the barnacles. She does not put it on thick when she scatters the || eel-grass. After she has done so, she splits up | into 20 small pieces one of the cedar-sticks to start her fire. | After she has done so, she takes her matches and lights them. | With them she burns the end of the cedar-stick for starting the lire. She puts it | on the middle of the scattered eel-grass, places the || split cedar-sticks on 25 it, and scatters them all over. As soon as it is burnt up, | she sits down on the rocks and waits for the | split cedar-sticks to burn up. When they are burnt, | the woman takes her clam-digging stick, sweeps away the eel-grass and | the ashes of the burnt wood, and, when they have all been remoA ed, she pries off the barnacles with her digging-stick. || The cooked barnacles come oil' in large cakes, as they 30 are in | cakes. Then the woman breaks them into smaller pieces | and puts them into her basket ; and when all that has been cooked is off, | she carries the barnacle-basket on her back and goes to her

35 bouse. | Then she calls her husband and ber children, or, if |] she has no children, she calls herfriends, to come and eat | barnacles. When they come and sit down, she spreads | mats in front of those who are to eat the barnacles. Then the woman goes down to the | beach of the house and picks up stones and carries them up. | She carries them in into the house and puts them down || where she sits down, and she gives to those who are to eat the barnacles, each two stones. | Then she pours out the barnacles in front of those | whom she invited. Then those who are to eat the barnacles put | one of the stones down on the floor. That is the one on which they will break the barnacles; |

45 and (hey take a barnacle in the left hand and put it on || the stone on which it is to be broken; and they take the hammer- | stone in the right hand and strike the barnacle and break its | shell. Then they cat the edible part. They keep on | doing so as they are eating the barnacles; and | when they have finished, they do just as I have told

50 before, || when I talked about the way they do when the guests finish eating barnacles at a barnacle-feast. | That is all about this. | 1 Cryptochiton. — As soon as the tide is low, (the woman) takes her| small basket and Iter digging-stick for cryptochiton and she goes down to the | rocky beach. Then she looks under stones on the rocky beach; j and when she sees a cryptochiton, she pushes the crypto-

' Continued from p. 151, line 21.

chiton digging-stick || under it; and when it is turned on its hack. 5 she takes it and throws | it into her cryptochiton basket. She continues doing this | as long as she finds cryptochitons; and when her little basket is full, | she goes up the beach into her house. |

Then she takes her small kettle and washes it out with water. | When this is done, she pours freshwater into it, until it is | half full, 10 and she puts it over the lire. When it | begins to boil, she takes her cryptochiton basket and pours the | chitons into the boiling water. When they are all in, | she takes her tongs and stirs them with them, so that they stop boiling, for the || chitons are cold. Therefore the 15 water stops boiling at once. | She keeps on stirring it while the cryptochitons are in the kettle; and | as soon as the water boils up again, she takes the | kettle off the fire. She takes a dish and quickly ; pours fresh water into it. Then she takes a large ladle, || and with 20 it she takes out the cryptochitons she is cooking and puts them into the | dish with water in it. When they are all in, she calls | her husband to come and eat the boiled cryptochitons. | Then he goes and sits down by the side of the dish with cryptochitons; | ami he takes out one, peels the shell off its back, and || throws it into the kettle. 2-5 He pulls out the | entrails and throws them into the kettle; ami when they have | "berries" on the back, these are of red color and soft, he puts them into his mouth | and cats them; and he washes the

.'50 clean cryptochitons in | the dish; and after washing them, lie || eats them. Some Indians call this "cryptochiton-eating;" | and when one has been eaten, they take another one | and clean it, as they did the first one, before; | and after it has been cleaned and washed, they | eat it; and the one who eats the chitons does this with every

35 one of them; || and as soon as he has finished, water is given to him He rinses | his mouth; and after rinsing his mouth, he drinks a | very little water; and after doing so, he sits still. | That is all about this, j 1 Baked Cryptochiton. — The woman also takes | a small basket of cryptochitons. She takes a handful and throws them under her | tire, at the side-logs, scraping out some of the hot ashes. | When she .") throws the chitons into the ashes, she takes her jj tonus and stirs the ashes about, so that they will be scattered, and she continues stirring them. | She does not leave them there a long time; and when they

. are burnt black, she | pulls them out with her tongs and puts them down by the side of t lie j tire. She takes her small dish and pours some water into it | until it is half full. Then she picks up the

10 roasted cryptochitons and || puts them into the dish with water in it, and she stirs them round with her | hand ; and when all the ashes are off, | she pours away the dirty water; and she pours more water into 12 it so as to | change it, and she again stirs it with her hand, and again | she pours off the dirty water. Now they are clean. || She pours 15 more water on them, and she peels off the shell from the back, as she did in the case | I first talked about when I talked about | boiling cryptochitons, and she does the same as she does when | eating them. That is all about tins. |

Winkles. — The woman just takes her small basket and | goes down 20 to the rocky beach of her house at low tide, about | the time when the Indians are going to Knight Inlet; for that is the time when | winkles gather to spawn, and that is what the woman searches for. | As soon as she finds them, the woman just puts her small basket under the place where there are many winkles, [ and she scrapes the winkles into her small basket; and as soon as || the small basket is 25 full, she comes up from the rocky beach carrying the winkle- | basket in her hands, and she puts it down by the side of the fire. Then she takes her small | kettle and puts it down by the side of the winklebasket. She takes it | and pours the winkles into the small kettle. When they are all in, she | takes the water and pours a little into it. She takes an || old piece of matting and tucks it in. Then she puts 30 the kettle on the fire, | and it stays on the fire a long time boiling. It takes about | four hours according to the watch before they are

33 done. | Then she takes them off and pours off the water; and when all the | liquid is off, she takes out the old mat that she tucked in,

35 and || she takes two stones to break the winkles. She uses | the mat to break them on, and spreads it out outside of her seat. | Then she takes the winkle-kettle and pours the | winkles on the mat on which they are to be broken. She takes up one of the stones | and puts it

40 on the mat to break them on it. In her || right hand she takes the other hammer-stone, and she takes up | one of the winkles, puts it on the one stone, and | strikes it with the hammer-stone. Then the | shell of the winkle breaks to pieces. She takes out the | edible part

45 and eats it, and she does the same with the others. || After she has eaten all, she rinses her mouth, so that the salt taste comes out, | and she drinks a little water; and she gathers the | broken shells, puts them into her mat on which they were broken, and she | goes out and throws them away outside the house, for these are not given at a

50 feast to | many tribes, — winkles, cryptochitons, and chitons. || Only chiefs and their children eat winkles. | I do not know why they are the only ones to eat them. That is all | about this, for there is only one way of cooking them. [ 1 Eel-Grass (Twisting off eel-grass). — In springtime, | when the winter is past , then all the women get ready to | twist eel-grass. . . .

The man's wife | who is going to twist eel-grass first takes her eelgrass twisting || paddle and her anchor-line of cedar-bark rope, and 5 also her | eel-grass twisting hat, for generally they wear a hat when they twist | eel-grass, because generally sea-water splashes into their faces | when the women pull up the twisting-stick with the eel-grass twisted around | its end. Then it splashes into their faces || when 10 they wash the eel-grass; and therefore (the woman) wears an eelgrass twisting hat. | She carries down every thing as she goes down to the beach | to her little old canoe for twisting eel-grass, and she also | carries her bailer and her eel-grass twisting-stick. She launches | her small old canoe, and puts into it what I have named. || When it is all aboard, she sits in the stern of the small eel-grass 15 twisting | canoe. She takes up her eel-grass twisting paddle and paddles, | and she goes to a place where she knows that there is thick eel-grass and that the eel-grass is growing in soft sand. | When she arrives at the place where the eel-grass is, | she takes the cedar-bark rope and ties the || stone to its end and throws it into the water; and 20 when it touches the bottom so that it is vertical, | she ties it to the stern-seat. After doing so, she ] takes her twisting-stick and puts the tip into the water. | She pushes it down into the sea-water and strikes the sandy bottom where | there is much eel-grass. Then she

1 Continued on p. 155, line 19, to p. 15G, line 45.

25 begins to twist it. Then the eel-grass || is t\ isted around the twistingstick. When she cannot turn the | twisting-stick any more, she pulls it up. The twisting woman pulls up the twisting-stick. | As soon as i be eel-grass comes in sight, she untwists | it to get it off from her twisting-stick, and then the eel-grass comes off; | and she squeezes

30 one span around it, || beginning at the head-end. That is what we refer to as the roots. | She washes it in saltwater, so that the sand comes off. | When it is all off, she measures two spans | from the upper end of the roots, and she breaks oil' the lower end. | When it is

35 all off, she puts it in front of herself, || and she puts the twisting-stick back into the water, and she does I lie same | as she did before. When she has much of it, the tide rises, | for they only twist at spring tide As soon as tbc tide | comes up, she hauls up the anchor and goes home; | and when she arrives at the beach of her house, she gets

40 out of her || old canoe for twisting eel-grass. She takes ou( her anchor and carries it up; | and when the anchor-line gets taut, she puts it down. ] Then she sends her husband to go and invite bis tribe j to come and peel eel-grass. The man immediately obeys \

45 his wife. He invites bis tribe. || When he comes back, he clears out bis house, I and spreads the mats around for those who are going to peel the eel-grass t() sit down on. | As soon as he has done so, be takes his oil-dishes | and oil and brings them, so that they are ready. 4S Then those who are to peel the | eel-grass come in; and when they are all inside, the man asks the || young men of his numaym to go and 50 carry up the eel-grass. | Immediately the young men go and carry it up. They | carry it into the house and put it down in front of those who are to peel it. | The man takes the oil and pours it into the | oil-dishes; and when the oil is in every one, (the young men) place theminfront || of those who are to peel the eel-grass, at the outer side. 55 There are four ] men to each oil-dish. Then the eel-grass is scattered in front of | those who are to peel it. When this is done, the | men take up four pieces of eel-grass and pluck off | the small roots. When they are all off, they peel off the ||. leaves of the tail-end. They begin 60 at the upper end of the thick | root; and when they have peeled it as far as the soft part in the middle of the | eel-grass, they do the same with the other three pieces. When | this has been done with all of them, they put the roots together so that they are j three fingerwidths in length, and then they ______ break || them off; 65

and they break them off again so ____~~^ _ that they are all the same length, | in this manner: Then there are eight pieces in all. They -, A „ „ ft tie | them together with the leaves, in this manner, / \ I \f \j \ - and they hold them at | 1. Then they dip (the bundle) j [K into the oil and eat it, and I all the others do the ' "\ same. After they have

70 finished eating, || they pick up what they did not eat and go out of the house; and they go into | their houses and put down in front of their | wives the eel-grass that they have taken along. They never drink water before they go out | and when they go into their houses. That is the eel-grass peeling feast given to | many tribes, for it is the

75 food of the first people || in the time of the first Indians of the mythical period. Therefore | an eel-grass feast is a valuable feast given by a man. | That is all that is to be said about eel-grass, for there is only one way | of eating it and of getting it. | 1 Seaweed. — When the visitors have finished | eating dried salmon, the woman takes her seaweed | and tears it into strips; then she gives it to each of the young men. | And some take an adz and put 5 the seaweed || on a block of hemlock-wood made on purpose: it is a span | and a half long and three | spans around, and it stands on the floor of the | house. Then they lay the seaweed flat on it, and the young men cut it with the adz; | and some of the young men chew

10 it and put it || into a large dish. As soon as enough of the seaweed has been chewed, | they stop chewing, and the others stop chopping it with the adz. | Then a kettle is taken, and water is poured into it | until it is half full. Then the chewed | seaweed is put into it. Then they stir it with a long-handled ladle, || and they watch it so that it 15 does not become too thick when it is | on the fire. They keep on stirring it while it is on the fire; | and after it has been boiling for a long time, oil | is poured on the seaweed. It is stirred again a long time, | so that it becomes well mixed. When it is really mixed, || the kettle is taken off the fire. Then it is done, | when the oil 20 disappears from the top of the seaweed. Immediately | a food-mat is taken and is spread before | those who are to eat the seaweed. Then spoons are given to the | guests. Then the small kettles are lifted by the handle, and || are put down at the outer edge of the food-mat, 25 and they begin to eat with spoons | the seaweed. They do not drink water before they eat it, | because they drank water before they ate dried salmon. | After they have finished eating with spoons the seaweed, they cool themselves | by drinking fresh water; and after they have finished they go out. || They eat seaweed at all times, in the morn- 30 ing and at | noon and in the evening; but only in the morning they eat | dried salmon first; and when there is no dried salmon, then they eat | dried halibut in its place: They do not eat dried salmon first, at | noon ami in the evening. ||

Powdered Seaweed. — (The powdered seaweed) is only taken when 1 the owner wants to eat some of it; | and they do it in the same way when it is cooked | as they do with the chopped and chewed seaweed.

As soon as | the seaweed gets cold quickly, the guests who eat it ||

5 take tongs, and red-hot stones are taken | and put into a small kettle. Then it | keeps warm for a long time while they are eating it. Seaweed is never | boiled in a large kettle, but they use a | small

10 kettle, for they eat it out of it; and || not once is it put into a dish, | for it is not good when it gets cold, and it is only good | when it is hot. That is all about this. |

Salmon-Spawn with Seaweed. I have | forgotten this. When two

15 spoonfuls of scattered || dog-salmon spawn are boiled, when they are nearly done, | the kettle is taken off from the fire, andthen cold water is poured | into it until the kettle is more than half full. | Then chopped seaweed is put in and is stirred. | When it is just the right

20 thickness, the kettle is put back || on the fire. Then it is left to boil for a long time; and | it is taken oil' again, and oil is poured into it. | This is eaten with spoons when it is done. |

Clams with Seaweed. — And also four large (small) | clams are

25 taken and are opened. Then || the sand is picked off; and when it is all off, they are put into the | kettle. When this is done with four I large clams, water is poured on, but not very | much water. |

The woman takes with her hands the meat || of the cleaned clams and 30 squeezes it, and she only stops squeezing it | when the water is quite milky- Then | she puts the kettle over the fire, and she lets it boil a long time. [ Then she pours oil into it. When it is | done, she takes it off the fire. Then she pours || cold water into it, until the kettle 35 is more than half full. | Then she takes chopped seaweed and puts it in, and | she stirs it until it is the right thickness; and she puts the kettle back | on the fire, and she lets it bod for a long time, and she puts more | oil into it. Then she takes the kettle off the || fire, 40 and it is done; and it is only eaten with spoons. | That is all about this. |

Fern-Root (1). — After she has (dug the fern-roots) the woman takes l the basket on her back |and goes home. On the following day, as soon as day comes, when the weather is good, | she takes a large mat and spreads it out on the ground in front of the | house. Then she goes back into her house and takes the || basket of fern-roots. Then 5 she goes out with it and pours the fern-roots on the | spread mat, and she scatters the fern-roots over it. Now she | dries them, so that they may become dry, and she turns them over again; | and when they all become dry, the woman | takes a piece of cedar-stick and measures it so that it is the size of one || span, and half the thickness 10

i Continued from p. 196, line 12.

11 of a finger, | and it is one finger-width wide; | and she whittles down the end of it until it is thin. As | soon as she has finished this, she takes the root and holds it bottom up in her | left hand ; and the woman

15 holds the cleaner, the cedar-stick, in the middle || and scrapes off the dirt that is on the fern-root, and the | small roots that are on its surface. As soon as | the dirt and the roots that were on the outside of the fern-root are all off, she | puts them on the mat again; and she only stops doing so wThen | all the fern-roots have been

20 cleaned. As soon as this is done, she takes || her basket and puts the cleaned fern-roots into it; | and when they are all in, she takes up the basket of fern-roots and hangs | it up in the rear of the house, behind the fire. They are kept twelve | days drying in the rear of the house. When this is done, the woman | gets some fire-wood, and makes every-

25 tiling ready. When she || has the fire-wTood, the woman takes a rest and when the fern-roots have been drying for eleven | days, the woman takes her large basket | and looks for good hemlock-branches and also wet leaves; that is to say, the | leaves of the salmon-berry bush and of the thimble-berry bush. These are referred to by the Indians as "wet leaves." | As soon as she finds them, she puts the

30 wet leaves into her basket; || and when it is full, she breaks off hemlock-branches and carries them under her arms; | and she carries the basket with wet leaves on her back and goes home. | Then she puts 32 the basket down from her back in the house.1 . . .

In the morning, as soon as day comes, she lights the fire under the stones; | and as soon as it blazes up, she takes her large basket || and 35 goes and plucks off seaweed and puts it into her basket. When | her basket is full, she carries it on her back, and she puts it down | close to the place where she is going to bake the fern-root; and she also takes two | large buckets, and she goes and draws fresh water. As soon as | she comes, she puts them down near the place where she is going to bake; || and she also takes tongs made on purpose to use 40 with the red-hot stones. | She puts them down where she put down the two buckets, | and she also takes an old mat and puts it down. Then she takes | her digging-stick of yew-wood and puts it down. Now everything is | ready. 2 . . . ||

And when all the fire is out of the hole, she takes with the tongs 45 the red-hot stones and puts them into the fire in the middle. Eight | stones she puts into the fire in the middle, for she puts into a heap on the floor of the house the | fire that she has taken out with her tongs from the place where she is going to bake. Then she levels down the | stones in the place where she is going to bake. ||

' Then follows the description of the oven (see Publications of the Jesup North Pacific Expedition, Vol. \ .p. 408).

• Then follows remarks on the taking out of stones from the fire (see ibid., p. 408).

50 As soon as she has done so, she takes a large clam-shell | and scrapes up the soil with it, and she puts it over the red-hot | stones; and she only stops doing so when (the soil) is four fingers | thick on top of the red-hot | stones. Then she takes the seaweed and throws

55 it on top of the soil, || and it is of the same thickness as the soil; and she takes | hemlock-branches and puts them on the seaweed, and she puts them carefully | on top of the seaweed so that none of it shows. | Then she takes the wet leaves and puts them on top of the hemlock-

60 branches, | and these are also four finger-widths thick. || Then she takes the fern-root and puts it among the wet leaves. She | places (the fern-roots) bottom upward, and they are close together. | First they are put on the right-hand side of the hole, turning the face to the | rear of the house. And when they are all in, the woman | takes wet

65 leaves and throws them over the fern-roots; and || these are also the same thickness as the thickness of those underneath the fern-roots, namely, four | finger-widths. As soon as this has been done, she levels down the top. | Then she takes hemlock-branches and places them over them, the | same amount as was first put into the hole. Then she takes seaweed | and throws it on top of the hemlock-

70 branches, and this is also four || finger-widths in thickness. Then she takes an old mat | and spreads it over the seaweed. Then she takes her yew-wood | digging-stick and pokes it down in the middle of what is 72 being baked by her. | She pokes it through the middle of the mat; and after she has done so, | she takes a large clam-shell, scrapes up some soil with it, || and throws it on top of the mat. When this is 75 level with the | floor of the house, she calls a woman who has had just one husband, | and whose husband is still alive, and who lias never been | a widow, and whose monthly period terminated at least eight days before. [ This woman is called to come and stamp down the soil || on top of what is to be baked. The woman continues for a long 80 time to tread down the sod, | and she only stops when the soil on top of the baking-place is very hard. | Then the owner of the fern-roots takes her tongs | and takes the red-hot stones which she had put into the | fire in the middle of the house, and puts four of them into || each of her buckets. As soon as she has done so, the [ water in the 85 buckets gets hot. When this has been done, | the woman again throws soil upon the baking-place which has been stamped down; and she | only finishes throwing soil on it when it is piled up over the baking- place, in this manner: | Now the root-digger stands out from it. After this is done, || she takes up the buckets by the handles, ' ^ 90

and she puts the two buckets | containing the hot water near to the baking-place. Then she pulls out the | root-digger and puts

93 it down on the floor of the house; and she takes one bucket | and pours the water into the hole on the top of the baking-place, where the | root-digger had been standing; and as soon as it is emptied,

95 she takes the || other bucket and empties it also into the hole on top; | and when it is emptied, she covers up the hole on top with soil. | It is evening when she finishes; and as soon as it gets dark, | she takes her tongs and lifts the lire from the middle of the house with her tongs, | 100 and puts the firebrands on top of the baking fern-roots; || and when it blazes up, she puts some wet fire-wood on top, | so that it may last until the morning. |

When she has finished, she asks the people who live in the same house to abstain | from sexual intercourse during the night. In the morning, when day comes, | the woman gets up, and she goes to look 5 at what is being baked by her. || As soon as the fire on top is all burned out, she digs | it up; and when it is not burned out, she extinguishes | the fire on top of it, and she waits for the soil to get cool before | she digs into it. As soon as she reaches, in digging, the | mat that has been spread on top, she takes it by the corners

10 and she lifts it up with everything on it, and || takes it out. Then she takes her tongs and takes out | the seaweed and the hemlock and the wet leaves. As soon as | the fern-roots show, she takes her large basket and | puts it down by the side of the baking-place. Then she takes out the fern-roots with her hands | and puts them into the basket; and when they are all out, || then she iills up with earth again 15 the hole in which she had been baking. She | just throws the soil on top of the stones; but she throws out of the house the seaweed | and the hemlock-branches and the wet leaves which were on top of the fern-roots. | Now the fern-roots are done. That is the | end of this. ||

Eating Fern-Roots. — Four days after [ the fern-roots have been in 20 the house and have been cooked, | the people are invited. Often the chiefs of the tribes eat the fern-roots, | for it is really a valuable food. | When the guests have taken their seats, the woman || takes 25 a food-mat and spreads it in front | of those who are going to eat the fern-root. Then she pours oil into oil-dishes; | and when all the oil has been poured into oil-dishes, | she takes dry spawn of the silversalmon and she puts it | on the food-mat. Then she puts the oil- dishes || before her guests; and she takes fern-roots and | puts them 30 down, two for each man. | The guests at once take up one, and | begin to clean off what can be plucked from the lower end of the root; ■ and | when they get off all the black bark, they dip it into the oil and || eat it; and if others prefer to eat it with dried | spawn, they 35 mix it, and they do not dip it into oil. | When they eat all the pieces

38 of fern-root, then the inner part is just | held by the chief, who often does not eat it. He just gives it | to the one to whom he wishes to

40 give it; for the Indians say, that, if || a chief eats the inner part of a fern-root, he will always | waver in his mind about giving away blankets, for one side of his mind will | forbid him to give away blankets. Therefore the inner part of fern-root is not eaten by the | head chiefs. When the guests | have all eaten two fern-roots each,

45 thej7 drink water, and || the woman gives each man two fern-roots to | take home to his wife. Then the guests go out of the house. | That is all about this. | 1 Fern-Root (2). — As1 soon as she enters the house, she puts the bundle of fern-roots down by the side ] of the fire. She builds up a large fire; | and as soon as it begins to burn low, she unties the root j with which the bundle of fern-root has been tied, and she spreads them out 5 so that they are straight. || Then she puts them on the fire, and | turns them over so that the whole outer side of the fern-root is charred. | When the whole fern-root is chaired, she takes it off | from the fire; and when they are all off, she takes a | short wedge and a piece of

10 fire-wood and her fish-knife, and || she puts them down at the place where she charred the fern-roots. Now | the fire in which she charred the fern-roots has gone out, and she takes the long | charred roots

1 Coutiuuetl Iroui p. (31*5, line fi3.

doubled in two, and puts them on the fire-wood, [ holding them with 13 her left hand. Then she takes the sharp point of the | wedge and strikes the charred fern-root with the top of the wedge. || She does 15 not strike it very hard, going along the whole length | while, she is striking it. As soon as the fern-root has been pounded flat, she | takes her fish-knife and puts the handle between the big toe | and the other toes, turning the edge of the knife upward. | Then she takes the pounded charred fern-root and measures a piece three || finger-widths 20 long. Then she | presses it against the sharp edge of the knife which is turned upward, | and cuts it off. She continues cutting that way; and as soon as all the roots have been cut in pieces, | she takes her oil-dish, puts some oil in it, | and begins to eat the pounded charred fern-root, || dipping it into oil every time she takes a piece, and put- 25 ting it into her mouth. For a long time | she chews it and sucks at it; and when all that is good has been sucked out, | she spits out the fibrous part inside of the fern-root; and | she takes another piece of pounded charred fern-root, cuts it in pieces, and dips it | into oil. She puts it into her mouth, || chews it for a long time, and sucks at it, 30 and spits out what is left after sucking. | She continues doing this while she is eating the cut pieces of charred fern-root. | As soon as she has eaten enough, she puts away what is left over, and she drinks | water. That is all about the fern-roots, for there is only one way of |

cooking it, and it is not good when eaten raw. They are not ||

35 given at feasts, for only old people eat them. | 1 Fern-Root (3).1 — She2 takes the fire-tongs and piles the fire-brands | together by the side of the fire. She takes the | fern-roots out of her basket and throws them on the | fire, where she turns them over with 5 the fire-tongs, so that they are || scorched all over. When they are brittle, they are done. | She takes them out with her tongs, and does the same with | the others. When all the roots are done, | she takes her small dish, washes it out, and when it is clean, | she breaks the roasted roots into short pieces into the small dish. She breaks the

10 roots into pieces || one finger-width long. When she | has broken up enough, she takes oil and pours it over them, | and she does not stop pouring oil over them until they are all covered. Then she takes | a spoon and begins to eat the scorched roots with oil. | She eats the

1") oil and the roasted roots with a spoon. j| After she has finished, she puts away what is left over, and | she drinks a little, water, for she does not want to vomit. Because | she has taken much oil, she does not take much water. | There is only one way of cooking the fern-

20 roots. | They are not eaten raw by the tribes. When a || hunter goes hunting, he holds a fern-root in his mouth in order | not to get i Dryopteris spinulosa. - Continued from p. 197, line 31.

hungry and thirsty, and also | those who vomit blood keep it in the mouth. That is all about this. |

Cooking Clover. — Now1 I will talk about the cooking of | clover. 1 First of all, the husband of the woman | goes to get fire-wood to cook the clover. When j he has filled his small canoe, he goes home and || throws down the fire-wood that he has obtained. After he has thrown 5 it out | of the canoe, he carries it on his shoulders and throws it down | in his house. After the fire-wood has all been taken up, he | takes his wife's basket and goes down to the beach and | puts stones into it. When this has been done, he || carries them on his back up 10 the beach and into his house, and he puts them down | by the side of the fireplace in the middle of the house. He only stops | when he thinks that he has enough. Then he takes the fire-wood and | puts one log down at the rear end of the fireplace in the middle of the house; and he | takes one of medium size and puts one end on the first one, the || other one resting on the floor of the house; and he 15 does the | same on the opposite side. Then he splits dry fire-wood and | places it between the two side-pieces; and when it is even with the top | of the side-pieces, he takes some medium-sized | firewood and places it crossways over the side-pieces, putting them close together. || After this has been done, he picks up the stones and 20

1 Continued (rom p. 188, line 60.

21 places them on top. | When all the stones are on, lie lights the fire underneath; I and when it blazes up, he sends some men of his | numaym to go and call thepeople. The messenger goes immediately | to call them; and as soon as lie arrives at the door of the house of

25 those whom he is to call, || he says, "I call you to come and eat the clover-root," | naming the man who sends the invitation. He continues | saying these words, going to the end of the village; and the one who gives the | clover-feast takes out the clover-baskets and puts them down | at the left-hand side of the door of the house; and

30 he || takes a large steaming-box and places it in front of the | fire in the middle of the house, together with two long fire-tongs. | He also takes two large buckets, | a large cedar-withe basket, and old mats, and he sends | a second time the man who went first to invite. As

35 soon as he goes, || he sends another man of his numaym to | get fresh water in the two large buckets, which is to be poured over the | clover when it is put on the red-hot stones. | As soon as the man who went to draw water conies back, he puts it down by the side of the | steaming-box. Now the guests who are going to eat the clover come

40 in. |i They go to the rear of the house and sit down. When | they are all in, they eat first scorched dried salmon. | When they eat the dried salmon, two men of the | numaym of the host take the tongs and | stand in readiness on each side of the steaming-box, and || both pick up the 45 red-hot stones and dip them quickly [ into the water that has been brought in in the two large buckets. They take the stones out again | and put them into the steaming-box. They do this | in order to wash off the ashes that stick on the stones; and they continue I to do so with all the red-hot stones. When || this has been 50 done, the woman takes the large basket and pours | some water over it, so that it is wet. Then she takes a | square box, pours some fresh water into it, not very much. | Then she throws the clover into it and washes off the sand that sticks to it. | When all the sand is off, she throws the roots into || the basket for steaming clover. When all 55 the I clover has been taken out of the square box and lias been washed, the two | men take hold of it, one on each side, and they put it on the red-hot | stones which they have put into the steaming-box. Then they press the clover-roots down in the | large basket so that they are close to the red-hot stones. || When they have been pressed 60 down, the woman takes some old mats | and spreads them on each side of the place where the clover is being steamed. | Then one of the men lifts a large bucket, j draws fresh water, and, when he comes in, he I immediately pours the fresh water over the clover which is || piled up at the place where it is being steamed. When the fresh 55 water lias all been poured out of the | bucket, they take old mats

67 and cover it over, j They do not let the steam blow out. [ They do not leave it there a long time, before the woman takes the short

70 tongs | and lifts up one side of the covering of old mats. [| She picks up some clover-roots and puts them into a small dish, and j she pinches them with her fingers; and if they break in two, J they are done. Then the man takes off the | old-mat covering and spreads the mats on each side of the steaming-box. j When this has been done,

75 two men take up || each one clam digging-stick and push it through | each side of the clover-basket in which the clover has been steamed, | and they lift it up out of the | steaming-box. Then they put it down on the old mats which are spread | on the floor, and they pour

SO it all out. When the clover is all out, || they put the basket down at the left-hand side of the house. | Then the woman spreads the hot clover over the | old mats, so that the steam comes out and so that they get cool. | After this has been done, the woman takes the dishes and | puts them down. Then the two men take the steamed ||

85 clover-roots and put them into the dishes; and when all | the dishes are full, they begin at one end of the dishes and go to the other, breaking up | the roots with their hands. When all the clover-roots are in pieces in the | dishes, the woman takes oil and pours it over them; j and when they are covered over with oil, they mix (the roots

/

and the oil) with their hands; || and when (everything) is mixed, it 90 is like mush. When | this is done, they carry the clover to those who are to eat it. Four men | eat out of one dish of clover. Those who | eat the clover take it with their hands. After | they have eaten, two men take soft || cedar-bark and give to each of those who 95 have eaten the clover a piece (with which) to | wipe off the oil from their hands. | After they have done this, they drink fresh water. Then J they go out. The steamed clover is given at a great feast to many tribes, | and those who eat steamed dover always try to eat it all. |[ This is all about one way of cooking it. | 100

Another Way of cooking Clover. — This is another way of | cooking 1 clover. The woman takes a small kettle and | puts it down by the place where she is sitting. She takes a cedar-stick and | splits it into thin pieces. She measures the size of the bottom || of her small 5 kettle with the split cedar-sticks, and | breaks the cedar-sticks in pieces and puts them in the bottom of the kettle. As soon | as they are all in the bottom of the kettle, she places others across them, in tins I way: -prr,. After this has been done, she takes her clover-basket | (t--~- - -\ and puts it down at the place where she is sitting; and ft I""/ she takes a small dish || and places it by 10 the side of the 4JJJy clover-basket, and also a bucket of water. I

11 Then she unties the string of the clover-basket, so that it comes off | and that she can take out the roots. She takes out the clover and puts it | into the small dish; and when she thinks it is enough to go into the kettle, | she pours some water into it and she

15 washes off the sand. || When all the sand is off, she places (the cloverroots) on top of the | cedar-sticks in the bottom of the small kettle. She does not press them down, | for she wishes (them) to he loosely inside of the kettle, so that | the steam can pass through easily. When (the kettle) is full, she takes soft cedar-bark, | dips it into

20 water, and covers the roots with it. || After she has tucked it in all round the small kettle, she pours a little | water all round the covering, perhaps half a teacupful, | which forms the liquid of the clover. Then she puts (the kettle) on the fire. | She does not let it boil long, before she takes it off of the fire of her house, ] and leaves it on the floor while it is getting done, — while it is staying there and the steam

25 is passing through it. || As soon as it stops steaming, the woman takes off | the top covering. She takes her small dish and puts it down by the side | of the clover-kettle. She takes her tongs, and with them she takes out the | boiled clover and puts it into the small dish. |

30 When it is all in the dish, she takes her oil-dish and puts some || oil into it. Then she calls her husband and her children to | come and sit down; and when they sit down, she puts before them the | whole clover-roots in the small dish, | and the oil in the oil-dish. Then they | take some clover-roots and dip them into the oil and || put 35 them into the mouth; and they continue to do so, eating it. | After they have eaten, they drink water, after eating | the boiled clover. The married couple and | their children alone eat boiled clover. It is not given | at feasts to many tribes. That is all about || boiled 40 clover. |

Baked Clover-Root. — Xow I will talk about clover baked in | hot 1 ashes. When the woman and her husband have nothing to eat | and they have no kettle, when they are camping out j in bad weather and their food is all gone, || then, since there is no place where clover does 5 not grow, the woman goes to find | the leaves of the clover. When she finds them, she | digs out (the roots) ; and when she has many, she goes to a place where there is water, | carrying the clover. She washes (the roots) so that the sand comes off. | When all the sand is off, she goes back || to her camp, carrying the clover, and she sits 10 down by the side of | the fire. Then she sends her husband inland to get | skunk- cabbage, and, if there is no skunk-cabbage, to get dry fern-fronds. [ When he gets the skunk-cabbage, he brings back two leaves and gives them | to his wife. The woman takes them and puts the || clover-roots into the skunk-cabbage leaves, which she 15

1(3 folds around them. As soon as she | has done so, she takes split cedar-sticks and digs a hole in the hot | ashes just under the fire. When the hole is deep enough, she | takes the clover wrapped up in skunk-cabbage and puts it into it. | She takes the split cedar-sticks

20 and she scrapes the hot ashes || over the clover that she is going to bake. When | it is covered thick with hot ashes, she piles fire over it. | When this is done, she waits for it to be baked. After a short while | she thinks that it is done. Then she takes up the split cedarsticks, scrapes | away the fire and the ashes, and digs out the clover

25 wrapped up in || skunk-cabbage leaves. She opens the leaves and spreads them on the floor, | and the baked clover-roots are piled up in the middle | of the leaf. They use the leaf as a dish, and eat it without oil | when they eat the baked clover. The woman only eats

30 it | with her husband; and they drink a little water after || eating it, as the white men do when they drink tea. After they have | eaten enough, they drink much water. That is all about this. |

Raw Clover-Root. — Now I will talk about | those who eat raw clover. Not all Indians eat it | raw. Generally it is eaten raw by

35 the woman who is || digging it, when she sets hungry, and she does not wish to lose time by going to | eat in her house. Then she just eats raw | clover. That is the only time when it is eaten raw. | These are all the ways of eating clover. |

Cinquefoil (1). — Now I shall talk about the man who | cooks cinque- 1 foil-roots for his tribe. First he takes a j large square box, which is put down at the right-hand side inside of | the house-door; and he takes cedar-wood that splits well, || and spUts it into pieces of the size of the 5 little finger; | and when he thinks he has enough, he takes the cedarbark and | splits it in narrow strips and long. When he | thinks he has enough, he takes cedar-sticks and | measures them off so that they are of the length of the inside of the square box. || Then he takes his 10 knife and he cuts them; and he takes another | cedar-stick and measures off the width of the inside of the square box, | and he cuts that also. Then he takes the other | cedar-sticks and measures them off according to the length of the square box. He measures j them with the cedar-stick, takes his knife, and cuts them off || so that they 15 are all of the same length. When he thinks he has enough, | he takes the measure of the width of the box and measures off another | cedar-stick, and cuts it accordingly. There are only | two sticks for the width of the box. Then he | takes one of the cedar-sticks which he has measured according to the length of the || box, and 20 one of those which he has measured | according to the width of the box, and he puts the two ends crosswise, in this | way:1 He takes the split cedar-bark and ties them together. | When they have been tied, he takes another one that has been

' So that the ends form a right angle.

measured according to the length of the box, and places it at the

25 end of the one || that he tied on first; and he continues | doing so until lie comes to the end of the crosspiece; and when he has filled it to the end, he takes the | other cedar-stick that had been measured for the other end (the width of the box), and he ties it on with | cedar-bark; and when he has finished with his frame for red-hot stones on which cinquefoils are cooked, | it is in this way:

30 He places it inside the bottom of the square box. || Then he takes up a medium-sized basket and goes into the woods to look for | dry fern-fronds. When he finds them, he pulls them out and puts them into his | basket. When it is full, he carries the | dry fern-fronds on his back into his |

35 house, and puts them down next to the square box. || After he has done so, he takes a stout and long cedar-bark rope, | coils it up, and dips it into the water on the beach. ] When the kinks are all out, he takes it back | into the house and ties it around the square box.

40 the whole height of it, and as tightly as possible, || so that the box may not burst when they begin to put red-hot | stones into it, for very often the square boxes burst | when the host who gives a cinquefoil-root feast fails to put a rope around it . | After this has been done, they do the same as they do when they [ build a fire in the middle

45 of the house | for clover and put stones on it. || When (the stones)

are all red-hot, t wo men take two long pairs of tongs, which they ] use as 46 walking-sticks, and go out of the house in which the cinqucf oil-roots are being cooked. J They are going to invite the tribe to come and eat cinquefoil-roots. They go into | each house and stand inside the door. || As soon as they have gone all through the village, they go back and call 50 again. | When they come back to the house in which the roots are being cooked, [ they spread mats for the guests to sit down on. After | they have done so, the guests come in; and when they are in, | the two men take the square box and put it || down by the side of the fire in the 55 middle of the house. Another man takes | two large buckets and goes to draw | freshwater; and when the one who went to draw water comes back, | another man takes the frame out of | the bottom of the box and puts it up against the side of the box, || behind it, away from 60 the fire in the middle of the house. When | this has been done, each takes a bucket, and, | standing at each end of the square box, carrying in the hand | the fire-tongs and the bucket, they put it down at the j left-hand side. Then they take off || the burning fire and put 65 it down at each end of the fireplace. When it has all been taken off, | they put the ends of the tongs into the | buckets which contain the water. \ and keep them in this way until the ends are wet. | That is

70 the time when the man takes a fairly stout cedar-bark rope || and winds it around the, square box so that it may not burst open when | they put the red-hot stones into it. Generally | the rope is put around the square box before the guests come in. | When this has been done, the two men who are to pick up the red-hot stones | take the tongs out

75 of the water and pick up the red-hot || stones and put them into the square box; | and when the end of the tongs begins to burn, they | push them at once into the water; and when the ends are wet again, | they pick up more red-hot stones. During this time | the wife of the host who is to give a feast of cinquefod-roots takes a new, smooth mat

SO and || spreads it out behind the box in which the cinquefod-roots are to be cooked. She takes | one of the cinquefod-baskets, unties the top, j and takes out the roots, which she throws on the mat. | She pulls them apart so that they lie loosely on the mat. She does this

85 with | four cinquefod-baskets. When the roots are all || pded up loosely, she takes one of the baskets of long roots | and a new mat, which she spreads out. | She unties the top and takes them out very carefully, | puts them on the mat, | and puds them apart carefully,

90 because she does not want them to break, for they are all long. || As soon as they have been pulled apart, she takes the dry fern-leaves and | puts them down on the floor of the house near by. She takes old mats | and puts them down next to the square box. | After this soas] RECIPES 539

has been done, the two men who have picked up the red-hot stones throw the | dry fern-leaves on the red-hot stones; and || after they 95 have done so, they take the frame and place it on top of the fernleaves. | They take the short cinquefoil-roots and place them in the square box, | then they put the frame into the box; and when [ all the short cinquefoil-roots are in, the woman gives four pieces of split cedar-bark to the man, and he places them over the || short cinquefoil- 100 roots. Then he takes up the long cinquefoil-roots and throws them on top of the | short roots, and the four pieces of split bark are a mark between the short | and the long roots. As soon as the long roots have all been put in, | the woman takes old mats and spread) them | next to the square box. When they are all || ready, the two 5 men take each one of the | buckets, each standing on one side of the square box, | and they pour the water over the long cinquefod-roots. | When the water has all been poured out of the buckets, they take hold of | the old mats at each corner and throw them over the box in which the roots are steaming; j| and they only stop when many | old 10 mats have been put on as a cover, so that the steam can not come through. | After they have covered it, the woman goes into a room | in tie corner of her house where the dishes are generally kept, j and

15 she passes them out. One of the men j| takes the dishes from her, and puts them down at the | left-hand side of the door of the house. Then the | other man counts how many dishes there will be, for there will I be one dish for each group of six guests. | As soon as he has

20 counted them, he names the number of dishes required; || that is, the number of dishes that the woman passes out of the room. | As soon as all the dishes are out of the room, the woman j takes one kelp bottle of oil for every two dishes; and when | the oil-bottles and dishes have all been taken out, one of the | men takes the fire-

25 tongs and with them strikes the mat covering of the || long cinquefoilroots. If the cover sinks down, the roots are done. If it does | not stay down but jumps back, they are not done yet. (If they are done,) he takes off | the mat covering, and a new mat is spread out. | The two men take hold on each end of the strips | of cedar-bark that mark the level between the short and the long roots. They take them

30 all up and put them down || on the new mat that had been spread out. After (the men) have done this, they | take their fire-tongs ami push them in. When the legs of the tongs spread open, | they press them together, and they lift out the short roots, and | they put them on another new mat that has been spread out; | and they only stop

35 taking out the roots when they are all out of the || box. Then the two men put down their | fire-tongs and sit down on each side of the short roots which are j on the new mat. Then they shake the steam 37 out of them, j taking up with both hands the short roots, and shaking them while they are | holding them up. Then the short roots fall down one by one, falling back || on the others; and before the two 40 men have done so a long time | the steam has all gone out. The woman does the same with the long roots; | and when she has done so, she takes the dishes and | puts the long cinquefoil-roots into them, and the two men | put the short einquefoil-roots into the dishes. When they have done so, they || take the oil-bottles and pour the oil 45 into the dishes containing the long roots | and the short roots; and they measure so that the | oil of one bottle is put into two dishes. After thej" have done so, they place | the dishes of long roots before the chiefs, one dish for j each six of them; and when the chiefs have received theirs, || they put one dish before six of the common people, j 50 When they have been put down, the | chiefs tuck up the sleeves of their shirts, | and after doing so they begin to eat. They take the j long roots with the right hand, fold them up with the thumb, || and, 55 when they have been made into a ball, they put them into the mouth. They all do it in this way; and the common people | eat the short roots in the same way as the long roots are eaten, j After they have had enough, those who have eaten the long roots and those who have eaten the short roots take in their hands what is left

60 over and take it home || to their wives. Then they drink water in their houses. | That is all about this. The long and the | short cinquef oil-roots are given at great feasts to many tribes, for | they are counted when chiefs count their feasts in rivalry. |

65 (2) There is anotherwayof cooking short and || long cinquef oil-roots — when they are boiled for a married couple and their children, | and when they invite their brothers or sisters. First, | the woman goes to get her | small kettle for cooking long and short cinquefoil-roots, for there is only one way of cooking them. She | washes out the small

70 kettle; and when it is clean, she takes split || cedar-wood and measures the size of the bottom of the kettle with the | split cedar-wood. She breaks the sticks and places them in the bottom, | six at the bottom of the small kettle, and she places the same number crosswise over | those six which she first put in. After | she has put them in, they are in this way srfTTTfv. m the bottom of the small

75 kettle. || After she has crossed H : ; : : : D the sticks in the bottom of the small kettle, | she takes 'vUJ_LLLJ her basket containing the long cinquefoil-roots, unties it, | takes a small dish and pours some water into it until it is half full. | She takes the long roots out of the basket and | puts them into the water in the

SO small dish, and she || washes them. After she has done so, she takes them out of the water and | puts them on the frame in the 81 bottom of the kettle for cooking the long roots. She only | stops putting them into the small kettle when they are heaped up high. She pours on very little | water, about half a cupful. [ She takes a piece of old mat and covers (the kettle) with it. || Then she tucks it in 85 all round so that it is tight, and so that not much steam | can come out when (the water) begins to boil. After she has done so, ] she puts it on the fire; and when it begins to boil, she takes her | firetongs and strikes the mat covering. When it | stays down and does not jump back, she takes it off the fire, removes [| the mat covering, 90 takes the small dish and puts it alongside of the | kettle. Then she takes the fire-tongs and pushes them into the | cinquefod-roots which are now done, picks them out and puts them into the small dish. | She only stops when they are all out of the kettle. Then she | takes up the steaming long roots, holds them up, and shakes them, until || the steam comes out. As soon as they stop steaming, she takes an | 95 oil-dish, pours oil into it, and, after doing so, she | puts the dish with the long roots in front of those who are to eat it. | She places the oildish on the outer side of the small dish. | Then those who are to eat the boded roots begin to eat. || They take hold of them with the right 200 hand, and | press the roots with the thumb so as to make a ball.

2 Then they dip (the ball) | into the oil and put it into the mouth. They keep on doing this | until they have had enough. Then they drink some | water after eating the boiled long roots. ||

5 There are only two ways of cooking the long and sh ort cinquef oilroots. | Only this teaches the common people their low station, | when it is given in a feast, for the long roots are given to the chiefs and the ] short ones (to the others), for only chiefs eat the long 10 roots | and the common men eat the short roots. || That is all about this.

1 Erythronium. — If the woman has many Erythronium plants, she takes a large dish | and puts it down at the place where she | always -it-. With one hand she takes up the | flat-bottomed basket contain-

5 ing the roots and pours them into the large dish. || Then she goes to get water in her bucket, and pours it into | the large dish containing the roots, and she moves them with her hands so that the earth comes off. She washes them; and | after moving them with her hands, she washes out the flat-bottomed basket. | When it is 10 clean, she takes the roots out of the water and || puts them back into the small-meshed flat-bottomed basket. When | the roots have all been taken out of the washing-dish, she takes up the | washing-dish at each end and pours out the dirty water outside of | the house; and she brings it back again and puts it down ' where it was before.

' Continued from p. 198, line 22.

Then she pours some water into the || large washing-dish, and takes 15 up in one hand the basket containing the roots | and pours them into the dish. She leaves them there | until she is ready to cook them. She also changes the | water in which they have been washed for clean water, and leaves the roots in it. Then she builds up | the fire and goes down to the beach, || carrying in her hands a basket for 20 stones. She puts | stones into it; and when it is full, she carries it on her back and puts the stones on the | fire. She continues doing this if she has many roots. | When she has enough stones, she takes her stcaming-box [ and places it ready by the side of the fire. She draws fresh water || in her bucket and pours it into the steaming-box. 25 When | it is half full, she stops pouring in water. Then she goes | with her bucket to draw more water, and puts it down by the side of the steaming-box; | and after doing so, she takes her tongs and puts them down. | Now everything is ready. When the stones of the fire are red-hot, || she takes the fire-tongs, and also the bucket with 30 water | that stands by the side of the fire. She is going to dip the red-hot | stones in it, and she takes up the red-hot stones with the tongs. | She quickly dips them into the water in the bucket, until the | ashes that stick on them come off. She puts them into the water in the steaming-box, || and she continues to do so. As soon as the water 35

36 in the steaming-box begins to boil, | the woman takes the flatbottomed basket, takes the | washed roots out of the dish, and puts them into the flat-bottomed basket. | As soon as all the roots are in the flat-bottomed basket, she | puts the basket, with the roots into

40 the boiling || water. After she has done so, she again takes up her tongs, | picks up red-hot stones, dips them into the | water in the bucket, and puts them in all around the sides of the | basket containing the roots. She does not put in really many | red-hot stones.

4.") Then the water begins to boil; || and it does not boil a very long time, before the | roots are boiled to pieces. Then the woman takes hold on each side of the | basket with roots, and she puts the basket into a large | dish. She pours out the water that was in the dish, and | lets the liquid drain off. For this purpose she puts (the roots) into the

50 large dish. || Then she takes a small dish, puts it down, and also oil | and spoons; and when everything is ready, she takes up with one hand | the basket containing the roots and lifts it out of the large j dish. Then she pours the boded roots into a | small dish, from which they are to be eaten. When the dish is full, she stops pouring them

55 in. She || takes od, and pours on much oil, and she only | stops pouring on od when (what is in the dish) is a thick paste. Then she stirs it with a | spoon, and gives the spoons to those who are to eat |

the boiled roots. Then they begin to eat with | spoons, and they eat much oil with them, because the roots are bitter. || Therefore they 60 put much oil on, | so that they may not taste bitter. After they have eaten enough, | they drink a little water. This is the manner in which | in former times the Indians boiled the Erythronium-roots. They were | used by the Indians at feasts given to many tribes. That is all about the || one way of cooking them. | 65

Boiled Erythronium. — Now I will talk again | about the way they 1 are cooked at present, for at present the Erythronium-roots are boiled; | and they are kept by the woman who digs them and put | into baskets, and they are dried in the sun by those who gather many of them where they grow in || great quantity. First of all, the woman 5 takes a kettle and | washes it out with water. When it is clean, she takes the | basket with Erythronium-roots, unties the top, and takes off | the dry grass covering. She takes a dish and | puts it down where she is sitting. Then she puts the roots into it, || and she pours 10 on some water. As soon as the top of the roots is covered, | she stirs them with her hands so that the soil may come off; [ and when the water in which they are beingwashed is dirty, she takes out the | roots and puts them into another dish which stands on the floor. | When they have all been taken out, she pours out the dirty water in the corner of the || house and she washes the dish. | When it is clean, she puts 15

17 the roots back into it | and pours some more clean water on them. Then she stirs them again with her | hands, and again she changes the water that she poured on last. | Now the roots are white when they

20 have been washed. || She pours some water into the kettle until it is half lull. | Then she puts it on the fire; and when the water begins to boil, | she takes up the dish with the roots and | pours them into the boiling water in the kettle in which the roots are to be cooked. |

25 When they are all in, she lets them boil. || She takes a cedar-stick and stirs them; and when | they have boiled to pieces, she takes the kettle oil of the fire, for they are done. Then she | takes oil and pours much of it on the roots. She takes her | spoon and stirs (the roots) so that the oil | and the water and the boiled roots are all

30 mixed. After || stirring them, she takes spoons and distributes them among | the guests who arc to cut the boiled roots. She puts the | kettle in which they were boiled in front of the guests, and | they begin to eat with the spoons out of the kettle. After | eating, they

35 drink a little water. That is all about this. || This kind of cooking is used for inviting many tribes. ] 1 Eaw and Baked Erythronium (1). — Some | women and men eat the roots raw when it is a hot day, for j the Erythronium-roots are cool

Inside when they are eaten raw. and they have a | milky taste. That is the only time when it is thus eaten. That is all || about this. 5

(2). There is another way of preparing them, when they are baked in | hot ashes. The Erythronium-roots which are baked in ashes are not washed. | The woman takes her tongs and | digs a hole under the side-pieces of her fire. When || the hole is deep enough, she takes a 10 handful of roots and puts them j into the hole. When they are nearly level with the top of the j hole, she takes her tongs and | covers them with ashes. She does not leave them there very long, before | she uncovers them with her tongs and takes them out. Then she puts them down by the side of the fire. || Wien all those 15 that have been buried in the ashes have been taken out, she takes her oil-dish | and pours some oil into it, and places it in front of the one who is goin^ to eat the j baked roots. She puts the baked | roots on a mat. from which they are to lie eaten; and shespreads (the mat) | in front of the one who is to eat (the roots) and puts them on it. Then lie takes the roots, || rubs oil with his thumb the ashes that are 20 sticking to them, and, | after doing so, he dips them into oil and puts them into his mouth. | He continues doing so while he is eating the baked | roots. After that, he drinks water; and | after drinking, he

25 takes a mouthful of water, squirts || it into his hands, and washes them off. Now it is done. | This is not given at a feast to many tribes. | 1 Boiled Lupine-Roots. — The woman lakes her small kettle, washes !t with fresh water, j and. when it is clean, she takes her small basket and | goes down to the beach of her house. She picks up 5 some fresh || medium-sized stones, puts them into her small basket, and, when | she thinks she has enough to put into the bottom of her small kettle, she carries | them up into the house, and she puts them down next to the | kettle in which the lupine is to be cooked. She takes some fresh stones | and puts them into the bottom of the small

10 kettle; and when they are all in, || she takes the lupine-root basket, unties the top, | and takes out the roots and | puts them on the stones in the bottom of tin- small kettle. \ She continues doing so, and only stops when it is heaping full, j Then she takes some dead

15 grass and covers it over, || and tucks the grass in all around, so that the steam comes through it ] when the water begins to boll. She takes a shell of a large horse-clam, j dips out water in it, and pours it over the dry grass cover. | She puts on four shells of water. | After

I'll doing so, she puts the kettle with the lupine-roots on the || fire. The reason why she pours the water on is because she | wishes the roots to be wet, so that they may not get burned. Then it begins to boil, |

and she lets it boil until the liquid is almost dried up. | They know 22 thai the liquid has dried up when | the steam ceases to come through. Then she takes the small kettle off the fire, || and they are done. 25 She does not take off the cover immediately, | because she wishes the roots to be steamed. When the steam stops | coming through, she takes off the top covering, takes her small dish | and puts it down close to her seat, where she has been cooking the roots. | She takes the tongs, picks up the lupine-roots which are in the || small kettle, 30 and she puts them into the small dish. | As soon as all the roots are out of the kettle, [ she takes her oil-dish and pours some od into it. | After doing so, she puts it into the small disli containing the lupineroots, and | places it in front of those who are to eat the boiled roots. || Then they take out the roots, one each, for | they are long 35 pieces; and they do not bod to pieces, although the roots in the kettle have been boiling a long time, | for they always remain whole. | They put the lupine-roots lengthwise into the dish, and | they dip one end into the oil in the oil-dish, and they bite off || the ends when 40 they are eating the lupine-roots. They continue doing so while | they are eating; and after they have finished, they drink water. Now | they do not get drunk and they do not get sleepy | after eating lupine-roots. That is all about this. |

1 Steamed Lupine-Roots. — They [ build a fire in the same way, and the woman goes to get stones in the same way, as they do when | they build a lire for steaming the short cinquef oil- roots; and only this is different, that | she takes green grass and skunk-cabbage 5 leaves to place || on the red-hot stones when they are placed in the steaming-box, | and that they put red-hot stones into the steamingbox. I When there are enough, the woman takes the green | grass and puts it on the red-hot stones; and when | there is a thick layer on them, she takes the skunk-cabbage leaves and places them flat on

10 the || fresh grass; and when there are many Layers of this, [ she takes her digging-stick for digging clams and pokes holes | through the skunk-cabbage leaves. After making many | holes, she takes her basket with lupine-roots, unties the | top, and takes out the roots,

15 which she places || on the skunk-cabbage leaves. When she thinks there are enough, | she takes a bucket with water and empties it over the roots. | When (the water) has all been poured out, she takes old mats and | covers up the box, so that the steam shall not come through. She leaves it that way for a long time. | Sometimes she

20 leaves it there until mid-day. if she began || cooking in the morning. Then she takes off the cover, takes her | small dish and puts it down. She takes her tongs and takes out | the steamed lupine-roots, puts them into the | small dish from which the roots are to be eaten; and when enough are in it, she takes an oil-dish, | pours some oil into it, and, after doing so, she puts the oil-dish on the || steamed roots and 25 puts it in front of those to whom she is going to give to eat. | Those who are eating the lupine-roots take them | and dip the ends into the oil, and | put the roots that have oil at the end into the mouth and bite them off and chew them. | As soon as (hey swallow the roots, they dip the cud || again into oil and put it into the mouth. They | 30 chew it, and those who eat the lupine-roots | take up another one, and do as they did | before when they began to eat the | roots. After eating, they drink much water. || That is all about the lupine- 35 roots. [

Carrots(l). — (After the woman lias gathered carrots,) she takes fire- 1 wood and builds up the fire. | After building the fire, she takes her small basket and goes | to get stones on the beach. She puts the stones | into her small basket, just enough so that she can carry them. || Then she stops putting in stones and carries the basket on 5 her back | up the beach into the house, and she | puts it down by the side | of the fire. Then she takes out the stones and puts them on top of | the fire. When there are many carrots, there are also many | stones. When she has enough stones, she takes her || large 10 basket, goes down to the beach, and at high-water mark picks up

' This follows the description of the gathering of roots, p. 201, line 21.

11 dead eel -grass, | which she puts into her large eel-grass-carrying basket. | As soon as the large basket is full of | dry eel-grass, she carries it on her b ack up the beach | and into her house, and she puts

15 it down || not far from the fire. Then she takes another | large basket and goes into the woods, looking for dry fern. | When she finds it, she picks it off and puts it into | the large basket. When it is full, she carries it on her back, and | she carries it out of the woods

20 home into her house. Then she || puts it down close to the dead-eelgrass basket. | She takes her tongs and the small-meshed large basket, | and also old mats, and keeps them in readiness. | Then she takes her large bucket and goes to draw water. When | she comes

25 back, she takes a large dish, in which she intends || to steam the carrots. Then she goes to gel her basket with carrots, | and pours them out into the large [ dish. She takes the bucket with water and pours (the water) | on the carrots in the large dish. She pats them

30 with her hands 1 until the soil and sand come off; and || after she has done so. she takes the small-meshed basket and puts it down | close to the dish in which she washes the carrots. She takes out the | washed carrots and puts them into the flat-bottomed, small-meshed, huge | basket. When it is full, the woman rises. | By this time the stones on the fire are red-hot. She || takes the tongs and picks off 35 the hnr ning wood and puts it down | in front of the fire. As soon as shehasdone so, she levels down the top of the ] red-hot stones, so that they are level; and when this has heen done, | she takes the basket with dry eel-grass and puts it down by the side | of the place where she is going to steam the roots. She takes the dry eel-grass || out of 40 the large basket and spreads it over the | red-hot stones. As soon as it is all on, she gets the | large basket with dry fern-leaves and puts it down close to the place where she is going to steam the | carrots. Then she takes out the dry fern-fronds and puts them ] on the dry eel-grass. She puts on one-half of the dry fern-fronds. Then she takes the || small-meshed, flat-bottomed, large basket with the 45 washed carrots | and puts it in the middle of the place where she is going to steam the carrots, and she takes | the remainder of the dry fern and puts it around the small-meshed, large, flat-bottomed basket in which | she is going to steam the roots; and she | only stops putting it around the basket when the fern-fronds are level wit h the top of the || place where she is going to steam (the roots). After 50 doing so, she takes old mats | which she has brought, and spreads them alongside of the steaming-place. When everything is ready, | she takes the bucket with water and empties it all over | and around the flat-bottomed, large steaming-baskets in which the roots are. |

55 As soon as the bucket is empty, she || takes the old mats and covers them over the basket; and she | only stops covering it when she has many old mats over it, so that | the steam can not come through. She leaves what is being steamed in that way; | and sometimes she only takes off the cover from the | carrots that are being steamed at

60 mid-day, if they are put on in the morning. When || they are done, the woman takes the dishes | and oil and puts them down; and when everything is ready, she takes off the covering of | old mats and spreads them out, so that they come off from ;he carrots; | and the small-meshed, flat-bottomed steaming basket stands in the middle of the fern-fronds, j where it is kept warm. Then the woman

65 sends her husband to || go and invite whomever he wishes to eat the carrots, j Sometimes his tribe come into the house when they know that I carrots have been steamed. When all those who are going | to eat the carrots have come in, two men of the numaym of the woman's husband | come and help her. They take the dishes and [|

70 put them down in a row. They take out the | flat-bottomed carrot steaming-basket from among the fern and put. it down at one end of the I row of dishes. One of them takes the tongs | and with them takes out the steamed carrots. The other one | takes up one of the

75 dishes and puts it down by the side of the || small-meshed, flatbottomed steaming-basket. Then the | other one puts the steamed carrots into it, and he continues to do so | with the whole number of 77 dishes. There are many of those who will eat the carrots. | When all the dishes are full, they | take oil and pour it in, so that there is much oil; ]| and after doing so, they put them down in front of those 80 who are going to eat the carrots. They | never exceed four men to each | dish. As soon as all the dishes have been put down, those | who are going to eat the carrots take them up with the-right hand and put them into the mouth; | and they continue doing so while they are eating the steamed carrots. || When they have had enough, they S5 take a handful of what is left over and take it to their | wives. Finally they drink water after washing their hands | in their houses. That is all about this. |

(2). What I just talked about is the way in which the people of olden times | steamed carrots; but the present people do not steam || carrots, they boil them in kettles on the fire of the | house. They 90 boil the carrots in the same way as they do when they | boil cinquefoil-roots, and there is no difference. | Just look at the way in which they boil short cinquef oil-roots, for | they do the same thingwben they boil carrots in a kettle. || They do not eat carrots raw, because they 95 have a strong taste and they cause | diarrhoea. That is all about it. |

Sea-milkwort. — When her basket is full, she goes | home, carrying 1 the basket in her hands. As soon as she enters | the house, she takes a

' Glaux maritima, v. obtusifolia (Fernald). sContinueii from p. 195, line 10.

dish, pours some | water into it, so that it is half full, and she takes || 5 the small basket and puts it down close to the dish with water. | She picks up some of the roots, puts them into the dish with water, | and shakes them so that the sand comes off. When | they are clean, she takes them out and puts them on a small mat that has been spread on the floor. | Then she takes up some more milkwort-roots and ||

10 puts them into the water and washes them. She continues doing this with the others, | and only stops when they have all been washed. After | this has been done, she takes her small kettle, washes it out, and, after doing so, | she takes a very small basket, goes down to the beach and | picks up medium-sized pebbles, which

15 she puts into the || small basket. There may be eight pebbles which I she puts in. She carries them up in one hand and takes them into the | house, where she puts them down by the side of the kettle. She takes the | pebbles out of the basket and puts them into the bottom of the | small kettle. She scatters them so that they cover

20 the bottom. || After doing so, she picks up some milkwort-roots and puts them | on the stones in the bottom of the kettle. She continues doing so, putting the | other milkwort-root in, and she only stops when I the kettle is piled full. Then she pours in a very little |

25 water. She takes a piece of an old mat, with which || she covers the kettle, and tucks it down all around so that the steam may not come |

through. Then she puts it on the fire. She boils it for a long time, | then she takes it off. She does not immediately | remove the 27 cover, so that the steam is kept in. When the | steam stops coming out, she takes off the covering, takes a small dish, || and puts it down 30 by the side of the small kettle. Then she takes her | fire-tongs, picks up the boiled roots, and | puts them into the dish with her tongs; and when the kettle is empty, | she takes her oil and pours some of it over them. Then she begins | to eat a boiled root with oil. She || does not press it into a ball when eating it, as is done with the short 35 cinquef oil-roots, | but she just takes the milkwort-root and puts it into her mouth, for | they are very short. After eating, she | puts away what is left over and washes her hands. | After doing so, she. gets sleepy. Generally (the people) go to || sleep immediately after having 40 eaten milkwort-root, for it makes one (very) sleepy. | Therefore the Indians do not eat it until evening. This is not | used for inviting many tribes. Only the married couple | and their children eat the milkwort-root. There is only one way of | cooking it. That is all about this. ||

If they eat much of the milkwort-root, it makes them feel squeam- 45 ish, | therefore it is called hoqlwale.

1 Lily.1 — When the people have a winter dance, the owner of lilybulbs promises a [ lily-bulb-feast to the Sparrow Society. | In the evening he takes his basket | down to the beach of his house and puts 5 stones || into it. He puts in as many as he thinks he can carry; | and he carries them into the house, and he puts them down | near the fireplace in the middle of the house; and he does not stop mi til he thinks | he has enough to steam the bulbs. In the morning, when day comes, | he sends the Sparrow Society to invite the various

10 dance-owners || and the head Sparrows, while he himself is building up the fire in his house. | After he has put on the crosspieces on the fire of his house, he throws the stones on to it; | and when he has put all the stones on, he lights the fire under | both ends. Then the wood begins to burn under the stones with which he is going to cook the | bulbs. Then he takes a large square box and puts it down

15 close || to the fire in the middle, and he also puts down dishes | and two tongs, and oil is put down. | Then he takes two large buckets and goes himself | to draw fresh water, and he pours the water into the square box. When | it is almost half full, he stops. Then he goes

20 to || draw more water, so that the large buckets will be full of fresh water, j His wife takes a large, fiat-bottomed, small-meshed basket and | places it next to the box; and the woman goes and gets the | lily-bulb-box. |

As soon as everything is in readiness, they send out four || member.- 25 of the Sparrow Society belongirg to the friends of the host to call again, | and they all go and call again. When they come | back, they go out again to see if any one hrs not come, for the | head Sparrows are now coming in. When the members of the head Sparrows are all in, | the messengers go again to call the dancers; and they come in, the four|| (messengers) leadirg the dancers. Then they announce 30 that they are coming, | and they come in. As soon as they are all in, they sit down. | Then they untie the top of the box, and they take out the lily-leaves | and throw them on the fire. Then they take a small-meshed | flat-bottomed basket and put it close to the top of the lily-box. || With their hands they take the plants out of the box 35 and put them into | the small-meshed, flat-bottomed basket. When it is full, [ they put the basket into a large dish and pour some water into it. | Then they move the bulbs with their hands, so that the soil comes off. | When they are all washed, two men take each one pair of long || toi gs, and with them they pick up the red-hot stones. They I 40 dip these into the water in the large buckets, so that the I ashes sticking to them come off, and they put them into the water in the | square box. They only stop putting in the red-hot stones | when the water begins to boil; and when it begins to boil, they || put the 45 basket with the lily-bulbs into it; | and when it is in, they put some

47 more red-hot | stones into it, not very many, so that the water boils hard. They are not | long in the water and they are done. Then they take out the basket with the bulbs, | and they pour the boiled

50 bulbs into the large dish. || Then they put the flat-bottomed basket again close to the lily-bulb-box, | and they pour some more raw bulbs into it; and when it is full, | they put it into the large dish to wash the bulbs; | and they pour some water on them and move them witli their hands; and when all the soil is off, | they put the

55 basket with the bulbs into the hot water. They || pick up some more red-hot stones and put them into it; | and when the water boils up, they stop putting | red-hot stones into it. When they are done, they | take out the flat-bottomed lily-basket and pour the bulbs into | another large dish. They keep on doing this, and they ||

60 only stop when all the lily-bulbs are out of the box. |

'linn the wife of the host takes out the dishes | and the spoonbaskets, and oil; and | two men go and take up each one large ladle,

65 and | each one empty dish, and they put these close || to the dish in which the cooked lily-bulbs are. They dip the large | ladle into the bulbs, and they pour them into the empty dish. | When the dish is more than half full, they go and put them down on the | left-hand side inside the door; and they continue doing so with | many empty 70 dishes. They only stop when cooked || lily-bulbs are in front of all of them. When they have done so, they take | oil and pour on much od. When | this has been done, they take the large ladles and stir (the bulbs); | and after stirring them, they take the spoon-basket | 75 and give the spoons to those who are to eat the bulbs; || and when every one has a spoon, they put the dishes with the bulbs | in front of those who are to eat the lily-bulbs. When they have all been put down, | the guests take the spoons and begin to eat; | and after they have done so, they drink a little water, for | they do not want to get squeamish, because there is much oil in it, for || there is more oil 80 than lily-bulbs. It tastes bitter when there is only a little | od with it: therefore they put much oil in, to remove the bitter taste. | After drinking, the guests go out. | That is all about one way of cooking it. |

Boiled Lily-Bulbs. — There is another way of cooking them. | They I wash them in the same way as I j said before; and the only difference is that they are boiled, for | they pour them into a small kettle after washing them, and they take an || old mat and cover them over with 5 it. After that they tuck it in all round | inside of the small kettle, so that steam can not come through. | And after they finish this, they dip up some water and pour it over the | old mat covering; and when

9 (the woman) thinks that the | water passes a little more than half the height of the lily-bulbs in the small kettle, she puts it on the ||

10 fire. She does not leave it there a long time boiling, before | she takes it off of the fire. She takes off the covering, and | takes her small dish, which she brings and puts down, and also her oU and her | spoon. Then she takes the spoon and dips it into the | boiled lily-

15 bulbs. Then she drains off the liquid; || and when all the liquid has run out, she pours (the bulbs) into a small dish, | and continues doing this with the others; and when they have | all been put into small dishes, she presses them with the back of the spoon, | until they are mashed ; and when they are mashed, they are | like wet flour, she takes

20 oil and pours it jj in. There is much oil on them. After doing so, she eats with the | spoon. Now she does in the same way as | I said before. Lily-bulbs are never baked in ashes, for | they are very soft when cooked. That is all. ]

25 Elderberry Cakes. — Now I will talk about the || eating of elderberry-cakes. When winter comes, and when | the tribe of the owner of elderberry-cakes have a winter dance, (the owner) invites his | tribe at noon; for elderberry-cakes must not be eaten in the | morning, because they give stomach-ache. Therefore they just invite | those who are to eat the elderberries when they think that the people have eaten their breakfast. || At noon they invite all the men when | they 30 have a whiter dance. As soon as the messengers go out to rail, | the wife of the one who gives the elderberry-feast gets ready and | clears her house. After she has done so, she brings out her | dishes, which she puts down at the right-hand side inside the || door of the 35 house where the elderberries are to be eaten. There she also puts the large water-buckets | and the elderberry-boxes and oil. When | everything is ready, she sends some member of (her husband's) numaym to go and | draw water; and when those who have gone to get water come back, she fills | the large buckets with water; and the woman also takes her spoon-basket || and puts it down ready by her seat at 40 the left-hand side | inside the door of the house where the elderberries are to be eaten. Now | the guests come in, after they have been called again by the messengers. As soon as | they come in, they wash the dishes; and when this is done, | (the woman) unties the cover of the elderberry -box and takes out the || elderberry-cakes. She unties the 45 cedar-bark strings, and | throws two cakes of elderberries into each of the dishes. | As soon as every one is in a dish, fresh water is poured on; | and she leaves them there while the feasters begin to sing | their feast-songs. She wants the elderberries to soak. || As 50 soon as those who are to eat the elderberries finish singing | the four

52 winter-dance songs, | all the young men of the host's numaym sit down by the side of | the dishes in which the elderberries arc rubbed. Each takes hold of a soaked | elderberry-cake; and they rub them to

55 pieces, since the liquid has all been soaked up || into the elderberrycakes. When they are all j in pieces, they rub them with the open right hand, so that they become really thick | and well mixed with water. After doing so, they take | oil and pour it into the whole number of dishes. | They put in much oil; and after doing so, they

60 give [| the spoons to the guests; and after every one of those who are to eat the elderberries have one, | they carry the elderberry-dishes, one for each six | men, and immediately the guests begin to eat the elderberries. They | just suck out the juice and blow out the seeds, |

65 but the old people swallow them with the seeds. || After they have eaten, water is passed around, and they | rinse their mouths, because seeds remain | inside the mouth. After doing so, they drink a little | water, and then they go out when they have | finished. ||

70 I will talk about the elderberries that are not tied into bundles i when I talk about the salal-berries when these are picked, | for the elderberries get ripe first of all the various kinds of berries. That is | why they go first to pick these. |

Unripe Elderberries. — Now I will talk again about || the boiled 75 elderberries; that is, before they are red. | Only the old women like very much to eat elderberries, | and they go first to get elderberries when they are still green; | for, as soon as a woman sees elder- berries that are still green, she takes | a small small-meshed basket and goes to pick the elderberries. When she arrives || at the elder- 80 berry-bushes, she plucks off the elderberries, which are in bunches, | and throws them into the basket for carrying elderberries. When it is | full, she goes home at once and puts | down the basket with the elderberries. She takes her small kettle and | carries it down to the beach. Then she puts down the kettle, || picks up gravel, and puts 85 it into the small kettle. | She takes care that no sand that sticks to the gravel | gets into the kettle. When it is half full from the bottom with | gravel, she carries the little kettle with the gravel in it into the house, and | puts it down where she is working at the elderberries. Then she takes her || small-meshed basket with elderberries 90 in it, and she pours the elderberries | into the small kettle for cooking elderberries. When they are all in, she dips up a | little water and pours it in. She takes an old piece of matting | and puts it on as a cover. Then she puts the kettle on the fire, and | watches it until it boils up; and as soon as it boils up, || she takes it off and takes off the 95

96 covering. She takes her small dish | and spoon and puts them down hy the side of the small kettle | in which the elderberries have been cooked. .She takes her spoon and pokes under the | boiled elderberries, and lifts them up and puts them into | the dish from which the elderberries are eaten; and after she has done so, she turns her 100 spoon over and || presses it into the boiled elderberries, which are still in bunches on the stems. | Now she breaks them to pieces; and when they get thick and pasty, she | takes oil and pours it over them. After doing so, she | takes her spoon and again presses (the elderberries) with the back of the spoon. | After doing so, she licks off the 5 juice from the spoon and || puts it down. Then she takes a cedarstick and splits it so that it is like | a pair of tongs. She takes a piece of split cedar-bark and ties it on one end to | keep it from splitting, and the tongs are one span | in length. When the tongs are finished, they | are used like a fork. She puts them into the boiled ||

10 berries which are mixed with the stems. Then she puts (the tongs) into her mouth and sucks out the juice; | and when all the juice has been sucked out, she blows out the stems and the | seeds. She continues doing so while she is eating the boiled | elderberries. After she has done this, she puts away what is left, | so that she can eat it

15 after a while. Then she takes up some water and || rinses her mouth , so that the seeds that are in her mouth may come out. | After she boas] rectpes 569

has done this, she drinks a little | water; and after doing this, she 117 cats roasted salmon | with oil. She does this with the roasted salmon [ so that she may get no stomach-ache. Now that is all about the elderberries. ||

Salal-Berry Cakes. — Now I will talk about the long salal-berry 1 cakes when they are | squeezed (in water). First of all, the woman takes her | dishes. She puts them down (in a row). She goes to draw water, and | pours it into the dishes. When the water is in each dish, || she takes shredded cedar-bark and | washes them, beginning at one 5 end. She uses the shredded | cedar-bark in washing them so that all the dirt may come off. When | they are clean, she takes the box with long salal-berry cakes, | unties the string holding down the cover, ]] takes off the cover, and takes off the skunk-cabbage covering. 10 She puts it down, and takes | out the long salal-berry cakes and breaks them into | five pieces lengthwise. She puts each one of the | pieces into a dish. There are five | dishes to each long salal-berry cake ; and when || there is a piece in each dish, she goes to draw water 15 and pours | it in; and when there is water in the dishes, she takes | a mat and covers up the dishes with the pieces of salal-berry [ cake. She leaves them in this way until the morning, when daylight comes. | She leaves them there all night. || In the morning, when daylight 20

21 comes, the young men go to call the people to | eat the long salalberry cakes. They all come in after the young men have called them | four times. Then the woman takes off the mat | covering of the dishes, and the young men go and stand each | next to a dish,

25 and they sit down and put [| both hands into the soaked berry-cake. They | take a handful of the berry-cake, squeeze it into a ball, and, when they take it out, | they squeeze it again, so that the ball of berries gets smaller; | and they stop squeezing only when it is all dissolved and the liquid is thick. ] Then they stop squeezing the

30 berry-cake. The woman goes || to get oil, and pours it on. They

. put much oil on ; | and after doing so, the woman takes the | basket containing her horn spoons. (For horn spoons | are made for eating salal-berry cakes, because they are all black, | and the spoons do not

35 turn black after being nsed by those || who eat long salal-berry cakes, as the wooden spoons do, when | they begin to use them for eating salal-berry cakes. Even | if they are new, [the wooden spoons] at once turn black all over. I Therefore they use only horn spoons to eat | long salal-berry cakes when they are given at a feast, because [the berries! ''" no* *)i('k to them.) ||

40 I only wished to turn for a while to this. | They give a spoon to every guest who | eats long salal-berry cake. After this has been done, they | put before them the dishes containing salal-berries mixed 43 with water. Now there are | six men to each dish. When the dishes have all been put down, || they immediately begin to eat the | 45 squeezed long salal-berry cakes in the dishes with their horn spoons. After eating, | the salal-berry dishes are taken away | and put down at the left-hand side of the door of the | feasting-house. Then the guests go out at once. || They do not drink any water after the feast. 50 That is all about this. |

Raw Salal-Berries (Eating raw, ripe salal-berries). — | When the l woman comes home after picking | ripe salal-berries, her husband goes and calls whomever he likes | to come to eat ripe salal-berries. When || the guests are all in, the woman takes a long | narrow mat 5 and spreads it in front of those who are to | cat the ripe salal-berries. Her husband takes the | basket containing the salal-berries and pours them all along the mat in | front of his guests. He pours out || all, 10 so that it reaches to the end of the guests.. His wife pours oil into | oil-dishes: and as soon as she has poured in the oil, her | husband takes the oil-dishes and puts them on the salal-berries. | He puts them far enough apart for the men to reach them, | and there are four men to each. || After all the oil-dishes have been put down, the guests 15 take I the salal-berries, each one bunch. They dip them into the oil; |

17 and after they have done this, all the salal-berries are covered with oil. | They shake off the oil, take the bunch out, and | eat them off one at a

'20 time; and when all have been taken off, they throw the stem || into the fire. Then they take another bunch and | do in the same way, and all the guests do the same. | After they have eaten, they all go out of the house. | They drink no water after eating it, for they | do

25 not want to remove the sweetness from the mouth. || For this reason they do not drink any water. The reason why| the branch is thrown into the fire by the one who has eaten the berries is, that they do not want any one to take it | for witchcraft; for the man's breath is on it, because he has bitten off the | salal-berries and it remains on it. Therefore they are afraid. Now that is all | about salal-berries. [| 1 Cakes of Currants ' (Eating currant-cakes) . — First | the woman takes the dishes and she brings them down and she puts them down on the left-hand side of the | door of the house where the currant-cakrs are to be eaten; and she places there also oil | and the horn-spoon 5 basket and also large water-buckets, || are put down on the floor, and also long mats.2 | . . .

As soon as he stops speaking, the wife of the | host takes the box containing the currant-cakes and unties the cover. | She takes out

1 Ribes bracteosus Dougl. and Ribcs pctiolare Dougl. 'Continued on page 751, line IS, to page 75J, line 82.

the currant-cakes, and unties the | string with which the bundles are tied; and she gives them to the two messengers, and || they put two 10 cakes into each dish. | When they are in each dish, (the messengers) pour a little more | water on; and after doing so, the woman | asks some of her husband's guests to squeeze and rub the [ currant-cakes. Immediately some of the young men come |] from their seats and sit 15 down alongside of the currant-dishes. | They take out of the water a soaked currant-cake, | roll it up and break it into pieces. When it is all in pieces, | they break it into smaller pieces, so that they are very small. Then they | gather up what has been broken into small pieces, and they make a ball, || and squeeze it with both hands so 20 that it becomes round; | and they squeeze it for a short time, and put the ball | into the currant-dish and into the juice, which is now becoming thick. | They press the ball with their right hands and make it Hat; | and when it is flattened out, they rub it with the right hand; || and before they have rubbed it very long, it gets pasty, because | the 25 ball dissolves in the water in which it is rubbed. As soon as it [ is very thick, they stop rubbing. Then they wash | their hands, and, after doing so, they walk back and | sit down at their seats. Then the wife of the || host takes a box of oil-bottles, and it is put down 30 next to her seat. | She unties the top; and when she takes off the |

33 cover, she puts it down. She takes out a ] large oil-bottle of kelp and gives it to the two messengers. | One of them bites off the string with which the mouth of the kelp bottle is tied; and, after tak-

35 ing off || the string, he holds it with his right hand, and | squeezes the oil out on the rubbed currant-cakes, while | the other one holds the head of the kelp bottle with his left | hand, and he squeezes it with lus right hand, so that the oil comes out | at the mouth. If the oil does not come out easily, because it is thick || in cold weather,

40 then the two messengers take hold, one of each end, | of the oilbottle. They stand one each side of the fire in the middle of the house, | and they pull the kelp bottle containing the od backward and forward over the fire in the middle of the house. | When the oil is melted, then they begin to pour it over the | currant-cakes in the

45 dish. They put on much oil, and || continue doing so witli the others. After oil has been poured on all of them, | they take the horn-spoon basket and | distribute the spoons among the feasters. After this is done, they put | the currant-dishes in front of them, | one dish for each six men. As soon as || all (of the berry-dishes) have been put

50 down, the guests begin to eat the berries. | They are told to eat everything that is in the dish; and this they do, for | these berries are never taken home when they are eaten in the house of the owner, |

iioas] RECIPES 575

because it brings bad luck to take them home, as the people of olden 53 times say. | Therefore they try to eat all; and after emptying their dishes, || they go out of the feasHiouse. That is all about the berry- 55 cakes. |

Raw Currants. — Currants are also eaten raw. When | the woman comes home from picking currants, she | asks her husband to get a dish, and put it | next to her seat. Then she unties the top of || the currant-basket, and she sits down (with her husband), | one on each 60 side of the | currant-basket; and the large dish is put down on the outer side of the currant-basket. Then they both take the currants | out of the basket ami strip them and put them into the dish. As soon as | they have been stripped off the stems, the stems are thrown || into the fire. The woman | and her husband continue doing this, 65 trying to see who will strip them most quickly. When | the currants have all been stripped off, the man goes and calls whomever lie likes | fromamonghisrelatives,orhemayevencallhisnumaym; | and assoon as the husband goes to call all those who are to eat the raw || currants, she takes oil, and the spoon-basket with horn spoons, | which she 70 keeps in readiness at the place where she sits down, and she also takes medium-sized dishes | and holds them ready. Then her husband comes in, followed by his guests; | for they do not sit down as they do at a great feast. The guests sit down | any way they like.

75 As soon as all arc in, || the woman wipes out with shredded cedarbark | a medium-sized dish. As soon as she has done so, she takes the | large dish with the stripped currants and puts it down where she is sitting. | Then she takes a large wooden ladle, dips it into the |

80 stripped currants, and dips them into the || medium-sized dish. When it is half full, she puts it aside and | takes another mediumsized dish, and she puts it down where the other one | stands con- taining the stripped currants. She puts | stripped currants into it; and when it is half full, she | puts it away. She continues doing this

85 with the others; and when || all the medium-sized dishes contain currants, she takes her oil | and pours it on, so that they are floating in it. When | she has done so, the horn spoons are given to all those who are to eat | the raw currants; and when every one who is going to eat currants lias a spoon, | then the dishes with the currants are

90 placed in front || of them. Now there are three men to | each dish. As soon as all (the dishes) have been put down, | those who are to eat the currants take up the horn spoons, and | all begin to eat the currants floating in the oil. There | is more oil in (each dish) than there are currants, because the currants without oU cause constipation. ||

95 They do not stop eating until all | the oU and the currants are at an end. Then those who have been eating the raw currants go out. I

These are not given at a feast to many | tribes. That is all about 97 the currants. |

Mashed Currants and [ Salal- Berries. — When the salal-berries are 1 thoroughly ripe, | the woman goes to pick salal-berries. and at the same time she picks currants | which are also ripe. || She has one 5 basket for salal-berries, and another | basket for currants. When the baskets are full, j she puts on the top covering of hemlock-branches; and after doing so, | she ties down the top and carries them on her back to her | house. There she puts them down next to her seat. || She puts down a large dish on the floor, outside of her seat, | and she 10 takes the salal-berry basket and puts it down at the | right-hand side of the large dish. She unties the string on top of her | salal-berry basket, and, after doing so, she pulls out the | hemlock-branches which cover it, and throws them into the fire. Then she takes jj one of the salal-berry branches and strips off the berries | into the 15 large dish. She continues doing this, and only | stops when it is all done. She throws the stripped | stems into the fire. Then she puts aside the empty basket, and | takes the basket containing the currants and puts it in the place of the || empty basket. She unties the 20 top string; and | as soon as it is off, she pulls off the hemlock-branches

22 and throws them into the ] fire. When this is done, she takes out a hunch of currants | and strips them off, and puts them on top of the salal-berries | which have been stripped oil' and which are in the

25 dishes. She strips the currant-stems || and puts the currants on the salal-berries that has been stripped off, and | she throws the currantstems into the fire. She continues doing this with the | others; and as soon as the basket is empty, | she puts it away. She takes her husband's stone hammer | by the small end with the right hand,

30 and || with the big end she pounds the mixed salal-berries and currants. | She pounds them with the stone hammer for a long time ami only stops when | all the salal-berries and currants have all burst and are | all mixed. When this is done, she tells her husband | to

35 go and invite whomever he likes from among the chiefs, || for only chiefs eat this kind of food, consisting of salal-berries | mixed with currants; and the owner of this kind of food, | salal-berries and currants, eats it, — the woman, her husband, | and their children. Then the woman's husband goes out to | invite the chiefs and their wives;

40 and as soon as the woman's || husband goes out of the house, she takes her small dishes and her | horn-spoon basket, and puts them dow;i next to her seat, | and also her oil, and she spreads out a new mat on which | her husband's guests are to sit. As soon as she has done so,

45 the chiefs come in with their wives, and husband and wife || sit down next to each other on the mat that lias been spread out for them, j 45 When they are all in, the wife of the host prepares | her small dishes. She counts how many | married couples there are, and she puts down the same number of small dishes for [two of] them. [ Each man and wife will have one dish. She takes soft shredded cedar-bark, || wipes 50 out the small dishes, and, after doing so, | she takes a large horn spoon, takes the | large dish of salal-berries mixed with currants, and puts it down next | to her seat. Then she dips the large horn ladle in | and stirs the berries. After doing so, she dips them out and puts thein || into the small dishes. She only stops when they are nearly 55 filled. | She continues doing this with the others. When she has finished, | she takes oil and pours it on, and she only stops pouring it on | when the oil covers the top of the mixture of salal-berries and | currants. As soon as she has finished, she gives the spoon-basket || to her husband, who distributes the spoons among his | guests. 60 After he has distributed them, he puts down the | dishes containing the salal-berries and currants, giving one to eacli couple. | Each dish is given to two, a husband and Ins wife. | When they have been put down, they eat with their spoons. They || try to eat it all, eating with 65 their spoons; and after they have eaten, | they go out. They never

67 drink any water alter eating it, for they do not want | to lose the good taste of the salal-berries from their mouths. ! That is all about this. | 1 Huckleberries. — As1 soon as (the woman) enters her house, she puts down | the two baskets, takes a | short wide board and puts it down flat near the place | where she always sits: and she takes a log and || 5 rolls it towards the board, so li al one end of the short wide hoard rests on it. | When this is done, it is like this: She also takes a piece of wood which is not really thick (2) and | puts it down, and she takes anew mat (4) and | spreads it out. She

10 lifts up the edge so that it lies on the piece of lire-wood at (2), || and she lifts up the lower end of the board (3) for cleaning the | huckleberries, and spreads under it one edge of the mat (4) on to which the | cleaned huckleberries roll. As soon as this has been done, she pushes small pieces of wood under the | sides of the cleaning-board, so that it lies firmly on the support (1) | for the cleaning-board. Alter

15 all this has been done, she takes a Ij bucket with water and puts it down; and she takes her | huckleberry-baskets, unties the top, and takes off the | skunk-cabbage covering. As soon as all this is off, she takes the | bucket and pours water over the board (3). | The water

20 runs over it, as it runs down the board (3) . || As soon as it is wet, she |

i Continued from p. 21 1. line 40.

puts down her bucket, takes up the basket with huckleberries, and, | 21 beginning at the upper end of the cleaning-board, she pours on the huckleberries | while it is still wet. The huckleberries roll down [ to the end of the cleaning-board, || on to the mat (4) which has been 25 spread out; and the | leaves stick to the cleaning-board (3), so that there are | no leaves on the mat on to which the cleaned huckleberries roll. | As soon as the huckleberries are cleaned, | the woman who works at them calls her husband to || take hold of one end of the 30 board; and they carry it | out of the house in which the huckleberries are being worked, and they put it down flat to be | dried, for, as soon as it is dry, the | leaves fall off, and the wind | blows them away. ||

Mashed Huckleberries. — Now, you know how huckleberries are 35 cleaned, | and I shall not talk about it again. | When the woman has picked many huckleberries, she | asks her husband to go and invite many people of different tribes, | and he sends out two young men to call for the first time. || They name the name of the child of the host 40 who is about to give a feast of mashed | huckleberries. The woman and her husband take out | oil and dishes and spoons, so that they stand ready at the | left-hand side of the house in which mashed huckleberries are to be eaten. | The house has already been cleaned,

1 Continued on p. 754, line 1.

r) and mats have been spread out around it. || After the young men have called four times, the people come into the house where the | mashed huckleberries are to be eaten. Immediately they | begin to sing the feast songs; and now the | numaym of the host comes to help him put | the huckleberries into the dishes. ||

50 The dishes are half filled with huckleberries; and when | there are some in each, they begin to mash them with both hands, | so that they burst; and after they have | burst, they pour oil over them, so that there is one half | mashed huckleberries and one half oil. When

55 they have finished, |j they distribute the spoons among the guests; and when each has one, they I put the dishes with the mashed huckleberries one in front of eacli six | men; and when they have been put down, | they begin to eat, and all | eat with their spoons the

60 mashed huckleberries; and they only || stop when they have eaten everything. Then they go out of the house. That is all | about it. | They never drink water afterwards. This is all about j oneway, what I say about the huckleberries. 1 Cleaning Huckleberries (Blowing huckleberries) .—When | awoman cuiiics home who has tried to pick many huckleberries, but who has found only a few; | and when her basket is only half full of huckleberries, which she tried to shake off; | and when the men are sitting 5 on their summer seats || outside the house of the owner of the huckleberries, — then (the woman) goes with the | huckleberries she has 6 shaken off to the men on the summer seat, and | puts clown her basket. The woman says, "Blow at the huckleberries that | I tried to shake off!" and immediately | the men all put the right hand into the || huckleberry-basket that she tried to fill, and take a handful each, 10 pour | it to and fro from hand to hand, and blow at them so as to blow off the leaves; | and when all the leaves have been blown off, they put the huckleberries | into the mouth and cat them; and they only stop eating the | blown huckleberries when they finish t! em. They do this when it is || very hot, for the blown huckleberries arc cooling 15 when they | are eaten on a warm day. Thai is all about t] is.

Viburnum-Berries with Water and Oil. — | Now I will talk about the eating of viburnum-berries | mixed with water and oil. They do not invite many people || to eat these, for this is only the food for husband 20 and wife | and their children, when there are no more ripe viburnumberries, and when the man wishes to | invite his near relatives. When whiter comes, | and the oil they put on the viburnum-berries gets thick, the | woman takes a wedge and wedges off the cover || of the 25 box containing the berries mixed with water and oil. When the cover | is off, she takes a small dish and a spoon, and she puts the | small dish on the corner of her box, and she dips the spoon into the |

mixture of water and oil, for only this shows on top, for it | is thick.

30 She dips into it until she comes to the viburnum-berries. || Then she puts these into a small dish. When there are enough in it, she puts | the dish containing the water and oil and the berries next to the | box. She takes the cover and puts it on bottom-side up, so that | the pegs stand upward. After doing so, she picks up | the dish and

35 puts it down in front of her husband || and her children. After doing so, she takes her small | spoon-basket, and she gives each a spoon, | and they begin to eat with the spoons. Then they eat | the viburnumberries mixed with oil and water. They are in clumps, for they stick together | on account of the thick oil. They do not blow out any-

40 tiling || when they eat them, for the women clean them well when they are | working at the viburnum-berries. After they have eaten, the woman | takes her small dish and puts it away. She takes a dry salmon ajid | roasts half of it over the fire; and as soon as one side of it begins to be blistered | a little, it is done. Then she breaks it

45 into small pieces || and puts (the pieces) into a small dish. She places this in front | of her husband and children, and they eat it to take the | oil taste out of their mouths. Therefore they eat the blistered | salmon without oil. They eat dried salmon without oil, because I the oil and the viburnum-berries burn the throats of those who eat them. After || they have eaten the salmon without oil, | 50 they drink a little water. That is all about this. |

Ripe Sucked Viburnum-Berries. — When the viburnum-berries | are 1 quite ripe, they are sucked. | The woman takes her front-basket and hangs it in front of her body. | Then she goes to the viburnum patch ; and when she gets there, she picks off (the. berries) and puts them into her || basket. When (her basket) is full, she goes | home. At once 5 she calls any one who likes to come, | and gives them ripe viburnumberries to suck. When | the guests come, they sit down. The woman takes a new mat | and spreads it hi front of her guests; and when it is down on the floor, || she takes the basket with the berries 10 and pours them | on the mat that has been spread out. Then she puts down her | basket, as it is now empty. She scatters the sucked berries | over the whole length of the mat. As soon as this has been done, | she takes an oil-dish and pours some oil into it. || After this 15 she puts it down next to the sucked berries. | Then the men take hold of one bunch of | berries each, dip them into the oil, and put them into the mouth, | and then they suck them. They just put them on the tongue | and press them against the palate; and then the berry bursts, || and they suck out the edible part. | The stems are thrown 20 into the fire. They continue doing this | while they are eating and

22 sucking the viburnum-berries, and they only stop when everything has been eaten. | Some of them stop sooner, because they can not stand to have their tongues | rubbed through. These are the ones 25 who have never eaten sucked viburnum-berries before. || As soon as they have done so, they go out. That is all about the viburnumhe rry. j 1 Steamed Viburnum-Berries. — There is one tiling that I forgot when I | described the steaming of viburnum-berries, | for you know the way in which viburnum-berries are picked when they are green. | In 5 this way they are eaten in Knight Inlet. || As soon as the woman comes home, she picks off the stems and puts | the cleaned berries into the large basket. When | they have been picked off, she puts the large | basket with the picked berries in a cool corner of the house. | After this has been done, she goes into the woods, carlo rying her basket on her back. She is going to || look for fern-fronds and skunk-cabbage leaves, and she tries to fmd very broad ones. | As soon as she finds broad leaves of skunk-cabbages, | she breaks off the leaves; and when she has enough, she leaves them there J and goes on, carrying her basket on her hack and looking for fern-fronds. When | she has found these, she puts the basket down, picks off the 15 fern-fronds and || puts them into the basket. When it is full, she ties down the top and carries the basket with fern-fronds | back the way she came. She picks up the skunk-cabbage on her way | home.

Then she puts down the skunk-cabbage at the place where she | put the large basket, and she puts down the || basket with the fern- 21) fronds. After this has been done, she takes | her clam-digging stick and a large horse-clam shell, and she sits down [ in an empty corner of the house. Then she pushes the digging-stick into the ground so that it | stands and measures off (a distance) two spans away from it. | Then she uses a small || cedar-stick for a mark. She takes her 25 clam-digging stick and marks | a line on the floor, beginning at the place where it was standing to the place where the cedar-stick is standing. | Then she measures another two spans | fromtheendofhermark. { She puts up a cedar-stick at the end of the line that she. measured, [j and marks it, starting from the end of her mark towards the cedar- 30 stick that is standing up. | After she has done so, it is this way:| After she has done so, she takes the cedar-stick and measures with it, beginning at (1) and gohig | towards (2), and she also measures the line (3) to (4) . | After she has 4 done this, she takes the cedar-stick and puts it up ||

at the end of the last line she measured, and she | measures again 35 with her cedar-stick the distance from (1) to (3); | she marks the end of the cedar-stick measure; | after this she puts it down, beginning at (2), | towards (4), and she marks it. Then it is in this way:

40 i After || she has marked it, she begins to dig along the marks which she has put down. She digs with her | digging-stick and the large shell. When the hole is one span | and four finger widths deep, she | stops digging. 4 She takes dry | driftwood and puts it into the hole;

45 and as soon as it shows level with the ground, || she puts small pieces of driftwood over it crosswise. Then she puts | stones on; and after this has been done, she lights a fire underneath for steaming | the mashed viburnum-berries. When the fire blazes up, she takes a large | dish, washes it out well with water, and, when it is clean, | she takes the basket with viburnum-berries and puts it down

50 next || to the washed large dish. She takes her husband's stone hammer | and sits down next to the large dish. Then | she takes a handful of green picked berries and puts them into the | large dish. Then she pounds them with the stone hammer until | they are crushed. When they are all crushed, she gathers them up at one

55 end || of the large dish, and she takes another handful of berries | with her left hand, puts them into the steaming-box for green | virburnum-berries, and she pounds them with her [ stone hammer with which she crushes them. When they are all crushed, | she gathers them up at the end, like the first ones that she crushed; ||

60 and she continues doing this with the whole number of green berries.

When ! all have been crushed, she takes her basket to the back 61 of the J house, and breaks off tips of | alder-tree branches and puts them into the basket. When she has enough of these, | she picks up old alder-leaves and lays them on top; || and when she has 65 enough of these, she carries them back j to the house, and she puts them down where she is going to steam the pounded | green viburnum-berries. When she has done so, she takes her tongs | and puts them down, and she also goes to draw water in her bucket, so that it is | ready, and she also has a mat to cover them. When fl everything is in readiness, she waits until the | fire-wood is burnt up, 70 although the stones are already red-hot on the fire | in the place where she is going to steam the berries. A long time after she has seen that the fire | has burned out, she takes her tongs and picks | out the charcoal that is left. When |[ it has all been taken out, she levels 75 down the red-hot stones | until they are level. After doing so, she waits again j for a short time, for she wants the charcoal to be all burned. | As soon as she sees that it is all | burnt up, she takes her bucket with water and sprinkles || a little water over the red-hot SO stones, until | the ashes that stick to the stones fly off. When this has been done, she takes the | tips of the alder-branches and puts them .on the | stones; and after they are on, she puts the dead leaves on. | She scatters these until they are level. When this is done, she ||

So takes the fern-leaves and spreads them carefully so that they are thick. | After this she takes the skunk-cabbage leaves and | spreads them over them. She bends the edges upwards inside the | steaminghole, and she lays them so that they will not leak, one on top of I tie other. | 'When this has been done, she takes the large dish which

90 In 'Ids the pounded || viburnum- berries, and she pours them into the steaming hole. When | this has been done, she puts down the empty large dish. She takes | broad leaves of the skunk-cabbage and spreads them well over what she is | steaming, and so that it does not leak. Then | she takes her bucket and pours the water in

95 between [[ the leaves enveloping the viburnum-berries | which she is steaming, and the side of the steaming-hole. As soon as she has poured water all round it, | she takes more skunk-cabbage leaves, spreads them over, and | takes a mat, and she adds still more cover to keep the steam down. | After this has been done, she takes a large

Km i shell and scrapes the soil up, || and with it she covers the mats.

That is all about the steaming of viburnum-berries. |

When morning comes after the day when she steamed the viburnumberries, and | when it is almost evening, the woman who steams the viburnum-berries takes the large dish | and pours some water into it.

She washes it out, so that all the || crushed viburnum-berries come off, 5 for the dish in which she steams the berries is the same dish in which she | crushed them. When it is clean, she | puts it down next to the steaming-hole. She takes a large | ladle, which is made for this kind of work, to scoop | out things that are still hot. She takes it and || puts it into the large dish. When this is done, she takes a | 10 large clam-shell and scrapes away the soil with which she covered | the steaming-hole. When it is all off, she takes | hold of two corners of the mat, turns it back, and puts it down on the floor. | Now the cooked skunk-cabbage wrapping begins to show. || She peals it off; 15 and when it is off, the steamed | viburnum-berries look like thick dirty water. | They are reddish in color. When all the skunkcabbage leaves have been taken off, she | takes the large dish in which the large ladle is kept and | puts it down by the side of the hole. Then she takes out the long-handled ladle, || dips it into the 20 steaming-hole, and pours the viburnum-berries into the large | dish. She does not stop until they are all in the large dish. | Then they have all been taken out of the steaming-hole. As soon as this is finished, | she takes up the dish hi which the steamed berries are, and | puts it in a cool place. She lets it cool off quickly. Then she takes a || mat 25 and puts it over it, for she does not want the. soot to drop | into it.

27 After doing this, she takes medium-sized dishes [ and washes them out with water. When this has been done, | she piles them up. Then she takes her spoon basket, in order to | have it ready, and puts

30 it down next to her seat. When she thinks that the || steamed viburnum-berries are cold enough, she sends her husband to invite whomever he | bkes among his friends, or, if he wishes | to invite (them), the members of his numaym. He invites them to | come and eat steamed crushed berries. When they | come in, the woman gets

35 ready. She takes a || medium-sized dish from the pile, and she puts it down at the | place where she always sits; and she takes oil and | puts it down where she sits; and finally she takes the dish containing | the steamed crushed viburnum-berries and puts it down | just out-

40 side of her seat. Then she takes a medium-sized || dish and puts it across the corner of the large dish in which the steamed | crushed viburnum-berries are. She takes a long-handled ladle, | dips it into the berries, and puts it into a medium-sized | dish. When it is half full, she puts it down; and | she does this with all the medium-sized

45 dishes. When || the crushed steamed viburnum-berries are in all of them, she takes [ oil and pours it in. She does not put in very much oil. | When she has done so, she distributes the spoons among the | guests of her husband; and when every one has one, the woman her-

50 self | places the medium-sized dishes before them. There is || one dish for each three men. When she has put them down, | the guests 51 at once take their spoons and begin to cat the | steamed viburnumberries; and after they have eaten, they drink a very little | water to rinse their mouths. After doing this, | they go out; and now at last this is all about the eating ot || crushed steamed viburnum- 55 berries. |

Brittle Crabapples. — The time to pick crabapples | is when they 1 get large, when they are. still green. When | the woman sees that the apples are getting large, she takes her | small basket and goes where good crabapples are, and picks them off. || She puts them into 5 her small basket ; and when it is full, | she goes home. Then she calls her husband and her 1 children to come and sit down; and when they sit down, she | spreads a food-mat in front of them. | She takes the basket with crabapples and pours the apples on the || mat. Then 10 they take hold of | the bunches of crabapples, one of each, and bite off the | crabapples from the stems and eat them. They | continue doing so, and only stop when they have | all been eaten. They do not eat oil with them, because there is juice inside. || Brittle crabapples are not 15 given at a feast to many tribes, | for only the married couple and their children eat I them. That is all about this. I

Crabapples and Oil. — This is the same as | viburnum-berries and oil,

2U about which I talked before, for you will || only have the same (description). |

Mashed Steamed Crabapples. — The | woman takes her small dish and her spoon, and she dips | some of the crabapples and water out of the box. Then she puts them into her small dish; and when it is |

25 half full, she takes it and puts it down next to her || place. She takes her husband's stone hammer, and she pounds | the crabapples in the small dish; and when they are all broken up, she | puts away the stone hammer that she was using, and she | mashes them with both hands. When they arc all | mashed, she takes oil and pours it on,

30 much of it; || and when this is done, she calls her husband and her children | to come and sit down; and as soon as the whole family has assembled, the | woman takes her spoons and gives one to each. | Then they all eat with their spoons; and | they eat the mashed crab-

35 apples. They only stop || when they have been eaten. They never drink water after eating them. | That is all about it. |

Salal-berries and Crabapples (Salal-berry cakes mixed with mashed ]

crabapples). — The woman takes two dishes and | puts them down next to the place where she always sits. Then she takes | four cakes

5 of salal-berries and puts them into one of the dishes. || As soon as she has finished doing so, she takes some water and pours it in. |

Then she watches until they are just covered with water. Then she 6 stops and | takes the spoon and the other dish, and takes it | to where she keeps the crabapples. She dips her spoon into the | crabapples and puts them into the dish. When it is half full, || there is 10 enough in it. Then she puts it down next to her seat. | Then she takes her husband's stone hammer and pounds | the crabapples; and when they are all pounded up, she puts away the stone hammer. | Then she takes the dish with salal-berries and mashes them with both | hands, the salal-berries which have been soaked. || When they are 1.5 all in pieces, she takes the dish with the pounded crabapples and pours them into the dish with the mashed salal-berries. When they | are all in, she takes the oil and pours it on. After | doing so, she mashes them again with both hands, | so that they are thoroughly mixed. When they are mixed, she stops, and || calls whomever she likes to come 20 to eat the mashed | crabapples mixed with dried salal-berries. When the guests | come and sit down, she gives them a food-mat and spreads it | in front of them. She takes the spoons and distributes | them among them. Finally she puts down in front of them the dish || with the salal-berries and crabapples mixed which she | puts down 25 in front of her guests. Then they take the | goat-horn spoons, for this kind of food is eaten with | goat-horn spoons, and they all eat

30 with their | spoons. They suck out the juice; || and when the juice is out, they blow out the skins. | They continue doing so while they are eating it. When they have eaten it all, | they go out. They never drink water after eating, | and only rinse out the mouth with water, for the food sticks | to the inside of the mouth. They do not

35 like to || drink water after eating this food, because the water causes heart-burn. | Therefore they are afraid to drink it. This is not | used when they invite many tribes, for it is only used by the husband and wife. | That is all about this. | 1 Bunch-Berries.1 — When (the basket) is full,2 (the man) sends his young men | to call his tribe, for he is going to give a feast with the bunch-berries. Then | his wife takes her dishes and puts them down next to her seat, | also the spoons and the oil. As soon as she has 5 finished, || she spreads down the mats for the guests to sit on when they come | in. When they are all in the house, the woman | tells the young men to go and put the berries into the dishes; | and when all the dishes are full of berries, she takes | oil and pours it in. After

10 this lias been done, (the young men) distribute || the spoons among the guests; and when this is done, | they put the dishes with the berries one in front of each four men. | Alter they have, been put down, the

1 Chamaeperklineum unalaschkense (Ledb.) Rydb. ' Continued from p. 221, line 27.

guests | take their spoons and eat the berries; | and after having done so, they go out. There is only one || way of eating the bunch- 15 berries; and they do not sing when | they are invited to this feast. That is all about this. |

Gooseberries. — (The woman1 puts [her basket with gooseberries] down on the floor;) and when a strong wind is blowing, she | spreads out her mat where the wind blows strongest. | She takes four pieces of firewood and puts them down crosswise under the edges || of the 20 mat, so that it is like a nest inside. When this has been done, | she takes her basket with the gooseberries, puts it down | at the end whence the wind is blowing, at the end of the long side of the | billets around the mat. in this way;2 and when the wind begins to blow hard, | she takes hold of each side of the large basket, || and 25 poms out, not violently, the gooseberries so that | they come slowly out of the gooseberry basket when they are | falling into the nest which was made for cleaning them. The woman lifts | the basket up high; and the leaves are blown away by the wind, | and do not fall onto the mat on which they are || cleaned. Only the 30 gooseberries fall down on it. | Now they are cleaned. As soon as this has been done, she goes and puts them back | into the large i Continued from p. 222, line 24.

a That is, she places four small logs in a rectangle and presses the mat into the space so formed, the edges leaning against the logs.

33 basket. Then she carries it on her back | into the house. She goes and pours them into the large dish. As soon as ] she has finished,

35 she picks more gooseberries, and || uses the same mat, and the canoe pole to strike them with. When | her basket is full, she carries | them home to her house. Again she puts down her mat | where the wind blows strongest, and she does the same as | before. When she

40 has many gooseberries, she takes a || low-sided box which is made for this purpose. It is | two spans and two short | spans long, and two

45 spans wide, | and one span | high. The woman takes this || low box and pours the | gooseberries into it. When it is nearly full, she stops pouring them in; | and when she has done so, she builds up a fire and puts | stones into it. When she thinks there are enough for her purpose, |

50 she takes her tongs and puts them down by the side of the fire. || She takes a bucket and goes to draw water. When she | comes back, she pours the water into the small dish, and she | puts the small dish next to the fire. When all this | has been done, the stones on the

55 fire are hot. | She takes her tongs, picks up the red-hot || stones, dips them into the small dish with water in it, | and, when the ashes that stick on the stones come off, she | puts them into the gooseberries. 57 She continues doing this with the other red-hot | stones. The stones are put in close together. When | this is finished, she takes a mat and spreads it over it, and || she leaves it this way some time. 60 When the woman thinks that the stones are getting cool, | she takes oil the mat covering and puts it down. | Then she takes her tongs ami picks out the stones that have cooled off, | and she puts them down next to the fire. When they are all out, | she stirs the berry jam with a cedar stick. || If they are not boiled to pieces, she takes her 65 tongs, | takes out more hot stones, dips | them into the small dish with water, and puts them in. She does not | take very many redhot stones. When it begins to boil up, | she spreads a mat over it; and she does not leave it there long, || before she takes off the covering 70 mat and puts it down. Then she | takes her tongs, picks out the stones from the | gooseberry jam, and puts them down next to the fire, | When the stones are all out, she takes a large dish and | puts it down next to the low-sided box. She takes a || long-handled ladle ■" and dips out the gooseberry jam and puts it into the | large dish. When it is full, she takes up the large dish of | gooseberry jam and puts it down at a cool place | to cool off quickly. When it is cold,

80 she | sends out her husband to invite his friends. He || might call his numaym, if the man wishes to give them the | gooseberry jam. As soon as they | all come in, the woman takes her small dishes, her | spoons, and her oil, and puts them down next to her seat. | Then

85 she sends her husband to get the || gooseberry-jam dish and to put it next to her seat. | When her husband comes, she takes a wooden spoon, | dips it into the jam, and puts it into the | small dishes. When these are halt full, there is enough in them; and | when she has

90 put some gooseberry jam into || the small dishes, she takes the oil and pours it on. She puts | much oil on. After this has been done, she gives a | spoon to each guest; and after this, one | dish with gooseberry jam is put down in front of | each three men. As soon as they

95 have been put down, || (the guests) begin to eat the gooseberry j am. | When they have eaten all, they go out. They never drink | water after it. |

Gooseberries are also eaten raw (and unripe) by the Indians. | They 100 pick them off the gooseberry bushes, or they eat them || in the house. They never call their friends for this. | That is all about the gooseberries. I

Currants. — Currants are also only eaten | from the currant bushes. 1 They do not give these at a feast to many | people or to their relatives, for there are not very many of | these. That is all about this. ||

Solomon's Seal. — This is the same thing. They only eat these off 5 the plant when | they see them growing on a berry patch, for | sometimes the plants have many edible berries. | The tribes are also not invited for these, for there are not | many berries of this kind. They arc not put on the fire and || boiled. That is all about this. | 10

1 Unifnlium dilatatum (Wood) HoweU.

V. BELIEFS AND CUSTOMS Signs (a'qEn)

Body Feelings as Signs. — Twitching of the Crown of iht Head. — 1 When the crown of the head of a man twitches, | he knows that he will cut off his hair for his relative who | is to die; for that is the way the Indians do. As soon as a near | relative dies, and when he has been dead four days, || the hair is cut. | 5

Twitching of the Nose. — When the nose of a man | twitches, he knows that he will blow his nose when he cries for a | relative who is going to die. |

Twitching of the Upper Lip. — When the upper || lip [of our mouth] 10 twitches (a man) knows that tears will run down | wThen he cries for a relative who is going to die. |

Twitching and Itching of the Cheek. — When the cheek | of a woman twitches or itches, she knows that she will scratch her face when she | cries for a relative who is going to die. ||

Heaving of the Stomach. — When the stomach of a man twitches, | 15 the Indians call it "heaving" of the stomach, for the stomach will heave | when he is wailing for one who is going to die. |

Wiping of the Eyes. — When the lower part of the thumb | of the hand of a man twitches, he knows that he will wipe his eyes || with the 20 lower part of his thumb when he wails for a relative who is going to die. |

21 Tremor inter femina. — Cum raulieris alterutra pars vulvae salit | scit inf antem suum moriturura esse; [ hide enim exit; atque. vaginae foramen cum salit, eadem de causa salit. |

25 Tremor penis. — Cum viri penis salit, || propter hoc scit suam uxorem morituram esse. |

Twitching and Itching of the Feet. — When | the feet of a woman twitch and itch, she knows that she will be in a widow's house | on account of her husband when he dies, for she will sit still a long time in the | widow's house. Tins is the same with a man. ||

30 Tremor genus. — Cum viri genu salit, | scit amicam suam esse morituram; nam simul ac | noctu adest vir cum arnica, postquam | cum arnica concubuit, vir ad vulvam amicae genu applicat. | Salit igitur genu viri cum arnica est moritura. ||

35 Twitching of the Upper Arm. — When the shoulder joint of a woman twitches, I she knows that one of her children is going to die, because | her shoulder joint twitches, and that is the place where the child lies when it I sleeps with its mother, j]

40 Twitching of tin Sides. When a woman's sides | twitch, she knows that she will lie sick in bed. |

Twitching of the Whole Body. — When the whole body of a man

I witches, I he knows that one of his children will die, [ if he has many children. First, his arms twitch, || because he carries his child 45 [there]; and afterwards his chest twitches, j for that is the place that his child lies when he carries it about; | afterwards the upper lip [of his mouth] twitches, for | tears run down when he cries; and then his | stomach twitches, for it heaves when he cries. Then he knows || by this that his child is going to die. | 50

Twitching of the Eyelids. — When the eyelids1 of a man | twitch, he knows that it is going to rain that day, for his eye is twitching, | and that is the place where the rain-water [when it rains] runs down. |

Twitching offhi Small ofth Back. When the small || of the back 55 (the part with which the hunter sits in the canoe) twitches, he knows there will be fine weather that | day. There will be no wind, and he will sit for a long time in his | little hunter's canoe paddling about. |

Twitching of the Under-lip. — When the under-lip2 of a | sea hunter twitches, he knows that he will eat all kinds of meat, for || the place 60 where the fat of the meat goes down is twitching, j

Twitching of Feet. — When the toes of the feet | of a man twitch, then a visitor will come, | for he will soon go to meet a visitor. |

Twitching of the Neck. — When the neck of a man twitches, || he 65 knows that his head will be cut off in war. I

1 According to others, the upper eyelids. 2 According to others, the middle line of the chin.

1 Cries of the Raven. — When it is desired that the owner of an afterbirth should understand | the cries of the raven, the after-birth is put down | on the beach where the ravens peck at it. And when it 5 is | pecked at by the ravens, || the man, when he is full grown, will understand the cries of the raven, for | the people of olden times considered it important that the raven came | to report about the arrival of warriors who came to make war upon the tribes. | Then they would come at once and ask one who understands the raven, tumbling about | and crying. It is bad news when they are tumbling 10 about || and feathers fall out. (Below) are the various cries | of the raven, which I learned from an old man of the Kwakiutl, | when they discussed about it in a feast, when I was a child | for when the ravens are crying, a man | whose after-birth has been eaten by ravens is sent out.1 II

15 ga ga ga gad Warriors are coming to make an attack.

gax gax gax .. ..Ravens will eat the bodies of people drowned by the capsizing of canoes.

qlEdzo qlEdzo Hunters will bring much meat to feed the people.

gaga ha hiigae A chief (or someone else) died.

xagaq xagaq . . A woman is going to die.

20 k' lEmax k' temaq It will be calm weather.

sox sox sox r .It will be calm and sunshine.

gfls gflx gus ... . There will be heavy rains.

wax wax wax A stranger will arrive on a visit.

xwo xwo xwo There will be a poor salmon run.

25 x'ok" x'ok" . .When ravens ciy thus while lighting in the air, there will be bad news.

' For the cries and their meanings see Indian text below.

The one whose after-birth has been eaten by the raven understands | 27 this what I am talking about. There are only a few whose afterbirths have been eaten | by the raven. | Eating

(He folds up the morsel, chews the end, and dips it into oil, and 1 keeps on doing so while he is eating.) When he has nearly eaten all, he stops, for it is a bad sign | for a man to eat all that is given to him. |

Picking Huckleberries

As1 soon as (the woman) has finished (picking the berries), she gets ready to | go and pick huckleberries when day comes, in the morning; for || the ancient Indian said that it brings bad luck not to pick 5 huckleberries at once into | a new basket when it has been finished. | Therefore the women immediately get ready to go | as soon as they finish the basket. |

Customs Relating to Sealing

When the flippers (of the seal) have been singed, (the man) strikes off with his || tongs the singed hair, so that it comes off in pieces, for 10 the hunters do not | allow any one to scrape off the singed hair. It yilxwa gwa£wina.-When a raven holds with its beak the end of a 26 branch and hangs down, it means that a man's head will be. cut off in war. nexg"in lak' gwagwex's£alasa. Wa, lak' holala haemaakwas maene yisa gwa£wina.

Eating

Picking Huckleberries

Customs Relating to Sealing

■ Continued from p. 140, line 16. ^Continued on p. 209, line 3. "Continued from p. 152, line 24.

12 is said that otherwise the seal would escape | from the hunter whenever he goes out hunting. | Therefore they only knock it off with the tongs, so that the singed hair | comes off.1 ||

15 (The2 hunter) always pushes his( paddle) right over his fire, hecause he wishes | it to become very black; and also that no | young woman may step over it, and no young man, for they never do right; ] and also that a menstruating woman may not give bad luck to the hunter. | His canoe-box also hangs in the corner of the house. He also puts ||

20 just over the fire the two mats on which (hunter and steersman) sit; but he leaves | his harpoon-shaft in the hunting-canoe; and [ also the bladder-float is hung up at the same place where the canoe-box is. |

Customs Relating to Porpoise-Hunting

Blue-hellebore root and | peucedanum-seeds are kept in the canoebox of the porpoise-hunter, and also back-sinew of the porpoise, which

25 is dried || for tying up the spear if it should break. | Blue-hellebore root is put into the canoe-box, and the peucedanum-seeds, | in case that a sea-monster should come up in the night when they are spearing | porpoises. It is said that often the sea-monsters show themselves. Then | the hellebore-root is taken out and chewed, and

30 spit || overboard on each side of the hunting-canoe, and | the same is

( istoms Relating to Porpoise Hunting i Continued on p. 452, line 25. » Remark inserted on p. 175, line 9.

done with the peucedanum-se.eds. Then the sea-monster sinks at 31 once, j when it smells the hellebore-root. Therefore it is kept in the box. |

Customs Relating to Salmon-Fishing -

Dog-Salmon. — (When the first dog-salmon (if the season has been 1 caught, the wife of the fisherman goes to meet her husband when he comes home from fishing.)

As1 soon as he arrives at the beach, his wife goes to meet him; | and when she sees what has been caught by her husband, | she begins to pray to it. The woman says, as she is praying: | "O Supernatural- Ones! O, Swimmers! I thank you that || you are willing to come 5 to us. Don't let your coming be bad, | for you come to be food for us. Therefore, | I beg you to protect me and the one who takes mercy on me, | that we may not die without cause, Swimmers!" Then1 the woman herself | replies, "Yes," and goes up from the bank of the river. ||

As2 soon as they finish cutting up the speared salmon, | the woman 10 at once gathers the slime and everything | that comes from the salmon, and puts it into a basket, and pours | it into the water at the mouth of the river; for it is said that | the various kinds of salmon at once come to life when the intestines are put into the water at the || mouths of the rivers, and therefore they do this; and | 15 they break off the intestines at the anal fin of the speared salmon

Customs Relating to Salmon Fishing i Continued from p. 303, line 13. 2 Continued from p. 304.

75052—21—35 eth— pt 1 39

17 but | they cut off the intestines at the anal fin of salmon caught with a hook, for, if the intestines were broken off | from those caught with a hook, then the | fish-line of him who does so would always

20 break. Therefore the woman takes care || in breaking it off. That is the end. ]

Silver-Salmon. — Eyes and salmon-heads roasted | together with backbone and tail, in this manner: | ^

When they go trolling for silver- JS salmon, and when they first go out to | sea, as soon as a MW man has caught four

25 silver-salmon, || his wife goes down /j| to meet him when he arrives at the beach of his | house. J| When she first sees what was caught by her husband, | 1 she prays to the silversalmon; and after she has prayed, ) she picks up with her fingers the four silver-salmon and goes up with them and puts them down | on the beach in front of the house. Then she takes her fish-

30 knife and || cuts the four silver-salmon; the head | and the tail are left on the backbone. Then she takes the | roasting-tongs and puts them up on the beach, where she is sitting. Then she takes | what she is going to roast and puts the salmon-tail and the backbone in |

35 between the roasting-tongs. Then she pushes it down, so that || the ends of the tongs reach to the eyes | of the salmon-head. After she lias done so, she gathers | the slime and throws it into the sea. As 37 soon as | she comes up from the beach, she picks up the roastingtongs with the eyes in them, that had been put over the fire, | for there are four of them, and she places them by the side of the lire of her house. || Then she watches them until the skin of the head is 40 blackened; | and when it turns black, she takes it away and puts it | over the fire. Then her husband at once | invites his numaym to come and eat it, for he must take care | not to keep it over night in the house; for the first people said, that, if || the roasted eyes were kept 45 over night in the house when | they are first caught, then the sdversalmon would disappear from the sea. | Therefore the}' do in this way. As soon as the guests j come in, they sit down in the rear of the tire, j on the mat that has been spread out for them. When all || the guests 50 are in, the woman takes a new food- | mat and spreads it in front of those to whom she is going to give to eat. Then she | takes down the four roasting-tongs with the eyes in them that had been over the fire and places them | before her guests. Then she takes the salmon out of the | roasting-tongs. After she has done so, she gives water || to 55 them to drink; and after they finish drinking, then the one highest in rank | prays to what they are going to eat. He says: "O, friends! | thank you that we meet alive. We have lived until | this time when you came this year. Now we pray | you, Supernatural-

60 Ones, to protect us from danger, || that nothing evil may happen to us when we eat you, | Supernatural-Ones! for that is the reason why you come here, that we may catch you | for food. We know that only your | bodies are dead here, but your souls come to watch | over

65 us when we are going to eat what you have given us || to eat now." Tims he says; and when he stops, he says, "Indeed !"

As soon as he stops speaking, they begin to eat, and | his friends also eat. Then the man takes up | a bucket and goes to draw fresh water | to drink after they have eaten; and when he comes back, ||

70 he puts down the water that he has drawn, and waits for them to finish eating. | After they have eaten, the water is put in front of them, | and they drink. Then his wife [ picks up the pieces of bone and skin and puts them on the | food-mat; and when she has them

75 all, she folds || up (the mat J and goes to throw the contents into the sea; and | the guests* only rub their hands together to dry off the fat from their hands, | for they are careful not to wash their bands, and not to | wipe their hands with cedar-bark. After they have done so, they go out. | Sockeye- Salmon. — The " name of the sun-dried salmon is also

80 "sandy," || and "place of cohabitation." for it is caught in the upper part of the river; | therefore it is called "from the sandy ground,"

1 Continued from p. 353, line 52.

for the place at the upper part of the river is sandy; | and it is said S2 that a woman was cutting old sockeye salmon when her | lover came and cohabited with her while she was cutting the salmon. | Then she was seen by her husband, and therefore he [| said that the sun- 85 dried salmon should be called "place of cohabitation," and at once ] all the men named it that way. lie was trying to make his | wife ashamed by it. Now the sun-dried salmon always has the name of "place of cohabitation." | That is the end.

Customs Relating to Fish-Traps As soon as the ends of the ribs (of the fish-trap) have been tied at l the place where the kelp-fish is to go in, | (the woman) tests it, (to see) whether it will be lucky or unlucky. | She puts it down by the side of the fire, | takes her fire-tongs, and takes up a not really big piece of || coal. She puts it into the fish-trap, puts down the | 5 fire-tongs, and takes hold with her hands of each side of the | fishtrap. Then she shakes it up and down, so that the coal jumps up and down j in the trap. If it only crumbles and the glowing coal | goes out, the owner knows that the fish-trap will be lucky || and that 10 the fish will not come out again the same way | as they went in; but if the coal jumps out again | through the way by which the kelpfish go in, then the owner knows | that the trap will be unlucky. | In

Customs Relating to Fish Traps most cases the women throw it away; but if the charcoal does not jump 15 out, || they go back into the woods and | look for maple-*.1 | . . .

Customs Relating to Sea-Eggs

As2 soon as the (shells of the sea-eggs) are all in, the woman takes a large firebrand and | puts it on top of the empty shells. Then she goes and pours them out | outside of the house. The reason why

20 they put the firebrand there is that || the spirits may not eat the refuse of the sea-eggs. | If they do not put a firebrand on top of it, it is said that the spirits | immediately go and eat it; and it is said that | he who ate what was in the empty shells eaten by the spirits would be immediately sick. | Therefore fire is put on top of them when

25 they are poured out at night. When || they eat flat or large seaeggs in the daytime, they do not put fire on top of them, | for it is done in the same way with large sea-eggs, for the | spirits like flat seaeggs and large sea-eggs. | That is all about the flat sea-eggs.

Beliefs Relating to the Devil-Fish

The "bear of the rocks " is the largest kind of devil-fish. This | is not 30 eaten by Indians. Sometimes they are nearly || three fathoms long

Customs Relating to Sea Eggs

Beliefs Relating to the Devil-Fish i Continued in Publications of the Je™p North Pacific Expedition, Vol. V, p. 387. 'After small sea eggs l:ove been eaten the shells are carried out ot the house. (Continued from p. 498, line 83.)

across | the amis, and they are (very) thick. I have seen one | sucker 31 one short span | across, and in the middle of the sucker is a piece just like a | round bone. The points of the middle of the suckers are sharp. || There are eight bones around the stomach, | and the arms 35 also have a bone each. | Sometimes they make a mistake and cook a | small "bear of the rocks." When it is cooked, and they take off the loose skin, | when it is squeezed by those who are washing it, it gets || thin, because the water in it comes out, for there is nothing but 40 water in the | "bear of the rocks." Then they throw it away, for | they are afraid to eat it, because it kills people and it is a seamonster. | That is all about this. |

Customs Relating to Canoe-Building

In ' the morning, as soon as it is day, (the canoe-builder) rises for || he is alone in the house, because canoe-builders are not allowed to lie 45 down | with their wives when building canoes. It is a saying of the first | people, that if a canoe-builder should lie down | with his wife, the tree from which he makes the canoe would be hollow. | Therefore he is not allowed to lie down with his wife. ||

As soon as this has been done,2 he takes a piece of charcoal and 50 paints | the face of a man on each side, in the middle of the | canoe,

Customs Relating to Canoe-Building

' Continued from Publications of the Je^up North Pacific Expedition, Vol. V, p. 3")6, line 2. 'The pegging for adzing the sides of the canoe. (Continued fromibtd., p. 364, line 25.)

53 for the purpose of frightening the spirits, — ] the Indians mean the souls of dead canoe-builders — for it is said that if they did not ] paint

55 the face of a man inside the canoe, || then the spirit would come to examine it as soon as the adzing of the canoe has been completed; | and lie would tell the canoe to split as soon as the | canoe-builder would spread it. When, however, it is painted inside with the face | of a man, the spirits will run away when they see the painting in it. ||

Customs Relating to Fern Eoots

60 Only old women are allowed to dig fern roots. Young women | are not allowed to dig them, for the people of olden times | said that it would make them sick, if the young women should go to dig fern roots. | Therefore only old women are allowed to dig them. |

Customs Relating to Currants

Now they are told to eat the contents of the dishes. They do 65 so. || because currants are never carried home when they are given by the owner, | for it brings bad luck when they are carried home, thus said the people of olden times. |

Customs Relating to Cedar-Bark

Even ' when the young cedar-tree is quite smooth, | they do not take all the cedar-bark, for the | people of olden times said that if they should

Customs Relating to Fern Roots

Customs Relating to Currants

Customs Relating to Cedar Bark

'See p. 575, line 51. sContinue'l from p. 122. line 47.

peel off all the cedar-bark of a || young cedar-tree, the young cedar 70 would die, and then another | cedar-tree near by would curse the bark-peeler, so that he would also die. Therefore | the barkpeelers never take all the bark off of a young tree. |

Customs Relating to the Felling of Trees Now I will talk about him who will work at | porpoise-hunting 1 The canoe-builder is first asked by the porpoise-hunter (of a | small canoe) to build a hunting-canoe. | The canoe-builder goes at once back into the woods to a place where|| the cedar for canoe-building is stand- 5 ing, for each canoe-builder always has a straight cedar in the woods picked out for canoe-building. He just walks right there, | carrying his axe, going to the place where the cedar-tree is standing. | He looks for the place where the cedar will lie when it falls. | When he sees all the branches on the outer side of the cedar-tree, he || chops through 10 the foot of the tree on the back of the cedar-tree; and as soon as he has chopped deep into it, | he takes four chips and throws | them behind the foot of the cedar-tree; and as he throws them, he says: | "O, supernatural one! now follow your supernatural power!"

Then he takes another Chip, throws it, || and says as he is throwing 15 it: "O, friend! now you see | your leader, who says that you shall turn your head and fall there also." |

Customs Relating to the Felling of Trees

17 Then he takes another one and throws it; and as | he throws the third one in the same way, he says while throwing it: | " O, life-giver !

20 now you have seen which way your supernatural power went. || Now go the same way." As he says so, he takes the | last one and throws it back of the foot of the tree that he is chopping, | and he says as he is throwing it: "O, friend! now you will go I where your heartwood goes. You will lie on your face at the same place." | After he

25 has said so, he answers himself and says: "Yes, || I shall fall with my top there." After he has said so, he takes his ax and | chops again; and as soon as his chopping passes half | through the trunk of the tree, he goes to the opposite side and chops ; and he does not chop | deep into it when the tree, begins to crack; and it does not take long until | the cedar-tree falls backward. ||

Prayer of Cinquefoil-Digger '

1 After2 they have finished (loading their canoe), they go aboard the travelling-canoe. | The man stands up in the stern of the canoe, because he steers it, and, | looking at his digging-house, ho prays to it and says, | praying and holding in his hand his steering-paddle

5 while he is standing up, he says: || "Look upon my wife and me, and

Prayer of Cinquefoil-Digger1

i Sec also Addenda, p. 1318.

"- This is done when husband and wife return from digging cinquefoil roots in their garden. Continued from p. 193, line 96.

protect | us, so that nothing may happen to us, friend! and | wish G that we may come back to live in you happily, | O house! when we come next year to dig cinquefoil. Good-bye!" | Thus he says, sits down in the stern of his travelling-canoe, and paddles; || and he must 10 not turn his face to look at his house again. | He only turns his face back after | passing the point (that hides the house).

Prayer to Young Cedar

(The woman1 who has found a young cedar) takes her adz and stands under the | young cedar-tree, and, looking upward to it, she prays, saying: || "Look at me, friend! I come to ask for your dress, | 15 for you have come to take pity on us; for there is nothing for which you [ can not be used, because it is your way that there is nothing for which we | can not use you, for you are really willing to give us your dress. I | come to beg you for this, long-life maker, for I am going to make a basket for lily roots out of you. || I pray you, friend, not to 20 feel angry with me on account of what I | am going to do to you; and I beg you, friend, to tell our | friends about what I ask of you. ] Take care, friend! Keep sickness away from me, so that I may not be killed by | sickness or in war, O friend!" |

This is the prayer that is used by those who peel cedar-bark of 25 young cedar-trees and I old cedar-trees. '

Prayer to Young Cedar

1 Continued from p. 131, line 4.

Weather Charms

1 I was walking along in Fort Rupert. I begged Haemisk"ienis | to tell mo about what he would when he wished the northwest wind to come. | He spoke at once, and said, "Listen, | that I may teach 5 you!" Tims he said. "One time, when I | was going south to Victoria, we arrived at 0's£F.q", and | the southeast wind began to blow strong. The wind lasted all day and all | night. Then I arose in the morning, and 1 saw that the | southeast wind was stdl blowing. I started our campfire; | and as soon as the fire blazed up, I went

10 down to the [| beach, for the tide of the sea was half out. | Then I searched for small crabs underneath the stones, and | I found four crabs. I carried the four and | went up the beach. Then I took cedar-bark and split it into strips. I | took four strips and tied them

15 to the right claws of the || crabs. As soon as I had tied the cedarbark to the four crabs, | I took poles and drove them into the ground. Not | really upright were the poles, which were two fathoms (long) ; hut it was thus," | said Ha£misk"ienis (imitating on the ground with cedar-sticks what he said, | while he placed them down on the

20 ground): The poles leaned over, and |] to the ends he hung the four crabs. "Then I watched them, | and as soon as I saw that the shells began to be red, I | took them down, and I untied the cedar-bark

Weather Charms from the claws. | I put them down, and I searched for four large clam-shells. | As soon as I found them, I took one of the || crabs and 25 put it into (a clam-shell). Then I took the cedar-bark with which they had been hung up, \ and tied it around, so that the shell should not open. | Then I did so also to the next one, and I did so to the four | shells. As soon as I had finished tying the four clam-shells, | I went and carried them into the woods. || I searched for a hole in the 30 bottom of a tree; and when I found a hole | in the bottom of a hemlock-tree, I put three shells | into it. Then I spoke to the last one, | and said, 'Warn your friends to call | strongly the northwest wind and the east wind, || else you will not go back to the beach, if 35 you do not get | what has been planned for you and your friends.' Thus I said when | I put it down in the hole on the ground. Then I left them, went back, and bathed in the sea. | As soon as I had finished, I sat down on the beach, that | the wind might dry me." Thus he said. "As soon as I || began to be dry, I dressed, and I 40 warmed myself by the | camp-fire. Now I waited for the northwest wind to blow | at noon." Thus he said. |

I questioned Ha£misk"i£nis again; and I said to him, [ "Who, indeed, was the first to wish that this should be done to the crabs for || calling the northwest wind V Thus I said to him. | 45

46 He replied at once, and said: | ''You know about all the Myth people, — all the different | quadrupeds, and all the different birds, and also all the | different crabs: they were all like men, and also the ||

50 trees and all the plants. Then war was made against the | southeast wind by the Myth people.1 That was the place where | Great- Inventor questioned his younger brothers, and said: 'O younger brothers! | who, indeed, controls the weather among you?" Thus

55 he said. "Immediately | a short man spoke, and said, || 'O Myth people! when you wish for the northwest wind in our | world', — thus said the Crab, for that was the name of the short | man, — ' then take four of the crabs that look just | like me, and take four long | pieces

60 of cedar-bark, and tie the ends of the cedar-bark to the right || claws, and hang them right over your fire; | and as soon as their backs begin to be red, take them down, untie | the cedar-bark from the claws, and search for four | large clam-shells ; and put the crabs | into them,

65 and tie them with the cedar-bark that was tied to the claws || of the crabs. Then when each crab is in | one shell, and after you have tied them, | go into the woods behind your houses, and search for a | hole in the bottom of a tree; and as soon as you find a hole in a | tree, put

See Boas and Hunt, Kwakiutl Texts C Publications of the Jesup North Pacific Expedition [I.eyden], Vol. Ill, p. 350, Vol. X, p. 98; Boas, Kwakiutl Tales (Columbia University Contributions to Anthropology, Vol. II, pp. 227, 494.

three shells into it; and then || again take one shell and pray to it, 70 and | say: "Now warn your friends to call | strongly the northwest wind and the east wind, | else you will not go back to the beach, if you do not get | what has been planned for yon and your friends." Thus you shall say to us. ' and you shall put the one into the hole. 75 Then | leave them, and the northwest wind will come at once." Thus he said. | Therefore it is known by the later (generations of) people. 1

I left Ha'£miskr£nis, and went into the house of | Kwa'gwaeno; 1 I questioned him and said. "This is the reason why I walk about, | that I beg you to teach me the | strongest way of calling the northwest wind." Thus I said to him. He || replied at once, and said, | 5 ' ' Listen to me ! for it is good to know how t( ) call the northwest wind , | even if the southeast wind is strongest. Whenever you are desirous to | go to Alert Bay. then go back to the woods and search for | a fern: and as soon as you find it, dig out four || roots of fern-plants, and take 10 care that you do not break off | one of them from the leafy stem. As soon as you have the | four roots, carry them home: and when you | enter your house, put the fern down. Then take | twenty dentalia

15 and some red ochre, and take || also four split pine-sticks three | of our fathoms in length; then sharpen the ends, and take the fern | and put it upside down; then push the ends of the sharpened | pinesticks among the leafy stems; | then, while it is still upside down,

2(1 take five dentalia, and || put two dentalia on the right-hand side of the fern-root, | and take two more dentalia and put them | on the left side of the fern-root, and then take | one dentalium shell and put it on its nose; | and tie them all on; and as soon as you finish, take ||

25 red paint and cover the root of the fern, | and place it by the side of the fire of your house or on the | south side of your fire. Then speak, and | say:

'Don't put me too near the fire, else there will be too much in your world! | Northwest Wind, East Wind!'

30 "Thus you shall say." Thus said || old Kwa'gwa£no. "As soon as the fern gets warm, | the northwest wind will at once begin." |

Then I questioned him, and said to him, "Let me ask you | who invented it?" I said to him. |

35 Immediately he began to laugh, and said: "It is not that || this has been recently invented, what I told you. Listen ! and I will | tell you the story about the one who first invented what I told you. |

"When the Myth people went to make war against Southeast- 37 Wind, | then Great-Inventor questioned his younger brothers, and | said: 'Who among you controls the weather?' Thus he said. || Im- 40 mediately a short man spoke, | and said, 'O Myth people! whenever you wish | for a northwest wind in our world,' — thus said the short | man, the Crab — 'then take four of my | fellow-crabs and hang them up over the fire of || your house; and as soon as our backs begin to be 45 red, | take us down and put us into four | large clam-shells, and hide us in | holes of trees,' thus he said — 'and if I do not make the | northwest wind in our world, then take one || of the crabs again out 50 of the hole of the tree and pray to it; | and as soon as you finish praying to it, put it into the | place where you took it from.' Thus said the Crab. |

"As soon as the Crab had finished speaking, one (person) who had | hair over his face and red ochre on his face also spoke. He had two || dentalia on each side in his ears, and he had one dentalium shell in 55 his nose. | He said: 'O chief, Great-Inventor! | I am the fern, and I control the weather. If | we go to make war on Southeast- Wind, take me | just as I am dressed now, and three of my || tribe here; 60

61 and place me on the south side of the fire in your house, | and say, "Don't put me too near the fire, else there will be too much in | your world ! Northwest Wmd ! East Wind !" Thus you shall say. ' " "Thus said the | Fern to Great-Inventor. |

65 "As soon as he stopped speaking, some slow || young man also spoke, and said: 'O | Myth people! listen to me! I am Snail. | When you are going to make war on Southeast- Wind, and when | the southeast wind is blowing strong, and when it is raining, then I am the only one who has a way of | calming the southeast wind, and I

70 also have a way of || stopping the rain.' Thus said the Snail to Great-Inventor. | 'Whenever the rain falls with the southeast wind, you shall take me | and three of my tribe and put us by | the south side of the fire in your house; and as soon as we | put out our tongues,

75 you shall sing; and this is what you shall say: || "Listen to me, Clear- Sky! Look at | me! I put out my tongue; I sweep off with my tongue from you the | clouds, Northwest-Wind, East-Wind, Clear- Sky!" | Thus you shall say.' "Thus he said.

80 "This is imitated by later (generations of) man. Then || Great- Inventor felt glad on account of the words of the Snail. |

"Then Land-Otter spoke also, and said, | 'O Myth people! turn your face, that I may also | tell you what I am to you. When you go to make war on | Southeast-Wind because it never becomes calm, as soon as you start, || four men shall come into my house. | 85 Then they shall pick up the soil from the floor of my house, and they shall | cany it, and shall throw the soil from the floor of my house into the | sea; and the last one shall say,

"O Northwest-Wind! | come and blow against Southeast- Wind ! " 'And || immediately the northwest wind will come, and it will 90 blow one | day; then it will become calm, and it will be calm for | four days; and that will be the time when you shall start; | and when you wish the northwest wind to continue to blow, then | all the four men shall call to Northwest- Wind; || and their leader shall say, before he 95 throws the | soil from the floor of myhouse into the water: "I call you, Northwest-Wind, that | you may come and help me, and blow me to the place where I am going. Forfour days | you shall do so." Thus you shall say. Then Northwest-Wind will blow for four days. | That is it.' Thus said Land-Otter to Great Inventor, || and the later (gene- 100 rations of) men do so for that reason. | As soon as the southeast wind is strong, when I am going southward and | I find an otter-slide, I pick up the | soil from the ground with both hands. I turn round | to the right and throw it into the water, praying with the || words of 5

5 Land-Otter. Then I throw into the water what I am carrying | northward from the otter-slide; and while I am carrying the soil | from the otter-slide, my crew beat time on the side of our canoe, | and they say, 'Don't treat roughly our charm, else our world will be

10 too rough.' | Then I turn round and throw it into the water; || and as soon as I throw it into the water, I say, T call you, "Northwest- Wind, | that you may come and help me, and blow me to the place where I am going. | For four days you shall do so.'|

"And as soon as I have done so four times,] go aboard my | canoe,

1 5 and we take our paddles, and I tell || my crew to go on and be ready, and I tell them to go ahead and | paddle together, and four times we pull our paddles through the water; | and we all begin to paddle; and I say, | 'Let us paddle away from the northwest, for it is already coming behind us.' | This I say when I paddle with my crew. ]|

20 That is theend of the fourwaysof calling the Northwest- Wind. | The first one is the crab, when it is hung over | the fire and hidden in the holes of trees; | and, again, the fern, when four- of them are taken

25 and | painted with red ochre, and dentalia are taken for its || ears and its nose, and they push into the lower end a | sharp split pinestick and place it by the side of the fire; | and, again, a snail, when four are taken and | placed by the side of the fire to stop the south- 28 east wind and rain; | and the soil of the otter-slide when it is thrown into the water || on the north side of the otter-slide. These are the 30 four ways. |

This is another means of calling Northwest-Wind — a piece of 1 kelp, | which is taken fresh from the sea. Now, when we | are again paddling along, when it is calm and it is a hot day in summer, | as soon as we see kelp floating on the water, we \ go towards it and pick 5 out a large piece of kelp, and the one who is to use it measures it off. | It is more than half a fathom long. Then he | rises in our canoe and turns his face northward. | He puts one end of the piece of kelp to his mouth; and he shouts loud | through the inside of the tubular kelp: ||

"I call you, North west- Wind, wo! | 10

"Come, Northwest- Wind, wo! |

"Come quickly, Northwest- Wind ! |

"I come to call you again, wo!" |

Every time he says "wo" he turns round to the right and he || puts 1 5 the end of the tube of kelp into the sea; ami bubbles come up, | because he says with a long breath, "WTo!" as he turns round. As soon as his | breath nearly gives out, he turns his face again, and

18 turns the end of the tube of kelp | towards the north, and he shouts again loud; and as soon as | he arrives at the "wo," he turns as long

20 as his breath lasts, and || he puts the end into the sea. When his breath is at an end | he rises again and turns to the north. | After he has cried "wo" four times, he lets the piece of kelp sink into the water. | Then he takes his paddle and paddles. | He says: "Go on,

25 paddle! for the one who has been invited is coming." || Then they paddle. This belongs to the Kwag'ul.

1 This is also a means of calling Northwest-Wind of the Koskimo — four | star-fishes. When the southeast wind is blowing, and | they wish it to turn into a northwest wind, a man | goes down to the beach 5 at low tide | and searches for four star-fishes ; and || as soon as he finds these star-fishes, he takes them from the beach | and puts them down by the side of the fire at the house. Then he takes red ochre | and daubs the four star-fishes all over with it. | As soon as this has been done, he takes cedar-bark and splits it; | then he takes four strips; 10 then he takes one of the || star-fishes and ties a cedar-bark strip to the end of one of its arms. Now it is | hanging right over the fire.

And he does the same to the | others. As soon as he finishes hanging them over | the fire, so that they may be smoked by the smoke, and when | they are dry, the man says, "0 friends! || take care! I 15 pray you, Owner-of-the-Weather, | to make your weather right, Owner-of-the-Weather ! O | Supernatural-One ! make your weather right and call | Northwest-Wind and East-Wind and Clear-Weather- Above." — "Yes," | says the man who himself gives answer. || He 20 pretends that the star-fish says this. Then the man says, | "Don't let me be too near the fire! Don't let me be too near the fire, else your | weather will be too good. Don't let me be too near the fire, else your weather will be good forever." | Thus he says. |

As soon as he stops speaking, he breaks off the cedar-strings || which hold the four star-fish, and he carries them into the woods 25 and | hides them under the stump of a tree. Then he leaves them. |

Some people say that he takes them back to the beach, | to the place where he took them from. |

This is also one way of calling the wind, and it is | a way of making l it calm, for all the winds, wherever they come from — | the northwest wind, and the northeast wind, and the south wind, and the southeast wind — | even when they are strong. ||

Whenever we go far away and a mother of twins sits in the canoe, | 5 or even if it is a man (a father of twins) , | as soon as there is no wind —

S what is referred to by the Indians as "calm"- | then the mother of twins turns her face | to the north, if they are going south; and

10 she raises her || right hand, and she turns her hands around toward the | south; and she says, "I call you, Northwest-Wind!" | She does so four times. Then she says, "Paddle away from the | northwest wind!" And the man also does the same. |

15 When it is foggy, the mother of twins takes her hat || and lifts it, and she holds it in her right hand, and | she does thus: she brings it down flat to her stomach. | She does so four times as she calls the fog to | get all inside her stomach; and when a man, a father of twins goes hunting | and it is foggy, then he takes his hat and ||

20 draws it four times through the fog, and puts it down behind | the place where he is sitting in the bow of the canoe. Then | all the fog is inside the hat; and when the hunter has no | hat, he catches the fog in his blanket | and hides it in his stomach. Four times he ||

25 does so; and four times also the woman, the mother of twins, | does so with her blanket. When she goes clam-digging, | then she also takes her blanket and with it catches the fog. | Four times she catches it in her blanket. Some | Indians say that the fog is all

30 gone into the || womb of the mother of twins. |

When an Indian wishes for snow, | twin-children are called; and 31 some eagle-down is taken, J and the down is put on the heads of the twins. | Then the man who wishes to have snow begins to speak, || and says, "O friends ! | I beg of you that you call down the snow, for 35 I | have put on you the down, on your heads, the down of our winter dance. | These are snowflakes at the place where you come from, | supernatural ones." ||

Sometimes the twin-children begin at once | to cry, for they think 40 it is only done to make fun of I them. That is all about this.

When the Indians wish for rain, | twin-children are called; and 1 perch-oil, | which is kept in small kelp bottles, is taken, and is put on the hands; | then the hands are rubbed together, so that they get greasy. || Then it is put with the right hand on the left-hand side of 5 the face of the | twin-child, and with the left hand on the | righthand side of the head of the twin-child; for, indeed, | the twin-children and the person who has invited them sit opposite each other. This is done four times | to each of them. The person who invited the twinchildren || speaks while he is putting the | hair-oil on the twins, and 10

12 says, | "O Supernatural-Ones! you say that you ran control the weather. Let | your world be all wet; for therefore I oil your |

15 heads, that it may begin to rain, and that the || rivers may rise, for we are waiting for the salmon to jump in the | mouth of the river." | As soon as the one who has invited them stops speaking, | the twins will sometimes cry, | and they go out of the house and tell their | parents about it. ||

20 When an Indian wishes for good weather, he | calls twin children; and as soon as the | twins come into his house, the person who invites them | spreads a new mat in the rear of the house. | He takes

25 a cooking-box and pours water into it, and he II picks up four redhot stones and puts them J into the water in the cooking-box. As soon as the water is lukewarm, | the one who invited the twins calls them | to sit down at each side of the cooking-box, and the | man

30 calls his wife to wash their faces. || Immediately the woman sils down between them. | She takes the head of the one first born and washes his head; and when she finishes, she takes | soft, shredded cedar-bark and wipes off the head of the twin-child ; | and as soon as

35 she finishes wiping the head of the twin-child, || the woman takes tallow and | smears it on the faces of the two twin-children. | Then 36 she takes red ocher and brings it three times toward the | face of the one, and the fourth time she paints his | face and head; and when she finishes the one, she || calls the other one, and she does the same 40 to him; and as soon | as she finishes, the woman sends the twinchild to | sit by the side of his brother, and the woman puts away | her cooking-box, the tallow, and the paint-bag of dressed skin. | As soon as this has been done, she sits down and she calls her || hus- 45 band, and she tells her husband to go on and to | pray to the twinchildren. Immediately | the man arises and sits down in front of the | twin-children; and he begins to speak, and says: | "Listen to me, you Supernatural-Ones! for this is the reason why I || invited 50 you, that you may work your supernatural power and make good weather | in your world. Supernatural-Ones, let your world become summer, | salmon ! ' And thus I pay you with tallow on | your faces, and red ocher, and also these | four eagle-tails." Thus he says, and he arises || and puts four eagle-feathers on the head of each 55 of the | children. Then the twins only look downhearted. | That is all. I

1 Twins are considered to be salmon.

1 When there is no rain in the world | and the risers are low and the salmon can not ascend the rivers | because they are very dry, and we wait in vain | for the salmon to ascend the rivers; then, when we II 5 get tired waiting for rain to come, we see that | the bodies of the salmon turn black. Then we take castorium | (of the beaver) and we give it to a virgin | to dip four times into the river, for four days

10 in the morning. | And the virgin is instructed what to say || every time she dips the castorium into the river. She says: | "Let your weather come, Weather-Owner! This one who — | calls you, Southwest-Wind, and Southeast-Wind. Now | you will come and bring rain, Rain-Wind and Hail-Wind. I Rain, rain, flood." Thus says

15 the virgin every time, || after she has dipped the castorium into the river. | Sometimes it will rain at once at night, | when the castorium is used. | Sometimes it may not rain for four days, | for this is a

20 strong rain-caller of the Indians. || And there is one next to castorium. |

Now you will listen (to it). Another one is blue hellebore. | When there is no castorium, | dried blue hellebore is taken and put into the river. | Then the man who throws it into the river speaks, || 25 and says, * * * (manuscript incomplete). |

Blue 'sea-eggs are not eaten until after | they have been four days in the house; for | the ancient people said that if they should eat them at once, | there would be bad weather, and southeast wind woidd blow. || for it is said the blue sea-eggs are the grandfather of 30 the southeast wind. Therefore | they are not immediately eaten. |

HUNTING TABOOS

I have been asked by you about notices set up by a hunter, | that i his wife may know which way he has gone | into the woods, or when he goes paddling, for the hunter does not let Ids | wife know for some time winch way he intends to go because all the women || talk to the 5 other women which way their husbands are going, if they are told by their husbands | the way they will go. It is heard by| the game of the hunters, — the animals, — what their wives say, | and therefore the animals are shy and are in vain hunted by the | hunters. ||

If the wife of the hunter is experienced, she will sit in the house 10 watching ] her husband when he is getting ready, and she never asks | where he is going. A little while after the hunter, her husband, has gone out | the woman arises and goes to the beach to ease herself. |

Hunting Taboos

) Continued from p. 499, line 15.

15 After this she goes up the beach, not going fast as she goes up || and she enters her house and sits down on the floor, and she keeps quiet, | and eats a little food. She never eats enough to be satiated, but eats a little food. It is said that ) the animals hunted by the husband of the hunter's wife do the | same way as she does, and the animals do not run

20 about when they go about looking for || food, and the animals do not eat enough to be satiated. |

If a sea-hunter hunts sea-otters and fur-seal, | the hunter's wife (that is the wife of the hunter) always | lies down in her bed covered with a new mat. | The reason why the hunter's wife does this is that the sea-

25 olter and the || fur-seal may be asleep when they are hunted by the husband of the hunter's wife. |

The beloved wives of the land-hunters and sea-hunters do | what I have said, because, indeed, the land-hunter and | the sea-hunter get their game easily if their wives sit at home well. | If the wife of the land-hunter and of the sea-hunter is not experi-

30 enced, || when she is a young woman who walks about all the time, she is not told by her husband | which way he goes hunting. She is generally | driven away by the hunter her husband when he comes home; for then he does not | get any game, which is hunted in vain, and the hunter is ashamed; | therefore he sends his wife away when | he comes home to his house. II

I have forgotten that an expert hunter's wife does not lie down 35 with the hunter her husband. | When her husband gets ready, he tells his wife | to go bathing in the river near by; and when they arrive at the river, the hunter goes ahead of his wife back into the woods, || where they lie down and cohabit. After this they come out of the 40 woods at the mouth of the river, and | both take off their blankets, | the hunter and| the hunter's wife. Then at the same time they step into the water, with | the right foot, and they step into the water at the same time with the || left foot, and they sit down | in the water at the 45 same time. And both at the same time spriukle water over th e | right side of the body; and after they have sprinkled themselves four times, | they also sprinkle the left side of the body; | and finally they wash the whole body. After || they have done so, they come out of the water at 50 the same time, and for a little while they sit on the ground ; | and when they are dry, the hunter puts on | his blanket and goes away leaving his | wife, and the hunter | goes straight to his house. He takes his weapons, | puts them into his hunting-canoe, and paddles || away to the place 55 where he is going to hunt. Then his wife remains sitting on the bank of the | river; and not long after her husband has left her, she arises slowly | and goes slowly back and | enters her house. She does not go quickly, and she sits down | and sits still without moving, and she only

GO eats a little. || She does not allow herself to eat much, so that | what is hunted by her husband may do the same. This is called by the people of olden times | ts!Egwelka ("made short inside"), when she does this purifying herself. Some hunters never lie down with their wives.

05 When he cohabits with another woman every fourth || day and when it is known by the wife of the hunter that her husband has a sweetheart | and she is expert at purifying herself on behalf of the hunter, | the hunter's wife gives a blanket | to the woman, the sweetheart of the hunter her husband, so that it may not | remain a secret that the

70 woman and the husband of the || hunter's wife are sweethearts. Generally the husband of the | woman knows that she has a hunter for her sweetheart, but he does not become | jealous because he takes the blankets that are given to his wife. | Sometimes forty, or even a hundred, blankets are given | by the hunter's wife to the husband of the one

75 who is the sweetheart of the || hunter her husband, and then the whole tribe know that the hunter and the woman | are sweethearts.

And this is the reason why the hunter does this. He does not lie with his wife, and his sweetheart does not lie down with her hus-

80 band; and after four days the hunter comes || and lies down with his sweetheart. At once he cohabits with his sweetheart. In the morn- 80 ing, when daylight comes, the | hunter and his sweetheart arise at the same time and go down | to the beach and go into the sea-water and | bathe at the same time. They dive four times and stay under water a long time: and after || diving they rub their bodies. After | 85 that both come out of the salt water at the same time and sit down on the | beach; and after their bodies are dry, they | put on their blankets at the same time, and both | arise at the same time on the beach, and the hunter goes to his || house, and his sweetheart goes to her own 90 house, and they both do not | go quickly as they are walking. |

The wife of the hunter always gives | food to her husband's sweetheart, and she always eats only a little. | The wife of the hunter does not observe any taboos. This is called || g'ildel.k'1 ("made long inside"), 95 when a man does this with another woman. | The hunters who do this are those whose wives are foolish | walking about and talking, and going after men, ami who do not know | the taboos to be observed by a hunter's wife. |

The hunter only tells his wife not || to touch his bed when he goes 100 hunting in the woods, or when he goes paddling. | This is the end of what is being done by the | hunter's wife. |

75052 — 21 — 35 eth — pt I 41

Now I will talk about the notice for the | wife of the hunter, which

5 way the hunter her husband goes, || for the bed of the hunter is not near the bed of his | wife, and generally the hunter hardly speaks | to his wife. When the hunter dreams | that he is making love to a living woman, and when he dreams that he cohabits | with the living woman

10 to whom he makes love, he immediately arises out of his || bed and quietlv goes, takes his powder-box | and his gun and the mat which serves as his seat and his paddle, and | he goes quietly out of the door of the house. |

As soon as he goes out of the house, he puts a mark on the | ground

15 with the tip of his hunting-paddle. j| The mark runs in the way in which he goes out paddling; and when | his wife arises and sees that her husband is not in Ins bed, | the woman knows at once that her husband had a good dream | for hunting. She goes out of the door of the house | and looks at the ground. There she sees her husband's

20 mark, || and then she knows which way he has gone. |

As soon as she knows which way he has gone, she goes back | into her house, not fast , and sits down, and she takes some food ] and cats it , and she chews for a long time what she is eating, | and she swallows it

25 in very small pieces; that is, if || the hunter's wife is an experienced woman. She does not stop eating until her | cheeks ache. |

When the front of the house is stone | at the place where the hunter 27 sits and when he dreams of making love to the wife of | another man, he has no way of letting his wife know that he goes out || hunting on 30 account of his favorable dream, for he immediately arises and goes | out in his canoe. When he goes out of the house, he takes | a long split piece of cedar-wood and places it on the ground, the end near | the door of the house pointing down to the beach, and the lower end | is pointing south; and when the hunter goes straight out from his || house, then he puts the cedar-stick on the rock (pointing away from 35 the door) ; and when he | goes north, he lavs the cedar-stick (pointing north); and when | he goes back into the woods, he puts the cedarstick pointing backward at ] one side of his house. |

In the same way are the marks which he puts on the | ground about which I talked first. ||

This is onl' done by the hunter when he dreams of making love to 40 a | living woman. When he dreams of making love to a dead woman, | he knows that he will not cat ch any animal. This is the same | dream for the hunter and trapper; for when | the trapper dreams of making love to a living woman, || he knows that st mething will be in his trap, 45 and he at once goes to |look at his trap to take out what is caught in it : and when the | trapper dreams of making love to a dead woman, he

1 Straight down to beach.

48 knows | that his trap did not catch anything, and that his trap is broken by a large animal. | That is the end. ||

Means of Having Children

1 [We will talk about the means of making a woman have children. | There was TlatlEndzid, who had been married eight | winters to his wife, and his wife had never been pregnant; | and this is what he 5 said: — ] Now, I have been married eight || winters to my wife, and she has never been pregnant. | I am sorry; for that was the reason | I married, that I might have children. Then I went to the Koskimo, | and I told the old man Qwa£x'iladze that I | felt badly because my

10 wife had not been pregnant in eight || winters. Then Qwa£x'iladze laughed. He | said: ' "O my dear! listen to me, and I | will inform you. Just listen ! When I first | married Born-to-be-given-Pres-

15 ents-First, she | got no child, and I had her for my wife four winters. || Then I was really sick at heart. | I invited the experts in medicine of the first Koskimo; | and I spoke, and said, 'O you experts in medicine among the | Koskimo, listen to me ! I pray you, have mercy on me, | and treat my wife so that she may have chddren.'

20 Thus I said to || those experts in medicine among the Koskimo.

Means of Having Children

1 The following is spoken in Koskimo dialect.

Then one of them spoke, | and said 'O Chief Qwaex 'lladze ! | let 21 Born-to-be-given-Presents-First go out of the house, else | she will hear what we are talking about here.' Then | Born-to-be-given - Presents-First was driven out. ||

"As soon as she had gone out, the expert in medicine spoke, | and 25 said, '0 chief! go and | send the little children to search for one | male lizard and also for one female | lizard. They shall be husband and wife; and as soon as |] they have brought them, you must take 30 them and put them together, chest to chest, j and tie them together in that way, while [ they are still alive. Then tie them on the right side of your | waist, and let them be there thus for four days. | Then untie them and || take some food;' and I chewed it. | 35

"Then I took the fore-feet of one of the lizards | and put them into the food, and I chewed it again, \ and then T put it down on the floor of the house; and then I also | took the hind-feet of the lizard || and put them into what had been chewed. Then | I put it down on 40 the floor of the house. Then I did the same with each one. | Then I took it up, and 1 took the fore-feet, | both of them; and I chewed them together | with the food, and I put it down on the floor of the

45 house. II Then 1 took the hind-feet of the other one, | and I chewed them also with the food. | Now I had finished four mouthfuls. | Now they were on the floor of the house. Then I called my wife, and I | asked her to eat what had been chewed; and she chewed it

50 and || she ate it up. Deinde | in cubiculum vocavi uxorem meam. Deinde nos in lecto collocavimus. | Ego iacui ei in dextra parte et

55 cum ea concubui. Postquam | perfeci, non sivi || uxorem meam se illo die commovere et sivi cam femina illo die distinere | el supinam ilia nocte recumbere. Menstruare quidem modo destiterat. I Numquain rursus menstruavit. Turn | facta est praegrians. Then she had a little boy. | She first had a child when I had been married ||

60 five winters to my wife; | and now I had this child, Midiicd." Thus said the chief, | speaking the Koskimo language. |

At once I went home, and I was already looking for | lizards on

65 the trail of Gwadze. T found two — a || female and a male lizard. At once | I tied them together, chest to chest, and I tied them to my licit | and put it around my waist, and I kept them on my right side. | I went home to Newettee. I arrived there where | I had left my wife. For two days I kept the lizards || on my waist. Statim i The following is again Kw agul dialect.

voluit | uxor mea ut secum luderem. Deinde earn rogavi, ct | "Quan- 70 do,'' inquam, "menstrua visti V sciebam enim cam turn menstruare. | "Menstruo," inquit, "quattuor iam dies." Deindo, | statui cum ea ilia nocte non coire. || Cum uxor mecum ludere conaretur, | iratum 75 me simulavi. Deindo duas noctes dormii. | When the lizards had been on my waist four days, j I took a biscuit and chewed itand I took the | lizard and cut off the fore-legs of the one, the male. || Then I put thorn in with what 1 had in my mouth and SO chewed thorn. When I | had done so, T put it (what I had chewed) down on the floor of the house, and I again took a biscuit | and bit off a piece; and I cut off the hind-feet | of the lizard and put them in with what 1 was chewing. When | I had finished, I bit off again a piece of biscuit; and I cut off || the fore-feet of the female 85 lizard, and I chewed them with the biscuit, | and I put (what I had chewed) down on the floor of the house. Then 1 bit off another piece of | biscuit, and I cut off the hind-feet of the lizard and | put them in with the biscuit I was chewing. Now there were therefore | four piles of chewed biscuit on the floor. ||

Then I called my wife to come to the place where I was sitting. | 90 She came at once. I put my arm around her, and f gave her | one of the pieces of biscuit. I told her to eat it. | She ate at once the

95 four pieces. Then | I called her into my room || and barred the door.

Peccavi, | nam uxori in sinistra parte me posui. Deinde | cum uxori mea concuhui. After I had done so, I spoke | and said, "O my dear! don't wish to move about this | day and night; just lie on

100 your back with legs extended." Thus said I || to my wife. |

Then she obeyed me; and my wife said that she | guessed that I was treating her with medicine, thai she might have a child. | Postea menstrua | uxoris meae desl ilerunt. Praegnans erat e( puellam 5 peperit. |.Etenim in sinistra parte jacebam dum cum uxore || concumbeham. Quare infans erat puella. Now 1 | had a child; and I believe in the medicine, for my wife never | had had a child for eight winters. 1 | gave her the medicine and she was pregnant at 10 once and when | we had been married nine winters we || had a daughter. |

The girl was four months old when my wife was pregnant again, | and she had another girl. | Now we have been married sixteen winters, I and my wife, | and we have four children, all girls. Eight [| 15 winters we had no children. Now foi eight winters we have had | children. The only reason why I am sick at heart is that the children are all | girls, for there is no boy. [Thus said | T 1st lEndzid of the Seaward-Dwellers.] |

Birth

The woman has not had a husband for a long time, when she is 1 with child; | and when she thinks that she is with child, both of them at once | are careful. |

Her husband takes nothing that he sees || that is hurt by a man, 5 or a bird with blood on its head, or | a seal with blood on its head or with singed hair. He and | his wife take a little of it, and hide it at a dry place under j a cedar-tree. They leave it there until the child of the woman is born, j I have forgotten this. When he first wipes off with soft || shredded cedar-bark the blood of whatever be 10 sees, he carries it to his house; | and when his wife is lying down, he asks her to sit upon the floor; | and when she sits there, the man begins at the back of his wife's head, | holding the bloody cedarbark, and passes it down | her back; and as he is passing down the cedar-bark, he says, || "This would 'happen to you." He does this 15 four times, | passing the bloody cedar-bark down her back, and says four times, "This | would happen to you" (he means to the child that she is bearing); and when | this is done, he goes and hides it at a dry place under a cedar-tree. |

The man also takes the tail of a deer, and [| the ends of the four 20 arms of an octopus, and the tip of the tail of a snake, | and the feet of

Birth

22 a toad. All these he keeps; | and he passes them over his wife when she gives birth to the child. |

And when his wife has been with child for nine months, the man |

25 walks continually. He goes into the house II not fast ; but when he goes out, he jumps | out. |

And when his wife feels that she is going to give birth to the child, he asks | an old woman to act as midwife for her and to take care of

30 her . | And when the old woman comes, she at once asks || the woman to lie on her back, knees up, with spread legs. | When she does so, the old woman feels of her | abdomen [to ascertain] the position of the child. She takes | perch-oil and rubs her hands with much of it, and she rubs over | the abdomen of the woman from below

35 the breastbone || to the groins. After she has done so she sits still [ and waits. The man meanwhile is running about quickly. | He goes very slowly when he enters a j house, and he is very fast when he comes out. Now the old | woman takes the ends of the tentacles

40 of the octopus and the II deer-tail and the snake-tail and the toadfeet, | and also four chitons; and she takes four | shells of (medium- sized) clams, and puts them down next to the fire. | First she takes the tongs and picks up the deer-tail | and puts it on the fire. When the hair begins to burn, || she puts the burnt hair into one of the j clamshells. When she thinks it is enough, she passes the | deer-tail up and down the back of the woman, who is sitting up. | She does this four times; and she says four times, | "This would happen to you;" and after she has done so, she throws it into the || fire. She does this 50 with all the other things; and when they | all have been burnt to a crisp, she pours some water on the remains of the deer-tail, j After doing this, she stirs it, and then she lets | the woman drink it. Then she takes the burnt tentacles | of the octopus and pours some wat clover them, stirs them, [| and gives it to the woman and lets her drink 55 it. |

Then she takes some perch-oil, pours a little of it on the | burnt snake-tail, and she does the same with the | burnt toad-feet. She stirs it, so that it forms a paste, | and rubs it on the stomach of the woman, first the || snake and then the toad, so that her stomach is 60 blackened. | When this is done, she takes water and pours it on the I burnt chiton, and stirs it until it is watery. When [ the birthpains come often, the old | woman takes the chiton water and gives it to the woman to drink; || and after drinking all of this, she waits to 65 see what is going to happen. When | the pains come in quick succession, | the old woman pulls up her petticoat and places her

68 legs I on the floor as she sits down. She takes much soft shredded cedar-bark and | places it between her knees; and after this has

70 been done, || she calls the woman to sit on her knees. | The woman has her legs outside of the thighs of the old | woman, and the old woman puts her arms around her. The | old woman puts her arms around the waist of the woman; and when the child is about to be

75 born, | the old woman blows down each side of the neck || of the woman; and after the child has been born, she tries to get the | afterbirth; and when it does not come quickly, she takes a small dish | and places it in front of the woman, and she puts her finger down her throat | until she vomits. Then the afterbirth comes out. |

80 Then the woman moves away, and they call her husband. || As soon as he comes, they take a knife, and twisted cotton thread | with which they tie the umbilical cord of the child. | After this has been done, they cut it off; and when it is ()lf, they take a washtub | and pour it half full of water. Then the old | woman puts her left foot

85 into it, and || she places the child on it so that it sits on the instep, | while she is holding it with her left hand. She washes it with the right hand; | and when this is -done, she takes soft shredded cedarbark | and wipes the child's body with it. After this is done, she takes red ocher | and puts a little in its mouth in order to make its bowels move, so that the bad things || in the belly of the child come 90 out; and when this is done, she puts an | old blanket around the child. Now, if it is a boy, it is called Tsaxis, | because it is born at Tsaxis, and that name is given to him. )

When the child is ten months old, straps are put on him. Then his father invites | his tribe, and all the men go into his house. || ■ They sit down and watch the singeing of the hair of the child; for 95 they put | a comb under the hair of the child, take dried split cedarwood, | and light the end in the fire. With these | they singe off the hair of the child. Wlien it is all off, | they take the knee-straps of skin and put them around the knees, || and the ankle-straps of skin 100 arc put around the ankles, and | the arm-straps are put on and the wrist-straps. When this is done, | they put red ocher on the child's head; and after this is done, they | put a silk handkerchief around the head. Then all the | men paint themselves with ocher; and after all this is done, II the father gives a silk handkerchief to each | man. 5 After the father has given a silk handkerchief to them, he | says, " This is given by my child Deyad." He is no longer called | Tsaxis. |

I have forgotten about the afterbirth of the child, which is kept in the house for || four days. Then the man takes | yew-wood and cuts 10 one end of it so that it is sharp like | a needle. It is four fingerwidths I long. When he finishes what he is making, he takes twisted | sinew of the black bear and the afterbirth, in the evening,

15 and he pushes || the point of the yew peg into its hollow end, where the | umbilical cord has been cut off. When it is three | fingerwidths in, he takes the | twisted sinew and ties it on. He ties the • end of the | afterbirth around the cud of the thing that has been

20 pushed in and that is like a needle of yew-wood in || the hollow end of the afterbirth. He ties it as firmly as possible, | and it is in this way: | r-

When this is ~~ x X done, he takes an old mat and | wraps it around it. J J Late at night, when everybody is asleep | in the — village, the man himself takes the

25 clam-digging stick || and the afterbirth that has been tied up, and he digs a hole at a place where | all the men walk on the street, lie | just wishes the old mat containing the afterbirth to fit into the j hole that he digs, and he puts it into it. He wants it to be

30 one span | deep under the surface of the soil. || Then he covers it up and levels down the | soil. He takes a bucket with water and pours it | over it, so that it can not be seen that the soil has been moved. When this has been done, I he goes home. I . . .

Now I will talk about the woman, the wife of || the man, when she 35 gives birth to her child. Then the man heats | some water; and when it is hot, he | puts a little oil into it, and gives it in a spoon to his wife. j He puts in front of her the hot water and the oil, and | his wife continues to drink it, || that the two "pillows" and the blood of 40 the womb may come off. | Much soft cedar-bark is also given by the man to his wife | to sit on, and when it is soaked with blood | he changes it. Then he puts the bloody cedar-bark | into a basket. When the "pillows" come out and || the blood, and the child is 45 four days old, | the man washes his wife in hot water, and she wipes her body with | soft shredded cedar-bark: and after doing so, | she throws the cedar-bark that had been used as a towel on the other | cedar-bark in the basket. Then the man goes up to the || rear of the 50 hcuse, and hangs up behind the post the basket with the cedarbark. I There he leaves it to dry. After this has been done, | he cuts off the hair of his wife down to her neck. | When the umbilical cord comes off from the child, and he wishes | the child to become rich, he ties up the cord and puts it || into a box in which he keeps 55 his expensive copper. Therefore | the child will be able to obtain coppers easily when he becomes really a man. | That is all about this. I

Treatment of Infants

1 Washing the New-Born Child. — When the child is born, | it is taken out of the hole by the midwife, who cuts | the navel-string after she has tied the end with twisted yellow cedar-bark. She | 5 takes a wash-basin and pours cold water into it. She || puts four stones, not very large, into the fire. Then the woman takes | wellrubbed yellow cedar-bark, and with it she wipes the body of the child, | so that what the midwife calls the "tallow" of the body of the child | that is just born comes off; and after she has wiped the body of the child, she takes | a pair of tongs and picks up one of the

10 red-hot stones; and || the midwife speaks to the red-hot stone, and | says: "I pray to you, Supernatural-One, to give to our darling | the power to withstand sickness." |

And after she has finished her speech, she puts (the red-hot stone) |

15 into the wash-basin of the child. Then she takes another || red-hot stone, speaks to it also, and | says, as she holds the child in the left hand, and | the tongs in the right hand: "I pray to you, Supernatural-One, | that the curses of those who are jealous | of the name of his father may not harm him." ||

20 And after her speech is at an end, she puts (the stone) into the same place where she put down the first one | she prayed to. Then she

Treatment of Infants takes with her tongs another red-hot | stone. She speaks, and says: 22 "Now I | pray to you, Supernatural-One, to protect our darling, that | no trouble may befall him as he is growing |[ up." | 25

When her speech is at an end, she puts the stone where she put the | former ones, and she takes with her tongs the (last) | red-hot stone, speaks, and says: "Now, I | pray to you, Supernatural-One, to give to our darling that he may grow up without trouble, ]| and that he 30 may never be weakly. "

As soon as her speech is at an end. she puts the stone into the water in the | dish basin in which she is going to wash the child. She feels of the water to ascertain ] whether it is warm; and when its temperature is right, j she takes out the four stones and puts them down. || Then she puts her left foot into the water in the basin, | 35 and lets the child sit on the instep of her foot. | She takes wellrubbed yellow cedar-bark and | puts it into the water, and washes the child with it, so that all the "tallow" of the body may come off | and the blood. When this has been done, she wipes the body with soft yellowT || cedar-bark. | 40

Forming the Head of the Child. — When the body of the child is dry, | she takes a kelp bottle containing oil of silver-perch, | opens the end, and pours some oil into her right hand. She | rubs it

45 on the body, face, and || head of the child, and she does not stop until the | child is covered with fish-oil. Then she takes a well-rubbed, split, medium- | sized (piece of) kelp, covers it with the oil of the silver-perch, and after | tliis is done she puts it around the head of the child just above the | ears. The piece of kelp goes four times

50 aiound the head. || It is two finger-widths wide. | After this has been done, she takes the cradle and puts it down in front of her. | 1 Cradling the Child. — She takes a well-prepared soft | skin of the kid of a mountain-goat and spreads it out behind her. She puts | the child on it. Then she takes well-twisted, thin, | long, cedar-withes, and places them lengthwise on the cradle; and the husband of the || 5 woman who has given birth to the cliild takes , his drill, and drills a hole one | span away VJ } \ \ jV from the head of the cradle, j in this way:

and when the hole goes through, he drills another hole | four fingerwidths away from the first one that he | drilled ; and he continues

10 drilling holes four finger-widths apart towards the || foot-end of the cradle along its side; and after he has drilled these holes, he takes | a narrow strip of deer-skin and pushes it through the first hole, and places | the end of the long cedar-withe along with it. lie sews on (the cedar-withe) | firmly. After he has done so, lie takes another taxes L'.asalile.

1 Cradling the Child. — Wit, la ax-edxa aek' laakwe papeq!waakL

strip | of deer-skin and puts it through the second hole; and the|| long withes are not tight, in t his way. . and he 15

sews them on. | When this lias been ~j J \ ( { / done, he again takes a strip of deer-skin, which iscalled |

"Sewing of the cradle-sewing," and pushes it through the third hole, | and he sews on the cedar-withes. He continues doing so through the J fourth and fifth holes; and after he has done so, he does the same on the left-hand side of the II cradle. Then he 20 finishes the "strip for holding in the child," for that is the name of | (the cedar-withe) (2). |

Then the man takes a piece of cedar-wood and cuts it | thin, one fingerwidth wide; | and after he has done so, he puts four of these into the cradle || a little more than half way down the depth of the cradle, 25 in this way: | y\y\y/\ V These are called "back-holders." At the same ~'- ' - ' ± ±~y time the midwife | splits cedarwithes about the thickness of the little fin- ger, about | one span less two finger-widths shorter than the inside of the | cradle; and when she has split enough of these, she takes four thin ]| cedar-sticks a little shorter than 30 the back-holder, j and she takes the E3 r split long cedarbark, | ami ties them on like this: ' When | this is done, she places it _, , on the back-holder. This is called ! the "back- | jj^j ) rest; "and when it has been put in, it is like this:

35 Now the cradle is placed on its side, for you know that the backrest | is so placed that it does not reach up to the back of the head of the child. It | is put in in this way that the child may have a long neck when it grows up. If | the back-rest should reach to the occiput, the child would have a | short neck when it grows up; there-

40 fore || the neck of the child is bent backward when it is put into the cradle. |

When the back-rest is finished, the midwife takes | shredded cedar-bark and measures the length of the | inside of the cradle, so that it is the same length as the back-rest. Then she cuts | it off

45 and puts it on the back-rest. There are four layers of the II underbedding. This is un-rubbed cedar-bark. After the under-bedding has been finished, | she takes well-rubbed cedar-bark and | measures the length of the inside of the cradle, beginning at the head of the | ■ cradle down to where the feet of the child are to be. Then she | cuts it off, and she spreads it over the under-bedding. This is called II

50 "soft bedding." There are four layers of this over the under-bedding. Now it is in | this way, /I the soft bedding is the first to go in at the place | ^l -—) I where the head of the

When this is done, she takes mountain-goat wool | well spun, and

55 spreads it over the soft bedding. || The soft wool does not extend

B0AS3 BELIEFS AND CUSTOMS 661

beyond the upper end of the back-rest towards the back of the head 56 of the | child, and the child lies on its back I on it. |

She takes some more well-spun mountain-goat wool for the cover of the | child. This is called "woolen cover." Now, when |] this is 60 done, she takes the well-rubbed soft skin of the mountain-goat kid | and spreads it over the cover, namely, the cover-mat of mountaingoat kid. | After this has been done, she takes wool not spun, and | puts it in where the feet and the legs of the child will be, beginning at the | calf of the legs and down to the feet. This is called || "soft (15 wool for the feet." When this is done, she takes wool and | pats it between her hands to press it together thin. | Then she lays it on the soft cedar-bark, | where the back of the head of the child will be. This is called | "soft wool for the head." Then she takes wellrubbed || cedar-bark and pats it between her hands until it becomes 70 rounded; and | she puts it down over the soft under-bedding at the back of the | child until it reaches down to the soft wool for the feet. It is called "put | under for passing water." |

Then she takes well-rubbed cedar-bark, || not very much, and pats 75 it between her hands until it becomes thin; and | she folds it up until it is three finger-widths | wide and of the same length as the width of the | head of the cradle, just like a small pillow. She lifts up the end of the wool | under the head and puts the small pillow

80 under the || soft woolen pillow, for the back of the head of the child rests on it when its neck is bent back, | so that it may have a long neck when it grows up. It is called | "cedar bark pillow near the bottom." |

When this is done, she takes wool and does as she did | before with

85 the preceding cushion. She places || it on the upper side of the woolen pillow, where the head of the child will | rest, and it is called "wool next to the pillow." | Then she takes well-rubbed yellow cedar-bark, | which is very soft, and measures with her hand until it is | one span long. There she cuts it off. She gathers up one end of it, ||

90 so that it is round, splits off a narrow strip of yellow cedar-bark, and ties up | one end of it so that it is like this: This is called | "cedar-bark cushion for the side of the face." Two of these are made, and the ends| of these show on each side of the face above the ears when the child lies on its back in the cradle. | These cedar-bark cushions are made

95 so that the child may have a rounded || face when it grows up. |

After this she takes yellow cedar-bark and measures off a length of ] one span and two finger-widths. There she | cuts it off. Then she splits a narrow strip of cedar-bark, | gathers up one end well, and ties the thin end with the strip of yellow cedar-bark in || this way: ^esg^ This is called "cedar-bark head-presser." 100

It is | put on @f | the forehead of the child so that its face may be flat- *=as^8|r tened a little, and so that the | forehead may not grow to be too round, and so that | the upper end of the nose may be flat, and the eyes not set deep in the face. | The cedarbark cushion for the side of the face and the forehead-presser together bring the face of the child to a good shape, II in the way the Indians 5 want to have it. |

When the cedar-bark forehead-presser is finished, she takes wool and | pats it with her hands until it becomes thin and pressedtogether. | Then she measures it across the forehead of the child, | beginning at the e.yes, and going to the back of the head. This is || to be laid under the forehead-presser, and it is called "soft wool for 10 the forehead." j

When this has been done, she takes a drill and drills a hole | one span from the head-end of the | cradle; and when the hole goes through, she drills another hole | the same distance as the one she made on the upper side of the cradle; and || when it goes through, she 15 takes a red-hot, long, thin stone and | pushes it into the hole, in order to enlarge it and to make it smooth, | in this way: ^ ,

This is called "hole for the twisted hair [ rope of ~"r~ * '■ the head-presser." |

After she has done so, she takes the long hair of a woman and ||

20 makes it into a string. She stops when the string is five spans | long. Then she puts one end through the hole. | It serves to tie down the forehead-presser, | so that it fits closely to the forehead of the child on the upper part of the | nose. It is called "hair rope for head-presser." ||

25 After this has been done, she takes strips of dressed deer-skin, | and measures off a strip three finger-widths wide and cuts it off. | Now it is a long strip. Then she measures off three | spans, and she cuts off | four of these. These are called "deer-skin head-strips." ||

30 There are four of these three | finger-widths wide, and three | spans long. When this is done, she | takes cedar sticks and splits them into thin pieces one finger-width wide, | and half a finger-width ||

35 thick, and a short span long. | After she has made | four of these, she takes two more cedar-sticks and measures | the width of the headpiece of the cradle near the bottom. | She breaks them off in this length. Then she takes another measure at the end of the back-rest ||

40 and she breaks it off. She takes a strip of | narrow split cedar-bark, and with it she ties them together, making a grate of the | four pieces of cedar-wood that she split before. The four pieces of cedar-wood 42 are held by those | which she broke last. After they have been tied together, they are in this way. (They form the head-rest.1) | This is put under what has already been put in at the || head end of the 45 cradle. Then she takes the four pieces of dressed deer-skin | (for pressing the forehead), three spans in length, and puts them under the middle | of the head-rest in this way, rrn and she straps them over the cedar-bark | forehead- = ; presser; and after she has tightened them over the ^ forehead, | she puts the head-string over it, and || puts the other end on the other 50 side of the cradle. She pulls it through backward and forward many times on each side of the head of the cradle. This is really put on tightly by the midwife. |

When this has been done, she takes yellow cedar-bark, splits it into | narrow strips, and makes a mat one | span and four fingerwidths || long and of the same width. | This is called ••yellow cedar- 55 bark woven head-cover." | It is used to cover the head of the child when | he sleeps in the cradle with the forehead-presser on, and it covers the small part of the face that shows | and the cedar-bark for.ehead-presser. ||

When this has been done, she takes cedar-bark, and splits it into | 60 long, narrow strips, and she makes a thin | rope. When she thinks i See fig. on p. 660.

63 she has twisted enough | she stops, and puts it on to the cedar-bark loops. She | pulls it backward and forward (lacing it on). Its name now is "string for lacing the child into the cradle." ||

65 When this has been done, she takes cedar-bark, splits it, and | twists a long rope. When she has enough for | hanging the cradle, she stops making the rope; and she takes the | cradle-rope and ties its end to the | end of the elastic branch, from which the cradle is

70 suspended. || Then she puts up the branch near to the place where the mother of the child is sitting; | and after it has been done she ties the end of the thin rope | to its end.1 This is called the " pullingrope," which is used when the child cries. | Now she has finished the work at the cradle. This is all about the ways of the | Nak!wax*da£xu and Kwag'ul, and the various tilings that belong to

75 the || cradle, and their names. | 1 Treatment of the Infant. — After four days | the kelp band around the head of the child is taken off. | The head of the child is well oiled with oil of the silver-perch. When | this has been dune, 5 the kelp band around the head is also oiled, || and then it is put back around the head of the | child. It is put on tight; and when this has been done, | the child is put into the cradle, and | the skin strips and the head-string are put on tightly; and | after the woman

1 See Vol. V, pi. 31, Publications of the Jesup Nor.h Pacific Expedition.

has cared for the child (the cradle) is hung up on the branch of the || cradle. | 10

If the child is a girl, the mother of twins, | a good-looking woman, is called to come to the house of the parents of the child | when they untie the head-band the second time. This is after eight | days, when the mother of twins is coming to put her tongue to the eves and face of the child; || and then she presses her mouth on the child's face, 15 so that she may be good-looking when she grows up. When | the child has had the head-band of kelp around its head for eightdays, | they call a woman, the mother of twins, to come in the | morning, and to take the child out of the cradle. As soon as | she comes, she sits down where they put down the cradle. .She first ||- unties the head-line, and opens the | ends of the skin strips. Then 20 she turns back the forehead-presser, | takes the wool off the forehead, and she also takes off the cedar-bark | cushions on the sides of the face. | Then she unlaces the cedar-bark rope. And when | all this is off, she takes off the bedding of the child; and when all this is off, || she takes the child in her arms out of the cradle. (I forgot that 25 she | unties the kelp head-band of the child, before the woman | puts her feet into the water.) The father of the child brings her the | wash-basin, and puts it down where the mother of twins is sitting, | for she will wash the child. Then they pour || cold rain-water into 30

31 the wash-basin, and put | one red-hot stone into the water in the wash-basin | for the child. When the water is just getting warm, they take out | the stone. The mother of twins puts her | left foot

35 into the water in the wash-basin, || and puts the child on her instep. | Then she takes well softened yellow cedar-bark, and | she squirts water on it out of her mouth four times, and she says, | "Now, my darling, I give you my good health, for I never get sick, | and everything comes to me without difficulty. You shall grow up well, ||

40 and you shall marry princes' of the chiefs of the tribes." j-

After she has prayed, she takes a | small chamber-vessel that she kept hidden, and which is almost full of | her urine. She holds it in

45 her right hand || and speaks again, and says: "Now, | my darling, I will put on your body this of which all kinds of sickness are afraid, | that it may protect you against danger, and that the spirits may be afraid of you." |

And when her prayer is at an end, she pours this water into the chamber- vessel | in which she is going to wash the child. She

50 takes yellow cedar-bark, and dips || it into the urine and water. Then she begins at the | right-hand side of the head of the child and washes it with the yellow cedar-bark, going along the right side of the body; | and after she finishes the right side, she | washes the left side of the body. After this she wipes the body with | soft yellow cedarbark, head and body. || After doing this, she lays the child face" down 55 across her knees, | with the head towards the left (of the mother of twins) ; | and she puts the thumb of her right hand at the left of the | small of the back of the child, and she puts the middle finger | at the right hand of the small of the back, and pulls them together towards the middle; || and while she is doing so, she says: "Dear girl, you shall 60 have a slender waist | when you grow up; and you shall not eat so much, | so that you will be stout." |

She pulls together thumb and middle finger four times | over the back of the child, and she repeats four times H what she said before. 65 After doing so, she turns the | child on its back, so that it lies on the knees of the woman; and she puts two | fingers of her right hand into her mouth, the first | and second one, wets them, and | presses them on the face of the child. First the region under the || eyebrows on 70 each side of the nose is pressed into shape. Then she | presses the face of the child all over. This is called by the Indians | " putting the face of the child into shape;" and after this has been done, she | licks the child's eyes; and the mother of twins says before | licking the child: "O darling! now I give you my good looks, || and the power of 75 my eyes, that you may not have bad eyes hereafter when you grow

76 up, | and that the princes of the chiefs of the tribes may fall in love with you, | and that your beauty may be praised by all the princes | of the chiefs of the tribes." |

SO When her speech is ended, she takes oil of the silver-perch and || oils the body of the child; and after oiling the body of the child, | she ods its head; and she does not stop until the head of the child | is soaked with oil. When | this has been done, she puts the kelp band around the head of the child; | and she puts on the bedding, and ||

85 everything else that belongs to the head of the child. After doing this she | gathers the cedar-bark with which the body has been wiped, and puts it into a | water-tight box, — the same one into which she put the cedar-bark on which the mother of the | child sat after giving birth to the child; and into which the first excrement of the child, |

90 and what was used for wiping its body, were put. This || box is called "cedar-bark box." j

When the mother of twins finishes taking care of the child, | she is paid four pairs of blankets. | The midwife who took care of the woman

95 receives the same pay. | They take (iff the kelp || head-band every eight days, and put it back around the head | after putting oil on the head of the child. | It is kept on for four moons. After four moons |

they stop putting on the kelp head-band around the head of the child. | And after this it is put into the cedar-bark || box; and nothing is 100 taken off from all the things belonging to the child, | for they will be taken off only when it is ten months old. |

As soon as the child is ten months old, the cedar-bark, | the yellow cedar-bark, and the wool bedding of the child are put | into the cedar-bark box; and after the hair of the child has been singed off, || and the anklets and arm-rings have been put on, — for the mother of 5 twins | also singes off the hair from the head of the child, and | puts on the anklets and arm-rings, — she goes and hides the cedar-bark box | under the rock under which the cedar-bark is hidden. |

This is the custom of the Kwag'ul, Nak!wax'da£xu, Gwa-sEla, || and Awlk' !enoxu. | 10

The reason why the long-heads of the Koskimo and | Gwatslenox", G'ap!eiioxu, l !asq !enoxu, and | l !aL !asiqwala, and NaqEmg'ilisala are different, is that | the kelp head-band is kept on for twelve days at a time, until the girl || is ten mouths old. It is a little different 15 when the child is a boy, | for then the kelp head-band is tied around for ten days, | and is taken off after eight months. | The head of the child is also rubbed with oil of the silver-perch in the same way ] as the Kwag'ul women do with their children. ||

20 Now you know why the women of the Koskimo have long heads. | All the bedding in the cradles of the Koskimo women | and Kwag'ul women is the same. Therefore | the mountain-goat wool is prized highly when it is bought by the Koskimo women from the | Kwag'ul. ||

25 The only difference is in the lacing of the child among the Koskimo women. | They use deer-skin, and they cut a narrow strip | half a finger-width wide and | very long. Two pieces are cut off. After they have been cut off, | the woman takes the back-rest and lays it

30 down flat || where she sits. Then she takes the long strips of thin dressed cedar-withes | and puts them on the edge of the back-rest, in this way: She takes the | narrow strip of deerskin and uses ■] "" j "~~" f^T it to sew on at (1). | After that she measures off J— — — : J I- the cedar-withes and sews it on at

35 (2), | and then " she also sews it on at (3), || and finally at (4). She does the same | at the other edge of the back-rest. Alter doing so, | she places the back-rest on the back-rest holder. Then it is finished. | It is called "deer-skin rope sewed on to backrest." | This is the old style of the Koskimo women. ||

40 If a child dies, the cradle and | the clothing are taken to the cedar-bark cave; but when | the cluld grows up to be healthy, they keep the cradle and the | back-rest, and they hide the clothing and the | cedar bark forehead-presser in the cave. The} keep thecradle 45 in case the first-born child should have a younger sister. |

Twins.1 — They only change the cradle when a woman has twins: for if she shoidd have twin-children after having many other children, | the cradle is put away. |

Then a wood-worker is asked to make for the twins cradles || with 5 notched head-pieces. Then the wood-worker goes to work at once trying to finish the cradles with the notched head-boards | before the twins are four days old; and when j the cradles with the notched head boards are finished, and the twins are three days old, they put two feathers from the II tail of the eagle into $tt if)

two holes drilled in thenotched headboard [ of the r-"1 cradle, two at each side, in this way: | \

Now the twins are wrapped up well in | soft yellow cedar-bark and in red cedar-bark. The faces of the | twins are painted red, and also those of the mother || and father. And the father of the twins must 15 sit still; | he is not allowed by lus tribe to do anything; he is not even allowed to get fire-wood | and water. His relatives | always sit by his side in the house in order to get the fire-wood | and the

' Sec also pp. 631-635. 75052 — 21 — 35 eth — pt 1 43

20 water and food || for the couple, and the twins who belong to the Salmon, are not allowed to have misfortune | — |.

As soon as the twins that belong to the Salmon are four days old, | when the navel-string comes off , they take the cradles with the | notched head-boards, put them down on the floor one on the right-hand

25 side of || another woman who has been the mother of twins, and they put down | the other one on the left-hand side; and when everything is ready, | they put the bedding into the two cradles with notched headboards. There is [ no difference between the bedding of twins and that of single children, j The only difference is that a cradle with a

30 notched head-board is used, and that the four || feathers from the tail of an eagle stand on the [ notched head-hoard of the cradle, and that the faces of the twins are | always painted red every fourth day, together with the faces of their parents, and that this continues | until the twins are ten months old.

As soon as the woman who has had twins before, finishes arranging

35 the bedding || in the cradle that was put down at the right-hand side of the | woman who has had twins before, she takes on her arms | the first-horn child belonging to the Salmon. She takes off the| wrappings of yellow cedar-bark and of ved cedar-bark; and, after taking them all off, | she takes the split kelp and puts it around the head of

40 the child belonging to the Salmon. || And this is different in regard t()

twins; | that they do not put on the head-hand until the navel-string 41 comes off on the | fourth day; and after putting the head-hand around the head of the | child belonging to the Salmon, the woman who has had twins (before) speaks | and says (Prayer for the twins): "O friend! || that is the reason why you come. You come to benefit 45 (hose who have come to be your | parents, and you have come to make them rich and to | defend them against sickness, O friend Salmon! you, Supernatural-One!" |

As soon as the prayer has been ended, she puts the child belonging to the Salmon | into the cradle with the notched head-board, and she || follows the way that is done with those who are not twin- 50 children. |

When this has been done, she turns her face to the other | cradle with the notched head-board, arranges everything in it; and after that, | she takes in her arms the child belonging to the Salmon, takes off the bedding j of yellow cedar-bark and red cedar-bark; and when it is all off, she takes the II split kelp and puts it around the head of the 55 child | belonging to the Salmon; and after this she puts it into the [ cradle with the notched head-board; and the woman who had borne twins before speaks, | pressing with her left hand on the chest of the child belonging to the Salmon, | and says (a prayer for the second || twin-child in the cradle): "O friend! I beg you, Supernatural-One, GO to | grow up well with your brother, YayaxwE£ya, and that you do |

63 not leave us! Make your parents happy! | for they will always give away property, so that you may always obtain | new names, 0

65 Ek!' eqElag'ila ! friend Salmon ! || you, Supernatural-One ! Do not come to bring us misfortune! Come to do good! You bring | wealth, you, Abalone-Maker ! You have come from the sea to us with your ] brother, Supernatural-Salmon, friend." |

As soon as the prayer is ended, she puts on the bedding | of yellow

70 cedar-bark and of red cedar bark and that of wool; and || after tlris has been done, she puts on the cedar-bark forehead-presser, and the pillow ; | and when this has been done, she puts down the cradle with notched head-board. She ) puts the first one, with the child belonging to the Salmon, on the [ right-hand side of the bed of the mother (of the new-born twins); and she puts the | other cradle with the

75 notched head-board, and the || child belonging to the Salmon in it, on the left-hand side of the mother; | and after the mother of twins has done this, she puts in order the sleeping-place | of the twinchildren and of their mother. |

She takes cedar-poles, not thick, and | one fathom long, sharpens ||

80 the points, and drives them into the floor, one of them backwards | from the place where the heads of the mother of twins | and of her husband are; and the other one she drives into the floor at the | place where their feet are; and she drives one into the floor | outward from the place where their heads are, and the other one outward from whore their feet are; || and after this has been done, she takes an 85 olachen-net and | hangs one corner to the top of the rear post at the head, | and she hangs one corner to the rear post at the foot of the bed; and | after this has been done, she takes red cedar-bark and measures off two spans. | There she cuts it off. She || splits it into 90 narrow strips. After she has split them, she | folds them in the middle, and hangs them to the net | which has been hung up. They are placed two spans apart. | When she reaches the end of the bed of the | mother of the twins, she puts them in, two spans || under the 95 first row. There are four rows of red cedar-bark. | Then she takes the tail of a white-tailed eagle, pulls out the feathers, | and, when she has them all off, she takes spun nettle-bark. | This is used to tie on the feathers, which are hung between the | red cedarbark, in this wav: , . , . , A , A ,-, A , Now it is done. || Then she 100

takes two thin lETf rf 42j~33/:3 poles and puts them across the two | posts ^K^t=K^T7tt^v over which the net has been hung, and ~ she places the | other pole over the outside posts. Then she takes a new, | large mat and places it across as a roof, and she also puts a new | mat at each end f) of the bed of the || mother of the twins and her Salmon children. After this has been done, | she takes eagle-down and puts it on the red cedar-bark, | and the feathers which hang from the net on the rear of the wall of the bedroom. |

When this has been done, she takes the after-birth of the twins and washes it, so that all the blood comes off; and after doing so.

ID she II hangs it up near the bed of the j mother and of the twins; and she takes the wrapping of the children, and | puts it into the cedarhark box. which she places at the ' outside of the head of the bed that she made for the mother of the twins, for that is the name of the | bed of the twin mother and of her cliildren. When this has

15 been done, the || woman who has had twins before speaks, and says to the mother of the new-horn twins and her | husband, to her who is still sitting on the floor where she gave birth to the | twins near the fire of the house, and she says: | " Now, take care, friends! for you will take up in your arms these | cradles with the supernatural ones,

20 when you go to this house which I made for them; for you || will really take care of both of those whom you have obtained by good luck, your | friends, so that they can not complain of us if they should get sick. | I say so, that you may do everything in the right way. | (I mean that the Salmon children are jealous; J for it kills one of the ||

25 twins if one if them is treated well. And | the one whom you do not treat well will become weak at once, go away, and leave behind his |

brother, and will go homo to the Salmon tribe from which he 27 came.) | That is what I mean, friends ! that you may take good care of those | whom you obtain by good luck." Thus says the woman who has had twins before, II to the woman and her husband, j 30

As soon as her speech is ended, the young mother of twins | and her husband arise, and both take up at the same time the cradles with the notched head-boards. | Together they go, — the woman who has had twins before and J husband and wife, — side by side, going towards the bed in the room; || and when they reach it, they put 35 down the cradles on each side of the | place where the mother of the (new-born) twins is going to lie down. Now she lies down between the twins, | and her husband sits down near her bed. | After this the woman who has had twins before takes a rest, for they | never pass four days without changing the II kelp head-bands of twin- 40 children. |

When four days have passed, the woman who has had twins before unties | the head-band of the twin-children. She takes | perch-oil and oils their heads and | also their bodies. When the heads of the twin-children are soaked with perch-oil, || she takes the 45 kelp head-bands and J puts them around their heads, with the right tightness: j and after she has done so, she paints their faces. She paints them both in the same way, | and she also puts the same |

painting on the faces of the mother and father; that is, two bands

50 running across the eyes, || one beginning at the end of the eyebrows and passing the ends of the | eyes to the lower end of the cheeks, (lie other across the | middle of the eyes down to the lower end of the cheeks.1 | After this has been done, she puts the children into the cradles; | and the woman who has had twins before comes back

55 every four days to II untie the head-bands of the twin-children, and | to oil with perch-oil their heads and bodies. | This continues for four months.

After four months she stops putting the head-bands around the |

60 heads of the twin-children. All the time || the faces of the children and of their parents are painted with ochre, until the twin-children are ten months old. | Mostly the | children continue painting with ochre even when they are grown up. | That is all about this. |

1 did not talk about this. When the woman who has had twins ||

65 first puts the twin-children into the cradles with the notched | headboards, when they are four days old, another person who has had twin-children, a man, | is called to come and sit down, and the | numaym of the father of the (new-born) twin children is called to |

70 come into his house. When they are all inside, || the chief of the numaym of the father of the (new-born) twins speaks, | and says: |

1 On each side of the face one vertical line running from the outer end of the eyebrows, and one from the middle of the eyebrows down to the level of the mouth.

"This is the reason why you were called to come into the house of 72 the twins, | that yon may make a dance for these children belonging to the Salmon, for | we will let our world know about these who came from the sea, from the house of Swimmer (the Salmon). || We will 75 take these supernatural ones who belong to the Salmon out of this house. | Now he shall carry them in his arms." Thus he says, and calls the name of the | man who has had twins before, and he also calls a woman who has had twins, whom lie calls [ his wife, although the | man who lias had twin-children may not lie her husband. ||

As soon as his speech is ended, the man who has had twin-children | SO goes to where the woman who lias had twin-children is seated, I and for a short time they act as though they were husband and wife. He asks for ochre | and eight tail-feathers of an eagle. | Then the elder brother of the (new-born) twin-children |l is called by the man who 85 has had twin-children before to come and sit down by his side | and by the side of the woman who for the time being acts as his wife.

When Salmon-Head, the elder brother of the twins, comes, he sits | down with them, and they paint themselves with ochre, — the three (the man and the woman) | and Salmon-Head, for this is the name of the woman's child || born before she has given birth to twins. | 90 As soon as a woman gives birth to twins, | the name of her elder child is Salmon-Head; and if the child horn before the twin children

93 is a girl, her name is Salmon-Head-Woman. After | they have been painted, they put red cedar-bark around the heads of the three

05 children; and || then the man who has had twin-children before takes eight | tail-feathers of the eagle, and puts one over the middle of the forehead in the | red cedar-hark head-ring of Salmon-Head, and he puts one in the head-band behind; | he puts one over the forehead of the woman who acts as his wife, | and one behind. There arc two on her. Then he does the same on his own head-band .'()() as he did with the woman || who acts as his wife. Then he asks for eagle-down; | and when it lias been given to him, he \ takes it and scatters it so, that the down is line; and | after doing so, he puts it on Salmon-Head; and after | putting it on, he puts it on the younger 5 brothers of Salmon-Head, the || two twins. And alter he has put down on them | he puts down on the woman acting as his wife, and finally on himself. | After he has done so, he and the woman who acts as his wife arise, | and he calls Salmon-Head to stand between them. Then | the man who has had twin-children speaks, and says: |

10 "Stand up, friends! and let us go out and | follow the rides of

Salmon-Chief!" Thus he says. And all stand up. j They all have on the one side of the cedar-bark head-rings a tail-feather of the

!■") eagle, | and four feathers are on the head-band of the || parents of the (new-born) twins. Then the parents who had twin-childivn 13 before | take up the cradles with notched head-boards. And their leader is | Salmon-Head, who is followed by his father; and last by his mother. | Then follows the man who has had twin-children before : and J next tn him, the woman who acts as his wife; and behind follow || all the men. They go out of the house of the twin-children. | 20 Salmon-Head and those next to him — J that is, the father of the (new-born) twins, and behind him the mother of the (new-horn) twins, — that is, j the parents of Salmon-Head. Next to them is the man who had twin-children, j who is carrying one of the twin-children in its cradle with the notched head-board; || and next to him followshis 25 wife with the | other cradle with the notched head-board and the other twin-child in it; | and behind them goes the numaym of the father of the young twins. | Now, Salmon-Head turns to the j right when he comes out of the door of the house, || and the whole number 30 follow him; and when they come to the space between the house in which the twins were horn anil the next one, they walk through the passage, \ come out behind the house, and they walk behind the house in which the twins were born. | They come out at the right-hand side

(if the house | in this way: ■— ■ Then they walk along the front of the house from which ; i they started, || and walk (past) | 35

thehousein which the twin- ;'| f |j children were horn and the next house, and) through *L:-~- '' the passage between (that

36 and the next) house to the left, and | do the same as they did with the first one. In this way they go around four houses | to the left in (his way: _..„.........„.„......, When they have | gone around the four houses :'| |j| |;;[|:j[)|ti proceeding toward the left, until they come '-• *— '^-----v-t^'-^-- ^0 ^jle |ast | house they go along

40 tlie rear of the four houses and || come out of the right-hand side of the house in which the children were born and they all go in. | When they arc inside, the father of the young twins, | and his wife, and Salmon-Head, and also the man who had twin-children, | and (the woman acting as) his wife, who are carrying the cradles with the notched head-boards j in which the twin-children

45 arc, stand up, and || stand in a row. Then the father-in-law of the | father of the young twin-children stands up and gives a copper plate as a marriage gift to his | son-in-law to give away to his tribe. He gives him no names | for the twin-children, for the right to give

50 names | to twins belongs to a grown up male twin; || often a grown up twin-woman names them. |

Now, the tribe invited by the father of the young twins come | and see the two twin-children, and they just | mention the name of (lie copper until the property of the father-in-law of the | father of the young twins is ready for the potlatch, This is called "buying the

55 copper" when || it is done in this way. |

When the tribe have all come in, | the father-in-law (of the father) 56 of the young twins buys his own copper. He does this, | that the twin children may have a name on account of the | copper sold at the time when they were born. Now, || the father of the young twins, 60 and his wife, are dressed up. They wear blankets set with J abalone shells, for they wish the twins to be loved. | They are the ones who d() no work for four years, and | they carry each a copper when they are going around the four | houses. The reason why they each carry a copper is that || they wish to be able to obtain them easily; for they 65 often carry valuables when they do so, | going around the four houses. They do it, because they have to work | for their beloved one (that is, the chief's daughter), who must not do any work. [ Those who have many relatives do this, for it is said by the Indians that | all the relatives will die if they do not follow our customs; || that, although the father of twins | and his wife may not want to fol- 70 low the rules, all the relatives beg them to do so, | and to purify themselves every fourth day in water after the twins are | four days old, and that they do not [ forget to paint themselves with ochre after purifying themselves in water, || the twins as well as the married 75 couple. They continue to do this until the twins are I ten months old. When the minds | of the married couple who are the parents of twins are really strong, they do not do any work for four years; |

78 that is, when there are many to look after them to get fire-wood and | food for them. ||

SO This is the way of those who have twin-children and who have no relatives, — | those who do work before they have twin-children. When (a woman) gives birth to two | children, what she often does is to ask | the midwife to choke the twin- | children, that they may go

85 back home to where they came from; and || the midwife is not allowed to disobey the wishes of the one | of whom she is taking care. Then she at once strangles the twins | that belong to the Salmon. She tries to do this | before anyone else sees the woman who has given birth; and when j the twins are dead, they ask the father of

90 the twins || to go and tell his relatives that his wife has given birth to two dead twins. | Then the midwife takes the afterbirth and washes it weU: | after washing it, she hangs it up to dry. | Then the two men who climb the burial-tree are asked | to come and bury the twins. |

95 When || they come, they quickly make two boxes for the | twinchildren. They are of exactly the same size. | When they have been finished, they take a board out of the right-hand side of the | wall of the house in which the twins were born to take out the twins; | for 300 they make the box outside of the II house, because the Indians say that it brings short life to those who make the j box if the bodies are 1 pat into it inside the house of the parents, even ! in the case of those who are not born as twins. After the twins j have been put into the box, they paint their faces with ochre. Now, | the faces of the two dead children have been painted with ochre. || When this has 5 been done, they put wrappings around them, | and put them into the box. Then | they take a long cedar-bark rope and put it around the burial-box | to hold down the cover, and also for the four men to carry them, j when they bury them. Then it is in this way: After || the ropes have been put around, eight Salmon people 1 1 1 | 1 1 10 come| and stand by the sides of the burial-boxes, two [on each side: so that there are four people carrying | each burial-box of those who are dead. Then they go to bury them. | The two men who climb the II burial-tree go a long distance ahead, each carrying l"1 one short board, and they | look for a good tree with good branches on which to place the boards, on which the burial boxes of the twins are placed. As soon as they find what they are looking for, j they climb up, and put down the boards where | they are to be. After they h;)\ e done this, those who are going to bury them arrive, and || place the 20 burial-boxes at the foot of the twin burial-tree. Then | the eight Salmon people sit on the ground. Now one of the tree-climbers comes down, takes the | rope, and puts it around the middle of one of the burial-boxes. | He throws up the other end,

'_'.") which is used as a hoisting-rope. Then it is caught || by the other climber, who hoists up the burial-box. | The other climber goes up at the same time, holding the box,| so that it does not knock against the burial-tree while it is being [ hoisted up. When it reaches the board on which the burial-box | of the twins is to be placed, the one

30 climber || who has remained in the tree takes it and puts it on the | board where it is to stay. After this has been done, he | lets go of the rope; the other | climber goes down, and puts the end of the rope | around the

35 middle of the other burial-box. Then it is hauled up by the || climber who stays behind, and the other | climber holds the box as it is being hoisted up. When it reaches the place, | it is put on top of the first one that they have put up. Then | the end of the rope of the burialbox is untied and is thrown down. | The one climber goes down with

40 it; || and when he reaches the ground, he ties another hoard to the | end of the rope. This is hauled up by the climber who stays in the tree; j and when it reaches the board where | the two burial-boxes have been placed, it is taken by the climber who remains | in the tree. He puts it on top of the || upper burial-box; and then the other climber goes 45 up, | and helps his friend tie the | burial-box to the twin burial-tree with the rope which they have used for hoisting the burial-boxes. | When this has been done, both comedown; | and as soon as they reach the ground, the eight || Salmon people rise and they go home together with 50 the two | climbers, for the parents of the dead twins do not go along.

Three days after the children of the parents of the twins were born, | in the evening, all the men || of the tribe of the parents of the 55 twins sit down outside of their houses; | and when they are all there, a man who is | told by the tribe to speak, addresses them, for this man is not | one of the chiefs; but the chiefs have asked him | to speak, for the chiefs are afraid of the parents of twins, || because 60 nobody ever succeeds in anything if the parents of twins wish ill to him. | Therefore the chiefs do not show that what is said is [ the speech which they wish to be made. The man says, | "O tribe! 1 invited you to come here and be seated, that I may ask the parents of twins | whether they intend to keep the taboos. Now I will go ami ask them." || Thus he says, and walks into the house in which the 65 twins were born; | and when he goes in, the woman, the mother of the twins, says at once | that she has heard what was said by the people

68 outside of the | house. And the woman, the mother of the twins, says, "We shall not | observe the taboos. We are going to dress in our

70 work-clothes in || the morning, and you shall come and beat rapid time when we go out of this | house in which the twins were born." As soon as she ends her speech, | the man goes out, and repeats to his tribe what the , mother of the twins has said; and the man tells his |

75 tribe to rise early, when daylight comes, and beat rapid time || for the parents of the twins, in front of the house in which the twins were born. Thus he says. J And when he ends his speech, the men all go home | to their houses. Tn the morning, when it gets day, | the men arise from their sleep, and | sit down outside of the house in which the

80 twins were born; and when || they arrive, they take their batons and distribute them | one to cadi man; and when | each man has one, the one who spoke before, | when the tribe first sat down, goes into the house. He does not stay there a long time, before | he comes out of the door of the house in which the twins were born, and

85 says, || "Now, beat time rapidlj !" And when he says so, all | the men beat time rapidly on boards. First the | father of the twins cumes out, and lie has hanging on his back the wedge-bag in which are his wedges | and his stone hammer. In his right hand he carries |

his paddle, in his left hand his || mat, as he comes walking along. 90 Next to him comes | his wife, who carries on her back her clamdigging | basket, and in it is her berrying basket. J Iii her right hand she carries her paddle and her digging-stick: | in her left hand, her mat and her bailer made of || a large horse-clam shell, which she uses 95 when digging clams; | and an old mat is spread over her back. Both of them, | she and her husband, wear belts. The | three go out, following one another, — first the man who spoke, | next, the father of the twins, and last the mother of the twins. |] Then they come walk- 400 ing along, and stand | outside the door of the house, and when they stop walking, I all the men stop beating time; and that | man, the only one who speaks, addresses them, and tells all | the people that tlie parents of the twins will not obey the taboos, || ami that they will 5 continue to work as they used to do before, and that for this reason | they have come in their working-dresses. Then he j promises a potlatch to his tribe. |

Immediately he gives away blankets to his tribe; j and after this has been done, || the man and his wife, the parents of the twins, are 10 at once allowed to work, when she gets strong enough to work. | Now this is ended. I

12 Now I shall talk about the mother of twins, | who, together with her husband, obeys the taboos. | When she is pregnant again, the

15 woman || and her husband, paint their faces with ochre, when daylight comes in the | morning, and they wear around their heads rings of red cedar-bark, with | one white tail-feather of the eagle standing in the back. They wear these during the whole time of her pregnancy ; | and when the child is born, is at once given the name

20 Salmon-Tail if it is a boy; || and if it is a girl, it is called Salmon-Tail- Woman. | Then they take one of the cradles with notched headboard | of the twin brothers for the cradle of Salmon-Tail, and they | do everything to him as they did to his elder brothers, the | twins.

25 And when Salmon-Tail is ten months old, || he is taken out of the cradle. They take the cradles with notched head-boards | to the cedar-bark cave. |

I have forgotten this. When the twins are ten months old, — that is, if they are recognized as olachens by an old man, one of twins — | generally this is a pair of twins, consisting of a boy and a

30 girl, — || and leg-rings and arm-rings are put on them, | an old man, one of twins, is called to give them a name obtained from the olachen. Then he looks at their hands; and when he sees that the twins have | small hands, the old man, one of a pair of twins, says to the | boy,

" O friend Making-Satiated ! yon are an olachen, " || for that is a name 35 coming from the home | of the olachen; and he looks at the other one of the twins, | and he names her Making-Satiated- Woman. When the twins come from | the Silver-Salmon, then the girl twin is called Ahalone- Woman, | and the boy is called Only-One; || and when the 40 twin-children come from | the Sockeye-Salmon, the girl is called Head-Dancer and | the boy is called Head-Worker. |

Now I shall talk again about the woman, the mother of | Salmon- Tail, the younger brother of the twins. You already || know that 45 the cradles with notched head-board of the | twins, after they have been used for their younger brother Salmon-Tail, j are taken to the cedar-bark cave. The mother of twins does not keep their cradles. | If the woman expects another child, | the Indians are careful not to make the cradle before II the child is boin, for often the child will be 50 dead when it is born; | therefore the cradle is made after the child is born. | When the child is born, | they make the cradle at once. Then | the child and his parents go straight back to the old ways. There are none of the customs that are being observed with twins, || and with their parents, and the | child of the mother who had given 55

56 birth to twins does not belong to the Salmon. It is an ordinary child, | like other children that were born single. |

The only thing that is different in the case of a mother of twins | is that the name of the preceding child is Salmon-Head; and when ||

GO the mother gives birth to twins, then, when Salmon-Head is ten months old, | his cradle is put away; and they make the two cradles | with notched j head-boards for cradles for the twin-children | belonging to the Salmon. | They do the same as they | did before to

05 the twins when they were born; and when || the twins have a younger brother, his name is | Salmon-Tail. Now I have finished | talking about twin-children. | 1 Cauterizing. —The afterbirth is well washed, | and hung up until il is quite dry. When it is dry, | it is folded up and put into the workbox | of the mother of the twins. It is kept in the box as a medi- 5 cine. || The mother of the twins takes well rubbed and scraped nettlebark, and | puts it into the same box. The whole tribe | know that the mother of twins keeps the afterbirth. She also | keeps in the same box a piece of cedar-wood with a hole burnt through it. | It is in

1.0 this way: ,- s And if a man or a woman is sick, || they go to the ^ mother of twins to be | cauterized by her.

iK'-is] BELIEFS AND CUSTOMS 095

Then the mother of twins opens her j box and pinches off some 1? of the dry afterbirth, | and she takes some of the soft nettle-bark, and also her stick for cauterizing. | She takes these to the house of the one whom she is going to cauterize. Generally they cauterize || the knees or the chest, or both sides of the head, | 10 if a person has headache; or, if a, [ man or woman has backache, they cauterize on each side \ of the small of the back; or if they have pains in the chest, they | cauterize on each side of the collar-bone, or sometimes above the nipples; [| or when there is pain on each 20 side of the head, they cauterize both temples | or often on the back of the neck and of the head, | but most frequently they cauterize the knees. |

When the mother of twins arrives, she sits down. She takes the | afterbirth and breaks it up into small pieces. She takes the || rubbed 25 nettle-bark and loosens it. She mixes it with a piece of the afterbirth, | and takes the cauterizing-stick. She puts the afterbirth and | nettle-bark which are mixed into the hole at the end; and when the hole of the | cauterizing stick is full, she lays it on the place where she is going to cauterize. She takes | cedar-wood, puts one end into the fire, and, when it burns, she || sets fire to the material in the cauter- 30 izing-stick. And when it burns evenly, | she presses it down with

32 her left hand | into the hole, so that it may not move; for generally the | person moves about when he feels the burning on his skin. This is the thickness | of the cauterizing-stick, and this the size of the

35 hole at the end.1 When || it is all burnt up, she lifts the cauterizingstick, and only j the ashes of the afterbirth and of the nettle remain sticking to the skin. The mother of twins presses on it | with her first-finger, so that the ashes go in; and | after she has finished cauterizing, she is paid one pair of | blankets for every place she has

40 cauterized. Sometimes she will cauterize in four places, || and she is paid four pairs of blankets. |

Cripples. — Now I shall talk about children that belong to the Salmon, but who are not twins. | When a woman gives birth to a one-eyed child, then | all the men say that it belongs to the Salmon. |

45 When a woman gave birth to a girl with a red spot like a || strawberry on the forehead, here at Fort Rupert, | it was said that (the girl) belonged to the Salmon; and a Koskimo woman gave birth | to a boy whose right leg was bent, who belonged to the Salmon; | and Kiinxulayngwa, a | l !ar, lasiqwala woman, gave birth to a child | who was white mi one side of the face, and he also belonged to the Salmon;

5(1 and || Ayaga, a Koskimo woman, gave birth to | a boy who had a scar on the face; | and also those who have scars on the body or who | lack a finger, — all these about whom I am talking are said to

1 3 mm. thickness of gauge-stick; 8 mm. diameter of hole.

belong to the Salmon. | I have seen all this, when the people 1 of all the tribes follow the rules that they have II for twin-children, and 55 their parents also | observe the taboos that belong to twin-children. |

Navel-string. — The parents keep the navel-string, | and if one of 1 the twins is a boy, | (the mother) wraps it in cedar-bark and gives it to her | near relative who is a seal-hunter, that the boy, one of the twins, may become a seal-hunter. II Then the seal-hunter puts the 5 navel-string between | the prongs of his harpoon-shaft. It is tucked in where the cross is shown.1 | Sometimes they put the navel-string at the end | of the seal-hunter's paddle. They | wrap helpline over it at the narrow part of the || hunter's paddle.2 The navel-string of 10 the | boy is put under a wrapping of dried helpline. | This is done with the navel-string of twins and of those who are not (wins. |

If they wish the boy to be a canoe-maker, they put | the navelstring under the deer-skin lashing of the || adz of a canoe-builder. 15 This is the navel-string right | where the cross is.3 Often they put the navel-string into the neck-ring | of a canoe-maker or of a sealhunter. When they wish | the boy to be a song-leader when lie

1 In the angle between the two prongs. The figure showing the cross has been omitted.

'-Just above the blade. The kelp is wrapped about, it several times, so as to cover about four or five inches of the paddle just above the blade.

3 Between the blade of the adz and the wrapping holding it. The figure showing the cross has been omitted.

grows up, the baton | of a song-leader is taken, and a hole is made in

20 the end with a thick drill. || The hole goes in deeply, sometimes three finger-widths | deep. When this has been done, they | fold up the navel-string lengthwise, and push it into the drill-hole | at the heavy (Mid of the song-leader's baton. They cut | a round plug of cedar-

25 wood and drive it over the navel-string; and || it goes in tightly, for they wish it to be held very firmly. | And after they have driven it in, they cut off the cedar-stick ) so that it is even with the end of the baton. |

There is another way of doing this. They let the boy sit | in the

30 drum; and they ask the song-leader to beat the || drum, not too loud, while he is singing. He does not beat hard | on the drum when he is beating it. They do this four times to the | boy. |

If it is desired to make him a salmon-fisherman or halibut-fisherman, | they put the navel-string into the neck ring of a fisherman ||

35 who catches all kinds of fish; and the same is done with the halibutfisherman; | he also puts the navel-string into his neck ring. | All the expert workmen wear the naval-strings of boys, | and wear them around their necks. |

40 And they do the same with the navel-strings of girls. || There are two ways. They are worn around the wrist | by a mat-maker or basket-maker, [ or around the neck by a woman who knows how to | 42 dry halibut or who knows how to cut salmon, or by those who know how to dig | all kinds of clams; that the girl, whenshegrows up, may get these without difficulty. || And also, when they wish | a girl or a 45 boy to be a good dancer when he or she grows up, they put | the navel-string of the girl around the legs of a woman who is a good dancer; | and when she knows well how to tremble with her hands, they put it around the wrist of her right hand. They do this, || that 50 the girl may know well how to tremble with her hands when she dances, j And they do the same with the navel-string of the boy; it is I put around the wrist id' an expert cannibal-dancer, that he may become a good dancer | when he grows up. That is all. |

Maturity

This is the princess of the real chief of the numaym | Maamtag'ila. 1 He is the head chief of all the numayms of all | the tribes of the whole people. They are the ones about whom I talked, i who have for their chief £maxuyalidze. The chief has for his princess || K" !edele£laku. The name K' !edele£laku of the princess comes | 5 from her father, when she becomes mature, and is sitting in the house for the maturing girl; | therefore she is called princess (K' !edel, "sitting still in the house")- The word k' !edef has two meanings. | She does not move while she is sitting there, her knees pressed | against her breasts; she is sitting still on the floor. And

10 when she eats, || she eats four pieces of broken dried salmon, which are put into the dish of the | princess; and there is a little oil into which the four | small pieces of broken dried salmon are dipped. And when this has been put into the dish, her j attendant, who is always a shaman, takes up the dish and | puts it before the princess,

15 and the princess only looks at the || dish which is placed in front of her. Then the attendant goes to draw | water, and gives it to the princess. Then the attendant | shaman-woman of the princess takes her drinking-tube of bone | taken from the wing of an eagle, and she puts one end of the j drinking-tube into the water. The attendant

20 shaman-woman || holds the bucket with water, and the attendant woman speaks, | and says, "Now, take a drink. Don't overdo it. | Put the end of the drinking-tube into your mouth that you may have a small mouth, princess, | and do not take a large mouthful when you drink. You may swallow four times | that you may not be stout,

-5 princess." Thus she says. || Then the princess puts her mouth to the end of the bone drinking-tube, | and she just opens her mouth and pushes the end of the | bone drinking-tube into it, and she just sucks at it and | swallows water four times. Then she stops, for the attendant shaman-woman watches I that she does not drink too much water. || After she has finished drinking water, she takes the 30 broken pieces of dried salmon, | dips them into the oil which is in the small oil-dish, and puts them J into her mouth. She chews very slowly, and she continues | doing this while she is eating the broken dried salmon. As soon as she has swallowed her food four times, j she stops eating, and immediately || the attendant takes her dish ami •'!•") oil-dish and | puts them away. She draws water for the princess to drink after eating; for | the various kinds of straps are put around the body of the princess, | who wears a hat with a tassel, and abalone shells tied to the | outside of the hat and abalone shells arc sewed to her blanket. || This is called "the abalone-blanket of the maturing 40 princess," | and her hat is called "the abalone-hat of the maturing princess." | If her father owns a copper, the expensive copper stands at. the right side of the maturing princess. The copper is placed there | that the princess may easily get coppers to carry on her back to her || future husband. She continues sitting in the house for [ a 45 month. This is called liaqadzd^'d ("flat things meeting inside of the house"). | She washes four times every fourth day. | Then the straps are taken off her body, and it is called " taking the straps off the body of | the maturing girl." Then the eyebrows are pulled out by the || attendant shaman-woman, and she cuts off | her hair. Then 50

52 the attendant woman takes | the straps and her seat made of soft cedar-bark | and goes into the woods, where she looks for a good vew-tree; and when | she finds it, she puts the straps of the princess

55 on to the tree. When [| this has been done, she takes the cedar-bark and places it in the | cave in which the cedar-bark is hidden. It is finished after this. |

The Sweat-Bath

1 Now I shall talk about the ways of the Kwakiutl when | a man or woman is sick. They make a steaming-box; | that is, a long box of the same length as the | sick person, for the height of the steaming-box 5 is two spans. || When it is finished, | not many stones are taken, for when there are many | there are twelve, and these are put on the fire of the. house. As j soon as they are all on the fire, a large basket is taken and I a man goes down to the beach to low water mark carrying a

10 large basket; || ami when he reaches the seaweed, he plucks it off and puts it I into the basket. When the basket is full of seaweed, he | carries the seaweed-basket on his back up the beach and puts it down by the side of the | steaming-box. Then he takes many yellow cedar-tips and I places them down alongside of the steaming-box. Then he

15 takes the seaweed || and puts some of it into the bottom of thesteaming-

Iv !alasa box, so | that it is covered with seaweed. The thickness of the seaweed 16 is four fingers | in the bottom of the steaming-box. | Then he takes tongs and takes up the red-hot stones and | puts them on the seaweed. He does the same with the other || red-hot stones, but the stones are 20 not placed close together. | When all the red-hot stones are in, he throws more | seaweed on, four fingers thick. | Then he takes yellow cedar-tips and lays them over the seaweed ; | and when there are many yellow cedar-tips on it, he takes an old blanket and || water and pours 25 water into the steaming-box; | and after he has poured water over it, he spreads the old blanket over it. Now the | man lies down on his back naked in the. steaming-box, and the | old blanket is taken and he is covered with it, so that only his head shows. | Then he lies for some time in the steaming-box until |[ the stones begin to get cold. Some- 30 times | a sick person lies until noon in the steaming-box, if the | heat of the steam bath is right. If the heat of the body is so great that he can not endure it, | then the sick man is taken out again | and some of the hot stones are taken out, || that the heat may be i ight. When this is 35 done, he lies down on it again; | and the sick person does not come out of the steaming-box | until the perspiration of his body begins to get cold. Then his body is shaking | because his body is cold. Then they wash him to remove the | cedar smell from his body; and when his

40 body has been wiped off,|| oil of the silver-perch is rubbed on his body. After | this has been done, they take soft shredded cedar-hark and wipe off his | body to remove the silver-perch oil. The reason why they quickly nib the body with | silver-perch oil before it gets dry and whde the body is still in perspiration, | is because they do not want

45 the skin to get hard; for || they say that the skin of a sick person who has been steamed will bo | very painful the day after, if the silverperch oil is not rubbed on the body, | because the skin gets hard, and he feels very sick; | hut the skin of a person gets never hard if his body is rubbed right away with | silver-perch oil before it gets dry.||

50 Tins is all about one way of (lie sweat bath. |

There is another method of sweat bathing. As soon as the person conies out of | the steaming-box, be washes his body with cold water; and after | this is done, he wipes it with soft shredded cedar-bark. Then another person | takes rough sandstone and puts it into water

55 which is in a || dish. Then he takes the root of blue hellebore and rubs the root of the | blue hellebore on the rough sandstone which is in the water in the dish. | As soon as the water in the dish becomes roily, the sick | person sprinkles his body with the blue hellebore mixed with the water, | after he finishes steaming; and when his body is all wet with

60 the || blue hellebore mixed with water, the sick person remains sitting doas] BELIEFS AND CUSTOMS 705

still | to let it dry on his body; and when his body is dry, | another 61 person takes oil of the silver-perch and rubs it on the | body of the sick person; and when his body is covered with | silver-perch oil, soft shredded cedar-bark is taken and it is wiped || off from the body, so 05 that the silver-perch oil comes off. After this it is finished. | All the Kwakiutl tribes use the steam bath for medicine, the whole number of tribes. | And generally the sick person gets well. | There are only a few sick | men or women who do not get well. That is all. [|

Death

When a beloved child is dying, | the parents keep on pra3'ing to 1 . the spirit not | to try to take away their child. "I will | pay you with these clothes of this my child, Sitting-on-Fire." || Thus they say, 5 while they put on the fire the clothes of the one who is lying there sick. |

Then the parents of the one who is lying there sick pay Sitting-on- Fire, | that he may pray to the souls of the grandparents of the one who lies sick, that they may not | wish to call their grandson. And the parents of the | one who lies there sick take four kinds of food, dry salmon first. [| They break it into four pieces. When it is ready, 10 they | take cinquef oil-roots and fold them up in four pieces. | And

Death

13 when that is ready, they take dried berry-cakes and | break them into four pieces. And when that is ready, they | take viburnum-

15 berries, lour spoonfuls. When all this || is ready, the father of the one who is lying sick in bed takes the dry salmon and | throws the pieces into the fire, one by one. And the | mother of the one who lies sick in bed says, "O Sitting-on-Fire ! now eat, and protect | my child, vSitting-on-Fire!"

Then the father of the one who lies sick in bed takes also cinque-

20 foil roots; he || takes one (root) and dips it into the oil. And | the mother of the one who lies sick in bed says again, "O Sittingon-Fire! go on, and pray to the | spirits, that they may have mercy on my child!" Thus she says. |

Then the father takes also one of the dried berry-cakes, dips it |

25 into oil, and throws it into the fire. Then he himself says, || "O Sitting-on-Fire ! now do have mercy on me, and | keep alive my child here, Sitting-on-Fire! Have mercy | and press back my child here, spirit, and I will take care of this, | supernatural one, that I may still have for a while my son here! Long-Life- | Maker!" ||

30 And when he has put all the berry-cakes on the fire of the house, then | he takes one of the spoonfuls of viburnum-berries, and three times he aims at | the fire of the house. The fourth time he pours them on the fire; and he | says, "Take this, Sitting-on-Fire! and pray to the spirits | of those behind us that they have mercy on me and my || wife here ! Pray to the Long-Life-Maker that he may | 35 come and take away the sickness of my child here ! Take pity on me, and | ask the supernatural one to come! Wa!" Thus says the father to Sitting-on-Fire. | Then that is finished. |

Then the shaman is asked to think of this while he is asleep, when || the parents finish putting into the fire the clothes of the one 40 who is lying sick abed and the four different kinds | of food. And immediately the- shaman goes into the woods, | trying to meet what made him supernatural. | Then the one who is sick abed is asked also to bear in mind, while he is asleep | at night, what the spirits of those behind us and || Sitting-on-Fire would say. Then the parents 45 also bear it in mind | while they sleep during the night; for they all, the parents | and the one sick abed, are just the same as the great shaman, because | the clothes and the food were put into the fire. J

Then they go to sleep. Then something is taken that belongs to the || one sick abed, and it is kept. And as soon as he goes to his 50 bed, | he hangs it up over the head of his bed. And as soon as the shaman | comes back, he lies down in his bed. | The owner of what is hanging up over the bed thinks of it continually. | And as soon as the one lying sick abed dreams, laughing while he is asleep, || then he 55 knows that he is not going to die. And when he dreams that | his

56 hair is hanging over his face, then the shaman knows that the sick one will die. | When he dreams that he is laughing, then the shaman | sings his sacred song and goes into the woods. He goes to search for the soul of the one who | lies sick abed, to bring it hack to him. At once the parents of the one who lies sick abed

60 feel good || at heart when they hear the shaman | singing his sacred song. And when they do not hear him singing his sacred song, | then they know that the shaman dreamed that hair was hanging over his face. | Then he never sings his sacred song. |

65 In the morning, when day comes, the hearts || of the parents of the one who lies sick abed feel bad, for they know that | their child will die. Then the one who is lying sick abed is growing weak very fast. | His parents now take all the best kinds of | food and the best clothing for the one who is sick abed, who is dying, j

As soon as (the breath) of the one lying sick abed breaks, the II

70 parents take the best clothing and put it on the one who had been sick abed. | After the parents have done so, the mother kicks her dead child four times. | And when she first kicks him, she says, | "Don't turn your head back to me." Then she turns around, and again | she kicks him. And as she kicks him, she says, "Don't come

75 back again." || Then she turns around again. She kicks him; and she | says as she kicks him, "Just go straight ahead." And then she | kicks him again; and says, "Only protect me and your | 77 father from sickness." Thus she says, and she leaves him. j

The (body) is taken by other people after this, and is taken through || (a hole), planks being pulled out at the side of the house. 80 There | the dead one is put into his coffin. Then he is | buried. And as soon as all those who have buried him have gone, | then the mother of the dead one gives all (lie best food and | the best clothes to other women, to go and burn them || behind the village. As soon 85 as they have done so, they come back. | For four days the mother of the dead one does so, | throwing food in the morning into the fire of her house. |

That is what the ancestors of the Kwakiutl do when | a child belonging to the nobility dies; and the II roof-boards of his father's 90 house are at once pulled down. And all | the men onl_y stop when all the roof-boards have been pulled down: and that is called'' craziness strikes [en the end] on account of the beloved one who died."

Four days after the child has died, | those who are not related to him are called to cut the hair of the mother ]| and of the father, and of 95 his brothers, for it is bad if | relatives cut the hair. When they cut the hair, it is | just as though they were cutting the throats of the relatives. Therefore | the Indians do this way. They will not let | the relatives cut the hair; that is what the Indians call had luck, when 100 the hair is cut || by relatives. Now it is finished in this manner. This is just to recognize | that a relative of those whose hair has been cut has died, and because they feel sick I at heart for the one who died. | '

The Ghost Country

1 A man was about t() die. A woman was his sweetheart. | She loved him. Then the woman saw her lover. | "You only have pity for me, for I am anxious about your state in the house. | I can not stop crying all these nights. There is always crying on account of || 5 the state in which you are. I long to know where you are going, that I | may go to the place to which you will go, for I shall probably not live when you get weak (die)." - ■ | " Really, take care!" said on his part the man to the \ woman, "and 1 will come and take you if the place to which I go should be good. | I shall come to take you that we may go to my future place. If (the place) should be bad," ||

10 said the man to his sweetheart, "I shall not come and take you. | I have beads for my necklace, t hat you may recognize me | if I come to take you. Don't consent to be taken off (by anyone else)." |

Then the man became weak (died). He was buried. Then | the

15 woman did not sleep, expecting her lover. Her lover came. || "Oh!" said the woman. "Oh!" said the man on his part. | "I come

The Ghost Country

1 See also Addenda, p. 1329.

iioas] BELIEFS AND CUSTOMS 711

to take you, that we may go to the place where I have gone. 16 Behold! it is good." | Then the woman felt of the necklace of the man. | "Let us go!" said the woman. Then she gathered her | belongings and they started. They arrived at a river. "Go on, shout! II that we may he taken (across)," said on his part 20 the man to the woman. | "Come, fetch us!" said on her part the woman. | The children did not pay any attention; they were playing on the ground, poling in the river. "You | yourself shout, that we may be taken (across)." Then the man | just yawned. The children came and took them across, and || they went to the 25 house. Then they went up and entered the house. |

The sisters of the husband of the woman recognized them. Then | they sat down in the house. Her sisters-in-law turned around in the house. The woman opened her little bag | and distributed spoons among her sisters-in-law. | They did nut take them. Then the husband of the woman said: || "Put those spoons on the 30 fire. Indeed, they only know | what is given to them when this is done to them." — "That is very strange; | you only turn your faces in the house when I try to give you something," said the woman. | Then she threw them on the lire of the house, and all the spoons burned. I The women took from one another the spoons || when they 35 burned inside. The women took care | of the spoons, j

37 Then the woman was pregnant, and gave birth to a child. | The child she had borne was a boy. For a long time the woman staid in the house; | then she longed for her father and her mother. "Let

40 us || see the grandparents of your master!" said the woman. "Let | us go!" said the man. Then they went out to go to their | house. They entered the house. The mother of the woman saw her | child. "Oh, oh, oh!" said the mother of the woman. "Welcome, | my

45 treasure ! Now take pity on your slaves, for what || can surpass our need of sympathy? Welcome! | Bring your child, that I may carry it in my arms." | Then the woman put her child in her arms, and | the mother of the woman carried it. She looked the child in the face. "What | should there be? Its eyes were holes, its face was a

50 little green, and moss was on the side of its face. II Then the woman said, "Ah!" and threw away the child. | "What is the matter with this chdd ? Confound it [indeed, you begin to be dead in the house!]" | said on her part the mother of the (woman). "Don't speak about me in vain anxiously, | that I should come again (and that you should) see me. I just had pity on you; | therefore I came and tried

55 to get to you." Thus she said to her mother and her || father. Then the mother of the woman followed her. "Come, | take pity on me! Give mo your child, that I may carry it." — "O my dear! I am | going back. I do not return to you at all. You have pushed aside | my child," the woman just said to her mother. | The mother of the woman cried in vain. The woman just started to go || to her hus- GO band, to the ghosts. There | she staid. She did not come back. That is the house of the ghosts. That is | the end. |

The Soul of Man. — Now I shall talk | about what the shamans and 1 twins, those who are born two | of one mother, say. This is what is referred to as Salmon twin. | I shall talk about this first, because she talked franjdy || about the sold of twin male and | female, for a 5 woman who was called Yayaxuyega talked very openly about it. | She had a large scar high up between her | breasts. I asked her how she was hurt, and she just laughed. | She said to me, "Don't you know? I am a Salmon chdd, || and my sweetheart is the man who 10 was born with me as twin | from the same mother. What you ask about is a spear-mark on me, | made when we were going up the river when I was a sockeye-salmon. | The spear of the one who speared me broke off. And then I went home to our house (where I lived) with | Maesila (guardian of salmon). Our souls always walk about among you || in your villages, but you don't see | us, for we are only souls. 15 Then I | asked my sweetheart MamEnlaye£, who was an olachen, to I leave (with me) our tribe, because they were talking about my having | ManiEnlaye£ for my lover; therefore we entered || our pre- 20

21 tended mother, LaeLas, and therefore | we just call her by that name." Thus said Yayaxuyega. |

Then I questioned her, because she said that all the souls of | twins went back to the village of Maesila at the outer edge of our world, | and therefore I asked her, "Is that the only place where the souls of ||

25 men go, to Maesila?" Thus I said to her. Then she said, "The | village of Ealexusiwalis, who is referred to by us as killer-whale, is notfar away. The | sea-hunters go there; for the souls of the sea- hunters come from | Ealexusiwahs, whom we call killer-whale. |

30 When the souls get tired, they go home || to the village of Ealexusiwalis. Then | the man, the owner of the hunter's soul, does not live long when he goes home, and he dies, | for he is not strong when his soul does not hold together | his body. Now watch my lover MamEnlaye£, | who came with me when we escaped from our ||

35 parents, when they talked too much about our | being lovers, for he says that he is going home, and that his | soul has already gone to the souls of the Salmon, when they die in the rivers after | spawning. And when they die, their souls go home | to the outside of our world.

40 Now MamEnlaye£ || has never any strength, for he is sleeping all the time. | He has no happiness." Then I asked Yayaxuyega | why the

BOisJ BELIEFS AND CUSTOMS 715

heart of him to whom she referred as her lover was bad. She only 42 laughed | and said, "His heart is bad, because I am married to | •maxumEwes." Thus she said. Then Yiiynxiiyega said, "We are always || walking along with the souls of the Salmon in the night. | 45 for they are all human beings." Thus she said. Then I asked her about | the seat of the soul of the Salmon, and also of man. | She laughed again and said, "Why, don't you | know? It always sits on the head, and the || soids of the Salmon also sit on the heads; but it 50 is different with the souls of the sea-hunters. [ They immediately go into their killer-whale masks, | and they go hunting seals." |

Then I questioned her again, and I said to her, "Go on, tell me, now, | that I may believe that you really know what you are talking about. What || becomes of our souls when we sleep in the night? 55 Doesn't the soul also go to | sleep?" Thus I said to her. Then she laughed again and said, "You are a | foolish man, really you are foolish that you think the soul \ of man, and of woman, goes to sleep. No, the soul never | goes to sleep at night, nor in the day. In the day it stays together || with us, and keeps watch over us. But when 60 night comes, and we go to sleep, | then our soul immediately leaves us, and goes to a distant | land. And then we dream of the place to which our soul goes, | and what it is doing. Now the person is not dead when he sleeps, | only he has no strength when he is asleep, for

65 his soul goes traveling about; If and when it is near day, the soul comes back again and \ sits on top of the head of the man. Then the man awakes | and gets up. If the soul of a man who is asleep goes too far away | and comes not back again, the man remains in bed |

70 asleep and is dead. The time when this happens is when the || soul goes to another man and makes a mistake." | Then I questioned her: "Where do the souls of | all those who are not twins and who are not sea-hunters go, — those of the common | people? Where do the souls go when the owner of the soul dies?" Thus | I said to her. Then

75 Yayaxuyega became angry and said, || "Don't they always stay in the village not very far from the other end | of the village? and don't they come walking about at night?" | Then she said, "I shall stop answering your questions. | It occurs to my mind that I have been the cause of anger for the Salmon and of the souls of the | dead ones,

80 because 1 talk about it. I think they will come II to get me now and take me home." Then I said, "Are you going to die? and do you say for that reason | that you will go home?" Thus I said to her. Then she cried, | and she said, "Indeed, I have done harm to myself, because I talked to you, | for I have divulged the ways of the | Salmon

85 people." Now I was really in her disfavor, and she was || really crying. Then I left her. I

iioas] BELIEFS AND CUSTOMS 717

Now her brother MamEnlayee, to whom Yayaxiiyega | referred 86 as her lover, was asleep all the time. He was depressed; | and his father Yaqal£Enala went up to the roof of his house, | and he called ManiEnlaye£ to go up and help him. || Immediately MamEnlayaye 90 went up to the roof of his house; | and when he just reached the place where his father Yaqal£Enala was, his foot slipped, | and he fell through the roof of the house, and he was | killed. Then Yayaxiiyega said that his soul had | gone home long ago. Not long after this Yayaxiiyega || also died. This was all what the | one said who 95 spoke openly about those born from the Salmon.

I forgot one thing. When I asked the Salmon woman Yayaxiiyega | what the soul of man was, whether it is large | or small, she said, ''Don't you see your shadow on the || ground when the sun is 100 shining? That is just like the soul. When | the soul wishes to sitwhere it is always seated, | on our head, then it is small. In the day time it is small, | but when we are asleep, it is big, when it travels about where it is going." |

And Yayaxiiyega said also this to her mother Laexas. || There were 5 three elder sisters of Yayaxiiyega. She called her | mother to come and sit down on her bed, and she said to her, | "You and your husband are very bad, for 3rou do not know how | to take care of us.

Now I shall go home, and take the | souls of my elder sisters." 110 Thus she said. It was only three II days since the time when Yayaxiiyega had said so to her mother when she died; | and it was not one winter when her | three elder sisters died, and their parents soon followed them. I That is all to be said about this. I

1 Now I shall talk about what is said by the shaman, about the | soul of man, by the great shaman Qasnomalas. That is | his name as a shaman, as a | chief of thenumaym SisEiiL!e£ of the Nak !wax' da£xu 5 his name is G'ex"se£stalisEme£. || When Lanax'lanag'Eku, the princess of Ts lagEyos, was very sick, | her grave-box had already been made, and they were about to wrap up her body. I was with the | Nak Iwax'- da£xu, having been invited. When night came, the | shaman Qasnomalas was asked to go and feel for the sickness. | He went and sat

10 down on the floor towards the fire from the woman. || First he felt of the top of her head, and he had not felt for a long time, | when the shaman said, "She has no soul, it flew away long ago. | Go on, clear your house that my tribe the Nak !wax'da£xu may come, | and I shall try to get back her soul. Now get | four kinds of sweet food, and

15 also four pretty dishes, || and put the sweet food into them, and also some clo tiling of this | sick one; and none of the young women shall come, because they might be menstruating," | said the shaman. 17 Now I heard what he said, | for I went with him, because he is the uncle of my wife. Now we ] went out of the house, and then the house was cleared out; and || after the house had been cleared 20 out, they walked and called all the grown-up | men of the Gosg'imuxu, and the Nak!wax'da£xu, and also | the grown-up women. But Qasnomalas did not want the young | men and the young women to come as spectators, because they are | careless, being lovers or menstruating, for their exhalation would make the sick woman worse, I! according to the saying of the Indians, who say that the 25 sick one gets at once worse | when a menstruating woman comes near a sick person. That | is called by the Indians " to steam the sick one," when a menstruating woman goes to see her | sick relatives; and therefore the relatives of the | sick one do not want the sick one to be seen. And also they do not allow young people II who are just 30 married to see the sick one, because they | believe that they are always in bed together, and that is the same as | menstruation. Their exhalation is bad for the sick one. | And if the sick one dies, | the Indians say that he has been affected by the exhalation. If a young woman goes || to see him, or a young man goes to see the sick 35 one, they | often find a recently used napkin of a menstruating woman behind the I taboo house of the sick woman. I

When all the Gosg'imuxu and the Nak!wax'da£xu had gone in, |

40 they went and sat down in the rear of the large house. Then || a long narrow board was taken and was put down in the rear | of the house between two rows of men who sat facing each other.1 | Then many batons were taken and | given to the Gosg'imux" and the Nak !wax'da£xu. | After this had been done, eagle-down was taken and

45 was put on || the two rows of men who sat facing each other in the rear | of the house. When this was done, the sick woman was taken and | was placed on a new mat which was spread in front of the | outer row of men in the rear of the house. | The shamans of the

50 Nak!wax'da£xu gave them instructions what to do; || for the Gosg'imuxu did not know what would be done by the | Nak !wax' da£xu for the great shaman Qasnomalas. As soon as | everything was ready, they all beat fast time together, all those who beat time for the | shaman; and they had not beaten time long, before they stopped. | Four times this was done. When they stopped beating fast time the

55 last time, || the shaman Qasnomalas came in carrying his rattle. | Then he stood on the floor inside of the door of the house. He did not | make any noise. He only looked at the sick woman. Then he | said, "Come,L lemElxalag'ilis, — and j'ouK'Enxwalayugwa, — and you |

GO max' nag' Em — and you Q Iwalax' ilayugwa, for I pray you to help || me.

•'On each side o[ the long narrow board.

You are not prostitutes." Thus he said to them. Immediately | 60 the four women went to where he was standing. Then Qasnomalas asked for | red cedar-bark for neck-rings and for head-rings, and also for | eagle-down. Immediately they went and gave it to him, and | he gave it to each of the four women. When they all had || neck- 65 rings of red cedar-bark and head-rings, the shaman j Qasnomalas put eagle-down on the four women; | and as soon as he had done so, he separated the women, who had to go each | to one corner of the house. Now the women were standing there. | Then Qasnomalas spoke again, and said, "Bring || the grave-box into which you were 70 about to put her whom 1 shall bring back to life, and the wrapping in which you were about to wrap her, | if she had been taken by £yayak'ilaga; f or 1 can see her | soul, which I shaU put back." Thus said the great shaman. Then | they put down the grave-box which was full of blankets, which were to have been wrapped around her | who was to be brought back to life by the great shaman. And he asked for || some clothing of the sick woman who was to be brought back to life, | 75 and for four dishes with sweet food. | All this was put down where he stood. Then he asked one of the | Nak!wax'da£xu, another shaman, to come and break up the grave-box, | and to throw all on the fire in the middle of the soul-catching house. || Then the other 80 shaman went carrying an ax and broke the | grave-box into pieces

75052—21—35 eth— pt 1 46

81 which he threw on the fire in the middle of the house; he took the many | blankets that were to be wrapped around her, and threw them on the fire in the middle of the house. Two kinds of things | were put on the fire by the other shaman. Then he was asked by the great shaman to stand in the house. | And Qasnomalas took the cloth-

85 ing of the || sick woman, carried it as he was going around the fire in the middle of the | house, singing his sacred, song and swinging his rattle, while all the | men were beating fast time. When he came to the place from which he had started, | he sang his sacred song and threw the clothes on the fire in the middle of the house. | Then he

90 took the dish with the sweet food, and put it on the || fire in the middle of the house. Then he did the same with the others. They only | continued beating fast time, those who heat time for the great shaman Qasnomalas; for | all the men are called time-beaters-forthe-shaman. | Then the time-beaters beat very fast time. Qasnom- alas | took the soul when many (souls) were waiting at the door for the

95 clothes that were being burned up. || He would say, "You are another one!" | and let it go. After he had been doing so for a long time, he took hold, with his | right hand, of the soul of the sick woman. Then | the time-beaters of the shaman stopped beating fast time. Then | the other shaman who was standing there began .to speak, and 100 said, "Now let her who is being restored sit up, || that my friend may put her soul back into her." | Thus he said, and the shaman made the sick woman sit up. | As soon as she sat up, the great shaman swung 2 his | rattle, and all the time-beaters beat time. Then the shaman j went towards her, opened his left hand, and the soul was sitting on it. || He rattled with his right hand: and as soon as he came | to the 5 sick woman, he gave his rattle to his friend the shaman, | who was holding up the sick woman. And he made the soul sit | on her head. For a long time he blew on the top of her head ; | and when he finished blowing on it, he pressed the top of the head of the sick woman. || Then he finished. He arose and spoke. He | said, "Now let our 10 sisters dance." Thus he said to the four | women who were to dance merrdy, because he had recovered the soul of the one who had come hack to life, | the one who had been walking with the spirits. Thus he said. Then he sang with | slow time-beating, and the timebeaters began to sing. || Now the four women danced and the | great 15 shaman also danced. As soon as the song ended, they finished. Then they were paid by him with one hundred blankets, and one hundred | blankets were given to the time-beaters of the shaman. Then the woman came back to life | after this. That is all about this. ||

Now I saw Qasnomalas, who was sitting on the ground | not far 20 from the other end of the village of the Gosg'imux" at the | north end. He called me to come the day following, | after he had caught the soul of Lanax'lanae'Ek". I went I and sat down near where he was

25 sitting on the ground, and he spoke first, || and said, "O son-in-law! Wliat do you think about what we | were doing here last night? " Thus he said. I just listened to him, and I | replied to him. I said to him, "It was a great thing that you did, for | you hroke the coffin of the one who woidd have been | not a little sick." Thus I said to

30 him. Then he laughed and said, || "That is not my wish, son-in-law. It is the supernatural power which told me to do | so, and the sold of the sick woman which I | saw flying about inside of the house. | Therefore I did so, and hroke the coffin." Thus said the great | shaman. ||

35 Then I asked him about the soid, whether the soul is large or | small. He said, "0 son-in-law! Did you not see | the soul last night, which came and sat on my hand ? | It is the size of our thumb, when it shrinks and | becomes small; then I put the soul on top of

40 our || head, and it grows so that it is of the same size as our body, for | the body is the house of the soul, for the souls have no houses. | They just fly about day and night. | And the owner of the soul is their resting-place, and our body is their house. | Those who say that souls

45 have houses || in this world lie. They have no houses. They just | fly about our world. In the morning when it is nearly daylight, |

they come home to the owners of the souls. And then they tell | 47 where they have been, and what they have seen where they have been all around our | world, and that is what we call dreams, the news that are told by the souls || when they come back to us." Sometimes the 50 souls come back the wrong way, | when they return to the owner of the soul, and then the soul is hurt, — | when it comes quickly and goes in crosswise, or upside down, into the | body of the owner of the soul. Then the soul is not strong enough | to come out where it is held, and the man at once looks sick. || He is not strong. He does not die 55 quickly, | but he asks a shaman to cure him, and to feel for his | sickness. Then the sides of the head | and the back of the head are first felt of by the shaman, and last he feels of the top of the | head. Then he knows that something is wrong about the soul. || And the 60 shaman teLls him that his soul is in the wrong way. Then the man | asks the shaman to put the soul right when | night comes. Thus he says. And the shaman only says that he will | do so. Then the shaman goes out of the house | into the woods and breaks off the tops of hemlock-branches, || and he makes a ring out of them, 65 through which he makes the man go. | When the ring is done, he hangs it up under the shelter of a thick | tree. Then lie leaves it. As soon as night comes, a man goes to | call a number of elderly men to beat time for the shaman who will cure | the soul.

70 They say this, calling the name of each man. Then || the shaman's messenger goes once, for all the men wish to please | the shaman, on account of their children, in case they should be sick; | therefore they all go immediately | into the house of the sick person, and immediately each one | is given a baton, and eagle-down is put on

75 them || quickly, for they hear the shaman singing his sacred song | in the woods. Then the time-beaters of the shaman beat quick time. | As soon as they stop, a new mat is taken and is | spread out towards the fire from the time-beaters of the shaman. As soon as | this has been done, the man comes and sits down on it. He is naked,

SO without || a shirt. As soon as they finish, the time-beaters of the shaman beat fast time again ; | and after they have beaten time four times, Qasnomalas comes in | singing his sacred song, holding in both hands the large ring. | As soon as he comes into the door of the house, he |

85 standsin the house and looks at the sick man. Then another || shaman carries in his hand eagle-down and puts it on the ring. | After he lias done so, Qasnomalas says, "Go on!" | Immediately the timebeaters beat fast time on the beating-boards. | Then the shaman walks holding the ring on each side. He goes to the man | and sits

90 down on the mat; and when he comes up to him, || the shaman turns around. Then he puts the ring over the man. The | ring is first put on the head of the man. When | the ring goes down to the knees 92 of the man, he arises; and when the ring reaches the floor, | he steps out with his right foot. | Then the man turns to the right. He sits • down again || on the mat. And he does this four times. Then he | 95 stops. Then the time-beaters also stop beating time. Now | the shaman puts down his ring, and he feels of the top of the head of the | man. He does not do so for a long time when he speaks. Then the | shaman says, "Now you have been set right." Thus he says. Then he takes each side of the || ring, and says, "Go on!" At once 200 the time-beaters | beat fast time, and he goes around the fire in the middle of the house; | and when he comes back to the place where he started, he throws his ring | into the fire in the middle of the house. Now it is done after this. And the man becomes well | after this. I just wanted to talk about this. ||

I asked Qasnomalas, when we were sitting down, to how many | 5 places the soul of man goes; and he said, "There are many, | and these are the places to which the soul of man goes, — the sea-hunters' place at sea,1 the hunters' place in the woods,2 | the salmon country,3 and the owl mask.4 |

These which I have named are the places to which the souls go. || But the ghost is not a soul, for it is only seen When | it gives notice 10

i The home o( the killer whales, lo which the souls of sea-hunters go.

• The home of the wolves, to which the souls of the land-hunters go. 3 The country to which the souls of twins go.

• Common people become owls.

1 1 to those who are going to die, those who see him ; for he has the whole body | of a man, and his bones are those of people who have long

• been dead. It is not the same | as a soul, for they have no bones in their bodies, and they have no | blood, for the souls are just like

15 smoke or shadows. || And they have no house besides our body, the body | of the soul-owner. That is the end. |

I have seen Qasnomalas twice, and this is the first time I write about it. | 1 Shamanism.— I will talk about the head shaman. | The " head shaman" is not nearly the same as the shaman of the Kwag'ul, for | the Kwag'ul call the head man of the Sparrow Society "head shaman." That is the same as q.'Entq.'adas (place-of-eating-songs) the one who has a head-ring of red cedar-bark and who never disappears (to 5 be initiated) ; II that is the "head shaman" of the Kwag'ul, and they also call him headman of the Sparrow Society. | He is not a shaman. However, the N;lk!wax'da£xu | use the name "head shaman "for the headman of the shamans — the head chief of the | shamans. They do not call the head of the Sparrow Society "head shaman;" j they call him WadanEin. He is the head of the Sparrow Society of the

10 Nak!wax'da£xu, || Gwa£sEla, Rivers Inlet tribe, the L !ax lasiqwfila, Gosg'imux", Gap !enoxu, Gwats !erioxu, and l !asq lenox", all of these |

' The terms for " soul " among the various tribes are as follows: — liKX'uiui-yf' (man on body) Kwag'ul bKk\va£yi' (manhood) Gosg imux» q!flelayu (means of life) DzawadEenoxu tsleklwa (bird) LlaLlasiqw.'lla bEgwanEmgEmt (man's mask) Nak!\va.-daex" bela'layu (means of healing) Awiklenox"

BOAS] 3ELIEFS AND CUSTOMS 729

own the WadanEm, and also the NaqEing'ilisEla. The | Kwag'uland 12 Q!6moya£ye, £walas Kwagul, Q !omk' luthss, | Mamaleleqala, Qwequ- DzawadEenox", H&xwamis, Gwawaenox", | and Legwilda£xu — all four tribes(?) — own the | "head shaman," who is not a shaman, on whose head red cedar-bark is placed, and who | never dances in the winter ceremonial. The other name of the || head man of the Sparrow Society 20 is "head shaman;" for the "head shaman" is thesamc as a"doctor" in a | museum, who is just called "doctor "but who is not a doctor. | It is the same with the " head shaman" in the winter dance. As soon as the | winter ceremonial is finished, tliat man is no longer | "head shaman," for he is only like a head shaman in the winter ceremonial, when all act in different ways. || It is the same with the "head 25 shaman" of the winter ceremonial. | If the one who is speaking wishes to call him "head man of the Sparrow Society," | then he calls hini "neadman of the Sparrow Society." When another man | sends him to call the cannibal to a feast, he says, "Go, now, | head shaman, and call our friend;" || lor the speakers do not always use the same 30 words. | . . . Therefore they want to have only one -speaker of the winter dance house.

I shall first say what I know about the shamans when they heal the | sick;1 for really you are much mistaken in what you say about

1 The following is a reply to a request for information regarding shamanism received in the years 1897 and 1900.

it, | when you say that the shamans nave spies who look out for ||

35 the sick among all the men. There are no | spies such as you refer to, who tell them about sick people, and about the place | where to feel for sickness of the body. |

And this is also a mistake, what you say, when you say | that the

40 shaman names the price to be paid by the sick person || whom he cures. |

And this is also a mistake, when you say that the | shaman bites his tongue and swallows the blood, and vomits it, when | some one passes behind him when he is eating. |

And this is also a mistake, when you say that the shaman sucksll

45 at the place of the sickness and bites it to make a blue mark appear. |

And this is also a mistake, what you say | about the soul being represented b}r dried berries; for there was a mischievous man,

K' !eso£yak'ilis, | whose soul was restored by a female shaman of the

Nimkish, whose | name was HelagolsEla. K" !eso£yak'ilis said that

50 it was made of dried berries, [| what the shaman placed on her hand) and what she called his soul; but nobody ! believed what K' !eso- £yak'ilis said to all the people, | that it was dried berries, for K" !eso- £yak'iliswas an expert in making fun of | all the strange things that one sees done by the shamans. I have never | spoken with the

55 shaman of the Nimkish, HelagolsEla, and I do not || know whether it is true that these were dried berries or not, as was said by K'eso-

£yak'ilis, | for he was a liar. What 1 mean is, that | all the people 56 believe that HelagolsEla, | that Nimkish woman is a shaman; for all the men | and women of the Kwag'ul are angry on account of what K' !eso£yak'ilis said || when he made fun of her, because Hela- 60 golsEla only goes into the house of sick people | to cure them. |

When a sick man or woman gets well, | the one who made him well never asks for pay, and generally they | are not paid. When the man is poor, then || he does not pay the shaman; but when the 65 one who is cured is a chief, | then he would be ashamed not to pay the shaman, because he is a chief, for he would be made fun of by his | tribe if he did not pay the shaman. All the shamans act that way, | and not one of them names the price to be paid by the one who is cured, | for if it is a common man who is cured by the shaman, || he generally pays two pairs of blankets to the shaman, but | often 70 he is not paid at all; and when (the patient) is a chief, | then the chief gives as much as is proper for the greatness of his position. | It depends upon his own wish how much he pays the shaman. [ The shaman never names the price; for the shaman does not [| talk about 75 the chief if he does not pay him well, for | the tribe of the chief talk about their chief when he | pays little to the shaman. That is all about this. |

78 And this is about the shaman who, as you say, bites the skin of the one who is being cured | to make the skin blue. Now you shall

SO really know [| what is done by the shaman. When the shaman is asked to cure a person, | he goes at once and sits down at the righthand side where the sick person lies in bed. | Then he asks the sick person for the place where he feels | sick. Then the sick person tells him, putting the first finger | on the place where he feels the sickness.

85 Then the shaman [| washes his hands in a dish containing water, which has been put down for him for sucking out the disease. | After the shaman has washed his hands, he feels of the place referred to by | the sick man. Then the shaman presses his | first finger on the place where the sickness is, and he presses it down for a long

90 time. | As soon as he lifts his finger, he watches the || place that he has pressed in. If it gets red at once, he knows | that the sick one will get well. Then the shaman is glad. | When the place which he has pressed in remains white and never gets red, | then the shaman recognizes that the sick one can not live long | after that. When it

95 does not get red for a long time and || gets red gradually, the shaman says that he will be sick for a long time. | Then he sucks at the place that he has pressed in; and when he lifts his head, he watches | the place where he has been sucking. And when it turns blue, he knows that | the sick one will not live long. When it | turns red, the shaman knows that he will lie in bed for a long time. I] And when the 100 place which he has been sucking really turns blue (?), | the shaman knows that he will get well quickly. ] That is all I know about the matter that I am talking about. |

Iv Ialmohklanaga

The Nak !wax' da£xu were living at Tegiixstei. | Their chief was 1 Q !ade. He was giving a winter dance that winter. |

Then the sister of Qlade, Q Iwalanenega, disappeared. She had not | disappeared long, when Q'.walanenega became sick at the place || where the Nak !wax' daexu stay when they disappear, a mountain on 5 the ground back of | Tegiixste£. She had not been there long, when she became really sick. | Then her brother Qlade became uneasy, because he saw that | his sister could not recover; and Qlade called the | chiefs of his tribe, the Nak !wax- daexu, and the head shamans, into his house || after midnight. And when they were all inside, [ 10 Qlade told them that his sister Q'.walanenega was dying. | Then the great shaman Lebid spoke, and | said, "Look into jour hearts, chiefs! for evidently the | supernatural powers of the woods are not near the place where our sister is staying || in her house, and the 15. young woman who has disappeared was menstruating. | This frightened away the spirits of the woods which were coming to help our sister. | Now, I wish that she come out of the woods, and that

K" Ialmodelanaga

18 she go to bed | in this winter-dance house, so that she may be cured by the supernatural powers of the | winter-dance house." Thus he

20 said, and immediately all the chiefs || agreed to what the great shaman had said. And as soon as he | finished his speech, they went out. |

When all the Nak!wax'da£xu had gone to sleep, | four strong men were asked to go to the place where those who disappear assemble. | They carried with them a large mat on which Qlwalanenega was to

25 lie || when they brought her out of the woods. It was nearly daylight | when they came back, and they put down Qlwalanenega | behind a board put on its edge at the right-hand side of the | dance house.1 As soon as she lay there, she was just | like dead, and they

30 thought that she had died. She never || moved from morning, when daylight came, until the evening. Then | they called the great shaman of the Nak!wax'da£xu, whose name was Fool, | to feel of her, for Qlade thought that his sister had died. | As soon as Fool finished feeling of her, | the great head shaman of the shamans, Fool, laughed,

35 and said, || "O dear Qlade! clean the bedroom of our child here, | and clear out everything in this room. When you have | done so, take a new mat without black stripes, and | spread it under your sister, and also her bedding, for | everything must be made new;

1 That is, in the rear right-hand corner, looking toward the rear of the house.

and when you have done this, take || red cedar-bark and split it into 40 narrow strips; and when | much cedar-bark has been split, take four | slender newly chopped cedar-trees of the same length as | our sister here, and also four j stout poles half a fathom in length, which are to be the posts of the room in which our sister is to he down; || and when they have been put down there, drive one of the | posts 45 into the floor at the right-hand side of the head of our sister, and | drive down another at the right-hand side of her foot, and still | another one at the left side of her shoulder, and the last | one at the left side of her feet; and when you have finished this, || take the four 50 slender cedar-trees, and lay their ends on the | four posts; and when you have done so, take the | split strips of red cedar-bark, and hang them from the | four poles of cedar-wood, just above our sister. When thej- have been | hung up, take much eagle-down, and || strew the eagle-down on the red cedar-bark, and on our sister where 55 she is | lying down in the middle of this frame which you made to hang up the | cedar-bark covered with eagle-down, and when jtou have done so, sweep out the place | where you have been working, so that nothing is left on the floor; | and do not be weak on account of our sister, and go to see her. || Don't go to see her this side of four 60 days, | otherwise you will frighten away wdiat will come to take pity

62 and restore our sister so that she will live. | You will only bring bad luck to our sister if you | attempt to go to see her before four days nave passed. That is all, | Chief Qlade." Thus said Fool, the great

65 shaman. || As soon as he stopped speaking, he went out. j

Immediately Qlade did the work that he was told to do by the | great shaman in t lie way he was to make the bedroom for Qlwalanenega. When [ it was finished, Q lade left. Now, the | heart of Qlade was really sick on account of his sister, for he saw that his

70 sister || was really dead; for he distrusted the words of | the great shaman, for Qa!de always opposed the shamans. | Therefore he was really crying as he was walking along. Qlade thought | he would obey the advice given by the great shaman, | and Qlade never went near the place where his sister was lying down. ||

75 Now, two nights had passed since the dead | Qlwalanenega had been covered with red cedar-bark. When night came, she was heard | talking with the one who is called Helemil. And | Qlwalanenega said that she had no sacred song; and Qlwalanenega said again, | "Go on, now, Helemil, supernatural one! bring me back to

80 life, so that I 11 may be named Q lulEnts lesEmaga." For a while | Q!ulEnts!esEinaga was silent, as she was speaking with Helemil, | and then Q lulEnts lesEmaga sang this sacred song : |

1. "O friend, Helemll! I pray you to revive me, our friend, with 83 your | life-bringer, Helemil; with your magic power, friend! Wae wae wit ! ||

2. "O friend, Helemll! I pray you to make me well, our friend ! 85 with your | means of healing, Helemll, your magic power, friend ! Wae wae wa! |

3. "0 friend, Helemll! I pray you to make me right, our friend, with your | means of setting right, Helemll, your magie power, friend ! Wae wae wa ! |

4. "0 friend, Helemll! have mercy on me with your life-bringer, || Helemll, your magic power, friend ! Wae wae wa! | 90

5. "Go on, friend, Helemil! have mercy on me with your healing power, | that 1 may come to be a healer by the means of your | healing power, Helemll, by your magic power, friend! ae." |

As soon as she had stopped singing, she talked again with the one with whom she had been talking before, || and QJwalanenega 95 replied to what Helemll said. | "() friend, Helemll! how is my sacred song? Do I j succeed nearly in the way 1 do it, friend?" And for a long time | they were silent. Then Qlwalanenega spoke again, and | said, "Thank you, friend, Helemll, that you have had mercy on me, and brought me to life, |] Long-Life-Giver, super- 100 natural one ! I will do as you tell | me, this coming night." That is what Q Nvalanenega | said, and it was quiet after that. |

75052 — 21 — 35 kth — pt 1 47

3 And before long, in the night, Q Iwalanenega was heard | singing her sacred song back of Teguxste£. Now, she had really disap- 5 peared; || and she never went to the house of those who had disappeared, | (the house) behind the mountain back of Teguxste£. |

Then Qliide was troubled about his sister, for nobody | knew where Q Iwalanenega had disappeared to; | and they never heard her

10 sacred song. || Sixteen days after she had left the dance-house, her sacred song was heard | back in the woods behind Teguxste5, and for a little while she came towards the beach. | Then she really came near the rear of the houses, | and she went far away again, singing her sacred song. Then | Qliide became glad, for lie knew that his

15 sister was still alive. || Then Qliide wished that they should capture quickly | three of those who stayed in the woods, and also Q Iwalanenega. | In the morning, as soon as daylight came, the men and women of the Nak!wax'da£xu | went to catch the three who were in the woods. And when | those came back who had gone to capture

20 those who stayed in the woods, and when they went into the || dancehouse, they sang the songs of the war-dancer, the tamer-dancer, | and the fire-dancer; and when the three dances were over, | they went into their sacred room. Now, the Xiik !wax'da£xu thought that | Q Iwalanenega would be a great shaman. As soon as night

IT, came, | the Nak Iwax'da-x" were called to come into the || dancehouse to sing for the three who had stayed in the woods. | As soon as 26 they were all in, the great shaman, | Fool, arose and spoke, and said, "O friends! | take your batons and heat quick time on your boards for a long time. \ And as soon as you stop beating, then make no sound for a long time. || Then you will again beat fast time on your 30 boards. You will do so | four times, for I am thinking of our great: friend | Q Iwalanenega. Therefore I wish that you should beat four times on your | boards, for we shall try to be successful, lor she may come into this | winter dance-house this night; and also these shall hear her sing her sacred song." || Thus said Fool. They never 35 heard [ her singing her sacred song, and they only sang the songs of the | three — the war-dancer, the tamer-dancer, and the fire-dancer. [ Ami after they had finished, they went out. For two | nights they went in vain to the dance-house, and || four times they beat the 40 boards in vain. Then the Xak Nva'da£x" went out to sleep. And they had not been asleep long, when the sound of the sacred song came from the rear of the dance-house; and as soon as the sacred song was ended, | they heard the cannibal cry. There were no whistles. | This is what the Nak !wax" da£xu call hamdzEdzEwe£, || and 45 it is called by the Kwakiutl oneqwa. | It is partly a great shaman, partly h&mshamts !es. That is what | Qlwalanenega, who had become a shaman, was, when she disappeared. And it was Helemll's | wish who made her hamdzEdzEwe£, although [ Qliide did not own the hanidzE(lzEwe£. || 50 (They talk much about what is done by those who disappear to become shamans; | for I hey use different dances when they show themselves, although | none belong to their ancestors, for they are according to the order of spirits.) j

As soon as Q Iwalanenega had uttered the cannibal-cry she sang her sacred song, | and immediately the great shaman, Fool, awak- 55 ened || all the men and asked them to go into the dance-house; | and when they were all inside they took their [ batons, and also the women, and the strong children, and | they all together beat fast time on the boards. They had not been | heating time long, when Q Iwalanenega uttered the cannibal-cry at the door of the danceon house. II And as soon as she came into the house, she turned into a shaman. | Now, the song leaders of the Nak!wax'da£xu did not sing, for | none knew that Q Iwalanenega was a hamdzEdzEwe£. She [ just sang her sacred song; and as soon as she had finished singing her sacred song, she | uttered the cannibal-cry. Then she bit four men. || G5 Then the song-leaders of the Niik !\vax'da£xu said that they would sing a new | song for her, and this is her song: |

boar] BELIEFS AND CUSTOMS 741

1. "Who is getting food for you, Giver-of-Supernatural-Power, 67 hamae hamae hama! | I went to get food for you, Helemil of Cannibal-at-North-End-of-World. I!

2. "I nearly perished there, Cannibal-at-North-End-of- World, | 70 hamae hamae hama! Then I was taken into the | sacred room of Helemil of Camiibal-at-North-End-of-World. |

3. "I was nearly kept by Cannibal-at-North-End-of-World, | hamae hamae hama ! Then my stomach was opened, || and the 75 supernatural power was put into me by Helemil of Cannibal-at- North-End-of-World. |

4. " Wlio is going to get corpses for you? Giver-of-Supernatural- Power, hamae hamae hama! | I went to get corpses for Helemil of Cannibal-at-North-End-of-World." |

As soon as she had stopped dancing, Qiwalanenega spoke. || and 80 said, " Thank you, friends ! I have been brought back to life | by our friend Helemil, and he said my name shall be QJulEnts'esEmaga. | And now you shall call me thus, and | none of you shall dare to make love to me for ten years; | and Helemil said to me that if any one should make love to me || inside of ten years, he would immediately 85 kill him. Thus said our | great friend to me. And for ten years I shall cure | the sick ones among you. And you shall not pay me

88 for it. He said if I should ask you for pay, | that then Helemil would kill me." Thus said QliilEutslesEmaga | to her tribe, and after that she was a great shaman. ||

The Initiation of One of the Ts Iots !ena of the Awa£ilela

The ancestors of the numaym TslotslEna lived on the upper part | 1 of the river of Hanwad, and their village site has the name TsElexwas. | Qleged was a grizzly-bear hunter. He was not a chief, but a | common man, for this is not a myth. It is a tale belonging to the time || when the white men came and built a house at Fort Rupert. 5 Therefore | Qleged hunted with a gun. Qleged's wife was a | proud woman. Her name was Tslchvael. Therefore her name was Tslelwael, | because she always talked proudly, and scolded | her husband, Qleged, as is the way of common women, because || nothing

10 is good for them except their pride. Now Qleged | paid no attention to his wife when she was angry with him. One | day Ts lelwael used really bad words against her husband, | and therefore Qleged struck his wife; and | after he had struck her, he took his gun and ||

15 went out of the house to walk 1)\ the river of Hanwad. | ThenQleged evidently saw a grizzly bear, for | this is only guessed by the tribe

The Initiation on One of the TsIotsIena of the Awa£ilela because they heard two shuts. ! It was late in the evening when the shots sounded. | It was dark, tin I Qleged did not come hack. || Then 20 his tribe thought that he had been hurt. In the | morning when day came, lie was expected in vain to come back, | and later in the clay Q !eged was given up. | Then the young men of the numaym Ts lots !ena made themselves ready j to go and look for Qleged, who had been expected (to return). They started || and they had not gone 25 far when they saw his tracks. | They followed them, and after going a long way, they found the stock of his gun. | They searched, and they found one of his legs. ! In vain they kept on searching for other parts | of his body, but they found nothing else besides the one leg and the stock of the gun and the barrel. [ Then those, who 30 had looked for Qleged went home. They | carried with them the one leg and the part of the gun. ; When they arrived at Qleged's house and [ told his wife the news, she told them to bury the || one 35 leg of her husband. The reason why they talked about Tslelwael was that she | almost died crying for her husband, | because it was on account of her that lie had gone out. Now | one leg of her husband had been buried in the fall of the year, j It was towards winter when Qleged had been killed || by the grizzly bear. Now it was 40

41 autumn again of the | following year when the two ends of the year meet. Then Qleged had been forgotten J by his tribe. All the | men and the women went out of their houses, and were sitting on their \ summer seats in front of their houses, for it was a fine day.

45 They had not II been sitting in their summer seats a long time when wolves began to howl | at the upper end of the village. Then the wolves howled again | behind the village, and then wolves howled again | on the other side right opposite the village, | and then the

50 wolves howled again where they had first || howled. Many wolves howled together. \ The howling of many wolves kept up for a whole day and | night. The men were curious | why they made this noise, for it seemed that the | wolves wanted something from the village

55 that night. Then || the ancestors of the TslotslEna were afraid, because the howling of the many | wolves was coming near behind the village that night. | In the morning when day came one of the men went out of the | house, and he saw many wolves on the bank

60 at the J upper end of the village walking along the bank, and || a great wolf walked out of the woods, and back of his head a man was sitting. At once | the man called his tribe to look at him. | And when the men and women came out, j they saw a great wolf and the man sitting | behind his head, and many wolves walking around him. || G'ilalalit was the name of the great wolf | behind whose head the 65 man was sitting. Then they recognized | that the man was Qleged, who was singing a sacred song. Then the old people | told ah the men and women to purify themselves at once. | Then all the men and || women broke off hemlock branches back of the | houses, and 70 went into the water in front of the houses, and | all washed themselves with hemlock branches. The great wolf J G'ilalalit was stand- ing still as though he was watching the | many wolves, what they were doing. After the people had finished purifing themselves || and had gone out of the river, they sat down in front of | the house 75 of Qleged. They were watching what was going to happen. | They cleared the house of Qleged. j When Qleged saw the men sitting on the ground, he got off from the neck | of G'ilalalit, and stood on the beach. Then || G'ilalalit and the many wolves went back into the NO woods. Qleged stood on the beach | singing his sacred song, and all the men made ready | to catch him. When the men | went towards Q leged, who was standing on the beach, he pointed with the | thing that he held, which was like a baton, towards the mountain on the other side of the river. || And immediately the mountain caught fire. 85

86 Then | he pointed his fire-bringer to the mountain up the river, | while he was standing on the beach, and continued singing his sacred song. Then [ the mountain caught fire. Then | the ancestors of the numaym TsIots'.Ena were afraid on account of what was

90 done by Q!eged. || The old men encouraged all | the men, and told them not to be afraid. Then all | the men stood in a row, and walked together.

When they came near him, the j line of men bent around Qieged;

95 and as soon as the II ends of the line of men passed Qieged, who was standing on the beach, | they encircled hun. Then Q leged was in the middle of the circle. When | the ring of men was getting small Qleged disappeared and [ stood on the beach farther up the river from those who tried to catch him. In vain | the men surrounded 100 him again. He did the same || as he had done before. Then an old man spoke, | and said, "O Tribe! let us go home for a while." I Then all the men agreed | to what he said, and they all started and | 5 went into the house of Q!eged. As soon as they were all in || the old man spoke, and said, | "Let them call the women to come quickly, and the virgins." j At once four young men ] went out of the house and called all the women and the | virgins, and when they had come, the || old man spoke, and said, "Listen why I j call you, women. I suppose 10 that | you all keep your napkins. I wish that you, who are menstruating, | and you, virgins, hum your napkins | around the great Qleged, who has a supernatural treasure." Thus he said. || And immediately 1") the menstruating women took off their cedar-hark napkins, and | put it down on the floor of the house. And others who were not menstruating went out of the house | to get their napkins which they kept. | When they had brought all, the | men and the women and the virgins went out. || They were going to try to catch Qleged; and | when 20 they came to the place where he was standing on the beach, they surrounded him. Then they put fire [ to the cedar-hark napkins of all the women; and when the fire began to smoke, | all the men and the women sat down. | Then the smoke of the fire went towards Qleged, and his II fire-bringer and death-bringer disappeared. 25 Then Qleged spoke, and | said, "Arise, and let us go home, for | you have made me secular." Thus he said. Now, Qleged hail been brought back | by this. As soon as he went into his house, he | told them that the wolves had gathered all the pieces of his body, || as they had been thrown away by four grizzly bears. 30

31 The wolves | had taken him into their house, and put together the pieces of his body. | Then four wolves had been Rent to take the one | leg that had been buried by the tribe; and when | they" had come

35 back bringing the one leg, they stuck it on || where it had been before; and after they had done so, they sprinkled water of life over him. | Then Q!eged had come back to life after that. As soon as | night came, they bad called all kinds of animals | to come and see Nung"axta£ye, the £walas£axaaku, that night. | It was not long

40 before the four men || who were wolves had come back. They had been | all around the world, and it was not long before | all kinds of animals had come into the large house. And when ; all were in, the song-leaders had beaten time on the | time-beating boards. Then

45 one hundered men || with wolf-head fore-head-masks had conic mil of the rear of the house. The masks were made like the heads of | wolves. Then they had gone around the fire in the middle of the house; and | when all had come out, the song-leaders had sung four | songs. And alter the last | song had been ended by the songleaders, they had gone back into the sacred room on which was

50 painted || Gllalalit. After they had finished, the speaker of the house had spoken, | and said, "Are you watching, J friend Qleged '

Now you will obtain the Ewalas£axaaku and | the name Nung'axta£ye. 53 This will be your name, and yon will have the | fire-bringer and death-bringer. You shall not || stay here long, only until the end 55 of the year. Then we shall j take you home, friend." Thus he had said. Thus said Qleged while he was telling his | tribe what had happened. Now this is imitated when they j give a winter dance, and that is why the Awa£lLEla own the £walas£axaaku. | That is the end of this.1 |l

1 For additional beliefs and customs see Addenda, p. 1331.

VI. SOCIAL CUSTOMS

Customs Relating to Eating

1 This is the size into which the salmon is broken when a chieftainess gives to eat to the chief. | Into larger pieces breaks it the wife of a | common man. |

Distribution of Porpoise

The dorsal fin and the side-fins of the porpoise are given to chiefs 5 at || great feasts. To the head chief is given | the chest of the porpoise. The body is given | to the common people. That is all about this. |

Distribution of Seal '

The hair-seal also teaches the common people their place; | for

10 chiefs receive the chest . and || the chiefs next in rank receive the limbs. They only give pieces of the body of the | seal to common people of the tribes, and they give the | tail of the seal to people

Customs Relating to Eating

Distribution of Porpoise

Distribution of Seal '

1 See also p. 544, lines 2U6-209. the translation of which is as follows: Only this teaches the common people their low position; for when cinquefoil-roots are given at a feast, the chiefs receive the long cinquefoil-roots, and the short roots are given to (the common people); for chiefs eat the long cinquefoil-roots, and all the common pnople eat the short roots. 750

lowest in rank. Therefore | trouble often follows a seal-feast and a 13 least of short and long | cinquef oil-roots; for when a man who gives || a seal-feast with many seals hales another man, he gives him 15 a piece of blubber from the body, [ although he may be of noble descent; and they do the same with the short cinquefoil-roots. | That is all about this. |

Feast of Currants

As soon as everything has been brought out and put down, (the woman) sends two young men | to go and invite her husband's tribe. They go; || and after they have gone into all the houses of the 20 village, they come back. They are also | sent to draw water: and immediately each takes a | large water-bucket in each hand, and they go down to draw water. When they come back, they pour | a little into each dish that stands on the floor. When the buckets are empty, | they go to draw more water in the same four large || buck- 25 ets. When they come back, carrying the bucket with water one in each hand, | the two water-carriers are told to put down the buckets | and to call those who are to eat the currant cakes. | They go into all the houses, and then they come back again; and when | they come back, the two young men who act as messengers are told to || spread 30 the long mats around the house in which the currants are to be eaten. |

Feast of Currants

32 Immediately they obey the order of the | host who is about to give a feast of currant cakes. When this is done they really | go to call again. Now they stay longer in each house while they are calling, | and some of the guests begin to conic when they arc called this time.

35 After they have gone through || the whole village, they go back again; and now the two messengers | take the tire-wood and put it on the fire. After they have done so, | they are sent by the host who is about to give the currant-feast to [look for faces] call a fourth time. | They go out, enter all the houses, | and say the following as they go in: " [We are] looking for a face, [we are] looking for a lace." When

40 they find a || man or a woman, both say at the same time, | "Wo, wo, wo, wo! Get up and go to the feast!" This is the way | they speak when it is winter-dance season; l)ut they do nol say this during the secular summer season, for in summer they just say, when they go the fourth time calling, | "We come back to call you, the only one (who has not come yet);" and they just stand waiting

45 for the one for whom || they went to get ready; and when he finishes, the | messengers go hack with him. When they come in, (it is seen that) | it is generally the son (or daughter) of a chief who is ashamed because of it. | As soon as he sits down, he asks the song-leader to sing | his feast-song ; (he continues) "for it is obtained by me because my child

50 ditl not come earlier." || Thus speaks the one who has been called last ; and immediately they sing his | feast-song. When the guests stop 51 singing, | he calls a speaker from his own numaym, | who can speak well; and as soon as the speaker arrives, the one who came late tells the one whom he called | to promise a feast, and to say that he will || sell a canoe for it; for generally the}' say that they will sell a canoe, 55 and this is the way they do in summer. | It is somewhat different during the winter-dancing season, when the messengers go back to look for those who have | not come in yet before the cannibal dancers and the Seal Society come in ; and if | the}' do not find the one whom they want, and particularly a (chief's) beloved daughter, | if she stays away too long and does not come home, then they give up waiting, || and they just go and call the cannibal dancer and the Seal 60 Society, j As soon as they come in and sit down in the rear of the house where the cakes of currants | are to be eaten, after making a speech in praise of them, (the messengers) | go out of the house. Then he sees the one for whom they went, | and who has arrived on the beach after having paddled. Then they go back into the house, and || tell the host that the one whom they could not find has arrived. | 65 Then at once she is called in by the two [ messengers; and when they come to the one whom they are calling, the two | messengers say, "Only you have been awaited! Come! We have been | sent for you by the host to bring you in." Thus they say || to her. Then 70 she puts on a good blanket, and, | after doing so, she walks among

72 those who are calling her. | The two messengers go in first; and as soon as they enter | the door of the feast-house, they say, | "Look at her! She has arrived now." And as soon as the woman walks in, ||

75 the guests all shout, and say, "You have been called, you have been called in!" The | woman goes in and stands in the rear of the house, just I outside of the feasters, between them and the fire in the middle of the house; | and at once her father gets up and tells the songleader to I sing his daughter's song. Then the guests begin to sing, ||

SO and the woman begins to dance; and as soon as the | singing stops, the woman sits down among the women to whom she belongs, | and her father promises a feast to his tribe. |

Huckleberry Feast

1 When this has been done,1 the husband and the wife get the | huckleberry-dishes and spoons, | and put them down at the lefthand side of the door of the house in which huckleberries are to be

5 eaten and also oil. | The woman puts them down, while || the husband clears out the house, and he | spreads the mats for the huckleberry-eaters to sit down on. | As soon as he has done so, he calls his tribe to come in to | eat huckleberries; and as soon as he has been to all the houses, | he goes back again ; and now two young men

Huckleberry Feast

'When the berries have been cleaned. Continued from p. 5Sl,llne34.

who belong to his numaym come with him. || When he invites to the 10 huckleberry feast, he says, | when he first invites the tribe, "I invite you to | come and eat the huckleberries of Breakfast-Food-Giver." Then he sends the two | young men to call again; and they say, "We come to call you again | to eat the huckleberries of Breakfast- Food-Giver;" for this name belongs to the huckleberry feast || when 15 they are given at a feast to many tribes. They have to call | four times for a huckleberry feast. When | the people come in, the host who gives the huckleberries at once gets ready, | and at the same time the guests begin to sing the songs. | Then they put the huckleberries into the dishes, so that they are half full. II They take oil and 20 pour it over them, so that it is one | half huckleberries and one half oil. After doing so, | they distribute the spoons; and when every one has his spoon, they put the | huckleberry-dishes one each in front of six men; | and after they have been put down, they || all eat 25 with their spoons, and they eat the huckleberries covered | with oil; and they do not stop until they have eaten all the huckleberries | and oil. After they have been eaten, they all go | out of the house. |

Viburnum-Berry Feast

Now I shall talk about viburnum-berries, which are given at a l feast, | for this feast is next in greatness to the oil feast, | which is

Viburnum-Berry Feast the greatest feast given to many tribes. Next to the | viburnum- 5 berry feast is the seal feast, which is given to many tribes. || These are put into house-dishes, the killer-whale | dish, hair-seal dish, whale dish, sea-lion dish, | beaver dish, grizzly-bear dish, wolf dish, and | Dzo'noq !wa dish, and also into the double-headed | serpent dish. These which I name are the dishes out of which the}' eat at great

10 feasts, || and belong to the various numayms of the different tribes. When they have a winter dance in winter, they come together to have a great dance, | all the tribes. They are invited by the one who is going | to give a viburnum-berry feast. When they go the first time to invite, | they put down all the berry -boxes on the left-hand

15 side of the door of the II f easting-house inside, and also oil-boxes. Generally | there are two boxes full of oil to be poured into ten boxes | of viburnum-berries, when these are given at a feast. There are also the various kinds of house-dishes. | There are always four

20 kinds. These are | left outside the feasting-house. The II small long dishes for feasting are placed behind the boxes containing the berries and the | oil-boxes, and the spoon-baskets are also | put where the small dishes are. Mats are then spread all round the house | for the guests who are to eat the viburnum-berries to sit down on when they come. When | those who are to eat the viburnum-berries have come in, after having been called four times, ||

they sing the great feasting-songs, and | all the members of the 2.5 nurnaym of the host sit down together. After | singing, the members of the nurnaym of the host get up. | The young men go out of the house and take hold of the four house-dishes, | which they bring in. They put them down all heading to the rear of the feastinghouse. || They take hold of each corner of a berry-box and pour | the 30 viburnum-berries into the house-dishes. Then they go and | pour one box of berries into each of the house-dishes; and as soon as this has been done, | they take the small f easting-dishes and put them on the edge of the other berry-box. | They take a long-handled ladle and dip it into the berries. || When it is full, they empty it into each 35 one of the small dishes; | and when the viburnum-berries are in them, they put the dishes on the floor, just behind the | housedishes. Generally they do not touch two of the berry-boxes, | and they give large spoons to the chiefs of the guests who have been invited to eat viburnum-berries. | When the berries have been put into the small dishes, they pour much || od over them. They take a 40 long-handled ladle, dip it | into the oil, and rill it. Then they pour the oil over the berries in the house-dish. | They also take one ladleful of oil, which they | pour into each of the house-dishes. After this has been done, | the speaker of the host stands up and speaks. || He 45 asks the chiefs of all the tribes to take care | and to try to eat all the

47 viburnum-berries in the house-dishes. | He calls the young men of his numaym to carry the | house-dishes and to put them down in front of the tribe first in rank of those who are to eat the berries.

50 Then | the young men arise and take off their || blankets, for they do not want to have them in the way if they should get twisted around their feet | when they lift the house-dishes. As soon as the blankets are off, | one of them, the oldest one, speaks, and tells | the young men to take hold of each end | of the house-dishes; and they all go and take hold of each end, and others take hold of the

55 sides. Then || the eldest one shouts while lie is standing in the house, " Wooye!" | and the young men also cry all at the same time, "Wooye!" | After they have done so four times, they lift the housedish and | put it down in front of the tribe highest in rank among the tribes. These are the Mamaleleqala; | that is, if the Kwag'ul

60 give the viburnum-berry feast. || Then the oldest one of the young men follows them; and as soon as they put the dish down in front of the guests, he says, | "This dish is for you, Mamaleleqala, for two of you, also for the Qwequsot!enoxu ." | Then they shout as they did before, "Wooye!" for the dish which they give to the Nimkish | and Lawets !es. There are again two (tribes), and they receive one housedish. Then they go to the | other house-dish and they cry " Wooye !"

65 and they put it down before the Maamtag'ila || and Gwawaenox".

And with the last they shout again, "Wooye!" and they | put the 66 dish down in front of the DzawadEenox" and Haxwamis. Then | all the house-dishes have been put down, and the young men take up the small dishes | and put these one in front of each four of the men, | and the larger ones each in front of six men. As soon as || they put down all of them, the speaker of the host who is giving the 70 viburnum-berry feast stands up and tells them to | start in and eat the viburnum-berries; and immediately the | chiefs of each two tribes stand up from their seats. They leave their | blankets on the ground in their seats, for they leave them there | where they were sitting, and they go and sit around the house-dishes || which contain 75 the viburnum-berries; and they eat with their spoons, for the food has already been given to them; | and the common people also eat with their spoons | out of their small dishes; and as soon as they have eaten, | the speaker of the host' who gives the berry-feast speaks, and tells | the members of his numaym to gather in the house and to sing the feasting-song. || Then the child of the host stands out in 80 front of them; and | when the members of the numaym sing the song, his daughter dances; | and when they have sung onehalf of the song, the guests j shout, "Woosqu!" They shout all at the same time, " Woosq"!" Then | two men, the nearest relatives of the host, take || each one large long-handled ladle and carry it on 85 their shoulders, | dancing a little while. After doing so, they go | and dip the ladle into the box which has not been touched. As soon

S7 as I the ladles are full, they go to stand in front of a | chief, of one 90 who belongs to the Mamaleleqfila, and the other one || in front of one who belongs to the Qwequsot!enoxu; and they say when they give them I to them, "Now, chief, draw in your breath!" Then the one to whom it is given stands up, | takes the spoon, and drinks the juice of the berries; | and when he has had enough, he pours what is left over into the house-dish, | while the daughter of the host is still 95 dancing. || The two men continue doing this with the two | longhandled ladles; and when the boxes are empty, they stop. Then the guests go out I when this is finished. When those who have eaten the viburnum-berries go out, | then the members of the numaym take the house-dishes that have been given | to the head chiefs of the 100 various tribes, || and they divide (the contents of each between) the chiefs of the tribes that have been eating together; and when | all the small dishes have been taken out, they keep quiet. That is all about this. |

Salmon-Berry Feast

1 As soon ' as all the salmon-berry pickers have brought their salmonberries, I and when (the host) has poured them all into the oil-box — for sometimes | five salmon-berry boxes half fill the oil-box | which

Salmon-Berry Feast

1 Continued from p. 212, line 33.

is used for the salmon-berry feast by a man — as soon as he has everything || in the box that the engaged women have picked, he calls | his 5 tribe, for salmon-berries are only given to one's own tribe. | They go at once and bring the oil, which is | placed on the floor. Now, I do not want to talk about it again, | for it is all the same as is done with the viburnum-berries || when they are eaten, as I first described when 10 they are put into house-dishes, | and it is done in the same way with salmon-berries in house-dishes. I have seen here | the Kwakiutl when they do this, when they are eating salmon-berries | and od out of house dishes. They first give to the Maamtag'ila, | and with them are the G' exsEm ; and the next are the Kiikwak !um, together with the SeiiLlEm; || and to the Layalalawa, together with the 15 Lafilax-s£Endayo. | Each of these had one carved dish; that is, when a salmon-berry feast is given by the Q!omoya£e, | and it is done in the same way when a salmon-berry feast is given by the Walas Kwakiutl: | for it is the same way for the viburnum-beny feast and for the salmon-berry feast. | There is only very little difference, for the oil is given in large ladles to the chiefs || to drink in the salmon- 20 berry feast. That is all about this; | for there is no way in which they are cooked. | Thej7 have too much juice to be dried into cakes. That is the end. I

Ckabapple Feast

1 The name of the boiled crabapples is changed when they are put into | the empty oil-box, when winter comes. They | are called "crabapples in water," for that means crabapples and water. | Therefore they are called " crabapples in water." || 5 Now I will talk about a crabapple feast, which the | chief gives to many tribes. Generally they have ten | boxes of crabapples with water; and, if a chief is (very) angry, he may get twenty | boxes of crabapples and water. I mean that the price of each box of crabapples and water is ten pairs of blankets | when it is sold. That is the

10 same as || ten dollars for each box of crabapples and water; | and this is also the price of the box of viburnum-berries. Each box contains five | coal-oil tins of crabapples. | The common people can not afford to buy these. |

Now I will talk about the. invitation to a crabapplc-and-water

15 feast; || for first of all they get the house-dishes ready, which | are put down outside of the feasting-house. | The host also sends out two young men of his numaym to | go and get fire-wood for the housefire in the feasting-house. They | take a Chinook canoe, and the

20 young men go to get a dead cedar. || They do not go to get fire-wood

Crabapple Feast (TsElxwelaxa tsElxusta)

from the beach; but they go ] to the woods on the islands, for they 21 do not need to go far into the woods to find a dead cedar. | It is not long before they come back, carrying a load of blocks of dead cedarwood. | When they reach the beach of the house, they are met by the numaym of | the host. They carry on their shoulders the cedarwood || which they carry up from the beach, and put down | outside 25 of the feasting-house. When it is all up, | they go and call two or even four young men of | the numaym (to go inviting). As soon as they have been to all the houses, they come | back. Then they put out the boxes containing the crabapples, || and place them inside the 30 door on the left-hand side of the feasting- | house. If there are ten boxes of crabapples, there will be five | boxes of oil to be poured on. They bring out everything and put it down, | and also four longhandled ladles are brought down and are hidden | on one side of the door. When everything is ready, the || young men carry in the 35 blocks of dead cedar-wood and build a fire | in the middle of the feasting-house. After this has been finished, | and when the fire in the middle of the house blazes up, they go calling again. They call four times, | then all those who are to eat the crabapples come in. When they have come, | they sit down in their proper seats. They never move their seats. Then || the drum is taken to them to sing 40 the feasting-songs. | First of all, they sing the feasting-song of the |

42 chief of the head tribe, the Mamaleleqala, if the Kwakiutl give a | crabapple feast. After this song is ended, the Qwequsot !enoxu |

45 sing their f easting-song; and when || that is done, the Nimkish | sing their f easting-song; and when they end their song, | the Lawets !es sing their f easting-song ; and when | they are through singing, the Maamtag'ila sing their | feasting-song; and when the songs are ended, they ||

50 take the drum and put it down near the door of the house. | Immediately they go and take the house-dishes from outside of the | house, and put them down with the head towards the rear of the | house. They take one of the crabapple-boxes and pour | the contents into

55 the house-dish for the Mamaleleqala and Qwequsot !enoxu. II When the crabapple-box has been emptied, they put it | out of the house. Then the young men take another | box of crabapples and pour them into the house-dish for the Nimkish. | Then they put the empty box

60 out of the I house. The young men come and take another || box of crabapples and pour them into the house-dish for the Lawets !es, | and they go again and put the empty box out of the house. | Then they take another box of crabapples and pour them into the | housedish fcr the Maamtag'ila, and then they put the empty box | out of the house. Then they come in again, and take many small dishes, ||

and put the crabapples into them so that they are all | half full. 65 They do not empty all the boxes containing crabapples, [ but they keep one of them, which | they do not touch. Then they take the four boxes of oil and | pour the oil over the crabapples until there is half as much oil as crabapples || in the carved dishes and small 70 dishes. After this has been done, | they distribute the spoons; and when every one has his spoon, | the speaker of the host stands up and gives out | one of the house-dishes containing crabapples and water to the Mamalelaqala and Qweq"sot !enoxu. | Then the young men go to each side of the carved dish Hand shout four times, "Wooye!" as 75 they lift it up. Then they go and put it down | immediately in front of the Mamaleleqala and Qwequsot !enoxu; | and as soon as they put it down, one, the oldest of the young men, | says, "This housedish is for you, Mamaleleqala, for two tribes, for you and the Qwequsot!enoxu. | Now, eat!" Then the young men go and || stand 80 on each side of another house-dish, and they shout again four times, "Wooye!" | and lift it up. Then they go and put it down in front of the Nimkish; and the | one who gives out the dishes says, "This house-dish is for you, Nimkish. Now, eat!" | and they shout also in the same way for the house-dishes of the other chiefs of the Lawets !es | and Maamtag'ila. As soon as the four house-dishes have been put down || the host picks out the one who had given before a crabapple feast 85

86 to him, [ which he is now paying back with his own crabapples that he has in the boxes; | for thus it is made clear, who was the one who had given a crabapple feast before. [ Then the one who gives out the dishes says, as he | puts down the box with crabapples

90 in front of the chief: "This dish is for you, LelEgEmllla. || It is difficult for me to take this from you, chief." [I just use | this name, LelEgEmllla, for his name, in order to show plainly what they say | when they give out the house-dishes and the crabapple-boxes]. As soon as all | have been put down, they take the small dishes and put them | in front of the common people of the chiefs; and when they

95 all have them, || then they eat with their spoons. They eat the crabapples. | The young men build up the fire with the dead cedarwood to make the guests feel uneasy ; | and when the fire in the middle of the feasting-house burns up well, | the speaker stands up and calls 100 his | numaym together to assemble close to the door of the || feasthouse. Then he tells them to go ahead and | sing the new feasting- songs, for they have new songs made for a | crabapple feast the same way as they do for an oil feast or a viburnum-berry feast. | They all stand together in a circle. | Only the near relatives of the host and || 5 the host's daughter do not go there, because she | will dance. Now they sing the new feasting-song, | and immediately the daughter comes out and dances. | She is followed by four men who carry on 8 their shoulders | each a long-handled ladle. They separate in twos as they dance, || two on each side of the woman. The four men do 10 not | dance long. Then they leave the woman, who is still dancing. | Two men go to the box containing the crabapples, j dip the longhandled ladle into it, and the other two men dip theirs | into the oil. Then the two go and give it to drink to || the chiefs who have given a 15 crabapple feast before; and the two others give | the oil to the chiefs who have given an oil feast before; and this is | what they say, standing before the one | who is going to be given to drink," Now, chief, | draw this in !" Then the chief stands up, | takes hold of each end of the ladle, and drinks; and when he has had enough, || he pours 20 what is left over into the house-dish. As soon as the crabapples are nearly | gone, the two men dip up the whole of what is left, | and two other men do the same | with the oil. The woman is still dancing; and then | the four men who are giving to the chiefs to drink (for that is the name of the work that they are doing) || dance. 25 The}- do not dance very long before they pour the contents of the two | long-handled ladles with crabapples and with oil into the | fire; and after they have done this, the guests | shout, "Woosqu!" That is as though | they would say, "The food that we are eating is men woman men

30 sweet." || After the feasters have finished the f easting-song, they stop | eating. Then the speakers of each side | exchange compliments; and when they stop speaking, all go out. Then | the house- dishes are taken by the feasters of the numaym to those who have not eaten all the contents. That is all | about this. ||

Feast of Salal-Berries and Crabapples Mixed

1 When a chief wishes to give a very great feast, when he gets angry (with another chief), | he buys many boxes of crabapples with water and | many bundles of dried salal-berry cakes and oil. When | he 5 has them all, he takes a small canoe, which is || washed out well. When it is clean, it is carried into his house. | His wife unties the covers of her salal-berry boxes, for | sometimes they use five or even eight salal-berry boxes, | if the chief has much property to buy them

10 with. | Then the woman takes them out and puts them || into the small canoe. Now, there is one salal-berry box | to each canoe. They are put into the canoes to soak. | Then she asks the young men of her husband's numaym | to go and draw much fresh water. | The young

15 men go, carrying a bucket in each hand, and draw water; and || when they come back, they pour it into the canoe for soaking the dried salal-berry cakes. | When the salal-berry cakes are just covered,

Feast of Salal-Berries and Crabapples Mixed they stop. They leave them there | a whole day and ;i whole night, 17 soaking the salal-berry cakes, for | the chief is going to give a feast to many tribes. In the morning, when day conies, they bring into his house the house-dishes and || the small dishes and the spoons. 20 They also | bring dead cedar-wood. Now it is already piled up crosswise in the middle j of the house. When everything is in readiness, they take a rest: | and in the evening the chief calls his numaym j to a meeting. When they are all in, the chief tells them to take care || and to be ready to help him if | some of the guests 25 should try to put the lire out, and he tells his numaym what he is planning to do. | He calls the names of those who art' to speak when the house-dishes are being handled, and who are to speak for the small canoe which is to he a feasting-dish. | Then he asks the songleader to sing || a feasting-song. Then the song-leader sings | the 30 song which he kept to himself. Now they learn the song; and when his assistants can sing the tune of the song, j then (the men) put the words into it, whatever they wish to say, J and whatever they heard || the rival chief say against the chief who is going to give the great :i."i feast. When | they can sing this song, the chief sends the young men | the night (before the feast) to call the tribes, when it is secular season. | Immediately the young men go and J call the names of all

750.JL.'— 21— 35 ETH— PT 1 49

40 the men in each of the II houses. When they have called all the names of those | who live in each of the houses, the young men shout, together "This is for ' Making-Satiated!" They come out and go into the next house, | and one of the young men who call says, "We come | to call you," calling the name of the man; and hecon-

45 tinues || saying this, calling them, until they reach the end of the houses. Then they all j scatter and go home to their houses. All the tribes | go to bed early; for they do not know what the chief is planning, | and they are afraid of the feast of salal-berry cakes and crabapples | and oil, if there is much of it, because it makes one feel

50 squeamish. Therefore || all the chiefs and common people are afraid of it; | but there is no way of not going to the feast, because they would be laughed at | by the numaym of the host. The host gets up early in the morning, and he | himself wakes up the members of his numaym to come and eat breakfast in his house. | As soon as

55 they have done so, they dress themselves, and || those who carry the long-handled ladles blacken their faces. There arc four of these, | and they paint their faces as though they wTcrc angry. The chief who is host does the same | if he is going to break a copper for a crosspiece over his fire. Then lie also blackens bis face, | and he puts on an angry face, and his speakers dress the same as J he has

B0AS1 SOCIAL CUSTOMS 771

done. Now all the members of the numaym are dressed; [| and after 60 tins, they send out four men to go and call again, | for the first calling of the tribes has been given the night before, j As soon as the messengers come back, they take a paddle and | stir with it the soaked salal-berries ; and as soon as all the water j has been soaked into the salal-berries, they are mushy. Then the four men take || . long-handled ladles and dip them J into the crabapples, and pour 05 these on the soaked salal-berries. j They do not stop until all the crabapples have been put on the salal-berries. Then , they take the house-dishes and put them down heading towards the rear of the house, and they stir the || salal-berries mixed with crabapples. When 70 they are mixed,- they j dip them out with their ladles from their small canoe into the house-dishes. Then they put them into the | house-dishes. When these are half full, there is enough in them; j and after they have done so, they take small dishes and put them down at | one side of the door. After doing so, they go again calling (the guests); || and when the people come who have been called, the 75 speaker of the host stands up J and calls out to those who are coming in, and assigns to them their seats. Then he | says, "Walk on, chief, to your seat that belongs to your position!" | Every man knows his seat, j and they go right to it and sit down. As soon as || all are in, they give the drum to the head tribe, | the SO

£$2 Mamaleleqala, to sing their song. ( You know how the drum is passed to every one of the tribes, | (beginning al the head tribe), for each one

85 has I a song for the feast. When [i they have all sung their feastsongs, the drum is put away and placed | at one side of the door. Then they go and distribute the house-dishes; and when this has ■ been done, they carry the canoe which serves as a house-dish | and put it down in front of the one who has given a feast of salal-berry cakes j and crabapples before, for this is to show who has given such

90 a feast: the giving of the ! small canoe. Then they call out the name of the former host. | and then he speaks proudly. As soon as | everything has been distributed, they pass about the small dishes among the common people of the | chiefs. When everything has been given out, they eat with the spoons, for these | have been dis-

95 tributcd already. Now the speaker rises and calls his numaym to assemble and | sing their feasting-song. |

I have forgotten the oil, for they pour some on the | mixed salalberries and crabapples in the house-dishes. As soon as | the song- leader has sung the first song, the daughter of the host comes out, || 100 carrying in one hand the copper: and when the numaym | of the young woman's father sings, she dances, holding ! the copper the lower end up in the right hand. Then lour men come out, carrying n0AS] SOCIAL CUSTOMS 773

on their shoulders the empty j ladles. They dance on each side of the woman while she is dancing, two on each side of her. | The 5 four men do not dance long before they go hack to where the oilboxes have been put down. All four of them J dip into the oil with their ladles until they overflow. Then | they go, so that the oil drips out, and they give it to the chiefs, || and the chiefs stand up. 10 They take hold of each end of the ; overflowing ladle; and then the men who handled the ladles say to each of them, | " Now, chief, draw this in with your breath," mentioning his I name. Then theyreallv drink all the oil; and j if some of the chiefs can not drink it, they just || put their lips to the ladle and pour it into the feast-dish. 15 They continue doing this, although they have now , stopped singing their feasting-song. When the [ oil-ladle reaches the rival of the host who gives the salal-berry and | crabapple feast, the ladle is filled entirely with oil; and li they treat it roughly when they go to the •_)() place where (the rival) is sitting, so that the oil drips out, j and the young man who brings it pretends not to see him in his seat, and thus he lets I the oil drip on the chief who is sitting down. Then he stands up | and speaks, and sends out some men of his | numavm to bring a hundred blankets, or even two hundred. || Then some men of 25

26 his numaym at once go out, but | he never takes the ladle, and the one who handles the ladles [ returns with it. Then he tells his numaym to take care not | to let their fire be putout by the fire of the rival chief: and while he says this, he pours into the fire [ the oil (that was to have been drunk) ; and then he says to the fire, "Now, ||

30 spirit of the fire, open your mouth, son, so that you get enough to eat!" I

Then those who went out to get the blankets come in, | and then the members of the numaym of the rival chief each takes hold of an end of the | blankets and spread them over the fire of the host. |

35 Now they put it out, and then the host goes and takes more II salalberries and crabapples, and the copper which his daughter was car- rying I when she was dancing, and he pushes it under the feast-fire. | At the same time the four young men who handle the ladles dip them into the oil; and when they are | full, they pour the oil into the fire; | and then those who try to put out the fire run away on account

40 of the heat, for || the oil and the blankets are burning together; and then I the host takes the oil and pours it among his rivals. |

Nolis, who died some time ago at Alert Bay, tried to put out the fire with seven canoes, | and he had the oil poured on his face by the great host of the Lawetsles. Besides, | he put on four hundred

45 blankets. The house was nearly || burned. All the roof-boards were burned. And this is the most real attempt at | putting out the fire 4fi of a feast that I have seen. The feastgiver of the Lawetsles had two hundred j blankets and five canoes, and also small cuppers. This is the | worst thing that chiefs do when they really get angry, and II at such a time the house-dishes are scorched by the lire. | 50

When all this is done, they go out. Then | the floor of the house is soaked with oil. j The numaym of the host go out and carry the house-dishes and the small canoe that served as a feast-dish to those to whom they belong; and as soon as they have been carried out, itis finished. || That is all about this. | . 55

Feast of Qot !xole

Now, when the winter conies, the owner of the qot !xole [ intends 1 to give a feast to his people of berries mixed with oil. | Then he sends out the young men belonging to his numaym to | call his guests: and as soon as they go, his wife takes the dishes and puts them down 5 next to her place, and also her spoons, j and shredded cedar-bark to wipe out the dishes and spoons. Now she wipes them out while her husband is clearing out the house. He also spreads down j mats for his guests to sit on; and he takes out the II box containing 10 the berries and oil, which is put down at the left-hand side of the j door of the house. As soon as the young men have called four

12 times, | the guests come in: and when they are in. they sing | an ordinary song, not a feast-song. | After having sung four songs, the

15 young men take the dishes and II put into them the oil and berries. ■They do not put much in, because it is difficult to eat and to swallow. Therefore they put a little into the dishes. After this has been done, they put them down, one dish in front of each | four men. At the same time when they put down the dishes, | the

20 spoons are distributed; and when everything has been placed, II the guests begin to eat the oil and berries. They never | eat it all, because it is hard work to eat it. When they | have finished, they go out. That is all about this. |

Social Position and Marriage Laws '

1 Chief's Daughter.2 — Generally the princess of ) Chief £maxuyalidze gets married at once when Iv' !edele£laku | comes out of the place where she has been sitting still. As soon as the princess is married, she I has the name modzll (Keeping-up-the-Blanket) , if she becomes the modzll of a real chief. ||

5 However, she remains a princess of the chief if her husband is a common man. | Then she is never called modzll as wife (of the com-

Social Position and Marriage Laws '

1 For additional matter sec Addenda, p. 1333. ^Continued from p. 701, line .",:.

mon man), | and she is still the princess of her father the chief. I 7 just wanted to talk | about the common men. j

Now when the princess is married to a chief, then she is || called a ID modzil, when she first goes into the house of her husband. | Now I am talking about the chief of the numaym Maamtag'ila. j £maxuyalidze, whose princess is K' ledeledak11. Not | long after she has been married to her husband, her father pays the marriage debt : and she has for her canoe mast | an expensive copper. And he gives as a marriage-gift a name to the husband || of his princess and much food 15 with it, and also canoes. | This is what is called "paying-t he-marriagedebt, sitting-in-the-canoe-of-the-princess;" for generally there are twenty | who sit in the canoes of the princess of a real chief, | when they put down the copper j bracelets and small coppers and many dishes and the || anchor-line of many spoons;when all this has been 20 put | down Chief miaxuvalidze says, "Now f will go and | call my princess that you may see her come.'' Thus lie says, and goes into j his house. And before long he comes back walking ahead of j his princess, and the chief stands outside id' his || house, and his princess 25 comes and stands by his side. She wears j a blanket covered with abalone shells, and entirely covered with abalone shells | is her hat. Her abalone-covered blanket j is called " the-heavy-abalone-covercd blanket," and her hat is called | " the-heavy-abalone-covered hat."

30 Then the chief, II the father of K' !edele£lakn speaks, and says, "Come and look at this | weight which originates with our family history, when the chieftainess carried the copper. Now stand up, | son-in-law, I will dress you." Thus says the chief, and takes | the alialone-covered blanket of the chieftainess and her abalone-covered hat and | promises to give them to his son-in-law, and he takes his

35 copper and gives || it also to his son-in-law. Then he calls his son-inlaw to come and | take them. The son-in-law comes and stands in front of his | father-in-law and of his wife, the chieftainess. Then the | abalone-covered blanket is put on to him and the abalonecovered hat is put on to him, | and he is given the copper. Then the

40 chief says to his || son-in-law, "O son-in-law! now I have changed your chief's dress, | son-in-law. Nowgo! It is finished. Youliavemy chieftainess for your wife." Thus he says, | and takes off the large ear-ornaments of abalone shell on each ear of the chieftainess and the j nose-ornament of abalone shell and attaches the ear-ornaments to his son-in-law, and | he also puts the nose-ornament of abalone

45 on to him. Then his son-in-law || goes back and stands where his nuinayin is standing, and he | speaks, and says, "Look at me, numaym! ) Now my whole chief's dress has been changed by my father-in-law. [ Now the chieftainess my wife, has no dress." Thus he says as he walks along j and goes into his house, and the property with which the marriage debt has been paid is carried II into his 50 house. When everything has been carried in, it is given away to all | the tribes, when day comes. That is all about this. |

When the father (of a princess) dies, then her brother has her for his princess. Then he is no longer her brother, for | she is now the princess of her brother who is now her lather. [ Only the eldest one of the brothers has his youngest sister for his princess. II As soon as 55 she gets married, she is modzil of her husband; | and her elder brother pays the marriage-debt to the husband of his princess, his sister, | because they never stop calling the daughter of a chief princess, | unless she becomes a chieftainess. When she is chieftainess, she is no more | princess, and she gives the name princess to her daughter; || but the name modzil is different, for she has only the 60 name modzil | when she has for her husband a chief. If she should separate from her husband, | then she is no longer called modzil of her husband; but if j she takes another husband who is a real chief, then she is again | modzil of her husband. That is all. ||

Chieftainess.' — It hurt (£niaxulayfigwa's) heart that she was never j 1 called the modzil of (Wag'idis) ; for thus they call tin- wife of a | real chief as soon as a chief ^ marries a princess of j another chief (it is well for me to name the other || chief, so that you kn( iw how they call the 5

' Continued from p. 1117, line 2S4.

6 new wife) Emaxuyalidze. | And when Emaxfl.yalidze lias been married four days | to his wife, then all the men say, "Go on, let us | sec the chief taincss of onr chief £maxuy.alidze," | and they all go into the

10 door of the house. Then the || leader says, "We come to sec the back of the chieftainess of | Emaxuyalidze." If she is a good chieftainess, she arises and | takes her belt. She lifts her blanket so that it is | just below her knees. Then she puts on her belt; | and after

15 doing so, she quickly spreads mats on the floor || for those to siton who come to see her back. Then she | gets food for those who come to see the back of the chieftainess of 'maxuvalidze. J

This is called by the Indians "a good chieftainess of the chief," who does | this, and they call her modzll ( = lifting-blanket-in-the house), because she lifts her blanket, and puts on her belt. She is

20 a bad || chieftainess of the chief if she just sits down when those conic in who come to see her back. J She just asks her husband's young men to [ take care of the food that she is going to give. After those have eaten who come to see her back, | they go out. Often the chief | tells his chieftainess to go away, and to go to her house,

25 because the chief is ashamed || if the chieftainess does not lead his tribe to their places when they j come into his house. That is all about this. |

Endogamy. — I'll talk about LalellLla, head chief | of the numaym 1 DzedzEmeleqala of the Nak!wax'da£xu. j Now LalellLla had for his wife the daughter of his younger brother YaxLEn, | whose name was Ha£meLas. The first wife of LalellLla was his niece. || Then LalellLla 5 married again XwelageLas, the | princess of Hayalk'En, chic!' of the numaym SesEnL !e£ of the | Gwa£sEla. Then LalellLla had two wives. His head wife was his niece | Hiim£eLas, and his second wife was XwelageLas. Then | Ha£m§Las gave birth to a daughter, and she was named Llaqwag'ilayugwa. || Then his second wife gave birth to 10 a boy, and j he had the name Sewid. As soon as Sewid was grown up, | he married Llaqwag'ilayugwa, and Sewid and j Llaqwag'ilayugwa were not married for a long time. Llaqwag'ilayugwa had a younger sister | Llalaga. Then Llaqwag'ilayugwa married Helamas,|| the eagle of the numaym G'exsEm of the Nak!wax'da£xu. ] Then 15 Llalaga married Gwales G'exk'Endze, head chief of the numaym | Sesr.ni. leof theNak !wax"da£xu. And \ Ilelamas andhiswife l laqwag'i- 'avugwa had not been married for a long time when she was with child, | and her younger sister Llalaga was also witli child. And i. Ifiqwag' ilayugwa had been with child for six H months her husband He- 20 lamas [became ill and after a short time he died. | He left his wife i.laqwag' ilayugwa with child. Then l laqwag' ilayugwa gave birth j to a boy, and the boy had the name | Helamas. And i. Iftlaga also gave birth

25 to a girl, and || her name was Ha£yosdesElas. And when ILVyosdesElas grew up, | she married Helamas; and Helamas had not been married long | with his cousin Ha-yosdesElas, when she was with child, and | she gave birth to a | girl.

30 She did not live long before she died. Then || Ha£yosdesElas gave birth to a boy. He lived for twenty days. | Then he died. Then she gave birth to another boy, | and he lived. His name was K'ene, ami he is now six j years old. |

35 I tried to learn why the relatives descended from || LalellL !a do this, and also the various tribes, | for many chiefs of the tribes do the same. | They marry the daughters of their younger brothers. Then the one whom I asked said to me | that they do this because they do not want their privileges to go | out of their family. They keep their

40 privileges among themselves || by doing so.1 |

1 Marrying outside of one's own tribe. — I will talk about a | prince of a chief who takes for his wile the princess of a chief | of another tribe.

This is called " taking a wife outside." | Then the wife "takes a hus-

5 band outside." fur thus it is called when || they do this, as was done

1 Marrying outside of one's own tribe. — Hcleu gwagwex-s£alasLa le-

'This form of marriage is called t!Ent!E»o. In Kurt Rupert there are two chiefs who married the daughters of their half-sisters. One of these i Kuaiiox'dze of the Laalax-'sEndayu, who married the daughter of his father and of his stepmother. His wife's name is UaUaqoliMak". See also Addenda, p. 134-1.

B0AS1 SOCIAL CUSTOMS 783

by my son £nEinogwis when he took from outside his wife | l laqwag'i- G layugwa. Then Llaqwag'ilayugwa, the princess of | Chief Gwexse£sElasEine% took as her husband from outside my son | mEinogwis. Now we are all related by marriage to the father of i Llaqwag'ilayugwa and to all those to whom marriage presents were given by mEinogwIs. Now || Llaqwag'ilayugwa lived in marriage away from 10 her house in the house of her husband £nEmogwis here in [ Fort Rupert. Now Llaqwag'ilayugwa is called "obtained from far off outside | by £nEinogwis." Only the woman is called "obtained from far off outside." | "Obtained from far off outside" is not said of mEinogwis when he takes a wife from outside | from another tribe. When || Llaqwag'ilayugwa wishes her husband mEmogwis to give 15 a feast, she says to her | husband, -HEmogwis, "Let us go to your father-in-law | Gwex'se£sElasEine£ to get some tiling out of his house, so that you may give a feast, for you | have taken me from a long way off." Thus she says. And immediately they start | to get something out of the house, and they go to Qalogwis, for Gwexse£sElasEine£ is the head chief of the || numaym SesEiiL !e£ of the 20 Lawetsles, and Gwex'se£sElasEme£ | can not avoid giving a marriage gift of food to his | son-in-law, mEinogwis, because the princess of the chief has been taken faraway. | If Gwex'se£sElasEme£ should not take notice of his princess when she | comes to get something out of the house of her father, then Gwex'se£sElasEme£ || and his 25 princess would be ridiculed by their tribe the Lawetsles, and

26 l laqwag'ilayugwa | would bo called a princess whom her father, the chief, dues not love. That is | the end. | 1 The Eagles. — This was your question, how the eagles j were obtained by the ancestor of the mimayni Maamtag'ila; namely, Llaqwag'ila. the prince | of emaxuyalidze. He was the one who was the first chief of all the | tribes, although first among them was 5 0£maxt !alaLe£ and all || the first ancestor of the different numayms. | Only -maxuyalidze was the first to make a potlatch; and therefore | he thought that he was the only one who was the first to make a potlatch. And j it occurred to him that the eagle was the only head chief and leader who was feared by all the | birds, and that therefore 10 he would be the eagle, because he was the first one || to give a potlatch; anil therefore the head chief, the Eagle, began to be feared | by all the tribes. It is the same as the eagle who is the first to eal of any carrion and of what he catches: and afterwards come | the different kinds of birds each of which eats on the beach what is left over by the eagle. | And ^maxuyalidze tried to imitate this. Therein fore he is now the head || eagle of all the numayms of the Kwakiutl. | And the DzEndzEuxq !ayu, the nuinaym of the Walas Kwakiutl, say j that Doqwayis first got the eagle, and the | numaym Maamtag'ila say that they had the first | eagle, and the name Llaqwag'ila is 20 still the first among all the eagles || of all the tribes. That is all. |

Names and Crests of the Maamtag'ila. — This is when | the son of 21 ?maxuyalidze, who had the name YaqoLas, began to be a prince: i that is, when he had a man's name, when the father of | YaqoLas gave a potlatch on account of the greatness of the name of his prince laqoLas. || Then £maxuyalidze gave his eagle(-seat) to his prince 25 YaqoLas, | and also the eagle-name Llaqwag'ila; for that | was the name of £maxuyalidze, Llaqwag'ila, when he was an | eagle. When he made over his eagle (-seat) and the name | Llaqwag'ila that goes witli it to his prince Llaqwag'ila, and when || Llaqwag'ila took the 30 name of his father £maxiiyalidze, he | himself gave a potlatch for his greatness — for he was now an eagle — | and oix account of his name Llaqwag'ila. And all the | privileges were given to Llaqwag'ila by his father £maxuyalidze, the house with the carved | posts, the two speaking-posts in the form of men || at each side of the door, 35 standing on top of the heads of grizzly bears, | and eagles sitting on top of the heads of the grizzly bear of the | post on each side of the rear of the house of £maxuyalidze. And large | coppers lay flat on the chests of the eagles on the posts in the rear of the | house. And the front of the house was painted with a copper, as it was first [| found by the ancestor of Chief £niaxiiyalidze at K' lodagala, for | that 4d is where the ancestors of Chief niiaxiiyalidze lived, at K" lodagala | inside of Gwadze£; for £maxuyalidze's numavm were the Maamtag'ila. I The dull-white Seagulls were the ancestors of | Chief £maxiivalidze. It was he who was named MatmatEla; namely, ||

45 the dull-white Seagull. He is now called Matag'ila. | Now Matag'ila had many men who are now named Maamtag'da; for that | is the numaym of his children, when there came to be many of them. | That is what is said about the first one, the head of the | numayms, the |

50 Maamtag'da. Now you know what I say. || That is all. | 1 Names. — Now I will talk about what I have been asked by you in regard to I the family names of the chiefs. I will talk about the chief | of the numaym Kiikwak him of the Kwexa, YaqoLadze. | He continually changed wives, and with each one a name was given to him by 5 Ms father-in-law, really || great names. He used these names given in marriage for a short time | when he gave a potlatch with the blankets which he obtained as a marriage-gift from (each of) his fathers-in-law; | and when he gave an oil feast with his marriagegift, then he used the name given in marriage as a feast-name. | They desire to keep the feast-names obtained | from the father-in-law,

10 for the feast-name is like the || winter-name. When the Kwakiutl first begin to perform the winter ceremonial, they all change their names | — men and women. Thus it is also with the | guests of a chief who gives a feast with od, a great od feast. | As soon as aU the guests go into the house in which the od feast is to be given, | the speaker of the chief rises, and speaks, and calls || the chiefs by their 15 feast-names, those who have given an oil feast; | hut he does not call the names of those, even if they are head chiefs, who have | not a feast-name. Then the chiefs are ashamed | because their names have not been called; and therefore coppers are generally broken | in oil feasts by the chiefs who are guests, in order to cover their shame, || when their names are not called. This is called "extinguishing the 20 fire of the | oil feast." When the feast is at an end, all the men go out; I and then the_y have no longer their feast-names, | but they are called by their potlatch-names after this, | which are the true family names; for the chiefs do not like to keep || the names obtained 25 in marriage as their potlatch-names. Oidy when they first give away blankets do they | use the names which the}' obtained from the father-in-law. After they | have given away blankets, all the men go out. I Then the chief has no longer the name obtained from his father-in-law, for he | has again his name YaqoLadze. He puts away the II name obtained in marriage. When his princess takes a 30 husband, the name | given in marriage is given to the son-in-law; but no I famdy name can be given away in marriage to the | husband of a princess, because they keep their names and all the | privileges for the eldest son, because all the privdeges belong to him. || That is 35 the end. | '

' See Addenda, pp. 1315-1385.

Speeches Delivered in Feasts

1 When the chief of the numaym SenLtem invites the | other numayms of the Kwag'ul to a feast, then as soon as | all the guests come in the speaker of the chief arises and he | turns his face to the 5 place where his numaym SenL !Em are sitting next to the [I door of the feast house. Then the speaker of the chief speaks, | for the speaker of the chiefs of the numayms always | first speak to the chiefs of the numayms and their names | are called. And this is what (the speaker) says to his numaym as he is | speaking: ||

10 "Indeed, Chief £nEmogwis, indeed HamisElal, indeed | Ma£nakul, am I not going to talk with gladness to the guests of my | chief, for they have all come into this house, into this good house | of my chief?" Thus he says, and turns Ids face to the guests. | Then he says: ||

15 "Welcome, Chief AwaxElag'ilis; welcome, Chief K'imk'EqEwed ;| welcome, Chief Tstex£ed; welcome, Chief Hfiwllkulal; welcome, Chief | Llaqwalal; welcome, Chief G'exk'Enis, come now to | jour seats, to the seats of your late fathers, and just sit down | in your seats, chiefs, which are prepared for you. Now sit down well,

20 chiefs, |1 and your people. You do not come here, chiefs, to | feel badly in this house of my chief. Now, sing feasting-songs | to tell

Speeches Delivered in Feasts our world, chiefs." Thus speaks the speaker, | and turns his face 23 to his numaym and says: |

"O numaym! Now the word of my chief has gone to the floor of the house; for || the way we speak in this house of my chief has been 25 marked out by our ancestors, for us to do as they say | in the way we do in this house of our chief. Now give a | drum to our chiefs that they may sing." Thus he says to the | young men of his numaym. At once they take the drum to the rear | of the feasting-house, and the three || numayms, the Maamtag'ila, G'exsEm, and Losyalaiawe, | 30 sing one song. As soon as the f easting-song is at an end, | the Kukwaklurn sing. And when their feasting-song is ended, | the SenL !Ein sing. And when their feasting-song is ended, the | Laalax'- sfEndayo and the Elgtinwe£ sing one feasting- || song. And when 35 their song is ended, then there are | four feast songs by the seven ; numayms of the Kwag'ul when they are invited by another | tribe. After they have finished singing, a young man | takes the drum from the rear of the feasting-house — some || Indians say instead of klwela- 40 dzats.'e, \ Jc!welayats!e, and both words are right — and he | puts it down inside of the door. Then many | young men prepare the food for the guests. And after they have done so, they put the | dishes

45 before the guests. As soon as all has been put down, || the guests begin to eat what has been put before them. And when they have half finished | eating, the speaker of the numaym Maamtag'da | speaks. He also speaks first to his fellow-guests, and he | turns his face to his fellow-guests, and the speaker says: |

"Indeed, Chief AwaxElag'ilis; indeed, Chief K'imk'EqEwed; ||

50 indeed, Chief Ts!Ex£ed; indeed, Chief Hawllkulal; indeed, | Chief Llaqwalal; indeed, Chief G'exk'Enis; do we not | speak with gladness to them on account of the way we come into this great house of | Chief £nEmogwis ? " Thus he says, and turns his face to the door. | Then he says: ||

55 "Sit still, great numaym, you SenLlEm, and listen | to me. Welcome, Chief £nEmogwis; welcome, Chief | HamesElal. Indeed, I shall say this, Chief Ma£nakul. Oh, welcome, | welcome ! you have done this well. Keep on, | Chief £nEmogwis, look out and do not let

GO the fire of || your house go out, Chief, on account of your tribe, Chief, that we may come | and be happy in your house, Chief. Now we are treated with sweet food, | Chief. Walk along the trail of the chiefmaker, Chief j £nEin5gwis. Thank you, Chief, for your kindness to your | people, Chief." Thus he says, and turns his face to his

65 numaym. || And he says, "Let us say this, chiefs^ Wa wa!" After |

he has finished speaking, the speaker of the house arises, and speaks. | 66 He says: |

"Indeed, true is the speeeh of the one who is speaking. It is true what you said. I take | notice of the meaning of the words of the old man to which you refer: || 'Keep on walking the trail of the chief- 70 maker, Chief.' That j is what my chief, £nEmogwis, is doing. He is walking along fast, | for indeed he walks on the road of bis grandfather Henak' !alasoe, | who knew how to invite the great chiefs, who knew how to give oil-feasts, who knew | how to break coppers. This is the trail followed by my chief, || £nEmogwis. This is a hand- 75 some chief. That is what I say, numaym | SenL Ieiu. Now, I will press down the food eaten by the chiefs invited | by our chief." Thus he says, and turns to the guests. | And he speaks again, and says as the | guests finish eating: ||

"Go on, go on, Chief AwaxElag'ilis; go on, Chief | K'imk'EqEwed; SO go on, Chief Ts!Ex£ed; go on, Chief Hawllkulal; | go on, Chief Llaqwalal; go on, Chief G'exk'Eiiis; go on | with your people, chiefs. Now it is well prepared j for what you were invited by my chief." Thus he says, and turns to his || numaym, the Seni. Ieiu, and s.- savs, "Wa, numaym! Now | it has gone to the floor what was marked out by our ancestors, what we should say | when we are here." Thus he says. Then it is ended. | .

1 Now you will see that the names j of the chiefs of the numaym SenLlEin are called out first by the speaker. When he gives notice, | all of them listen to his speeches. First | the head chief of he chiefs, 5 £nEinogwis, is called. Then he || names the one next to £nEmogwis, HamesElal. Then he names next to | HamesElal, Ma£nakula, for that is the order of the three chiefs of the | numaym SenL !eiu ; for they come down to the younger brothers beginning with the | eldest brother, calling the name of the next one until he calls the youngest one. That is | when the numaym SenL tern give a feast. And even

10 when a || common man gives a feast, the three chiefs are always named. | The name of the host, who is a common man, is never called by the | speaker when he gives notice to his numaym that he will speak, | when the guests of the host first come in, and when he presses down the food of the | guests after they have finished eating. ||

15 And when the speech to his numaym the SenLlEin is at an end, then he | turns to the guests, and he calls the head chief of each numaym by name. | First he names the head chief of the | Maamtag'ila, AwaxElag ihs; and next, | K'imk'EqEwed, who is the head chief

20 of the numaym G'exsEm. Then he names || Ts !EX£ed, the head chief of the numaym Lo£yalalawa. Then he names | Hawilkfilal, the head chief of the numavm Kiikwaklum. I Then he names

Llaqwalal, head chief of the numaym Laalax's£Eiidayo. | And last he names G'exk'Enis, head chief of the | numaym Elgtinwe£. That is when the speaker of the chief of the || numaym SenLlEin is speaking. 25 He never names the common men, | even when they give a feast. | And the speaker of the guests praises the common man | who gives the feast. And this is the way of the speaker of the | host, and of the speaker of the guests. That is the end. ||

Swear-Words (Hankwa)

1. HiislElol, Go and die. Generally used by women in friendly banter.

2. LalE£laa, you are dead there. Used in friendly discussion when a person feels that he can no longer carry on his argument. 2a. HanLalEloL, die yourself. Retort to the preceding. Used, however, not in friendly discussion, but after a serious quarrel.

3. LEJlwest!a axa, you are dead there. Used in a bantering way, or at the end of an argument.

4. LE£ldzewest!a axa, you great one are dead there. Used often at the end of an argument between husband and wife, or by men after a quarrel.

5. LE£ldzamasa, indeed, you are dead there. Used as a reproach, for instance, when a person, by his lack of skill, has broken an object or hmt another person.

6. X'ist5lil laqu, show your teeth and your orbits there

(meaning that the skull is lying on the ground). lagas. I hope what you wish will happen to me will

HAPPEN TO YOLT, DEATH-BRIXGIXG-WOMAX. Retort to 6.

66. Wiidzo, WawanEingilagas, go away, Death-brixging-womax ' Sometimes used like the preceding.

7. Xidzll lox, show your teeth on the floor of the house. la. Q'.Exstolil lox, you bite the floor of my house at the door. These (7 and 7a) are used in a quarrel.

8. Le£1x'S£51 15X, DIE HERE ON THE GROUND.

Sa. IIuxeiiIeIol, I wish you would die right here. Retort to 8. Used by men only, particularly men of high rank, in quarrels over social matters.

9. YagWll l6x, LIE DOWN DEAD ON THE FLOOR OF MY HOUSE.

9a. Yaq!Qs lox, lie down dead on the ground. Retort to 9. Used in a similar way as the preceding.

10. Yaxstolll laq", lie down dead on the floor of my house. 10a. YaxwElsnesLas qa£s lE£la5s laxs Ladzasex, oh, if you would

DIE ON THE GROUND WHERE YOU ARE STANDING! Retort to

10. These (10 and 10a) are never used by women, but particularly by chiefs.

11. WexEnLas yaxwEls qa£s lE£laos laq", I wish you would lie

DOWN ON THE GROUND AND DIE HERE.

11a. Sol 1e£H qa£s q lulegEmalamaos liixes waldicmos g'axEn, you

SHALL DIE, AND YOUR OWN WORD SHALL KILL YOU FOR WHAT

you said. Retort to 11. Used by men.

gwaElsa, I WISH YOU would die at the place where you are standing, and disappear. Used in quarrels during potlatch.

13. Hask'la, die with your teeth in your head.

miei.os 1e£1l, die now, for the death-dealing point of my tongue will kill you quickly. Retort to 13. This is considered the worst insult. Following are swear-words of the DEnax'da£xu-

14. QatsEmakoi., your head has been cut off.

14a. PIoqomakoL, you are a body without head. Retort to 14. There is one particular swear-word of the DEiiax"da£xu against the Anvali.Kla numnym K- !ek'!aenoxu.

15. KliniLKinakoL, your face has been adzed. This refers to the fact that a member of that numaym was killed by the DEnax'da£xu by cutting his face with an adz.